Z-MAP Plus

Reference
Guide

Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

2003 Landmark Graphics Corporation

Part No. 161328 October 2003

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

2003 Landmark Graphics Corporation

All Rights Reserved Worldwide
This publication has been provided pursuant to an agreement containing restrictions on its use. The publication is also
protected by Federal copyright law. No part of this publication may be copied or distributed, transmitted, transcribed,
stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any human or computer language, in any form or by any means,
electronic, magnetic, manual, or otherwise, or disclosed to third parties without the express written permission of:

Landmark Graphics Corporation

Building 1, Suite 200, 2101 CityWest, Houston, Texas 77042, USA
P.O. Box 42806, Houston, Texas 77242, USA
Phone: 713-839-2000
FAX: 713-839-2401
Web: www.lgc.com

Trademark Notice
3D Drill View, 3D Drill View KM, 3Dview, Active Field Surveillance, Active Reservoir Surveillance, ADC,
ARIES, Asset Development Center, Asset Development Centre, Automate, BLITZ, BLITZPAK, CasingSeat,
CDDM, COMPASS, Contouring Assistant, Corporate Data Archiver, Corporate Data Store, DataStar, DBPlot,
Decision Suite, Decisionarium, DecisionDesktop, DecisionSpace, DecisionSpace AssetPlanner, DecisionSpace
Atomic Meshing, DecisionSpace PowerModel, DecisionSpace PrecisionTarget, DecisionSpace TrackPlanner,
DecisionSpace Well Seismic Fusion, DepthTeam, DepthTeam Explorer, DepthTeam Express, DepthTeam Extreme,
DepthTeam Interpreter, DESKTOP-PVT, DESKTOP-VIP, DEX, DFW, DIMS, Discovery, Drillability Suite,
DrillModel, DrillVision, DSS, Dynamic Reservoir Management, Dynamic Surveillance System, EarthCube,
EdgeCa$h, eLandmark, Engineer's Desktop, EOS-PAK, EPM, Executive Assistant, FastTrack, FZAP!,
GeoDataLoad, GeoGraphix (stylized), GeoGraphix Exploration System, GeoLink, GES, GESXplorer, GMAplus,
GRIDGENR, Handheld Field Operator, I2 Enterprise, iDIMS, IsoMap, Landmark, Landmark and Design,
Landmark logo and Design, LandScape, Lattix, LeaseMap, LMK Resources, LogEdit, LogM, LogPrep,
Make Great Decisions, MathPack, MIRA, Model Builder, MultiWell, MyLandmark, MyWorkspace, OpenBooks,
OpenExplorer, OpenJournal, OpenOrigin, OpenSGM, OpenVision, OpenWells, OpenWire, OpenWorks,
OpenWorks Well File, PAL, Parallel-VIP, PetroBank, PetroWorks, PlotView, Point Gridding Plus,
Pointing Dispatcher, PostStack, PostStack ESP, PowerView, PRIZM, PROFILE, ProMAGIC, ProMAX,
ProMAX 2D, ProMAX 3D, ProMAX 3DPSDM, ProMAX MVA, ProMAX VSP, pSTAx, QUICKDIF,
QUIKCDP, QUIKDIG, QUIKRAY, QUIKSHOT, QUIKVSP, RAVE, RAYMAP, Real Freedom,
Real-Time Asset Management Center, Real-Time Asset Management Centre, Real Time Knowledge Company,
Reservoir Framework Builder, RESev, ResMap, RMS, SafeStart, SCAN, SeisCube, SeisMap, SeisModel, SeisSpace,
SeisVision, SeisWell, SeisWorks, SeisWorks MultiView, SeisWorks PowerSection, SeisXchange, Sierra,
Sierra (design), SigmaView, SimResults, SIVA, SpecDecomp, StrataMap, StrataModel, StrataAmp, StrataSim,
StratWorks, StressCheck, STRUCT, Surf & Connect, SynTool, SystemStart, SystemStart for Clients,
System Start for Servers, SystemStart for Storage, T2B, TDQ, Team Workspace, TeamView, TERAS,
Total Drilling Performance, TOW/cs The Oilfield Workstation, Trend Form Gridding, Turbo Synthetics, VIP,
VIP-COMP, VIP-CORE, VIP-DUAL, VIP-ENCORE, VIP-EXECUTIVE, VIP-Local Grid Refinement,
VIP-THERM, WavX, Web Editor, Web OpenWorks, Wellbase, Wellbore Planner, WELLCAT, WELLPLAN,
WellXchange, WOW, Xsection, Xsource, You're in Control. Experience the difference, ZAP!, and Z-MAP Plus
are trademarks, registered trademarks or service marks of Landmark Graphics Corporation.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Note
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a
commitment by Landmark Graphics Corporation. Landmark Graphics Corporation assumes no responsibility for any
error that may appear in this manual. Some states or jurisdictions do not allow disclaimer of expressed or implied
warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.

R2003.12.0 ii
Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Contents
Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Introduction
Z-MAP Plus Overview ........................................................................................ 1
Guide Purpose and Organization ............................................................... 1
Documentation ............................................................................................. 2

Z-MAP Plus Interface ......................................................................................... 3

Using the Primary Windows ........................................................................ 3
Z-MAP Plus System Window ................................................................. 4

Z-MAP Plus Xterm Window .................................................................... 4

Z-MAP Plus Window ............................................................................... 4

Shortcut Icons ......................................................................................... 6

Workflow Icons ....................................................................................... 7

Starting Z-MAP Plus .......................................................................................... 8

Starting Z-MAP Plus from OpenWorks ...................................................... 8
Starting Z-MAP Plus from the Z-MAP Plus Command Menu ................... 9
Setting Up an Alias for the StartUp Command .......................................... 10
Using Environment Variables ................................................................ 10

Understanding MFDs, ZGFs, and OpenWorks ................................................ 11

Visualizing MFDs and ZGFs ........................................................................ 11
Purpose and Use of MFDs ........................................................................... 11
Purpose and Use of ZGFs ........................................................................... 12

R2003.12.0 Contents iii

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Introduction continued

OpenWorks ........................................................................................................ 13
Overview of OpenWorks .............................................................................. 13
Z-MAP Plus Connection to OpenWorks ..................................................... 14
Starting Z-MAP Plus with an OpenWorks Connection ........................ 14

Selecting input Files from OpenWorks ................................................. 15

Saving Files to the OpenWorks Project ................................................ 16

Typical Workflows ........................................................................................ 17

Using Z-MAP Plus with OpenWorks for the First Time ............................ 19
Defining Projects and Interpreters ............................................................. 20

Integrating with Other Products ....................................................................... 22

SeisWorks .......................................................................................................... 24

StratWorks ......................................................................................................... 26

Stratamodel ........................................................................................................ 27

TDQ ..................................................................................................................... 28

PetroWorks ........................................................................................................ 29

New Features in the 2003.12 Release .............................................................. 30

New Icons ..................................................................................................... 30
Opening SeisWorks Horizons as Grids ..................................................... 30
True Color ..................................................................................................... 30

R2003.12.0 Contents iv
Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

File Menu Options

Overview ............................................................................................................. 31

Options in the File New Menu .......................................................................... 32

Session ......................................................................................................... 32
Master File .................................................................................................... 33
Graphics File (ZGF) ...................................................................................... 34
Basemap ....................................................................................................... 34
Picture Name, AOI Types, and Scale Types ......................................... 36

AOI from Grid, Data, Picture, or Contours ........................................... 37

AOI from User Input; Offsets, and Scale AOI ....................................... 38

Projection Parameters ............................................................................ 39

Cross Section ............................................................................................... 45

Picture Name ........................................................................................... 46

AOI from Horizons, Baseline ................................................................. 46

Horizons (Grid Files) .............................................................................. 46

Baseline (Vertex File) ............................................................................. 46

Line Number ............................................................................................ 47

AOI from Existing Picture ...................................................................... 47

AOI from User Input ................................................................................ 47

Horizontal and Vertical Minimums and Maximums ............................. 47

Offsets and Scale .................................................................................... 47

Open Menu Options .......................................................................................... 48

Session ......................................................................................................... 48
MFD Open/Close .......................................................................................... 48
ZGF Open/Close ........................................................................................... 49
Picture Open ................................................................................................. 49

R2003.12.0 Contents v
Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

File: Open continued

SeisWorks ..................................................................................................... 50
Seismic Project Selection Dialog Box .................................................. 51

Import from SeisWorks Dialog Box ...................................................... 52

Mapping Files Section ............................................................................ 57

MFD Output Section ............................................................................... 58

OpenWorks Output Section ................................................................... 59

Using the File Manager ..................................................................................... 60

Working with File Manager .......................................................................... 61
File Manager Icons ................................................................................. 62

Other Ways to Execute Commands in the File Manager .................... 63

Directory Pane .............................................................................................. 65

File Listing Pane ........................................................................................... 66
File Detail Pane ............................................................................................. 67

Save Session As Command ............................................................................. 68

Saving Parameters to a Session File ......................................................... 68

Save As Command ............................................................................................ 70

ASCII (Export) ............................................................................................... 70
File ............................................................................................................ 70

Format File .............................................................................................. 71

Format Name ........................................................................................... 71

Output Name & ID Characters ............................................................... 72

CPS-1 File ..................................................................................................... 73

ZGF Flat File ................................................................................................. 74
ASCII File Format for ZGFs .................................................................... 74

R2003.12.0 Contents vi
Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

File: Save As continued

SeisWorks File .............................................................................................. 85
Seismic Project Selection Dialog Box .................................................. 85

Transfer Grid to Seismic Dialog Box .................................................... 86

Info ...................................................................................................................... 89
Master File Directory .................................................................................... 90
Report ...................................................................................................... 91

Type of File to Display ............................................................................ 92

Match on Characters .............................................................................. 92

File Listing .................................................................................................... 93

Input File .................................................................................................. 94

Listing Type, Records, and Output File ................................................ 94

Fields to List (Ordered Selection) ......................................................... 96

Column Headings and Widths ............................................................... 99

Windowed Data ....................................................................................... 100

Grid Listing ................................................................................................... 101

Data Statistics .............................................................................................. 104
Select Data File ....................................................................................... 104

Select Field .............................................................................................. 104

Grid Statistics ............................................................................................... 105

Select Input Grid ..................................................................................... 105

File/Picture Information ............................................................................... 105

Input Graphics File ................................................................................. 105

Information Specifications ..................................................................... 106

Graphics File Summary ............................................................................... 107

List CPS-1 File .............................................................................................. 107

R2003.12.0 Contents vii

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

File continued

Directory Paths .................................................................................................. 108

MFDs ............................................................................................................. 110
ZGFs .............................................................................................................. 111
Data Files ...................................................................................................... 112
Session Files ................................................................................................ 112
Format Files .................................................................................................. 114
Color Tables ................................................................................................. 115
Macro Files ................................................................................................... 115

Import ................................................................................................................. 116

ASCII (Import) ............................................................................................... 117
Before You Start to Import ASCII Data ................................................. 119

Input and Output Files for the Import Option ....................................... 120

If You Have a Format File ....................................................................... 121

If You Have a Format Description ......................................................... 121

If You Do Not Have a Format File .......................................................... 122

Grid File to MFD/OW .................................................................................... 129

Disk File to ZGF ............................................................................................ 130
CPS-1 File to MFD ........................................................................................ 131

Print Menu Options ........................................................................................... 131

CGM ............................................................................................................... 132
Graphics File Name ................................................................................ 134

Picture Name ........................................................................................... 134

Unit Type ................................................................................................. 134

Graphics Features .................................................................................. 134

Picture: W and H ..................................................................................... 134

R2003.12.0 Contents viii

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

File: Print: CGM continued

Plot Parameters ...................................................................................... 135

Queue Plotter and Plotter Name ............................................................ 136

Create CGM Disk File CGM File Name .................................................. 136

Other .............................................................................................................. 137

Select Graphics File ............................................................................... 138

Select Picture .......................................................................................... 138

Plot Parameters ...................................................................................... 138

Choose Features to Plot ........................................................................ 139

Copy Menu Options ........................................................................................... 140

Copy Files ..................................................................................................... 140
Input File .................................................................................................. 141

Output File Name and Master File ......................................................... 141

Copy Pictures ............................................................................................... 142

Input Graphics File ................................................................................. 143

Input Picture ............................................................................................ 144

Output Graphics File .............................................................................. 144

Output Picture ......................................................................................... 145

Features Division .................................................................................... 145

Features to Copy .................................................................................... 145

Rename Menu Options ...................................................................................... 146

Rename Files ................................................................................................ 146
Input File .................................................................................................. 147

Output File Name and Master File ......................................................... 147

Rename Pictures .......................................................................................... 148

Input Graphics File ................................................................................. 149

R2003.12.0 Contents ix
Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

File: Rename: Rename Pictures continued

Input Picture ............................................................................................ 149

Output Picture ......................................................................................... 149

Delete Menu Options ......................................................................................... 150

Delete Files ................................................................................................... 150
Delete Pictures ............................................................................................. 151
Select Graphics File ............................................................................... 152

Select and Delete Pictures ..................................................................... 152

Compressing Files ............................................................................................ 153

Compressing Master Files .......................................................................... 153
Input/Output Master File ........................................................................ 154

Compressing Graphics Files ...................................................................... 155

Select Input/Output Graphics File ......................................................... 156

Exiting from Z-MAP Plus ................................................................................... 156

Edit Menu Options

Overview ............................................................................................................. 157

Graphics Editor .................................................................................................. 158

Undo Last Feature ........................................................................................ 159
Redo Last Deleted Feature .......................................................................... 159
Delete Features ............................................................................................ 159
Delete Elements of a Feature ...................................................................... 160
Edit Selected Features ................................................................................. 161
Editing Procedures ................................................................................. 162

Select Graphics Features ....................................................................... 163

Edit Text ................................................................................................... 165

R2003.12.0 Contents x
Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Edit: Graphics Editor: Edit Selected Feature continued

Delete Text ............................................................................................... 166

Change Parameters ................................................................................ 166

Edit Lines ................................................................................................. 167

Edit Markers ............................................................................................ 169

Edit Area .................................................................................................. 173

Edit All Features ........................................................................................... 173

Data Editor ......................................................................................................... 174

Points ............................................................................................................ 175
Cursor Move ............................................................................................ 175

View/Edit .................................................................................................. 176

Area Edit .................................................................................................. 176

Undo ......................................................................................................... 178

Delete ....................................................................................................... 178

Undelete ................................................................................................... 178

Create Point ............................................................................................. 179

Select File ................................................................................................ 180

Select Fields ............................................................................................ 180
Display Parameters ................................................................................ 181

Autoset Parameters ................................................................................ 183

Contours, Faults, Lines ............................................................................... 185

Reshape Contours .................................................................................. 185

Break ........................................................................................................ 187

Extend ...................................................................................................... 188

Break & Extend ....................................................................................... 189

Smooth .................................................................................................... 189

R2003.12.0 Contents xi
Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Edit: Data Editor: Contours, Faults, Lines continued

Undo Last Edit ........................................................................................ 190

Delete ....................................................................................................... 190

Undelete ................................................................................................... 190

New Line .................................................................................................. 190

Contour Value Edit ................................................................................. 191

Point Edit ................................................................................................. 191

Select Files .............................................................................................. 191

Display Parameters ................................................................................ 191

Autoset Parameters ................................................................................ 192

Grid Nodes .................................................................................................... 194

Change Values ........................................................................................ 194

Interpolate Values ................................................................................... 194

Area Edit .................................................................................................. 195

Select File ................................................................................................ 196

Post Values ............................................................................................. 196

Selective Post ......................................................................................... 198

Create Data ................................................................................................... 198

Regrid ............................................................................................................ 201
Select Data .................................................................................................... 205
Update Files .................................................................................................. 206
Cancel Edit .................................................................................................... 207

Color Overview .................................................................................................. 208

Color Table ......................................................................................................... 209

The RGB Color System ................................................................................ 209
HLS Color System ........................................................................................ 210

R2003.12.0 Contents xii

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Edit: Color Table continued

Description of the Color Table Display ...................................................... 211
Description of the Edit Color Table Dialog Box ........................................ 212
Status/Prompt ......................................................................................... 213

Set Color Mode RGB or HLS .................................................................. 213

Edit ........................................................................................................... 213

Display ..................................................................................................... 214

Copy ......................................................................................................... 214

Interpolate ............................................................................................... 214

Read ......................................................................................................... 216

Write ......................................................................................................... 216

Update picture dynamically ................................................................... 217

Saving the Changes to the Color Table ................................................ 217

Color Indices ...................................................................................................... 218

Features
Overview ............................................................................................................. 219

Basemap (Basemap Features Dialog Box) ..................................................... 223

Basemap Features Buttons ......................................................................... 225

Cross Section .................................................................................................... 226

Cross Section Features ............................................................................... 226
Horizons .................................................................................................. 226

Map Features ................................................................................................ 232

Overlay Pictures ................................................................................................ 233

Input Graphics File ....................................................................................... 235
Input Picture ................................................................................................. 235

R2003.12.0 Contents xiii

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Features: Overlay Pictures continued

Output Graphics File .................................................................................... 235
Output Picture .............................................................................................. 236
Overlay Parameters ..................................................................................... 236
Division of Features on Overlay ............................................................ 237

Features to Overlay ................................................................................ 237

Contouring ......................................................................................................... 238

Overview of Contouring Options ................................................................ 238
Contour ......................................................................................................... 239
Contour Old .................................................................................................. 240
Input File (Grid or Contour) ................................................................... 241

Constraint (Faults or Polygon) .............................................................. 241

Contouring Parameters, Output Name ................................................. 241

Curve Drawing and Labeling Parameters ............................................. 243

Contour Report ....................................................................................... 245

Fast Contour ................................................................................................. 246

3D Fishnet Plot ............................................................................................. 246
Shaded Relief ............................................................................................... 247
Contouring the Brightness Grid to Obtain the Shaded Relief Map .... 249

Color Table .............................................................................................. 250

Color Scale ................................................................................................... 251

Lines ................................................................................................................... 252

File (Drawing Lines Using File) ................................................................... 253
Select Data .............................................................................................. 253

Fields to Post .......................................................................................... 253

Line Drawing Parameters ....................................................................... 254

R2003.12.0 Contents xiv

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Features: Contouring: Lines: File (Drawing Lines Using File) continued

Symbol Parameters ................................................................................ 260

Vary Symbol Size Parameters ............................................................... 265

Labeling Parameters .............................................................................. 267

Data Units/Clip Mode .............................................................................. 268

Cursor (Drawing Lines with the Cursor) .................................................... 269

Contours .................................................................................................. 269

Faults ....................................................................................................... 269

Polylines .................................................................................................. 269

Line Parameters ...................................................................................... 270

Drawing Lines and Line End Options ................................................... 270

Text ..................................................................................................................... 271

File (File Text) ............................................................................................... 272
Key (Key Text) .............................................................................................. 273
Keyboard ................................................................................................. 273

Key & Cursor ........................................................................................... 274

Cursor Only ............................................................................................. 274

Below Last ............................................................................................... 274

Grid Nodes ......................................................................................................... 275

Post Grid Data Dialog Box .......................................................................... 275
Grid .......................................................................................................... 275

Posting Parameters ................................................................................ 275

Labeling Parameters .............................................................................. 276

Polygons ............................................................................................................ 277

Color-filled Polygons ................................................................................... 277
Lease Polygon Drawing ............................................................................... 278

R2003.12.0 Contents xv
Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Features: Polygons continued

Shaded Polygons ......................................................................................... 279

(X,Y,Z) Point Data .............................................................................................. 280

Post Data Dialog Box ................................................................................... 280
Select Data Button Select DATA Dialog Box .................................... 280

Fields to post Button Ordered Selection Dialog Box ....................... 280

Symbol Parameters Button Symbol Parameters Dialog Box .......... 280

Labeling Parameters .................................................................................... 288

Field Parameters ..................................................................................... 288

Labeling Rate .......................................................................................... 289

Color Fields ............................................................................................. 290

Data Units/Clip Mode ................................................................................... 290

Data Units ................................................................................................ 290

Clip to Border Mode ............................................................................... 290

Deviated Wells ................................................................................................... 291

Deviated Well Files ....................................................................................... 293
Select Data .................................................................................................... 294
Top/Bottom Fields to Post .......................................................................... 294
Top/Bottom Symbol Parameters ................................................................ 294
General Symbol Parameters .................................................................. 295

Choose Symbol Code Field ................................................................... 296

Choose Select Field ................................................................................ 296

Choose Color Field for Symbol Color ................................................... 297

Vary Symbol Color Parameters ............................................................. 297

Z-table to Vary Symbol Color ................................................................ 298

Choose Size Field for Symbol Size ....................................................... 298

R2003.12.0 Contents xvi

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Features: Deviated Wells: Top/Bottom Symbol Parameters continued

Vary Symbol Size Parameters ............................................................... 299

Choose Z-field to Vary Symbol Size ..................................................... 300

Z-table to Vary Symbol Size ................................................................... 300

Top/Bottom Labeling Parameters ............................................................... 300

Field Parameters ..................................................................................... 300

Labeling Rate .......................................................................................... 301

Color Fields ............................................................................................. 301

Well Trace Line Mode/Scale Mode .............................................................. 302

Use Primary Line Parameters for Which Lines .................................... 302

Type of Line Scale .................................................................................. 303

Well Trace Parameters ................................................................................. 303

Primary Line Parameters ....................................................................... 304

Choose Color Field for Line Color ........................................................ 306

Vary Line Color Parameters ................................................................... 306

Choose Z-Field to Vary Line Color ........................................................ 307

Z-Table to Vary Line Color ..................................................................... 307

Vary Line Pattern Parameters ................................................................ 308

Choose Z-Field to Vary Line Pattern ..................................................... 309

Z-Table to Vary Line Pattern .................................................................. 309

Choose Select Field ................................................................................ 309

Secondary Line Parameters .................................................................. 310

Well Trace Fields to Post ............................................................................. 312

Well Trace Symbol Parameters ................................................................... 312
General Symbol Parameters .................................................................. 312

Choose Symbol Code Field ................................................................... 314

R2003.12.0 Contents xvii

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Features: Deviated Wells: Well Trace Symbol Parameters continued

Choose Select Field ................................................................................ 314

Choose Color Field For Symbol Color .................................................. 314

Vary Symbol Color Parameters ............................................................. 314

Choose Size Field for Symbol Size ....................................................... 316

Vary Symbol Size Parameters ............................................................... 316

Choose Z-field to Vary Symbol Size ..................................................... 317

Z-table to Vary Symbol Size ................................................................... 317

Well Trace Labeling Parameters ................................................................. 318

Well Trace Scale Field ................................................................................. 318
Well Trace Scale Parameters ...................................................................... 319
Data Units/Clip Mode ................................................................................... 320

2D Seismic ......................................................................................................... 321

Post Seismic Line Data Dialog Box ............................................................ 321
Data .......................................................................................................... 322

Z-field ....................................................................................................... 322

Shotpoints to Post .................................................................................. 322

Labeled Shotpoints (Shotpoint Number) .............................................. 325

Labeled Shotpoints (Z-values) .............................................................. 327

Labeling Parameters and ZNON ............................................................ 330

Line Name Parameters ........................................................................... 331

Select Lines to Post ................................................................................ 332

Symbol Color Parameters ...................................................................... 335

3D Seismic ......................................................................................................... 338

Input Data Requirements (Fields and Sorts) ............................................. 339
Post Seismic Data Menu .............................................................................. 340

R2003.12.0 Contents xviii

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Features: 3D Seismic: Post Seismic Data Menu continued

Seismic Data ........................................................................................... 340

Choose Fields ......................................................................................... 341

Shotpoints to Post .................................................................................. 343

Shotpoint Labels (Shotpoint Number) .................................................. 345

Shotpoint Labels (Z-value) ..................................................................... 346

Line Name Parameters ........................................................................... 348

Track Line Parameters ........................................................................... 349

3D Survey Name Parameters ................................................................. 351

3D Survey Line Parameters ................................................................... 353

General Posting Parameters .................................................................. 355

Select Data to Post ................................................................................. 356

Modulation Parameters .......................................................................... 359

Symbol Size Range Creation Parameters ............................................ 360

Edit Z-Range Values ............................................................................... 362

Edit Symbol Size Range Values ............................................................ 362

Surveys (Canadian) ........................................................................................... 363

Create DLS/NTS Picture .............................................................................. 364
Post DLS & NTS Surveys ............................................................................ 365
Create & Post DLS Picture .......................................................................... 366
Create & Post NTS Picture .......................................................................... 366
NAD 27NAD 83 Datum Shift ...................................................................... 367
Post Township/Section Range (DLS) ......................................................... 367
Post National Topo. Survey (NTS) .............................................................. 368

Projection Box ................................................................................................... 369

R2003.12.0 Contents xix

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Features continued

Picture Assembly .............................................................................................. 370

Select Graphics File ..................................................................................... 370
Select Picture ............................................................................................... 370
Select Features ............................................................................................. 370
Cutline, Division ........................................................................................... 371
Create Frame ................................................................................................ 371
Modify Frame ................................................................................................ 372
Delete Frame ................................................................................................. 374

View Menu Options

Overview ............................................................................................................. 375

Display List ........................................................................................................ 376

Zoom In ............................................................................................................... 377

Canceling an Ongoing Redraw Operation ................................................. 377

Zoom Out ............................................................................................................ 378

Window ............................................................................................................... 379

Pan ...................................................................................................................... 380

Re-display .......................................................................................................... 381

Full Display ........................................................................................................ 382

Auto Display ....................................................................................................... 383

Switch Screens .................................................................................................. 384

R2003.12.0 Contents xx
Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Modeling
Overview ............................................................................................................. 385
Shared Gridding Parameters ...................................................................... 388
Control Grids ................................................................................................ 389
Data Hulls ...................................................................................................... 390
Setting the Radius of the Ball used to Create the Convex Hull .......... 391

Search Radius .............................................................................................. 392

Extrapolation Distance ................................................................................ 392
Refinements .................................................................................................. 393
Flexing Parameters ...................................................................................... 393

Point Gridding Plus ........................................................................................... 394

Overview ....................................................................................................... 395
Point Gridding Plus Support Utilities ......................................................... 398
Using Point Gridding Plus ........................................................................... 399
Fault Processing ..................................................................................... 400

Fault Geometry ....................................................................................... 400

Profile Contouring and Point Gridding Plus ........................................ 400

Using Point Gridding Plus with Vertical Separation Faults ................ 401

Point Gridding Plus Parameters ................................................................. 401

Basic Tab ...................................................................................................... 401
Input Files ................................................................................................ 402

Gridding Parameters .............................................................................. 404

Output Panel ........................................................................................... 413

Advanced Tab ............................................................................................... 413

Smoothing Panel .................................................................................... 413

Other Controls Panel .............................................................................. 414

R2003.12.0 Contents xxi

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Modeling: Point Gridding Plus: Advanced Tab continued

Pre-Computed Fault Polygon File ......................................................... 418

Other Outputs Tab ....................................................................................... 418

Expanded Fault Panel ............................................................................ 419

Fault Filled Panel .................................................................................... 419

ZNON Filled - Optional Panel ................................................................. 420

Data Used in Gridding - Optional Panel ................................................ 420

Additional Fields Tab ................................................................................... 421

DZ/DX Field .............................................................................................. 421

DZ/DY Field .............................................................................................. 421

GRADIENT-WEIGHT Field ...................................................................... 421

Data Type ................................................................................................. 421

Algorithms Requiring Additional Parameter Dialog Boxes ..................... 422

Isopach Parameter Options ................................................................... 423

Bounded Range Parameters Options ................................................... 424

Kriging Algorithm - Parameter Options ................................................ 425

Point Gridding .................................................................................................... 430

Overview ....................................................................................................... 431
Control Points .............................................................................................. 432
Z-field ............................................................................................................ 432
Faults ............................................................................................................. 432
Output Grid Name and Algorithm ............................................................... 432
Output Grid Name ................................................................................... 432

Output Grid Master File .......................................................................... 433

Algorithm Choices .................................................................................. 433

Boundary Tolerance ............................................................................... 435

R2003.12.0 Contents xxii

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Modeling: Point Gridding: Output Grid Name and Algorithm continued

Compression Factor ............................................................................... 435

Type of Data ............................................................................................ 436

Primary Parameters ..................................................................................... 437

Minimum and Maximum X and Y Coordinates ..................................... 438

X and Y Gridding Increments ................................................................ 438

Minimum and Maximum Z-values ......................................................... 439

Search Radius ......................................................................................... 439

Control Grid Usage ................................................................................. 439

Secondary Parameters ................................................................................ 440
X Expand and Y Expand ......................................................................... 441

Type of Weighting ................................................................................... 441

Minimum Total Points ............................................................................ 441

Desired Points Per Sector ...................................................................... 442

Minimum Number of Sectors ................................................................. 443

Extrapolation Distance ........................................................................... 443

Flexing Parameters ...................................................................................... 444

Type of Flexing ....................................................................................... 445

Cutoff ....................................................................................................... 446

Number of Refinements ......................................................................... 446

Number of Flex Passes .......................................................................... 446

Control of Passes ................................................................................... 446

Smoothness Modulus ............................................................................ 447

Control Grid .................................................................................................. 447

Select Additional Fields ............................................................................... 448
DZ/DX Field .............................................................................................. 448

R2003.12.0 Contents xxiii

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Modeling: Point Gridding: Select Additional Fields continued

DZ/DY Field .............................................................................................. 448

Z-weight Field .......................................................................................... 448

Data Distribution Statistics ......................................................................... 448

Contour Gridding ............................................................................................... 451

Overview ....................................................................................................... 452
Contour Gridding Algorithm .................................................................. 452

Contours ....................................................................................................... 452

Contour Data Format ................................................................................... 453
Faults ............................................................................................................. 454
Output Grid Name and Error Check Parameters ....................................... 455
Select Output Type ................................................................................. 455

Output Grid Name ................................................................................... 455

Output Grid Master File .......................................................................... 455

Name of Error-Check Contour File ........................................................ 456

Contour File Master File ......................................................................... 456

Break Contour Distance ......................................................................... 456

Close Contour Distance ......................................................................... 456

Primary Parameters ..................................................................................... 457

Minimum and Maximum X and Y Coordinates ..................................... 457

Grid Increment ........................................................................................ 457

Minimum and Maximum Grid Values .................................................... 458

ZNON Value ............................................................................................. 458

Number of Search Lines ........................................................................ 458

Search Radius ......................................................................................... 459

Extrapolation Distance ........................................................................... 460

R2003.12.0 Contents xxiv

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Modeling: Contour Gridding: Primary Parameters continued

Name of Intersection Point File ............................................................. 460

Master File for Point File ........................................................................ 460

Flexing Parameters ...................................................................................... 461

Type of Flexing ....................................................................................... 461

Cutoff ....................................................................................................... 461

Number of Flex Passes .......................................................................... 461

Control of Passes ................................................................................... 462

Smoothness Modulus ............................................................................ 462

Use CTOG Intersection Points? ............................................................ 462

Use Contour Constraints? ..................................................................... 463

Upper/Lower Surface Bias and Multiplier Parameters ........................ 463

Upper Surface Bias ................................................................................. 464

Lower Surface Bias ................................................................................ 464

Upper Surface Multiplier ........................................................................ 464

Lower Surface Multiplier ........................................................................ 464

Profiles .......................................................................................................... 465

Z-Field (Profiles) ........................................................................................... 466
Control Points .............................................................................................. 466
Z-Field (Control Points) ............................................................................... 466

Trendform Gridding ........................................................................................... 467

Understanding Trendform Gridding ........................................................... 468
What is a Form Grid ................................................................................ 468

Trendform Gridding Algorithm .............................................................. 469

Gridding Bias .......................................................................................... 470

Faults in Trendform Gridding ................................................................ 470

R2003.12.0 Contents xxv

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Modeling: Trendform Gridding: Understanding Trendform Gridding continued

Recommendations .................................................................................. 470

Using Trendform Gridding .......................................................................... 471

Trendform Gridding Parameters ................................................................. 472
Trendform Gridding Tab ........................................................................ 472

Other Outputs and Controls Tab ........................................................... 474

Viewing Results ............................................................................................ 474

Example 1. Applying Trendform to Attribute Modeling ............................ 475
Example 2: Applying Trendform to Stream Channel Contours ............... 476

Line Gridding Plus ............................................................................................. 477

Line Gridding Plus Gridding Parameters ................................................... 478
Data Hull Polygon File Name and MFD Location ................................. 478

Fault-cut Line File Name and Location ................................................. 478

Output Type ............................................................................................. 479

Distance Between Point to Cut Line ..................................................... 479

Control Grid Usage ................................................................................. 480

X and Y Grid Increments ........................................................................ 480

X Min, X Max, Y Min, Y Max, Z Min, Z Max ............................................ 481

Hull Data Value ........................................................................................ 482

Radius (for CONCAVE HULLs) .............................................................. 482

Extrapolation Mode ................................................................................ 483

Extrapolation Distance ........................................................................... 484

Minimum Number of Fault Crossings ................................................... 484

Gridding Extrapolation Limit Method ................................................... 484

Number of Refinements ......................................................................... 484

Type of Flexing ....................................................................................... 484

R2003.12.0 Contents xxvi

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Modeling: Line Gridding Plus Parameters continued

Smoothness Modulus ............................................................................ 485

Type of Flexing ....................................................................................... 485

Number of Flex Passes .......................................................................... 485

Control of Passes ................................................................................... 486

Cutoff ....................................................................................................... 486

Report Type ............................................................................................. 486

Line Gridding ..................................................................................................... 487

Overview ....................................................................................................... 487
Line Gridding Algorithm ........................................................................ 489

Line File ......................................................................................................... 490

Line Z-field .................................................................................................... 490
Faults ............................................................................................................. 490
Output File Name(s) & Types ...................................................................... 491
Select Output Type ................................................................................. 491

Output Grid Name ................................................................................... 492

Output Grid Master File .......................................................................... 492

Fault-cut Line Output File Name ........................................................... 492

Fault-cut Line Output Master File .......................................................... 492

Primary Parameters ..................................................................................... 493

Minimum and Maximum X and Y Coordinates ..................................... 493

X and Y Gridding Increments ................................................................ 493

Minimum and Maximum Z Values ......................................................... 494

ZNON Value ............................................................................................. 494

Search Radius ......................................................................................... 495

Break Line Distance ............................................................................... 495

R2003.12.0 Contents xxvii

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Modeling: Line Gridding: Primary Parameters continued

Extrapolation Mode ................................................................................ 495

Extrapolation Distance ........................................................................... 496

Flexing Parameters ...................................................................................... 496

Type of Flexing ....................................................................................... 497

Cutoff ....................................................................................................... 497

Number of Refinements ......................................................................... 497

Number of Flex Passes .......................................................................... 497

Control of Passes ................................................................................... 498

Smoothness Modulus ............................................................................ 498

Use Created Points in Flexing ............................................................... 498

Upper/Lower Bias and Multiplier Parameters ...................................... 499

Upper Surface Bias ................................................................................. 499

Lower Surface Bias ................................................................................ 500

Upper Surface Multiplier ........................................................................ 500

Lower Surface Multiplier ........................................................................ 500

Trend Fit Gridding ............................................................................................. 501

Overview ....................................................................................................... 502
Select Input File ............................................................................................ 502
Z-Field (for Data Input) ................................................................................. 503
Output Grid Name, Primary Parameters .................................................... 503
Output Grid Name ................................................................................... 503

Output Grid Master File .......................................................................... 504

Number of Terms .................................................................................... 504

Minimum and Maximum X and Y Coordinates ..................................... 505

X and Y Gridding Increments ................................................................ 505

R2003.12.0 Contents xxviii

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Modeling: Trend Fit Gridding: Output Grid Name, Primary Parameters continued
Minimum and Maximum Z Values ......................................................... 505

Input Grid (Blocking) Parameters ............................................................... 506

X and Y Block Factors ............................................................................ 506
Mean Information Display ...................................................................... 506
Residual Display ..................................................................................... 506

Trend Surface Grid ............................................................................................ 507

Using Trend Surface Gridding .................................................................... 508
Factors Affecting Trend Gridding Accuracy ........................................ 508
Block Averaging ..................................................................................... 512
Output Grid Parameters ......................................................................... 512
Limiting Z Values .................................................................................... 513

Boolean Grid ...................................................................................................... 515

Constant Grid ..................................................................................................... 516

Polynomial Grid ................................................................................................. 517

User-Defined Filter ............................................................................................ 519

Flexing ................................................................................................................ 520

Major Types of Flexing ................................................................................ 521
Effects of Flexing on Surface Form ............................................................ 522
Set FLEXING Parameters Dialog Box ......................................................... 523
Input Grid ................................................................................................. 523
Faults ....................................................................................................... 523
Output Grid Name, Mask Use ................................................................ 523
Flexing Parameters ................................................................................. 524
Control Points ......................................................................................... 529
Z-field (Control Pts) ................................................................................ 530
Grid .......................................................................................................... 530

R2003.12.0 Contents xxix

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Operations
Overview ............................................................................................................. 531

Calculator ........................................................................................................... 536

Introduction to the Calculator ..................................................................... 538

Grid Operations ................................................................................................. 539

Single Grid Operations ................................................................................ 540
Input Grid ................................................................................................. 540

Operation ................................................................................................. 541

Output Grid Name and Constant Value ................................................ 543

Faults ....................................................................................................... 543

Dual Grid Operations ................................................................................... 544

Grid A and B ............................................................................................ 545

Operation ................................................................................................. 545

Output Grid Name, ZNON, and AOI ....................................................... 547

Antilog Base 10 (from Grid) ........................................................................ 548

Blank Grid ..................................................................................................... 549
How Blank Grid Works ........................................................................... 550

Input Grid ................................................................................................. 550

Select Polygon File ................................................................................. 550

Output Name and Parameters ............................................................... 550

Resample Grid .............................................................................................. 552

How Resample Grid Works .................................................................... 553

Input Grid ................................................................................................. 553

Select Faults ............................................................................................ 553

Output Grid Name and Parameters ....................................................... 554

R2003.12.0 Contents xxx

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Operations: Grid Operations continued

Grid to Data ................................................................................................... 555
Input Grid ................................................................................................. 556

Output Data & Field Name, Conversion Rate ....................................... 556

Data Operations ................................................................................................. 558

Single Data Operations ................................................................................ 560
Input Data ................................................................................................ 561

Input Field ................................................................................................ 561

Operation ................................................................................................. 561

Output Data, Constant Value ................................................................. 563

Dual Data Operations ................................................................................... 565

Input Data ................................................................................................ 566

Input Field A and B ................................................................................. 567

Operation ................................................................................................. 567

Output Field ............................................................................................. 568

Field Type (if New Output Field) ............................................................ 568

Output Data, ZNON ................................................................................. 568

Antilog Base 10 (from Data) ........................................................................ 569

Blank Data ..................................................................................................... 570
How it Works ........................................................................................... 571

Input Data ................................................................................................ 571

Input Field ................................................................................................ 571

Polygon File ............................................................................................ 571

Output Field ............................................................................................. 571

Output Names and Parameters ............................................................. 572

Grid to Data ................................................................................................... 572

R2003.12.0 Contents xxxi

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Operations: Data Operations continued

Data Selection (Select Dialog Box) ............................................................. 573
Select Dialog Box Buttons ..................................................................... 574

Data Type ................................................................................................. 575

Output File ............................................................................................... 576

Output MFD ............................................................................................. 576

Source File .............................................................................................. 576

Edits to Perform ...................................................................................... 576

Input Edit Parameters ............................................................................. 577

Merge Data .................................................................................................... 617
Rules for the Input Files ......................................................................... 618

Specifying Merge Operation Parameters ............................................. 619

Range Editing ............................................................................................... 624

Input Data ................................................................................................ 625

Output File, Edit Type and Scope ......................................................... 625

Select Fields ............................................................................................ 627

Range Edit Field Mins and Maxs ........................................................... 627

Text Field for Scope Definition .............................................................. 628

Rotate Data ................................................................................................... 628

Applications ............................................................................................ 629

Input Data ................................................................................................ 629

Output Data Name, Parameters ............................................................. 629

R2003.12.0 Contents xxxii

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Operations: Data Operations continued

Sort Data ....................................................................................................... 631
How the Sort Data Operation Works ..................................................... 632

Input Data ................................................................................................ 632

Sort Fields ............................................................................................... 632

Output Name ........................................................................................... 632

Field Operations ........................................................................................... 633

Copy Only Selected Fields, Copy Original Fields
and Add Additional Fields ..................................................................... 633
Input File .................................................................................................. 635

Output File Name and Master File ......................................................... 635

Select Fields to Copy (Ordered Selection) ........................................... 636

Select Fields to Add ............................................................................... 637

Field Parameters for Added Fields ....................................................... 637

Output Field Names ................................................................................ 638

Output Field Types ................................................................................. 638

Output Field Format Descriptors .......................................................... 639

Output Field ZNONS ............................................................................... 640

Rename Fields ........................................................................................ 641

Overview .................................................................................................. 642

Input File .................................................................................................. 642

Output File Name and Master File ......................................................... 642

Fields to Rename .................................................................................... 643

Output Field Names ................................................................................ 643

Delete Fields ............................................................................................ 644

Input File .................................................................................................. 645

R2003.12.0 Contents xxxiii

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Operations: Data Operations: Field Operations continued

Output File Name and Master File ......................................................... 645

Fields to Delete ....................................................................................... 645

Geophysical Operations ................................................................................... 646

Append X-Y to Seismic Time File ............................................................... 647
Grid to Seismic Lines Converter ................................................................ 648
Migration, Reverse Migration ...................................................................... 649
Time Horizon Grid ................................................................................... 649

Velocity Grid ............................................................................................ 650

Time Horizon Faults ............................................................................... 650

Velocity Faults ........................................................................................ 650

Control Points ......................................................................................... 650

Output Files ............................................................................................. 651

Migration Parameters ............................................................................. 651

Control Point X-field ............................................................................... 652

Control Point Y-field ............................................................................... 652

Output Z-field .......................................................................................... 652

Mistie Reduction .......................................................................................... 653

Input File Name ....................................................................................... 653

Input Z-field ............................................................................................. 654

Adjustment Desired? .............................................................................. 654

Output File Names and Master File ....................................................... 655

Hold Specific Line(s) Fixed .................................................................... 655

R2003.12.0 Contents xxxiv

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Operations: Geophysical Operations continued

Seismic Data Thinning ................................................................................. 656
Input File .................................................................................................. 657

Output File, Algorithm, Parameters ...................................................... 658

X Field ...................................................................................................... 659

Y Field ...................................................................................................... 660

Shotpoint Field ........................................................................................ 660

Segment ID Field ..................................................................................... 660

Line Name Field ...................................................................................... 660

Horizon Name Field ................................................................................ 660

Area Name Field ...................................................................................... 661

Windowed Thinning Fields .................................................................... 661

Scale/Bias Line or Area ............................................................................... 662

Input File .................................................................................................. 663

Output File, Algorithm, Parameters ...................................................... 663

Line Name Field ...................................................................................... 664

Area Name Field ...................................................................................... 664

Scale/Bias Field ...................................................................................... 664

Normalized Interval Velocity (Data) ............................................................ 664

Normalized Interval Velocity (Grid) ............................................................ 665

Faults .................................................................................................................. 667

Balancer ........................................................................................................ 668
Calculate Fault Fields .................................................................................. 669
Dip Symbol Generator ................................................................................. 670
Migrator ......................................................................................................... 671
Profiler ........................................................................................................... 673

R2003.12.0 Contents xxxv

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Operations: Faults continued

Shrinker ......................................................................................................... 674

Remaining Operations ...................................................................................... 675

Back Interpolation ............................................................................................. 677

BACK INTERPOLATION Dialog Box Options ............................................ 679
Select Input Grid ..................................................................................... 679

Select Faults ............................................................................................ 679

Select Input Data ..................................................................................... 679

Output Z-field .......................................................................................... 679

Output Name, Strategy ........................................................................... 680

File Conversion .................................................................................................. 681

Converting a Control Point File to a Contour File ..................................... 683
Converting a Vertex File to a Contour File ................................................ 683
FILE CONVERSION Dialog Box Options .................................................... 683
Input File .................................................................................................. 683

Output Name, Type, Conversion Parameters ...................................... 683

X Field ...................................................................................................... 685

Y Field ...................................................................................................... 685

Z Fields .................................................................................................... 685

Line Segment Field ................................................................................. 685

Line Name Field ...................................................................................... 685

Horizon Name Field ................................................................................ 685

Shotpoint Field ........................................................................................ 685

R2003.12.0 Contents xxxvi

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Operations continued

Coordinate Transformations ............................................................................ 686

Spheroid ........................................................................................................ 689
Projection ...................................................................................................... 689
Defining Where Projection Surface and Spheroid Intersect ............... 691

TRANSFORM COORDINATES Dialog Box Options .................................. 692

Input File .................................................................................................. 692

Set Direction of transformation ............................................................. 692

Input Y/Latitude Field ............................................................................. 692

Input X/Longitude Field .......................................................................... 692

Output Name and Transformation parameters .................................... 692

Set Projection for Transformation ........................................................ 693

Transformation Coordinates (Overwrite Fields) ............................................. 700

Lat/Lon (DMS) to Decimal Degrees .................................................................. 701

DEGREES, MINUTES, SECONDS CONVERSION Dialog Box Options .... 702
Input File .................................................................................................. 702

Output File, Algorithm, Parameters ...................................................... 702

DMS Latitude Field ................................................................................. 703

DMS Longitude Field .............................................................................. 703

Latitude Field .......................................................................................... 703

Longitude Field ....................................................................................... 703

Line Generalization ........................................................................................... 704

LINE GENERALIZATION Dialog Box Options ............................................ 705
Input File .................................................................................................. 705

Output File, Algorithm, Parameters ...................................................... 706

Z Field ...................................................................................................... 709

R2003.12.0 Contents xxxvii

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Operations: Line Generalization Dialog Box continued

Segment ID Field ..................................................................................... 709

Line Name Field ...................................................................................... 709

Horizon Name Field ................................................................................ 709

Line Resampling ................................................................................................ 710

Line Resampling Dialog Box Options ........................................................ 711
Data Type ................................................................................................. 711

Files .......................................................................................................... 711

Output File ............................................................................................... 711

Output MFD ............................................................................................. 712

Resampling and Propagation ................................................................ 712

Resampling Parameters ......................................................................... 712

Propagation Parameters ........................................................................ 725

Choose Fields ......................................................................................... 728

Line Identification Parameters .............................................................. 730

Surface Intersection .......................................................................................... 735

Surface Intersection Dialog Box Options .................................................. 736
Input Grid 1 .............................................................................................. 736

Input Grid 2 .............................................................................................. 736

Output Vertex File ................................................................................... 736

Output Vertex File Master File ............................................................... 736

R2003.12.0 Contents xxxviii

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Macros
Overview ............................................................................................................. 737
User Macros .................................................................................................. 737
Quick-look ..................................................................................................... 738
Graphics ........................................................................................................ 739
Operations .................................................................................................... 739
Geophysics ................................................................................................... 740
Utilities .......................................................................................................... 740

Execute Macro ................................................................................................... 741

Fill in Macro Parameter Defaults ................................................................ 742
View Parameter Panels, Change/Assign Parameter Values .................... 742

CARM
Overview ............................................................................................................. 743

Volumetrics ........................................................................................................ 745

How Volumes Are Computed ...................................................................... 746
Volumetrics Report ...................................................................................... 747
Volumetrics Dialog Box Options ................................................................ 749
Input Grid ................................................................................................. 749

Select Faults ............................................................................................ 750

Select Vertex File .................................................................................... 751

Output Name and Parameters ............................................................... 751

Reservoir Envelope Volumetrics ..................................................................... 760

Surface Correction ............................................................................................ 761

R2003.12.0 Contents xxxix

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

CARM continued

Water Saturation Averaging ............................................................................. 762

Requirements for Performing Water Saturation Averaging ..................... 763
Water Saturation Averaging Dialog Box Options ..................................... 764
Formation Grids (Formation Structure) ................................................ 764

Porosity Curves ...................................................................................... 765

Water Saturation at OWC ....................................................................... 765

Elevation at OWC .................................................................................... 765

Intermediate Grid Porosity Increment .................................................. 766

Intermediate Grid Height Increment ...................................................... 766

Intermediate [Check] Grid Output File Name ....................................... 766

Intermediate Grid Master File ................................................................ 766

Average Water Saturation Output File Name ....................................... 766

Average Water Saturation Output Master File ..................................... 766

Area/Depth Plot .................................................................................................. 767

Quick Volumetrics (2 Polygons) ...................................................................... 769

Quick Volumetrics (40 Polygons) .................................................................... 770

Tools
Overview ............................................................................................................. 771

Spawn Unix Process ......................................................................................... 772

System Window ................................................................................................. 773

Raise .............................................................................................................. 773
Log Output .................................................................................................... 773
Always On Top ............................................................................................. 773

R2003.12.0 Contents xl
Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Tools continued

Process Logging ............................................................................................... 774

Logging Option ............................................................................................ 775
Log File Name ............................................................................................... 775

System Switches ............................................................................................... 776

Parameter Unlocking Mode ......................................................................... 776
Diagnostic Messages Displayed ................................................................. 777
Display Picture When Opened .................................................................... 777
Graphics Background Mode ....................................................................... 778
Units .............................................................................................................. 778
Graphics Window Configuration ................................................................ 778
Confirm Exit .................................................................................................. 778
Iconify Console on Macro Execution ......................................................... 779

OW Sort Order ................................................................................................... 779

Sort Hierarchically by Key Fields ............................................................... 779
Sort By Date .................................................................................................. 780

SIL Debug Print Switch ..................................................................................... 780

Appendix A. Graphics Feature Codes

Graphics Feature (Segment Type) Codes ....................................................... 781

Appendix B. File and Field Codes

Data File Type Codes ........................................................................................ 785

Data Field Type Codes ...................................................................................... 787

R2003.12.0 Contents xli

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line Patterns

Introduction ........................................................................................................ 791
Working with Well Symbols ........................................................................ 791
Editing Well Symbols in the OpenWorks Environment ...................... 791

Editing Well Symbols in the Standalone Environment ....................... 792

Font Types ......................................................................................................... 801

Line Patterns ...................................................................................................... 802

Appendix D. Color Editing

Introduction ........................................................................................................ 803
Terminology .................................................................................................. 804

Color Concepts in Z-MAP Plus ......................................................................... 804

RGB Color System ....................................................................................... 805
HLS Color System ........................................................................................ 805
RGB Color System vs. HLS Color System ................................................. 807

Color Table ......................................................................................................... 808

Printing Color ............................................................................................... 809
Color Representation Section ............................................................... 810

Color Index Section ................................................................................ 811

Color Table and the COLORWHEEL.ZGF Graphics File ..................... 812

Default Changes ..................................................................................... 812

R2003.12.0 Contents xlii

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Appendix E. Import/Export
Transferring Data In or Out of an MFD ............................................................ 827
Introduction .................................................................................................. 827
Common Terms ...................................................................................... 828

Import/Export File Format ................................................................................. 829

Beginning and Ending Symbols ................................................................. 829
Comment Symbols ....................................................................................... 830
History Symbols ........................................................................................... 830
File Description Parameters ........................................................................ 831
General File Description Parameters .................................................... 831

Non-Grid File Parameters ...................................................................... 832

Grid File Parameters ............................................................................... 833

Field Description Parameters ..................................................................... 834

Example ................................................................................................... 834

Non-Grid Field Description Parameters ............................................... 834

Grid Field Description Parameters ........................................................ 839

Parameters for Line 1 ............................................................................. 839

Parameters for Line 2 ............................................................................. 842

Parameters for Line 3 ............................................................................. 843

Lattice Field Description Parameters ................................................... 844

Parameters for Line 1 ............................................................................. 844

Parameters for Line 2 ............................................................................. 846

Format File ......................................................................................................... 847

Examples ...................................................................................................... 847
Non-Grid Examples ................................................................................ 847

Grid Examples ......................................................................................... 849

R2003.12.0 Contents xliii

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Appendix E: Import/Export continued

Structuring Files for Transfer into a Master File ............................................ 850

Introduction .................................................................................................. 850
File Structures .............................................................................................. 851
How Grids are Formatted ....................................................................... 851

Importing ASCII Files Into Z-MAP Plus and OpenWorks ............................... 860
Disk File to MFD/OW .................................................................................... 860
Grid File to MFD/OW .................................................................................... 861
Other Tools ................................................................................................... 861
Example 1:
Loading an ASCII Dataset into OpenWorks ASCII (Import) ..................... 862
Example 2:
Loading ASCII Grid to OpenWorks with Grid File to MFD/OW ................ 863

Appendix F. State Plane Codes

State Plane Projection Codes ........................................................................... 865

Appendix G. Mapping and Cartographic Projections

Overview ............................................................................................................. 871

Map Properties ................................................................................................... 872

Shapes .......................................................................................................... 872
Areas ............................................................................................................. 872
Distances ...................................................................................................... 873
Directions ...................................................................................................... 873

R2003.12.0 Contents xliv

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Appendix G: Mapping and Cartographic Projections continued

Control Parameters ........................................................................................... 874

Input Dataset ................................................................................................ 874
Direction of Projection ................................................................................. 874
Forward Projection ................................................................................. 874

Inverse Projection ................................................................................... 874

Map Projections ................................................................................................. 875

Projections .................................................................................................... 877
Cylindrical Projections ................................................................................ 879
Conic Projections ......................................................................................... 881
Planar Azimuthal Projections ..................................................................... 881
Other Projections ......................................................................................... 881
Descriptions of Z-MAP Plus Map Projections ........................................... 882
Descriptions of Blue Marble Map Projections ........................................... 888
Reference Spheroid ..................................................................................... 893
State Plane Coordinate System .................................................................. 896

Appendix H. Customized Title Blocks

Introduction ........................................................................................................ 897
Contents of This Appendix ......................................................................... 897

Logo and Title Block ......................................................................................... 898

Understanding LOGOFILEs .............................................................................. 899

Example LOGOFILE ..................................................................................... 900

Using LOGOFILEs ............................................................................................. 900

R2003.12.0 Contents xlv

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Appendix I. Auxiliary Files

Auxiliary Files for Z-MAP Plus ......................................................................... 901
Files in Your Home Directory ...................................................................... 901
Files That Affect Z-MAP Plus Sessions ................................................ 901

Files That Dont Affect the Operation of Z-MAP Plus .......................... 903

External Runtime Application Files That Everyone Uses ........................ 904

Glossary
Z-MAP Plus Glossary ........................................................................................ 905

Index .................................................................................................................... 937

R2003.12.0 Contents xlvi

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Introduction

Z-MAP Plus Overview

Z-MAP Plus offers the most advanced software system for interpretive
surface and fault modeling and mapping available in the exploration and
production business today. Z-MAP Plus provides leading-edge tools for
the contemporary geoscientist while preserving the power of the classic
products, including Z-MAP, B-MAP, and Z-EDIT. ZCL, the macro
language on which Z-MAP Plus is built, provides flexibilityas well as
powerful modeling and mapping tools for supplementing the
capabilities of the Z-MAP Plus user interface.

Guide Purpose and Organization

This guide has reference information about the menu options in
Z-MAP Plus, organized to match the Z-MAP Plus window menus and
the free-standing menus. The Gridding, Data Modeling and Mapping
documentation begins with an explanation of the science behind the
operations. You will often want to use the data-dependent default
values. When you want to use custom settings, use the guides
descriptions of the parameter values. Overview workflows, tables, and
selected screen captures supplement the text to help you understand how
to use each option.

R2003.12.0 Introduction: Z-MAP Plus Overview 1

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Documentation
The Z-MAP Plus documentation set includes the following PDF-format
documents.
Z-MAP Plus User Guide Introductory information about
gridding, MFDs, ZGFs, workflows, and many commonly used
procedures.
Macro Reference Manual for Z-MAP Plus / ZCL Reference
information about the Landmark-supplied macros.
Z-MAP Plus Utilities Reference Guide Reference information
about the Z-MAP Plus utilities: Pointset Builder, Flowlines/
Orthogonal Contours, Overpost Resolution (New), Source Priority,
Hardcopy, Hardcopy Batch, and Convert a ZGF to a DXF.
Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide (this document) Reference
information about Z-MAP Plus menus and optionsorganized to
match the Z-MAP Plus menu structure. Appendixes contain
information about topics that include: codes for graphics features,
files, fields, symbols, fonts, line patterns, state planes; formats for
import and export files, basics about color systems, mapping
projections, auxiliary files, and customizing title blocks.
Z-MAP Plus Installation and Configuration Guide System
administration information for installing the Z-MAP Plus product
suite, such as Z-MAP Plus, ZCL, and utilities, plus detailed license
management information.
ZCL Operators Manual, Volumes 1 and 2 Process definitions
and parameter requirements for ZCL processes, which you can
customize and use to expedite workflows.
Z-MAP Plus Release Notes Summaries of new features,
outstanding issues, and essential notes.
Pointset Builder Reference Guide Information about the
Pointset Builder utility, which you can use to extract OpenWorks
data and create pointsets from it (x,y,z data files).
Pointset Builder Release Notes Installation and other important
information about Pointset Builder.
Browser-based online help is also available for tabbed dialog boxes. To
display browser-based help about the parameters in a tabbed dialog box,
click the Help button in the dialog box.

R2003.12.0 Introduction: Z-MAP Plus Overview 2

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Z-MAP Plus Interface

This section describes how to use different components in the
Z-MAP Plus interface. This section explains how to perform these
tasks:
Use the primary Z-MAP Plus windows.
Recognize the types of dialog boxes.
Use common features of Z-MAP Plus dialog boxes.

Using the Primary Windows

When you start Z-MAP Plus, three windows appear:
Z-MAP Plus window (with the display area embedded or separate)
Z-MAP Plus System window
Z-MAP Plus xterm window
These three windows must remain open while you use Z-MAP Plus.
You can iconify these windows, but do not close them. They contain the
primary menu options, provide useful information (help and program
output reports), and display graphics.

Do Not Close or Kill the Z-MAP Plus xterm Window

Never use the kill window or Close option to remove the Z-MAP Plus xterm
window from your monitor. This window must remain active during the
Z-MAP Plus session, or serious problems will result.

R2003.12.0 Introduction: Z-MAP Plus Interface 3

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Z-MAP Plus System Window

The Z-MAP Plus System window accompanies the main Z-MAP Plus
window and is used to display nearly all program output and session
events. Some examples include:
gridding and contour reports
file directories, listings, and statistics
error messages

Watch This Window.

Messages appear to let
you know when one
process is finished and
you can continue to the
next.

Z-MAP Plus Xterm Window

The Z-MAP Plus xterm window may display output from Z-MAP Plus
processes or error messages. However, session events and most error
messages typically appear in the Z-MAP Plus System window.

Z-MAP Plus Window

The Z-MAP Plus window has three major components:
The menu bar is located at the top of the window. Click any menu
name to display a drop-down list of options.
The display area is the primary working area for graphics. Maps
and cross sections appear in this area. You can resize the display
area. The image readjusts automatically to fill the available space,
while maintaining the maps aspect ratio. This means the
relationship between the x and y coordinates is consistent. You can
detach the display area from the menu bar and display these two
elements on separate monitors.

R2003.12.0 Introduction: Z-MAP Plus Interface 4

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

The status area is located below the display area. Watch the status
area for helpful prompts and parameter values for current
processes.
The following illustration shows the menus in the Z-MAP Plus menu
bar.

Z-MAP Plus Menu Structure

R2003.12.0 Introduction: Z-MAP Plus Interface 5

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Inactive Options
The Edit and View options are initially inactive and appear dimmed. These
options control the display of graphics. The options become active if you attach
or create a graphics file.

Shortcut Icons

The graphical toolbar shown on the left contains

Zoom In
shortcuts to graphical functions, most of which have a
menu option counterpart. In most cases, the option
Window executes as soon as you click the icon button.
The graphical toolbar contains these icon buttons:
Zoom Out View
functions
Zoom In (page 377)
Window (page 379)
Full Display
Zoom Out (page 378)
Full Display (page 382)
Re-display
Re-display (page 381)
Display List (page 376)
Display List Pan (page 380)
Color Table (page 209)
Pan Color Indices (page 218)
Raise System Window (page 773)
Color Table
Edit Toggle Background Color (page 778)
functions Process Interrupt (page 377) No menu
Color Indices
counterpart
Raise System Undo (page 159)
Window Tools Redo (page 159)
functions
Toggle
Background
Color
Process Available only on toolbar
Interrupt No menu counterpart

Undo Edit Graphics Editor

functions
Redo

R2003.12.0 Introduction: Z-MAP Plus Interface 6

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Workflow Icons
The icons in the workflow toolbar are shortcuts to some frequently used
functions. The icons are organized from left to right in a rough
approximation of a typical Z-MAP Plus workflow.
Basemap Point Gridding Save to
Attach ZGFs Picture Open Features Plus SeisWorks

Attach
MFDs

Master File Directory File Manager Contouring Calculator Open

SeisWorks Data

Each icon has a menu option counterpart:

Icon Name Corresponding Menu Option

Attach MFDs File Open MFD Open/Close (page 33)

Attach ZGFs File Open ZGF Open/Close (page 34)

Master File Directory File Info Master File Directory (page 93)

Picture Open File Open Picture Open (page 49)

File Manager File Manager (page 60)

Basemap Features Features Basemap (page 223)

Point Gridding Plus Modeling Point Gridding Plus (page 394)

Contouring Features Contouring Contour (page 238)

Calculator Operations Calculator (page 536)

Open SeisWorks Data File Open SeisWorks (page 50)

Save to SeisWorks File Save As SeisWorks File (page 85)

R2003.12.0 Introduction: Z-MAP Plus Interface 7

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Starting Z-MAP Plus

Once Z-MAP Plus is properly installed and configured, you can start
the program by using either of the following interfaces:
OpenWorks Command Menu
Z-MAP Plus Command Menu
The remainder of this topic describes how to use these methods.

Meaning of the Term <install_dir>

In the following discussion, <install_dir> refers to the pathname to your
Z-MAP Plus installation. For example, if you install Z-MAP Plus in the directory
/home/user/ZMAPPlus, <install_dir> indicates your unique pathname /home/user.
In this example, the full pathname to the ZMAPPlus start-up script is
/home/user/ZMAPPlus/sh/ZMAPPlus.

Starting Z-MAP Plus from OpenWorks

1. From the OpenWorks Command Menu, select Applications
Z-MAP Plus. The Z-MAP Plus Command Menu appears.

R2003.12.0 Introduction: Starting Z-MAP Plus 8

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

2. You can now select Z-MAP Plus or a related application from the
Applications menu of the Z-MAP Plus Command Menu.

Running Multiple Z-MAP Plus Sessions

You can run only one Z-MAP Plus session at a time from a single working
directory.
Although you can display multiple OpenWorks Command Menus that are
each set to read different databases, Z-MAP Plus does not allow
concurrent access to its parameter file (LASPRM.ZCL). To run multiple
Z-MAP Plus sessions simultaneously, you must reset the WORKGROUP
environment variable to another directory.

Starting Z-MAP Plus from the Z-MAP Plus Command Menu

If you operate in an X Windows environment, but do not use
OpenWorks, you can display the Z-MAP Plus Command Menu and
start Z-MAP Plus from an xterm window.
To display the Z-MAP Plus Command Menu from an xterm window,
enter the following command, where <install_dir> is the path to the
Z-MAP Plus installation directory:
<install_dir>/ZMAPPlus/sh/ZMAPPlus
The Z-MAP Plus Command Menu appears. Select Z-MAP Plus or a
related application from the Applications menu.

R2003.12.0 Introduction: Starting Z-MAP Plus 9

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Setting Up an Alias for the StartUp Command

To make the start-up commands easier to remember and use, add them
as aliases to your .cshrc file.
Add the following line to your .cshrc file. (The change takes effect the
next time you log into your Unix account.)
alias ZMAPPlus <install_dir>/ZMAPPlus/sh/ZMAPPlus
You can now display the Z-MAP Plus Command Menu by entering:
ZMAPPlus

Using Environment Variables

You can enable or disable environment variables, according to your
preferences and depending on whether you use OpenWorks. (For more
information about environment variables, see Appendix A.
Environment Variables for Mapping Products in the Z-MAP Plus
Installation and Configuration Guide.)

R2003.12.0 Introduction: Starting Z-MAP Plus 10

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Understanding MFDs, ZGFs, and OpenWorks

Master File Directories (MFDs) and Z-MAP Graphics Files (ZGFs) are
the primary system-level files that contain Z-MAP Plus data and
pictures. If you run Z-MAP Plus concurrently with OpenWorks, you can
read and write grids, pointsets, and faults directly to the OpenWorks
database.
This topic reviews the structure of MFDs and ZGFs, as well as some
basic principles about the OpenWorks database.

Visualizing MFDs and ZGFs

To understand how MFDs and ZGFs operate, think of them as filing
cabinets that keep different types of information organized.
MFDs manage types of data, such as:
control points
grids
faults
lineal features
text
ZGFs manage picture files, including these elements:
maps
cross sections
three-dimensional displays

Purpose and Use of MFDs

Remember these important points about using MFDs:
At amy one time, you can have a maximum of four MFDs attached
to a Z-MAP Plus session.
Z-MAP Plus automatically provides an additional scratch MFD
that contains temporary or intermediate files. The contents of the
scratch MFD are deleted if you create an MFD, attach an MFD,
detach an MFD, or exit from Z-MAP Plus.
A single MFD can store multiple occurrences of the many
supported file types.

R2003.12.0 Introduction: Understanding MFDs, ZGFs, and OpenWorks 11

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Each file in an MFD is composed of one or more fields.

MFDs can contain more than 60 different field types.
The files and fields stored in an MFD have no naming conventions.
File names have a 24-character limit, and field names have a
20-character limit.
An MFD has no size limit. It grows automatically when you add
data to it.
Z-MAP Plus creates a lock file (named mfd-name.LCK), which
prevents multiple users from simultaneously using the same MFD.
The lock file is automatically deleted if you exit from Z-MAP Plus
or if you detach the locked MFD. (If you exit from Z-MAP Plus
improperly, the lock files may not be deleted. In this case, you
must remove the lock file manually to regain access to the locked
MFDs.)
You can set MFDs to allow only read-only access, which permits
multiple users to use the MFDs, but prohibits anyone from adding
files to them. Lock files are not created for read-only MFDs.
Changing an MFD from read/write to read-only is system
dependent. Use the appropriate system command to change the file
protection for MFDs (for example, chmod 444 filename.MFD).

Purpose and Use of ZGFs

Remember these important points about ZGFs:
You can have only one ZGF attached to a Z-MAP Plus session at
any one time.
ZGFs have a hierarchal structure, which facilitates graphical
editing.
One ZGF can store multiple pictures.
Each ZGF picture consists of one or more features, such as a
border, border labels, contours, and posted control points.
Each feature consists of one or more of four graphical
components. These components are lines, text, symbols, and
polygons. For example, the contours feature has a line
component (contour lines) and a text component (contour
labels).
Each component has one or more attributes, such as line style,
text font, and color.

R2003.12.0 Introduction: Understanding MFDs, ZGFs, and OpenWorks 12

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

ZGFs have no size limit. They grow automatically as you add

pictures or add features to existing pictures.
You typically create ZGFs to accompany the data in a particular
MFD, and you give ZGFs names that are similar to the
corresponding MFD. For example, you might create
PROJECT-X.ZGF to accompany PROJECT-X.MFD.

OpenWorks
If you use OpenWorks with Z-MAP Plus, Z-MAP Plus has a direct
connection with the data stored for the OpenWorks project. You do not
need to perform special import and export operations to retrieve and
send data to OpenWorks. This topic contains a brief overview of
OpenWorks, and examines the connection between OpenWorks and
Z-MAP Plus.

Overview of OpenWorks
OpenWorks is a computer environment built on a comprehensive
exploration and production database. You can use various OpenWorks
utilities to import, export, manage, and display data.
An Oracle relational data structure sits at the foundation of OpenWorks.
The Oracle database is composed of tables that group related
information. OpenWorks stores four kinds of data that you can use in
Z-MAP Plus:
Pointsetssimilar to Z-MAP Plus DATA files. They contain X, Y,
and Z-VALUE fields.
Gridssimilar to Z-MAP Plus GRID files. They are evenly
distributed points that are estimates of an attribute over an area.
Faultssimilar to Z-MAP Plus FALT files. They are fault
polygons or lines associated with a surface in OpenWorks.
Deviated Well Tracesdeviated well traces are read-only.
All Z-MAP Plus operations can be performed using data from either the
traditional binary MFD data files, or using data directly from the
OpenWorks database.

R2003.12.0 Introduction: OpenWorks 13

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

You can use MFDs with the OpenWorks database in the following
ways:
If you use the OpenWorks database as a central repository, you can
use MFDs as temporary storage project databases.
To optimize data access and retrieval speeds, you can copy data
from OpenWorks to an MFD for temporary storage.
The MFD datatypes (such as DATA and FALT) are stored with the data
so Z-MAP Plus can filter the data for display in dialog boxes.
The instructions in this section assume that your project data is already
loaded into the OpenWorks database. For more information about data
loading, see the OpenWorks Geodata Loading guide.

Z-MAP Plus Connection to OpenWorks

If you run Z-MAP Plus concurrently with OpenWorks, you can
establish connectivity between them. This topic describes:
starting Z-MAP Plus with an OpenWorks connection
selecting input files from OpenWorks
saving output files to OpenWorks

Starting Z-MAP Plus with an OpenWorks Connection

When you start Z-MAP Plus, the program automatically detects whether
or not the OpenWorks environment is available. If it is, Z-MAP Plus
asks you to select a project, and then an interpreter for the project, if one
is not already selected.

R2003.12.0 Introduction: OpenWorks 14

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Once you select a project and interpreter, the Z-MAP Plus Command
Menu reflects the settings, as shown in the following example:

Selecting input Files from OpenWorks

You can perform Z-MAP Plus functions that use pointsets, grids, and
faults using data from either the traditional binary MFD data files, or
directly from the OpenWorks database.
When you are performing a function that can use data from OpenWorks,
and you have an OpenWorks connection with data available, your input
dialog box appears as shown in the following example:

The upper part of the dialog box refers to data stored in a Z-MAP Plus
MFD. The lower part of the dialog box lists all the available grids in the
current OpenWorks project. The column headings are described in the
following table:

Column Explanation

Geo Name Cross references the selected stratigraphic unit.

Geo Type Defined as a stratigraphic unit, fault, or surface.
Data Set Name Ties a file back to a given pointset. Defaults to the first letter of
the data type followed by the date and time and the first part of
the input file.
Attribute A qualitative variable describing physical characteristics.
Type References the type of data.
Interpreter Ties a pointset to an interpreters initials.

R2003.12.0 Introduction: OpenWorks 15

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

If you use a function in Z-MAP Plus that requires faults or pointsets, the
input dialog box is similar, except that faults and pointsets are shown as
options instead of grids.

Saving Files to the OpenWorks Project

You can use functions that output pointsets, grids, and faults to store
data directly in the OpenWorks project. These functions include an
OpenWorks option for Output MFD, as shown in the following
example.

Once you select OpenWorks for output, the OW button next to the
Output File Name option. When you click the OW button, the following
dialog box appears:

With this dialog box, you can fill out the information that OpenWorks
requires to properly store your grid, pointset, or fault data in the
database. This dialog box uses default values based on the input
parameters specified.

R2003.12.0 Introduction: OpenWorks 16

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Once stored in the database, you have immediate access to the data. the
previous dialog box showed an example of storing a pointset in the
OpenWorks database. As you can see from the following picture, the
pointset becomes immediately available as potential input for a gridding
operation.

Gridding Point Gridding Plus Control Points

Typical Workflows
There are really no typical workflows for Z-MAP Plus. How you use
this versatile program depends on your data, your objectives, and your
work style. You might consider the approaches suggested in the
following diagram and adapt them when you are ready. This work flow
assumes that you have already created the project and loaded data into
the database.

R2003.12.0 Introduction: OpenWorks 17

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Workflow for a Select a project and establish an interpreter.

Comprehensive Set the interpreter/source priority.
Z-MAP Plus
Session
Evaluate well data and make a list of all wells of special interest
(for example, those with a particular log suite).

Create a pointset consisting of multiple fields using the wells available

in the current well list.

Create a map that shows well locations of the current poinset.

Produce a grid of one of the pointset fields.

Contour the grid using color-filled contours

Edit the contours of the grid to incorporate interpretation and recontour

Grid and contour a lower surface

Calculate isochore values using grid operations

Grid and contour a lower surface

Calculate isochore values using grid operations

Create Gas-Oil contact and Oil-Water contact grids

Calculate hydrocarbon reserves for the oil and gas zones

R2003.12.0 Introduction: OpenWorks 18

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Using Z-MAP Plus with OpenWorks for the First Time

Once your project has been created and the data is loaded into the
OpenWorks database, you are ready to start Z-MAP Plus. The first time
you work with a particular project in Z-MAP Plus, you must do the
following:
Select the project.
Create an interpreter designation for yourself in that project.
Select the current interpreter.
Establish a prioritized list of interpreters.
You can accomplish these steps in several ways. One approach is shown
in the following workflow.

Workflow for Starting the Initial Session

Start OpenWorks.

Create an interpreter, using the

Interpreters Tool.

Start Z-MAP Plus.

Select an project and interpreter from

the popup list.

Create a prioritized list of interpreters

using the Source Priority tool.

When you start subsequent sessions with the same project, fewer steps
are required. You already have an interpreter designation in the project,
and your prioritized list of interpreters remains in effect.

R2003.12.0 Introduction: OpenWorks 19

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Defining Projects and Interpreters

At the beginning of each session, you are required to select a project, and
an interpreter. You can make both selections with the OpenWorks
Project Status tool. If you do not, you are prompted to select a project
and an interpreter when you start the Z-MAP Plus application.

What Is a Project?
A project is a logical collection of data. Assuming that you have created
a project and have loaded your well data, all you have to do is select a
project from a list of the available projects on your system.
For information about creating projects, see the OpenWorks Data
Management guide. For information about data loading, see the
Geodata Loading guide.

What Is an Interpreter?
So that several people can work in the same project and use each others
interpretations without corrupting them, OpenWorks assigns
interpreters initials to such data as:
surface and fault picks and profiles
pointsets
grids
For example, if you pick Top A, other interpreters can see the pick and
use it to create gridded surfaces. However, only you can alter the pick.
If no interpreters are defined in a project, the interpreter LGC is
automatically created and selected as the current interpreter.

R2003.12.0 Introduction: OpenWorks 20

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Users and Interpreters

A user is a login account. Users own interpreters. For instance, when you
log on, you can create several interpreters, giving each different initials.
All of these interpreters are owned by you and no one else can edit the
data created by any of these interpreters.
Users are given browse, interpret, or management access to a project by
the project owner. Interpreters have the same access level as the user
who created them.
Browse lets you view data in the database but you cannot edit it.
Interpret lets you add your own data, edit it in, and delete it from
the database.
Management lets you edit data created by anyone working in the
project. Generally only a project manager has this level of access.

Changing the Owner of an Interpreter Designation

To change an interpreter (and all of its associated data) from one user account
to another, do as follows:
1. Log in with the user account to which you want to change the interpreter.
2. In the Interpreters tool, delete the interpreter.
3. Add the same interpreter initials. The user account you are logged into is
now listed as the current owner.

Sources and Interpreters

A source is a set of identifying initials that was loaded with the data into
the database. Generally, source refers to a commercial data source such
as PI or Dwights (DWI). An interpreter is a person on the system who
has access to the project.
You can view and use data from a source. If you want to edit it, you must
create an interpreter with the same initials as the source (create an
interpreter designated DWI if you want to edit Dwights data, for
example). In effect, you take possession of the data.
All data sources are listed in the Set Interpreter/Source Priority dialog
box. Sources are not listed in the OpenWorks Interpreters dialog box
because they are not interpreters, they are just sources of data. For more
information about setting interpreter source priority, see the
Z-MAP Plus Utilities Reference Guide.

R2003.12.0 Introduction: OpenWorks 21

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Integrating with Other Products

Z-MAP Plus is integrated with other Landmark products in three ways:
OpenWorks database Z-MAP Plus can read grid, fault, and
pointset data that other applications write to the OpenWorks
database or that are loaded into the database with OpenWorks
utilities. You can save Z-MAP Plus data to the OpenWorks
database for use by other applications.
MFDs The MFD is the storage device for all types of data files
that Z-MAP Plus uses and some data files that other Landmark
applications use. Z-MAP Plus can write data to MFDs and read it
from them.
ZGFs ZGFs store Z-MAP Plus maps as graphics files.
This topic covers the means of integrating data between Z-MAP Plus
and the following Landmark applications:
SeisWorks Geophysical interpretation application that
interprets horizons and faults.
StratWorks Geological interpretation application that
correlates well logs, builds cross sections, models faults, and
makes maps.
Stratamodel Reservoir modeling application that uses grids
and well log data to populate the cells of a 3D model, to perform
operations and calculations on the model, to extract and
manipulate attribute data, and to animate it for simulations.
OpenVision 3D Viewer Landmarks 3D visualization
application. Provides access to OpenWorks, SeisWorks,
Z-MAP Plus, StratWorks, Wellbore Planner, Gocad and Sierra
modeling applications. OpenVision allows simultaneous data
corrections from any number of applications and creates a
visualization environment for multiple data types.
TDQ Application that moves data easily between SeisWorks
and StratWorks or Z-MAP Plus by creating velocity models that
convert time surface grids or faults to depth surface grid or faults,
and vice versa.

Setting Compatible Depth Type and Depth Units

To create grids in Z-MAP Plus that you can export to TDQ, you must set
the Depth Type and Depth Units so that TDQ can recognize the output
grid.

R2003.12.0 Introduction: Integrating with Other Products 22

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

PetroWorks a petrophysical interpretation application that

displays and edits well logs, performs environmental corrections,
and generates crossplots, histograms, and reports.
Z-MAP Plus Integration With
Other Landmark Products Z-MAP Plus
Grid, contour, and edit surfaces.
Perform surface and data operations

Pointset Builder

OpenWorks Oracle Database

Access and store pointsets of data
ranging from well picks to production data.
Access and store grids and faults shared
by various Landmark applications.

SeisWorks
StratWorks
Access pointsets, grids, horizons,
Use grids created with advanced
faults, and shot points.
Z-MAP Plus gridding algorithms.
Access zone attribute grids.

PetroWorks
Stratamodel
Access zone attributes created from
Transfer MFD grids, pointsets, and faults.
calculated logs for gridding in Z-MAP Plus.

TDQ
Access grids and polygons.

R2003.12.0 Introduction: Integrating with Other Products 23

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

SeisWorks

pointsets, well Z-MAP Plus

traces,
centerline faults,
fault polygons,
horizons/grids

OpenWorks
MFD
database

grids, pointsets, grids, pointsets,

well traces, centerline faults,
centerline faults, fault polygons,
fault polygons horizons
(converted to grids)

Save in Open in
SeisWorks
database Z-MAP Plus

Of the data types SeisWorks can export, Z-MAP Plus can use the
following ones:
Horizon files Data from seismic interpretation in SeisWorks
2D/3D.
SeisWorks/2D exports x, y, z, line names, and shotpoint numbers.
SeisWorks/3D exports x, y, z, line number, and shotpoint number.

SeisWorks 3D LIne Names

Shotpoint values imported into Z-MAP Plus do not match the seismic
survey line names in SeisWorks 3D surveys. The shotpoint values refer to
the 3D Line Number value.

Z-MAP Plus is designed to work with data output from SeisWorks

2.3 or later. Z-MAP Plus treats data from earlier versions of
SeisWorks as point data.

R2003.12.0 Introduction: SeisWorks 24

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Fault Heave Data is stored in the FALT data type and includes
fault heave or fault throw information associated with the horizon.
This file contains the following fields: x, y, segment ID, delta z
throw, and fault gap (heave).
Computed Contour Dataset is generated by the SeisWorks
mapping software using triangulation or gridding algorithms. On
export, this file is separated into three pieces: control point data,
shotline data, and fault polygons.
Control points file contains isolated data points, such as well log
picks, and includes x, y, and z values. (You can use the data in this
file as an Additional Well Control File in Z-MAP Plus.)
Shotline points file contains shotline data created by sampling the
horizon file in SeisWorks and includes x, y, z, and line name.
(Because this file does not contain shotpoint identification,
Z-MAP Plus can only read the contents as well data.)
Fault polygons file contains polygons that were either hand drawn
or calculated from fault heaves by the SeisWorks software and
includes x, y, and segment ID.
Fault Segment files contain all assigned and unassigned fault
segments in the working project and are stored in one DATA file.
The file has the following format: x, y, z, segment ID, and fault
plane number.

R2003.12.0 Introduction: SeisWorks 25

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

StratWorks

Z-MAP Plus

maps
grids
pointsets grids
well traces
centerline faults
fault polygons
pointsets
centerline faults
fault polygons

OpenWorks MFD ZGF

database

pointsets
centerline faults
fault polygons
grids
pointsets
well traces
centerline faults grids
fault polygons

maps

StratWorks

You can use files produced in Z-MAP Plus to do the following in

StratWorks:
contour grids
display grid profiles along any section
perform grid operations, such as multiplying an isopach grid by a
porosity grid
produce hardcopy

R2003.12.0 Introduction: StratWorks 26

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Of the variety of data that StratWorks can export, Z-MAP Plus can use
the following:
Pointsets, which are stored in a DATA file type in the MFD,
include control points and are stored as x, y values, well ID, and
one z value.
Fault polygons, which are stored in a FALT file type in the MFD,
include (x, y, and segment ID) and are created with the StratWorks
MapView editing function.
Regular fault data, which is stored in a FALT file type in the
MFD, includes (x, y, segment ID, heave, and vertical separation)
and is created from information stored with the fault polygons and
associated fault cuts.
The fault polygons and center line fault files are given the same
name, except that the latter is preceded by cline.

Stratamodel

Z-MAP Plus

grids
OpenWorks well traces
database

data file MFD

grids
read only
well traces

Stratamodel

You can exchange grids and pointsets between Stratamodel and

Z-MAP Plus through MFDs. You can exchange well data directly
through data files.

R2003.12.0 Introduction: Stratamodel 27

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

TDQ

Z-MAP Plus

Set Depth Type

Set Depth Units

grids
grids fault polygons
centerline faults

OpenWorks data file

database

grids
fault polygons
grids
centerline faults

TDQ

You can import data from or export data to TDQ through the
OpenWorks database, or exchange grids and fault polygon data directly
through data files.
TDQ sees only depth or time grids, all other grid types are invisible. Be
sure you set the Depth Type and Depth Units by using the OpenWorks
Grid Output Specification dialog box.

R2003.12.0 Introduction: TDQ 28

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

PetroWorks
In addition to the data you can write to and read from the OpenWorks
database, you can import reservoir production parameter data the
PetroWorks Summation module generates. Examples of reservoir
production parameter data include net pay and net reservoir rock, which
PetroWorks saves as zone attributes and stores in the OpenWorks
database. You can import this data from OpenWorks into an MFD and
use it to create grids and contour maps in Z-MAP Plus. (For more
information about PetroWorks, see the PetroWorks User Guide set.)

Z-MAP Plus

grids
pointsets
well traces
MFD

OpenWorks
database
reservoir
production
parameters
grids
pointsets
well traces

PetroWorks

R2003.12.0 Introduction: PetroWorks 29

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

New Features in the 2003.12 Release

New Icons
Three shortcut icons have been added to the top of the Z-MAP Plus
window and one icon has been updated to be more recognizable:
File Manager To start the File Manager, click the new
File Manager icon (or select File Manager in the Z-MAP Plus
window). Use the File Manager to quickly copy, move, and delete
virtually any type of file you create in Z-MAP Plus. You can also
use the File Manager to compress MFDs and ZGFs.
Open SeisWorks Data To display the dialog box for opening a
SeisWorks horizon as a grid, click the new Open SeisWorks Data
icon (or select File Open SeisWorks in the Z-MAP Plus
window).
Save to SeisWorks To display the dialog box for saving grids
as SeisWorks horizons, click the new Save to SeisWorks icon (or
select File Save As SeisWorks File in the Z-MAP Plus
window).
Open Picture To display the dialog box for opening a picture,
click the newly designed Open Picture icon (or select File
Open Picture Open in the Z-MAP Plus window).

Opening SeisWorks Horizons as Grids

If you open SeisWorks horizons as grids in Z-MAP Plus, you now select
the horizons to import in much the same way you would select horizons
in SeisWorks. You can also filter or search the horizon list by using the
wildcards *, ?, and [ ]. (For more information, see SeisWorks starting
on page 50.)
The dialog box for saving grids as SeisWorks horizons also has search
and filter capabilities for managing the horizon list (as described in
SeisWorks File starting on page 85).

True Color
Z-MAP Plus now displays images in true color, no matter which
platform you use, provided your system is set to display true color.
When you print images or save them as CGM files, a standard 256-color
palette is still used.

R2003.12.0 Introduction: New Features in the 2003.12 Release 30

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

File Menu Options

Overview
Use File menu options in the Z-MAP Plus window to manage
Z-MAP Plus files in the following ways:
New Create Master File Directories (MFDs), session files,
maps, and cross sections (page 32).
Open Attach existing MFDs and a Z-MAP Graphics File
(ZGF) to the current session. Open session files, pictures, and
SeisWorks horizon files (page 48). You can reopen saved session
files to restore session settings.
Manager Start the File Manager utility (page 60). Use the File
Manager to cut, copy, paste, move, delete, and rename member
files in MFDs, pictures in ZGFs, Systems files, and OpenWorks
files. You can also compress and rename MFDs and ZGFs.
(Equivalent to the File Manager icon.)
Save Session As Save session settings (page 68). You can
reopen session files later to reload the saved settings.
Save As Save MFD contents as ASCII, CPS-1, or ZGF Flat
Files (page 70). Save grids as horizons for use in SeisWorks
(page 85).
Info Display information in the system window (page 89)
about the following elements: file directory, file listing, grid
listing, data statistics, grid statistics, file or picture, graphics file
summary, and list of CPS-1 files.
Directory Paths Set directory paths (page 108). These settings
determine which directories are searched to create lists of available
filessuch as MFDs and ZGFs you can attach.
Import Import various types of data into Z-MAP Plus and save
the data in an MFD or ZGF (page 116).
Print Print a picture to a CGM or other file type (page 132).

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Overview 31

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Copy Copy (page 141), rename (page 147), and delete

(page 151) files and pictures. (Equivalent to the Copy,
Rename MFD/ZGF, Rename File/Pictures, and Delete icons in
the File Manager.)
Compress Compress MFDs and ZGFs (page 154). (Equivalent
to the Compress MFD/ZGF icon in the File Manager.)
Exit Exit from Z-MAP Plus (page 157).

Options in the File New Menu

Session
To create a blank session file (parameter file), select File New
Session. The CREATE a BLANK Session File dialog box appears.
Enter a name in the Enter Name for Blank Session File box. If you use
an existing file name, the original file is overwritten.
To create the blank session file, click OK. The next time you select
File New Open Session to display the SELECT Session File
dialog box, the session file name appears in the list. If you select a blank
session file, all the parameter settings revert to the default values.

Session File Extensions

Parameter files have the extension .ZCLPARMS. (Use all capitals or all lower
case for the extension, but do not use mixed case.) If you do not add the
extension, the program adds it automatically when you click OK. (For more
information about session file extensions, see page 68.)

For information about the target directory for the blank session file, see
Location for Saving Session Files on page 69.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Options in the File New Menu 32

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Master File
Select File New Master File (MFD) to display the CREATE
MASTER FILE dialog box, which you use to create a Master File
Directory (MFD). In the CREATE MASTER FILE dialog box, set the
parameters described in the following text.

Saving Scratch File Contents

Note that if you create an MFD, it is automatically attached to the current
session. Attaching or detaching an MFD causes the contents of the scratch file
If you want to save the scratch file contents, use an existing MFD to do this
before you create the MFD.

Enter New Master File Name

Enter the name of the new Master File Directory (MFD) in the Enter
New MASTER FILE Name box. The fully qualified name (full path
terminated by the file name and extension) can be a maximum of 79
characters long and cannot contain blank spaces. MFDs have the
extension .MFD, which can be all upper case or all lower case. If you do
not add the extension, the program adds it automatically when it creates
the file.
If you do not enter a destination path, the MFD is saved in the output
path specified in the MFDs tab of the Directory Paths dialog box. If no
MFD output path is specified in the Directory Paths dialog box, the file
is saved in your home directory.

Internal Master File Name

The internal MFD name is the name that represents the MFD in lists,
such as a list for selecting a destination MFD for saving a file.
Optional: To use a file name other than the one you specified as the new
MFD name, enter a name in the Internal Master File Name box. The
file name can be a maximum 24 characters long and can contain internal
blanks. The default name is the new MFD name.

Internal MFD Names in MFD Copies

If you use your computer's operating system command to copy an MFD as
another file with a different name, both files have the same internal MFD name.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Options in the File New Menu 33

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Graphics File (ZGF)

If you select File New Graphics File (ZGF), the Specify New
GRAPHICS FILE name dialog box appears, which you use to create a
Z-MAP Graphics File (ZGF). As soon as you create a ZGF, it is
automatically attached to the current session. Specify the new ZGF file
name, as described in the following text.

New Graphics File Name

Enter the new ZGF name in the Enter New GRAPHICS FILE Name
box. ZGF file names must have the following characteristics:
Fully qualified name (full path terminated by the file name and
extension) is no longer than 79 characters
No internal blank spaces
Terminated with the extension .ZGF or .zgf
If you do not add the extension, the program adds it automatically
when it creates the file.
If you do not enter a destination path, the ZGF is saved in the output path
specified in the ZGFs tab of the Directory Paths dialog box. If no
Directory Paths: ZGFs output path is specified, the file is saved in your
home directory.

Graphics File Header

This field is obsolete.

Basemap
Select File New Basemap to display the NEW MAP Creation
dialog box, which you use to create a new basemap. The following
workflow shows the main steps.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Options in the File New Menu 34

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Select File New

Basemap

Click the first button, Picture Name, AOI Types and Scale Types.
Specify parameters in the Picture NAME, AOI & Scale Type dialog box.

Existing data,
User input Define AOI picture, contours
from...

Enter X and Y minimums and maximums Select AOI from grid, data, picture contours

Enter values for map offsets and scale Select AOI type

A list of data files or pictures appears AOI

Select a file/picture from list

Is this a
Yes projected No
map?
Select projection parameters

Select source for projection

Activate projection

Apply

Save and return to the

Z-MAP Plus window
New Basemap Workflow

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Options in the File New Menu 35

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Picture Name, AOI Types, and Scale Types

Click the Picture Name, AOI Types and Scale Types button in the
NEW MAP Creation dialog box to display Picture NAME, AOI & Scale
Type dialog box. You must specify a name for the new map, an AOI
type, and a scale type.

Enter New Picture Name

In the Enter New Picture Name box of the Picture NAME, AOI &
Scale Type dialog box, specify a map name. The name can be a
maximum of 64 characters long and can contain blank spaces.

AOI (Area of Interest) Type

Click the AOI Type button box in the Picture NAME, AOI & Scale
Type dialog box. Select an AOI type from the drop-down list. The AOI
type controls how the map coordinates are defined. The choices for this
parameter are:
XY (default value) Use a Cartesian (rectilinear, Northing/
Easting) coordinate system. No projection information is stored
with the map, so the map scale must be in UnitsPerInch.
Note that a map with an XY AOI type can be a projected map, but
the projection data is not stored with the map. If you place data on
the map that is in a coordinate reference system, the map is
projected, even though the AOI borders are rectilinear and you
cannot post latitude and longitude labels at the borders.
XY PROJECTED Use a Cartesian (rectilinear, Northing/
Easting) coordinate system. Projection information is stored with
the map, so the scale can be of the type UnitsPerInch,
MapToGround, or Absolute. The AOI border is parallel to northing
and easting, so the borders are rectilinear.
LATLONGPROJECTED Use explicitly specified projection
parameters to display the map. Define the map edges in terms of
latitude and longitude. Projection information is stored with the
map, so the map scale can be of the type UnitsPerInch,
MapToGround, or Absolute. The AOI border is parallel to latitude
and longitude, so it is curved.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Options in the File New Menu 36

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Scale Type
You must set a scale for drawing the map so it corresponds
proportionally with real world distances. Use the Scale Type option to
specify how you plan to set the scale. You define the actual scale
measurements when you specify the AOI.
Click the Scale Type button in the Picture NAME, AOI & Scale Type
dialog box. From the drop-down list, choose an option to use as a basis
for the map scale:
UNITSPERINCH (default value) Use map units per inch.
ABSOLUTE Use map units per data.
MAPTOGROUND Use different types of units, such as feet
and centimeters.

AOI from Grid, Data, Picture, or Contours

You must specify an AOI for the new map, either by using the AOI from
existing data or by explicitly specifying AOI parameter values.
To use exiting data to specify the AOI, click the AOI from Grid, Data,
Picture, or Contours button. The Select AOI Source TYPE dialog box
appears, which you use to select an existing grid, data file, picture, or
contour file to use as the source of the AOI.
Grid From the Select AOI Source file dialog box that appears,
select a grid to use as the AOI source.
Data From the Select AOI Source file dialog box that appears,
select an AOI source either an MFD dataset (from the top list)
or a DATA file (from the bottom list).
Picture From the Select AOI Source GRAPHICS FILE dialog
box that appears, select one of the available pictures to use as the
AOI source. The dialog box closes immediately and the Select
AOI SOURCE PICTURE File dialog box appears. In this dialog
box, select one of the listed features to use as the basis for the AOI.
Contours From the Select AOI Source file dialog box that
appears, select a contour file to use as the AOI source.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Options in the File New Menu 37

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

AOI from User Input; Offsets, and Scale AOI

To specify the AOI from explicit values, click the AOI from User
Input; Offsets, and Scale AOI button. The Limits, Offsets, and Scale
dialog box appears, which you use to specify parameters for the AOI.
Specify the following values:
X and Y Minimums and Maximums Minimum and
maximum X and Y coordinates.
Top Top offset area of the map, in plotter units (in./cm.).
Bottom Bottom offset area of the map, in plotter units (in./cm.).
Left Left offset area of the map, in plotter units (in./cm.).
Right Right offset area of the map, in plotter units (in./cm.).
X Scale and Y Scale Formulas for the X scale and Y scale,
calculated as follows:
X maximum X minimum
X scale = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
desired number of inches or centimeters in X

Y maximum Y minimum
Y scale = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
desired number of inches or centimeters in Y

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Options in the File New Menu 38

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Projection Parameters
You must specify projection parameters for the map. Click the
Projection Parameters button to display the Set up a Projection dialog
box. Use this dialog box to create projections for the new map from one
of the following sources:
a data file
an existing picture
user input
state plane

Projection from DATA or PICTURE

To use the projection from an existing data file or map, click the
Projection from DATA or PICTURE button. The Select Projection
Source Type dialog box appears, which you use to select the data file or
picture whose projection information you want to use. Click one of the
following buttons to display the appropriate list:
DATA Click the DATA button. From the Select PROJECTION
Source from DATA File dialog box that appears, select a
projection source either an MFDs dataset (from the top list) or
a specific DATA file (from the bottom list.) Choose a dataset or
DATA file that contains the appropriate projection information.
PICTURE Click the PICTURE button. From the Select
Projection Source GRAPHICS FILE dialog box that appears,
select the ZGF that contains the target picture. The dialog box
closes and the Select PROJECTION Source from PICTURE File
dialog box appears, which you use to select the picture that has the
projection you want to use.

Projection from user input

To define a projection explicitly, click the Projection from user input
button in the Set up a Projection dialog box. The Projection Parameter
SETUP dialog box appears. You must specify the following values:
type of projection Projection Code button (next topic)
reference spheroid Spheroid button (page 41)
projection-specific parameters Projection Parameters button
(page 42)

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Options in the File New Menu 39

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Projection Code
To use a projection code to define the projection, click the Projection
Code button in the Projection Parameter SETUP dialog box. Select a
projection code from the list of codes that appears. The projection can
be Cylindrical, Conic or Planar Azimuthal. The available projections are
listed in the following text. For a complete description of each available
projection, see Map Projections on page 875.

Unlocking Parameters When Changing Projections

Landmark highly recommends that you unlock parameters before you change
projections in order to prevent AOI incompatibility.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Options in the File New Menu 40

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Spheroid
Once you select a projection code, select a spheroid code. Each spheroid
code corresponds to a reference spheroid a theoretical geometric
figure whose dimensions closely resemble the dimensions of the earth
for a particular area.
Click the Spheroid button in the Projection Parameter SETUP dialog
box. The Select Spheroid CODE list appears, which you use to choose
a defined reference spheroid or to select the USER-DEFINED option
and specify custom axes for the spheroid. Spheroid options are shown in
the following illustration.
For a complete description of each of the reference spheroids (including
the dimensions for the semi-major axis and the semi-minor axis of each
one), see Reference Spheroid on page 893. The program uses the two
axes to calculate the ellipticity for the map projection.
.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Options in the File New Menu 41

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Projection Parameters
Once you select a projection code and spheroid, click the Projection
Parameters button in the Projection Parameter SETUP dialog box to
display the Set Projection Parameters dialog box appears. The Set
Projection Parameters dialog box contains parameters required for the
specified projection. The parameters are context-specific, and may
include the following options:
Unit Code
Unit Factor
Reference Latitude
Latitude Scale Factor
Reference Longitude
Longitude Scale Factor
False Northing and False Easting
Central Meridian
Mapping Across the Dateline

Unit Code
You can choose the units of measurement for the projection from the
Unit Code list, unless you are using a UTM Projection (in which units
are always defined in meters). The available units of measurement may
include these options: USER-SUPPLIED, METERS, FEET, YARDS,
INCHES, KILOMETERS, NAUTICAL MILES, STATUTE MILES,
and US SURVEY FEET.

Unit Factor (units/meter)

You can enter a value in the Unit Factor box to custom define the
number of units if you set the Unit Code to USER-SUPPLIED.
User-supplied units are defined as units/meter, and the default value is
1.0000.

Reference Latitude (Standard Parallel)

Reference Latitude, or Standard Parallel, is a parallel of latitude used as
a control line to compute a map projection.

Latitude Scale Factor

The Latitude Scale Factor is a multiplier for reducing a distance
obtained from a map by computing the scale to the actual distance on the
datum of the map. For all projections using only one scale factor, the
Longitude Scale Factor is used. The Latitude Scale Factor is used only
for the Polyconic projection.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Options in the File New Menu 42

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Reference Longitude
Reference Longitude, or Central Meridian, is the line of longitude
located at the center of a projection on which the projection is generally
based.

Longitude Scale Factor

The Longitude Scale Factor is a multiplier for reducing a distance
obtained from a map by computing the scale to the actual distance on the
datum of the map. For example, applying a scale reduction along the
central meridian of a transverse Mercator projection creates two lines of
true scale on either side of the central meridian.

False Easting
A value assigned a central meridian of a coordinate system to avoid the
inconvenience of using negative coordinates.

False Northing
A value assigned to the origin of Northings, or grid coordinates to avoid
the inconvenience of using negative coordinates.

Central Meridian
The line of Longitude located at the center of a projection on which the
projection is generally based. This parameter is also known as the
Reference Longitude.

Mapping Across the Dateline

Select whether or not the map crosses the international dateline. This is
a theoretical 180th meridian, the regions to the east of which are counted
as being one day earlier in their calendar dates than regions to the west
of the line.

Projection from STATE PLANE

The State Plane Coordinate System (SPCS) is used as a standard for
geodetic mapping across the United States and its territories. This
system which is used by the United States Geologic Survey (USGS),
dictates the parameters used by the projections.

NAD27 and NAD83 Projection Systems

Z-MAP Plus now explicitly supports both NAD27 and NAD83
coordinates and provides a means of converting latitude/longitude
coordinates between the two datums.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Options in the File New Menu 43

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

In general, a geodetic datum is determined by direct measurement of the

earths surface in a specific area. In the cases of NAD27 and NAD83,
the area in question is North America.
A complete horizontal datum consists of the following elements:
all of the parameters necessary to define a particular coordinate
system
a set of control points whose geometric relationships are known,
either through measurement or calculation.
For many years, the standard of reference for latitude/longitude
coordinates for North America were the measurements made for
NAD27.
Due to the improvements in measurement equipment and techniques, a
new datum for North America has been determined: NAD83 also
known as WGS84 (World Geodetic Survey of 1984).
Since NAD27 was the reference for over 50 years, there is an enormous
amount of data that will need to be converted to the NAD83 reference.
This is the problem that is now addressed in Release 2.0.

State Plane Units of Measure

Units used by the NAD27 state plane projection system are in U.S. survey feet.
Units used by the NAD83 state plane projection system are in metric units.

If you click either NAD27 or NAD83, a list appears that consists of all
50 states, Samoa, Puerto Rico, the Virgin Islands and the Old and New
regions for Michigan. Select the option you want.

Select Region
A list of regions associated with the selected state appears. Depending
on the state, regions are listed as East, West, North, South, Central, or
by number, such as Region 1, Region 2, and Region 3.

Activate Projection
Select this option to activate the currently defined projection
parameters. These parameters remain in effect until you select the
Deactivate Projection option or reactivate and change the current
projection parameters by reselecting the Activate Projection option.

Deactivate Projection
Select this option to deactivate a projection when you wish to generate
a picture using northing/easting parameters.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Options in the File New Menu 44

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Cross Section

Select File New Cross Section in

the Z-MAP Plus window

Enter new picture name

Determine AOI source

Horizons, baseline AOI from existing picture AOI from user input

Select horizon AOI parameters Select AOI graphics file Enter x,y minimums
and maximums

Select AOI source picture

Select AOI Select AOI baseline file
horizon (grid) files

Select line number

Select grid file on baseline file

Enter values for map offsets and scale

Apply

Save and return to the

Z-MAP Plus window

Cross Section Workflow

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Options in the File New Menu 45

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

To create a new cross section, select File New Cross Section. A

cross section displays the intersection of one or more stacked surfaces
with a vertical plane or several joined vertical planes which are
positioned along a specified baseline. Cross Sections show the spatial
relationship between surfaces and surface variations which might be
overlooked on conventional contour maps. The surfaces displayed come
from grid surfaces that have been generated in the Gridding option. For
example, a cross section can be useful for checking multiple grids to
ensure that they do not overlap.
To create a cross section, you must satisfy two requirements:
Name the cross section.
Specify how to define the area of interest (AOI) or map limits.

Picture Name
Enter the name of the new cross section. You can use a maximum of 24
characters to assign a descriptive and meaningful name. You can
include blanks in the name.

AOI from Horizons, Baseline

Cross sections are made from grids. The grids used for the cross section
as well as the line depicting the cross section coverage, need to be
selected in order for the Area of Interest (AOI) to be calculated.

Horizons (Grid Files)

A cross section can be composed of a maximum of ten horizons. The
horizons are displayed on the cross section based on grid surfaces.
The input grids are used to calculate the AOI when the option executes.

Baseline (Vertex File)

The vertex file should be composed of a set of x,y points in the baseplane
of the input grids, which when connected by line segments, marks the
baseline for the cross section. This baseline is the source for all possible
points where cross-section values must be computed. Closely spaced x,y
points along the baseline are the locations where the surface values are
computed. The baseline can be a single line segment or composed of two
or more line segments which connect a series of points, such as a set of
well locations.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Options in the File New Menu 46

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Line Number
If a file contains more than one line, enter the line number to use as the
baseline.

AOI from Existing Picture

You can define the area of interest (AOI) by finding another cross
section with an appropriate AOI.
You can use this option to define the cross section AOI by using the AOI
of an existing cross section. The ZGF you select is used to build a list of
available pictures you can select. The list of available ZGFs reflects the
ZGFs in the specified ZGFs: Directory Paths (described on page 111).
If the needed ZGF is not listed, check the directory path settings.
In the list of pictures that appears, select a cross section to use for
determining the AOI of the new cross section.

AOI from User Input

Once you have selected the desired horizons, and selected the baseline
to use, select the AOI from User Input option. The program will display
the defaults for the horizontal and vertical axes limits. You may then use
this dialog box to define the maps offsets and the vertical and horizontal
scales.

Horizontal and Vertical Minimums and Maximums

The horizontal axis limits are defaulted as the length of the baseline with
the horizontal minimum set to zero. The vertical axis limits are defaulted
to cover the range of all the Z-values in the selected grids.
To draw the cross section with the same horizontal scale as a contour
map, the horizontal axis scale must be the same as the X and Y scales
used to generate the contour map.
Vertical variation can be exaggerated by making the vertical axis scale
smaller than the horizontal axis scale.

Offsets and Scale

Specify the area above, below, to the left, and to the right of the border
that you want to reserve for map labels and other information.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Options in the File New Menu 47

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Open Menu Options

Use the options in the File Open menu to open these types of files:
Session Open a session file to restore parameter settings from a
previous Z-MAP Plus session or revert to default parameter values
(if you have saved a blank session file).
MFD Open/Close Open (attach) or close (detach) up to four
Master File Directories (MFDs).
ZGF Open/Close Open (attach) a Z-MAP Graphics File
(ZGF). If you attach a ZGF, any ZGF that was previously attached
is automatically detached (closed).
Picture Open Display a list of all maps and cross sections in
the attached ZGF.
SeisWorks Open a horizon file (created in SeisWorks) as a grid.

Session
Select Open Session to display the SELECT Session File dialog box,
which you use to select and open a .ZCLPARM (or .zclparm) file.
Parameter values are reset from the selected file.
The SELECT Session File dialog box contains a list of the previously
created parameter files contained in the directories specified in the
Session tab of the Directory Paths dialog box. If the list is empty, check
the settings in the Directory Paths dialog box, as described on page 112.

MFD Open/Close
You can select MFDs to open or close from a list of the MFDs located
in paths specified by the Directory Paths for Master Files setting. (For
more information about this setting, see Directory Paths on
page 108.)
You can have a maximum of four MFDs attached to a session at a time.
If you select more than four MFDs to attach, only the first four are
attached, and an error statement appears in the system window.

Attach MFDs Icon

Clicking the Attach MFDs icon is equivalent to selecting the MFD Open/
Close menu option. The Attach MFDs icon is located at the top of the
Z-MAP Plus window:

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Open Menu Options 48

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

A scratch file is also attached to each program run. Temporary files

(files that you need for intermediate steps) may be written to the scratch
file, but these files are deleted when the program is stopped. In order for
a file to be saved, it must be written to an MFD or to OpenWorks.
Attached MFDs appear on the list in reverse color. To detach an MFD,
select the highlighted file.

ZGF Open/Close
Select Open Graphics File to attach a graphics file (ZGF) and
automatically detach the currently attached ZGF. The program searches
for all ZGFs in the directories specified by the Directory Paths setting.

Attach ZGFs Icon

Clicking the Attach ZGFs icon is equivalent to selecting the ZGF Open/Close
menu option. The Attach ZGFs icon is located at the top of the Z-MAP Plus
window.

As soon as you select a file, the list disappears and the selected file is
attached. You can attach only one graphics file at a time.

Picture Open
Select Open Picture Open to select a picture (map or cross section)
you want to view and modify. If the picture you want is not listed in the
dialog box that appears, check the status area to verify that the
appropriate ZGF is attached. Once you select a picture, the status area
displays the picture name.

Picture Open Icon

Clicking the Picture Open icon is equivalent to selecting the Picture Open
menu option. The Picture Open icon is located at the top of the Z-MAP Plus
window.

If this is the first time you have selected the File Open
Picture Open option, the Edit and View menus are inactive. Once you
select or create a map or cross section, these menus are activated and no
longer appear dimmed.
If the Tools System Switches Display Picture When Opened
option is set to Yes, the selected map or cross section is drawn
automatically. If not, you must select View Full Display or click the
Full Display icon.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Open Menu Options 49

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

SeisWorks
If you use Z-MAP Plus with OpenWorks, you can import and
automatically grid SeisWorks horizons (.hzd, .hts, or .hzd_glb files) so
they are accessible in Z-MAP Plus.
To open a SeisWorks horizon as a grid in Z-MAP Plus, click the Open
SeisWorks Data icon or select File Open SeisWorks in the
Z-MAP Plus window.
Two dialog boxes are associated with the SeisWorks Open option:
Seismic Project Selection The first dialog box that appears,
which you use to specify the SeisWorks project that contains the
horizons you want to import (next topic).
Import From SeisWorks The follow-up dialog box, which you
use to select the input horizons and specify the output files and
settings (page 86).

Context-Sensitive Help for This Task

Browser-based help (with complete information about the parameter settings)
is available for this operation. To display the browser-based help, perform one
of these actions:
Click the Help button in the Seismic Project Selection dialog box or Transfer
Grid to Seismic dialog box, or
Select the Help Help option and navigate to the topic.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Open Menu Options 50

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Seismic Project Selection Dialog Box

If you click the Open SeisWorks Data icon or select File Open
SeisWorks, the Seismic Project Selection dialog box appears. You use
this dialog box to select the source seismic project, horizon domain, and
target location for the saving the horizon file.

To begin the import process, select a seismic project in the Seismic

Project Selection dialog box by following these steps:
1. Required: In the 3D Seismic Projects or 2D Seismic Projects list,
highlight the name of the seismic project that contains the horizon
file you want to import as a grid.
2. Specify the domain in which the horizon was saved: Select either
the Time or Depth radio button in the Domain area. (The program
does not perform time-to-depth or depth-to-time conversions.)
3. Required: Specify the type of location for saving the new grid by
selecting the MFD or OpenWorks radio button in the Output area.
4. Click OK.
The Seismic Project Selection dialog box closes. The Import From
SeisWorks dialog box appears immediately in either MFD mode
or OpenWorks mode, depending on the specified Output setting.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Open Menu Options 51

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Import from SeisWorks Dialog Box

As soon as you click OK in the Seismic Project Selection dialog box,
the Import From SeisWorks dialog box appearseither in MFD or
OpenWorks mode, depending on the Output setting specified in the
Seismic Project Selection dialog box.

Import From
SeisWorks
dialog box,
configured to
save a horizon to
an MFD and
automatically
generate a grid.

Use the Import from SeisWorks dialog box to specify which horizons to
import, the types of output to create, and the conversion settings.
The Import from SeisWorks dialog box contains three sections:
Horizons next topic
Mapping Files page 57
OpenWorks Output or MFD Output page 58

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Open Menu Options 52

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Horizons Section
The Horizons section of the Import from SeisWorks dialog box contains
the following options:

Select Horizons
Required: Create a list of one or more horizons to import. The seismic
line data in horizon files will be converted and stored in the specified
MFD or in the OpenWorks project as one or more DATA files. A
separate DATA file is created for each selected horizon. (Separate files
may also be created for the various types of output you select.)
Click the Select Horizons: List button and use the Multiple Horizon
Selection dialog box that appears for selecting horizons to importin
much the same way you would select horizons if you were working in
SeisWorks. The Horizon Choices list contains all the horizons in the
selected seismic project. For 3D seismic projects, the listed file types are
.hzd or .hts files. In 2D seismic projects, the listed files are of type
.hzd_glb.
To create a horizon list from scratch, move one or more horizons to the
Horizon Selection list (on the right side of the dialog box) by clicking
horizon names in the Horizon Choices list, then clicking the top arrow
icon between the two lists. The selected horizon names move to the
Horizon Selection list and the values in the counter boxes above both
lists are updated.
To automatically select the horizons in a previously saved list, click the
Open List button. In the Horizon Set File Open dialog box that appears,
complete the following steps:
1. Select a horizon list (.hst) file to use from the list.
2. Select the Append or Replace radio button to specify which items
are highlighted in the Horizon Choices list:
Append Adds the list's horizons to the group of already
highlighted items.
Replace Highlights only the horizons from the list. (Clears
the selection of any already highlighted horizons that are not
on the list.)
The selection mode affects which horizons are highlighted in the
Horizon Choices list. Horizons you have already moved to the list
are unaffected.
To view the contents of a list, highlight it and click the View
button.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Open Menu Options 53

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Selecting Multiple Items You can accumulate a group of items

to move simultaneously by clicking items one at a time. You
cannot use the Control or Shift key to add items to the selected
group. To clear a selection, click a highlighted item. You can move
items to the Horizon Selection list as a group, or build the list
gradually. Items in the Horizon Selection list appear in
alphabetical order.
3. When you finish selecting a list and display mode, click OK.

Searching and Filtering in the List

To restrict the contents of the Horizon Choices list of the Multiple Horizon
Selection dialog box, use the standard Search/Filter String box at the top of
the dialog box. In the string, you can use the wildcards * (all characters), ? (any
single character), and [ ] (multiple terms) as described in the following
examples:
* Searching for test* locates the first horizon name that begins with test.
Filtering for test* restricts the list contents to show only horizon names that
contain the string test. The string test*depth finds horizon names that begin
with test, end with depth, and have any characters in between.
? The string test? will find a horizon named test2, but not one named test22,
because the wildcard ? represents a single character.
[ ] The string test[hrz,HRZ]* finds horizon names that begin with testhrz or
testHRZ.
The string test[a,b.c] finds horizon names that begin with testa, testb, or testc.
The string test* ?hrz *2 finds horizon names that begin with test, end with 2,
or consist of a single character followed by hrz.

Saving the Current List To save the current Horizon Selection list,
click the Save List button. In the Horizon Set File Save dialog box that
appears, enter a new list name or select a list file to overwrite.

How the Converted Data Is Stored

Horizon files contain seismic line data and are stored in the target MFD as
DATA type files. A separate file is created for each horizon. The new DATA files
retain the name of the original horizon with .DAT appended to the end of the file
name. The data file contains the following fields:
X Y Line Name Z Value Shotpoint Number

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Open Menu Options 54

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Converting Large Horizons

Converting a large horizon can be time-consuming (for example, a horizon
interpreted on 1,000 lines). To expedite the operation for an extremely large
horizon, decimate the horizon and convert it to a dataset in SeisWorks before
you import it. To learn how to do this, see the SeisWorks Convert Horizon to
Map Points option described in the SeisWorks/3D Horizon Interpretation
guide.

Line / Trace References and Increments (3D Only)

If you are importing horizons from a 3D project, the Line Reference,
(Line Reference) Increment, Trace Reference, and (Trace Reference)
Increment boxes appear under the Select Horizons: List button.

Line Reference The Line Reference box specifies the number

of the first line to import. (By default, each horizon is imported
from the first line.) To eliminate some lines, use the arrows to
change the value incrementally.
Trace Reference The Trace Reference box specifies the
number of the first trace to import. (By default, each horizon is
imported from the first trace.) To eliminate some traces, use the
arrows to change the value incrementally.
Line Reference: Increment and Trace Reference: Increment
You can use the Increment boxes to thin the seismic data
imported. By default, the Increment values are set at 1, so the data
is not thinned. Use the arrows to adjust the value to the number of
lines or traces you want to omit. For example, if the Line
Reference value sets the import to begin at line 110 and the Line
Reference: Increment value is set to 20, the imported file
contains lines 110, 130, 150, 170, and so on. The other lines are
omitted.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Open Menu Options 55

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Variable Shift and Constant Shift (2D Only)

If you are importing horizons from a 2D project, the Variable Shift and
Constant Shift radio buttons appear under the Select Horizons: List
button.
If you select the Variable Shift radio button, variable shifts are
applied to the horizons before the file is imported.
If you select the Constant Shift radio button, the constant shift
currently active for the seismic project is applied to the horizons
before the file is imported.

Output Options
The lower part of the Horizons section of the Import from SeisWorks
dialog box contains options for specifying the types of output to
generate.

Select all the check boxes that correspond to output types you want to
generate. You must select at least one output type. The output options
are described in the following text:
Output as Control Points and Output ZNONS To generate a
control points file from the horizon data, select the Output as
Control Points check box. To include trace locations for
uninterpreted areas in the horizon, also select the Output ZNONs
check box. You can use this setting to output all the x,y
coordinates of uninterpreted or partially interpreted horizons. All
trace locations are output, so uninterpreted locations are given a
ZNON (null) value.
Generate Grid To create a grid file each imported horizon file,
select the Generate Grid check box. When you click the Apply or
OK button, the system window reports which grids were created.
Output Fault Heaves (Fault Center Lines) To import all the
fault heave files associated with the horizon data, select the
Output Fault Heaves (Fault Center Lines) check box. Fault
heave information is derived from the fault heave entries in the
OpenWorks database and are written to a series of regular
Z-MAP Plus fault files. Each regular fault file contains the heave
information for a specific horizon and is named for the horizon
with a FALT designation.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Open Menu Options 56

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Distinctions Between Heave in SeisWorks and Z-MAP Plus

In SeisWorks, heave is measured along seismic lines instead of perpendicular to
the fault strike, as in Z-MAP Plus. For this reason, heaves from SeisWorks are
always greater than or equal to the actual heave. The throw is always less than
or equal to the vertical separation. If the difference is constant, you can edit the
imported file in the Z-MAP Plus Calculator (accessible by selecting
Operations Calculator).

Mapping Files Section

The Mapping Files section of the Import from SeisWorks dialog box
contains the following options.

Output Fault Segments

To convert the fault segments into a DATA file, select the Output Fault
Segments check box. All the fault segment data in the current project is
imported into a single fileyou cannot select which fault segments to
convert. The format of the output file is:
X Y Z SegmentID Fault Plane Number
All points in a segment share the same ID. All segments assigned to a
given plane have the same fault plane value. Unassigned segments have
a fault plane value of zero (0).

Alternate Method for Importing Faults

You can also convert a fault plane to a horizon in SeisWorks (Faults Convert
Fault to Horizon) before you import it to Z-MAP Plus. This approach enables
you to separate the fault plane data from the sum total of project fault plane data.

Output Points and Fault Polygons

To save mapping file data as control points, shot lines, and fault
polygons, select the Output Points and Fault Polygons check box,
then click the List button. In the Multiple Point and Fault Polygon
Selection dialog box that appears, select one or more mapping files (.dts
files) to import, then click OK.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Open Menu Options 57

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

The contents of a SeisWorks mapping file are separated by data type and
written to three files during the conversion. All three file types are
named after the original .dts file name. For example, if you import a
mapping file named lowsand, the following three Z-MAP Plus files are
generated:

New File Extension File Type File Format

.dtsCpnt control points X, Y, Z
.dtsShot shot lines X, Y, Z, Line Name
.dtsFalt fault polygon X, Y, SegID

Shot point numbers are not imported, but you can use shot lines files to
perform line gridding or to post lines on basemaps.
Output Manual Contours
To import data from SeisWorks manual contour files (.mcf) into a
Z-MAP Plus CNTR file, select the Output Manual Contours check
box and click the List button.

MFD Output Section

If you displayed the Import from SeisWorks dialog box in MFD mode,
the dialog box contains an MFD Output section, which has the following
options.

Flip Z Values (Simulate TVDSS) To multiply positive time

values by -1, select the Flip Z Values (Simulate TVDSS) check
box. This operation does not convert time to depth, but flips time
values so they have negative values that simulate true vertical
depth subsea values.
Output MFD The name on the Output MFD button specifies
which attached MFD is used for storing the imported file(s). To
change this value, click the Output MFD button, and select an
option from the drop-down list. The list contains the scratch file
and all the attached MFDs.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Open Menu Options 58

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

OpenWorks Output Section

If you display the Import from SeisWorks dialog box in OpenWorks
mode, the dialog box contains an OpenWorks Output section, which has
the following options.

Flip Z Values (Simulate TVDSS) Select this radio button to

multiply positive time values by -1. This operation does not
convert time to depth, but flips time values so they have negative
values that simulate true vertical depth subsea values.
Geo Type To specify a Geo Type for the output, click the
Geo Type button and choose a value from the drop-down list. The
list contains all the Geo Types associated with the current
OpenWorks project. The Geo Type is typically a geologic
characterization, such as STRAT UNIT (stratigraphic unit).
Geo Name Use the Geo Name box to specify a geo name value
for the imported data. To enter one of the standard values, click the
Geo Name button and select one of the standard values from the
drop-down list. To use a custom value, highlight or double-click
the default value (UNKNOWN) and enter a value from the
keyboard. In OpenWorks, the geo name refers to a geological unit.
Depth Type Displays the currently specified depth type
either measured depth (MD) or simulated true vertical depth
subsea. You cannot change the Depth Type value directly. To
change this value, select or clear the Flip Z Values radio button.
Depth Units Displays the depth units setting specified for the
OpenWorks project. You cannot change the Depth Units value
directly.
Grid Name If you select the Generate Grid check box, the
Grid Name box becomes active, enabling you to specify a name
for grids you create from the imported data. The default name is
UNKNOWN. To overwrite an existing name, click the Down arrow
and select a name from the drop-down list. To specify a unique
name, edit the name displayed in the Grid Name box. The Grid
Name list contains all the grids in the current OpenWorks project.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Open Menu Options 59

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Using the File Manager

Use the File Manager to cut, copy, paste, move, delete, and rename
MFD member files, ZGF pictures, systems files, and OpenWorks files.
You can also compress and rename MFDs and ZGFs in this dialog box.
To display the Z-MAP Plus File Manager dialog box, select File
Manager in the Z-MAP Plus window or click the File Manager icon.

Icon bar
Tabs

File Listing
pane
Directory
pane

File Detail
pane

Pane size
controls

Buttons

In the File Manager, you can easily manage almost every type of file you
create in Z-MAP Plus. Macro files (.ZCLMAC files) are the exception.
You can use File Manager to manipulate the following file types:
OpenWorks, MFDs, ZGFs, .FMT, .TBL, .ZEQ, and DATA files.
The remainder of this topic describes the components of the
Z-MAP Plus File Manager dialog box. For detailed information about
File Manager operations and tabs, use the context-sensitive help system
accessible by clicking the Help button in the Z-MAP Plus File Manager
dialog box.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Using the File Manager 60

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Working with File Manager

The Z-MAP Plus File Manager dialog box contains the following
elements:
Icon toolbar (top) Click an icon to immediately execute actions
(Cut, Copy, Paste, Delete, and Compress) or display a dialog box for
executing actions (Rename MFD and Rename Field). Options are
context-specific, and appear dimmed if they are unavailable. To activate
icons, choose a tab and highlight a directory or MFD name in the left
pane or a file name in the right pane.
Directory Pane (left) View the currently accessible directories or
MFDs. Depending on the tab displayed, the directories reflect the top
level of the current OpenWorks project, scratch file, attached MFDs,
ZGFs contained in the attached MFDs, or system files. If you select an
MFD or a directory below the upper-level directory, the component files
appear in the File Listing pane (in the upper right section of the dialog
box).
File Listing Pane (upper right) View the names of the files or
pictures in the directory or MFD that is currently selected in the
Directory pane.
File Detail Pane (lower right) View details about the file currently
selected in the File Listing pane (except for system files, which display
no information). For example, use this pane to view information about
a files range or size.
Close Button Close the Z-MAP Plus File Manager dialog box.
Help Button Display the browser-based help window, with the home
File Manager topic shown as the entry point to the help system.

Warning: Immediate Command Execution

Be careful when you perform operations in the File Manager.
The Z-MAP Plus File Manager dialog box does not contain an OK or Apply
buttonalmost all commands execute immediately. The exceptions are
Rename MFD and Rename Field, which display dialog boxes for completing
their operations.
For example, if you delete a picture from a ZGF in the File Manager, the picture
is immediately removed from the file system. You cannot automatically undo
the deletion; and you can no longer access the deleted picture.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Using the File Manager 61

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

File Manager Icons

The Z-MAP Plus File Manager dialog box contains several shortcut
icons for executing operations quickly. The icons are
context-sensitivethey are active only if the operation is appropriate to
the current context. Active, available icons are clear-looking (as shown
below). Inactive icons are dimmed.

Rename MFD/ZGF Cut Delete

Compress MFD/ZGF Rename File/ Copy
Paste (shown in
Picture inactive state)

If you position the cursor over an icon, its name appears. All the icons
have counterpart options in MB3 menus.

How the Cut, Copy, and Paste Operations Work Together

The Paste icon becomes active only after you perform a Cut or Copy operation.
In fact, the Cut and Copy operations are not executed until the Paste operation
is performed. Once you click the Paste icon after performing a Cut, the file
disappears from its original location. If you select another file in the File Listing
pane after you perform a Cut or Copy operation and the follow-up Paste
operation, the Cut or Copy operation is canceled. File Manager has no
"clipboard" storage.
You can paste files into a ZGF or MFD only if you have write access to the file.
If the ZGF or MFD is read-only, you can see and attach the file, but you cannot
add any data to it.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Using the File Manager 62

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Other Ways to Execute Commands in the File Manager

Mouse Button Three (MB3) Menu Commands

Icon operations are also accessible through MB3 menu options. As with
the shortcut icons, MB3 options are context-sensitive, so only the
options appropriate to the current tab and context are available. The
following example shows the options available if you click MB3 in the
File Listing tab. (The Paste option is inactive in this example.)

MB3 menu for the File Listing tab

Selecting Multiple Files in the File Listing Pane

In the File Listing pane, you can select multiple files to cut, copy, paste,
or delete as a group.
To select a single file Click the row that contains the file name.
To select a group of noncontiguous files Press <CTRL> as you
select file names.
To select a group of contiguous files Click the first row in the
selected range of rows, then press <Shift> as you click the last row in
the range.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Using the File Manager 63

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Drag-and-Drop
Use drag-and-drop to move or copy files from the File Listing pane to
the directory tree. You can drag-and-drop the following file types to
these locations:
MFD component files to a different MFD, or
A selected picture to a different ZGF.

Limitations on Drag-and-Drop Operations

The following limitations apply to drag-and-drop operations:
You cannot drag-and-drop files into OpenWorks.
You cannot move or copy data into an inappropriate directory type. For
example, you cannot copy or paste a picture into an MFD.
You cannot drag files into a read-only ZGF or MFD.

To drag-and-drop files in the File Manager, follow these steps:

1. Select the MFDs or ZGfs tab in the Z-MAP Plus File Manager
dialog box. The selected tab appears in front.
2. In the Directory pane (at the left), select an MFD or ZGF. The
selected MFD or ZGFs contents appear at the upper right.
3. In the File Listing pane (upper right corner of the dialog box),
highlight the names of the items you want to move or copy.
4. Perform one of these actions:
Moving Position the cursor over the highlighted item(s),
press MB1, and drag to the target MFD or ZGF in the
Directory pane. In move mode, the cursor appears as an arrow.
Copying Drag the item(s) as you would for moving, but
hold down the Control key as you drag. In copy mode, the
cursor appears as a rectangle with a + (plus symbol) above it.
5. When you reach the target ZGF or MFD icon, drop the item(s) by
releasing the mouse button (and the Control key, if you are
dragging in copy mode).

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Using the File Manager 64

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Directory Pane
The Directory pane is the tree display at the left side of the Z-MAP Plus
File Manager dialog box. The Directory pane display changes as you
switch tabs, to display the related objects at the highest level of the file
system.
If you select an icon in the Directory pane, the items contents are listed
in the File Listing pane at the dialog boxs upper right.
The following table describes the contents of the Directory pane for each
tab:

Tab Directory Pane Contents

OpenWorks When you first select the OpenWorks tab, the tree is collapsed and
only the current project folder icon is visible. If you select the
project folder icon, the tree expands to show the project
subdirectories. To display the contents of a subdirectory in the File
Listing pane, select the subdirectory folder icon. (For example,
subdirectory contents may include faults, grids, contour sets,
control points, polylines, deviated wells, and lattices.)

MFD Each attached MFD is represented by a folder icon. To display the

MFDs contents in the File Listing pane, select the MFD icon.

ZGF All ZGFs in the defined directory paths are listed (not just the
currently attached ZGF). Each ZGF is represented by a folder
icon. To display a ZGFs pictures in the File Listing pane, select
the ZGF icon.

System All directories that contain system-generated files are displayed.

This list of directories is derived from the File Directory Paths
setting. To display the system files in a directory, in the File
Listing pane, select the system directory icon.

If you select an MFD or ZGF in the Directory pane, the Compress and
Rename MFD/ZGF icons become active, enabling you to display a
dialog box for compressing or renaming a selected MFD or ZGF.

Compressing Files from the File Menu

You can also display the dialog box for compressing an MFD or ZGF by
selecting an option in the File Compress menu (as described starting on
page 154).

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Using the File Manager 65

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

File Listing Pane

The horizontal pane at the upper right displays the file names from the
active directory selected in the Directory pane. If the ZGF tab is
selected, the File Listing pane displays the names of the ZGFs pictures.
If the OpenWorks tab is selected and you select a subdirectory, the
subdireectorys component files are listed. Each row in the File Listing
pane represents information about a single file or picture.
Column headings change depending on the type of directory displayed.
For example, column headings for MFDs are: Name, Type, Size, and
Date. The following example detail show the column headings for ZGF
picture files:

To select a file or picture in this pane, click the row once with MB1.
Triangle Map is the selected picture in the sample above. When you
have selected an OpenWorks, ZGF or MFD, the File Detail pane
becomes active and displays information about the selected file or
picture. The Rename File, Cut, Copy, Paste (after a Cut or Copy
operation), and Delete icons also become active when a file is selected
in this pane.

Sort File Lists

You can sort any of these file lists by the column headings. Each column
heading is on a toggle button. Click the column heading button you want
to use to sort and the information is rearranged in either descending or
ascending order.
OpenWorks files are initially displayed in the order set by using the
Tools OW Sort Order option.

Resize Columns in File Listing

You can resize the column widths in the File Listing dialog box by
clicking MB2 on the boundary line between the columns and dragging
the boundary line. To resize columns, the cursor must be located over
table boundary lines, not column heading boundary lines.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Using the File Manager 66

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

File Detail Pane

The horizontal bottom right pane is called the File Detail pane. The File
Detail pane displays useful information about the file or picture that is
highlighted in the File Listing pane. The type of information in the File
Detail pane varies depending on the type of file currently selected. The
following example shows the information for the Triangle Map picture.
:

The File Detail pane is inactive if you select a system file.

Resizing Panes
Resize To resize the height of the panes in the Z-MAP Plus File Manager dialog box,
icon use the small square Resize icon between the panes. Drag the Resize icon up or
down with any mouse button until the panes are the appropriate height.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Using the File Manager 67

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Save Session As Command

To save the current parameter values to a session file (parameter file),
select File Save Session As. The SAVE Session to Session File
dialog box appears.

Saving Parameters to a Session File

In the SAVE Session to Session File dialog box, specify a name for the
parameter file in the Enter New Project Session File Name box. If you
use an existing file name, the original file is overwritten.
Once you save a session file, the next time you select File New
Open Session to display the SELECT Session File dialog box, the
session file name appears in the list. If you select the saved session file,
the parameter settings from the saved session are restored.

Important Facts About Session File Extensions

Parameter files have the extension .ZCLPARMS. (You can use all capitals or
all lower case letters for the extension, but not mixed case.) If you do not add
the extension, the program adds .ZCLPARMS automatically when you click
OK.
If you enter a non-standard extension, a warning message appears in the
system window (similar to the following example).
BRINKLEY.XYZ - HAS A NON-STANDARD EXTENSION
FILE HAS BEEN NAMED: - BRINKLEY.XYZ.ZCLPARMS
In this situation, the file is saved as renamed on most systems.
You can load a parameter file only if it has a .ZCLPARMS or .zclparms
extension. Otherwise, the file is not included n the SELECT Session File list.
If you use an existing file name (for example, Brinkley.ZCLPARMS) and
specify the extension in the opposite case (for example, Brinkley.zclparms),
the original file is not overwritten. A copy of the file is saved with the
specified extension.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Save Session As Command 68

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Location for Saving Session Files

The session file is saved by default in the directory specified as the
output path in the Session tab of the Directory Paths dialog box. If no
output path session files is specified, the session file is saved in your
home directory (the directory you used to start Z-MAP Plus).
You can specify a custom location by entering a fully qualified file
name, as shown in the following example:
/me/prj1/w_texas/BRINKLEY.ZCLPARMS
or specify a location starting from your home directory, as shown in this
example:
ProjMapping/BRINKLEY.ZCLPARMS
(In this example, the session file is saved in the ProjMapping directory
located under your home directory.)

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Save Session As Command 69

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Save As Command
You can use the File Save As options to save Z-MAP Plus data in
disk filesmaking the data accessible in other Landmark programs.
The Save As options are:
ASCII (Export) Copies data from a component file in an MFD
to an ASCII file (next topic).
CPS-1 File Copies the contents of one internal file in an MFD
to a CPS Save file. CPS Save files are binary files that you can use
with the CPS-1 mapping program (page 73).
ZGF Flat File Copies the contents of a ZGF to a formatted
ASCII file (page 74).
SeisWorks File Saves one or more grids as SeisWorks horizon
file(s) (page 85). (Corresponds to the Save to SeisWorks icon.)

ASCII (Export)
Use the ASCII (Export) option to save a file from an attached MFD as
a formatted ASCII file. You most often use this option to make data
available for import to other programs, but you can also use it to convert
data between file types. (In most cases, however, you can perform
file-type conversions by using the Operations File Conversion
option.)
You have a choice of formats for the output file: Use either a previously
created format or automatically generated formats (derived from the
formats of the source file fields). You can also automatically create
formats for grids. Additionally, you can include a format description
header at the top of the output file. Files created with automatically
generated formats and introductory format description headers can be
re-imported into Z-MAP Plus in their original form.
To use the ASCII (Export) option as the first step in converting data
between file types, use the default values to create the export file and
include a format description header at the top of the file. Edit the file
type specified in the header and use the edited format to import the file.
(For more information, see Appendix E. Import/Export on page 827.)

File
From the list of files that appears, select a file to transfer to a formatted
disk files. You can export any file stored in an MFD.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Save As Command 70

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Format File
A list of formatted disk (ASCII) files whose names end with .FMT or
.fmt appears.

Definition of Terms: Format File and Format Name

Format is a description of a particular dataset. This description can be placed at
the top of a data file in a format group, or in a format file. The format consists
of a set of parameters, some of which describe the general nature of the data file
(File Description Parameters), and others which describe each field of the data
file (Field Description Parameters).
A format file is a disk file which contains one or more formats. Each of these
formats is identified by a format name.
A format name can be a maximum of 40 alphanumeric characters long. Names
may need to be long if the format file contains multiple formats. Each format
description needs a unique format name. The format name identifies which
format you want to use in a format file. If you assign an existing format name
and give it to a new format description, the newly named format overwrites the
existing format in the format file.

The format file is a standard text file consisting of one or more formats.
A format is a series of lines describing what is to be exported and in what
format. Each field that is to be output is described in the format. To learn
more about the format (format group in ZCL), see Appendix E. Import/
Export on page 827 or Import on page 116. You do not need a
format file to export a Z-MAP Plus file. The format can be created
automatically.
If your format file is not listed, make sure the Format tab of the
Directory Paths dialog box points to its location.

Format Name
From the list of formats that appears, select the format that defines the
the output file and the fields included in the file.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Save As Command 71

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Output Name & ID Characters

This option allows you to specify the name of the file to be exported,
whether format information is placed on top of that file, and what
characters are used in that format.
The group ID or format ID character is used to define the beginning and
end of the format information that goes on top of the output file when
Header is selected.

Output Disk File Name

Enter the name of the formatted disk (ASCII) output file. The fully
qualified name (full path terminated by the file name and extension) can
be a maximum of 79 characters long, cannot contain blank spaces, and
should follow the conventions appropriate for a text file created with
your operating system.
If you do not enter the full destination path, the file is written to the
Directory Output Path for Data Files. The default location is the
directory you were in when you started Z-MAP Plus. If you do not enter
an extension, the program adds the .DAT extension when it creates the
file. (For example, if you enter the file name LISTING, the name is
changed to LISTING.DAT.)

Include Information Header on File

Controls whether a format is placed on top of the output file. The format
can be automatically created using information in the file to be exported
or can be selected from a file of previously created formats (*.fmt or
*.FMT).
Since this format contains all information about the file and its columns
of values, it is commonly referred to as an Information Header. Also
since this is a format it can be used by the Import option to import this
or any other file having similar form. Possible choices for this parameter
include:
Header (default value) Place the format used to export the file
on top of the output file.
No Header Do not place the format on top of the output file.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Save As Command 72

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Group ID Character
The group ID or format ID character is used to define the beginning and
end of the format information that goes on top of the output file when
Header is selected. The default character is @.
For a discussion of what formats and the group ID character are, see
Appendix E. Import/Export on page 827 or Import on page 116.

Comment ID Character
The comment ID character is used to identify lines of text that are treated
as comments if the header format is used to import a file. The default
character is !. When the header format is generated automatically,
comments describing the date and time and file from which it was
created are output to the header. If an existing format is used, whatever
comments it contains are output to the header.
For a discussion of what formats and the comment ID character are, see
Appendix E. Import/Export on page 827 or Import on page 116.

History ID Character
The history ID character is used to identify lines of text that are stored
as history information if the header format is used to import a file. When
the format is generated automatically, no lines of history are output to
the header. If an existing format is used, whatever history information it
contains is output to the header. The default character is +.
For a discussion of what formats and the history ID character are, see
Appendix E. Import/Export on page 827 or Import on page 116.

CPS-1 File
Use the CPS-1 File option to execute the EXPORT-CPS-FILE macro.
This macro exports a member file from an MFD to a CPS SAVE file.
You can export an original or extended file.
For more information about this macro, see the Help
Online Manuals Macros Manual EXPORT-CPS-FILE or
the Macro Reference Manual for Z-MAP Plus / ZCL.

Macro Name EXPORT-CPS-FILE

Macro Type .ZCLMAC

Purpose This macro exports a member file out of an MFD to a CPS SAVE file.
You can export an original file or an extended file.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Save As Command 73

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Description As input, you must specify a member file of the type GRID, DATA,
VERT, FALT, or CNTR.

Results A CPS SAVE file on the requested file name

ZGF Flat File

You can use the ZGF Flat File option to save ZGF information as a flat
ASCII file. To do this, this option executes the EXPORT-ZGF-FILE
macro. The rest of this topic explains the format of the ASCII file.

ASCII File Format for ZGFs

This topic describes the specified interchange format for records, as well
as the overall file format, of the ASCII file that describes a ZGF.
Output from the ZGF to ASCII file transfer process is always in plotter
units. Each record is 100 bytes long, with a fixed format. Command
records have a $ in column 1, followed by the record type in columns 2
and 3, and command-dependent data in the remainder of the record.
Non-command records supply additional data for the command
immediately preceding them. They have no constant information and
are identified solely by their column number in the file. Non-command
records occupy columns 1100, with more specific column assignments
for each field. See Non-Command Records on page 84.

Command Record Types

There are 25 command record types that can be divided into four
categories:
header
group
primitive
modal
Unless otherwise specified, all angles are in decimal degrees from the
positive x axis; all x and y are in drawing units ($DU, either REAL or
PLOT); heights and line parameters are in plot units.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Save As Command 74

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Header Record
Each picture has a header record. ZGF flat files have 16 types of header
records, described in the following table.

Record
Column Format Description
Type

$AX 13 A3 $AX axes

410 A7 unused
1125 F15.0 semi-major axis
2630 F15.0 semi-minor axis

$BN 13 A3 $BN boundary

410 A7 boundary type; one of:
GEO lat/long
BNDING rectilinear
1120 F10.0 minimum latitude
2130 F10.0 minimum latitude
3140 F10.0 maximum latitude
4150 F10.0 maximum longitude
5160 F10.0 minimum x
6170 F10.0 minimum y
7180 F10.0 maximum x
8190 F10.0 maximum y
9194 I4 projection system zone

$CL 13 A3 $CL cut line

410 A7 unused
1120 F10.0 left offset; distance in plot units of the left cut
line from the minimum x
2130 F10.0
right offset; distance in plot units of the right
3140 F10.0 cut line from the maximum x
bottom offset; distance in plot units of the
4150 F10.0 bottom cut line from the minimum y
top offset; distance in plot units of the top cut
line from the maximum y

$CO 13 A3 $CO constants

410 A7 unused
1120 F10.0 standard parallel (least)
2130 F10.0 standard parallel (greatest)
3140 F10.0 reference latitude
4150 F10.0 scale factor along reference latitude
5160 F10.0 reference longitude
6170 F10.0 scale factor along reference longitude
7180 F10.0 false easting
8190 F10.0 false northing

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Save As Command 75

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Record
Column Format Description
Type

$DM 13 A3 $DM dimension

4 I1 number of dimensions for plot; for now 2
(two-dimensional) is the only valid
number

$DU 13 A3 $DU drawing units; coordinate system, one

of:
REAL (see real units, $RU)
PLOT (see plot units, $PU)

$GR 13 A3 $GR grid

4100 A97 type of grid, one of:
UTM projection (see $PR) must be
TRANSVERSE MERCATOR
STATE PLANE
USER

$OR 13 A3 $OR map origin

410 A7 unused
1120 F10.0 x in real units
2130 F10.0
y in real units

$PN 13 A3 $PN picture name, for example, start a new

picture. Must be first record of each picture,
with other header records as subgroups
4100 A97 name of picture

$PR 13 A3 $PR projection

4100 A97 projection type, one of:
ALBERS EQUAL AREA
AMERICAN POLYCONIC
AZIMUTHAL GNOMONIC
AZIMUTHAL ORTHOGRAPHIC
AZIMUTHAL STEREOGRAPHIC
BIPOLAR OBLIQUE CONIC CONFORMAL
CASSINI-SOLDNER
SINGLE PARALLEL LAMBERT
DOUBLE PARALLEL LAMBERT
MODIFIED POLYCONIC
NEW ZEALAND MAP GRID
GENERAL TRANSVERSE MERCATOR
OBLIQUE TRANSVERSE MERCATOR
STANDARD MERCATOR
UNIVERSAL TRANSVERSE MERCATOR
VAN DER GRINTEN I

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Save As Command 76

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Record
Column Format Description
Type

$PU 13 A3 $PU plot units

45 A2 plot units, one of:
IN inches
MM millimeters
CM centimeters
M meters

$RO 13 A3 $RO rotation

410 A7 unused
1120 F10.0 rotation angle. For now, this value is always
0.0.

$RU 13 A3 $RU real units

45 A2 real units for projected coordinates, one of:
IN inches
FT feet
YD yards
MI miles
NM nautical miles
M meters
KM kilometers
US user-supplied
620 F15.0 units factor, units per meter

$SC 13 A3 $SC scale

410 A7 unused
1120 F10.0 scale, absolute ratio between real and plot
coordinates, ignoring units

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Save As Command 77

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Record
Column Format Description
Type

$SH 13 A3 $SH spheroid

4100 A97 spheroid type, one of:
USER-DEFINED
AIRY 1858
AUSTRALIAN NATIONAL
BESSEL 1841
CLARKE 1858
CLARKE 1866
CLARKE 1880
EVEREST 1830
FISCHER 1960
FISCHER 1968
GHANA NATIONAL
GRS-80
HAYFORD 1909
HELMERT
HOUGH 1956
INTERNATIONAL
IUGG 1967
IUGG 1975
KAULA 1961
KRASSOVSKY 1940
MALAYAN EVEREST 1830
MERCURY
MERCURY MODIFIED
SOUTH AMERICAN 1969
WGS-72 1972
WGS-84

$ZN 13 A3 $ZN zone, only needed when $GR (grid) is

UTM or STATE PLANE
4100 A97 projection system zone

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Save As Command 78

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Group Record
Group records mark the start of a particular category of records (for
example, contours and well data). The next occurrence of a group record
closes the previous group, so groups cannot be nested. The three types
of group records are described in the following table.

Record
Column Format Description
Type

$CR 13 A3 $CR contour

45 A2 unused
610 A5 contour type. For now, this is always ZYCOR.

$WL 13 A3 $WL well data

410 A7 unused
1118 A7 well type, one of:
DEVIATED (two $SY symbols in group)
BOTTOM (one $SY symbol in group)

$GE 13 A3 $GE generic; anything that is not contour or

well data

Primitive Record
Primitive records are used to describe information about four types of
graphics features. Graphics primitive records contain information about
hidden tags, including LGB type codes, lines, symbols, and text. Each
of the four primitive record types is explained in the following table.

Record
Column Format Description
Type

$HT 13 A3 $HT hidden tag; used for various types of

information, including LGB type codes; can
be followed by continuation records number of
46 I3 characters; if more than 94, the string
continues in column 1 of the next record
7100 A94 alphanumeric string

$PL 13 A3 $PL polyline; contains point strings for line

drawing; can be followed by point records C if
4 A1 this polyline is a continuation of the previous
line; otherwise, blank unused count of the
510 A6 number of points following on point records
1120 I10

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Save As Command 79

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Record
Column Format Description
Type

$SY 13 A3 $SY symbol drawing information

49 I6 symbol code
10 unused
1120 F10.0
2130 F10.0 x location
3140 F10.0 y location
4150 F10.0 unused
5160 F10.0 angle; always 0.0
height

$T 13 A3 $T text drawing information; can be

followed by continuation records containing
more characters, number of characters; if >60,
46 I3 the string continues in column 1 of the next
record (a continuation record)
unused
710 A3 x location
1120 F10.0
2130 F10.0 y location
3140 F10.0 unused
41100 A60 text

Special $HT records store information for these types of data:

color table
text color
line color
marker (symbol) color
polygon fill color
colorfilled polygon
clipping window
These records are explained in the following topic.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Save As Command 80

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Color Table
Immediately following the picture name record is a $HT record that
defines the color representation table.
$HT 30 NO COLOR TABLE shows that the picture has no color
representation table associated with it.
$HT994 COLOR TABLE precedes records that contain integer
codes for the color representation table. The integer codes can be
decoded into floating point RGB values by the following method:
%Blue = (ICODE/1048576) / 1023
%Green = (MOD(ICODE/1024), 1024) / 1023
%Red = (MOD(ICODE,1024)) / 1023
The color codes can be read with the FORTRAN format
((9(8I12/1,/) starting on the first line following the $HT record.

Codes for Controlling Color

You can control the colors assigned to an individual graphic element on
a ZGF picture by editing color indices for that particular element. The
following table contains information about the color code, purpose, and
FORTRAN format for graphic elements.

Graphic
Code Changes
Element

Text $HT 30ZGTSTC Changes the color of all text until you
enter another color index for the graphic
element.

Line $HT 30ZGTSLC Changes the color for all lines until you
enter another color index for this graphic
element.

Marker/Symbol $HT 30ZGTSMC Changes the color of symbols until you

enter another color index for the graphic
element.

Polygon Fill $HT 30ZGTSFC Changes the color of polygon area. Used
in conjunction with the code identifying
each of the polygons present on the ZGF
picture.

For each of the four elements in the table above, the FORTRAN format
is 1x,13.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Save As Command 81

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Colorfilled Polygon
This color code identifies the polygon whose index is being set. It has
the following format:
$HTNNNZGTCUL
where NNN is an integer from 1 to 999 that represents a colorfilled
polygon. It is read with the following FORTRAN format, where
ICOLOR is the color index. NPTS is the number of vertices on the
polygon, and ZMIN and ZMAX are not used.
READ (LTEMP, 750) ICOLOR, ZMIN, ZMAX, NPTS
750 FORMAT (20X, I10, 2F15.5, 7X, I3)
The polygon vertices following are read with the format (10F10.0).
Each hidden tag can have a maximum of 40 points stored. Larger
polygons are stored in a series of $HT groups.

Clipping Window
This code determines whether the posted graphics on the ZGF picture
are clipped. You can use this code to limit posted graphics to a given
areafor example, to keep contours inside the map border or to limit
posted border labels to a small area outside the map border. The code
has the following format:
$HTNNNZGTWND
where NNN is an integer from 1 to 999 that flags the activated or
deactivated status of a clipping window for posted graphics. It is read
with the following FORTRAN format:
READ(LTEMP,210)MODE, NUMVTX, IPLOT
210 FORMAT (14X, I1, 1X, I15, 1X, I10)
READ(LTEMP,230)(XCORS(I),YCORS(I),I=ISTART,IEND)
230 FORMAT (14X, 8F10.0)

MODE value += 1 to activate the clipping window, with no

drawing outside the window, or 0 to deactivate the current window.
NUMVTX is the number of vertices in the clipping window. For the
current applications, this value is always 2. The two vertices
represent two corners of a rectangular clipping window. All
graphics are clipped to this window as long as it is active.
IPLOT is not currently used and can be ignored.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Save As Command 82

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Modal Record
Modal records set parameters for lines or text, as described in the
following table.

Record
Column Format Description
Type

$LF 13 A3 $LF line parameters

49 A6 line type, one of:
DASH use columns 2150
HASH use columns 2140
SOLID
10 A1 S if the next record is a symbol record ($SY),
giving the symbol to spot at every data point
(with joining lines between); otherwise, blank
1120 F10.0
line weight, in plot units; one of:
1/200 (regular)
2/200 (bold)

2130 F10.0 hash length, in plot units

3140 F10.0 hash spacing, in plot units
4150 A10 hash direction, one of:
LEFT
RIGHT

2130 F10.0 length of dash, in plot units

3140 F10.0 length of space, in plot units

$TX 14 A3 $TX text parameters

56 A7 unused
726 A7 font, one of:
ZYCOR PLAIN
ROMAN SIMPLEX
ROMAN COMPLEX
ITALICS
DUPLEX
27 A1
justification, one of:
L left
R right
2830 A3 C center
3140 F10.0 unused
4150 F10.0 angle
height

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Save As Command 83

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Non-Command Records
Two types of records are not commands: continuation and point records.
A continuation record can only occur immediately following a hidden
tag ($HT), text ($T), or another continuation record. It is FORTRAN
format A100 and uses columns 1100.
A point record can occur only immediately after a hidden tag ($HT), text
($T), or continuation record, and follows this format:

Descriptio
Column Format
n

110 F10.0 first x

1120 F10.0 first y
2130 F10.0 second x
3140 F10.0 second y
4150 F10.0 third x
5160 F10.0 third y
6170 F10.0 fourth x
7180 F10.0 fourth y
8190 F10.0 fifth x
91100 F10.0 fifth y

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Save As Command 84

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

SeisWorks File
If you run Z-MAP Plus with OpenWorks, you can save grids as horizons
for use in SeisWorks. To begin this operation, click the Save to
SeisWorks icon or select Save As SeisWorks File in the
Z-MAP Plus window.
To complete this operation, you use the following two dialog boxes:
Seismic Project Selection (next topic)
Transfer Grid to Seismic (page 86)

Context-Sensitive Help for This Task

Browser-based help (with complete information about the parameter settings)
is available for this operation. To display the browser-based help, perform one
of these actions:
Click the Help button in the Seismic Project Selection dialog box or Transfer
Grid to Seismic dialog box, or
Select the Help Help option and navigate to the topic.

Seismic Project Selection Dialog Box

If you click the Save to SeisWorks icon or select Save As
SeisWorks File in the Z-MAP Plus window, the Seismic Project
Selection dialog box appears.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Save As Command 85

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

1. Required: In the 3D Seismic Projects list or 2D Seismic Projects

list, highlight the name of the seismic project to use as the
destination for the horizon file. You must make a selection in one
of these lists.
2. Domain Select the Time or Depth radio button to designate
whether the OpenWorks project data is saved in the time or depth
domain. (Z-MAP Plus does not perform any time-to-depth or
depth-to-time conversions.)
3. Output Select the OpenWorks or MFD radio button to
designate whether to save the output in the current OpenWorks
project or in an MFD (which you specify later). (The option you
select determines whether the follow-up dialog box appears in
MFD or OpenWorks mode.)
4. Click OK to save the settings, close the dialog box, and display the
follow-up dialog box the Transfer Grid to Seismic dialog box.

Transfer Grid to Seismic Dialog Box

The Transfer Grid to Seismic dialog box appears automatically when
you click OK in the Seismic Project Selection dialog box. The Transfer
Grid to Seismic dialog box contains two sections:
Grid Selection
Horizon Specification

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Save As Command 86

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Grid Selection
Grid Required: Specify the name of the source grid to convert to a
horizon. Click the Grid: Select button to display a list of grids in
currently attached MFDs or in the current OpenWorks project.
Highlight the name of the grid you want to convert. The dialog box
closes immediately. You return to the Transfer Grid to Seismic dialog
box, which displays the name of the selected grid file in the Grid box.
Fault To include the data from a fault file associated with the target
grid, click the Fault: Select button. Use the Select A Fault File dialog
box that appears for specifying the fault file. The Select A Fault File
dialog box displays a list of all the faults in the attached MFDs and in
the OpenWorks project. Highlight the name of the associated fault
whose data you want to include. The dialog box closes immediately.
You return to the Transfer Grid to Seismic dialog box, which displays
the name of the selected fault file in the Fault box.

Horizon Specification Pane

Reference Datum Shift You can edit the Reference Datum
Shift value to shift the datum point for the horizon you are about to
create. Shifting the datum for the entire grid before you convert the
horizon saves a lot of time. The value you specify in the Reference
Datum Shift box is added to every node value in the grid.
If you enter a Reference Datum Shift value, remember which
domain (time or depth) the grid is in, or you may encounter
problems in the output horizon file. No unit conversion is
performed (such as feet-to-meters or seconds-to-milliseconds).
Flip Z Values (Simulate TVDSS) To simulate true vertical
depth subsea values, select the Flip Z Values (Simulate TVDSS)
check box. This sets the program to multiply positive values by -1.
This operation does not actually convert time to depthit flips
the time values by giving them a negative value.
Horizon Required: Specify the name of the new horizon or use
the default name (Exported_Grid.) To specify a custom name,
enter a name directly in the Horizon box or click the Horizon:
Select button and select an existing file name from the Select A
Horizon Name dialog box that appears. In the dialog box, you can
select an existing file name to overwrite, or select a name, then edit
it. Once you click OK in the Select A Horizon Name dialog box,
the dialog box closes and the specified name appears in the
Horizon box.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Save As Command 87

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Searching and Filtering in the List

To restrict the contents of the horizon list of the Select A Horizon Name dialog
box, use the standard Search/Filter String box at the top of the dialog box. In
the string, you can use the wildcards * (all characters), ? (any single character),
and [ ] (multiple terms) as described in the following examples:
* Searching for test* locates the first horizon name that begins with test.
Filtering for test* restricts the list contents to show only horizon names that
contain the string test. The string test*depth finds horizon names that begin
with test, end with depth, and have any characters in between.
? The string test? will find a horizon named test2, but not one named test22,
because the wildcard ? represents a single character.
[ ] The string test[hrz,HRZ]* finds horizon names that begin with testhrz or
testHRZ.
The string test[a,b.c] finds horizon names that begin with testa, testb, or testc.
The string test* ?hrz *2 finds horizon names that begin with test, end with 2,
or consist of a single character followed by hrz.

When you finish specifying the source grid name, target horizon name,
and any other options you want to use, click OK or Apply in the
Transfer Grid to Seismic dialog box. If you specified an existing horizon
name, a confirmation message box appears and asks if you want to
overwrite the original file. Once the file is created, a message appears in
the system window.

Merged SeisWorks Projects

Although Z-MAP Plus treats the projects that comprise a merged SeisWorks
project as separate, you can still save a grid to the merged SeisWorks project
(such as a 2D3D project). For example, save the grid to the 2D project
component, then use the same output horizon name to save the grid to the 3D
project component. You can view and interpret the two output files as a single
horizon in a SeisWorks merged session.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Save As Command 88

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Info
Use the File Info options to view information about Z-MAP Plus
files, grids, and graphics.
The options include:
Master File Directory Displays information about files on the
currently attached OpenWorks files, MFDs and the scratch file.
File Listing Displays the contents of any nongrid file in the
currently attached OpenWorks files, MFDs and the scratch file.
Grid Listing Displays the contents of a grid on the screen.
Data Statistics Generates data statistics on a field for any
currently attached data file.
Grid Statistics Generates grid statistics for any currently
attached grid file.
File/Picture Information Generates a report describing the
contents of a graphics file.
Graphics File Summary Enables you to execute the
ZGF-SUMMARY macro, which generates a report for each
picture in the graphics file (ZGF).
List CPS-1 File Enables you to execute the LIST-CPS-FILE
macro, which lists the contents of a CPS SAVE file.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Info 89

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Master File Directory

Use the File Info Master File Directory option to display
information about files in the currently attached OpenWorks files,
MFDs, and scratch file. In the FILE DIRECTORY dialog box that
appears, you can control the amount of information to display by
making selections for the Report and Type of File to Display settings,
as shown in the following illustration.

Type of File to Display List in File Directory Dialog Box

To search for file names that match a specified text string, use the
Match on Characters box. Once you click OK, the report appears in
the Z-MAP Plus System window.

Master File Directory Icon

The Master File Directory icon (located at the top of the Z-MAP Plus window)
corresponds to the File Info Master File Directory option.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Info 90

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Report
Report choices refer to the extent of information you would like
presented about the files listed. The Summary option tells you how may
records are allocated for the scratch file and for each MFD, and how
many of the (allocated) records have been used. The Partial option lists
the following information about each file: When the file was created, the
number of fields, the number of words per record, the number of data
records, and the minimum and maximum X and Y Coordinates. In
addition to the information in the Partial listing, the Full option lists the
field name, the data type, the default format, the first word, the number
of words, and the ZNON value for each field.

File Summary
Full Report Partial Report
Type Report

DATA name of the file name of the file file name

date and time created date and time created data type
number of fields number of fields MFD
number of words per number of words per size
record record
minimum and maximum minimum and
x,y coordinates maximum x,y
field names coordinates
data type of each field
default format
first word
number of words
ZNON (null or missing
data) value

GRID name of the file name of the file file name

date and time created date and time created data type
minimum and maximum minimum and MFD
x,y coordinates maximum x,y size
X ad Y gridding coordinates
intervals X and Y gridding
number of grid rows and intervals
columns number of grid rows and
minimum and maximum columns
surface values minimum and
surface range maximum surface
null data value values
data collection radius surface range
X and Y direction for null data value
data collection data collection radius
expansion X and Y direction for
data collection
expansion

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Info 91

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Type of File to Display

You can display All of the files or only files of a particular type (for
example, GRID or VERT). Available file types include:

GRID grid WLOG well log

DATA data DWEL deviated well
CNTR contour MCRO macro
FALT fault LSLT selected line name
VERT line LPST posted line name
TEXT text SSEC seismic section
TRIA trilat triangulation lattice CELL block-centered cell
XSEC cross section PCEL point-centered cell

Match on Characters
Use this feature to enter a character string to match to the first characters
in a file name. The File Directory utility lists all the matching file names
in the currently attached OpenWorks files, MFDs and scratch file.
This feature matches the first characters in the first word of a file name.
You can enter one or more unique characters to view the data or grid
statistics for a subset of the available files.
For example, if you enter W, file directory information appears in your
process window for all files that start with W.

Unix is Case-Sensitive
Unix names are case-sensitive. You must enter capitalize characters correctly.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Info 92

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

File Listing

Select File Info File Listing.

Select input file.

Enter listing type, output file title, lines, and records.

Select fields to list in display order.

Enter Fortran format.

Enter column names and widths.

Apply and return to the

Z-MAP Plus window.

File Listing Workflow

File Listing displays the contents of any nongrid file in the currently
attached OpenWorks files, MFDs and scratch file. The default behavior
is to list all records and all fields, but you can select which fields are
listed. You also have control over output format, and which lines of the
file to start and end the listing on. You can use values in a field as upper
and lower limits (window) for defining records to be listed, and can use
Line or Area name to select records for listing. The list that is generated
appears in the system window.

Limitation on Number of Words Displayed

The File Listing option displays no more than 100 words that match the input
criteria. If more than 100 words are available, an error message in the system
window informs you of the number of words left out.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Info 93

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

The File Listing menu contains of the following options:

Input File
Listing Type, Records, and Output File
Field Formats
Column Headings and Widths
Windowed Data Fields
Windowing Parameters

Input File
Select the file to list.

Listing Type, Records, and Output File

Use this dialog box to specify whether you want to create an automatic,
full, or partial listing of files. The File Listing option also enables you to
specify the file title, output file, lines per page, and which records are
affected by the partial listing constraints.

Listing Type
Use the Listing Type parameter to control whether the listing is
automatically generated, and, if not automatically generated, which
method to use for subsetting the listed records. Possible choices include:
Automatic (default value) List all records and all fields of the
dataset. The Automatic listing uses the print formats stored with
each field of the file, unless you have just changed the formats in a
previous listing. If you have changed the print formats in a
previous listing, Automatic file listing uses the changed formats.
While in Automatic file listing, you cannot select fields, formats,
column headings and widths. You also cannot window data fields.
Full List all the records, but maintain control over which fields
are listed and their format.
Line Name List all records whose names in the Line Name
Field match the name you enter in the Line/Area Name parameter.
You control which fields are listed and their format.
Area Name List all records whose names in the Area Name
Field match the name you enter in the Line/Area Name parameter.
You control which fields are listed and their format.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Info 94

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Window List all records whose values in the fields selected for
windowing fall inside specified minimum and maximum values for
those fields. You can use the intersection of a maximum of ten
window fields. You control which fields are listed and their format.
Exception List all records whose values in the fields selected
for windowing fall outside specified minimum and maximum
values for those fields. You can use the intersection of a maximum
of ten window fields. You control which fields are listed and their
format.

Enter Listing Title

Enter the title you want to print on the top line of the output listing. The
title can be a maximum of 80 characters long; include capitals, lower
case letters, or both; and contain blank spaces.

Enter Listing Output File

Enter the name of the formatted disk (ASCII) output file that will
contain the listing. The fully qualified name (full path terminated by the
file name and extension) can be a maximum of 79 characters long,
cannot contain blank spaces, and should follow the conventions
appropriate for a text file created with your operating system.
If you do not enter the full path for the output file, the file is saved in the
output path specified in the Data tab of the Directory Paths dialog box.
If no Directory Paths: Data output path is specified, the default location
becomes the directory you were in when you started Z-MAP Plus
(called the home directory).
If you do not enter an extension for the file name, the program adds the
.DAT extension when it creates the file. (For example, if you enter the
file name LISTING, the name is changed to LISTING.DAT.

Line/Area Name
Enter a Line name or Area name. This name may be up to 40 characters
long, contain internal blanks, and should match some of the names used
in the Line or Area Name field in the file to be listed. All records having
a name in the line or area name field that match this name are listed. The
first line or area name field in the file is used for the comparison.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Info 95

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Lines Per Page

Enter the number of lines to print on each page. This parameter causes
a new page to be printed and the column headings for each field to be
printed at the beginning of the page. There is no apparent upper limit to
the number of lines per page (that is, the listing completely fills pages
with output until this limit is reached).

Starting Record
Enter the sequential number of the first record that you want to appear
in the listing. All earlier records are ignored.

Ending Record
Enter the sequential number of the last record that you want to appear in
the listing. All following records are ignored. The default is the last
record on the file.

Fields to List (Ordered Selection)

The ordered selection dialog box is required if you have the option of
determining the order in which field labels or symbols are posted, or the
order in which fields are printed in a report. The ordered selection dialog
box has two panes.
The left pane contains the Source List, which contains the fields from
the input data file. The right pane is the Destination List. If you click a
field name in the Source List, the field appears in the Destination List
and is set to appear in the output file. The order of the fields on the
Destination List determines the order of the fields in the output file.
The Ordered Selection dialog box contains three buttons: Append,
Delete, and Insert. These buttons affect only the fields in the
Destination List. You can add (append), delete, and change the order of
(insert) the fields in the Destination List. You typically use the Append
button when you select fields to place in the output file. Append is the
default mode. You can have only one mode selected at a time.

Append
To place a field on the Destination List, the Append button must be
depressed. Simply click the fields you want on the output file. They
appear on the Destination List (default value).

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Info 96

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Delete
You can delete any field in the Destination list. With the Delete button
depressed, click the fields you want to delete from the output file.

Insert
To use the Insert button, pick a field in the Destination List and click
the button. The currently selected field in the Source List is inserted
above the targeted field in the Destination List.

Field Formats
Enter the print format to use for each selected field. The print formats
are specified in FORTRAN format notation. The defaults are taken from
the width and number of decimal places specified for each field in the
file being listed. The default values are usually acceptable. However, if
you want a specific look for each column, you must change the default
formats.
Valid FORTRAN format notation includes:
Character Field (A Format) Use the number of words, the letter A,
then the maximum number of characters allowed in the column. The
number of characters must be a multiple of four. The text in an A format
field is left justified.
Example:

Text in field (13 characters) = Base of Muddy

FORTRAN format = 4A4
Output = Base of Muddy
Column positions = ----------------

Numeric Field (F Format) Use the letter F (floating point format)

followed by the maximum number of characters allowed in the column,
a period, and the maximum number of decimal places you want to the
right of the decimal. The text in an F field is right-justified.

Recommendation for Leading Blank Space

On most systems, it is preferable to leave an empty space for the sign (positive
or negative) even if all values in the field are positive.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Info 97

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Example:

Number in field = 4398.455

FORTRAN format = F10.4
Output = 4398.4550
Column positions = ----------

Numeric Field (E Format) Use the letter E (scientific notation)

followed by the maximum number of characters allowed in the column,
a period, and the total number of significant digits you want to display.
The field should be at least seven characters wider than the number of
significant digits. The text in an E field is right justified. For most cases,
the G format is preferred.
Example:

Number in field = 4392.455

FORTRAN format = E15.5
Output = .43925E+04
Column positions = ---------------

Example:

Number in field = 4392.455

FORTRAN format = E15.3
Output = .439E+04
Column positions = ---------------

Example:

Number in field = 4392.455

FORTRAN format = E15.7
Output = .4392455E+04
Column positions = ---------------

Numeric Field (G Format) Use the letter G (general) followed by

the maximum number of characters wide the column is to be, a period,
and the maximum number of significant digits you want to display. The
field should be at least seven characters wider than the number of
significant digits. The G format prints much like the F format if the
number of digits fits; otherwise, G format prints like the E format. The
text is right-justified if no exponent is printed in the column.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Info 98

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Example:

Number in field = 4392.455

FORTRAN format = G15.5
Output = 4392.5
Column positions = ---------------

Example:

Number in field = 4392455000000000.0

FORTRAN format = G15.3
Output = .43925E+04
Column positions = ---------------

Example:

Number in field = - 0.0000000004392455

FORTRAN format = G15.7
Output = -.4392455E-07
Column positions = ---------------

Column Headings and Widths

Use this dialog box to specify the title and width of each field column.
The first items on the dialog box are column headings (titles). The
default for each heading is the name of the field that is to be listed in that
column.
The last items on the dialog box are the column heading widths. The
default widths are the maximum number of characters specified in the
field format parameter.

Heading for Column

Enter the title you want to appear at the top of each column (field) of the
listing. This title may be up to 20 characters long and contain internal
blanks. If there are more letters in the title than the column is wide, then
Z-MAP Plus breaks the title at spaces and stacks the words one above
the other. If there are no spaces in the title then the ending letters are
truncated.
These column headings appear at the top of each page. The default for
each heading is the name of the field listed in the column.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Info 99

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Heading Width for Column

Enter the number of characters wide the column heading is to be when
printed on the listing. This is an integer of any size (If negative, the
absolute value is used. If real, the decimals are truncated).
The default width is the maximum number of characters specified in the
field format parameter. This default is almost always the value you
should use. Anything larger or smaller causes the column heading to be
smaller or larger than the data column. The affect is to shift all of the
subsequent column headings off center for the columns they represent.
If you want more space for the header then change the maximum
number of characters in the field (field format).

Windowed Data
Up to ten fields can be windowed when selecting records to be listed.
Windowing on a field means that a maximum and minimum value is
selected for a field and if that fields values fall either inside those limits
(Listing Type = Window) or outside those limits (Listing Type =
Exception), the data record associated with those values are listed.
When more than one field is used, the records listed are the intersection
of the windowsthat is, a record must be found in all windows.

Select Input Fields (Ordered Selection)

See Fields to List (Ordered Selection) on page 96.

Select Field MINs and MAXs

Enter the minimum and maximum value that defines the bounds for
each field you selected to window on. If nothing is entered, all values in
the field are inside the window (for example, default is MIN and MAX
of the field).
Only those records whose window fields value falls inside these limits
(Listing Type = Window) or outside these limits (Listing Type =
Exception) are listed. If several window fields are used, only those
records that have value in every Min Max window are listed.

Maximum (for named field)

Enter the maximum value to be used when defining a window for values
in this field.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Info 100

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Grid Listing

Select File Info

Grid Listing

Select input grid

Select
listing
type

Grid listing Printer contour Both

Enter Fortran format Set printer positions Specify all grid listing
and contour levels and printer contour
parameters
Select labeling mode

Enter listing output file

Set windowing
parameters? N

Yes
Enter minimum and maximum
row and column values

Apply

Save and return to the

Z-MAP Plus window

Grid Listing Workflow

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Info 101

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Grid Listing displays the contents of a grid on the screen. The fields and
their associated values are listed. You control the names of columns and
the order in which values are displayed. File Listings and Grid Listings
can also be routed to an ASCII file.
Use Grid Listing to perform these tasks:
List and view grid values.
Create a printer contour of the grid.
List grid values and create a printer contour.
You can display the grid report to the monitor or save it as a disk file.
The Grid Listing menu contains of these options, discussed in the
following topics:
Input Grid
Listing Type, Format
Windowing Parameters

Input Grid
Select an grid to be listed from the list of grids that appears.

Listing Type, Format

Use this selection to specify:
how the grid is displayed (Listing Type)
the FORTRAN format of the listing
whether to label the rows and columns of the printer listing
the number of printer positions or printer contour levels
the minimum contour value to display
the contour interval for the printer
the name of the listing output file

Listing Type
Use this parameter to choose how the grid is displayed.
The options are:
Grid Listing Print only the grid report.
Printer Contour Print only the contours using print characters.
Both Print both the grid listing and the printer contour.
Printing the grid listing to an output disk file is optional. However, the
listing is always displayed to the screen.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Info 102

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Format
For each field you have selected to list, you should specify the print
format. This parameter is expressed in FORTRAN format notation. (See
the discussion on FORTRAN format notation under Field Formats on
page 97.)

Labeling Mode
This parameter refers to labeling rows and columns, and is needed when
the listing type is Grid Listing. There are two options:
do not label the rows and columns of the gridonly output the
grid node values
label the rows and columns of the grid

Number of Printer Positions

This parameter must be supplied when the listing type is Printer
Contour. The number of print positions across the top has a range
between 1 and 132.

Number of Printer Contour Levels

This parameter must be supplied when the listing type is Printer
Contour. The number refers to the number of contours, and the range is
0100.

Minimum Contour Level

This parameter must be supplied when the listing type is Printer
Contour. The parameter asks for the minimum contour interval to begin
printing.

Contour Interval
This parameter must be supplied when the listing type is Printer
Contour. The parameter refers to the interval between adjacent contours.

Enter Listing Output File Type, Format

This parameter asks for the name of the Listing Output File. Since this
output file is a disk file and not a Z-MAP Plus file, you should observe
the naming conventions of your computers operating system. The
listing is written to this file.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Info 103

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Windowing Parameters
Use the Window capability to look at a part of the grid instead of the
entire grid. As mentioned earlier, minimum and maximum row and
column numbers are used to determine the limits of the windowed area.
You can select the grid size by identifying:
the top edge of the window (minimum row number)
the bottom edge of the window (maximum row number)
the left edge of the window (minimum column number)
the right edge of the window (maximum column number)

Minimum Row
Refers to the top edge of the window (minimum row number).

Maximum Row
Refers to the bottom edge of the window (maximum row number).

Minimum Column
Refers to the left edge of the window (minimum column number).

Maximum Column
Refers to the right edge of the window (maximum column number).

Data Statistics
You can generate data statistics for a field in any currently attached data
file. The statistics you can display include number of Y locations and
ZNONs, minimum and maximum X-, Y-, and Z-values, the range, mean,
standard deviation, and root mean square of the Z-values, and the fields
ZNON value.

Select Data File

From the list of non-grid files presented, select the file that contains the
field you want to use as input for displaying data statistics.

Select Field
From the list of fields presented, select a field to use as input for
displaying data statistics.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Info 104

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Grid Statistics
You can generate statistics for any available grid. The statistics you can
generated include X and Y grid increment, number of rows, number of
columns, ZNON nodes, real-valued nodes, maximum and minimum X,
Y, and Z values, and the range, mean, standard deviation, root mean
square, and relative variance of the Z values. In addition, some of the
data collection parameters used during gridding are provided.

Select Input Grid

A list of Grids on the currently attached MFDs, OpenWorks database,
and the scratch file is presented. Point to and click the grid for which you
want statistics to be calculated. As soon as you select a grid, the statistics
are calculated and results appear in the Z-MAP Plus xterm window. Use
the scroll bar to the right of the window to review the data.

File/Picture Information
A report is generated describing the contents of a graphics file. The
report indicates the number of pictures on the file. For each picture, the
report includes name, X and Y limits and ranges, map scale, plot
dimensions in inches, and what graphics features are on the picture. You
can control how much of this information is displayed for each picture
and whether the output is written to a formatted disk file.

Input Graphics File

From the list of ZGFs that appear, select the ZGF whose contents you
want to view. The list of ZGFs reflects the contents of the directories
specified in the ZGFs tab of the Directory Paths dialog box. If the file
you want is not listed, check the Directory Path settings.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Info 105

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Information Specifications
Use this dialog box to control whether picture headers (summary
statistics) and picture element (graphics features) lists appear in the
report. You can also specify the name of a file on for writing the output.

Show Picture Headers

Controls whether the picture header is output to the listing. The header
includes X and Y limits and ranges, map scale, and plot dimensions in
inches. Possible choices for this parameter include:
Show Headers (default value) Display the header information for
each picture on the graphics file.
Dont Show Headers Do not show the header information for each
picture.

Show Picture Divisions

Controls whether a list of graphics features is generated. Possible
choices for this parameter include:
Show Divisions (default value) Display a list of graphics features
for each picture on the graphics file.
Dont Show Divisions Do not display a list of graphics features for
each picture.

Enter ZGF Information Output File

Enter the name of the formatted disk (ASCII) output file that will
contain the graphics file information. The length of the fully qualified
name (full path terminated with the file name and extension) is limited
to approximately 50 characters. In ZCL, the fully qualified name can be
a maximum of 79 characters long, cannot contain blank spaces, and
should follow your operating systems text file conventions.
If you do not enter the full path for the output file, the file is saved in the
output path specified in the Data tab of the Directory Paths dialog box.
If no Directory Paths: Data output path is specified, the default location
becomes the directory you were in when you started Z-MAP Plus
(called the home directory).
If you do not enter an extension for the file name, the program adds the
.DAT extension when it creates the file. (For example, if you enter the
file name LISTING, the name is changed to LISTING.DAT.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Info 106

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Graphics File Summary

To execute the ZGF-SUMMARY macro, select File Info
Graphics File Summary, and specify parameters with the EXECUTE
MACRO: ZGF SUMMARY dialog box that appears. The
ZGF-SUMMARY macro generates a report for each map or cross
section in the specified ZGF.
For more information about this macro, see the Help
Online Manuals Macros Manual ZGF-SUMMARY or see the
Macro Reference Manual for Z-MAP Plus / ZCL.

Macro Name ZGF-SUMMARY

Macro Type .ZCLMAC

Purpose The ZGF-SUMMARY macro generates a report for each map or cross
section in the specified ZGF. The report includes:
name of the picture (map or cross section)
area of interest details
a list of the features (graphic segments) in the file
projection information

Description You are asked to specify a graphics file.

Results A printout in the system window that contains information about the
pictures in the ZGF.

List CPS-1 File

Enables you to execute the LIST-CPS-FILE macro, which lists the
contents of a CPS SAVE file. For more information about this macro,
see the Help Online Manuals Macros Manual
LIST-CPS-FILE or the Macro Reference Manual for Z-MAP Plus /
ZCL.

Macro Name LIST-CPS-FILE

Macro Type .ZCLMAC
Purpose This macro lists the contents of a CPS SAVE file.

Description You are asked to input a CPS SAVE file.

Results A listing of the contents of the CPS SAVE file.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Info 107

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Directory Paths

Select File Directory Paths in the

Z-MAP Plus window

Specify directory paths or

use only the default, home directory

master graphics data session format color macro

files files files files files tables files

Specify up to four directory paths for input files and

one directory path for output files

Click OK and return to

Z-MAP Plus window

Workflow for Setting Directory Paths

Use the Directory Paths dialog box to select directories to be searched
when the program looks for the following types of files:
Master File Directories (MFDs)
Z-MAP Graphics Files (ZGFs)
data files
session (parameter) files
format files
color tables
macro files

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Directory Paths 108

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

All files found during searches are used to build lists of files for you to
select from when running Z-MAP Plus options. The output paths tell
Z-MAP Plus where to write files it creates.

Importance of Using Standard Extensions

To enable the program to find the appropriate files to display in dialog box lists,
the file names must have the correct extension. Throughout this section, note the
file extensions required for each file type. Extensions are preceded by a dot (.),
as in MFD, .ZGF, .DAT, .ZCLPARMS, .FMT, .TBL, .GRIDMAC, .OPERMAC,
.PICMAC, .UTILMAC, and .SYSMAC.

The Directory Paths dialog box is easy to use. In each tab, click the
Browse button to locate directories you need and highlight the
directories.

To build a directory path, select the appropriate tab for the file type (for
example, MFDs or ZGFs). You can specify a maximum of four input
paths, each pointing to a different directory. For all file types (except
macro files) you can also specify an output path, a location for writing
files. The default input and output paths point to the current directory
(the directory you were in when you started Z-MAP Plus, represented
by the dot slash ( ./ ) symbol.
Click the Browse button beside each path to bring up the Select a
Directory dialog box. Use this dialog box to specify a path.
Click the Apply to all button beside each path to copy that directory
path to all tabs in the dialog box. This is helpful if the project files are
stored in common directories.
Comprehensive HTML Help is available for this topic by clicking the
Help button in the lower right corner of the Directory Paths dialog box.
The remainder of this section defines the file types listed on the tabs.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Directory Paths 109

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

MFDs
Z-MAP Plus processes require various types of data. Examples of data
types include:
control point data (DATA)
contour data (CNTR)
fault traces (FALT)
line data (VERT)
textual data (TEXT)
grid values (GRID)
deviated well data (well tracks) (DWEL)
Trilat Triangulation Lattice (TRIA)
cross section (XSEC)
seismic section (SSEC)
well log traces (WLOG)
format files (FMT)
color tables (TBL)
point-centered cell table (PCEL)
block-centered cell table (CELL)
A Master File Directory (MFD) is a disk file that contains a collection
of datasets. Z-MAP Plus uses MFDs when listing appropriate data types
for a given process, and writes the results of a Z-MAP Plus process to
an output data file. Like input data files, output data files are stored in
MFDs.
MFDs store data of all types, except for Graphics Segment Types.
Graphics Segment Types or Graphics Features are components of
pictures. Pictures are stored on Z-MAP Graphics Files (ZGFs).
Once you specify Directory Paths that point to MFDs, the MFDs in
those directory paths (with write permissions) are available to be
attached to your current session.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Directory Paths 110

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

ZGFs
Graphics files store pictures used by Z-MAP Plus. Pictures are a
collection of graphics features (or graphics segment types), such as
borders, contours, control point symbols, seismic line segments,
user-defined polygons, and labels. Some operations give you the option
of treating all the graphics features in a picture as a single feature, or of
keeping the individual features separate so you can manipulate them
individually.
The ZGFs tab of the Directory Paths dialog box instructs the program
which locations to search for the graphics files that will be accessible in
Z-MAP Plus. You can set paths to many graphics files, but you can only
have one ZGF attached to the session at a time. If you select Open
Graphics File, the list that appears contains all the ZGFs found in the
specified directory paths for ZGFs. Select the ZGF you want to attach.
The new selection immediately overrides any previous selection.

Automatic Link to OpenWorks ZGFs

Z-MAP Plus automatically adds a path to the OpenWorks picture area for the
current project if you are connected to OpenWorks and if there is a blank line in
your ZGF Directory Paths settings. This is designed to facilitate access to
OpenWorks files. To eliminate this automatic connection, fill all four paths with
other paths or the same path multiple times.

Pictures you create or edit during a Z-MAP Plus session are stored in the
attached ZGF. To display pictures stored in another ZGF, select
Open Graphics File, and select the appropriate ZGF.
In the ZGFs tab of the Directory Paths dialog box, you can specify a
maximum of four input paths and one output directory path. You do not
need to specify any paths unless you want to use ZGFs that are not in
your home directory (or you want to save ZGFs in a custom location). If
you use a common location to define one of the input and output paths,
in later sessions it will be easier to find the ZGFs you create.

Naming Conventions
The program searches only for graphics files that end in .ZGF or .zgf, so you
must use one of these extension when name graphics files. Otherwise, the ZGFs
are inaccessiblethey do not appear in dialog box lists.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Directory Paths 111

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Data Files
Directory Paths for Data Files allows you to build up to four input
directory paths and one output directory path for data (ASCII) files.
A directory path tells Z-MAP Plus which directories to search when
looking for data files. You need not build any paths since the default
input and output paths point to your current directory (directory you
were in when you started Z-MAP Plus). However, if the data files you
want are not on your current directory, you must build a path to point to
them. You should probably make one of the input paths the same as the
output path so you can easily locate newly created DATA files the next
time you start Z-MAP Plus.

Importance of Using a Standard Extension

The program searches only for DATA file names that end in .DAT or .dat, so it
is very important to use this convention. Otherwise, the DATA files do not
appear in dialog box lists and are not accessible in Z-MAP Plus.

Session Files
Z-MAP Plus processes offer a range of session (parameter) choices for
users. Many processes can execute using defaults once the user selects
the input data for that process. Required parameters either have a gray
background or are indicated by a gray square surrounding the parameter
entry area. As users increase their desire to shape the outcome of a
process such as gridding or contouring, they can supply more of their
own data. Users can also try different sorts of constraints on a process to
explore different interpretations of their data.
Session files store parameter settings entered during a Z-MAP Plus
program run. Parameter settings include information such as which
MFDs and which ZGF you have attached, the Area of Interest of all your
pictures, and the values you last entered for Flexing Parameters.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Directory Paths 112

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Z-MAP Plus stores all parameter settings for your current session into
the LASPRM.ZCL and LASPRM.ZCL2 files. Each time you click the
OK, Apply and Save buttons in a dialog box that is not associated with
a macro, parameter settings are written to one of the LASPRM files. If
you do not load a saved session file for your current session,
Z-MAP Plus restores the parameter settings by using the LASPRMS
files.

LASPRMS Corruption
If you experience unexpected program termination, exit Z-MAP Plus, delete the
LASPRM.ZCL and LASPRM.ZCL2 files, and restart the program.

You may want to create specialized session files. If you have more than
one project, you may want to create a session file for each of them. With
project-based session files, you can set up gridding and modeling
parameter values to reflect the different geologic structures in various
areas. You also might want to save a session that yielded a certain
interpretation, and create another session file to compare the way
different parameters affect the result of a process. If you are not getting
the expected results, you may occasionally want to create a blank
LASPRMS file and start parameter definition all over.

Naming Conventions
The program searches only for files that end in .ZCLPARMS or .zclparms, so
you must name your files with this extension.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Directory Paths 113

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Format Files
The Directory Paths dialog box can point to format files that have been
saved (or exist as external diskfiles). Format files describe the general
nature of the each data type, the fields in the data file, and the
configuration of the rows and columns. Here are a few of the more
common ways to create and use format files in Z-MAP Plus:
Use any ASCII editor such as vi, ed, or emacs to create a format
file. The field descriptions required by a format file vary depending
on the data type. For a description of the required fields for a
format file, and how to construct a format file, see Structuring
Files for Transfer into a Master File on page 850. Appendix D
provides examples of format files for all major data types.
Use the File Import Disk File to MFD/OW option to create
a format file interactively. The Examine/Prepare Input File allows
you to mark all the necessary fields and save their format to a file.
Include the format description at the top of the data file you wish
to import or export.
The Format Files option allows you to build up to four input directory
paths and one output directory path for format files. A directory path
tells Z-MAP Plus which directory to search when looking for format
files. You need not build any paths, since the default input and output
paths point to your current directory (directory you were in when you
started Z-MAP Plus). However, if the format files you want are not on
your current directory, you must build a path to point to them. You
should probably make one of your input paths the same as your output
path so that a newly created format file can be found in the next
execution of Z-MAP Plus.

Naming Convention for Format Files

Z-MAP Plus searches only for files with an .FMT or .fmt extension, so you
must use this convention when you name format files.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Directory Paths 114

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Color Tables
A color table defines the color of each feature in a picture, such as the
picture contours, border, seismic line symbols, or well symbols. The
color tables associated with pictures you create or import into
Z-MAP Plus are external disk files.
.

Naming Convention
The program searches only for color table files that have the extension .TBL or
.tbl, so use one of these extensions when you name color table files.

To create custom color tables, use the Edit Color Tables Write
option.
To enable the program to locate specific color table files, specify their
paths in the Color tab of the Directory Paths dialog box. You can specify
a maximum of four input directory paths and one output directory path
for color tables. The input directory paths instruct the program which
directories to search for color tables.
You are not required to specify any color table paths unless you put
custom color tables in a location other than the default location (the
directory you used to start Z-MAP Plus). The program does not require
an input path to find the default color table.If you make one of the input
paths the same as the output path, it will be easy to find newly created
color tables in the next Z-MAP Plus session.

Macro Files
A macro is a sequence of processes that are packaged to be executed as
a group. You can call many ready-to-execute macros directly from
Z-MAP Plus. You can also use the Z-MAP Command Language (ZCL)
to create custom macros. The Macro Reference Manual for
Z-MAP Plus / ZCL contains essential information about pre-defined
macros.
You can use the Macros tab of the Directory Paths dialog box to specify
a maximum of four input directory paths, which the program searches
when it creates macro lists to display in dialog boxes. You typically do
not need to specify macro paths the default path is the home directory
(the directory you were in when you started Z-MAP Plus). If you save
macro files to a different directory, specify the path that leads to them.
If you select Macros User Macros in the Z-MAP Plus window,
Z-MAP Plus searches the macro file directory input paths. Macros in
these paths are listed and become available for execution.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Directory Paths 115

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Import
Use the File Import options to make data from other applications
accessible in Z-MAP Plus.
The following list shows the Import options, along with brief
descriptions of their results:
ASCII (Import) Transfer a formatted disk (ASCII) file into a
specified Master File Directory (MFD) or into OpenWorks (next
topic).
Grid File to MFD/OW Create a format group (based on your
specifications), which you can use to import a grid file (page 130).
Disk File to ZGF Converts a flat graphics file into a graphics
file usable in Z-MAP Plus (page 131).
CPS-1 File to MFD Enables you to import a CPS SAVE file
into an MFD (page 132).

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Import 116

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

ASCII (Import)

Select File Import from the

Z-MAP Plus window.

Select a disk file for import.

Does data have a No

Yes format group (a
data description)?

Examine/prepare input file.

format file Is format group in top of data file

a format file or at
top of data file? Describe columns in input
dataset.

Save format group to a

Select the format file. format file.

Select format name. .

Assign output file name.

Save and return to the

Z-MAP Plus window.

ASCII (Import) Workflow

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Import 117

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

You can use the ASCII (Import) option to copy a formatted disk
(ASCII) file into an MFD. Once in the MFD, the data is available for use
in other Z-MAP Plus operations. Formatted files can have a maximum
width of 250 characters and can contain any number of lines (or physical
records).
Formatted files can also have any number of logical records (described
in the following paragraph). The maximum number of physical records
in each logical record is 10.
Physical and Logical Records It may be helpful to think of a logical
record as all the information associated with an x,y location. One x,y
location (logical record) can have 50 fields (or columns) of information.
The fields require several lines (physical records) to hold their values,
so a file may have several physical records for each logical record. To
import a formatted file, you must describe the position of each field
value in each physical record of the logical record.
To describe the input data to Z-MAP Plus, you use a format. A format
is a description of the general shape of the input data (such as number of
lines and number of physical records per logical record) and of each data
column to be copied (such as field name, field type, and beginning and
ending position in the file). The format can be:
located at the beginning of the data,
taken from an existing format file, or
interactively built during the import process
If the format is interactively built, it is stored in a format file for reuse.
You can use previously built formats to import data with a similar
format.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Import 118

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Before You Start to Import ASCII Data

For specific examples of how to format different data types in preparation for
importing them into an MFD, see Appendix E. Import/Export on page 827.

Determine the Format Situation with Respect to the Data. The options
you need to use depend on your situation. The main file/format
parameters are:
Disk File In The disk file that contains the data you want to
import into an MFD.
Disk File Out The disk file you have imported into an MFD. It
is the data you imported. A format description may have been
added to this file. The file name you assigned is the name of the
member file you created in an MFD.
Format File You either have an existing format file to use for
importing the disk file, or you construct one on-the-fly.
Format Name You can name the format contained in the
format file. If the format you want to use already exists, select its
name. Do not give the same format name to two different format
groups (data descriptions) in a single format file. Format group
names must be unique.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Import 119

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Input and Output Files for the Import Option

The two required parameters for importing an ASCII file are Select a
Disk File for Input and Output Name. Regardless of the format of the
data you are importing, you must select a data file to import and give it
a name. The data file uses the specified name when you import it and
store in an MFD.
The disk files contain the data. The format file and format description
contain information about how the data is structured, enabling the
program to import the data and add it to an MFD.

Select a Disk File for Input

From the list that appears, select a disk file to use as input when the
option executes. The list contains formatted disk (ASCII) files with the
extension .DAT or .dat. If the file you want to use does not have the
correct extension, rename it.

Output Name
Use the Output Name dialog box to name the output file and output
MFD. Enter the name of the Output File in the box. Use the popup menu
to choose the output MFD.

Output File Name

Enter the name of the file to create in the target MFD. The name can be
a maximum of 24 characters long and can contain internal blanks.

Output Master File

When you click the parameter box, a popup dialog box appears, listing
the MFDs and a scratch file attached to your run. Select the MFD to use
for writing the output file.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Import 120

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

If You Have a Format File

If you have a format file that describes the structure of the data to import,
follow these steps:
1. Select a Disk File for Input (Import).
2. Go directly to Select a Format File and select the format file to
use.
3. Select a Format Name.

Select a Format File

A list of formatted disk (ASCII) files whose names end with .FMT or
.fmt appears. Select the format file to use.

Definition of Terms: Format File vs. Format Name

Format is a description of a particular dataset. You can place this description at
the top of a data file in a format group, or in a format file. The format consists
of a set of parameters, some that describe the general nature of the data file (file
description parameters), and others that describe each field of the data file (field
description parameters).
A format file is a disk file that contains one or more formats. Each format is
identified by a format name. A format name can be up to 40 alphanumeric
characters long. It is necessary because a format file can store one or more
formats. Each format description needs a unique format name. The format name
identifies the format in a format file you want to use. If you assign a format
name you have already used, and give it to a new format description, the newly
named format overwrites any format with the same name in the format file.

If the needed format file is not listed, make sure the Format tab of the
Directory Paths dialog box is set to locate the format files on your
system.

Select a Format Name

Select a format name from the list that appears. For a discussion of what
formats contain, see Appendix E. Import/Export on page 827.

If You Have a Format Description

If you have a format description, place it at the head of the data file. The
program reads the format description as it imports the disk file. You
Select a Disk File for Input, then supply an Output Name.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Import 121

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

If You Do Not Have a Format File

You can create the format file for many data types interactively. Choose
the Input Disk File, then display the Examine/Prepare Input File dialog
box. When you have described the format field parameters, you select
the Action option Save Format. The Save Format dialog box appears,
and asks you to name the format file and the format.
If the data you are importing cannot have a format created for it
interactively (for example, grid data), you must create your own format
description. For information about creating format descriptions for the
major data types, see Appendix E. Import/Export on page 827.

Interactive Format Description with the Examine/Prepare Input File

Preparing the input file for formatting requires you to perform up to four
functions at approximately the same time: data preview display, control
data display, enter values for field parameters, and implement line
disposition. Four dialog boxes appear during Examine/Prepare Input
File, each of them dedicated to one of the four functions.
Use the Data Preview Window to mark a field for format
definition.
Use the Data Display Control Options menu to scroll data to the
left, right, up, down, top, and bottom. You can also increase and
decrease the number of lines per record.
Use the Line Disposition dialog box to designate a line as a
comment line or a history line.
Use the Field Parameters dialog box to enter parameter values for
the format file.

Examine/Prepare Input File

Use this selection to describe the format of the data. This format is used
to import the data and is stored as a format file under a name you
specify. If you click Examine/Prepare Input File, two dialog boxes
appear: the Data Preview Window and the Data Display Control
Options menu.
If you already have a usable format file, do not create a format file.
Specify the existing format by clicking the Select a Format File button.
To end the process of defining format settings, click the Done button in
the Data Display Control dialog box. To abort the description process,
click the Cancel button.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Import 122

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Turning File Formats Off

If the file you select to examine appears in reverse color, a format file is active
and is describing the file (possibly incorrectly). To deactivate the format file,
click Select A Format File and select the No Format option.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Import 123

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Z-MAP+ Data Preview Window

If you click the EXAMINE/PREPARE INPUT File button in the

IMPORT FILES dialog box, a preview box (the ZMAP+ data preview
window) appears and shows the contents of the selected file. The Data
Display Control Options dialog box also appears, which you can use to
manipulate the display.
The preview box displays the first 20 lines of the selected file and the
left 80 characters of each line. A column on the left indicates which
physical record each line represents in the logical record. Z-MAP Plus
initially assumes each logical record has only one physical record, so the
values in the left column are ones. To change this, click the Increase
Lines-per-record button in the Data Display Control Options dialog
box. The left column also indicates whether a line is a comment or
history record. To designate a line as a comment or history record, click
the line in the left column. The Line Disposition dialog box appears.
Select the action to take, as described in the Line Disposition topic that
follows.
To control the movement of the preview box over a formatted disk file,
click the Left, Right, Up, Down, Top, and Bottom buttons in the Data
Display Control Options dialog box (as described in Data Display
Control Options Menu on page 126).

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Import 124

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

You define the position and other information about a column of data
(field) by using the cursor. First identify a column of values to describe.
In a line that contains one of the values, select the far left position of the
value (including blanks). Hold down the left mouse button and move the
cursor to the right until it is positioned where you want the value to end,
then release the mouse button. The included area and all equivalent
values in other records are highlighted. These value slots (in reverse
color) are entries in that field when the Z-MAP Plus file is created. The
cursor can also sweep from right to left to highlight values.
Once you mark a column of values with the cursor, the Field Parameters
dialog box appears. This dialog box allows you to name and describe
that field. If what is highlighted in black is not what you want to be part
of this field, click the Cancel button on the Field Parameters dialog box
and re-highlight the column. Once you have named the field and have
changed other parameters, click the OK button to accept them. To
change parameter settings for a field after you apply the settings, click
the highlighted area, and the Field Parameters dialog box for that field
appears again.

Repeat the format defining process for all values you want to be fields
in the Z-MAP Plus file. You need to define only the data you want to
import. You can define data in any order, not necessarily left to right.
When you finish defining, select Save Format from the Action list.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Import 125

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Line Disposition
This dialog box appears when you click a number in the column on the
left side of the Z-MAP Plus Data Preview Window. It allows you to
place a special character in front of particular lines in the input data file.
These characters cause the line to be treated either as a comment (which
the program ignores), or as history (which is stored with other
descriptive information about the imported file).

Do Nothing
Does nothing and returns you to the Data Display Control and Data
Preview windows.

Treat Selected Line as Comment

Clicking this button places an exclamation mark in the first line of the
file. All the characters of that line are shifted to the right one character,
so no information is lost. The exclamation mark identifies the line as a
comment, which the program should ignore when importing the data.
This if very useful if unrelated lines are in the file. For example, several
lines at the top might describe the contents of the file.

Treat Selected Line as History

Clicking this button places a plus sign (+) in the first line of the file. All
the characters of that line are shifted to the right one character, so no
information is lost. The plus sign tells Z-MAP Plus that this line is to be
written into the history area of the imported files header.

Data Display Control Options Menu

This menu allows you to move the preview window over your formatted
disk file and to define the number of lines (physical records) per x,y
location (logical record). While defining formats, you interact with this
menu, the Z-MAP Plus Data Preview Window, and the Field Parameters
dialog box simultaneously. Functions in this dialog box include:
Left causes the data preview window to move left across the data
until it reaches the left most column. The window moves 20
columns at a time.
Right causes the data preview window to move right across the
data until it reaches the right most column. The window moves 20
columns at a time.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Import 126

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Up causes the data preview window to move up through the data

until it reaches the uppermost line. The window moves 10 lines at
a time.
Down causes the data preview window to move down through the
window until it reaches the lowermost line. The window moves 10
lines at a time.
Top causes the data preview window to move to the top of the
data.
Bottom causes the data preview window to move to the bottom of
the data.
Increase Lines-per-record allows you to increase the number of
lines (physical records) of data that are to represent one x,y
location (logical record). The default minimum value is 1 and the
default maximum value is 10.
Decrease Lines-per-record allows you to decrease the number of
lines (physical records) of data that are to represent one x,y
location (logical record). The default minimum value is 1 and the
default maximum value is 10.
Done temporarily saves the format descriptions used when the
import operation is complete. Once you: 1) highlight each data
column destined to be a field and 2) provide descriptive
information about the fields, clicking the Done button saves the
settings temporarily. These settings are discarded if you do not
click Apply before you terminate the import procedure.
Cancel discards any specified format descriptions and returns you
to the Import menu.

Field Parameters
Use this dialog box to define characteristics of the field created with the
data you highlighted in the data preview window. Field characteristics
include type, name, decimals, ZNON value, internal storage format, and
sort index. In addition, the dialog box also lets you define the type (such
as DATA or CNTR) for the file to be imported.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Import 127

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

You can use the first eight options in this dialog box to describe each
data field you highlight. The following table describes the choices
available for these options.

Available
Option Default Description
Choices

FIELD TYPE Over 70 possible Calculated based Click FIELD TYPE button to select from a
field types on work flow list of available field types.

FIELD NAME Any alphanumeric FIELD TYPE Fill in a text string up to 20 characters in
character string length.

INPUT DECIMAL Any integer 0 if left blank Used only when data contains no decimal.
PLACE Inserts a decimal by counting over from the
right-justified position.

ZNON VALUE Any real number .1E+31 Enter a real number value well outside the
range of data values.

ALPHA ZNON Any alphanumeric blank Enter a character string. (Converted to the
character string numeric ZNON VALUE for real number
fields when you apply the import process).

PRINT WIDTH Any integer, but the SIGNIGICANT The print width that is used when exporting
practical limit is 14 DIGITS + 6, but or listing this field of data. Should be at least
not less than 10 (SIGNIFICANT DIGITS+6).

SIGNIFICANT Any integer, but the Width of Specified the number of significant digits
DIGITS practical limit is highlighted field retained when exporting or listing this field.
eight. Most real number fields are single precision,
preserving only eight significant digits.

SORTING INDEX 0 - 10 0 Allows you to include a hierarchical sort

index with the field when importing, if the
file is already sorted. Does not sort the file.

File Type
Select the type of file to create. All valid nongrid file types are available.
If you are importing a grid, you must build a format file outside of
Z-MAP Plus and select it by clicking the Select a Format button in the
Import Files dialog box (as described in Appendix E. Import/
Export on page 827).

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Import 128

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Action
Select one of the following actiosn to perform:
Continue (default value) Use this option to define more fields.
Save Format Use this option when you finish defining fields,
want to save the format and continue with the import operation.
Use this dialog box to save the format you have just built.
Required input values are the name of the format file (data
description) and name of the format in that file. The format file
name cannot contain blanks, and the format name cannot contain
commas.
Format File Name Specify the name of the ASCII disk file to
use for storing the format group.
Format Name Enter the name of the format to create. This
name can be a maximum of 40 characters long and can contain
internal blanks. The format name cannot contain commas. It is
necessary to name the formats because you can put more than one
format on one format file. In Z-MAPs Command Language (ZCL)
these are sometimes called Format Groups, since each represents a
group of formats that describe a file.
If you try to write a format to the format file with a name that is
already on the file, Z-MAP Plus asks you to enter a new name. If
you want to reuse that name you must exit Z-MAP Plus and delete
the old name and format from the file. In the format file the first
line of the format begins with an at sign (@). Find the @ that is
followed by the name you want to reuse. Delete that line and all
the lines after it until you reach the next @. Do not delete that @.
You can then return to the import option and save the format under
that name.
If you have defined comments in the file, you must also specify a
new data file name that contains the data file with comment
markers.
Delete Field Use this option to change a previously defined
field. You can redefine the fields width or any of its other
parameters.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Import 129

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Grid File to MFD/OW

Use the Grid File to MFD/OW option to execute the IMPORT-GRID
macro. A format group is created, based on the information you supply.
The format group can be used to import the grid dataset.
For more information about this macro, see the Macro Reference
Manual for Z-MAP Plus / ZCL.

Macro Name IMPORT-GRID

Macro Type .ZCLMAC

Purpose Based on the information you supply, a format group is createdwhich

can be used to import the grid dataset. The macro saves the format
group in a separate dictionary file, which overwrites a file that has the
same file name. The grid dataset is in a separate disk file.

Description You are prompted to specify the following values:

file name of the input grid dataset
external file name and group name for the format group
File and Field Descriptor parameters
name of the GRID file to create
For more information about File and Field Descriptor parameters, see
the appropriate appendix of the ZCL Operators Manual or see the
Z-MAP Plus Reference Manual.
Results A GRID file on an MFD.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Import 130

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Disk File to ZGF

Use the Disk File to ZGF option to execute the IMPORT-ZGF-FILE
macro. This macro converts a flat graphics file into a graphics file that
is usable in Z-MAP Plus.
For more information about this macro, see Help
Online Manuals Macros Manual IMPORT-ZGF-FILE or see
the Macro Reference Manual for Z-MAP Plus / ZCL.

Macro Name IMPORT-ZGF-FILE

Macro Type .ZCLMAC

Purpose This operation converts a flat graphics file to a ZGF.

Description Specify these input values:

a flat graphics file
the full path name for the new ZGF

Results A usable graphics file.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Import 131

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

CPS-1 File to MFD

The CPS-1 File to MFD option allows you execute the
IMPORT-CPS-FILE macro. This macro imports a CPS SAVE file into
an MFD.
For more information about this macro, see Help
Online Manuals Macros Manual IMPORT-CPS-FILE or the
Macro Reference Manual for Z-MAP Plus / ZCL.

Macro Name IMPORT-CPS-FILE

Macro Type .ZCLMAC

Purpose This macro imports a CPS SAVE file into an MFD. If the file is an
extended file, the information in the header is read and used. If it is not
an extended file, you are asked to enter the header information.

Description You are asked to specify the following input values:

a CPS SAVE file
name of the output file

Results A CPS SAVE file on the requested file name.

There is no need to import data from OpenWorks to Z-MAP Plus. If

OpenWorks is installed and available, the data files stored in the
database appear in the data selection dialog boxes.

Print Menu Options

The Print menu contains two options for plotting a picture:
CGM Use the CGM option to run hardcopy jobs in the
background while running Z-MAP Plus (next topic).
Other If you choose the Other option, you must exit from
Z-MAP Plus, then start the hardcopy process by selecting
Utilities Hardcopy or Hardcopy Batch from the Z-MAP Plus
Command Menu (page 138).

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Print Menu Options 132

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

CGM

Select File Print in the

Z-MAP Plus window.

Select Plot a Picture (CGM).

Select graphics file.

Select picture to make scaled plot, CGM file, or hardcopy plot.

Select graphics features to plot.

Set parameter values for picture width, height, and offset.

Set parameter values for width, height, scale, factor, number of copies, rotation, and cutline.

Are you running

Yes Z-MAP Plus with
OpenWorks plot No
queuing?
You must create a CGM file Select radio button to create
and/or select a plotter. CGM file.

OK OK

A report on the CGM file A report on the CGM file

appears in the system appears in the system
window. window.

Return to Z-MAP Plus window.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Print Menu Options 133

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Plot a Picture (CGM) Workflow

Plot a Picture (CGM) allows you to create hardcopy pictures without
exiting Z-MAP Plus. You can save plots as CGM for printing later, or
send them to the Landmark Queuing System while you continue with
the session. Plot a Picture (CGM) runs in the background and does not
interrupt your work.

Plot a Picture (CGM)

You can specify choices or values for the following:
graphics file name and picture name
plotter units expressed as inches or centimeters
graphics feature(s) to plot
dimensions and offset of the plot
scale factor
number of copies, rotation, and cutline
plotter name and queue
plotter dimensions
option to create a CGM file

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Print Menu Options 134

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Plot a Picture (CGM) allows you to perform multiple plotting jobs as

well as multiple copies of the same plot. A picture can be plotted on any
plotter that is linked to OpenWorks.
The Z-MAP Plus Plot a Picture, or Scaled Plot, capability can now
generate a CGM file. The CGM file option lets you write the picture to
a file in CGM format instead of sending the picture to a plotter
immediately. When this button is depressed, the CGM option is active.

Graphics File Name

From the list of graphics files that appears, select a graphics file and
click OK. This file is used to build a list of accessible pictures. The list
of ZGFs reflects the content of the directories specified in the ZGFs tab
of the Directory Paths dialog box (as described on page 111). If the file
you want is not listed, check the directory path.

Picture Name
From the list of pictures that appears, select a picture, and click OK. Part
or all of this picture is used when the option executes.

Unit Type
Unit Type refers to plotter units. Click to indicate whether your plotter
units are expressed in inches or centimeters.

Graphics Features
If you click the raised box, another dialog box appears, which lists the
graphics features of the selected picture. Select the picture features to
plot. Select All, Select None, or select individual features.

Picture: W and H
This is the actual size of the picture minus any offset areas you have
built into the plot. If the plot size is 37 x 37 plotter units (in./cm.), and if
you ask for a 1 unit offset all around the picture, the Picture W (width)
is 35 and H (height) is 35.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Print Menu Options 135

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Plot Parameters
Plot Parameters include these elements:
offsets
plot dimensions
scale factor
number of copies
rotation of the picture on the plot
cutline

Offsets
Enter a value for the Left, Right, Top and Bottom Offset areas. The
offset is the area around the picture which is not part of the picture. An
offset is a sort of margin around the picture.

Width, Height of the Plot

Indicate how large you would like the plot to be. You are specifying the
height and width of the plot.

Scale Factor
This option can increase or decrease the size of your picture.
Enter a percentage to use for scaling the plot size. For example, a scale
factor of 300 percent for a 10 x 11 plot creates a 30 x 33 plot.

Number of Copies
Indicate the number of copies you want. The default number of plots/
copies is 1.

Rotate
By depressing the Rotate radio button, you can rotate the picture relative
to the orientation of the plot. The default is NO (raised button).

Cutline
A cutline is a line which can be used to trim the plot. It is optional.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Print Menu Options 136

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Queue Plotter and Plotter Name

Controls which plotter device the plot is drawn on. Possible choices for
this menu depend on the devices available at your installation. Click the
parameter input box and a popup menu shows which devices your
systems administrators have attached to Z-MAP Plus.
If you wish your plot to be printed as soon as it can (if plots of other
users waiting), depress the Queue Plotter button. You must select from
a list of plotters if you wish to queue for plotting.
To write your picture out to a file as a CGM, leave the Queue Plotter
button raised. Submit your plot to the queue when you are ready to
plot it.

Create CGM Disk File CGM File Name

To convert the picture to a CGM and write it out as a file, click the
Create CGM button. Make sure the Queue Plotter option is not selected
or the CGM will go to the plotter. Assign a name to the CGM file.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Print Menu Options 137

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Other

Select File Print in the

Z-MAP Plus window.

Select graphic file.

Select picture to plot.

Enter number of copies to plot.

Use cutline?

Select plotter device type.

Set scale factor.

Plot
Yes specified No
features?
Plot only selected features. Plot only cleared features.
All

Plot all features.

Apply

Return to Z-MAP Plus window.

When you exit Z-MAP Plus, you are asked if you want to plot the
picture immediately.

Plot a Picture (Other) Workflow

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Print Menu Options 138

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

This hardcopy method requires that you supply the parameter values for
hardcopy. The plot a picture parameter file is used to create a plot. If the
you do not want to create a hardcopy at this time, the parameter file is
stored. It is used to create a plot when you select HDBAT.

Select Graphics File

Select a ZGF from the list that appears. The pictures in this file are
available for printing. The list reflects the directory contents as specified
in the ZGFs tab of the Directory Paths dialog box (described on
page 111). If the ZGF you want is not listed, check the directory path
settings.

Select Picture
Select a picture from the list that appears. Part or all of this picture is
used when the option executes.

Plot Parameters
Use this dialog box to select a plotter device and to indicate whether to
plot all or selected features. The Plot Parameters dialog box also enables
you to specify these options:
number of plots
scale factor for adjusting plot size
whether the cutline is included

Number of Copies
Enter the number of copies of the picture you want. The default is 1.

Use Cutline
Controls whether a cutline is drawn on the plot. Possible choices for this
parameter are:
No Cutline (default value) Do not draw a cutline on the plot.
Cutline Draw a cutline on the plot.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Print Menu Options 139

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Device Type
Controls which plotter device is used. Possible choices for this menu
depend on the devices available at your installation. Click the parameter
input box and a popup menu shows which devices your systems
administrators attached to Z-MAP Plus.

Scale Factor
Enter a number to use for scaling the size of the plot. The dimensions of
the plot are multiplied by this number to determine the final size of the
plot. For example, a scale factor of 3 for a plot that is 10 inches by 11
inches would create a plot 30 inches by 33 inches. Similarly, if the scale
factor were 0.5 the plot would be 5 inches by 5.5 inches.

Plot Specified Features

Controls whether:
all features are to be plotted
selected features are to be plotted
selected features are not to be plotted

Possible choices for this parameter include:

All (default value) Ignore which features have been selected,
plot all of them.
Yes Plot only the selected features.
No Plot only the features that have not been selected.
To select which features are or are not plotted, select the Choose
Features to Plot option.

Choose Features to Plot

A list of features on the picture is presented. Point to and click the
features you wish to plot or not to plot (depends on how you have set the
Plot Specified Features switch). The selected features appear as white
letters on a black background. You can toggle the features on and off
until you are ready to plot. Clicking Apply stores the current settings.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Print Menu Options 140

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Copy Menu Options

Use the File Copy options to copy files and pictures.
The options include:
Copy Filescopies one file at a time.
Copy Picturescopies pictures from one graphics file to another.

Copy Files

Select File Copy in the

Z-MAP Plus window.

Select input file.

Enter output file name and select MFD.

Select to copy or not to copy file history.

Apply

Confirmation of rename fields procedure

appears in system window.

Save and return to the

Z-MAP Plus window.

Copy Files Workflow

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Copy Menu Options 141

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

You can copy existing files of any type from OpenWorks files, an
attached MFD, or the scratch file to any other attached MFD or to the
scratch file. The new file name be different from the old name even if
you are saving it in a different MFD. If you use the same name, the copy
occurs, but a warning message appears and tells you to copy the file with
the same name to another MFD.
The copy files command works on only one file at a time. If you want to
copy almost all of the files in one MFD to a new MFD, this is not the
way to do it. Instead, use the Unix system copy command to copy the
entire MFD, then use the File Delete Files option to delete
unwanted files from the new MFD.

Input File
Select an input file from the list of files that appears.

Output File Name and Master File

Use this dialog box to specify the name for the new file, the MFD to use
for storing it, and whether file history is carried along to the new file.

Output File Name

Enter the name of the file to be created; this name may be up to 24
characters long and may contain internal blanks. If you do not supply
this name, a forward slash is added to the old file name (for example, old
name TOP OF MUDDY, new default name /TOP OF MUDDY).

Output File Master File

When you click the parameter box, a popup dialog box appears and lists
OpenWorks, the MFDs, and the scratch file attached to your session.
Select the MFD or other destination to use for writing the output file.

Copy File History

The Copy File History parameter enables you to copy history
information from the original file to the new file. File history describes
what has happened to a file (for example, how the file was created, its
parameter settings, and files used). The history can potentially go back
many generations. Possible choices for this parameter include:
Copy History Copy the history as it appears in the original file
and add this copy event to that file.
Do Not Copy (default setting) Do not copy the history from the
original file, instead make this copy event the first item in the files
history.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Copy Menu Options 142

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Copy Pictures

Select File Copy in the

Z-MAP Plus window.

Select input graphics file.

Select input picture.

Select output graphics file.

Enter output picture name.

Yes
Maintain division
Select features to copy.
Maintain features
division on copied No
picture?
Select single feature
Copy all features simultaneously.

Apply

To verify, select an output ZGF, then an input picture

The copied picture should appear in the list.

Save and return to the

Z-MAP Plus window.

Copy Pictures Workflow

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Copy Menu Options 143

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

You can copy pictures from one ZGF to another. You can copy all or
some of the picture features. You can combine the copied features into
one graphics feature (LGB or Logical Graphics Block) or preserve them
as individual features. You can create a new ZGF to store the copied
picture.

Differences Between Copying and Overlaying Pictures

In the Overlay Pictures operation, the destination picture already exists, but
the Copy Pictures operation creates the destination picture.
Overlay Pictures can change AOI or scales. If you overlay contours from a
1:4000 scale map onto a map with a scale of 1:2000, the overlaid contours
are rescaled. Copy Pictures does not make these scale adjustments.
Overlay pictures can be used to send (overlay) features on a map with a
different AOI.
Copy works on all features. Overlay works on selected features inside the
map AOI.

Input Graphics File

For the Input Graphics File value, select the ZGF that contains the
picture you want to copy from the list of ZGFs that appears. The first
option listed is Use Current Graphics File (the attached ZGF). The list
also contains the other ZGFs specified in the ZGFs tab of the Directory
Paths dialog box. If the file you want is not in this list, check the
directory paths.
The selected ZGF is used to build a list of available pictures.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Copy Menu Options 144

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Input Picture
From the list of pictures that appears, select the picture you want to
copy. Part or all of this picture is used when the option executes.

Output Graphics File

From the list of ZGFs that appears, select a ZGF to use for saving the
copy. You can use the current ZGF or another existing ZGFor you can
create a ZGF to use. The list of available ZGFs reflects the contents of
the directories specified in the ZGFs tab of the Directory Paths dialog
box. If the needed ZGF is not listed, check the ZGF directory path
settings.

New Graphics File

Use this dialog box to name a new ZGF for storing the copied picture.

New Graphics File Name

Enter the name of the new ZGF for storing the picture copy. The full
path (with the file name and extension of .zgf or .ZGF) must not be more
than 65 characters long. The file name can contain blank spaces, and
must follow the file naming conventions for your operating system.
If you do not enter the full destination path, the file is written to the
Directory Output Path for Graphics. The default location is the directory
you were in when you started Z-MAP Plus. If you do not enter an
extension, the program adds the .ZGF extension when it creates the file.
(For example, if you enter the file name MARROW, the name is changed
to MARROW.ZGF.)

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Copy Menu Options 145

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Output Picture
Use this dialog box to specify the name for the copied picture.

Picture Name
Enter the name of the picture to be created. The name can be a maximum
of 64 characters long and can contain internal blanks.

Features Division
This dialog box allows you to combine individual graphics features
(contours, text, lines, etc.) into one graphics feature (for example, Index
Map) when a picture is copied. For most purposes you want to Maintain
Division of the features. Graphics features, sometimes referred to as
Logical Graphics Blocks (LGB), can be manipulated easily (deleted,
copied, etc.) when they are distinct features. When they are combined
into one graphics feature, that manipulation capability is lost. However,
because they are now one graphics feature they can be copied, deleted,
and so on as a single unit, which also has advantages.

Division of Features on Copy

Controls whether graphics features maintain their division or are
combined into one graphics feature (for example, Index Map). Possible
choices for this parameter include:
Maintain Division (default value) Maintain the features (such
as contours, text, and lines) as they are in the original picture.
Single Feature Combine the features into one graphics feature.

Features to Copy
A list of features appears. All features printed with black letters on a
white background WILL be copied. Features printed with white letters
on a black background will not be copied. If you point to and click a
feature, the feature is switched from white-to-black or black-to-white.
Once all of the features are set appropriately, click OK and the settings
are stored.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Copy Menu Options 146

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Rename Menu Options

You can use the File Rename options to rename files and pictures.
The options include:
Rename Files Renames any type of file contained on the
attached MFDs or scratch file.
Rename Pictures Renames one picture at a time.

Rename Files

Select File Rename in the

Z-MAP Plus window.

Select input file.

Enter output file name and select MFD.

Select to copy or not to copy file history.

Apply

Confirmation of rename fields procedure

appears in system window.

Save and return to the

Z-MAP Plus window.

Rename Files Workflow

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Rename Menu Options 147

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

You can rename files of any type contained in the attached MFDs or
scratch file. A renamed file is actually a copy of the old file saved under
a new name, followed by deletion of the old file. Because Rename is
done this way, it can be thought of as a Move with the ability to rename
during the move.

Input File
From the file list that appears, select an input file to use.

Output File Name and Master File

Use this dialog box to specify the new name for the file, the MFD to use
for storing it, and whether file history is carried along to the renamed
file.

Output File Name

Enter the new name for the file. This name may be up to 24 characters
long and may contain internal blanks. If you do not supply a name, a
forward slash is added to the old file name (for example, old name TOP
OF MUDDY, new default name /TOP OF MUDDY). If you enter a name
identical to the old one, Z-MAP Plus executes correctly, but you gain
nothing except to reposition the file to the end of the MFD.

Output File Master File

When you click the parameter box, a popup dialog box appears, which
lists the attached MFDs and the scratch file for the session. Select the
MFD to use for saving the output file.

Copy File History

Use this parameter to carry history information contained in the original
file along to the renamed file. File History describes what has happened
to a file (for example, how that file was created, parameter settings, and
files used). The history can potentially go back many generations.
Possible choices for this parameter include:
Copy History Copy the history as it appears in the original file and
add this Rename event to that file.
Do Not Copy (default value) Do not copy the history from the
original file, instead make this Rename event the first item in the files
history.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Rename Menu Options 148

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Rename Pictures

Select File Rename in the

Z-MAP Plus window.

Select an input ZGF.

Select a picture to rename.

Enter the output picture name.

Apply.

To verify, select the input ZGF again. The renamed picture

should appear in the list immediately.

Save and return to the

Z-MAP Plus window.

Rename Pictures Workflow

You can rename one picture at a time. This process does not do a copy
and rename but actually changes the name in the graphics files internal
directory. Therefore, the execution is very fast.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Rename Menu Options 149

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Input Graphics File

When you rename picture(s) in a ZGF, you can select the currently
attached ZGF or any other ZGF located in the specified ZGF directory
paths. The name of the currently selected graphics file appears in the
Z-MAP Plus window status area.
From the list of ZGFs that appears, select the file that contains the
picture you want to rename. The first option in the selection dialog box
is Use Current Graphics File. The dialog box lists all the ZGFs in the
directory paths specified in the Directory Paths: ZGFs dialog box. If the
needed file is missing from the list, check the Directory Path settings.

Input Picture
As input, you can select the currently displayed picture or any other
picture in the selected input ZGF. The name of the current picture
appears in the Z-MAP Plus window status area.
From the list of pictures that appears, select the picture to rename. The
first option in the selection dialog box is Rename Current Picture. The
dialog box also lists all the pictures in the currently attached ZGF.

Output Picture
Use the Output Picture dialog box to specify a new name for the picture.

Picture Name
Enter a new name for the picture. The fully qualified name (full path
terminated by the file name and extension) can be a maximum of 79
characters long and can contain blank spaces. If you do not give the
output picture a new name, an error message appears. Each picture in a
graphics file must have a unique name.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Rename Menu Options 150

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Delete Menu Options

You can use the File Delete option to delete files and pictures saved
on an MFD. To delete files and pictures stored in OpenWorks, you must
use OpenWorks utilities such as Map Data Manager.
The options include:
Delete Files Delete files from a list of files on the currently
attached MFDs and scratch file.
Delete Pictures Delete pictures from a graphics file.

Delete Files

Select File Delete from

the Z-MAP Plus window.

Select file(s) to delete.

OK

Confirm delete by checking list and clicking

OK again

Confirmation of delete file procedure appears.

Second OK returns you to the

Z-MAP Plus window.

Delete Files Workflow

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Delete Menu Options 151

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

A list of files on the currently attached MFDs and scratch file is

presented. Select the files you wish to delete. Files selected for deletion
appear as white letters on a black background. You can toggle these files
on and off until you are ready to delete.
Clicking OK causes the Delete option to execute. However, before it
deletes, the files are redisplayed one more time with those to be deleted
still in black background. Clicking OK again causes the deletion to take
place. A list of the deleted files appears in the system window.

Delete Pictures

Select File Delete in the

Z-MAP Plus window.

Select input file.

Select picture to delete.

OK

Check list and OK again to confirm deletion.

Confirmation of deletion appears in system

window.

Save and return to the

Z-MAP Plus window.

Delete Pictures Workflow

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Delete Menu Options 152

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

This option allows you to delete pictures from a graphics file. Many
pictures can be deleted in one execution of Delete Picture. A verification
dialog box is presented to give you a second chance before deletion
occurs.

Select Graphics File

From the list of ZGFs that appears, select the ZGF that contains the
picture to deleteyou can select the currently attached ZGF (Use
Current Graphics File option) or any other ZGF in the list. (The name
of the currently selected graphics file appears in the Z-MAP Plus
window status area.)
The selection list contains all the ZGFs specified in the ZGFs tab of the
Directory Paths dialog box. The file you select is used to build the list of
pictures available for deletion. If the appropriate ZGF is not listed,
check the directory path settings.

Select and Delete Pictures

You can delete one or more pictures from a graphics file. One option is
to delete the currently active picture. The name of the currently active
picture appears in the Z-MAP Plus window status area.
A list of pictures in the selected graphics file appears. Point to and click
the pictures to delete. Pictures selected for deletion appear as white
letters on a black background. You can toggle these pictures on and off
until you are ready to perform the deletion. Clicking OK causes the
Delete option to execute.

Confirm Deletion(s)
Before the deletion occurs, the picture list is redisplayed and shows the
pictures selected for deletion in a black background. Clicking OK again
executes the deletion. A list of the deleted files appears in the
Z-MAP Plus System Window.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Delete Menu Options 153

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Compressing Files

Compressing Master Files

Use the File Compress Master File (MFD) option to compress
any unused space that has accumulated in an MFD.
As you add data to an MFD, the file increases in size automatically. If
you delete data, however, the MFD does not automatically decrease in
size. The next time you add data, the data is written to a vacated part of
the MFD, provided the empty space is large enough to accommodate the
data.
If you delete several data files from an MFD, the MFD is likely to
contain a lot of wasted space. To reclaim unused space, compress the
MFD. Compressing is especially helpful for archiving MFDs that may
contain a lot of unused space.
By compressing an MFD, you actually copy its data to a new file. You
are asked to specify a name for the new MFD, but the file retains the
original internal name. To perform the compression operation, your
system must have enough available space for the new compressed copy.
Once the compression operation is complete, detach the old MFD from
the Z-MAP Plus session and delete it (at the operating system level). If
you do not perform these follow-up steps, the compression operations
results in even more wasted space.

Compressing Files in the File Manager

You can also display the dialog box for compressing an MFD or ZGF by
clicking the Compress MFD/ZGF icon in the Z-MAP Plus File Manager
dialog box.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Compressing Files 154

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Input/Output Master File

A list of the attached MFDs appears. You are asked to select the MFD
to be compressed and specify a name for the new compressed MFD.

Input Master File

If the needed MFD is not listed, you need to select File New
Master File and attach the appropriate MFD. If the needed MFD is not
listed, check the MFDs tab of the Directory Paths dialog box.

Output Master File Name

When you supply the name for the new, compressed MFD, it is
essential that the name is different from the input MFD. Otherwise, the
old MFD is overwritten. The name of the new, compressed MFD can be
a maximum of 65 characters long, cannot contain internal blanks, and
should follow the appropriate naming conventions for your system. The
name should be a word you choose followed by a period and the letters
MFD (or mfd). If you do not add the extension, the program adds it
automatically.

Warning: Rename After Compressing

It is essential that the new, compressed MFD have a different name from the
input MFD. Otherwise the old MFD is overwritten.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Compressing Files 155

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Compressing Graphics Files

Use the Compress Graphics File option to compress space previously
occupied by deleted pictures or features. When pictures or features of
pictures are deleted from a graphics file, the graphics file does not shrink
in size. If you write another picture or add more details to old pictures
on that graphics file, it first uses that freed up space before going after
new space and increasing the total size of the graphics file. If you have
deleted many more pictures or features than you have added since the
deletions, then a lot of unused space accumulates in the graphics file.
This option enables you to get rid of that space.
Compressing a ZGF automatically copies all the pictures from one ZGF
to a new version of the file. You must have enough space available to
create the duplicate file. At the beginning of the process, you are asked
to name the new file. The name you specify is an external namethe
new file has the same header (internal name) as the old one.
Once the compression operation is complete, delete the original ZGF at
the system level. If you do not delete the original, uncompressed version
of the ZGF, you actually lose disk space instead of gaining it.

Warning: Check the ZGF Before Deleting

It is a good practice to check the first and last picture in a new ZGF before you
delete the old ZGF.

Compressing is helpful when you are archiving graphics files and

suspect they have a lot of unused space.

Compressing Files in the File Manager

You can also display the dialog box for compressing an MFD or ZGF by
clicking the Compress MFD/ZGF icon in the Z-MAP Plus File Manager
dialog box.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Compressing Files 156

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Select Input/Output Graphics File

Select the ZGF to compress and specify a name for the new compressed
ZGF.

Select Input Graphics File

From the list that appears, select the ZGF you want to compress. The
listed ZGFs reflect the contents of the directories specified in the ZGFs
tab of the Directory Paths dialog box.

Output Graphics File Name

Specify a name for the new compressed ZGF a name that is different
from the input ZGF name. Otherwise, the old ZGF is overwritten. (It is
best to verify the validity of the compressed version of the ZGF before
you discard the original file.)
The name can be a maximum 65 characters long (for the full path, file
name, and extension). The file name cannot contain internal blanks and
must follow the file naming conventions for your operating system. The
name is composed of an alphanumeric string of your choosing, followed
by the extension .ZGF or .zgf. If you do not add the extension, the
program adds it for you when it creates the file.

Importance of Using the Correct Extension

It is essential that the new, compressed graphics file have a different name from
the original ZGF, or the original ZGF is overwritten.

Exiting from Z-MAP Plus

To end the Z-MAP Plus session, select the Exit option from the File
menu.

R2003.12.0 File Menu Options: Exiting from Z-MAP Plus 157

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Edit Menu Options

Overview

Use the Edit menu options in the Z-MAP Plus window to perform the
following actions. (Edit menu options are active only if a picture is
selected.)
Graphics Editor (page 158) Delete or modify graphic
elements (features) from the currently active picture.
Data Editor (page 174) Edit and create data files in the
Edit/Create Data dialog box.
Color Table (page 209) Show the current Color Table display
and the Edit Color Table dialog box, which you use to open, save,
copy and edit color tables.
Color Indices (page 218) Display a list of graphic elements
and modify the colors or color table cells associated with the
elements.

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Overview 157

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Graphics Editor
Use the Graphics Editor options to delete or modify graphic elements in
the current map or cross section. The edits affect only the display. Data
files are not modified.

The Graphics Editor options include:

Undo Last Feature Delete the most recent feature added.
You must run this option immediately after you add a feature (such
as title block, text, or contours).
Redo Last Deleted Feature Restore the feature deleted with
the Undo Last Feature option.
Delete Features Permanently remove features from the
current map or cross section.
Delete Elements of a Feature Delete feature elements from
the current map or cross section. (For example, feature elements of
contours include lines, text, symbols, and polygons.)
Edit Selected Features Change parameters (such as color,
position, size, font, and wording) for feature elements in the
current map or cross section. You can edit the parameters of the
selected features (such as contours, text, and faults). This option is
useful for editing a single feature on a complicated map.
Edit All Features Change parameters (such as color, position,
size, font, and wording) for feature elements in the current map or
cross section. You can edit the parameters of the any features on
the map or cross section. This option is useful for changing several
features during a single editing operation.

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Graphics Editor 158

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Undo Last Feature

Immediately removes the most recent feature added (such as text or
contours). Available only if no other operation has been executed since
the feature was added.
As soon as you select this option, the feature is deleted. No dialog box
appears. To reverse this action, immediately click Redo Last Deleted
Feature.
An icon for this option appears in the graphics toolbox on the left side
of the main window:

Redo Last Deleted Feature

Restores the feature just deleted with Undo Last Feature, provided no
other operation was executed since deletion.

Delete Features
Deletes all or some of the features in the current picture (such as text or
contours). A list of features will be presented for you to select from.
When you have chosen the features to delete, the selected features will
be deleted.
If you execute this option and then change your mind about what was
deleted, you can get all of the just deleted features back, if you go
immediately to Undelete Last Deleted Feature. Do not perform any
other procedure. Selecting Undelete Last Deleted Feature will restore
what was deleted, as long as no other options were executed between
deletion and undeletion.

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Graphics Editor 159

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Delete Elements of a Feature

Deletes elements of all or some of the features that are on the current
picture. Each feature can have four elementspolylines, text strings,
markers (symbols), and color-filled polygonsalthough all elements of
a feature may not be displayed on the current picture. You can select
several features and delete the same element from all of those features.
A list of features appears. Select the features you want to change. A list
of the four elements appears automatically with all elements selected
(highlighted). Click to clear the elements you want to preserve;
highlighted elements will be deleted from the active features. For
example, suppose you posted seismic data on the map with shotpoints
(markers), track lines (polylines), and text to label the shotpoints. To
delete the track lines between the shotpoints, delete elements for posted
line data and delete the polylines. This is quicker than deleting all the
seismic data, then reposting it on the map.

Select Element Types

Select the elementspolylines, text strings, markers (symbols), and
color-filled polygonsyou want deleted from the previously selected
features. You can toggle these elements on and off until you are ready
to delete them. Clear the elements you want to preserve; all highlighted
elements will be deleted from the active features.
To restore the just-deleted elements, you must go directly to Undelete
Last Deleted Feature. Selecting Undelete Last Deleted Feature will
restore what was deleted as long as no other option was selected
between deletion and undeletion.

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Graphics Editor 160

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Edit Selected Features

Enables you to change parameters such as color, position, size, font,
wording, etc., for any feature on the current picture. Only features
(contours, text, faults, etc.) that you select are available to have their
elements edited. Because only the selected features are active, this
option is good for modifying one item from a complicated area of the
map when it would be difficult to identify that item if all features were
active. The default for Edit Selected Features is to edit all elements
from all features.

Edit All and Edit Selected Dialog Boxes

Edit All Features and Edit Selected Features use exactly the same dialog
boxes and parameters.

Enter from Edit on

Z-MAP Plus main menu

Select graphics features to be available for editing

Select item with cursor or action to perform

Wrong item New editing Cancel edit

Undo last edit
found parameters session

Select item and

action

OK & return to
Z-MAP Plus main menu

Edit Selected Features Workflow

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Graphics Editor 161

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Editing Procedures
On selecting Edit Edit Selected Feature, you are first given the
opportunity to choose which features will be available for editing in this
session. The Select Item menu appears and you have the following
options:
Select Item with Cursor
Pick a Menu Option
Normally, you will go directly to the picture and select the feature you
want to modify.

Editing the First Feature

To Select Item with Cursor, move the cursor arrow to the graphic feature
you want to modify or delete. Once selected, the feature will blink off
and then back on. Depending on the type of feature you select, one of
four dialog boxes will appear:
Edit Text
Edit Lines
Edit Markers (Symbols)
Edit Area (color-filled areas)
When Edit Text or Edit Markers appears you will be able to select
Move, Copy, Delete, or Change Parameters. When Edit Lines or Edit
Area appears, you will be able to select Delete or Change Parameters. If
you want to change the position of a line, then go to Edit Edit/
Create Data.
You can select the appropriate action from the menu that appears. If you
choose Change Parameters, another dialog box will appear with all the
attributes of the feature displayed. Make the desired changes and once
the edit has taken place, the Select Item menu and prompt will appear
again. If you did not like the edit, then select Undo Last Edit. If you want
to abort all the edits made since entering this Edit option, then select
Cancel Edit Session.

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Graphics Editor 162

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Editing the Second Feature

After you edit and the Select Item menu and prompt reappears, you can
continue to edit picture features. If you select a feature of the same type
as the previous edit, the same change is applied to the second feature.
That is, if you deleted the first feature, the second feature is
automatically deleted. This enables you to apply the same edit to a large
number of features with a minimum number of keystrokes.
To apply a different edit action, click the New Editing Parameters
button before you select the item to edit. This causes the appropriate edit
dialog box (such as Edit Text or Edit Line) to appear once you select the
item. Follow by selecting an editing option. If you happen to select the
feature before you click the New Editing Parameters button, click the
Undo Last Edit button. The feature reverts to its previous state.
If you select a feature and the wrong element is identified, click the
Wrong Item Found button. This causes the program to locate and edit
the next closest feature of the same type. If the right feature is found,
continue editing. You can perform the search twice. If you click the
Wrong Item Found button a third time, the following prompt appears.

Select Graphics Features

A list of map features appears. All items are highlighted (selected).
Clear the selection for any features you do not want to edit. When you
click OK in the dialog box, the Select Item dialog box and the following
prompt appear.

The Select Item dialog box has four options:

Undo Last Edit
Wrong Item Found
New Editing Parameters
Cancel Edit Session

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Graphics Editor 163

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Undo Last Edit

Undo Last Edit will return the modified feature to its previous condition
(i.e., if you perform two edits on a feature, the second edit will be
undone, returning the feature to its condition after the first edit).

Wrong Item Found

If you click the Wrong Item found button, the program locates and
edits the feature closest to and of the same type as the selected feature.
The initially selected feature is returned to its original form. If the right
feature is found, then continue editing. If not, then select Wrong Item
Found again. This search will be done twice. The third time you select
Wrong Item Found the following message appears:

If you cannot find the feature, try to select the feature again, window in
to make it easier to find, or re-enter Edit, Edit Selected Features and
select only the graphics feature you want to modify.

New Editing Parameters

To prevent the previous edit action from being applied to the next
selected picture element, select New Editing Parameters. The select
item with the cursor or pick a menu option prompt appears. Select a
feature. An appropriate edit dialog box (i.e., Edit Text, Edit Line, etc.)
will appear. Select an editing option.
If you selected the feature before selecting New Editing Parameters, and
wanted to change the edit action, then select Undo Last Edit. The
element will be changed back to its previous form. Now select New
Editing Parameters, then select the item and apply the editing action.

Cancel Edit Session

If you click the Cancel Edit session button, you cancel all the edits
made since you entered the Edit option. If you only want to abort the last
edit, select Undo Last Edit.

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Graphics Editor 164

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Edit Text
You can display the Edit Text dialog box from Edit All Features and
Edit Selected Features. Use the Edit Text dialog box to move, copy,
delete, and change parameters (such as size, color, and font) of the text
you have selected. You return to the Select Item menu after the edit is
performed.

Move Text and Copy Text

Use the Move Text option to move text to a different position. You can
enter x,y coordinates for the new position or use the cursor to select a
position.
Use the Copy Text option to place a copy of a text string in the picture.
You can enter x,y coordinates for the text position or use the cursor to
select a position.

Key In Location
Key In Location enables you to enter the x,y coordinates for the new
position of the selected text. This x,y position refers to the lower left,
lower right, or center of the text as specified when this text was last
placed on the picture.
New X-Location and New Y-Location (Plotter Units) To
move or copy selected text, enter numbers that represent the x and
y values of the desired destination. This is measured in plotter
units
(in./cm.) from the lower left corner of the plot (established by the
lower X-offset and left Y-offset).
Location Mode Location Mode enables you to define the part
of the text positioned in a new location. You select a new location
by clicking mouse Button 1 with the cursor in the appropriate
position.
Text Justification Use this parameter to control where text
is positioned relative to a new location point you select. The
options for this parameter are:
Lower Left (default setting) Positions the text so that its
lower left corner is at the new location point.
Lower Right Positions the text so that its lower right corner
is at the new location point.
Center Positions the text so that its center (vertical and
horizontal center) is at the new location point.

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Graphics Editor 165

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Delete Text
Delete Text Removes the selected text immediately and returns
you to the Select Item menu.
To restore the deleted text, click Undo Last Edit in the Select Item
dialog box. The deleted text is restored, provided nothing else has
been done since the deletion.

Change Parameters
Click the Change Parameters button to display a dialog box for
changing any of the following attributes for the currently selected text
string: Angle of rotation, font, height (size), color, and the text string.
Rotation To rotate the currently selected text string, enter a
number for the angle of rotation, measured counterclockwise from
the horizontal plane (where zero = horizontal). The text string
rotates from the point (lower left, lower right, or center) currently
selected as the reference point for posting the text.
Font This parameter controls which font (typeface) is used to
display the text. The choices are shown at left.
Height Enter a value in plotter units (in./cm.) to define the
height of the text.
Color To select the text color, enter the color index number or
click the color button.
To select the color index from the color table, enter a number from
0 to 255.
Click the button next to the Color box, and the Select a Color
Index dialog box appears. Select the color you want from the color
buttons. Use the scroll bar to see other color indices and their
associated colors.
If the color table is the default Z-MAP Plus color table, the first
eight color indices and their associated colors are as shown in the
following table.

Color Index Color

0 Background color (usually black)
1 Foreground color (usually white)
2 Red
3 Green
4 Blue
5 Cyan

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Graphics Editor 166

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Color Index Color

6 Magenta
7 Yellow
8 Orange

To look at the color table settings for the current picture, select
View Color Color Table.
String New text can be entered to replace the text you have
selected. This may be up to 80 characters long and may contain
internal blanks. You can use upper and lowercase characters with
all fonts except Plain.

Edit Lines
Use the Edit Lines dialog box to delete or change the parameters of the
selected line (such as line type, color, and symbol).

Delete Line Segment

Delete Line Segment will delete the portion of the line you have
selected. No dialog boxes are displayed when this happens.
If you change your mind and do not want to delete this portion of the
line, select Undo Last Edit on the Select Item dialog box and the line will
be restored. The Undo procedure only works if nothing else has been
selected since the deletion.

Change Parameters
Use the Change Parameters option to specify the line pattern, color,
length, spacing, and direction of hachures; length and spacing of dashes;
type and height of the posted symbols; each line vertex; and the weight
of bold lines.
Line Pattern Line Pattern controls what pattern is used to draw
a line. Select a pattern from the popup menu.
Line Color To select a color for displaying the line, use one of
these methods:
Color Index Value Enter a color index value from 0 to 255
to select the color.
Color Button Click the color button. In the Select a Color
Index dialog box that appears, select a color from the standard
palette. To see other color indices and their associated colors
use the scroll bar.

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Graphics Editor 167

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

To see the first eight color indices and colors in the default
Z-MAP Plus color table, see page 172.
To see the current pictures color table settings, select View
Color Color Table.
Hachure Length To set the length of hachures, enter a value in
plotter units (in./cm.). The default hachure length is .05 cm.
Hachure Spacing Enter a value in plotter units (in./cm.) to set
the spacing along the line between hachures. This defaults to 0.5
cm. This will control how close together the hachures are placed.
Hachure Direction Hachure Direction controls which side of
the line the hachures are drawn. To determine which side of the
line is being referred to, the program looks at the way the line data
is stored. It begins from the first point on the line and draws
hachures either to the right or left of the point. Possible choices for
this parameter include:
Right (default) Hachures are drawn on the right side of the
line when moving along the line in the order the line vertices
were entered.
Left Hachures are drawn on the left side of the line when
moving along the line in the order the line vertices were
entered.
Dash Length Enter a value in plotter units (in./cm.) to set the
length of the line (dash) portion of the dashed line. This defaults to
a value of 1.
Dash Spacing Enter a value in plotter units (in./cm.) to set the
length of the space (gap) portion of the dashed line. This defaults
to a value of 1.
Symbol Code To replace the current symbol, enter the number
of the new marker (symbol) you want to use. This defaults to a
value of 1.
The following table shows some standard symbol code numbers
and their associated symbols.

Symbol (Marker) Code Symbol

0 No Symbol
1 Plus
2 X

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Graphics Editor 168

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Symbol (Marker) Code Symbol

3 Square
4 Circle with a dot in it
5 X with horizontal line top and base
6 X with vertical line left and right side
7 X with lines all four sides
8 Diamond
9 Triangle
10 Asterisk
26 Dry Hole
28 Gas Show
30 Gas
48 Oil
50 Oil and Gas
60 Oil Show
62 Oil and Gas Show

For examples of the markers in the extended set used in

Z-MAP Plus, see Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line
Patterns on page 791.
Symbol Height You can enter a value in plotter units (in./cm.)
that will define the height of the symbol. This defaults to 0.07 cm.
Line Weight (Multiple of Plain) You can enter the number of
plain (single) lines that are drawn side-by-side to create a bold
line. This defaults to 2 and can range from 2 to 8.

Edit Markers
In the Edit Markers dialog box, choose Move, Copy, Delete, and
Change Parameters (such as size, color, and symbol) for the currently
selected Marker (symbol).

Move Marker and Copy Marker

Use the Move Marker option to select a new position for the selected
marker by entering x,y coordinates. Use the Copy Marker option to enter
x,y coordinates for the position of a copy of the selected marker.

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Graphics Editor 169

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Key In Location Enter the x,y coordinates for the selected

markers new position.
New X-Location and New Y-Location (Plotter Units) To
move or copy a selected marker, enter numbers that represent the x
and y values of the desired destination. This is measured in plotter
units (in./cm.) from the lower left corner of the plot (established by
the lower X-offset and left Y-offset).

Delete Marker
To delete the selected marker, select the Delete Marker option. The
deletion occurs immediately.
To restore the deleted marker, click the Undo Last Edit button in the
Select Item dialog box. This only works if nothing else has been selected
since the deletion.

Change Parameters
Change Parameters enables you to specify the marker type (symbol
code), its size, and color.

Marker Type
To replace the current marker symbol, enter the number of the new
marker you want to use. This defaults to 1.
Some standard symbol code numbers and their associated symbols
include:

Symbol (Marker) Code Symbol

0 No Symbol
1 Plus
2 X
3 Square
4 Circle with a dot in it
5 X with horizontal line top and base
6 X with vertical line left and right side
7 X with lines all four sides
8 Diamond
9 Triangle

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Graphics Editor 170

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Symbol (Marker) Code Symbol

10 Asterisk
26 Dry Hole
28 Gas Show
30 Gas
48 Oil
50 Oil and Gas
60 Oil Show
62 Oil and Gas Show

For examples of the markers in the extended set used in Z-MAP Plus,
see Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line Patterns on page 791.

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Graphics Editor 171

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Marker Size
You can enter a value in plotter units (in./cm.) which defines the size of
the Marker. This defaults to 0.07 cm.

Marker Color
To select the color for displaying the marker, use one of these methods:
Color Index Value Enter a color index value from 0 to 255 to
select the color.
Color Button Click the color button. In the Select a Color
Index dialog box that appears, select a color from the standard
palette. To see other color indices and their associated colors use
the scroll bar.
The following table shows the default Z-MAP Plus color tables first
eight color index values and their associated colors.

Color Index Color

0 Background color (usually black)

1 Foreground color (usually white)
2 Red
3 Green
4 Blue
5 Cyan
6 Magenta
7 Yellow
8 Orange

To see the current pictures color table settings, select View Color
Color Table.

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Graphics Editor 172

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Edit Area
Use the Edit Area dialog box to delete or change the color of the
currently selected area.

Delete Fill Area

Delete Fill Area immediately changes the selected color-filled area to
the background color.
To restore the deleted fill area, select Undo Last Edit in the Select Item
dialog box. The restoration takes effect only if you have not performed
any other action since the deletion.

Change Parameters
Use the Change Parameters setting to delete or change the color in the
currently selected area.

Fill Color
To select a color to use to display the Fill Color marker, enter the color
index number or click the color button. To select the color index from
the color table, enter a value from 0 to 255.
If you click the color button next to the entry field, the Select a Color
Index dialog box appears. Select a color in the Select a Color Index
dialog box. To see other color indices and their associated colors, use the
scroll bar.
To see the default Z-MAP Plus color tables first eight color indices and
their associated colors, see the table on page 172.
To see the current pictures color table settings, select View Color
Color Table.

Edit All Features

Use the Edit All Features option to change parameters for a feature in
the current picture (such as color, position, size, font, and wording).
The Edit All Features and Edit Selected Features options use the same
dialog boxes and parameters. For descriptions of the dialog boxes and
parameters, see Edit Selected Features on page 161.

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Graphics Editor 173

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Data Editor
The Data Editor displays the Edit/Create Data dialog box. This dialog
box enables you to edit and create data files. You can see the changes
you are making to the data file reflected in the picture displayed. Any
data in the Area of Interest (AOI) of the present picture and on the
attached MFDs or OpenWorks can be edited. Both data used to create
the currently displayed picture and data not used to create the picture (on
attached MFDs or OpenWorks) can be edited.
In order to begin editing or creating data, you must have a picture
currently active. If one is not active, you may select to work on an old
picture or create a picture.
You can select the files you want to edit, or you can allow the program
to select the data files on which your current picture is based. Each file
used to create the current picture will automatically be selected.
Unless you cancel the editing session, the results of the editing session
are reflected in the MFD and ZGF. The following types of data can be
edited or created:
Control Points
Seismic Data
Contours
Faults
Profiles
Vertices (Line Inflection Points)
Grid Node Values
These edit/create data files are stored in the specified MFD or in the
OpenWorks project.
Any feature on your current picture can be altered. The program creates
a set of data during each execution of contouring, posting, and lines. The
changes to the current picture will be stored on the graphics file you
designate.

Save Often During Data Editing

It is very important to save your work often when editing, especially when
during extensive editing sessions. It is very easy to corrupt an MFD during
complex editing sessions; so SAVE OFTEN!

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Data Editor 174

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Points
Using your cursor on the currently displayed picture, you can edit
control point data, such as Well Data and Seismic Data. You may
window, pan or zoom in on any point while editing.
Options include:
Cursor Move
View/Edit
Area Edit
Undo
Delete
Undelete
Create Point
Select File
Select Fields
Display Parameters
Autoset Parameters

Cursor Move
Use the Cursor Move option to graphically reposition one or more
control points in your currently displayed picture.
If you select Cursor Move, the Cursor Move dialog box appears,
followed by the prompt:
SELECT POINT TO MOVE OR DISMISS
Select a control point to move by clicking it. A dialog box appears,
followed by the prompt:
INPUT NEW X,Y LOCATION
Position the cursor at the target location for the control point and click.
The control point automatically moves to the new location. The Cursor
Move dialog box and the SELECT POINT TO MOVE OR DISMISS
prompt appear. You can reposition another control point or exit the
Cursor Move mode by selecting OK. The changes you made to your
data file during the editing session are saved automatically when you
close the Edit/Create Data menu.

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Data Editor 175

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

View/Edit
Use the View/Edit option to edit values of points along the currently
selected line. If you select a point, all the points data values are
displayed. You can then perform a keyboard edit on any of the points
values.
The following prompt appears:
SELECT POINT TO EDIT OR DISMISS
Once you select a point, a dialog box appears and reports current
information about the selected control point. If you have selected to edit
certain fields of information (under Select Fields), only those fields are
displayed. You can change the value for any field that appears, then
click OK to save the edits, or click Cancel to close the dialog box
without saving changes. The selected control point is highlighted during
editing.

Area Edit
When Area Edit is selected, you can edit all of the control points in an
area that you specify. Area Edit can edit all points inside or outside a
polygon or the current view (portion of the picture currently displayed).
Area Edit has the following capabilities:
deletion of points
blanking (converting to ZNON) all, one, or currently selected
Z-fields
change one Z-field to a constant value
These features are particularly useful when you are trying to set all of
the control points in an area to a constant, such as a ZNON. For example,
you may have the end of a seismic line that has totally invalid time
values, and you want to set all of the shotpoints equal to ZNON in order
to create a reasonable grid despite the bad values.
There are several options under Area Edit:
Select Polygon File
Select Polygon
Create Polygon
Current View
Parameters
Edit Field
Select Point File

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Data Editor 176

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Select Polygon File

You can select a polygon as the area to edit from an existing file in the
MFD or OpenWorks project, or you can create a polygon by using the
cursor in the map display.

Select Polygon
You can select a specific polygon from the active files. Values for points
inside or outside the polygon can be changed. The polygon(s) from the
Polygon File you have just selected will appear on your picture. Select
the polygon you wish to use for editing.

Create Polygon
Using your cursor, you can draw a polygon on your map. Values for
points inside or outside the polygon can be changed.

Current View
You can use the portion of your map that is on the graphics screen as the
area to edit. If your entire map is still displayed, you may window (or
zoom in) on a smaller portion of the map and use that area as the current
area to edit.

Parameters
Use Selection of Parameter to select an Operation to perform on the area
to edit, such as deleting a control point and setting Z fields to ZNONS.
You may also specify a Fill Value, which is a number (such as the value
for ZNON) that you would like to set several control points equal to.
You may also select as an Area to Edit either the region Inside the area
you selected, or Outside the area you selected to edit.

Operation
In the area you have defined for editing, you can perform the following
processes:
Delete Points
Blank All Z Fields
Blank Currently Selected Fields
Blank One Z Field
Replace Value For One Z Field

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Data Editor 177

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Fill Value
The fill value is the Z-Value that you wish to assign to the points in the
area you have selected for editing. For example, you may want to make
all values in the area ZNONs. The fill value would then the value you
have defined for null data.

Area to Edit
You can perform editing operations either Inside or Outside the
polygon you have defined.

Edit Field
A list of fields appears. Select the field which contains the point values
you wish to change.

Select Point File

You may select datasets which have already been selected for editing.
For example, your active picture may have been built using both a
seismic shotpoint data file and a well control point file. Your selection
will determine whether the editor applies the area edit to the seismic data
or to the well data.

Undo
Undo enables you to restore the last edit you performed to the way it was
before editing. Undo will undo the last point edit, such as a cursor move
or a view edit. If you invoke undo while editing points using area edit,
and the editor does not restore the points, you can recover these points
by selecting Edit Edit Create Data Cancel Edit.

Delete
Delete will omit a control point that you select with the cursor from your
edited datafile. If you decide that you didnt really want the control point
deleted, you may put it back by selecting undelete.

Undelete
Undelete brings back a control point you deleted. The control points
that have been deleted will be highlighted, and you may select one to put
back. The control point is then put back into your edited datafile.

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Data Editor 178

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Create Point
Use the Create Point option to add one or more points to the existing
file.
Place the cursor at the target location for the new control point. A dialog
box appears with information about the fields that you have stored with
this dataset. The location is filled in automatically, but you specify the
Z fields and other information you want to save with the new control
point. Select OK to save the information that you have typed in, or
Cancel to return to the Point edit menu and not save the new control
point. If you would like to enter all of the information for the new
control point, you may select the option Key X, Y to enter the location
of the new data point as well as any additional fields that you would like
to save with it.

Key X, Y
You can use the Key X, Y option to enter values for the x,y location of
the new point. You can also enter values for the point fields, such as the
Z field and Well ID File.
X-field Enter the value for the X coordinate of the new point.
Y-field Enter the value for the Y coordinate of the new point.
Z-field Enter the value for the Z field of the new point.
Field Values Field names for the fields on the point dataset you
are editing also appear on the Key X, Y dialog box. Assign a value
appropriate to each of the fields listed, e.g., Z-value or Well ID. Up
to 10 fields can appear on one dialog box. Values for up to 50 fields
can be assigned.

Select File
Select File enables you to select a file for adding a point, i.e., it answers
the question: Which edit file (file selected for editing) gets the new point
written to it?
On this menu you are selecting among datasets which have already been
selected for editing. For example, your active picture may have both
seismic shotpoint data and well control point data posted on it. Your
selection will decide whether the editor applies the area edit to the
seismic data or to the well data.

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Data Editor 179

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Select File
Select File is useful for getting an additional file to edit. For example,
your active picture may have had seismic shotpoint data posted, but you
may want to edit the well data values in addition to the seismic data
values.
Select File enables you to select a file for adding a point, i.e., it answers
the question: Which edit file (file selected for editing) gets the new point
written to it?
You may select datasets which have already been selected for editing.
For example, your active picture may have been built using both a
seismic shotpoint data file and a well control point file. Your selection
will decide whether the editor applies the area edit to the seismic data or
to the well data.
To remove a dataset from editing, you must use the Select Files option
on the Edit/Create Data main menu.

Select Fields
Select Fields enables you to select the point dataset you want to edit, and
the fields on that dataset which you want to edit.

Select Fields
A list of fields is presented. You can choose to edit all fields, or one or
more fields. Select Fields limits the fields displayed for View/Edit. This
option is helpful for datasets with more fields than will fit on a dialog
box (ten). Select Fields gives you the chance of viewing only those
fields you are interested in editing, and if at all possible, to view them
on one dialog box.

Select File (for Field Selection)

If you are editing two datasets, such as a seismic dataset and a well
control point set, you must say which file the fields are coming from. If
you are editing only one dataset, you need not Select File.

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Data Editor 180

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Display Parameters
Use the Display Parameters option to see the options for displaying
control point information for the current map. This option is useful if
you have not posted your control points on the map, but would like to
see them now in order to edit them. (This option only changes the
posting of point data in the editor. This option under Line Posting
actually changes the picture.) The Display Parameters options are:
Select Fields
Sizes/Colors
Locations
Select File
Post Symbol/Value Options

Select Fields
Use the Select Fields option to select a field, such as a Z field to post on
the picture around the control point.

Sizes/Colors
Use the Sizes/Colors option to choose a symbol number, size, color, and
a value (Z field) size and color for the points that you are posting. Sizes
are expressed in plotter units (in./cm.).
Symbol Size This is the size of the symbol you are posting with
your points. The value for Symbol Size is expressed in plotter units
(in./cm.).
Symbol Number Symbol Number is the number of the symbol
in the Extended Symbol Set. Examples of the symbols and their
numbers can be found in Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line
Patterns on page 791.
Symbol Color Symbol Color is the color of the symbol
representing the control point value. Using a number from 0255,
indicate the color for the posted symbol. If you click the color box,
a palette of 256 colors appears. Click to select the color you want.
Value Size Value Size is the size of the number or text
representing the field value, expressed in plotter units (in./cm.).
Value Color Value Color is the color of the number or text
representing the control point value. Using a number from 0255,
indicate the color for the posted grid node value. If you click the
color box, a palette of 256 colors appears. Click to select the color
you want.

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Data Editor 181

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Locations
Location enables you to select where you would like to see any selected
field values posted in relation to the symbol.
A list of fields on the file you are editing appears. For each field you
have selected to post, indicate where you would like the value to appear.
The choices are to post the value Above, Below, Right, or Left of the
symbol.

Select File
Select File enables you to select the dataset for which you want to
establish display parameters.

Post Symbol/Value Options

Post Symbol/Value Options enables you to select if and where symbols
and values are posted. You can choose not to post symbols or values, to
post symbols and values for selected points, to post the symbol and not
the value, or to post the symbol and field value for every control point.
No Posting. No symbols or values will be posted.
Symbol Only. Symbol Only will post a symbol at the location of all
points, but will not include values for fields around the symbol.
Selected Points. Selected Points will post a symbol at the location of
all points. When a point is selected for editing, specified fields may be
displayed. You will specify fields to display in Select Fields.
All. All will post a symbol and specified field values for every control
point on the file.
Once all of your posting parameters have been set up the way you would
like them, you may select Symbol Only, Selected Points, or All. Select
No Posting to get out of the posting option without posting any values
on your map. When you select one of the options on the Post Symbol
Value Options dialog box, you will return to the Posting dialog box
where you can Apply your posting choice.
The posting you do in the editor is temporary as far as your picture is
concerned. The changes to the dataset are permanent, but when you exit
your editor, the posting parameters go back to the way they were on the
picture when you started the editing session.

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Data Editor 182

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Autoset Parameters
Use the Autoset Parameters option to specify defaults for creating
points.
You can specify values by selecting the files used to create a particular
picture. The Autoset feature is useful for many sorts of editing tasks and
can be used for all data types. The Autoset capability is useful both if
you are creating a dataset or are editing/adding to an existing dataset.
Autoset works with control points, vertex data, and fault files.
Autoset can be invoked from Point Edit, Line Edit, and Create Data.

Select Type
Like the Select File options, Select Type is a choice among already
selected files. It answers the question: For which type of file do you
want to set Autoset Parameters?
Once you select a file for Autoset Parameters, The program computes
values for new points in the file according to the new parameter values.

Set File Parameters

This dialog box enables you to Autoset Extra Fields and to Snap
Vertices to point locations if you wish to do so.

Autoset Extra Fields

The Autoset File Parameters feature provides the option to Autoset
Extra Fields. This feature will enable the editor to pick up a value
(usually a Z-value) from a grid or control point on which the picture was
based. This feature is especially useful for adding synthesized control
points away from your data, and for creating digitized profiles.
Autoset Extra Fields enables the editor to set field values for new
points automatically. When inputting new points, the editor sets all
fields to default values. When using Autoset, the mapper will not be
asked to supply the values for the new points. Unless you specify how
to set the values using Set Field Parameters, the program will set the
field values to the ZNON for that field.

Snap Vertices to Point Locations

This feature will conform the vertices of your new data to the control
point file you have selected.

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Data Editor 183

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Snap Vertices to Point Locations is another feature of Autoset

Parameters. When you select this option, the editor will pick up the x,y
location of the nearest point in the selected file and use it as the location
of the new point. Snap Vertices is useful for creating a subset of an
existing point set by graphically selecting the points for the new set,
without having to place the cursor exactly on the point locations.
When snapping to point locations, you also have the option of defaulting
the field value from a field in the snap to point.

Select an Item (Match Vertices to Points From File)

This dialog box will appear only if you answered Yes to Snap Vertices
to Point Locations. When you select this option, the editor will pick up
the x,y location of the nearest point in the selected file and use it as the
location of the new point. Snap Vertices is useful for creating a subset
of an existing point set by graphically selecting the points for the new
set, without having to place the cursor exactly on the point locations.
Select the file whose points you want your new data points to snap to.

Set Field Parameters

If a grid file is among the data files selected for editing, and if you want
to default the value of this data field from the grid, you can select a grid.
This grid will be back interpolated at the new point locations and the
back interpolated value used as the field value for the control point.
When snapping to point locations, you also have the option of defaulting
the field value from a field in the snap to point.

Clear
Clear will erase all the parameter values selected in the Autoset
Parameters dialog box.

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Data Editor 184

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Contours, Faults, Lines

Contours, Faults, Lines enables you to edit contours, fault data, or a line
(vertex data). Using your cursor on the currently displayed picture, you
can modify contours, faults, or line data. You can window, pan, or zoom
the picture at any time while editing. When you select Contours, Faults,
Lines, the Line Edit menu appears.

Reshape Contours
Reshape Contours provides a way to edit a contour line. Reshape also
provides smoothing of edited contour lines.
There are three main steps to the Reshape Contours process:
1. Select the contour line on the active map that you want to reshape.
X marks appear along the selected contour line, marking the points
on the line you can move.
2. Select the point you want to move.
3. Select the new location for the selected point.
The contour will be redefined and reshaped according to the point you
have chosen, the new destination you have chosen for the point, and the
points on the contour line which have remained fixed.
You can reshape lines by selecting and moving a reshaping point, or
point of inflection. Reshape Contours fits a curve through the three
closest reshaping points.
If you do not want to reshape the line using a marked point (a point of
inflection along the contour), you can add and delete points which are
able to be moved. To remove reshaping points which you do not want
to influence the shape of the new line, use the Add/Delete Points option.
The ability to add and delete reshaping points gives you more control
over the shape of the new contour. When you delete reshaping points,
a larger segment of the line can be reshaped. When you add reshaping
points, a smaller segment of the line can be reshaped.
The results of the reshape operation can be viewed immediately, and
changes can be made until the line fits with the desired interpretation.
The reshaped contour can now become input for other Z-MAP Plus
operations, such as Contour to Grid.

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Data Editor 185

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Select Line
Use the cursor to select a contour line to reshape.

Move Point
A prompt appears directing you to select a point to move. Contours are
reshaped if you select a marked point of inflection to move, then select
the new location for the point of inflection. Use the cursor to select the
point to move in the contour line.

Add
This option enables you to add reshaping points to the contour line.
Adding reshaping points permits a smaller segment of the contour to
be reshaped.
Contours are reshaped when you choose a marked point of inflection to
move and select the new location for the point of inflection. The Add
Point feature enables you to reshape contour lines using points other
than the points of inflection. To add a point, use your cursor to input the
location of the new inflection (reshaping) point.

Delete
Contours are reshaped when you choose a marked point of inflection to
move and select the new location for that point of inflection. The Delete
Point feature enables you to eliminate points of inflection which you do
not want to use in reshaping the contour. To delete a point, use your
cursor to select the inflection point which you wish to omit. The Delete
Point feature enables you to reshape a larger segment of the contour line.

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Data Editor 186

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Break
Use the Break option to cut a line into separate parts. For example, if you
accidentally cross a fault with a contour, you can break the contour at
the fault and delete the part of the contour that crosses the fault
incorrectly.
There are two ways that you can break a line:
Individually
At a Line
Individually means that you will be using the cursor to input a break
point on a line. When you select to break an individual line, the program
will prompt you to select a break point on a line. The program will place
an X in the spot you have selected with your cursor.
At a Line means that you may break a line where it intersects another
line. For example, you may decide to break all of the contours at a
coastline, so that you can later delete the contours that are onshore. This
option is especially useful when contours and faults have been digitized.
The tiny contour segments inside fault polygons need to be cleaned up
before going to contour gridding.

Type to Break
If you select to Break At a Line, you must select the Type of Line To
Break, and the dataset you want broken (for example, contours of grid
A or grid B, or fault set 1 or fault set 2). From the list of line types that
appears, select a line type to break at line intersections.

Break Keeping and Break Deleting

When you select to Break At a Line, you will then need to indicate
whether you want to keep or delete the shorter line segment of the
broken line.
When you select Break Keeping, the program will keep both segments
of the broken line.
Break Deleting will break the line and automatically delete the shortest
segment. Break deleting should only be used when the piece to delete is
obvious, such as a contour slightly crossing a fault line.

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Data Editor 187

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Extend
Use the Extend option to continue an existing line (such as a contour or
fault line). For example, if contouring did not extend all of the contour
lines to the map border, you can use this option to make the contour lines
end neatly at the border.
When Extend is selected, you need to select a line to extend, then input
points where you would like the line to go. When your line is complete,
there are several options to end the line:
End End stops the line at the last specified point.
Break/Connect Break/Connect breaks a line and connects one
of the line segments that result to another line.
Attach To End Attach to End attaches the last point selected to
the end of another line.
Delete Extra End Delete Extra End has the same effects as
End, except the part of the original line that was not extended is
deleted.
Delete Extra Break/connect Delete Extra Break/Connect is
the same as Break/Connect, but the piece of the connect line which
was not connected is deleted. The original line that was not
extended is also deleted.
Delete Extra Attach To End Delete Extra Attach to End
deletes the old segment of line after you attach to another line. It is
the same as Attach to End.
Delete Last Delete Last deletes the last point you input.

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Data Editor 188

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Break & Extend

Use the Break & Extend option to stop a line (such as a contour or fault)
at a given location, then extend the line in another direction. For
example, you may decide that a fault is correct until it reaches a certain
position, but it then goes off in an unexpected direction. You can break
the fault line at the point it goes in the wrong direction, then extend the
good portion of the fault in the correct direction. You are prompted to
select a point on the line to break it, then you can extend the line. When
the line is complete, use one of these options to end the line:
End
Break/Connect
Attach to End
Delete Extra End
Delete Extra Break/Connect
Delete Extra Attach to End
Delete Last
For a discussion of these options, see Extend on page 188.

Smooth
Smoothing will fit a curve through points that you have input when you
created a line.
When you select Smooth, a prompt appears directing you to do one of
two things:
select a line to smooth
change the defaults for which lines are subject to smoothing

Change Options
Use the Change Opts feature to change the smoothing defaults for each
data file you are editing. The default values for line types are:
Yes Always smooth the line.
No Do not smooth the new lines.
Query Asks if you desire smoothing.
Depending on the type of line selected, these defaults are initially set to:
Yes for contours
Query for faults
No for vertex files

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Data Editor 189

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

You need at least three points in order to smooth a line (two points
already is a smooth straight line). This is very useful when you are trying
to input fault data or contours because it will give them a smooth
appearance instead of a jagged straight line appearance.
The Smoothing Options dialog box lists the Line files subject to
smoothing. If you do not want to accept the defaults which are imposed
on each line type, you can indicate whether you want smoothing for each
of the line types.

Undo Last Edit

Undo Last Edit will give you back your original line before you
performed the last edit. This is useful if you discover that you make a
mistake in editing and really would like it back the way it was before
you tried to change it.

Delete
Delete is designed to eliminate a line (contour, or fault). To delete a line,
place the cursor on the line that you would like to delete and select it. If
you have deleted a line by mistake, you may select Undelete to get your
line back. Use OK when you are finished deleting lines.

Undelete
Undelete will retrieve a line that has been eliminated (deleted). If you
have deleted the wrong line for example, undelete will allow you to get
your line back. After undelete is selected, the lines that have been
deleted will be highlighted. You may select the line to put back with the
cursor. Use Dismiss when you are finished undeleting lines.

New Line
Us the New Line option to create a new line. If it is a contour, you will
also be asked to enter a value for the contour level. Sketch in the new
line using your cursor on the picture. If the smooth option is set to query,
you will need to decide whether to smooth the line. If the smooth option
is set to yes, the line will be smoothed automatically.

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Data Editor 190

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Contour Value Edit

Contour Value Edit enables you to change the value of a contour line.
For example, if you have added a 8500 contour line but incorrectly typed
in that the contour line had a value of 6500, you may select Contour
Value Edit in order to change the contour level to the correct number.
Select the contour that you would like to change the level of with the
cursor.

Point Edit
Point Edit is used to edit vertex points on a line. First select the line with
the cursor. Points along the line will be displayed. You may select to
modify point values, move, delete, or add a point. You may also change
the way the points are displayed.

Select Files
You must have a file selected in order to edit line data, so this option
should be selected only if you would like to access some file in addition
to files you originally selected to edit.

Display Parameters
Display Parameters will allow you to select how you would like lines
displayed on your map in order to help you edit them. There are three
options:
By Line By Line will allow you to select how to display each
line.
All of a Type All of a Type will allow you to display all of the
lines that are the same type (e.g., all contour lines) with the same
end and with the same posting parameters.
Change Default Change Defaults enables you to change the
way new lines of a file type are displayed. It does not change the
way current lines are displayed.
These methods of display allow you to change the line color, the
line type (solid, dashed, etc.), the thickness of bold lines, length of
gaps and dashes if you have dashed lines, etc.

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Data Editor 191

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Autoset Parameters
Use the Autoset Parameters option to specify default values for new
lines.
The editors Autoset Parameters capability enables you to get values
from the files which are selected for editing. For example, a grid can be
used to determine Z-values for new points which you will input. The
Autoset feature is useful for many sorts of editing tasks and can be used
for all data types. The Autoset capability is useful both when you are
creating a new dataset and when you are editing/adding to an existing
dataset. Autoset works with control points, vertex data, and fault files.
You can invoke Autoset from Point Edit, Line Edit, and Create Data.

Select Type
Like the Select File options, Select Type is a choice among already
selected files. It answers the question: For which file do you want to set
Autoset Parameters?

Set File Parameters

Set File Parameters enables you to Autoset Extra Fields and to Snap
Vertices to point locations if you wish to do so.
Autoset Extra Fields The Autoset File Parameters feature
provides the option to Autoset Extra Fields. This feature will
enable the editor to pick up a value (usually a Z-value) from a grid
or control point on which the picture was based. This feature is
especially useful for adding synthesized control points away from
your data, and for creating digitized profiles.
Autoset Extra Fields enables the editor to set field values for new
points automatically. When you input new points, the program sets
all fields to default values. You are not asked to specify the values
for the new points. Unless you specify how to set the values by
using Set Field Parameters, the program sets the field values to the
ZNON (null value) for the field.
Snap Vertices to Point Locations This feature will conform
the vertices of your new data to the control point file you have
selected.

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Data Editor 192

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Snap Vertices to Point Locations is another feature of Autoset

Parameters. When you select this option, the editor will pick up the
x,y location of the nearest point in the selected file and use it as the
location of the new point. Snap Vertices is useful for creating a
subset of an existing point set by graphically selecting the points
for the new set, without having to place the cursor exactly on the
point locations.
When snapping to point locations, you also have the option of
defaulting the field value from a field in the snap to point.
Match Vertices to Points from File This dialog box will
appear only if you answered Yes to Snap Vertices to Point
Locations When you select this option, the editor will pick up the
x,y location of the nearest point in the selected file and use it as the
location of the new point. Snap Vertices is useful for creating a
subset of an existing point set by graphically selecting the points
for the new set, without having to place the cursor exactly on the
point locations.
Select the file whose points you want your new data points to
snap to.

Set Field Parameters

If a grid file is among the data files selected for editing, and if you want
to default the value of this data field from the grid, you can select a grid.
This grid will be back interpolated at the new point locations and the
back interpolated value used as the field value.
When Snapping to Point Locations, you also have the option of
defaulting the field value from a field in the snap to point. See Match
Vertices to Points from File, above.

Edit Lines Contour Level

If the line you are creating is a Contour Line, then you need to specify
the Contour Level for the New Line.

Clear Autoset Parameters

You can erase the autoset file and field parameters by selecting this
option. The values associated with the new lines will not be drawn from
an autoset file.

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Data Editor 193

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Grid Nodes
Select this option to edit grid node values. Grid nodes are calculated in
the gridding option. You may change grid node values, or set grid nodes
equal to ZNON (null data value). When you edit grid nodes directly,
there is no need to re-grid (since this procedure is directly changing the
grid). After you select to edit grid nodes, the grid nodes will be drawn
on your screen.

Change Values
Select this option to change the value of a grid node. For example, if the
grid node had a value of 7543, and you would like it to have a value of
7500, select Change Values. You may then select the grid node whose
value you want to change. Select the grid node you want to edit with
your cursor. You will then see a dialog box that has the current value,
and you may enter the new value. The status area shows the values of
the surrounding grid nodes. You can change values for as many grid
nodes as you like. Select OK to save the changes, or Cancel if you do
not want the changes saved.

Interpolate Values
Select this option to see x, y, and z values for any point on the map. The
program interpolates values based on the values of the surrounding grid
nodes. The Z-value appears on the map. The information for the selected
point appears in the Z-MAP Plus System window.

Select Fault File

Select a fault file from the list that appears. Faults are needed only when
back interpolating surfaces cut by faults. When faults are used, grid
nodes are calculated using only data located on the same side of the
faults as the node. A Fault File must already be on the MFD in order to
be available for this option.

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Data Editor 194

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Area Edit
The Area Edit option will change all of the grid nodes in an area. This is
especially useful for setting large regions of a grid to ZNON (null data
value). When area edit is selected, you may designate an area to edit
with the cursor, or you may select an existing polygon from a previously
created polygon file. You may also use the current view of the picture
on the screen as the area to edit if you do not want to use a polygon file.
You will then get a dialog box where you may enter the value (fill value)
that you would like the grid nodes in the area to have, and you may
select to change the grid nodes either inside or outside of the area that
you selected to edit.

Select Polygon File

You may select a polygon from an existing file as your area to edit, or
create a polygon by using the cursor on the map. The polygon may then
be used for an area edit.

Select Polygon
If a polygon already exists on a the active picture, you can select it.
Selecting the polygon will confine the grid node edit to the area enclosed
by the polygon.

Create Polygon
The purpose of Create Polygon is to allow you to define the area in
which they wish to edit grid node values. Using your cursor, draw a
polygon on your map. Values for points inside or outside the polygon
can be changed.
End And Close will complete the continuous perimeter of the polygon.
The first point of the polygon will become the last point, so that the
polygon is closed.
Delete Last will delete the last line segment you have drawn on the
picture.

Current View
You may use the portion of your map that is on the graphics screen as
the area to edit. If your entire map is still displayed, you may window
(or zoom in) on a smaller portion of the map and use that area as the
current area to edit.

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Data Editor 195

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Set Parameters
This dialog box enables you to enter a replacement value for Z-values
inside the polygon.
Fill Value The Fill Value is the Z-value you want to enter for
the grid area inside or outside the polygon. For example, if you
would like all of the grid nodes inside the polygon to be replaced
by a ZNON, enter the value you are using as the null data value.
Fill Inside/Outside Polygon The replacement Z-value can be
applied to the area Inside or Outside the polygon.

Select File
Use this to select a grid to edit, if the file that you selected from the main
Edit/Create menu is not the file that you really need.

Post Values
Post Values labels the grid nodes with their values. This is useful if you
have not previously labeled the grid node values on your map and need
to see the values in order to determine which ones to edit. You may
change how the grid node symbols and the Z-values appear and control
how much of the grid is posted, the symbol size, color, and symbol
number. If you would like to post values at only a few grid nodes, you
may select Selective Post and only display values for those grid nodes
that you select with the cursor.

Symbol Parameters
This dialog box enables you to set values controlling posted symbols.
Post Symbol at Node Locations The options are to Post or
Omit symbols at grid node locations.
Symbol Size This is the size of the symbol to be posted in
plotter units (in./cm.).
Symbol Color Using a number from 0 255, indicate the color
index for the posted symbol. If you click the color box, a palette of
256 colors appears. Click to select the color you want.
Marker Number Marker Number refers to the number of the
symbol in the Extended Symbol Set. Examples of the symbols and
their numbers can be found in Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and
Line Patterns on page 791.

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Data Editor 196

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Row, Rate, and Column Parameters Starting and Ending

Row, Row Rate, and Starting and Ending Rate, all refer to the
configuration of symbols in the rows and columns of the grid.
These parameters are useful if you would like to display only a
subset of grid nodes on your map. For example, you may want to
start with the 5th row and column of grid nodes and end with the
20th row and column. You could choose to post every 3rd row
(Row Rate) to have an idea of the grid node values in a problem
area.

Value Parameters
This dialog box enables you to control the posting of grid symbols at
symbol locations.
Post Value at Symbol Locations This option enables you to
post the Z-value of the grid node at symbol locations on the picture
you are editing. To post the grid node value, choose Post. If you do
not wish to post the grid node value with the symbol, choose Omit.
Value Size The Value Size is the size of the number
representing the grid node Z value, expressed in display units
(inches or centimeters).
Value Color Value Color is the color of the numbers
representing the grid node Z value. Using a number from 0255,
indicate the color for the posted grid node value. If you click the
color box, a palette of 256 colors appears. Click to select the color
you want.
Number of Decimals This value refers to the number of digits
to the right of the decimal. Indicate how many decimal places you
want to post for your grid values.
Row, Rate, and Column Parameters First and Last Row, Row
Rate, First and Last Column, and Column Rate all refer to the
placement of grid node values in the rows and columns of the grid.
Starting and Ending Row, Row Rate, and Starting and Ending
Rate, all refer to the configuration of symbols in the rows and
columns of the grid. These parameters are useful if you would like
to display only a subset of grid nodes on your map. For example,
you may want to start with the 5th row and column of grid nodes
and end with the 20th row and column. You could choose to post
every 3rd row (Row Rate) to have an idea of the grid node values
in a problem area.

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Data Editor 197

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Selective Post
Instead of using parameter values to select which grid nodes are to be
posted, you can select grid nodes to be posted with your cursor.

Create Data
Create Data uses an existing picture as a graphic aid to create data files.
The data you create using the editor will be stored in an MFD or
OpenWorks unless you use the Update Files option or Cancel Edit
option on the Edit/Create Data main menu.
Select Create Data if you would like to create a data file instead of
editing an existing file. You can create the following types of files:
Contours (CNTR)
Faults (FALT)
Polylines (VERT)
Profiles (DATA)
Control Points (DATA)
You must select the type of data that you would like to create (contour,
fault, etc.), give it a file name, and select an MFD or OpenWorks to save
it on. You may also create extra fields of data (except for X, Y, and
Segment ID and describe what those fields are. X, Y, and Segment ID
may not be used as extra fields of data (these are already required fields
of data for lines).

Contour
Select Contour in order to create a contour file. You will need to select
contours as the type of data to create, give the contour data a file name,
select a destination MFD or OpenWorks to saving the file, and describe
any additional fields that you have. You may use the cursor on your map
in order to input the contour data. You will be asked to enter a contour
level number for each new contour that you input. Contours are
automatically smoothed unless smoothing options have been changed.

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Data Editor 198

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Fault
Fault enables you to create a fault file. You will need to select faults as
the type of data to create, give the fault data a file name, select an MFD
or OpenWorks to write the file to, and describe any additional fields that
you have. You may use the cursor on your map in order to input the fault
data. You may also smooth out the created faults by answering Yes to
the menu that asks if you would like to smooth the line. If you would
like to leave the line just as you have drawn it, answer No to the
smoothing question. When creating a New Fault File, you can also
choose to Autoset Extra Fields and to Snap Vertices to Point Locations;
see Set File Parameters on page 192 for information about these two
options.

Polyline
Polyline enables you to create a line of data. You may enter lines for
coastlines, state or national boundaries, lease lines, etc. You will need to
select polylines as the type of data to create, give the line data a file
name, select an MFD or OpenWorks to write the file to, and describe
any additional fields that you have. You may use the cursor on your map
in order to input the line data. Polylines will not be smoothed until
smoothing options have been changed. When creating a New Line File,
you can also choose to Autoset Extra Fields and to Snap Vertices to
Point Locations; see Set File Parameters on page 192 for information
about these two options

Profile\
Profile enables you to create profile lines. Profiles are vertex lines that
also have a depth (Z) value, so they usually have X, Y, SEG ID, and Z
as their fields. Profiles are useful to input additional information in areas
where there is not enough data to create a reasonable surface model. For
example, if you have an isolated fault block with two wells, inputting
profile data will allow you to have enough data to create a reasonable
contour map in the area.
Once profile data has been created you may use it in gridding. A dialog
box will appear that will allow you to input the Z-value for each vertex
point that you enter. You will need to select profiles as the type of data
to create, give the profile data a file name, select an MFD to write the
file to, and describe any additional fields that you have. You may use the
cursor on your map in order to input the profile data. When creating a
New Profile File, you can also choose to Autoset Extra Fields and to
Snap Vertices to Point Locations; see Set File Parameters on
page 192 for information about these two options.

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Data Editor 199

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Control Point
Use Control Point to create well or seismic data in the current map with
the cursor. You may also input several Z-fields if you would like to. You
will need to select control points as the type of data to create, give the
control point data a file name, select an MFD to write the file to, and
describe any additional fields that you have. You may use the cursor on
your map in order to input the control point data. When creating a New
Control Point File, you can also choose to Autoset Extra Fields and to
Snap Vertices to Point Locations; see Set File Parameters on
page 192 for information about these two options.

Field Descriptors
This dialog box enables you to describe fields on the file you are
creating. The values entered on this dialog box describe fields in
addition to the ones required by each of the specific data types being
created. Field description is not allowed for contour data. For new fault,
line, and profile files, you may describe up to eight fields in addition to
X, Y, and Segment ID. For control point files, you may describe up to
eight fields in addition to X and Y.
This dialog box can appear up to eight times, one time for each of the
additional fields you have specified for the new data you are creating.
Each of the parameter values should be set to match the specific field (1
8) which is being described.
Field Name This dialog box enables you to name one or more
of the fields you specified for the data you are creating. The
number of fields you can name depends on the number of fields
you specified in the Filename, Master File Name, and Number of
Fields dialog box. You can specify a as many as eight fields in
addition to the required fields for the kind of data you are creating.
Supply a Field Name for each of the additional fields which will
appear on the file you are creating. The dialog box will appear as
many times as there are fields to be described.
Field Type There are eight choices for Field Type: Z-value,
Text Size, Character Size, Symbol Code, Delta Z-Throw, Dip
Angle, Color, and Other Field Types. For each time the dialog box
appears assign the appropriate field type for each of the additional
fields in the data you are creating.
Number of Characters (Text Field Only) This number refers
to the number of characters in the character string. It applies only
to the Text Field.

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Data Editor 200

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Associated Grid (Z Field Only) The editor associates grids

with data by two different means: 1) It uses grids you have
specifically selected to edit, and 2) It uses the data on which your
picture was based. If you have selected to edit a grid, or if the
picture you are using to create your new data was based on a grid,
you must make a choice. You can associate a given Z field with a
grid on the list, or you can choose No Grid. If there are no grids
associated with your data at present, the program will lock on to
the No Grid option.
Default Value From Field This option refers to the fields on
the Match Vertices to Points from File list. For each of the
additional fields you have selected to create, you can choose the
field on the Match Vertices to Points File from which you want
your new field to get its value. For fields 18, choose the field on
the Match Vertices file from which you want the default value for
each field to be set.
This option will appear only if you have opted to Snap Vertices to
Point Locations. You had this option presented in the Filename,
master file Name, and Number of Fields dialog box. If you
answered Yes to the Snap Option, another dialog box appeared,
requiring you to select a data file. The Match Vertices to Points
from File dialog box presented a list of data files. When you
selected a file from this list, you indicated to the program that you
want your new data points to snap to the vertices of the nearest
matching control point on that data file.

Regrid
You can regrid:
a polygonal area of a grid
the area of the active picture (view limits) currently displayed
the area of the picture (picture limits)
After you have edited data, such as control point or contour data, you
may regrid the edited area by selecting Regrid. Regrid will calculate
new grid node values using the data that you select (usually you want to
use the edited data you just created) and it will smoothly patch the new
grid node values into the original grid. Only the grid nodes in the
selected area can change. Since regrid has to make calculations over the
area that you specify, it is advisable to regrid in the edited area only - for
this reason, regrid is much quicker if you keep the edited area as small
as possible.

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Data Editor 201

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

When using contour data, Regrid will use the CTOG (contour to grid)
algorithm to regrid. When possible, Regrid will use the same algorithm
and parameters that were used in building the original grid.

Set Limits
Set Limits enables you to select where you would like regridding to
occur. You may select a polygon file, then a polygon to limit the
regridding, or you may create a new polygon to control where
regridding will take place, You may also use the current view on the
screen as the area to regrid.
Select Polygon File You may select a polygon from an existing
file as your area to regrid, or create a new polygon using the cursor
on your map. The polygon may then be used for as the area to
regrid.
Select Polygon Enables you to select a specific polygon from
the active files. Values for points inside or outside the polygon can
be regridded. The polygon(s) on the Polygon File you have
selected will appear on your picture. Select the polygon you wish
to use in regridding.
Create Polygon Using your cursor, draw a polygon on your
map. Values for points inside or outside the polygon can be
regridded.
View Limits When you select View Limits, you are indicating
that you want to regrid in the area currently displayed on the
picture on your Graphics Display.
Picture Limit When you select Picture Limit, you are
indicating that you want to regrid in the entire area of the picture.
Set Flags After the area to regrid has been established, you can
determine how regridding will treat null values in the original grid,
and what regridding will do with regridded nulls. You also specify
whether the program regrids inside or outside the polygon you
have defined.
Replace Nulls in Grid with Regrid Values Replace Nulls
in Grid with Regrid Values will allow regridding to calculate a
good grid node value for grid nodes in the edited area that were
previously calculated as ZNONs (null data values).
Replace Values in Grid with Regrid Nulls Replace Values
in Grid with Regrid Nulls will allow regridding to replace grid
nodes in the edit area that previously had a data value with the
ZNON value.

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Data Editor 202

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Regrid Inside or Outside of Polygon When you execute

regridding, the grid values will be recalculated only in the area
you define for regridding. Indicate whether you want
regridding to occur inside or outside the polygon or area you
have defined.

Files/Fields
Select Files/Fields in order to select the files that you would like to have
an effect on regridding, or in order to select fields of data to be used in
regridding, if several Z fields exist. After you select the files/fields to
regrid, you will be asked for the output file name and the destination
MFD or OpenWorks.
Select Regrid Contour File If you would like your regrid files
and fields to be based on a contour file, select the contour file to be
used.
Select Regrid Fault File If you would like your regrid files and
fields to be based on a fault file, select the fault file you want.
Select Regrid Profile File If you would like your regrid files
and fields to be based on a profile file, select the profile file you
want.
Select Regrid Profile Z-field A list of fields on your profile file
appears. Select the Z-field you would like to use in regridding.
Select Regrid Point File If you would like a Point File to be
used in Regridding, select the point file you wish to use.
Select Regrid Point Z-field Select the Z-field from your Point
File which you wish to use in Regridding.
Select Grid To Regrid Select the Grid whose values are to be
recalculated.

Auto Regrid
Auto Regrid will regrid your edited area using default parameters that
have been calculated based on your data.

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Data Editor 203

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Manual Regrid
Manual Regrid enables you to enter your own parameters to control how
grid node values are calculated. You will be asked to select a gridding
method (line gridding, point gridding, etc.), and Gridding Parameters
(see help on gridding if you need further help on gridding parameters).
Not all gridding methods are valid with all data types. For example, the
only gridding method that works with contours is CTOG. You will only
be allowed to select a gridding method that is valid for the (current) data
selected for regridding.
Select Method This dialog box enables you to select a gridding
method with which to perform the regrid. Select the method of
gridding you want to use in the regrid area.
Parameters A list of parameters associated with the gridding
method appears. You can choose a gridding algorithm available in
that method. For a definition of each of the parameters on the
Regrid Parameters dialog box, see the definitions supplied under
Gridding Methods:
Point Gridding
Trend Fit Gridding
Contour Gridding
Line Gridding
Point Gridding Plus
Filter Only

Contour Edit Area

Contour Edit Area will re-contour the area that you have regridded in
order to see the effects of regridding on your map. The new (and old)
contours will be displayed on the screen, but not saved on your picture
unless you select to have the new contours added to your picture. If you
add the contours in the edit area to the picture, and it will leave the old
contours on the picture also.

Contour Grid Area

Contour Grid Area will contour the entire grid area and allow you to see
the effects of re-gridding on your map. You may add these to your
picture to save them, and you also have the option to replace the old
contours that were on the map with the new contours of the grid area.

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Data Editor 204

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Select Data
To edit data you must have a picture to work with. Attach the ZGF that
contains the picture you want to edit. (You can attach the ZGF by using
the File New Graphics File(ZGF) option.) To edit the data used
to create the picture, you also must verify that the MFD that contains the
data is attached.
If the MFD that contains the data files which were used to create the
picture is attached, then the editor automatically selects the data files.
The Select Data option is on the main menu in case you would like to
select data files other than those on which your active picture was
created. If you only want to edit the control point data or the contour
data, Select Data can enable you to restrict your edits to these files.
If you Select Data from the Edit/Create main menu, these files will be
available for any of the types of data editing. If you enter a specific
editing application and want to add to your scope, you can Select Data
in that application.

Select Files For Editing

When you choose Select Data on the main menu, a dialog box appears.
The Select Files for Editing dialog box contains a list of Data Types that
can be edited:
Polyline
Contour
Fault
Grid
Point
Profile
Vertex
Select the data types you want. Files corresponding to these data types
on the currently attached MFDs or OpenWorks are now available for
selection. Items already selected appear in reverse color. Click to clear
the selection for data types you do not want to edit.
Faults are needed only when building surfaces cut by faults. A Fault File
must have been previously constructed in order to be available for this
option.

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Data Editor 205

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

The editor works with the Segment ID field on the profile data. Profiles
are like cross sections that have X, Y, and Z-values at each digitized
point along the cross section. Straight line connections are made
between these X-Y-Z points along each profile. The straight line
connections that intersect Contour Gridding search lines create
Intersection Points for use during the gridding process. These profiles
are commonly used to more adequately control gridding between or
away from contours, near faults, and in areas of rapid gradient changes.

Update Files
When you exit the editor, edited files are automatically written to the
MFD or OpenWorks and the picture is updated. The default file name is
the same as the input file name with a version identifier added. The
default MFD is the one that contained the original data. Select Update
Files to change the default names and MFDs or to force an intermediate
version of the data to be written.
Normally, using the editor does not require selecting the update files
option.

Select Files
A list of files known to the editor for the current editing session is
presented. The files known to the editor were selected either because the
current picture is based on them, or because you specifically selected the
files for editing. You can choose to update one or more files, or all files.
A list of files is presented. Point to and click the file you want.

Output Filenames/Master File

If you select Output Filenames/Master Files, a dialog box appears.
You must name an output file and a destination (an MFD or
OpenWorks) for each output file created in the editing session. You
specify the output file name by entering an alphanumeric string from the
keyboard. These names may be up to 24 characters long and may
contain internal blanks. Select the Output Master File from a list. Click
the box to the right of the parameter to view the list of the attached
MFDs, a scratch file, and OpenWorks. Select the destination (the MFD
or OpenWorks) to use for storing the output file.

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Data Editor 206

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Update Picture Flags

Normally the picture file is updated whenever a file displayed on the
picture is updated. Using this option, you may specify that edits not be
reflected on your picture. Update Picture Flags also enables you to have
created line data added to your picture.

Cancel Edit
Select Cancel Edit in order to quit from an editing session and not save
any files. Cancel Edit will cancel the changes made to one or more
datasets. A list of the currently edited files is displayed. Select the files
for which you want to cancel the changes you have made during this
editing session. If you click OK, editing on selected files will be
cancelled. The files selected under the cancel function will return to
their condition prior to the start of the editing session. You may then
continue editing with the original data or exit the editor without the
selected files being updated.

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Data Editor 207

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Color Overview
The colors assigned to each feature or part of a feature, such as lines,
text, polygons, etc., are stored in the pictures color table. Use the Color
Table option to perform color editing by displaying and modifying the
color table.
If you select the Color Table option in Z-MAP Plus, the Color Table
display and the Edit Color Table dialog box appear. Select colors (one
by one) to edit from the Color Table display, and perform the edit in the
Edit Color Table dialog box. The results appear in the Color Table
display.
This topic begins with an overview of how Z-MAP Plus determines
color for a specific feature. This is followed by a description of the Edit
Color Table dialog box. Next, you will find a general explanation of the
Edit Color Table dialog box. If you are familiar with the basics
regarding color graphics and the color table, turn to the discussion of the
Color Editing options that begins with Set Color Mode RGB or HLS on
page 213.
The fundamental units of graphics are called primitives. Z-MAP Plus
supports four types of graphic primitives:
line strings
symbols
text
polygons
Each primitive has an attribute called color.
Rather than identifying the color of a primitive directly, color is
identified indirectly as an index into a table of available colors. The
Z-MAP Plus color table is indexed from 0 to 255, and supports 256
colors. Each entry to the table is described using the Red, Green, Blue
(RGB) color model.
Although colors can be defined in either the RGB or Hue, Lightness and
Saturation (HLS) model, HLS parameters are converted to and stored as
RGB parameters in the color table. The RGB model describes color as
three numbers in the range of zero to one. These three numbers indicate
the relative amounts of red, green and blue that are added together to
obtain the color. HLS describes color by the angle of hue (from 0 - 360
degrees) and the percentage of lightness and saturation (from 0 - 100%).

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Color Overview 208

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Color Table
To display the color table, click the Color Table icon or select Edit
Color Table in the Z-MAP Plus window.
The color table can have a maximum of 256 colors. The first eight
standard Z-MAP Plus colors follow:

0 = background (black/white)
1 = normal foreground (white/black)
2 = red
3 = green
4 = blue
5 = cyan
6 = magenta
7 = yellow

Each color cell in the table has an assigned index number. The colors in
the table are assigned to indexes zero through seven. These color
associations may only be valid the first time you enter the program. The
color table for all future sessions is based on the changes made in the
previous session.

The RGB Color System

The color table stores colors in the RGB Color Coordinate System. A
color index number which is listed down one side of the Color Table
display refers to the RGB scale found in the Edit Color Edit dialog box.
The amount of each color used may range from zero to one; however,
their combined total does not have to equal one.

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Color Table 209

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

HLS Color System

You may wish to change the color descriptor mode to Hue, Lightness,
and Saturation (HLS).
Hue is determined by the wave length of light reflected from a surface.
Lightness is the amount of color reflected from a surface and Saturation
is the intensity of the color.
Hue is measured in degrees. The degree measurements for some hues
are:
Blue = 0
Magenta = 60
Red = 120
Yellow = 180
Green = 240
Cyan = 360
Both Lightness and Saturation are defined on a scale from 0 to 100
percent. A Lightness of 0 produces a dark shade, while a Lightness of
100 produces a very light shade. Likewise, a completely desaturated
color is gray, while a completely saturated color is at its most intense.

RGB HLS
COLOR
Red Green Blue Hue % Lightness % Saturation

Blue 0 0 1 0 50 100

Magenta 1 0 1 60 50 100

Red 1 0 0 120 50 100

Yellow 1 1 0 180 50 100

Green 0 1 0 240 50 100

Cyan 0 1 1 300 50 100

Black 0 0 0 N/A 0 N/A

Grey same amount of each* N/A 199* 0

White 1 1 1 N/A 100 N/A

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Color Table 210

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Description of the Color Table Display

When you display the Color Table, only the colors used in the current
map appear. However, you can select any blank cell and the
corresponding color appears.
A sample Color Table display is shown in the following example.

The Color Table display has 16 rows and 16 columns. To calculate the
index number for a cell you want to change, add the number on the left
side of the row to the number at the top of the column:
Example:
The cell in the eighth row and seventh column is
Color Index 119: 112 + 7 = 119

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Color Table 211

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Description of the Edit Color Table Dialog Box

The Edit Color Table dialog box contains these elements:

Status line
Prompt line
RGB and HLS color mode toggle
Action menu
Color editing area
Option to update picture dynamically or on demand
Standard window buttons

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Color Table 212

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Status/Prompt
The status line and prompt line guides you through the action options.
The instructions are action-specific. For example, if you select Display
you see:
Status: Display from
Prompt: Identify first color
Next, select a cell in the Color Table display. You see:
Status: Display from
Prompt: Identify second color
The underscored area in the status line contains the number of the first
color cell to be displayed.

Set Color Mode RGB or HLS

You can select either RGB or HLS color mode in the Edit Color Table
dialog box. RGB is the default mode.
RGB creates colors by combining the three primary colors of light:
red, green and blue.
HLS mixes colors based on hue, lightness, and saturation. Hue is
determined by the wave length of light reflected from a surface.
Lightness is the amount of color reflected from a surface, and
saturation is the intensity of the color.

Edit
If you select the Edit option, the RGB or HLS color descriptors for the
specified color index appear. In addition to viewing the current
descriptors, you can redefine these values, changing the display color.
By moving the sliders, you can adjust the selected color index.
The RGB scroll bars for altering the amounts of red, green and blue in a
specified color index are shown in the following example detail:

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Color Table 213

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Display
To view all of the colors in the color table, select the Display option.
Then select the first and last cells in the color table, and all of the colors
stored in the color table appear. If your terminal supports fewer than 256
colors, the program approximates any unsupported colors you request to
be displayed. For example, pink might appear as red.
If the program supports fewer than 256 colors (say it supports only 128
colors), the program first blanks out the colors originally displayed on
the map, then one by one it blanks out the first 128 colors in order to
display colors in cells 129 through 255.
To display a series of colors, select the first and last cells in the sequence
you wish to display. For example, to display the colors in cells 1 through
200, select cell 1 and cell 200.

Copy
Use the Copy option in the Edit Color Table dialog box to copy the color
associated with one index in the color table to another color index
position. For example, lets say you copy the color for Index 1 to Index
12. Index 1 and Index 12 have the same color as a result.

Interpolate
You can linearly interpolate the color descriptor values in a specified
range on the color table. Since linear interpolation produces gradual
shading along the specified color range, this option is most often applied
to Colorfill or to data posting to help visualize the difference between
Z-values.
You can interpolate color descriptor values in either RGB or the HLS
mode. To interpolate directly, use RGB. To interpolate in hue around the
spectrum, use HLS.

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Color Table 214

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

HLS Interpolation

WHITE 0 Saturation 100 100

75

Lightness
Red 120 60

180 Hue 0 Blue 50

Green 240 300

25

BLACK 0

HLS Color Model

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Color Table 215

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

RGB Interpolation
CYAN
(0, 100, 100)

BLUE
(0, 0, 100)
WHITE
(100, 100, 100)

MAGENTA
(100, 0, 100)
E
AL
SC
AY
GR GREEN
(0, 100, 0)

BLACK
(0, 0, 0)
YELLOW
(100, 100, 0)

RED
(100, 0, 0)

RGB Color Model

Read
Use the Read option in the Edit Color Table dialog box to read in (load)
any color table that has been saved to file. Select Read and Select a color
table from the list of color tables (files with extension .TBL or .tbl)
appears. The color tables are selected from the directories specified in
the Color tab of the Directory Paths dialog box (as described on Color
Tables on page 115). If the file you want is not in this list, check the
directory path.

Write
Use the Write option to write the revised color table to a file. Use the
extension .TBL or .tbl. If you do not specify an extension, the program
adds .TBL to the name you specify.

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Color Table 216

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Update picture dynamically

Use the Update picture dynamically check box to specify whether you
want the current map to update continuously as you edit color values or
on demand.
Selected The map updates as you move the sliders.
Performance may be slow for a large map.
Cleared (Default) You see the effect of color changes only if
you save them by clicking the Apply or OK button.

Saving the Changes to the Color Table

To save the changes to the color table, click Apply or OK in the Edit
Color Table dialog box. If you click Apply, the current map display is
updated, and the dialog box remains open for further changes. If you
click OK, the current map display is updated, and the dialog box closes.
If you do not want to save changes, click Cancel or Reset. The Reset
button restores the original settings without closing the Edit Color Table
dialog box. The Cancel button closes the dialog box without saving
changes. In either case, the color table is unchanged.
The changes you make are stored with the current pictures color table.
This version is used to generate future pictures until you edit the color
table again.

You May Never See the Default Color Table Again

The color table uses the default values the first time you start Z-MAP Plus. If
you change the color table, the changes are saved when you exit from the
program. The next time you start Z-MAP Plus, the most recent color table is
used. Remember you can save color tables to separate files and reload them.

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Color Table 217

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Color Indices
To execute the Color Indices operation, select the Color Indices menu
option or click the Color Indices icon in the Z-MAP Plus window.
When you invoke Color Indices, a list appears that shows the map
graphic features you can display. Features may include borders, labels,
contours, title blocks, and the north arrow. When you select a feature to
modify its color index, the SELECT Default COLOR INDICES dialog
box appears. Enter a color index number for one of the following
components or click the swatch to select a new color from the color
table:
Line Color Index
Text Color Index
Symbol Color Index
Polygon Color Index

Swatch

When you modify the color index, you:

Specify a color index number of any of the color indices pertinent
to that type of feature.
Store parameter choices by clicking OK.
The list of features reappears so you can choose another graphical
feature and change the Color Index of its components. When you finish
modifying features, close the dialog box by clicking Cancel.
Color index editing does not affect features already on a map; it only
affects the features you add after you edit the color index

R2003.12.0 Edit Menu Options: Color Indices 218

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Features

Overview
Use the Features menu options control what is displayed in the display
area of the Z-MAP Plus window. This option is active only if a picture
is selected (currently active).
The Features menu includes options for these tasks:
Adding graphic features to the display, such as borders, grid nodes,
labels, lines, north arrows, scale bars, and title blocks.
Displaying contours, point data, deviated wells, seismic data, text,
maps and cross sections.
Overlaying multiple pictures (maps and cross sections) as one
picture.
Manipulating the Z-MAP Plus window display area.

Basemap
Use the Features: Basemap option to add borders, labels, scale bars,
title block, North arrows, and an index map to the current map by using
a the Basemap Features dialog box (page 223).

Cross Section
The Features: Cross Section menu has two options for cross section
features:
Cross Section Features Draws horizons (grid profiles) and Top
picks from wells on the current picture. Control is provided for:
which grids or fields to display, whether to use faults, line type and
width, and other parameters. In addition, the grids as displayed in
the cross section can be output as profile data to the MFD
(page 226).
Map Features Adds map features such as a border, labels,
scale bars, a title block, or an index map to the cross section
(page 232).

R2003.12.0 Features: Overview 219

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Overlay Pictures
Use the Features: Over Pictures option to overlay one or more features
from one picture onto another picture (page 233).

Contouring
The Features: Contouring menu contains six contouring method
options:
Contour Acts as the updated interface to the powerful
NEW-CONTOUR macro. Use this option to build a contour map
and select contour map options (page 239).
Contour Old Generates annotated contours from grid or
digitized contour data. These annotated contours are included as
part of the information on a contour map. Contour lines are drawn
across an area of equal elevation or equal time values (page 240).
Fast Contour Uses the FASTCONTOURMAP macro to build
a grid, then generate a contour map from the selected Z-field in the
data file (page 246).
3D Fishnet Plot Generates an isometric plot or perspective
map (page 246).
Shaded Relief Produces a brightness grid for contouring with
colorfill (page 247).
Color Scale Draws a color scale that relates a series of color
indices to a variation in a quantity. You typically use this option to
add a color scale bar to a color-filled contour map, but you can also
use it to show almost any quantity variation (page 251).

Lines
Use the Features: Lines option to post lines from data files, or for
drawing lines on a picture freehand (page 252).

Text
The Features: Text menu contains two options:
File Text Add text to the picture by using a file as the text
source (page 272).
Key Text Add text to the picture by entering it from the
keyboard (page 273).

R2003.12.0 Features: Overview 220

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Grid Nodes
Use the Features: Grid Nodes option to place symbols and optional
grid values at each node location. While grid node values are not
normally marked on finished maps, grid editing is sometimes facilitated
by having a work map which shows all grid values (page 275).

Polygons
Use the Features: Polygons options to add polygons to a map. This
menu contains three options:
Color-filled Polygons Enables you to fill a polygon with a solid
color (page 277).
Lease Polygon Drawing Posts leases. This option enables you
to define each lease by colored lines, hachuring or color-fill
(page 278).
Shaded Polygons Fills a set of polygons with hachured lines
(page 279).

(X,Y,Z) Point Data

Use the Features: (X,Y,Z) Point Data option to place symbols at
control point locations. In addition, you may post Z-field values and/or
other information around the posted symbols. For example, you can post
the well name above the well symbol and the depth to a particular
horizon below the well symbol (page 280).

Deviated Wells
Use the Features: Deviated Wells option to post and label the top,
bottom, and well trace of deviated wells. The process provides
significant control over size and color of posted features (page 291).

2DSeismic
Use the Features: 2D Seismic option to post seismic line data on the
map (page 321). This option was once called Seismic (Old).

3D Seismic
Use the Features: 3D Seismic option to post both 3D surveys and 2D
seismic data to the map (page 338). This option was once called
Seismic (New).

R2003.12.0 Features: Overview 221

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Surveys (Canadian)
Z-MAP Plus supports many types of Canadian surveys (on Solaris and
IRIX platforms):
Create DLS/NTS PictureCreates a picture using the Dominion
Land Survey (DLS) and /or the National Topographic Survey
(NTS) system (page 364).
Post DLS & NTS SurveysPosts DLS and NTS lines and labels
on an existing picture. You must supply both areas present to use
this option (page 365).
Create & Post DLS PictureCreates a picture on which you can
plot DLS information (page 366).
Create & Post NTS PictureCreates a picture on which you can
plot NTS information (page 366).
NAD 27NAD 83 Datum Shifttranslates NAD 27 latitudes and
longitudes to NAD 83 state plane projections and vice versa
(page 367).
Post Township/Section Range (DLS)Draws the Township,
Section, Quarter Section along with the Township and Section
labels. (page 367)
Post National Topo. Survey (NTS)Posts National Topographic
Survey (NTS), Map, Series, Block, Unit and/or Quarter lines and
labels on an existing picture (page 368).

Projection Box
Use the Features: Projection Box option to execute the
POST-PIC-STATS macro and post AOI and Projection on a map
(page 369). (For more information about this macro, see the Macro
Reference Manual for Z-MAP Plus / ZCL.)

Picture Assembly
Use the Features: Picture Assembly option to assemble many any
pictures on one picture. Control is provided for features selected,
position, and size for each picture to be assembled (page 370).

R2003.12.0 Features: Overview 222

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Basemap (Basemap Features Dialog Box)

Use the Basemap Features dialog box to add graphic features to the
current map, such as a border, labels, scale bars, a title block, a North
arrow, or an index map.
To display the Basemap Features dialog box, select Features
Basemap or click the Basemap Features icon. These options are
available only if a picture or map is currently displayed in the
Z-MAP Plus window.

Post Radio Button and Asterisks

To activate the options in any of the Basemap Features dialog box tabs, select
the Post radio button.
Once you select the Post radio button, an asterisk appears beside the tab name
to indicate that it is active. Next time you click OK or Apply All, the features
on all the active tabs are added to the map.

To use the Basemap Features dialog box, follow these steps:

1. Select the tab for the type of feature you want to add. The tab
appears in front.
2. Select the Post radio button at the top of the tab. The tabs option
become active.
3. Specify parameter values for the features you are adding.
4. Click the Apply button at the bottom of the dialog box to add the
feature described in the current tab. You can also specify features
on multiple tabs, then click the OK or Apply All button to add all
the tabs features simultaneously.
For details about the parameters, click the Help button in the Basemap
Features dialog box. The context-sensitive help system window appears.

R2003.12.0 Features: Basemap (Basemap Features Dialog Box) 223

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

A summary of the tabs follows:

Border Draw a line around the entire area occupied by the basemap.
You can set the border line weight, color, and appearance (such as a
solid or dashed line).
Labels [N/E] Add non-projected X (northing) and Y (easting) labels
around the edge of the map or cross section. You can also add ticks at
coordinate cross points.
Labels [L/L] Add projected latitude and longitude labels (and ticks
at cross points, optionally). This tab appears only if you have a projected
map displayed.
Scale Bar Add one or more scale bars, stacked in a block. The scale
bars correlate the map units to real distances. You can specify the units
used for each scale bar, as well as the height, width, and position of the
scale bar block.
Title Block Add a title block that can contain the company name and
location, five lines of additional text, the author, scale, and map file
number. You can specify the text, as well as the title block size and
position. (For information about customizing a title block, see
Appendix H. Customized Title Blocks, starting on page 897.)
North Arrow Add an arrow pointing in the north compass direction.
You can specify the arrows location, length, and rotation.
Index Map Add a miniature version of a previously created picture.
Index maps are often used to show a larger scale representation of the
area surrounding the detail map shown in the display.

R2003.12.0 Features: Basemap (Basemap Features Dialog Box) 224

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Basemap Features Buttons

The Basemap Features dialog box has two sets of buttonsbuttons that
appear on each tab and buttons along the bottom that affect all tabs.
Some of the buttons behave differently than standard Z-MAP Plus
buttons, as described in the following tables.

Buttons on Individual Tabs

Apply Adds the feature described on the currently displayed tab.

Unlock Unlocks all parameters on the current tab.
Clear Border, Scale Bar, Title Block, N. Arrow, and Index Map
tabs: Resets all parameter values on the current tab to the default
setting (if any).
Set to AOI Label [N/E] and Label L/L] tabs: Resets all parameter values on
the current tab to either the values derived from the map AOI or to
any default setting that is pre-defined. (For example, the Top /
Bottom Label Min and Side Label Min values are reset to
AOI-specific values. The Label Mode and Label Placement values
are reset to default values.)
Reset Resets all parameter settings on the current tab to their saved values
(the values that were set the last time you clicked the OK, Apply,
Apply All, or Save All button).

Buttons at the Bottom of the Dialog Box

OK Adds the active features (features on tabs with the Post check box
selected) and closes the Basemap Features dialog box.
Apply All Adds the active features and leaves the Basemap Features dialog
box open.
Save All Saves all the current settings without adding any features. The
saved settings appear the next time you click the Reset or Reset All
button.
Unlock All Unlocks the parameter values on all tabs.
Clear All Resets parameter values on all tabs to their default settings (if any).
The settings related to the AOI are derived from the current picture.
Other settings may be derived from the most recently saved display
parameter values.
Reset All Resets parameter values on all tabs to their saved values (the values
that were set the last time you clicked the OK, Apply, Apply All, or
Save All button).
Cancel Closes the Basemap Features dialog box without adding any
features to the map.
Help Starts the browser-based help system for Basemap Features.

R2003.12.0 Features: Basemap (Basemap Features Dialog Box) 225

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Cross Section
The Features Cross Section option is divided into two suboptions:
Cross Section Features
Map Features

Cross Section Features

Cross Section Features enables you to draw horizons and top picks from
wells on the currently active cross section. Use this panel to choose
parameter settings for:
horizons
wells
Cross-section Horizons generates a cross-section curve from a specified
grid and identifies that curve by a name.
Cross-section Wells projects wells onto a cross section and displays
them as sticks on the section. The well name and other data can be
displayed at the top of each stick.

Horizons
You can select a maximum of ten horizons to display in the cross
section. If you select the Cross Section Features option after you create
a cross-section plot, the program remembers the cross-section horizons
and baseline used to generate the picture. If another picture is generated
before the cross-section features are placed on the map, however, you
must specify the baseline and the horizons.

Baseline
The baseline marks the location where the cross section is constructed.
Select the baseline file from a vertex file that is in the Area of Interest
(AOI) of the grid profiles and is on an MFD. The grid profiles appear
along the baseline if you create a cross section. The baseline defaults to
the one selected for AOI setup. You can create a baseline by selecting a
map, then selecting the Edit Edit/Create Data option, and choosing
to create a vertex line.

R2003.12.0 Features: Cross Section 226

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

The vertex file should be composed of a set of x,y points in the baseplane
of the input grids, which, when connected by line segments, marks the
baseline for the cross section. This baseline is the source for all possible
points where cross-section values must be computed. Closely spaced x,y
points along the baseline are the locations where the surface values are
computed.
If you want to post wells on a line of section, the horizon must lie within
the minimum and maximum range of the cross section, and the
bandwidth must be large enough so the well can be projected onto the
line of section.

Select Baseline File

A list of vertex files is presented. Select the file you want. This file is
used as the cross-section baseline.

Horizons
Cross sections are made from grids. Surface values at closely spaced x,y
points along the baseline are computed by back interpolation from the
input grids. This gives a point d,z on the cross-section axes where d is
the distance along the baseline from the first point and z is the value of
the surface at x,y. These are connected by line segments to depict the
cross-section curve. The back interpolation scheme used for cross
sections is the same one used for contouring; therefore, cross sections
intersect contour elevations at the expected points along the baseline.
The cross-section curve between contour elevations reveals how the
gridded surface behaves between contours.

Select Input Fields (Ordered Selection)

The ordered selection panel is required when you have the option of
determining the order in which field labels or symbols will be posted, or
the order in which fields will be printed on a report.

Horizon Labels
Labels are strings of, at most, 20 characters that are used to distinguish
one surface from the next on a stacked or composite cross section. The
labels or names will default to the name of the horizon selected to
generate the curves or they may be input using a keyboard.
A dialog box appears, listing each of the selected grid files. Enter the
label for each horizon that will appear on the cross section.

R2003.12.0 Features: Cross Section 227

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Faults
Input grid profiles can include fault data. If this is the case, include the
fault data when you make the cross section.
Faults are digitized curves that have a discontinuous (faulted) surface.
In computer mapping, curves with a discontinuous surface are called
fault traces. The x,y points along a fault must be sequentially digitized,
so that connecting the points with line segments adequately reconstructs
the fault trace. Faults can either be single curves (denoting vertical faults
or very small fault throws) or double-sided curves (indicating the
amount of throw on the fault). For double-sided curves, a trace is
distinguished from the next trace in the dataset by a unique fault number
that follows each of the x,y points along a fault. When processing a
faulted surface, you must enter the corresponding fault data for that
surface. Select the fault files in the same order as you selected the
corresponding horizons.

Select Input Fields (Ordered Selection)

The ordered selection panel is required when you have the option of
determining the order in which field labels or symbols are posted, or the
order in which fields are printed on a report.

Horizon Parameters
Horizon Parameters include:
Line Number
Labeling Size
Grid Sampling Rate

Line Number
The baseline may be composed of one or more line segments that
connect a series of points, such as a set of well locations. If there is more
than one line segment in a file, you must enter the number that
corresponds to the line segment you wish to use. Each line on the file
should have a unique line number.

Labeling Size
Labels are drawn at the size (in plotter units) specified by this parameter.
By knowing the character size and number of characters, you can
determine how much margin space is required to name the curves.
Change the right offset (margin) to allow complete labels to be printed.

R2003.12.0 Features: Cross Section 228

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Grid Sampling Rate

The Sampling Rate determines the number of points used to represent
the cross-section curve. The options are:
Coarse 1
Medium 4
Fine 8
Very Fine16
(sampling rate)(number of points representing cross section
curve)
Using Fine, for example, causes the process to interpolate up to eight
points across a grid cell. Fewer points are generated if the baseline cuts
across a corner of the cell. Most cross sections are adequately made
using the default of Medium. The Very Fine rate may be required for
extremely rough surfaces However, the finer the grid sampling rate, the
greater the processing time.

Grid Sampling Distance

You can specify sampling in cross sections as a distance as well as a rate.
Specify the distance (in engineering units) over which you want the
sampling to occur.

Output Files
You can save a maximum of ten cross-section files that contain the x,y,z
sample points created for the associated grid when making the cross
section. Use this panel to give each of the cross-section files a file name,
and to assign each of the output files to either OpenWorks or an MFD.

Output cross section file name (Up to 10 Files)

Enter the name of the files to be created. The names can be a maximum
of 24 characters long and can contain internal blanks.

Master File Directory for Output file X

Click the Master File Directory for Output File box to display a list
that contains the option Openworks, the MFDs attached to the
Z-MAP Plus session, and the session scratch file. Select the destination
MFD to use for saving the output file.

R2003.12.0 Features: Cross Section 229

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Wells
Wells should be selected if you would like to post the well data that lies
within a user-specified bandwidth of the cross-section baseline. The
wells that do not fall directly on the baseline will be projected onto the
baseline at right angles, as long as they fall within the bandwidth
specified for your baseline. You may also post any field of data that is
stored with your well data, for example, the well name and the depth
fields.

Baseline
The Baseline marks the linear location where the cross section is
constructed. Wells can be projected onto the baseline within a
user-specified bandwidth (distance).
From the list that appears, select a file to use as the cross section
baseline. This should be the same file you selected under Horizons.

Well Data
From the list of data files that appears, select the control point file that
contains the well to add to the cross section. A field will be selected from
this file and used as input when the option executes.

Horizons
If you select Horizons from the Wells menu, a symbol is posted at each
selected horizon. You choose the horizons you want from the fields
found on the input Well Data File.

Select Input Fields (Ordered Selection)

The ordered selection panel is required when you have the option of
determining the order in which field labels or symbols will be posted, or
the order in which fields will be printed on a report. Label Horizons

Label Horizons
All selected horizons can be labeled with one data field. A panel will
appear for each of the horizons you have selected. You will choose one
label field for each of these horizons. Horizon Labels default to the grid
name of each selected horizon. The Horizon Labels will be written in the
right margin (offset).

R2003.12.0 Features: Cross Section 230

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Label Wells
Using Label Wells, you can label the first selected horizon with several
data fields. The ordered selection panel determines the order of the
labeled data fields on the map.

Select Input Fields (Ordered Selection)

The ordered selection panel is required when you have the option of
determining the order in which field labels or symbols will be posted, or
the order in which fields will be printed on a report.

Label Parameters
Use the Label Parameters table to control labeling by using the
following parameters:
Line Number The line number comes from the Baseline File
for Wells. Enter the line number on the Baseline file you want to
use for cross-section display.
Band Width Control points are posted within a bandwidth
(distance) you define. This band for posting control points arcs
around the end of the baseline in all directions. Enter the value for
the bandwidth. The default bandwidth value is 0, which means that
only the wells that lie exactly on the baseline are posted on the
cross section.
Labeling Size This number refers to the height of the label in
plotter units (in./cm.). The default heights are 0.1 inches or 0.25
centimeters.
Labeling Format Label format refers to the orientation of the
control point labels:
Horizontal aligns the label parallel to the baseline of the
cross section.
Vertical aligns the label perpendicular to the baseline of the
cross section.
Include Field Name? Control points can be labeled with field
names. The field name can be omitted or included in the label. The
options are Name and Noname:
Name Posts the field name.
Noname Posts the field name with the posted control
points.

R2003.12.0 Features: Cross Section 231

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Post Z-field value Label control points with field values. You
can include or omit Z field values in the label:
Zvalue Labels Posts Z value labels.
No Zvalue Labels Posts no Z value labels.

Map Features
If you select Features Cross Section Map Features, the Cross
Section Map Features dialog box appears. This is a tabbed dialog box
that is very similar to the Basemap Features dialog box described on
219, with these exceptions:
No tab for setting projected map Labels (L/L)
No North Arrow settings tab
To learn more about the settings in the Cross Section Features dialog
box, see the browser-based help system (accessible from the Help
button in the Cross Section Map Features dialog box).

R2003.12.0 Features: Cross Section 232

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Overlay Pictures

Display the picture to be overlaid, then select

Features Overlay Pictures.

Select input graphics file.

Select input picture.

Select output graphics file.

Select output data file.

Yes Maintain features No

on overlay?

Choose which features to overlay. Overlay all features.

Use
cutline (from
Yes input picture on No
output picture?

Draw cutline on output picture. Use no cutline.

Apply.

To verify results, select Picture, pick output picture, then select Full Display.

Save and return to Z-MAP Plus

window.

Overlay Pictures Workflow

R2003.12.0 Features: Overlay Pictures 233

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

You can overlay one or more features from a picture on another picture.
Here are a few guidelines to help you use the Overlay Pictures option:
Scale The scale of the "draped" picture features (the input
picture features) is adjusted to fit the scale of the output picture.
AOI The AOI of the new picture is the output pictures AOI. If
the output pictures AOI is smaller than the input picture, only the
area of the input picture that intersects the AOI of the output
picture is overlaid (as shown in the following illustration).
Requirement for Overlapping Part of the picture from which
features are being copied must overlap the area of the output
picture on which the features are overlaid (for example, the X and
Y limits of pictures must overlap). If they do not overlap, nothing
appears in the output picture.
Controlling Features Included All features from the input
picture (including those in the margins) that overlap or intersect
with the output picture appear on the output picture. Features of
the input picture that extend beyond the edge of the output picture
are clipped at the map border of the output picture. To prevent
unwanted features from appearing in the new map, turn them off
with Features to Overlay.

Input Picture To produce results, Output Picture

the input picture AOI 5
5 must intersect the
output picture AOI.

3
3

1
Input Picture Margin 1 3 5

5 5 Features in the input

pictures margin that overlay
the output pictures AOI
appear on the overlay
3 picture unless you turn the
3
features off by using
Features to Overlay.

1 3 5

R2003.12.0 Features: Overlay Pictures 234

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

To view the overlaid features, you must reselect the output picture.
Select File Open Picture Open or click the Picture Open
icon.
Color The color table of the output picture overrides the color
table of the input picture. This can cause problems, for example, if
you overlay a colorfilled picture on a posted data picture. The
colorfill may display differently because the colorfilled picture
features are now using the color table for the posted data.

Input Graphics File

Click the Input GRAPHICS FILE button, and select a ZGF in the
dialog box that appears. The ZGF you select determines which pictures
are available for you to overlay. The first option is Use Current
Graphics file. The list also includes all the ZGFs found in the locations
specified in the ZGFs tab of the Directory Paths dialog box (as described
on page 111). If the file you want is not listed, make sure its directory
path is specified.
The name of the currently attached ZGF is reported in the status area at
the bottom of the Z-MAP Plus window.

Input Picture
Click the Input picture button. In the dialog box that appears, select a
picture to overlay. The first option is Use Current Picture. The list also
includes all the pictures in the selected Input Graphics File.
The name of the current picture is reported in the status area at the
bottom of the Z-MAP Plus window.

Output Graphics File

Click the Output GRAPHICS FILE button, and select a ZGF in the
dialog box that appears. The ZGF you select determines which pictures
are available for you to place overlay features. The first option is Use
current graphics file. The list also includes all the ZGFs found in the
locations specified in the ZGFs tab of the Directory Paths dialog box (as
described on page 111). If the file you want is not listed, make sure its
directory path is specified.

R2003.12.0 Features: Overlay Pictures 235

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Output Picture
Click the Output picture button. In the dialog box that appears, select
a picture you want to use as the foundation layer for overlaying features.
The list contains the pictures in the selected Output Graphics File.

Overlay Parameters
Click the Overlay parameters button. In the dialog box that appears,
you can specify whether you want to combine all of the graphics
features to be overlaid into a single feature, and to control whether the
output picture cutline is drawn on the output picture. Graphics features,
sometimes referred to as Logical Graphics Blocks (LGB), can be
manipulated easily when they are distinct features. (For example, they
can be easily deleted or copied.) If features are combined into one
feature, that manipulation capability is lost. However, because the
features are combined, they can be copied, deleted, and so on as a single
unit, which also has advantages.

Maintaining Feature Divisions

Be careful to Maintaining Divisions if the picture you are overlaying has
some of the same features as the destination picture. For example, the picture
you want to overlay has contours, as does the picture which is being overlaid.
When both source and destination picture have contours, the contours on the
destination picture become one feature. You cannot edit the resulting single
feature by trying to delete one set of contours and leave the other. If you want
only one set of contours on the destination picture, use the Edit
Edit Picture Delete Features option before overlaying.

R2003.12.0 Features: Overlay Pictures 236

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Division of Features on Overlay

Click the Division of Features on Overlay button and select an option
from the drop-down list. The options control whether features remain
separate or are combined in the new picture. In other words, do features
maintain their division or are they combined into one graphics feature
(such as Index Map). The choices for this parameter are:
Maintain Division (default value) Maintain the features as they
are in the original picture (for example, contours, text, and lines).
Single Feature Combine the features into one feature. If you
use this setting you cannot delete single features, such as contour
lines or labels.

Use Cutline
Click the Use cutline button and select an option from the drop-down
list. The options control whether the cutline from the input picture is
drawn on the output picture. The choices for this parameter are:
No Cutline (default value) Do not draw the input picture
cutline on the output picture.
Cutline Draw the input picture cutline on the output picture.
The cutline is positioned just as it is on the input picture, relative to
the border of the input picture. That is, if the input picture is
smaller than the output picture, the cutline surrounds the smaller
area.
The cutline represents the edge of the plotter paper and appears as
a dotted line in the display. The default offsets between the cutline
and the map AOI equal one inch on the top, right, and left, and four
inches on the bottom.

Features to Overlay
Click the Features to Overlay button. In the dialog box that appears,
select the features you want to overlay from the input picture to the
output picture. The selected features are highlighted. You can toggle
features on and off until you are ready to click OK and set the feature
selection.

Resetting the Overlay Picture Values

You can return the Overlay Picture dialog box to its original settings at any time by
clicking the Reset button.

R2003.12.0 Features: Overlay Pictures 237

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Contouring
Z-MAP Pluss contouring capability is divided into Contouring,
Contour Old, Fast Contour, 3D Fishnet Plot, Shaded Relief, and Color
Scale.

Overview of Contouring Options

Contour
Features Contouring Contour builds a contour map and permits
you to customize the appearance of contours. You can also display
Contouring with the shortcut icon shown at left.
In addition to producing graphics features for posting on your map,
Contouring also selects the contouring algorithm best suited to your
data. If profiles are present, NEW-CONTOUR selects the Profile
Contouring Algorithm. If there are opaque faults, the macro uses the
Extended Fault Contouring Algorithm. If neither opaque faults nor
profiles are present, the macro uses the faster No-Constraint algorithm.
With respect to graphics features, you can choose whether to colorfill
your contours, and also whether to include a color bar on your map
For more information about Contouring, see the browser-based help
available from the Help button on the Contouring dialog.

Contour Old
Contours are added to the picture from either a grid or contour file.
Controls over line type, width, and value posting are provided. The
smoothness of contours generated from a grid can be controlled. Faults
or polygons can be used to constrain contouring, and the area between
each pair of contours can be filled with color. In addition, the contours
drawn from a grid can be output as digitized contours to an MFD or
OpenWorks.

R2003.12.0 Features: Contouring 238

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Fast Contour
Enables you to execute the FASTCONTOURMAP macro. This macro
builds a grid and then generates a contour map from the selected Z-field
on your data file. For more information about this macro, see the Macro
Reference Manual for Z-MAP Plus / ZCL.

3D Fishnet Plot
Executes the FISHNET-PLOT macro. This macro creates a fishnet plot
of a gridded surface. You are allowed to designate the angle from which
to view the surface.

Shaded Relief
Allows you to create a shaded relief map also known as a brightness
grid.

Color Scale
Draws a color scale relating a series of color indices to a variation in
some quantity. This option is used primarily for placing a color scale bar
on a map with color-filled contours, but almost any quantity variation
can be shown in this way.

Contour
Contouring generates annotated contours from either a grid or digitized
contour data. These annotated contours are included as part of the
information contained on a contour map. Contour lines are drawn across
an area of equal elevation or equal time values.
Use the Contours option to perform these tasks:
Plot a CTOG output contour file to determine how the digitized
contour data points are connected.
Output digitized contours for use in other Landmark geological
software operations.
Redraw digitized contours with a different map scale or contour
symbol, such as dashed lines instead of solid lines.
Contour depth or time maps to show elements such as areas of
closure, highs, or lows to use for exploration and development.
Display topographic information in an easily understandable
format.

R2003.12.0 Features: Contouring 239

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

The Contouring dialog box replaces the previous contouring interface

(before the 1998.5 release). This dialog box has added controls for these
operations:
Set the lowest and highest contour level for the map.
Control colorfill with more options.
Set all colors on the map from the Colors tab.

The Contouring dialog divides all the parameter settings for the
NEW-CONTOUR process into four tabs:
Basic Specify the name of the input grid file, the contour
interval, minimum and maximum depths, and general posting
parameters.
Colors Specify the colors of the contour lines, labels, highlight
frequency and color, and controls the colorfill (if you want to use
colorfill).
Label/Line Specify the label characteristics (such as size,
frequency, and font) as well as the appearance of the contour lines.
On this tab, you also designate a discontinuity file and polygon
clipping file, if you want them.
Output Files Save the file that contains the contour descriptive
data separately from the picture.
Each parameter in the Contouring dialog is covered in detail in the
browser-based Help system, accessible by clicking the Help button in
the Contouring dialog box.

Contour Old
The Contour Old option generates annotated contours from either a
grid or digitized contour data.

Z-MAP Plus Contouring Menu

R2003.12.0 Features: Contouring 240

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Input File (Grid or Contour)

A list of contour and grid files is presented. Z-MAP Plus uses the grid
node value or contour value as input when Contouring executes. Select
the file you wish to use as input.

Constraint (Faults or Polygon)

Faults represent constraints on contouring. By providing the program
with information about fault locations, you indicate that you do not want
contouring to take place across the fault.
You can confine contouring to a specific area by selecting a vertex file.
The vertex file will define a polygon on your map. Contouring will take
place either inside or outside the polygon.
A list of faults and vertex files is presented. Faults are needed only when
building surfaces cut by faults. When faults are used, grid nodes are
calculated using only data located on the same side of the faults as the
node. A fault file must have been previously constructed in order to be
available for this option.

Contouring Parameters, Output Name

Use this panel to specify the contour minimum and maximum,
contouring interval, curve sampling density, output file name and output
MFD. It is only needed for grid input.

Minimum and Maximum Contour Values

These values indicate the minimum and maximum contour levels
generated during contouring. The default minimum contour value
equals the lowest contour level which is divisible by the contour interval
and greater than or equal to the minimum grid value. The default
maximum contour value equals the largest contour level divisible by the
contour interval and greater than or equal to the maximum grid value.

Contouring Interval
Z-MAP Plus computes a rounded number below the grid minimum as
the surface level on which the contour interval is based. The contour
interval (CI) marks a fixed distance in Z units between contours. All
contours that are integer multiples of CI are automatically traced.
During standard contouring, the default value for CI is based on the
relief of the input grid. For example, if you would like contours every
50 feet, the contour interval would be 50.

R2003.12.0 Features: Contouring 241

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Curve Sampling Density

The smoothness of your contours depends on the amount of data you
have to work with and the curve sampling density you select. There are
five curve sampling density rates:
Coarsest. Contours given a coarse sampling rate are generated
fastest; however, they are the least smooth.
Coarse. A moderate sampling density produces draft quality
contours.
Medium. This sampling rate is most often used to generate
contours for working maps, or to preview faults.
Fine. This sampling rate is most often used to generate a report
map.
Very Fine. Contours generated with this sampling density are the
smoothest possible; however, this sampling rate requires the
greatest amount of processing time.
It is important to note that the finer the curve sampling density, the more
points that must be contoured. This results in a longer contouring
process. While in some cases, it may be necessary to apply the finest
curve sampling density to ensure that all surfaces are contoured
smoothly, the trade-off between processing time and smoothness should
be considered.

Output Contour File Name, OpenWorks, and Output Master File

Specify the name of the file to be created. The name can be a maximum
of 24 characters long and can contain internal blanks. Next, you must
select either OpenWorks or the destination MFD for storing the data.
Select the destination MFD from the list of attached MFDs and scratch
file. These files are listed in a popup window that appears when you
click the parameter box. The program will default to Master File 1, as
listed in the status area.

R2003.12.0 Features: Contouring 242

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Curve Drawing and Labeling Parameters

Use the Set CURVE DRAWING and LABELING Parameters dialog
box to specify the following input values:
Contour Labels
Reference (bold) Contours
Hachured Contours
Dashed Contours
Distance to First Label
Distance Between Labels
Character Height
Decimal Positions
Label Value Scale Factor and Label Value Bias
Colorfilled Contours
settings for contours over colorfill
settings for contour colors

Dialog Box After Selecting Starting Color Index Color Box

R2003.12.0 Features: Contouring 243

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Contour Labels Labels may be optionally placed at all contour

levels, or you may specify an interval at which to label your
contours. The specified interval is know as the labeling curve rate.
If you select a labeling curve rate of 3, then every third contour
level will be labeled.
Reference Contours: Bold, Hachured, or Dashed Contour
reference curves represent a multiple of the contour interval.
Reference curves may be bold, hachured, or dashed, whereas
intermediate contours are always a solid thin line.
When defining the frequency with which you would like to draw
bold, hachured and dashed contours on your map, enter the
interval at which you wish the reference contour to appear. A 0
indicates no reference curves, while a 1 indicates all curves will be
drawn with the specified line type.
Distance to First Label Contour labels are not automatically
placed at the start of each contour curve. Therefore, you are asked
to specify the distance, in plotter units (in./cm.), from the origin of
the contour curve to the beginning of the first label.
Distance Between Labels Labels are placed an equal distance
from each other around the entire contour curve. Specify the
distance, in plotter units (in./cm.), between contour labels.
Character Height Contour label sizes may vary to fit your
needs. It has been noted that contour labels are best when drawn at
one of three heights: 0.07, 0.10, or 0.14 inch (0.18, 0.25, 0.36 cm).
While maps that measure less than 10 by 10 inches (25 by 25 cm)
should probably have a label size equal to 0.07 or 0.10 inch, larger
contour maps will probably look better with 0.14 inch labels.
Enter, in plotter units (in./cm.), the character size you desire for
your contour labels.
Decimal Positions This value indicates the number of places to
the right of the decimal which will be included in the contour
label.
Label Value Scale Factor Enter the desired scale factor. The
contour curve labels will be multiplied by this value. For example,
if your data was in seconds but you would like milliseconds
output, a scale of 1000 would output correct labels.
Label Value Bias If you would like a constant added to the
label values for contours, enter the value.

R2003.12.0 Features: Contouring 244

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Colorfilled Contours Z-MAP Plus can generate colorfilled

contours when contouring from a grid. This function is not
available when contouring from an existing contour file. By
default this operation is not enabled; however, you may enable it
by selecting the Colorfilled option from the parameter box that
accompanies the Colorfilled Contours parameter.
The colors Colorfill chooses are internal to the algorithm. The first
contour level posted uses color index 17, the second uses 18, and
so on. You can change these colors in the color table. For more
information about this procedure, see Appendix D. Color
Editing on page 803.
Draw Contour Lines Over Colorfill You may elect to overlay
contour lines onto the colorfilled contours. By default, the program
will draw and overlay these lines for you. If you do not wish to
overlay these lines, select the No Overlay option.
Starting Color Index for Colorfilled Contours This is the
minimum color index that defines the starting color for colorfill.
Each higher contour level is assigned a successively higher color
index number.
Colorfill Color Index Rate of Change For every
FILLRATEth contour level, the colorfill index color changes.
Starting Color Index for Contour Lines The Starting Color
Index for Contour Lines setting is the initial color index in which
contour lines are displayed.
Line Color Index Rate of Change For every FILLRATEth
contour line, the colorfill index color changes.

Contour Report
Once interactive contouring begins, a contouring index table appears in
the Status/Report window. The contouring index table contains four
types of information:
Index The index value reports how many contours have been
processed and how many remain to be processed.
Contour Value column The Contour Value column lists each
contour value.
Number Points column The Number Points column lists the
number of points used to produce the contour.
Length column The Length (in.) column reports the length of
each contour.

R2003.12.0 Features: Contouring 245

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Fast Contour
Use the Fast Contour option to execute the FASTCONTOURMAP
macro. This macro builds a grid and then generates a contour map from
the selected Z-field on your data file.
For more information about this macro, see the Macro Reference
Manual for Z-MAP Plus / ZCL.
Fast Contour builds a grid and then generates a contour map from the
selected z field on your data file.
You are asked to specify the following input values:
well dataset
z field on the well dataset
a fault dataset (optional)
contouring interval (optional)
ZGF name and picture name
A contour map of the grid is created from the z field.

Fast Contour Uses Point Data

Use FASTMAPFROMGRID to make a fast map using control point data.

3D Fishnet Plot
Creates a fishnet plot (also known as a perspective map) of a gridded
surface by using the FISHNET-PLOT macro. Fishnet plots often reveal
surface detail that is not be apparent in a conventional contour map. You
can specify the angle for viewing the surface.
You must specify the following information:
name of the graphics file
name of the new picture
name of the input grid file
For descriptions of the FISHNET-PLOT macro parameters, see the
Macro Reference Manual for Z-MAP Plus / ZCL. For more information
about using the 3D Fishnet Plot option, select Help Online
Manuals Macros, and locate the topic for FISHNET-PLOT.

R2003.12.0 Features: Contouring 246

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Shaded Relief

The Shaded Relief operation produces a brightness grid. This brightness

grid can then be used as input to Features Contouring, yielding a
Shaded Relief map once Colorfilled Contours are added.
Assuming that the sun is shining on the structure of interest, the Shaded
Relief operation produces a grid whose values are proportional to the
brightness of the surface (grid). The output grid will have higher values
when the surface is facing the direction from which the sun is shining
and lower values when facing other directions.
Common applications of Shaded Relief mapping are:
representation of the highs and lows of a surface
enhancement of directional features on a surface, especially lineal
features
enhancement of subtle surface textures
creation of a 3D look without the cost of building a 3D
perspective
photographic representation of a grid surface

R2003.12.0 Features: Contouring 247

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

The Shaded Relief dialog box contains the following parameters:

Input Grid From the list of input grids that appears, select a
grid to use as input.
Brightness Parameters Brightness Parameters refer to light
intensity used for scaling purposes. The minimum brightness
factor applies to the surface that faces directly away from the sun.
The maximum brightness factor corresponds to the surface directly
facing the sun.
Min This is the minimum brightness of a surface above the
haze facing away from the sun. The possible values are
between 0.0 and 1.0, with 0.0 being the default.
Max This is the maximum brightness of a surface above the
haze facing toward the sun. The possible values are between
0.0 and 1.0, with 1.0 being the default.
Altitude Of Sun (Degrees) The altitude of the sun is the
elevation of the sun, in degrees, above the horizontal plane. This
value may range from 0 to 90 degrees. For maximum detail
definition in your Shaded Relief map, the suns rays should be
approximately parallel to the general trend of the surface. In most
cases this angle would be 0 degrees.
The default value, 315 degrees, places the sun at the upper left
(northwest) side of the map. This is the most common location for
the sun in shaded relief maps. This position does a good job of
avoiding the relief inversion problem.
Azimuth Of Sun (Degrees) The Azimuth of the Sun is
expressed in degrees clockwise from the North. For example, an
azimuth of 90 degrees means the sun is shining from the east; an
azimuth of 315 degrees means the light appears to be shining from
the northwest. The range of values is 0 to 360 degrees.
Haze Factor The Haze Factor simulates the amount of haze in
the lower areas of the surface. 0.0 signifies no haze, while 1.0
signifies the presence of a haze which would make the lowest
points on the grid opaque, and not reflective of light. Most users
default this value to 0.
Conversion Factor The conversion factor allows you to vary
the unit of measure. A table of unit conversions can be found in
Operations, Volumetrics, Length Scale. If you are converting
feet to meters, your conversion factor is 3.048.

R2003.12.0 Features: Contouring 248

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

The conversion factor has two uses. First, if the X,Y values are in
meters and the Z values are in feet, a conversion factor of 3.048
converts the meters to feet, putting the X, Y, and Z values in the
same units for a realistic picture.
Second, you can use the conversion factor to apply a vertical
exaggeration to the Z values. The state of Florida is hundreds of
miles long but only 165 feet high. Without adding a vertical
exaggeration, a relief map of Florida would have noting to show.
Also, some maps may have units that are not convertible. For
example, X and Y in meters and Z in milligals. In cases where it is
not desirable (or possible) to use a realistic conversion factor, try a
conversion factor approximately equal to 4 times the range in Z
divided by the range in X.
Output Grid These entries specify the name of the output
brightness grid and the destination MFD or the OpenWorks path.
Output File Name This is the name of the output brightness
grid.
Master File This is the name of the destination MFD for
storing the output brightness grid.

Contouring the Brightness Grid to Obtain the Shaded Relief Map

In Features Contouring, you can now use your brightness grid as
the input grid for contouring. The Shaded Relief features will be added
to the map in the Curve-Drawing and Labeling Parameters of
Z-MAP Plus. This is when you specify Colorfill parameters which will
highlight the darker and brighter places on the gridded surface.
In some cases you may wish to colorfill contour without overlaying the
contours. Or you may wish to colorfill and contour and either delete the
contours or turn off their display.
The two remaining phases for producing the shaded relief map are
1) contour set up and 2) filling the color table for the picture.
Follow these rules for contours when creating a shaded relief picture:

R2003.12.0 Features: Contouring 249

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Contour Setup
1. Create 40-50 colorfill contour levels.
2. Do not draw contours on the picture, or at least do not draw
contours on the picture during the colorfill pass.
3. Do NOT use contour lines while generating colorfilled polygons
unless you are using an very fine grid.

Colorfilled Polygons
Use the Features Contouring option to generate colorfilled polygons
without using contour lines.

Color Table
The general procedure is as follows. Select Edit Color Table. For the
contour range indices you specified, select the lowest index and give it
a dark color. Select the highest index for the contours and give it a light
color. Interpolate between these two indices to create a continuous
change from dark to light.
Suggested colors for interpolation:
Dark gray: (0, 10, 0) HLS Light gray:(0, 77, 0) HLS
Contour the darkest shades (lowest points on the grid) first, following
with the progressively lighter shades (higher points on the grid).

R2003.12.0 Features: Contouring 250

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Color Scale
Color Scale draws a color bar relating a series of color indices to a
variation in some quantity. This option is used primarily for placing a
color scale bar on a map with color-filled contours, but almost any
quantity variation can be shown in this way. Color Scale uses the
COLOR-BAR macro to create the scale.
To create a color scale, you must have a graphics file and a picture
attached to your Z-MAP Plus session. To see the resultant color bar in
Z-MAP Plus, you must select Display Full Display after you create
the color scale.
You are asked to supply the following elements:
file providing the data range
field number providing data range (optional)
information about contour intervals, number of contours, and
contour minimum and contour maximum
color bar and color-fill information
line color information (optional)
contour labeling information (optional)
See the Macro Reference Manual for Z-MAP Plus / ZCL for detailed
descriptions of each parameter for COLOR-BAR. To display this
information, select Help Online Manuals Macros Manual, and
locate the topic for COLOR-BAR.

R2003.12.0 Features: Contouring 251

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Lines
You may draw lines on your current map after retrieving line data from
an input dataset. The Lines option may be used to display all types of
lineal data that are not normally associated with Z-values, including:
lease polygons
cultural data such as roads, etc.
land grids
fault traces
many other types of x,y data
When drawing lines, you specify:
line type
scaling units
line clipping option
where to place symbols at vertex locations
symbol code
symbol size
If the line is dashed, you can specify the length of the dash, as well as
the length of the gap.
There are two ways to draw lines on an active picture from the
Features Lines option:
draw lines using File
draw lines using Cursor

R2003.12.0 Features: Lines 252

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

File (Drawing Lines Using File)

This option allows you to post lines on a currently active picture. Lines
can be posted from vertex, fault, and profile data. You may select from
a list of seven graphical representations or up to 20 line patterns.

Select Data
Select a file from the list of files available in the OpenWorks project and
the attached MFDs. This file is used as input when the option executes.

Fields to Post
A list of fields is presented. You may select up to two fields to post. (If
you select more than two fields from the list, the program will not
recognize any of the fields you have attached.)

R2003.12.0 Features: Lines 253

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Line Drawing Parameters

Use these options to control line color and pattern. You can specify line
parameters manually, or use fields to control the line color and pattern.

General Line Parameters

This panel enables you to control line type, dash length and dash gap,
hachure length, gap, and direction, line weight and line color. These
parameters do not affect the Line Type Patterns.

Line Type
This menu allows you to choose the type of line you want to draw in
connecting the points. Select on the graphical representations of the
desired Line Type, or choose to establish Line Type by Pattern number
or vary the line patterns by Z-field.

Line Pattern Number

This is the pattern number for drawing lines. Enter a number from 1 to
20. (For examples, see Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line
Patterns, starting on page 791.)

Dash Length One

This value is required only if you have chosen a dashed line as the Line
Type for lines. This number represents the length in plotter units
(in./cm.) of the first dash in the dash pattern for drawing lines. The
default length for the first dash is 0.07 in. or 0.18 cm.

R2003.12.0 Features: Lines 254

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Dash Length Two

This value is required only if you have chosen a dashed line with two or
three different dash lengths. This number represents the length in plotter
units (in./cm.) of the second dash in the dash pattern for drawing lines.
The default length for the second dash is 0.09 in. or 0.23 cm.

Dash Length Three

This value is required only if you have chosen a dashed line with three
dash lengths as the Line Type. This number represents the length in
plotter units (in./cm.) of the third dash in the dash pattern for drawing
lines. The default length for the third dash is 0.11 in. or 0.28 cm.

Gap Length One

This value is required only if you have chosen a dashed line as the Line
Type. This number represents the length in plotter units (in./cm.) of the
first gap between dashes in the dash pattern for drawing lines. The
default length for the first gap is 0.07 in. or 0.18 cm.

Gap Length Two

This value is required only if you have chosen a dashed line (consisting
of two or three unequal dash lengths) as the Line Type. This number
represents the length in plotter units (in./cm.) of the second gap between
dashes in the dash pattern for drawing lines. The default gap length for
the second gap is 0.09 in. or 0.23 cm.

Gap Length Three

This value is required only if you have chosen a dashed line (consisting
of three unequal dash lengths) as the Line Type. This number represents
the length in plotter units (in./cm.) of the third gap between dashes in the
dash pattern for drawing lines. The default gap length for the third gap
is 0.11 in. or 0.28 cm.

Hachure Gap
This value is required only if you have chosen a Line Type of Hachure.
This number represents the gap between hachures in plotter units
(in./cm.) of the hachures in the pattern for drawing lines. The default
hachure gap is 0.1 in. or 0.25 cm.

R2003.12.0 Features: Lines 255

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Hachure Length
This value is required only if you have chosen a Line Type of Hachure.
This number represents the length in plotter units (in./cm.) of the
hachures in the pattern for drawing primary lines. The default Hachure
Length is 0.05 is or 0.13 cm.

Hachure Direction
This direction is the direction of the hachures relative to the line. Left
means to draw the hachures on the relative left side of the line, and
Right means to draw the hachures on the right side of the line. The
default direction is Left.

Line Weight
This number represents a multiple of the normal line width for drawing
lines. The thicknesses range from 1 to 8, and the default Line Weight is
1. The larger the weight, the bolder the line will be.

Color Mode
There are three methods for defining the color of the primary lines:
Index, Field, and Z-field.
Index refers to the number of the color in the Z-MAP Plus color table.
Field refers to the number of the Line Color Field. The line color field
must be present on the input data file.
Z-field will vary color by Z-field. When color is to vary by Z-field, the
program allows you to specify the value change in Z-field required to
change the color of primary lines.

Color Index
The color index is a number from 0 to 255 in the Z-MAP Plus color
table. The color index refers to the settings for the currently active
picture. To choose a color index for lines, click the color box. A palette
of the 256 colors appears. You can change the color index of the lines
by clicking the color you want.

Choose Color Field for Line Color

A list of the field names for color fields is presented. These color fields
are taken from the input line data file. Select one of the fields listed.

R2003.12.0 Features: Lines 256

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Vary Line Color Parameters

This panel allows you to vary the color of the posted line. Color can be
varied by choosing a starting color index, the number of color levels,
method of defaulting the Z-table for color levels, the Z-increment for
defaulting, and the start Z-value for defaulting. The purpose of this
feature is to allow the mapper to show a gradual increase in a Z-value by
representing a defined change in Z as a color in a given range. For
example, every change of 50 data units could be represented by a
slightly darker shade of blue.

Start Color Index

This number is the number of the color in the color table where the
varying of line colors is to begin. The number of color levels beyond this
value will determine the range of line colors available.

Number of Color Levels

This number refers to the number of colors available for primary lines
as Z-values change on the picture. Number of Color Levels is only used
when the default method for varying line color is Divide.

Default Z-Table for Color Levels By

Defaulting the color variation will result in an automatic assignment of
a color to a Z-value according to the criteria you select for this
parameter. The four methods for determining defaulting are:
None
Divide
Increment
Increment+Start

Units of Measure for Z-Values

While the examples in this text refer to feet, Z-values can be expressed in any
data unit, such as meters, miles, etc.

None indicates that you do not want to default the color

variation. When you choose not to default the color variation, the
program requires that you input maximum Z-values for each color
change (user input required).

R2003.12.0 Features: Lines 257

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Divide indicates that you want to default the color variation by

dividing the Z-value range into a number of color levels. A Divide
value of 20 would change the color of the line 20 times. Divide
will calculate equal intervals for the number of color levels you
specify.
For example, if the range of Z is 01000 feet, a divide of 20 would
produce 20 colors, with a color change every 50 feet (Number of
Color Levels required).
Increment indicates how often you want the symbol color to
change with a change in Z-value. When you choose increment, the
program will change the symbol color each time a constant change
in Z has been achieved.
For example, if the range of Z is 0-1,000 feet, and Increment = 20,
there would be 50 different colors, producing a change in the
symbol color every 20 feet.
Increment+Start means that you specify the lowest Z-value at
which to begin default color variation, and the increment which
must be achieved each time before changing to the next color
(Z-increment and Start Value are required).

Z-Increment for Defaulting

The Z-Increment for Defaulting refers to the constant interval between
Z-values in the data which will cause the Line Color to default to the
next color in the Z-MAP Plus color table. If the Z-increment is 1,000
feet, and the starting color is 57 (blue-purple), then a change in 1,000
feet will change the Line Color to 58 (violet).

Start Z-value for Defaulting

This parameter allows you to single out Z-values of interest. For
example, if you are interested in depths at or below 5,500 feet, the Start
Z-Value for defaulting can be 5,500 feet. Data closer to the top surface
than 5,500 feet will all have the same line color.

Choose Z-field to Vary Line Color

The value of the selected Z-field will be used to change line color. You
can only select one Z-field to determine line color variation. Fields
available for selection are taken from your input line data file. A list of
Z-fields appears. Select the Z-field you want.

R2003.12.0 Features: Lines 258

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Z-Table to Vary Line Color

This table contains a range of up to 50 maximum Z-values for color
indices to use when drawing lines. The table contains a list of Z-values
for each color level. The number of color levels was indicated in the
Vary Line Color Parameters panel. If you stipulated 4 color levels, you
will be asked to enter 4 maximum Z-levels. These Maximum Z-values
are not required if you chose a method of defaulting the table.
Each parameter entry area on the Z Level Table for Line Color
represents the maximum Z-value for each color. The values you enter
into this table will correlate line color to maximum Z-value; when the
Z-value reaches the next maximum, the line color will vary by one index
number.
For example, assume that your starting color on the color index is 17,
the distance between maximum Z-values is 100 feet, and your
maximum Z-value for index 17 is 7,500 feet. The index color for
7,575 feet will be index color 18.
You can represent up to 50 maximum Z-values. The number of Z-values
you can enter on this table is determined by the Number of Color Levels
you entered on the Vary Line Color Parameters table. The starting color
on the color index was also determined by your choice on the Vary Line
Color Parameters table.

Vary Line Pattern Parameters

You can change line patterns posted on variations in Z-value. (For
examples of 20 line patterns, see Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and
Line Patterns, starting on page 791.)

Choose Z-field to Vary Line Pattern

If you want your line pattern to change with Z-values, select the Z field
to which the changes in line pattern are to be tied.

Z-table to Vary Line Pattern

This look-up table is used when the Default Z-Table for Pattern
Numbers method is DIVIDE. You can use up to 20 Z-levels. Each level
has a minimum Z-value associated with each line pattern level in the
table.

R2003.12.0 Features: Lines 259

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Symbol Parameters
Use this panel to control line symbol parameters, including:
Symbol Code
Select Field
Color Field
Symbol Color
Symbol Size

General Symbol Parameters

Use this panel to control the following symbol parameters:
Posting Method
Symbol Code
Symbol Color
Symbol Size
Posting Rate

Posting Method for Symbols and Labels

This method determines whether symbols and labels are posted for no
points (Omit), for All points, or for Select points.

Determine Symbol Code by

There are three ways to determine the symbol code associated with the
lines. The Omit option means that no symbol will be posted. Symbol
Field refers to a symbol field on your input file. The Symbol Number
option lets you enter the Symbol Code number to determine the symbols
posted for lines.

Symbol Code Number

Enter the Symbol Code Number for the symbol you want to use. (For a
list of Symbol Codes, see Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line
Patterns, starting on page 791.)

R2003.12.0 Features: Lines 260

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Determine Symbol Color by

You can determine the Symbol Color by: Index, Field, Z-field, and Line.
Index refers to a number in the Z-MAP Plus color table. When
you enter a number, a box containing the color for the color index
appears to the left of the entry.
Field means that a field on your input file specifies a color for
each symbol.
Z-field refers to a Z-field on the input data file to which the
symbol color is tied. Determining color by Z-field will result in a
change of colors when the value of the field changes.
Line refers to the color of the succeeding line segment. The
succeeding line segment is the segment after the point.

Symbol Color Index

The symbol color index is the number associated with one of the 256
colors in the Z-MAP Plus color table. Click the color box to display the
color palette, then click the color to use as the symbol color.

Determine Symbol Size by

There are five methods for determining symbol size: Value, Field,
Diameter, Area, and Class.
Value uses the size of the symbol in plotter units (in./cm.). The
default values are 0.07 in. and 0.18 cm.
Field refers to a size field on the input file.
Diameter refers to the diameter of the symbol in plotter units
(in./cm.). You can vary the diameter of a symbol based on a
Z-field.
For Diameter, Size = (field value + offset) * scale.
Area defines the area of a posted symbol, causing the area of
the symbol to vary based on a Z-field.
For Area, Size = SQRT [ (4/) * scale * (field value + offset) ]
Class permits you to vary symbol height incrementally based
on a Z-field. This is similar to varying color by Z-field. Each
symbol size represents a range of values.

Symbol Size
This number is the symbol height in plotter units (in./cm.).

R2003.12.0 Features: Lines 261

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Posting Rate
The Posting Rate for symbols is the divisor of the number of points. A
posting rate of 1 means that every point will be posted. A posting rate of
5 means the first point and then every fifth point will be posted along a
line.

Choose Symbol Code Field

This is the name of the field containing the symbol code of the symbol
to be posted.

Choose Select Field

This panel allows you to choose a field to use as the posting Select Field.
A list of fields on your input line file appears. Choose the field you want
to use as the posting Select Field. At any point where this field is not
defined (= ZNON), a symbol will not be posted.

Choose Color Field for Symbol Color

This is the Color Field used to determine the color for the posted
symbol.

Vary Symbol Color Parameters

This panel allows you to vary the color of the symbol posted. Color can
be varied by choosing a starting color index, the number of color levels,
method of defaulting the Z-table for color levels, the Z-increment for
defaulting, and the start Z-value for defaulting. The purpose of this
feature is to allow the mapper to show a gradual increase in a Z-value by
representing a defined change in Z as a color in a given range. For
example, every change of 50 data units could be represented by a
slightly darker shade of blue.
Start Color Index This number is the number of the color in
the color table where the varying of symbol colors is to begin. The
number of color levels beyond this value will determine the range
of symbol colors available.
Number of Color Levels This number refers to the number of
colors in the color table which are to be displayed as Z-values on
the map. The Number of Color Levels is only used when the
default method for varying symbol color is Divide.

R2003.12.0 Features: Lines 262

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Default Z-Table for Color Levels By

Using default color variation results in an automatic assignment of a
color to a Z-value according to the criteria you select for this parameter.

Z-Value Units of Measure

While the examples in this text refer to feet, Z-values can be expressed in any
data unit, such as meters, miles, etc.

The four methods for determining defaulting are:

None indicates that you do not want to default the color variation.
When you choose not to default the color variation, the program
requires that you input maximum Z-values for each color change.
(User input required)
Divide indicates that you want to default the color variation by
dividing the Z-value range into a number of color levels. A Divide
value of 20 would change the color of the symbol 20 times. Divide
will calculate equal intervals for the number of color levels you
specify.
For example, if the range of Z is 01000 feet, a divide of 20 would
produce 20 colors, with a color change every 50 feet. (Number of
Color Levels required)
Increment indicates how often you want the symbol color to
change with a change in Z-value. When you choose increment, the
program will change the symbol color each time a constant change
in Z has been achieved.
For example, if the range of Z is 01,000 feet, and Increment = 20,
there would be 50 different colors, producing a change in the
symbol color every 20 feet. (Z-Increment required)
Increment+Start means that you specify the lowest Z-value at
which to begin default color variation, and the increment which
must be achieved each time before changing to the next color.
(Z-increment and Start Value required)

Z-increment for Defaulting

The Z-Increment for Defaulting refers to the constant interval between
Z-values in the data which will cause the Symbol Color to default to the
next color in the Z-MAP Plus color table. If the Z-increment is 1,000
feet, and the starting color is 57 (blue-purple), then a change in 1,000
feet will change the symbol color to 58 (violet).

R2003.12.0 Features: Lines 263

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Start Z-value for Defaulting

This parameter allows you to single out Z-values of interest. For
example, if you are interested in depths at or below 5,500 feet, the Start
Z-value for Defaulting can be 5,500 feet. Data closer to the top surface
than 5,500 feet will all have the same symbol color.

Choose Z-field to Vary Symbol Color

Changes in the color of the posted symbol will be tied to the Z-field you
select. You can only select one Z-field to determine symbol color
variation. Fields available for selection are taken from your input line
data file. A list of Z-fields appears. Select the Z-field you want.

Z-table to Vary Symbol Color

This table contains a range of up to 50 maximum Z-values for color
indices to use when posting color symbols. The table contains a list of
Z-values for each color index. The number of color index numbers
posted on the panel was indicated in the Vary Symbol Color panel. If
you stipulated 4 color levels, you will be asked to enter 4 maximum
Z-levels. These maximum Z-values are not required if you chose a
method of defaulting the table.

Maximum Z-value for Symbol Color Index

The parameter entry area on this panel allows you to correlate changes
in Z-value to changes in symbol color index. You can choose up to 50
symbol color levels. The number of Maximum Z-values listed on this
panel is determined by the number of symbol color levels you indicated
on the Vary Symbol Color Parameters panel. Enter the Maximum
Z-value you want for each Symbol Color Index.

Choose Size Field For Symbol Size

If your input data file has a size field on it, you will see a list. Select the
size field you want.

R2003.12.0 Features: Lines 264

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Vary Symbol Size Parameters

This panel allows you to specify how symbol size parameters will be set
to cause variation in symbol size on your current picture. Control over
symbol size variation is provided by setting parameter values. Parameter
values which can be set for symbol size variation follow:
Offset for Vary by Area or Diameter This number refers to
the offset for symbol size calculation. When you have chosen to
Vary Symbol Size by Area or Diameter, these are the equations:
Vary Diameter Size:
Size = (field value + offset) * scale
Vary Area Size:
Size = SQRT [ (4/p) * scale * (field value + offset) ]
Scale for Vary by Area or Diameter This is the scale for
symbol size calculation.
Vary Area Size:
Size = SQRT [ (4/p) * scale * (field value + offset) ]
Vary Diameter Size:
Size = (field value + offset) * scale
Minimum Symbol Size (in./cm.) for Vary This number refers
to the smallest Symbol Size to post in plotter units (in./cm.). The
default minimum is 0.05 in. or 0.13 cm. For calculating symbol
size to vary by area or diameter, computed sizes smaller than this
minimum will be posted at the minimum size. For symbol sizes
calculated by class, this minimum is the smallest class size. This
size will be incremented by the Symbol Size Increment.
Maximum Symbol Size (in./cm.) for Vary This number refers
to the maximum Symbol Size to post in plotter units (in./cm.). The
default maximum is 0.25 in. or 0.64 cm. When calculating symbol
size to vary by area or diameter, computed sizes larger than this
maximum will be posted at the maximum size. For symbol sizes
calculated by class, this maximum is the largest class size. This
size will be incremented by the Symbol Size Increment.
Symbol Size Increment (in./cm) for Vary When Symbol Size
is set to Vary by Class, the Symbol Size Increment must be stated
in plotter units (in./cm.) The default symbol size increment is 0.05
in. or 0.13 cm.

R2003.12.0 Features: Lines 265

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Number of Class Intervals Symbol sizes can be made to vary

according to Class Intervals. Class intervals are defined by
Minimum Z-values, and you can define from 1 to 6 class intervals
for Symbol Size.
Z-minimum for Class One This number refers to the lowest
Z-value at which you want Symbol Posting to begin.

Choose Z-field to Vary Symbol Size

Changes in the size of the posted symbol will be tied to the Z-field on
this list which you select. You can only select one Z-field to determine
symbol size variation. Fields available for selection are taken from your
input line data file. A list of Z-fields appears. Select the Z-field you want
to use.

Z-Table to Vary Symbol Size

This table contains a range of up to 6 maximum Z-values for symbol
sizes to use. The table contains a list of Z-values for each symbol size
class. The number of size classes was indicated in the Vary Symbol
Parameters panel. If you stipulated 4 levels, you will be asked to enter 4
maximum Z-levels.

Maximum Z-value for Size Class

The parameter entry area on this panel allows you to correlate changes
in Z-value to changes in symbol size. You can choose up to 6 size class
levels. The number of maximum Z-values listed on this panel is
determined by the number of size class levels you indicated on the Vary
Symbol Size Parameters panel. Enter the maximum Z-value you want
for each size class.

R2003.12.0 Features: Lines 266

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Labeling Parameters
This panel allows you to determine labeling parameters for fields.
Control is allowed for: label rate, color mode and color index, font,
number of decimals, height and location of the symbol. You can
determine these label parameters for one or two fields, and you can
determine the labeling parameters for each of two fields independently.

Label Rate for All Fields

The Label Rate refers to the frequency with which posted points are
labeled. A Label Rate of 1 means that all posted points are to be labeled.
A Label Rate of 5 means that the first posted point will be labeled, and
every fifth point after will be labeled.

Color Mode
There are three ways to determine the color of the labels:
Index, Symbol, and Line.
Index refers to the number of the color in the Z-MAP Plus color
table.
Symbol refers to the color of the posted symbol to be labeled.
Line refers to the color of the succeeding line segment.

Color Index
If you chose the Index option for Label Color Mode, you must assign a
color index to determine label color for the current field. To see a palette
of the Z-MAP Plus color table, click the color box. Click the color you
want for the current fields label.

Label Font
The Label Font is the font in which labels for this field are to be printed.
The choices are shown at left.

Number of Decimals
This number refers to the number of places to the right of the decimal to
post for the field.

R2003.12.0 Features: Lines 267

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Height of Label
This value refers to the height of the label, in plotter units (in./cm). The
label represents the current field. The default label heights are 0.07 in.
or 0.18 cm.

Location of Label
There are two options for locating a label on a line. The label can be
posted to the Right of the line or it can posted to the Left of the line.

Data Units/Clip Mode

This panel allows you to determine the data units in which the
coordinates of the points are expressed, and whether data outside the
AOI border is displayed or clipped.

Data Units
The coordinates of the points on the lines are expressed in data units.
Data Units can be either user units or plotter units. The default value is
user units.
User units are engineering or user coordinates such as feet.
Plotter units are inches or centimeters.

Clip to Border Mode

This option refers to what the program is to do with points on the line
file which lie outside the AOI border of the current picture. When you
select Noclip, the lines are displayed beyond the border of the map.
When you select Clip, the program will not display the data outside the
border.

R2003.12.0 Features: Lines 268

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Cursor (Drawing Lines with the Cursor)

The Cursor option is intended to add map design functionality. Its
purpose is to allow you to draw freehand lines on your active picture.
While lines drawn with Cursor draw can be saved to the picture, drawing
lines using Cursor DOES NOT AFFECT THE DATA FILES ON
WHICH THE ACTIVE PICTURE IS BASED. Consequently, to edit
any lines drawn using Cursor draw, you must use the Edit option.
If your purpose in drawing lines is to affect data files stored in the
attached MFDs or in the OpenWorks project, you must use the Edit
Edit/Create Data option.

Editing MFD Data

To create or modify data on an MFD or OpenWorks, use the Edit
Data Editor option.

You can draw Contours, Faults, or Polylines on an active picture. With

Cursor draw, you do not need a preexisting data file for posting lines.
Lines drawn freehand can be conformed to user-specified parameters
and are saved in the ZGF as part of the active picture.

Contours
This option is for hand drawing contours on a work map. You will have
a variety of line pattern choices as well as a smoothing option. The
Delete option will make it possible for you to interpret and redraw your
contour.

Faults
This option is for hand drawing faults on a work map. You will have a
variety of line pattern choices as well as a smoothing option. The Delete
option will make it possible for you to interpret and redraw your fault.

Polylines
This option is for hand drawing lines or figures on a map. You will have
a variety of line pattern choices. The Delete option will make it possible
to redraw your line(s) if you wish.

R2003.12.0 Features: Lines 269

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Line Parameters
When you click Contours, Faults or Polylines, a Line Parameters panel
appears. For an explanation of most of the line parameters, refer to
General Line Parameters on page 254.
For all line types, you can set preferences for line color, line pattern, and
hachures.
For Contours, there is an option to label and set label intervals.
For Contours and Faults, there is a Smoothing option which enables you
to smooth or not smooth the hand-drawn graphics feature.

Drawing Lines and Line End Options

You are able to draw the lines on the active picture as soon as you click
OK in the Line Parameters dialog box. Click Button 1 at the location for
starting the first line, then click at each vertex location for that line.
When you have set all the points for the line, choose an End Option.

End Options
Once you click OK in the Line Parameters dialog box, the End Options
dialog box appears. There are three options for ending the line:
Delete Last deletes the last point you input (and the line connecting that
point to the previous point, if any) in the current line. It will not delete
points from lines that have been ended with End Open or End Closed.
End Open ends the current line at the last point input.
End Closed ends the current line and connects the last point input
to the first point input.

R2003.12.0 Features: Lines 270

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Text

Enter from Features in

Z-MAP Plus window

Select method for retrieving or creating text

Import text from a file Enter text from keyboard

Select text file Choose method to specify

character size and location

Select fields for X, Y, text, font,

location, size, and rotation Key & Cursor Below
Keyboard Last
Cursor Only

Set posting parameters

Save and return to

Z-MAP Plus window

Text Workflow

Text allows you to add text anywhere on your map. Text is required to
make a finished map. Different types of text that frequently appear on
maps include lease names and related information, names of roads,
rivers, etc., township-range indices, indicators for target areas, etc. All
of these types of text can be placed on your map with this process. For
example, you could name the map Top Cretaceous Structure Map, and
add a second line of text below the title (Below Last) that reads Offshore
Louisiana. Text has a source (either a text file or keyboard entry), a font
(type of lettering), a location, a color, and a rotation. To locate text, use
the keyboard only, the cursor only, or the cursor and keyboard together.

R2003.12.0 Features: Text 271

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

File (File Text)

If your source for text is a text file, the file can contain information for
the following parameters:
Select Text File A list of files is presented. Select the file you
want. This file will be used as input when the option executes. If
you do not have a text file, you must create one in order to use this
feature.
Select X-field This option allows you to select an X-field for
the x location of the text.
Select Y-field This option allows you to select a Y-field for the
y location of the text.
Select Text Field This option allows you to select the field that
contains the text to be posted.
Select Font Field This option will allow you to select a font
(text style) if there is a font field on your input text file.
Select Location Field This option allows you to identify the
location of your text if there is a location field in your input text
file.
Select Size Field This option allows you to choose a size for
your text characters if your input text file has an entry for this field.
Select Rotation Field This option allows you to identify angle
of rotation for your text if your input text file contains a rotation
field.
Posting Parameters This feature allows you to select the
parameters with which to post your text. It will allow you to select
the font, character size of the text, rotation angle, location,
coordinate system, scale factor, and color of the text. The options
for Coordinate System, SCALED, and UNSCALED refer to map
units and plotter units respectively. Scale Factor is only used in
conjunction with Text Size.

R2003.12.0 Features: Text 272

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Key (Key Text)

Most users select the keyboard as the source of text. From the Key Text
menu, select from:
Keyboard
Key & Cursor
Cursor Only
Below Last
If you select Key Text, a prompt directs you to:
SELECT HOW TO SPECIFY CHARACTER SIZE AND LOCATION.

Keyboard
If you select Keyboard, a dialog box appears, which you use to enter a
text string and its location.
Text Enter the text string you want to appear on the map.
X Location of Text (Plotter Units) Enter the x position of the
text, expressed in plotter units (in./cm.).
Y Location Enter the y position of your text in plotter units (in./
cm.).
Font The choices for text font are shown at left.
Color Index The color index is a number from 0 to 255 in the
Z-MAP Plus color table. The Color Index refers to the settings for
the currently active picture. To choose a Color Index for text, click
the color box. A palette of the 256 colors appears. You can change
the Color Index of the text by clicking the color you want.
Character Size Specify the size of the characters in your text
string in plotter units
(in./cm.).
Degree of Rotation In degrees from 0 to 360, indicate the
rotation for your text string. Rotation is counterclockwise, 0
degrees rotation is horizontal; 90 degrees is perpendicular to the x
axis, and so on.
Location Specified The options for location are Lower Left,
Lower Right, and Center. For example, if you choose Center, it
means that the location you are specifying (with the cursor or the
keyboard location) is the center of the text string. Lower Left
would be the lower left corner of the text string.

R2003.12.0 Features: Text 273

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Key & Cursor

With the exception of X-Location and Y-Location of text, the
parameters for Key & Cursor placement are the same as for Keyboard
placement. The X-Location and Y-Location of the text string are not
needed because the position of the cursor on the map determines the x,y
location.
Text Enter the text string as you want it to appear on the map.
Font The choices for text font are shown at left.
Color Index The color index is a number from 0 to 255 in the
Z-MAP Plus color table. The Color Index refers to the settings for
the currently active picture. To choose a color index for lines, click
the color box. A palette of the 256 colors will appear. You can
change the color index of the lines by clicking the color you want.
Character Size Specify the size of the characters in your text
string in plotter units (in./cm.).
Degree of Rotation In degrees from 0 to 360, indicate the
rotation for your text string. Rotation is counterclockwise,
0 degrees rotation is horizontal; 90 degrees is perpendicular to the
x axis, and so on.
Location Specified The options for location are Lower Left,
Lower Right, and Center. For example, if you choose Center, it
means that the location you are specifying (with the cursor or the
keyboard location) is the center of the text string. Lower Left
would be the lower left corner of the text string.

Cursor Only
The entries for cursor placement are Text, Font, and Color Index.
Text Enter the text string as you want it to appear on the map.
Font The choices for text font are shown at left.
Color Index The color index is a number from 0 to 255 in the
Z-MAP Plus color table. The Color Index refers to the settings for
the currently active picture. To choose a color index for lines, click
the color box. A palette of the 256 colors will appear. You can
change the color index of the lines by clicking the color you want.

Below Last
The entries for Below Last are Text, Font, and Color Index. The location
of the text string is below the previously chosen text string.

R2003.12.0 Features: Text 274

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Grid Nodes
Select Features Grid Nodes to place symbols and optional grid
values at gird nodes. Grid values do not typically appear on finished
maps, but you may want to show grid values while you edit a grid.
Exercise caution when you post grid node values: A dense grid can
easily result in unreadable, overlapping grid values. Such grids also take
more time to display, since drawing numbers takes much longer than
drawing lines or other types of map features.
To post grid node values, specify these parameters in the Post Grid Data
dialog box:
the grid
the symbol to mark the node location
symbol height
whether to mark ZNON (null data) locations
whether to post grid values
the rate to write grid values
the number of decimal positions for each value
an area within the grid to post

Post Grid Data Dialog Box

Grid
If you click the Grid button, the Select GRID dialog box appears with a
list of grids. Select a grid to use as input.

Posting Parameters
If you click the Posting Parameters button, the Set POSTING
Parameters dialog box, which you use to specify these parameters:
Symbol Number To post a symbol at the grid node locations,
use the Symbol Number box to specify a symbol to post. Enter 0
to post no symbol. (For symbols and their values, see Appendix
C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line Patterns, starting on page 791.)
Symbol Size Use the Symbol Size box to define the symbol
size in plotter units (in./cm.). The default value of 0.07 in. (0.18
cm.) is adequate to mark the locations and produce legible grid
values. Increasing the size increases the probability that values will
overlap.

R2003.12.0 Features: Grid Nodes 275

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Post at ZNON Location? ZNON (null) grid values result from

a variety of situations. Since it might be important to know where
ZNONs occur, you can use this parameter to mark the locations.
Alternately, there may be large areas of nulls that are of no interest
and marking them only clutters the display. You can choose to post
or omit ZNONs.
First Row To Post Minimum row of the grid to be displayed;
this specifies the bottom of the window.
Last Row To Post Maximum row of the grid to be displayed;
this specifies the top of the window.
First Column To Post Minimum column of the grid to be
displayed; this specifies the left side of the window.
Last Column To Post Maximum column of the grid to be
displayed; this specifies the right side of the window.

Labeling Parameters
Click the Labeling Parameters button to display the Set Labeling
Parameters dialog box. Use this dialog box to specify whether or not to
post the grid values, the number of decimal positions in the grid values,
the rate at which to display grid values, and what portion of the grid you
want to display.
Post Grid Value? If only grid locations are required, there is no
need to post the grid values. On the other hand, the grid value
information may be helpful. You must decide which option is best
in your case.
Decimal Positions In Value The decimal position indicates the
number of digits to the right of the decimal to be included in the
grid value. If a 0 is entered, an integer value is posted.
Row Labeling Rate and Column Labeling Rate Grid values
are output column-wise from top to bottom. Normally, all entries
are displayed. However, you can specify the output rates to reduce
the density of values on your map. Using m = 2, and n = 5 will
output every 5th row and every other column.
Starting Row (of posted rows) and Starting Column (of posted
columns) If only a portion of the grid is required, you may use
the starting row and column indices to limit the displayed locations
and values. The defaults display the full grid.

R2003.12.0 Features: Grid Nodes 276

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Polygons
The Features Polygons menu contains these options:
Color-filled Polygons
Lease Polygon Drawing
Shaded Polygons

Color-filled Polygons
To fill polygons with a solid color, select Features Polygons
Color-filled Polygons.The EXECUTE MACRO:POLYGON-FILL
dialog box appears. You specify the following parameters.
name of the input vertex file (Polygons are stored in VERT
(vertex) type files.)
coordinate system for the polygon vertices: either
ENGINEERING or PLOTTER
color to use for filling the polygon

R2003.12.0 Features: Polygons 277

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Lease Polygon Drawing

Lease Polygon Drawing allows you to post and label lease polygons. In
addition to labeling each polygon with lease identification information,
you have the ability to show lease attributes through:
line shading
hachuring
text
color

You are required to supply:

A text dataset that contains lease identification information. This
dataset must contain one or more text fields and the Area
Identification field. It may also contain an Area Symbol code field,
one or more color code fields and multiple z fields.
A vertex dataset that contains the lease identification information.
This dataset must contain X (Easting), Y (Northing), SEG I.D.,
and Area Identification fields.

Area ID and the Polygon Dataset Must be same Data Type

The Area Identification field for both the text dataset and the vertex dataset
must be the same data type and have the same field width.

To label leases, specify:

up to four fields from the lease identification file to use in labeling
each lease
the size of each line of text
Text strings are stacked in the order in which they are selected with
labels automatically center justified. When center justification is not
possible, then labels are right or left justified.
If labels are too large, the macro posts only the last selected label using
a unique two character code that is automatically generated. The text file
entries that cannot be posted are automatically output to a file that
contains the two character identification codes and their meanings.
Lease Polygon Drawing uses the LEASE-DRAWING macro. For more
information about using this feature, select Help Online
Manuals Macros, and locate the topic for LEASE DRAWING.

R2003.12.0 Features: Polygons 278

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Shaded Polygons
Fills a set of polygons with hachured lines. Use this option to hachure
shade fault polygons that have been converted to a vertex file.
Before you can use this option, you must have a picture displayed. The
shaded vertex file is added to the current picture.

Reselect the Current Picture

When you use the Shaded Polygons macro, you must reselect the current
picture by clicking the Picture Open icon. The shaded polygon becomes
visible when you select View Full Display or click the Full Display icon.

The Change Features Delete Last Feature option is not functional

with this process.
You are asked to supply a vertex file that contains polygons. Data fields
required by the macro include:
X (EASTING)
Y (NORTHING)
SEG I.D.
Optionally, you can specify a color index field for the hachured line.
You are also asked to make these specifications:
type of hachured line to draw
hachured line color
polygon outline color
source of hachure line color (value or color field)

R2003.12.0 Features: Polygons 279

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

(X,Y,Z) Point Data

Use the X,Y,Z Point Data option to place symbols at control point
locations or to post Z-field values and/or other information around
posted symbols. For example, you can post the well name above the well
symbol and the depth to a particular horizon below the well symbol.

Post Data Dialog Box

If you select Features X,Y,Z Point Data, the Post Data dialog box
appears, which contains the following buttons:

Select Data Button Select DATA Dialog Box

Click the Select Data button to display the Select DATA dialog box.
From the list of files, select the one that contains the data you want to
post. You must select a file before you can specify the other parameters
for the Post Data dialog box.

Fields to post Button Ordered Selection Dialog Box

Click the Fields to post button to display the Ordered Selection dialog
box. This specification is required if you have the option of determining
the order in which field labels or symbols will be posted.

Symbol Parameters Button Symbol Parameters Dialog Box

Click the Symbol Parameters button to display the Symbol Parameters
dialog box, which you use to control point symbol parameters,
including:
symbol code
select field
color field
symbol color
symbol size
The following text describes the parameters in the Symbol Parameters
dialog box.

R2003.12.0 Features: (X,Y,Z) Point Data 280

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

General Symbol Parameters

Click the General Symbol Parameters button to display the General
Symbol Parameters dialog box, which you use to control the following
symbol parameters:
posting method
symbol code
symbol color
symbol size
posting rate

Posting Method for Symbols and Labels

The listed choices for symbol posting with posted data points are All,
Select, and Omit. All and Select are the relevant choices. Omit is not
applicable to the posting method for x,y,z point data.
All. Post symbols with all data points.
Select. Post symbols only at points whose select field value is not
null. any Z-field can be a select field. You will choose Field under
the Choose Symbol Code Field panel.
Omit. This is not a meaningful option for this posting method.
Disregard it, and choose between All and Select for posting
method.

Determine Symbol Code by

The symbol code can be determined by symbol Number, symbol Field,
or Omit.
Number. You can specify the type of symbol posted by using a
symbol number from the Z-MAP Plus Extended Symbol Set. (See
Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line Patterns, starting on
page 791.)
Field. Determine symbol code to use by reading from a Symbol
Code field on your input dataset.
Omit. You can Omit the symbol for posted points. If you want to
retain or suppress labels with posted data points, you can do this
under Label Parameters.

R2003.12.0 Features: (X,Y,Z) Point Data 281

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Symbol Code Number

This number refers to a symbol supplied in the Z-MAP Plus Extended
Symbol Set. If Determine Symbol Code By is set to Number, this
selected symbol will be posted at each location. Otherwise, this
parameter is ignored. (For a list of Symbol Codes, see Appendix C.
Symbols, Fonts, and Line Patterns, starting on page 791.)

Determine Symbol Color by

You may specify the color of the posted symbol in one of three ways.
These three options are on the parameter menu:
You can determine the Symbol Color by Index, Field, or Z-field.
Index refers to a number in the Z-MAP Plus color table. When
you enter a number, the a box containing that color on the color
index appears to the left of the entry. Using Index as the method of
posting means that all of the symbols will be posted with this color
index.
Field means that a field on your input file specifies a color for each
symbol.
Z-field refers to the number of the Z-field on the input data file to
which the symbol color is tied. Determining color by Z-field will
result in a change of colors when the Z-value of the control point
changes (by a user-defined amount).

Symbol Color Index

This is the number associated with one of the 256 colors in the
Z-MAP Plus color table. Enter the index number of the color you want
to use, or click the color swatch next to the number field to call up the
Select A Color Index panel for a graphical selection.

R2003.12.0 Features: (X,Y,Z) Point Data 282

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Determine Symbol Size by

Choose one of these methods for determining symbol size:
VALUE uses the size of the symbol in plotter units (in./cm.). The
default values are 0.07 in. and 0.18 cm.
FIELD uses size from a field on the input file.
DIAMETER allows symbol size to vary by a simple scaling of a
selected Z-field.
AREA allows size of symbol to represent actual area as defined by
a Z-field of area (in engineering units).
CLASS allows symbol size to vary based on up to 6 user defined
intervals that relate to a particular Z-field. You can make all the
producing well symbols a specific size in plotter units (in./cm.), all
the dry holes another size.

Symbol Size
This is the symbol height in plotter units (in./cm.).

Posting Rate
The Posting Rate for symbols is a divisor for the number of points. A
posting rate of 1 means that every control point will be posted. A posting
rate of 5 means that every 5th control point will be posted.

Choose Symbol Code Field

Click the Choose Symbol Code Field button to display the Select
Symbol dialog box. If the input file contains a symbol field, use this
option to post a symbol for a point based on the symbol field.

Choose Select Field

Click the Choose Select Field button to display the Select Field to use
as Posting Select Field dialog box. This dialog box contains a list of
fields in the input line file. Choose a field to use as the posting Select
Field. (The posted control points are based on this field.)

Choose Color Field for symbol color

This is the color field used to determine the color for the posted symbol.
A list of the field names for color fields is presented. These color fields
are taken from the input line data file.

R2003.12.0 Features: (X,Y,Z) Point Data 283

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Vary Symbol Color Parameters

Click the Vary Symbol Color Parameters button to display the Vary
Symbol Color Parameters dialog box. Use this dialog box to vary the
color of the symbol posted. You can show a gradual increase in a
Z-value by assigning a color to a given range. You can vary the color by
choosing a starting color index, the number of color levels, method of
defaulting the Z-table for color levels, the Z-increment for defaulting,
and the start Z-value for defaulting. You can show a gradual increase in
a Z-value by assigning a color to a given range.

Start Color Index

The Start Color Index is the number of the beginning color (in the color
table) to use for varying the symbol colors.

Number of Color Levels

Enter the number of colors to display on the map as Z-values.

Default Z-Table for Color Levels by

Select the criteria (if any) you want to use to automatically assign the
Z-value color.
NONE indicates that you do not want to use default color
variation.
DIVIDE indicates that you want to default the color variation by
dividing the Z-value by a constant value. A Divide value of 50
would change the color of the symbol every time the Z-value is
divisible by 50. Default setting)
INCREMENT indicates that you want to default the color of the
Z-value symbol when a constant distance change has been
achieved. An increment of 25, for example. would result in a
change of color for the Z-value symbol every 25 feet.
INCREMENT+START means that you specify the lowest
Z-value at which to begin default color variation, and the
increment which must be achieved before the next color is posted.

Z-Increment for defaulting

This value is the Z-increment that causes the line color to move up one
level. This value is used only if the Default Z-Table for Color Levels
by button reads INCREMENT or INCREMENT+START.

R2003.12.0 Features: (X,Y,Z) Point Data 284

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Start Z-Value for defaulting

This number is the Z-value to begin defaulting the Z-table. The Start
Z-value is only used if the Default Z-Table for Color Levels by button
reads INCREMENT+START. If the Start Z-value is 7300, and the
increment is 50, color defaulting occurs at 7350, 7400, 7450, etc.

Choose Z-field to vary symbol color

Click the Choose Z-field to vary symbol color button to display the
Select Z FIELD for COLOR change in posting symbol dialog box. If the
input file contains more than one Z-field, you must choose a Z-value to
use as the basis of the color variations.

Z-table to vary symbol color

Click the Z-table to vary symbol color button to display the Z level
TABLE for symbol color dialog box. Use this dialog box only if you are
not using one of the default methods for assigning color table values.
If you are assigning custom values to the color table, you can specify a
maximum value for color index numbers. This enables you to correlate
changes in Z-value to changes in symbol color number.
The number of color index fields and starting index color reflects the
choices you made in the Vary Symbol Color Parameters dialog box. For
example, if you stipulated four color levels, you can enter minimum or
maximum Z-level values for the four color indexes. The maximum
number of color index fields displayed is 17.

Choose Size Field for symbol size

A list of Size Fields on the input line data file appears. You can choose
one size field from this list.

R2003.12.0 Features: (X,Y,Z) Point Data 285

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Vary Symbol Size Parameters

Click the Vary Symbol Size Parameters button to display the Vary
Symbol Size Parameters dialog box. Set parameter values in this dialog
box to control the symbol size variation in the current picture. Values
you can set for symbol size variation follow:
Offset for Vary by Area or Diameter This number refers to
the offset for symbol size calculation. When you have chosen to
vary symbol size by area or diameter, these are the equations:
Vary Area Size:
Size = SQRT [(4/pi) * Scale * (field value + offset)]
Vary Diameter Size:
Size = (field value + offset) * scale
Scale for Vary by Area or Diameter This is the scale for
symbol size calculation.
Vary Area Size:
Size = SQRT [(4/pi) * Scale * (field value + offset)]
Vary Diameter Size:
Size = (field value + offset) * scale
Minimum Symbol Size (in/cm) for Vary This number refers
to the minimum symbol size to post, in plotter units (in./cm). The
default minimum is 0.05 in. or 0.13 cm.
Maximum Symbol Size (in/cm) for Vary This number refers
to the maximum symbol size to post, in plotter units (in./cm). The
default maximum is 0.25 in. or 0.64 cm.
Symbol Size Increment (in/cm) for Vary When symbol size is
set to Vary By Class, the symbol size increment must be stated in
plotter units (in./cm.) The default symbol size increment is 0.05 in.
or 0.13 cm.
Number of Class Intervals Symbol sizes can be made to vary
according to class intervals. Class intervals are defined by
minimum Z-values, and you can define from 1 to 6 class intervals
for symbol size.
Z-Minimum for Class one This number refers to the lowest
Z-value for symbol posting to begin.

R2003.12.0 Features: (X,Y,Z) Point Data 286

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Choose Z-field to vary symbol size

Click the Choose Z-field to vary symbol size button to display the
Select Z-Field to use to vary symbol size dialog box. This dialog box
contains a list of fields in the input line data file. Changes in the size of
the posted symbol are tied to the Z-field you select from this list. You
can select only one Z-field to determine symbol size variation.

Z-table to vary symbol size

Click the Choose Z-table to vary symbol size button to display the
Z level TABLE for symbol size dialog box. Use this dialog box only if
you are not using one of the default methods for assigning color table
values.
If you are assigning custom values to the color table, you can specify a
maximum value for each size class you specified in the Vary Symbol
Color Parameters dialog box (up to 20 size classes). This enables you to
correlate changes in Z-value to changes in symbol size.

R2003.12.0 Features: (X,Y,Z) Point Data 287

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Labeling Parameters
Use this selection to determine the parameters for labeling fields, for
setting the rate at which to post labels, and for selecting color fields.

Field Parameters
This panel allows you to determine labeling parameters for fields.
Control is allowed for:
color mode
color index
font
number of decimals
height (of label)
location (of label)
You can determine the labeling parameters for each field selected for
labeling independently.

Color Mode
There are three ways to determine the color of the symbol: by the color
Index, by the Symbol, and by the Field.
Index refers to the color index for the color in the Z-MAP Plus
color table.
Symbol refers to the symbol number in the Z-MAP Plus Extended
Symbol Set. (For a list of symbols and their codes, see Appendix
C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line Patterns, starting on page 791.)
Field refers to a field of data stored with the control point data that
lists a color index for each control point.

Color Index
If you choose the Index option for Color Mode, you must assign a color
index from the color table to determine label color for the current field.
The color index is a number from 0 to 255 which represents a color in
the Z-MAP Plus color table. The color index refers to the settings for the
currently active picture.

R2003.12.0 Features: (X,Y,Z) Point Data 288

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Field Font
The Field Font is the font in which Labels for this field are to be printed.
The choices are:

Number of Decimals
This number refers to the number of places to the right of the decimal to
post for the field. Up to 12 decimal places are allowed.

Height of Label
This value refers to the height of the label, in plotter units (in./cm). The
label represents the current field. The default label heights are 0.07 in.
or 0.18 cm.

Location of Label
There are two options for locating a label on a line. The label can be
posted to the Right of the line or it can posted to the Left of the line.

Labeling Rate
The Labeling Rate refers to the rate at which posted control points are
labeled. A label rate of 1 means that every point is labeled, a label rate
of 3 means that every 3rd point in the file is labeled.

R2003.12.0 Features: (X,Y,Z) Point Data 289

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Color Fields
This panel is a list of color fields found on your input control point data
file. Select the color field you would like to use for your label. This
parameter is used only when Color Mode is set to Field.

Data Units/Clip Mode

This panel allows you to determine the data units in which the
coordinates of the points are expressed, and whether data outside the
AOI border is displayed or clipped at the border.

Data Units
The coordinates of the control points are expressed in data units. Data
units can be either user units or plotter units. User units are engineering
or user coordinates such as feet. Plotter units are inches or centimeters.
The default value is User units.

Clip to Border Mode

This option refers to what the program is to do with points on the line
file which lie outside the AOI border of the current picture. When you
select Noclip, the lines are displayed beyond the border of the map.
When you select Clip, the program will not display the data outside the
border.

R2003.12.0 Features: (X,Y,Z) Point Data 290

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Deviated Wells

Features Deviated Wells menu

Deviated well posting enables you to post and label the top, bottom, and
well trace of deviated wells. The process provides significant control
over size and color of posted features.
The main components of deviated well posting are Top Hole Posting,
Bottom Hole Posting, and Well Trace Posting.

R2003.12.0 Features: Deviated Wells 291

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Well Trace Posting includes posting points along the well trace. The
capabilities of each component are outlined in the following table.

Well Trace Posting

Top Hole Posting Bottom Hole Posting
(Intermediate)

Post symbols at: Post symbols at: Well Trace Posting

all wells all wells
Color of line segments
only wells that are not only wells that are not
from point:
ZNON for selected ZNON for selected
constant color
Z-field Z-field
color based on color field
a specified posting rate a specified posting rate
variable color based on
selected Z-field
Symbol Uses: Symbol uses: Well traces can be divided
same symbol at all same symbol at all into:
wells wells secondary lines that can
different symbols different symbols have different posting
based on symbol code based on symbol code parameters from primary
field field lines
Symbol size and color is Symbol size and color is Scale posting along well
based on: based on: trace:
constant value constant value based on a selected
size or color field size or color field Z-field
Z-field values Z-field values tick style controls
tick label controls
Labels up to 12 fields at: Labels up to 12 fields at: Note:
each posted symbol each posted symbol Uses the same line styles that
a specified labeling rate a specified labeling rate are available for any line
posting (solid, dashed,
pattern.).

Colors for posted fields Colors for posted fields Posting Points Along Well
can be: can be: Trace
same color as symbol same color as symbol
Symbol posting and size:
a specified color a specified color
same capabilities as Top
based on a color field based on a color field
and Bottom Hole Posting
Symbol color:
same color as well trace
same capabilities as Top
and Bottom Hole Posting
Labels up to 2 fields:
same capabilities as for
Top and Bottom Hole
Posting

Posted fields can have different sizes, fonts, decimal places, and/or positions.

R2003.12.0 Features: Deviated Wells 292

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Each of the three major parts of a deviated well data file has fields to
post and symbol and labeling parameters. The Top and Bottom
components have been documented under three headings: Top/Bottom
Fields to Post, Top/Bottom Symbol Parameters, and Top/Bottom
Labeling Parameters. Parameter settings for the top do not have to match
bottom hole parameters. The Well Trace component of the data has
three additional parameter types: Line Mode/Scale Mode, Well Trace
Parameters, and Scale Field.
The Top, Bottom, and Well Trace components of the deviated well each
has a Fields to Post panel. This panel is the Ordered Select panel new to
Z-MAP Plus.
Each component also has parallel panels for symbol and labeling
parameters. The parameter panels for all three components are identical
for symbol posting and labeling.
You will most likely want to vary the color coding for symbols and
labels according to whether they belong to the top, bottom, or well trace
component. You can also color code points according to the variation in
a selected Z-field.

Deviated Well Files

Deviated Well files are of the type DWEL. The required fields are X, Y,
and Segment I.D.
All field types are allowed on a DWEL file, but some of the more
important optional fields include:

Fields for Top Only Fields for Top, Bottom, Fields for Well Trace
and Well Trace Only
Well Name or Platform Select Field Line Color Field to
Name (used for Symbol Field Vary Line Color
labeling) Symbol Size Field Z-field to Vary Line
Symbol Color Field Color
Z-field used to control Z-field to Vary Line
Symbol Size Pattern
Color Fields for Labels Well Trace Fields to
Z-field used to control Post
Symbol Color Well Trace Scale Field

R2003.12.0 Features: Deviated Wells 293

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Select Data
A list of DWEL (deviated well) data files appears, including the
OpenWorks Current Well List. This file will contain the deviated wells
that you would like to post. If you select from the OpenWorks Current
Well List, the selected well list becomes a DWEL file for use in
Z-MAP Plus, however DWEL files cannot used by other applications.

Top/Bottom Fields to Post

At either the well top or bottom locations, you can post up to 12 fields.
The ordered selection panel gives you the option of determining the
order in which field labels or symbols will be posted, or the order in
which fields will be printed on a report.
The Ordered Selection panel has two lists side by side. The Source List
contains the fields that are listed in your input data file. The Destination
List holds the fields you select for output from the Source List. Fields
are output in the order in which they are listed on the Destination List.
Depending on the mode you are in, you can Append (add), Delete, and
Insert (change the order of) the fields on the Destination List. Append is
the default mode.

Top/Bottom Symbol Parameters

These panels allow you to control Top/Bottom Field Symbol
Parameters, including:
Symbol Code
Select Field
Color Field
Symbol Color
Symbol Size

R2003.12.0 Features: Deviated Wells 294

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

General Symbol Parameters

General Symbol Parameters allows you to determine how symbols get
posted by controlling the following parameters: Posting Method,
Symbol Code, Symbol Color, Symbol Size, and Posting Rate.
Posting Method for Symbols and Labels This method
determines how Symbols and Labels are posted. The options are:
All Post symbols with all data points.
Select Post symbols only at points whose select field value
is not null. any Z-field can be a select field. You will choose
Field under the Choose Symbol Code Field panel.
Omit No symbols posted.
Determine Symbol Code By There are three options to
determine which symbol gets posted at top/bottom locations:
Number. You may specify the type of symbol to be posted
using a symbol number from the Z-MAP Plus Extended
Symbol Set. (See Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line
Patterns, starting on page 791.)
Field. Determine symbol code to use by reading from a
Symbol Code field on your input dataset.
Omit. You can Omit the symbol for posted points. If you want
to retain or suppress labels with posted data points, you can do
this under Label Parameters.
Symbol Code Number This number refers to a symbol
supplied in the Z-MAP Plus Extended Symbol Set. If Determine
Symbol Code By is set to Number, this selected symbol will be
posted at each location. Otherwise, this parameter is ignored. (For
a list of Symbol Codes, see Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and
Line Patterns, starting on page 791.)
Determine Symbol Color By You can determine the symbol
color by Index, Field or Z-field.
Index refers to a number in the Z-MAP Plus color table. When
you enter a number, the a box containing that color on the color
index appears to the left of the entry. Using Index as the
method of posting means that all of the symbols will be posted
with this color index.
Field means that a field on your input file specifies a color for
each symbol.

R2003.12.0 Features: Deviated Wells 295

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Z-field refers to the number of the Z-field on the input data file
to which the symbol color is tied. Determining color by Z-field
will result in a change of colors when the Z-value of the
control point changes (by a user-defined amount).
Symbol Color Index This is the number associated with the
256 colors in the Z-MAP Plus color table. Each color has an
associated number, or index. To see a palette of the colors, select
the Color Box. Then select the color you want for your symbol
color.
Determine Symbol Size By There are five methods for
determining symbol size:
Value uses the size of the symbol in plotter units (in./cm.). The
default values are 0.07 in. and 0.18 cm.
Field size from a field on the input file.
Diameter allows symbol size to vary by a simple scaling of a
selected Z-field.
Area allows size of symbol to represent actual area as defined
by a Z-field of area (in engineering units).
Class allows symbol size to vary based on up to 6 user defined
intervals that relate to a particular Z-field. You can make all the
producing well symbols a specific size in plotter units (in./
cm.), all the dry holes another size.
Symbol Size This number is the symbol height in plotter units
(in./cm.).
Posting Rate The Posting Rate for symbols is the divisor of the
number of top/bottom fields. A Posting Rate of 1 means that every
top/bottom field on the data file will have a symbol posted. A
Posting Rate of 5 means that every 5th field will have a symbol
posted.

Choose Symbol Code Field

Choosing Symbol Code Field will post a symbol for a point based on the
symbol field on your input file, if your input file contains one.

Choose Select Field

The Select Field determines where posting can occur at top/bottom
locations. A list of fields on your input file appears. Select the field you
want to use as the field on which to base the posted top/bottom fields.

R2003.12.0 Features: Deviated Wells 296

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Choose Color Field for Symbol Color

This is the color field used to determine the color for the posted symbol.
A list of the field names for color fields is presented. These color fields
are taken from the input data file. Select one of the fields listed.

Vary Symbol Color Parameters

Vary Symbol Color Parameters allows you to vary the color of the
symbol posted. Color can be varied by choosing a starting color index,
the number of color levels, method of defaulting the Z-table for color
levels, the Z-increment for defaulting, and the start Z-value for
defaulting. The purpose of this feature is to allow the mapper to show a
gradual increase in a Z-value by representing a defined change in Z as a
color in a given range. For example, every change of 50 feet could be
represented by a slightly darker shade of blue.

Start Color Index

This number represents the Color Index which will be used for the first
Z-value range to be posted. Index refers to a number in the Z-MAP Plus
color table. When you enter a number, the a box containing that color on
the color index appears to the left of the entry. Using Index as the
method of posting means that all of the symbols will be posted with this
color index.

Number of Color Levels

This number refers to the number of colors in the color table that are
displayed as changes in Z-values.

Default Z-Table for Color Levels By

Defaulting the color variation results in an automatic assignment of a
color to a Z-value according to the criteria you select for the parameter.
None Does not default the color variation.
Divide Indicates that you want to default the color variation by
dividing the Z-value by a constant value. A Divide value of 50
would change the color of the symbol every time the Z-value is
divisible by 50.
Increment Indicates that you want to default the color of the
Z-value symbol when a constant distance change has been
achieved. An increment of 25, for example, would result in a
change of color for every Z-value change of 25.

R2003.12.0 Features: Deviated Wells 297

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Increment+Start Begins with the Start Z-value for Defaulting

Symbol Color and changes to the next color index when the
Z-increment has been reached.

Z-increment for Defaulting

This value equals the Z-increment which will cause the symbol color to
move up one level. This defaulting method is only used if Default
Z-table for Color Levels By is Increment or Increment+Start.

Start Z-value for Defaulting

This number represents the Z-value at which you wish to begin
defaulting the Z-table. The Start Z-value is only used when Default
Z-table for Color Levels By is Increment+Start. If your Start Z-value
is 7300, and your increment is 50, color defaulting will occur at 7350,
7400, 7450, etc.

Choose Z-field to Vary Symbol Color

If there is more than one Z-field on an input file, you must choose the
Z-field that you would like to use to base the color variations on.

Z-table to Vary Symbol Color

This table contains a range of Z-values for color indices that you may
use when posting color symbols. The table contains a list of Z-values for
each color index. Maximum Z-values are not required if you chose a
method of defaulting the table.

Maximum Z-value For Color Index

You may correlate changes in Z-value to changes in color index number.
The number of Maximum Z-values listed on this panel is determined by
the number of Symbol Color Levels you indicated on the Symbol Color
Set Parameters panel; you can choose up to 20 symbol color levels.
Enter the Maximum Z-value you want for each color index.

Choose Size Field for Symbol Size

If your input dataset contains size fields, a list of Size Fields on your
input line data file is presented. You can choose one Size Field from this
list.

R2003.12.0 Features: Deviated Wells 298

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Vary Symbol Size Parameters

You may specify how Symbol Size Parameters will be set to cause
variation in symbol size on your current picture. Control over symbol
size variation is provided by setting parameter values. The parameter
values are described in the following text.
Offset for Vary by Area or Diameter This number refers to
the offset for Symbol Size calculation. When you chose to vary
Symbol Size by Area or Diameter, these are the equations:
Vary Area Size:
Size = SQRT [(4/p) * scale * (field value + offset)]
Vary Diameter Size:
Size = (field value + offset) * scale
Scale for Vary by Area or Diameter This is the scale for
symbol size calculation.
Vary Area Size:
Size = SQRT [(4/p) * scale * (field value + offset)]
Vary Diameter Size:
Size = (field value + offset) * scale
Minimum Symbol Size (in./cm.) for Vary This number refers
to the minimum symbol size to post, in plotter units (in./cm.). The
default minimum is 0.05 in. or 0.13 cm.
Maximum Symbol Size (in./cm.) for Vary This number refers
to the maximum symbol size to post, in plotter units (in./cm.). The
default maximum is 0.25 in. or 0.64 cm.
Symbol Size Increment (in./cm.) for Vary When symbol size
is set to Vary by Class, the symbol size increment must be stated in
plotter units (in./cm.) The default Symbol Size Increment is 0.05
in. or 0.13 cm.
Number of Class Intervals Symbol sizes can be made to vary
according to Class Intervals. Class Intervals are defined by
Minimum Z-values, and you can define from 1 to 6 class intervals
for symbol size.
Z-minimum for Class One This number refers to the lowest
Z-value at which you want Symbol Posting to begin.

R2003.12.0 Features: Deviated Wells 299

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Choose Z-field to Vary Symbol Size

Changes in the size of the posted symbol will be tied to the Z-field you
select from this list. You may only select one Z-field to determine
symbol size variation. Fields available for selection are taken from your
input line data file.

Z-table to Vary Symbol Size

This table contains a range of up to 6 maximum Z-values for symbol
sizes to use. The table contains a Z-value for each symbol size class.
These Maximum Z-values are not required if you chose a method of
defaulting the table.

Maximum Z-value for Size Class

You may correlate top/bottom symbol size to maximum Z-values. Enter
the maximum Z-value for each Size Class.

Top/Bottom Labeling Parameters

You can control how labels posted at symbols are set up by controlling
Field Labeling Parameters, Labeling Rate, and Color Fields.

Field Parameters
You can determine labeling parameters for each field selected for
labeling independently. You can specify values for the following
parameters:
Color Mode There are three ways to determine the color of the
symbol:
Index refers to a number in the Z-MAP Plus color table.
When you enter a number, the a box containing that color on
the color index appears to the left of the entry. Using Index as
the method of posting means that all of the labels will be
posted with this color index.
Symbol allows you to determine the color of a text label
based on the type of symbol it labels. You do this by selecting
the symbol code number you want from the Z-MAP Plus
Extended Symbol Set, which provides symbols for posting oil
wells, shotpoints, for example. (For examples of these
symbols, see Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line
Patterns, starting on page 791.)
Field means that the label color to use is read from a color
field in your input dataset.

R2003.12.0 Features: Deviated Wells 300

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Color Index If you choose the Index option for Color Mode,
you must assign a color index from the color table to determine
label color for the current field. The Color Index is a number from
0 to 255 which represents a color in the Z-MAP Plus color table.
To see the color palette, select the Color Box. Select the color you
want for the current field's label.
Font The Font is the font in which labels for the Label Field are
to be printed. The choices are shown at left.
Number of Decimals For each numeric label field, you can
control the number of decimal places. This number refers to the
number of places to the right of the decimal to post for the field.
Up to 12 decimal places are allowed.
Height of Label This value refers to the height of the label, in
plotter units (in./cm.). The label represents the current field. The
default label heights are 0.07 in. or 0.18 cm.
Location of Label This panel enables you to control the
position of each label field with respect to the symbol. There are
five options for locating a label in relation to a posted symbol:
Above the top/bottom symbol
Below the top/bottom symbol
Right of the top/bottom symbol
Left of the top/bottom symbol
Centered with reference to the well location

Labeling Rate
The Labeling Rate refers to the rate at which posted top/bottom fields
are labeled. A label rate of 1 means that every posted top/bottom field is
labeled, a label rate of 3 means that every 3rd posted field is labeled.

Color Fields
Color Fields presents a list of color fields. Select the color field for the
top/bottom label color. The Select Color Field for top/bottom label color
will appear for as many fields whose color mode was set to Field.

R2003.12.0 Features: Deviated Wells 301

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Well Trace Line Mode/Scale Mode

Well Trace Line Mode/Scale Mode allows you to determine the type of
line which will connect the (well trace) intermediate points. You are
asked to specify:
which lines will have primary line parameters applied
the type of line scale you want

Use Primary Line Parameters for Which Lines

Whether a line is a primary or a secondary line depends on the Select
Field. The first point on a primary line must be a known value. A null
value (ZNON) is not acceptable.
Secondary lines have a null first point (for the value of the Select Field).
The value for the first point on a secondary line is unknown.
Primary line parameters allow you to specify the type of line to connect
the well trace line segments. The types of lines are determined by the
following choices:
Pattern Number
Solid
Single Dash
Double Dash
Triple Dash
Hachured
Vary the Pattern by Z-field
Omit
There are three options with respect to Primary Line Parameters:
All. Post all lines using Primary Line Parameters.
Primary. Post only primary lines using Primary Line Parameters.
When the value of the top hole location is not null, use the Primary Line
Parameters for that line. When the value of the top hole location is null,
use Secondary Parameters for that line.
Secondary. Post only secondary lines using Primary Line Parameters.
When the value of the top hole location is not null, use the Secondary
Line Parameters for that line. When the value of the top hole location is
null, use Primary Parameters for that line.

R2003.12.0 Features: Deviated Wells 302

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Type of Line Scale

The Tick Field is the field number of the Z-field used to post tick marks
and labels along lines. If the Z-field is a depth field, a depth scale for
well traces will be produced.
The Type of Line Scale refers to a method for plotting a scale on lines
based on the values of the Tick Field.
There are three options for Type of Line Scale:
Ticks. Plots tick marks at specified increments.
Ticks+Labels. Plots tick marks at specified increments and posts the
label with the value of the field at these tick marks.
Omit. Does not plot a scale.

Well Trace Parameters

Well Trace line drawing parameters provide control for the following:
Primary Line Parameters
Choose Color Field for Line Color
Vary Line Color Parameters
Choose Z-field to Vary Line Color
Z-table to Vary Line Color
Vary Line Pattern Parameters
Choose Z-field to Vary Line Pattern
Z-table to Vary Line Pattern
Choose Select Field
Secondary Line Parameters

R2003.12.0 Features: Deviated Wells 303

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Primary Line Parameters

Click the Primary Line Parameters button in the Well trace Line
Drawing dialog box to display the Primary Line Parameters for Well
Traces dialog box. Use this dialog box to control line type, dash length
and dash gap, hachure length, gap, and direction, line weight and line
color. You can specify the following input values:
Line Type This menu allows you to choose the type of line you
want to draw in connecting the points. Select on the graphical
representations of the desired line types, or choose to establish line
type by Pattern number or vary the line pattern by Z-field.
Line Pattern Number This is the pattern number for drawing
lines. Enter a number from 1 to 20. (For examples of line patterns,
see Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line Patterns, starting on
page 791.)
Dash Length One This value is required only if you have
chosen a dashed line as the line type for well traces. This number
represents the length in plotter units (in./cm.) of the first dash in
the dash pattern for drawing lines. The default length for the first
dash is 0.07 in. or 0.18 cm.
Dash Length Two This value is required only if you have
chosen a dashed line with two or three different dash lengths. This
number represents the length in plotter units (in./cm.) of the
second dash in the dash pattern for drawing lines. The default
length for the second dash is 0.09 in. or 0.23 cm.
Dash Length Three This value is required only if you have
chosen a dashed line with three dash lengths as the Line Type. This
number represents the length in plotter units (in./cm.) of the third
dash in the dash pattern for drawing lines. The default length for
the third dash is 0.11 in. or 0.28 cm.
Gap Length One This value is required only if you have
chosen a dashed line as the Line Type. This number represents the
length in plotter units (in./cm.) of the first gap between dashes in
the dash pattern for drawing lines. The default length for the first
gap is 0.07 in. or 0.18 cm.
Gap Length Two This value is required only if you have
chosen a dashed line (consisting of two or three unequal dash
lengths) as the Line Type. This number represents the length in
plotter units (in./cm.) of the second gap between dashes in the dash
pattern for drawing lines. The default gap length for the second
gap is 0.09 in. or 0.23 cm.

R2003.12.0 Features: Deviated Wells 304

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Gap Length Three This value is required only if you have

chosen a dashed line (consisting of three unequal dash lengths) as
the Line Type. This number represents the length in plotter units
(in./cm.) of the third gap between dashes in the dash pattern for
drawing lines. The default gap length for the third gap is 0.11 in. or
0.28 cm.
Hachure Gap This value is required only if you have chosen a
Line Type of Hachure. This number represents the gap between
hachures in plotter units
(in./cm.) of the hachures in the pattern for drawing lines. The
default hachure gap is 0.1 in. or 0.25 cm.
Hachure Length This value is required only if you have
chosen a Line Type of Hachure. This number represents the length
in plotter units (in./cm.) of the hachures in the pattern for drawing
primary lines. The default hachure length is 0.05 in. or 0.13 cm.
Hachure Direction This direction is the direction of the
hachures relative to the line. Left means to draw the hachures on
the relative left side of the line, and Right means to draw the
hachures on the right side of the line. The default direction is Left.
Line Weight This number represents a multiple of the normal
line width for drawing lines. The thicknesses range from 1 to 8,
and the default line weight is 1. The larger the weight, the bolder
the line will be.
Color Mode There are three methods for defining the color of
the primary lines:
Index refers to a number in the Z-MAP Plus color table.
When you enter a number, the a box containing that color on
the color index appears to the left of the entry. Using Index as
the method of posting means that all of the lines will be posted
with this color index.
Field means that a field on your input file specifies a color
for each line.
Z-field refers to the number of the Z-field on the input data
file to which the line color is tied. Determining color by Z-field
will result in a change of colors when the Z-value of the line
changes (by a user-defined amount).

R2003.12.0 Features: Deviated Wells 305

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Color Index The Color Index is a number from 0 to 255 in the

Z-MAP Plus color table. The Color Index refers to the settings for
the currently active picture. To choose a Color Index for lines,
select the color box. A palette of the 256 colors will appear. You
can change the color index of the lines by selecting the color you
want.

Choose Color Field for Line Color

From the list of the color field names that appears, select a field to use
for the line color. The color fields are derived from the input line data
file.

Vary Line Color Parameters

If the color variation is based on the Z-field value, click the Vary Line
Color Parameters button in the Well trace Line Drawing Parameters
dialog box to display the Vary Line Color Parameters dialog box. Use
this dialog box to vary line color by specifying user-supplied default
parameters. You can specify the starting color, method of defaulting
Z-table, the Z-increment for defaulting, and the starting Z-value for
defaulting.
Start Color Index This number represents the color index
which will be used for the first Z-value range to be posted. The
Color Index represents a color in the Z-MAP Plus color table.
Number of Color Levels This is the number of color levels to
use when determining symbol color variation. The number of
color levels is relevant when the method of determining symbol
color is tied to the value of the Z-field.
Default Z-table for Color Levels By When the method of
determining Symbol Color is by Z-field value, there are four
modes of setting up the Z-table to vary symbol color:
None Does not default the table.
Divide Divides the range of Z-values into color level
classes. The program will calculate a reasonable starting
Z-value and Z-increment.
Increment The change in Z-value necessary to change the
symbol color to the next color on the Color Index.
Increment+Start Begins with the Start Z-value for
Defaulting Symbol Color and changes to the next color index
when the Z-increment has been reached.

R2003.12.0 Features: Deviated Wells 306

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Z-increment for Defaulting The Z-increment for Defaulting

refers to the interval between Z-values in the data which will cause
the symbol color to default to the next color in the Z-MAP Plus
color table. If the Z-increment is 1,000 feet, and the starting color
is 57 (blue-purple), then a depth of another 1,000 feet will change
the symbol color to 58 (violet).
Start Z-value for Defaulting This parameter allows you to
single out Z-values of interest. If you are interested in depths at or
below 5,500 feet, the Start Z-value for defaulting can be 5,500
feet. Data closer to the top surface than 5,500 feet will all be the
same color.

Choose Z-Field to Vary Line Color

The value of the selected Z-field is used to change line color. You can
only select one Z-field to determine line color variation. Fields available
for selection are derived from the input line data file.

Z-Table to Vary Line Color

If you specified a Z-field to use for varying line color, click the Z-Table
to Vary Line Color button in the Well trace Line Drawing dialog box
to display the Z level TABLE for Line Color dialog box. This dialog box
contains a range of up to 50 maximum Z-values for color indices to use
when drawing lines, one for each color level. The number of color levels
was indicated in the Vary Line Color Parameters panel. If you stipulated
4 color levels, you will be asked to enter 4 maximum Z-levels. These
maximum Z-values are not required if you chose a method of defaulting
the table.
Each parameter entry area on the Z-table for line color represents the
maximum Z-value for that color. The values you enter into this table will
correlate line color to Maximum Z-value. When the Z-value reaches the
next maximum, the line color will vary by one index number. You can
represent up to 50 Maximum Z-values.
For example, assume that your starting color in the color table is 17, the
distance between Maximum Z-values is 100 feet, and your Maximum
Z-value for index 17 is 7,500 feet. The index color for 7,575 feet will
be index color 18.
The number of Z-values you can enter on this table is determined by the
Number of Color Levels you entered on the Vary Line Color Parameters
panel. The starting color was also determined by your choice on the
Vary Line Color Parameters panel.

R2003.12.0 Features: Deviated Wells 307

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Vary Line Pattern Parameters

Click the Vary Line Pattern Parameters button in the Well trace Line
Drawing Parameters dialog box to display the Vary Line Pattern
Parameters dialog box. This dialog box contains the same choices for
line patterns as are available for varying line colors. If the Line Type is
Z-field, the default values for assigning patterns can be defined.
Start Pattern Number This number represents the starting
pattern number for drawing lines. There can be up to 20 patterns,
each line pattern being correlated with a given Z-value.
Number of Patterns The number of line patterns needed
depends on the number of maximum Z-values for which a change
in line pattern is desired. Up to 20 maximum Z-values, and up to
20 line patterns, can be specified.
Default Z-table for Pattern Numbers by You can use up to 50
Z-values to determine the line patterns to use for drawing lines.
The table uses four modes to determine how the lines on the active
picture are to be drawn:
None Indicates that you do not default the table.
Divide Divides the data range into pattern level divisions.
The program will calculate a starting value and an increment
for each line pattern level.
Increment Indicates that the Z-increment will be used to
calculate an increment and a starting value.
Increment+Start The starting value for the table comes
from the Start Z-value plus the Z-increment for pattern
changes.
Z-Increment for defaulting This value equals the Z-Increment
which causes the Line Pattern to move up one level. This
defaulting method is only used if Default Z-table for Pattern
Numbers By is Increment or Increment+Start.
Start Z-value for Defaulting This number represents the
Z-value at which you wish to begin defaulting the Z-table. It is
only used when Default Z-table for Pattern Numbers By is
Increment+Start.

R2003.12.0 Features: Deviated Wells 308

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Choose Z-Field to Vary Line Pattern

You can click the Choose Z-Field to Vary Line Pattern button in the
Well trace Line Drawing dialog box to tie changes in line pattern to the
values of a selected Z-field. From the list of Z-fields in the input line
data file, select one field to determine the line pattern variation.

Z-Table to Vary Line Pattern

If you specified a Z-field to use for varying line pattern, click the
Z-Table to Vary Line Color button in the Well trace Line Drawing
dialog box to display the Z level TABLE for Line Pattern dialog box.
This dialog box contains a range of up to 20 maximum Z-values for line
patterns to use when drawing lines. The table contains a list of Z-values
for each line pattern. The number of pattern levels was indicated in the
Vary Line Pattern Parameters panel. If you stipulated 4 pattern levels,
you will be asked to enter 4 maximum Z-levels. These Maximum
Z-values are not required if you chose a method of defaulting the table.
The parameter entry area on this panel allows you to correlate changes
in Z-value to changes in line pattern. You can choose up to 20 line
pattern levels. The number of Maximum Z-values listed on this panel is
determined by the number of line pattern levels you indicated on the
Vary Line Pattern Parameters panel. Enter the Maximum Z-value you
want for each pattern number.

Choose Select Field

The Select Field determines where posting can occur at bottom
locations. To choose a field to use as the posting Select Field, click the
Choose Select Field button in the Well trace Drawing Parameters
dialog box. A list of the fields in the specified input file appears. Choose
the field you want to use as the field on which to base the posted well
trace fields.

R2003.12.0 Features: Deviated Wells 309

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Secondary Line Parameters

Click the Secondary Line Parameters button in the Well trace Line
Drawing Parameters dialog box to display the Secondary Line
Parameters for Well Traces dialog box. Use this dialog box to specify
the following input values:
Line Type Use the Line menu allows you to choose the type of
line you want to draw for the well trace. Select on the graphical
representations of the desired line types, or choose to establish line
type by Pattern number or vary the line pattern by Z-field.
Line Pattern Number This is the pattern number for drawing
lines. Enter a number from 1 to 20. (For examples of line patterns,
see Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line Patterns, starting on
page 791.)
Dash Length One This value is required only if you have
chosen a dashed line as the Line Type for well traces. This number
represents the length in plotter units (in./cm.) of the first dash in
the dash pattern for drawing lines. The default length for the first
dash is 0.07 in. or 0.18 cm.
Dash Length Two This value is required only if you have
chosen a dashed line with two or three different dash lengths as the
Line Type. This number represents the length in plotter units (in./
cm.) of the second dash in the dash pattern for drawing lines. The
default length for the second dash is 0.09 in. or 0.23 cm.
Dash Length Three This value is required only if you have
selected a dashed line with three dash lengths as the Line Type.
This number represents the length in plotter units (in./cm.) of the
third dash in the dash pattern for drawing lines. The default length
for the third dash is 0.11 in. or 0.28 cm.
Gap Length One This value is required only if you have
selected a dashed line as the Line Type. This number represents
the length in plotter units (in./cm.) of the first gap between dashes
in the dash pattern for drawing lines. The default length for the
first gap is 0.07 in. or 0.18 cm.
Gap Length Two This value is required only if you have
selected a dashed line (consisting of two or three unequal dash
lengths) as the Line Type. This number represents the length in
plotter units (in./cm.) of the second gap between dashes in the dash
pattern for drawing lines. The default gap length for the second
gap is 0.09 in. or 0.23 cm.

R2003.12.0 Features: Deviated Wells 310

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Gap Length Three This value is required only if you have

selected a dashed line (consisting of three unequal dash lengths) as
the Line Type. This number represents the length in plotter units
(in./cm.) of the third gap between dashes in the dash pattern for
drawing lines. The default gap length for the third gap is 0.11 in. or
0.28 cm.
Hachure Gap This value is required only if you have selected a
Line Type of Hachure. This number represents the gap between
hachures in plotter units (in./cm.) of the hachures in the pattern for
drawing lines. The default hachure gap is 0.1 in. or 0.25 cm.
Hachure Length This value is required only if you have
selected a Line Type of Hachure. This number represents the
length in plotter units (in./cm.) of the hachures in the pattern for
drawing primary lines. The default hachure length is 0.05 in. or
0.13 cm.
Hachure Direction This direction is the direction of the
hachures relative to the line. Left means to draw the hachures on
the relative left side of the line, and Right means to draw the
hachures on the right side of the line. The default direction is Left.
Line Weight This number represents a multiple of the normal
line width for drawing lines. The thicknesses range from 1 to 8,
and the default Line Weight is 1. The larger the weight, the bolder
the line will be.
Color Mode There are three methods for defining the color of
the primary lines. See Color Mode There are three methods for
defining the color of the primary lines: on page 305.
Color Index The Color Index is a number from 0 to 255 in the
Z-MAP Plus color table. The Color Index refers to the settings for
the currently active picture. To select a color index for lines, select
the color box. A palette of the 256 colors will appear. You can
change the color index of the lines by selecting the color you want.

R2003.12.0 Features: Deviated Wells 311

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Well Trace Fields to Post

Click the Well Trace Fields to Post button in the Post Deviated Wells
dialog box to create an ordered list of field labels or symbols. You can
post a maximum of two well trace fields at each point.
You can use the Ordered Selection dialog box that appears to specify the
order for posting field labels or symbols. Append is the default mode.

Well Trace Symbol Parameters

You can use the Well Trace Symbol Parameters dialog box to control
line symbol parameters, select field, color field, symbol color, and
symbol size. To display this dialog box, click the Well Trace Symbol
Parameters button in the Post Deviated Wells dialog box.

General Symbol Parameters

Click the General Symbol Parameters button in the Well Trace
Symbol Parameters dialog box to display the General Symbol
Parameters for Well Traces dialog box and specify the following symbol
parameter values:
Posting Method for Symbols and Labels This method
determines whether Symbols and Labels are posted for
intermediate points:
All Post all intermediate points.
Select Post intermediate points whose select field value is
not null. any Z-field can be a select field. You will choose Field
under the Choose Symbol Code Field panel.
Omit No well trace points posted.
Determine Symbol Code By:
Number You may specify the type of symbol to be posted
using a symbol number from the Z-MAP Plus Extended
Symbol Set. (See Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line
Patterns, starting on page 791.)
Field Determine symbol code to use by reading from a
Symbol Code field on the input dataset.
Omit No symbol is posted.

R2003.12.0 Features: Deviated Wells 312

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Symbol Code Number This number refers to a symbol

supplied in the Z-MAP Plus Extended Symbol Set. If Determine
Symbol Code By is set to Number, this selected symbol will be
posted at each location. Otherwise, this parameter is ignored. (For
a list of Symbol Codes, see Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and
Line Patterns, starting on page 791.)
Determine Symbol Color By You can determine the symbol
color by, Index, Field, Z-field or Line.
Index refers to a number in the Z-MAP Plus color table.
When you enter a number, the a box containing that color on
the color index appears to the left of the entry. Using Index as
the method of posting means that all of the symbols will be
posted with this color index.
Field means that a field on your input file specifies a color
for each symbol.
Z-field refers to the number of the Z-field on the input data
file to which the symbol color is tied. Determining color by
Z-field will result in a change of colors when the Z-value of the
control point changes (by a user-defined amount).
Line means that the symbol color will vary with the line
pattern for your trackline.
Symbol Color Index This is the number associated with the
256 colors in the color table. Key in the index number of the color
you want to use, or click the color swatch next to the number field
to call up the Select A Color Index panel for a graphical selection.
Determine Symbol Size By There are five methods for
determining symbol size:
Value uses the size of the symbol in plotter units (in./cm.).
The default values are 0.07 in. and 0.18 cm.
Field size from a field on the input file.
Diameter allows symbol size to vary by a simple scaling of
a selected Z-field.
Area allows size of symbol to represent actual area as
defined by a Z-field of area (in engineering units).
Class allows symbol size to vary based on up to 6 user
defined intervals that relate to a particular Z-field. You can
make all the producing well symbols a specific size in plotter
units (in./cm.), all the dry holes another size.

R2003.12.0 Features: Deviated Wells 313

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Symbol Size This number is the symbol height in plotter units

(in./cm.).
Posting Rate The Posting Rate for symbols is the divisor of the
number of well trace fields. A Posting Rate of 1 means that every
well trace field on the data file will have a symbol posted. A
Posting Rate of 5 means that every 5th well trace field will have a
symbol posted.

Choose Symbol Code Field

This option will post a symbol for a point based on the symbol field on
your input file, if your input file contains one.

Choose Select Field

The Select Field determines where posting can occur at well trace
locations. This panel allows you to choose a field to use as the Select
Field.

Choose Color Field For Symbol Color

If your input dataset contains a field for symbol color, this panel will
allow you to select one.

Vary Symbol Color Parameters

To vary the color of the posted symbols, click the Vary Symbol Color
Parameters button in the Well Trace Symbol Parameters dialog box to
display the Vary Well Trace Symbol Color Parameters dialog box.
Color can be varied by choosing a starting color index, the number of
color levels, method of defaulting the Z-table for color levels, the
Z-increment for defaulting, and the start Z-value for defaulting. The
purpose of this feature is to allow the mapper to show a gradual increase
in a Z-value by representing a defined change in Z as a color in a given
range. For example, every change of 50 feet could be represented by a
slightly darker shade of blue.

R2003.12.0 Features: Deviated Wells 314

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Specify the following symbol parameter values:

Start Color Index This number is the number of the color in
the color table to use for beginning the varying of symbol colors.
The number of color levels beyond this value will determine the
range of symbol colors available.
Number of Color Levels This number refers to the number of
colors in the color table which are to be displayed as changes in
Z-values on the map.
Default Z-Table for Color Levels By Defaulting the color
variation will result in an automatic assignment of a color to a
Z-value according to the criteria you select for this parameter.
None Does not default the color variation.
Divide Indicates that you want to default the color variation
by dividing the Z-value by a constant value. A Divide value of
50 would change the color of the symbol every time the
Z-value is divisible by 50.
Increment Indicates that you want to default the color of
the Z-value symbol when a constant distance change has been
achieved. An increment of 25, for example, would result in a
change of color for every Z-value change of 25.
Increment+Start The starting value for the table comes
from the Start Z-value plus the Z-increment for pattern
changes.
Z-increment for Defaulting This value equals the Z-increment
which will cause the symbol color to move up one level. This
defaulting method is only used if Default Z-table for Color Levels
By is Increment or Increment+Start.
Start Z-value for Defaulting This number represents the
Z-value at which you wish to begin defaulting the Z-table. The
Start Z-value is only used when Default Z-table for Color Levels
By is Increment+Start. If your Start Z-value is 7300, and your
increment is 50, color defaulting will occur at 7350, 7400, 7450,
etc.
Choose Z-field to Vary Symbol Color If there is more than
one Z-field on an input file, you must choose the Z-field that you
would like to use to base the color variations on.

R2003.12.0 Features: Deviated Wells 315

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Z-table To Vary Symbol Color This table contains a range of

Z-values for color indices to use when posting color symbols. The
table contains a list of Z-values for each color index. These
maximum Z-values are not required if you chose a method of
defaulting the table.
Maximum Z-value for Color Index The parameter entry area
on this panel allows you to correlate changes in Z-value to changes
in symbol color number. The number of Maximum Z-values listed
on this panel is determined by the number of Symbol Color Levels
you indicated on the Symbol Color Set Parameters panel; you can
choose up to 20 symbol color levels. Enter the Maximum Z-value
you want for each symbol's color number.

Choose Size Field for Symbol Size

You can choose one size field from a list of Size Fields in your input line
data file when the list is presented.

Vary Symbol Size Parameters

To specify how symbol size is varied in the current picture, click the
Vary Symbol Size Parameters button in the Well Trace Symbol
Parameters dialog box. The Vary Well Trace Symbol Size Parameters
dialog box appears, which you use to specify the following symbol
parameter values:
Offset for Vary By Area or Diameter This number refers to
the offset for symbol size calculation. When you have chosen to
vary Symbol Size by Area or Diameter, these are the equations:
Vary Area Size:
Size = SQRT [(4/p) * scale * (field value + offset)]
Vary Diameter Size:
Size = (field value + offset) * scale
Scale for Vary By Area or Diameter This is the scale for
symbol size calculation.
Vary Area Size:
Size = SQRT [(4/p) * scale * (field value + offset)]
Vary Diameter Size:
Size = (field value + offset) * scale
Minimum Symbol Size (in./cm.) for Vary This number refers
to the minimum symbol size to post in plotter units (in./cm.). The
default minimum is 0.05 in. or 0.13 cm.

R2003.12.0 Features: Deviated Wells 316

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Maximum Symbol Size (in./cm.) for Vary This number refers

to the maximum symbol size to post in plotter units (in./cm.). The
default maximum is 0.25 in. or 0.64 cm.
Symbol Size Increment (in./cm.) for Vary When symbol size
is set to vary by class, the symbol size increment must be stated in
plotter units (in./cm.) The default symbol size increment is 0.05 in.
or 0.13 cm.
Number of Class Intervals Symbol sizes can be made to vary
according to class intervals. Class intervals are defined by
Minimum Z-values, and you can define from 1 to 6 Class Intervals
for Symbol Size.
Z-Minimum for Class One This number refers to the lowest
Z-value at which you want symbol posting to begin.

Choose Z-field to Vary Symbol Size

Changes in the size of the posted symbol will be tied to the selected
Z-field on this list which you select. You can only select one Z-field to
determine symbol size variation. Fields available for selection are taken
from your input line data file.

Z-table to Vary Symbol Size

If you specified a Z-field to use for varying symbol size, click the
Z-Table to Vary Symbol Size button in the Well Trace Symbol
Parameters dialog box to display the Z level TABLE for Well Trace
Symbol Size dialog box.
This table contains a range of up to six maximum Z-values for symbol
sizes to use. The table contains a Z-value for each symbol size class.
These Maximum Z-values are not required if you chose a method of
defaulting the table.
The parameter entry area allows you to correlate changes in Z-value to
changes in symbol size. The number of Maximum Z-values listed on
this panel is determined by the number of Size Class Levels you
indicated on the Vary Symbol Size Parameters panel; you can choose up
to 6 size class levels. Enter the maximum Z-value you want for each size
class.

R2003.12.0 Features: Deviated Wells 317

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Well Trace Labeling Parameters

Well Trace Labeling Parameters enables you to set up well trace field
labeling parameters, labeling rate for well trace fields, and color fields
for well trace labels.
Label Rate for All Fields This is the rate at which posted fields
along the well trace will be labeled. A Label Rate of 1 means that
all posted fields will be labeled; a Label Rate of 3 means that every
3rd posted point will be labeled.
Color Mode There are three methods for defining the color of
the well trace labels. For a discussion of these methods, see Color
Mode There are three methods for defining the color of the
primary lines: on page 305.
Color Index If you choose the Index option for Color Mode,
you must assign a color index from the color table to determine
label color for the current field. The color index is a number from 0
to 255 which represents a color in the color table. The Color Index
refers to the settings for the currently active picture. To view the
color palette, select the color box. Select the color you want for the
current field's label.
Font The Font is the font in which labels for this field are to be
printed. The choices are shown at left.
Number of Decimals For each numeric label field, you can
control the number of decimal places. This number refers to the
number of places to the right of the decimal to post for the field.
Up to 12 decimal places are allowed.
Height This value refers to the height of the label, in plotter
units (in./cm.). The label represents the current field. The default
label heights are 0.07 in. or 0.18 cm.
Location There are two options for locating a label on a line.
The label can be posted to the Right of the line or it can be posted
to the Left of the line.

Well Trace Scale Field

Well Trace Scale Field allows you to choose the Z-field for setting up
tick mark parameters and tick label parameters. Variations in the
spacing, color, line weight, font, and other variables will be tied to the
Z-field you choose.

R2003.12.0 Features: Deviated Wells 318

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Well Trace Scale Parameters

To set up variations in ticks and labels for well trace lines, click the Well
Trace Scale Parameters button in the Post Deviated Wells dialog box.
In the Well Trace Scale Parameters dialog box that appears, you can
specify the following input values:
Minimum Z-value for Tick This is the minimum Z-value for
posting ticks and labels. The program takes the Minimum Z-value
for posting ticks and labels and adds the Z-field Tick Increment.
Ticks are not posted at Z-values falling below the value of
Minimum + Increment.
Maximum Z-value for Tick This is the maximum Z-value for
posting ticks and labels. Ticks are not posted for Z-values
exceeding this number.
Z-Increment Between Ticks The Z-increment is the increment
between tick marks on the Well Trace Scale. The Z-increment is
based on the same units as the Z-value.
Tick Length The Tick Length is the length of the tick mark,
expressed in plotter units (in./cm.).
Tick Line Weight Tick Line Weight is a multiple of the normal
line weight for drawing tick marks. The thicknesses range from 1
to 8, and the default Tick Line Weight is 1. The larger the weight,
the bolder the line will be.
Determine Tick Color by There are two ways to determine
Tick Color:
Index The number of a color in the color table.
Line The color of the well trace line. If you choose Line,
the color of the tick mark will become the same as the color of
the well trace line.
Tick Color Index Color Index Number is associated with the
color for the ticks.
Determine Label Color by Labels may have the same color as
the tick mark, the line or the color index.

R2003.12.0 Features: Deviated Wells 319

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Label Color Index If you choose the Index option for Color
Mode, you must assign a color index from the color table to
determine label color for the current label. The Color Index is a
number from 0 to 255 which represents a color in the color table.
The Color Index refers to the settings for the currently active
picture. To view a palette of the color table, select the color box.
Select the color you want for the current label's label.
Label Font The Label Font is the font in which labels for this
field are to be printed. The choices are shown at left.
Number of Decimals For each numeric label field, you can
control the number of decimal places. This number refers to the
number of places to the right of the decimal to post for the label.
Up to 12 decimal places are allowed.
Label Height This value refers to the height of the label, in
plotter units (in./cm.). The label represents the Z-field selected for
Well Trace Fields to Post. The default label heights are 0.07 in. or
0.18 cm.
Label Location There are two options for locating a label on a
line. The label can be posted to the Right of the line or it can
posted to the Left of the line.
Label Orientation A label may be placed either perpendicular
or parallel to the line it references.

Data Units/Clip Mode

Click the Data unit/Clip mode button in the Post Deviated Wells dialog
box. In the Data Units/Clip mode dialog box that appears, you can
specify the following values:
Data units (default setting) Specify the measurement units
used for control point coordinates by clicking the Data units
button. From the drop-down list, select USER (to express values in
user units like feet or meters) or PLOTTER (to express values in
plotter units like inches or centimeters).
Clip to border mode Points on the line file that lie outside the
Area of Interest (AOI) of the current picture may be cut off at the
border or extend beyond the border of the map. The options are:
Clip Clip the data at the map border.
Noclip Display data beyond the map border.

R2003.12.0 Features: Deviated Wells 320

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

2D Seismic

Post Seismic Line Data Dialog Box

Features 2D Seismic - Seismic Line Data menu

The 2D Seismic feature is to allow you to post seismic line data on your
map. You can post shotpoints and track lines. Control is available for the
following options:
Z-values of labeled shotpoints
labeling parameters
ZNON value
posting all seismic lines, or some seismic lines
symbol color parameters

R2003.12.0 Features: 2D Seismic 321

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Data
This is the data file which contains the seismic data which you would
like to post on the map. Labeling and posting options will be applied to
this seismic data file. A list of data files is presented. Select the data file
you want.

Shotpoint Numbers
Shotpoint numbers for both data files need to be ordered and contiguous in
each line. To do this, use the Operations Data Operations Sort Data
option.

Z-field
A list of fields is presented. If you do not want to post Z-values along
with seismic shotpoints, select None - use no field.

Shotpoints to Post
Click the Shotpoints to Post button in the Post SEISMIC LINE Data
dialog box. In the Select Shotpoints to POST dialog box that appears,
you can specify the following input values:
selection mode for posting symbols
symbol field/symbol code number
centered symbol code
symbol size
rate to post symbols (divisible by)
starting location (divisible bias)/first shotpoint to post
minimum separation between shotpoints, in plotter units

R2003.12.0 Features: 2D Seismic 322

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Selection Mode
The Shotpoints to Post panel enables you to determine which shotpoints
on the input file to post on the map. The next two options on the Post
Seismic Data main menu will determine how points already posted on
the map will be labeled.
The available methods available for shotpoint symbol posting are
described in the following text.
All Points Post all shotpoints on a line.
Endpoints+Postrate Post the first, last, and every nth shotpoint
on the data file. This method posts shotpoints based on a
user-specified increment, not by shotpoint number. The first and
last shotpoints are posted, and intervening shotpoints are posted
according to two user-specified values: Starting Location and Rate
to Post. The value you specify for Starting Location is the
numerical position of the first intervening shotpoint to post. The
value you specify for Rate to Post is the increment at which
subsequent shotpoints should be posted. For example, when
Starting Location = 5 and Rate to Post = 10, the 1st, 5th, 15th,
25th, 35th, etc., and the last shotpoint are posted.
Endpoints+Divisible Post the first and last points and every
point having a shotpoint number divisible by n. This method posts
shotpoints based on shotpoint number. The first and last shotpoints
are posted, and intervening shotpoints are posted according to two
user-specified values, m and n. Here, m is a number which is added
to the shotpoint number and n is a number which is divided into
(shotpoint number + m). Only those points whose shotpoint
number plus m is equally divisible by n will be posted. For
example, to post only shotpoint numbers that end in 7, set m = 3
and n = 10. Thus, when the shotpoint numbers that end in 7 have 3
added to them, they will be divisible by 10.
Intervals This method posts shotpoints based on intervals
expressed in plotter units (in./cm.). The first and last points are
posted, and intervening shotpoints are posted at a distance greater
than a user-specified minimum separation. Check line statistics to
determine a reasonable minimum separation.
Trackline A trackline will connect the shotpoints, but no
symbols will appear at the shotpoint locations.

R2003.12.0 Features: 2D Seismic 323

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Use Symbol Field or Symbol Number

You may specify the type of symbol to be posted using a symbol number
from the Z-MAP Plus Extended Symbol Set or by using the symbol field
on your input file, if your input file contains one. You may also choose
not to post a symbol. These three options are on the parameter menu.

Centered Symbol Code

For a list of symbols and their codes, see Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts,
and Line Patterns, starting on page 791.

Symbol Size
This is the size of the shotpoint symbol in plotter units (in./cm).

Rate to Post (Divisible By)

This number represents the rate to post shotpoints. If the rate to post is
1, all shotpoints in the file are posted. A value of 3 posts every third
point in the file.
Divisible By is active when the posting mode is Endpoints+Divisible.
Posting shotpoints that are divisible by 10 would post shotpoints 100,
110, 120, etc. (assuming that these shotpoints are in your file and that
the divisible bias is 0).

Starting Location (Divisible Bias)

The first and last endpoints in the AOI are always labeled. The rate to
post takes effect after the first point is posted. For example, if the rate is
2, shotpoints 1, 3, 5, 7, etc. are posted.
Divisible Bias is active when your labeling mode is
Endpoints+Divisible. This number will be added to the shotpoint
number before division and the label will be posted when the result is an
integer.

Minimum Separation
The minimum separation should be defined only when the Selection
Mode is Intervals. This number represents the minimum separation
between posted shotpoints. The minimum distance between posted
shotpoints should be expressed in plotter units (in./cm.).

R2003.12.0 Features: 2D Seismic 324

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Labeled Shotpoints (Shotpoint Number)

To specify how shotpoints are labeled with their shotpoint numbers,
click the Labeled Shotpoints (Shotpoint Number) button in the Post
SEISMIC LINE Data dialog box. The Select Shotpoints to LABEL
With Shotpoint NUMBER dialog box that appears uses your Shotpoints
to Post settings. You can specify the following input values:
labeling mode
label orientation
rate to post (rate to label posted shotpoints)
starting location
minimum separation

Shotpoint Labeling Mode

The five options available for shotpoint symbol labeling are on the
parameter menu. Each is described in the following text.
No Labels Do not label shotpoints.
All Points Label all points on a line.
Endpoints+Lablrate Label the first, last, and every nth point
on a line. This method labels shotpoints based on a user-specified
increment, not by shotpoint number. The first and last shotpoints
are labeled, and intervening shotpoints are labeled according to
two user-specified values: Starting Location and Rate to Post (the
menu should actually say Rate to Label). The value you specify for
Starting Location is the numerical position of the first intervening
shotpoint to label. The value you specify for Rate to Post is the
increment at which subsequent shotpoints should be labeled. For
example, when Starting Location = 5 and Rate to Post = 10, the
1st, 5th, 15th, 25th, 35th, etc., and the last shotpoint are labeled.
Endpoints+Divisible Label the first and last points and every
point having a shotpoint number divisible by n. This method labels
shotpoints based on shotpoint number. The first and last shotpoints
are labeled, and intervening shotpoints are labeled according to
two user-specified values, m and n. Here, m is a number which is
added to the shotpoint number and n is a number which is divided
into (shotpoint number + m). Only those points whose shotpoint
number plus m is equally divisible by n will be labeled. For
example, to label only shotpoint numbers that end in 7, set m = 3
and n = 10. Thus, when the shotpoint numbers that end in 7 have 3
added to them, they will be divisible by 10.

R2003.12.0 Features: 2D Seismic 325

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Intervals This method posts shotpoints based on intervals

expressed in plotter units (in./cm.). The first and last points are
posted, and intervening shotpoints are posted at a distance greater
than a user-specified minimum separation. Check line statistics to
determine a reasonable minimum separation.

Label Orientation
The Shotpoint Label Orientation has two components. The first
component is the location of the shotpoint number label relative to the
seismic line. The second component is the angle of rotation which the
label has. The angle of rotation can be specified in relation to the seismic
line or in relation to the x axis of the map.
Left+Above+X-axis This option will place labels above a
horizontal seismic line or to the left side of a vertical seismic line.
Label rotation will be set up in relation to the x axis of the map.
Right+Below+X-axis This option will place labels below a
horizontal seismic line or to the right side of a vertical seismic line.
Label rotation will be set up in relation to the x axis of the map.
Left+Above+Line This option will place labels above a
horizontal seismic line or to the left side of a vertical seismic line.
Label rotation will be set up in relation to the seismic line.
Right+Below+Line This option will place labels below a
horizontal seismic line or to the right side of a vertical seismic line.
Label rotation will be set up in relation to the seismic line.

Rate to Post (Divisible by)

This number represents the rate to label the posted shotpoints. If the rate
to post is 1, all posted shotpoints will be labeled. A label rate of 3 would
label every third shotpoint label is posted.
Divisible By is active when the posting mode is Endpoints+Divisible.
Labeling shotpoints that are divisible by 10 would give you labels for
100, 110, 120, etc. (assuming these points are in the data file and the
divisible bias is 0).

R2003.12.0 Features: 2D Seismic 326

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Starting Location (Divisible Bias)

The first endpoint on the line, as well as the last endpoint on the line, will
be posted. If the starting location is 7, then the 7th shotpoint will be
posted. The rate to post goes into effect at this point. Assuming a post
rate of 2, the 1st, 7th, 9th, and 11th point, etc., will be posted until the
last shotpoint is reached.
Divisible Bias is active when your labeling mode is
Endpoints+Divisible. This number will be added to the shotpoint
number before division.

Minimum Separation
The Minimum Separation should be defined only when the Selection
Mode is Intervals. This number represents the minimum separation
between labeled shotpoints. The minimum distance between labeled
shotpoints should be expressed in plotter units (in./cm.).

Labeled Shotpoints (Z-values)

This panel enables you to determine which shotpoints are labeled with
Z-values. The control parameters for this panel are the same as the
control parameters for selecting shotpoints to label with shotpoint
number.

Z-value Labeling Mode

The five options available for shotpoint labeling are described in the
following text.
No Labels Do not label shotpoints.
All Points Label all points on a line.
Endpoints+Lablrate Label the first, last, and every nth point
on a line. This method labels shotpoints based on a user-specified
increment, not by shotpoint number. The first and last shotpoints
are labeled, and intervening shotpoints are labeled according to
two user-specified values: Starting Location and Rate to Post (the
menu should actually say Rate to Label). The value you specify for
Starting Location is the numerical position of the first intervening
shotpoint to label. The value you specify for Rate to Post is the
increment at which subsequent shotpoints should be labeled. For
example, when Starting Location = 5 and Rate to Post = 10, the
1st, 5th, 15th, 25th, 35th, etc., and the last shotpoint are labeled.

R2003.12.0 Features: 2D Seismic 327

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Endpoints+Divisible Label the first and last points and every

point having a shotpoint number divisible by n. This method labels
shotpoints based on shotpoint number. The first and last shotpoints
are labeled, and intervening shotpoints are labeled according to
two user-specified values, m and n. Here, m is a number which is
added to the shotpoint number and n is a number which is divided
into (shotpoint number + m). Only those points whose shotpoint
number plus m is equally divisible by n will be labeled. For
example, to label only shotpoint numbers that end in 7, set m = 3
and n = 10. Thus, when the shotpoint numbers that end in 7 have 3
added to them, they will be divisible by 10.
Shotpoint Label user-specified shotpoints.

Z-value Orientation
The Z-value Orientation has two components. The first component is the
location of the Z-value label relative to the seismic line. The second
component is the angle of rotation which the label has. The angle of
rotation can be specified in relation to the seismic line or in relation to
the x axis of the map.
Left+Above+X-axis Places labels above a horizontal line or to
the left side of a vertical seismic line. The label rotation angle will
be set up in relation to the x axis of the map.
Right+Below+X-axis Places labels below a horizontal line or
to the right side of a vertical seismic line. The label rotation angle
will be set up in relation to the x axis of the map.
Left+Above+Line Places labels above a horizontal line or to
the left side of a vertical seismic line. The label rotation angle will
be set up in relation to the seismic line.
Right+Below+Line Places labels below a horizontal line or to
the right side of a vertical seismic line. The label rotation angle
will be set up in relation to the seismic line.

R2003.12.0 Features: 2D Seismic 328

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Rate to Post (Divisible by)

This number represents the rate to label Z-values at the posted
shotpoints. If the rate to post (label) is 1, all posted shotpoints will have
labels. A rate of 3 would give you Z-values for every 3rd posted
shotpoint.
Divisible By is active when the Labeling Mode is Endpoints+Divisible.
Labeling shotpoints with Z-values for points divisible by 10 would give
you values for shotpoints 100, 110, 120, etc. (assuming these shotpoints
are in your file and the divisible bias is 0).

Starting Location (Divisible Bias)

The first endpoint on the line, as well as the last endpoint on the line, will
be posted. If the starting location is 7, then the 7th shotpoint will be
posted. The rate to post goes into effect at this point. Assuming a post
rate of 2, the 1st, 7th, 9th, and 11th point, etc., will be labeled until the
last shotpoint is reached.
Divisible Bias is active when your labeling mode is
Endpoints+Divisible. This number will be added to the shotpoint
number before division. Only those shotpoints that are divisible by the
divisible rate once the divisible bias has been added will have Z-value
labels.

R2003.12.0 Features: 2D Seismic 329

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Labeling Parameters and ZNON

To specify parameters for labeling seismic lines, click the Labeling
Parameters and ZNON button in the Post SEISMIC LINE Data dialog
box. In the Set LABELING Parameters dialog box that appears, you can
specify the following values:
Character Size Character size is the height of the numbers and
letters in the labels. Character size is expressed in plotter units (in./
cm.). The default character size is 0.1 in. or 0.25 cm.
Label Rotation Angle There are two reference points for label
rotation angle: the seismic line and the x axis of the map. When
you chose your labeling mode in the Labeled Shotpoints and
Labeled Z-values panels, you selected a Label Orientation. The
Label Rotation Angle refers to your choice of the line or the x axis
as the point of reference.
Decimal Positions in Z-values This number refers to the
number of digits to the right of the decimal in the posted value.
Z-value Shift This number is the number to add to the Z-value
before the Z-value label is posted.
Z-value Scale This number is the number to multiply the
Z-value by before the Z-value label is posted. For example, if you
are working with a Z-value expressed in seconds, you can multiply
by 1000 to have time values posted in milliseconds.
ZNON Value This number is the null data value for the field
being posted.

R2003.12.0 Features: 2D Seismic 330

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Line Name Parameters

To specify parameters for posting line names, click the Line Name
Parameters button in the Post SEISMIC LINE Data dialog box. In the
Set LINE NAME DRAWING Parameters dialog box that appears, you
can specify the following values:
Name Positioning Mode This option determines where the
seismic line name will be displayed:
Both+Line The line name will be posted at both the first
and last shotpoints. The reference point for the rotation angle is
the seismic line.
Start+Line The line name will be posted at the starting
shotpoint only. The reference point for the rotation angle is the
seismic line.
End+Line The line name will be posted at the ending
shotpoint only. The reference point for the rotation angle is the
seismic line.
Both+Axis The line name will be posted at both the first
and last shotpoints. The reference point for the rotation angle is
the x axis.
Start+Axis The line name will be posted at the starting
shotpoint only. The reference point for the rotation angle is the
x axis.
End+Axis The line name will be posted at the ending
shotpoint only. The reference point for the rotation angle is the
x axis.
Character Size Character size is the height of the numbers and
letters in the labels. Character size is expressed in plotter units (in./
cm.). The default character size is 0.1 in. or 0.25 cm.
Name Rotation Angle There are two reference points for label
rotation angle: the seismic line and the x axis of the map. When
you chose your labeling mode in the Labeled Shotpoints and
Labeled Z-values panels, you selected a Label Orientation. The
Label Rotation Angle refers to your choice of the line or the x axis
as the point of reference.
Type of Trackline Between Shotpoints Select the type of
trackline which is to connect consecutive points on the same
seismic line. In addition to Locked, Blank, and Omit, there is a
menu consisting of solid, dashed, bold, and tick tracklines.

R2003.12.0 Features: 2D Seismic 331

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Length of Trackline Dashes This is the length of the trackline

dashes when the trackline type is dashed. The trackline length is
expressed in plotter units (in./cm.). The default length is 0.2 in. or
0.5 cm.
Line Width of Trackline This is the width or weight of the
trackline when the trackline type is bold. The width is expressed as
a multiple of plain line widths.

Select Lines to Post

This option provides control for posting seismic lines.
The menu allows you to:
choose a method of posting seismic lines
create or select a posted line list dataset
create or select a selected line list dataset
select line names from a menu or by using wildcards

Select Method
Select Method enables you to select which seismic lines to post:
post all seismic lines on a file, or post only selected lines
select the posted lines by exclusion or inclusion
The options for Selecting Seismic Lines are as follows:
All Will post all seismic lines on an input file and output the
line names to a posted line list dataset.
Only Will post only those lines which you select. Selected lines
will appear on the active map. Selected line names are written to
the selected line list dataset. They are marked as posted in the
posted line list dataset.
Except The excluded lines are written to the selected line list
dataset and are not posted. All the lines except the excluded lines
will be posted.

R2003.12.0 Features: 2D Seismic 332

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Posted Line List Dataset

This is an output file that contains all the line names for the seismic data
file. Posted lines are flagged on the list by the word Posted. Files created
for output will have the extension LPST. It is usually best to create a file
each time you post with a new dataset.
You can pick another LPST file or create one. Unless you want to
prevent posting of lines already posted on the picture, it is best to create
a file. If you select to create a file, a panel appears.

Create a New File

This is the name of the new posted line dataset and the MFD on which
it should be written. Use an existing posted line list dataset to prevent
already posted lines from being reposted each time you execute Selected
Line Posting.
Posted Line Dataset Name This is the name of the new posted
line dataset.
Output Master File Select OpenWorks or the destination MFD
for storing the posted line dataset.

Selected Line List Dataset

This is an output file which contains the list of lines to label or exclude
from labeling. These files have the extension LSLT. To ensure that
posted lines are labeled to your specifications, it is best to create a
labeling file.
You can select an existing selected line list dataset to repeat a posting
sequence, or you can create a file.

Create a New File

This is an output file that contains the list of lines to label or exclude
from labeling.
Selected Line Dataset Name This is the name of the new
selected line dataset.
Output Master File Select OpenWorks or the destination MFD
for storing the selected line dataset.

Select Line Names (Menu Select)

The line names you select from this list are output to the selected line list
dataset file and the lines will be posted on, or excluded from, your active
picture. When the Select Method is All, you cannot access this panel.

R2003.12.0 Features: 2D Seismic 333

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Input Line Names (with Wild Cards)

You can use this option to add or delete line names in the selected line
list dataset by using a wildcard. Wildcards can consist of a text string
plus one character or a text string plus multiple characters.
Add Line Names Specifies the wildcard and character string
associated with the line names you want to add to the selected line
list. For example, %AUS% adds all line names that contain the
string AUS, such as AUS-069.
Line Name Specifies the identifying wildcard and text string
(for example, %AUS%). You can place wildcards anywhere inside
the string, at the beginning, and at the end. It is helpful to include
the wildcard at the beginning. Otherwise, leading blanks in the
data file may exclude text strings you want to include (for
example, AUS).
Wildcard The wildcard is the character which may match any
character in a line name. Any symbol except an asterisk (*) may be
used as a wildcard.
Wildcard Use The choices include line names matching a
multi-character or one character string:
MULTICHR
ONECHAR
For example:
for MULTICHR, AUS% matches: AUS, AUS1, AUSTEB
for ONECHAR, AUS% matches: AUS1, AUS2, but no AUSTEB
Delete Line Names This option presents a list of line names
and wildcards on the selected line list data file. Lines selected from
this list will be deleted when the option executes.

R2003.12.0 Features: 2D Seismic 334

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Symbol Color Parameters

This panel enables you to select methods for determining the color of the
symbols and labels which will be posted with seismic lines on your
active picture. This panel enables you to select:
basic color parameters for symbols and labels
the symbol color field and symbol field
Z-field to vary symbol color
Z-color table for varying symbol color

Set Parameters
To set the color of the symbols and labels posted with seismic lines,
click the Set parameters button in the Symbol Color Parameters dialog
box. Use the Set Parameters dialog box that appears to specify the
following values:
Symbol Color Selection by You can determine the color of the
symbol associated with a seismic line by three methods.
Symbol Color The color of all seismic line symbols will be
determined by selecting a value in the color table.
Color Field The color of each symbol is given by the color
field on the input data file which you select.
Z-field The color of each symbol is tied to the Z-field on
your input data file which you have selected for determining
symbol color changes. You can only select one Z-field to
determine symbol color variation. Fields available for selection
are taken from your input seismic line data file.
Symbol Color This number refers to the number in the color
table for the color you desire.

R2003.12.0 Features: 2D Seismic 335

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Set Variable Color Table by This parameter determines how

the Z-table for symbol color variation will be set up. There are
three options:
Type In Choosing Type In means that you want to supply
values for symbol color. No automatic defaults for the Z-table
will be set up. You can enter a number for the symbol color for
each Z-value.
Divisions When you choose Divisions, the table starts with
the minimum Z-value. The program will divide the range of
Z-field values into equal color levels. This is the default way of
setting up the Variable color table.
Increment The color table takes its reference from the
minimum Z-value. The program finds the nearest multiple of
the Z-increment for Color Change which is less than the
minimum Z-value. The color variation defaulting begins with
this value. Each level in the table is incremented by the
Z-increment until it either exceeds the maximum Z-value or
until it reaches the limits of the table.
Number of Color Levels This number refers to the number of
colors in the color table which are to be displayed as Z-value
changes on the map.
Start Color This is the number of the color in the color table
where the varying of symbol colors is to begin. The number of
color levels beyond this value will determine the range of symbol
colors available.
Z increment for Color Change This value equals the
Z-increment that causes the symbol color to move up one level.
This value must be supplied when the Symbol Color Selection by
is Z-field and the Set Variable color table is by Increment.
Label Font The Label Font is the font in which labels for this
field are to be printed. The choices are shown at left.
Label Color The Label Color refers to an index number that is
associated with a color in the color table.

R2003.12.0 Features: 2D Seismic 336

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Select Symbol Color Field

A list of symbol color fields from your input seismic data file appears.
Select the symbol color field you want.

Select Z-field to Vary Symbol Color

A list of Z-fields on your input seismic data file appears. The Z-field you
select will become the basis for symbol color variation.

Edit Z Color Table

This table enables you to define Z-value minimums for each of the
Z-value levels you are defining. Different colors from the color table are
assigned to each of the levels.
Each color index number represented in the color levels needs to have a
minimum Z-value defined. Z-values falling in the range defined by this
minimum, and not exceeding the next defined minimum value, will be
assigned the color corresponding to that level of Z-value.

Select Symbol Field

A list of symbol fields on your input seismic data file appears. Select the
symbol field you want.

R2003.12.0 Features: 2D Seismic 337

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

3D Seismic
Compared with 2D Seismic, the 3D Seismic posting option has
additional capabilities and improvements in seismic line data posting.
You can use 3D Seismic to:
Post seismic lines (track line) and shotpoints for both 3D surveys
and 2D seismic data.
Thin track line out of dense 3D seismic data.
Decimate (eliminate selected) shotpoints, labels of posted
shotpoints, and labels for Z-field attributes.
Relocate and rotate 3D survey names and seismic line names.
Clip a seismic line at the map border, rather than truncating it at
the last shotpoint which will fit in the map border.
Indicate whether a given shotpoint on a seismic line is the start of,
the end of, or within, a discontinuity (geologic unconformity).
Vary the color, size, font of line names, line numbers, and
Z-attribute labels based on select criteria.
Vary the type, color and size of shotpoint symbols and labels based
on selected criteria.
Vary all of the above mentioned parameters for line names or line
numbers and shotpoint labels according to range criteria.

R2003.12.0 Features: 3D Seismic 338

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Input Data Requirements (Fields and Sorts)

This posting process requires seismic data which satisfies the
requirements of either 2D seismic data or of a 3D seismic survey.
The required fields for 2D data are as follows:
Line number (or line name)
Shotpoint number
X
Y
Z conditionally required; it is needed for color, size, and
Z-value labeling modulation
The required fields for 3D data are as follows:
3D survey name
3D line number
3D shotpoint number
X
Y
Z conditionally required. It is needed for color, size, and
Z-value labeling modulation

Shotpoint Numbers
Shotpoint numbers for both data files need to be ordered and contiguous in each
line. To do this, use the Operations Data Operations Sort Data option.

R2003.12.0 Features: 3D Seismic 339

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Post Seismic Data Menu

Features 3D Seismic Seismic Line Data (New) menu

The Post Seismic Data (New) menu provides options that display
secondary choice or parameter entry dialog boxes. The following is a
description of what the panels and parameters of this process are
designed to do.

Seismic Data
This panel presents a list of all data files in the attached MFDs and in the
OpenWorks project. The panel enables you to select the data file that
contains the fields to display. If the fields in the file are not sorted
correctly, a diagnostic message appears.

Data
Type Primary Secondary Tertiary

2D Line Name Shotpoint Number (none)

Line Number Shotpoint Number (none)
3D 3D Survey 3D Line Number 3D Shotpoint Number
3D Survey 3D Shotpoint Number 3D Line Number

Fields in seismic line data files will usually be sorted correctly.

However, you can use the Sort Data option under Operations Data
Operations to sort the data in the correct order if necessary.

R2003.12.0 Features: 3D Seismic 340

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Choose Fields
The parameters in this panel are defined in detail in the following text.
Each of the Choose Field options in this panel display a dialog box that
lists fields of a given type (such as text size, color, font) when these
fields are present on the input seismic data file.
Fields which control posting of data include the Z-value field, the
selection field, the shotpoint reshot field, the discontinuity field, and the
modulation field. All the other fields on the Choose Fields menu are
fields which will affect some graphical attribute of posted data, such as
the color, line pattern, or line weight of a posted seismic line, the text
color, size, and font of survey names, line names, and shotpoint
numbers; the color, type, and size of shotpoint symbols.
The following fields can be chosen if present on the input seismic line
data file:

Z-value Field Color Field

Selection Field Track Line Pattern Field

3D Survey Name Size Field Track Line Weight Field

3D Survey Name Color Field Shotpoint Symbol Code Field

3D Survey Name Font Field Shotpoint Symbol Size Field

Line Name Size Field Shotpoint Reshot Field

Line Name Color Field Discontinuity Field

Line Name Font Field Modulation Field

Z-value Field The field which will be the Z-attribute field.

Variations of this Z-value field can be noted using graphical
features such as size and color of label.
Selection Field When not all seismic data are to be posted, this
field will determine which lines and surveys to post. The only valid
select field for 2D seismic data is line name or line number. The
only valid select field for 3D seismic data is 3D survey name.
3d Survey Name/line Name Parameters When parameters for
text attributes are present on seismic data files, the user can select
the size, color, and font of the text which will make up the 3D
survey name or seismic line names. The field types which will be
listed for survey names and line names are type text size, text
color, and font.

R2003.12.0 Features: 3D Seismic 341

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Color Field When this color field is present on seismic data

files, the user can select the color field for shotpoints, symbols, and
Z-value attribute labels.
Track Line Parameters When parameters for line attributes
are present on seismic data files, the user can select the line pattern
and line weight to be used in representing track lines (seismic
lines) on the picture. The field types governing the appearance of
the seismic lines are type line pattern and type line weight.
Shotpoint Symbol Parameters When parameters for the type
and size of the shotpoint symbol are present on seismic data files,
the user can select the field to determine the type and size of
shotpoint symbol to be posted on the active map.
Shotpoint Reshot Field The reshot field is a text field. If you
have specified the reshot field on your input file, and if the reshot
field has a value, the text of the reshot field will be appended to the
shotpoint number label (when the shotpoint number label is
posted).
Discontinuity Field A flag for a discontinuity in the data can
be activated for a specific field. In the General Posting Parameters
menu, you can say Yes or No to using discontinuities.
Modulation Field Selecting a modulation field enables you to
modulate, or vary, symbol size or color with the variation in the
value of a Z-field (the modulation field). The modulation field is
used when Color Mode is Z-field.

R2003.12.0 Features: 3D Seismic 342

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Shotpoints to Post
This option brings up a Shotpoints to Post panel. The Shotpoints to Post
panel allows users to determine whether to post All, None or some of
the shotpoints. The some options consist of the Rate and Divide
methods.
Use the Shotpoints to Post dialog box to specify the following input
values:
whether all or some shotpoints are posted using a shotpoint
symbol
the type of symbol which is posted for shotpoints
the method for deciding the size of a given shotpoint symbol
the discontinuity ratio
the starting point on the seismic line for posting shotpoint symbols

Symbol Posting Method

The options for symbol posting method are All, Rate, Divide, and None.
For Rate and Divide, (as well as for All) the first and last shotpoints on
the seismic line are always posted.
All Posts a symbol for all shotpoints in the data file.
Rate Posts a symbol for every Rateth shotpoint, in addition to
posting the first and last shotpoint on all seismic lines. For
example, a rate of 5 on a line with 30 shotpoints will result in the
posting of symbols for shotpoints number 1, 6, 11, 16, 21, 26, 30,
and so on to the last shotpoint on the line.
Divide Posts a shotpoint symbol for any shotpoint number
divisible by the divisor, in addition to the first and last shotpoint on
the seismic line. For example, a Divide value of five on a line with
30 shotpoints will result in the posting of shotpoints symbols for
shotpoints number 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, and so on to the last
shotpoint on the line.
None Posts no shotpoint symbols.

Centered Symbol Code

The marker symbols available for shotpoint symbol type are taken from
the Extended Symbol Set. Enter the number of the symbol type you want
to use. (For examples see Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line
Patterns, starting on page 791.)

R2003.12.0 Features: 3D Seismic 343

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Symbol Size Mode

You can define the size of the shotpoint symbol in the following ways:
Value The symbol will be the size, in plotter units (in./cm/),
entered in the value field for Symbol Size on this panel.
Field The symbol will be the size indicated by the field type
symbol size on the input seismic line data file. If there is more than
one symbol size field on the input seismic data file, the user will be
able to select the size field.
Z-field The symbol will vary in size according to the variation
in the value of a selected Z-attribute. The symbol size variation
will be governed by Z-range table and the symbol size table.

Symbol Size
This parameter is for use when the Symbol Size Mode is Size. Enter the
size, in plotter units (in./cm.), for the posted shotpoint symbols.

Discontinuity Ratio
This parameter is used only when you have answered Yes to Use
Discontinuities? on the General Posting Parameters menu. The
Discontinuity Ratio is the Discontinuity Symbol Size Ratio. The value
you enter will result in the scaling of the posted shotpoint symbol size
wherever the shotpoint falls within a discontinuity (unconformity).

Rate To Post (Divisible By)

This parameter is required when the shotpoint symbol posting mode is
Rate or Divide.
This is the shotpoint symbol posting rate. A rate of 2 will post symbols
for the endpoints and for every other shotpoint, e.g., 1, 3, 5, 7, etc.

Starting Location (Divisible Bias)

The starting shotpoint number is a bias added to the shotpoints on each
seismic line before rate or division are performed. The divisible bias is
the starting shotpoint number on each seismic line where shotpoint
posting is to begin. Shotpoints are posted according to the following
equation: Integer=(Shotpoint+Bias)/(Divide Rate). Each shotpoint
position that meets these conditions with an integer is posted.

R2003.12.0 Features: 3D Seismic 344

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

If the starting shotpoint number is 5, and the Divide value is 4, then

shotpoint numbers 1, 8, 12, 16 and so on are posted. Shotpoint 4 is
evenly divisible by 4, but shotpoint 4 is not posted because if falls before
the starting shotpoint number of 5.
For Rate, if the starting shotpoint number is 5 and the rate is 2, shotpoint
number 1, 5, 7, 9, and so on to the last shotpoint number have Z-value
labels posted. Shotpoint number 3 falls within the rate, but is not posted
with a Z-value label because it comes before the starting shotpoint.

Shotpoint Labels (Shotpoint Number)

The label which can be associated with a shotpoint on a seismic line is
the shotpoint number, and if a reshot field is present, the reshot text will
be added to the shotpoint number. Like Shotpoints to Post, Shotpoints
to Label options include All or None; the option to post some shotpoint
labels are Rate, Interval and Divide.
The Shotpoints to Label options apply to the posted shotpoints. The
panel allows the user to determine which of the posted shotpoints will
be labeled with the shotpoint number.
The panel allows for control of shotpoint color, size, and angle as well
as starting point for the first label.

Shotpoint Labeling Mode

For All, Some, or None of the posted shotpoints, a shotpoint number
label can be included. If a given shotpoint has a symbol posted, it can be
selected to have a shotpoint number label posted with it.
The options for label posting method are All, Rate, Divide, and None.
For All, Rate, and Divide, the program will always label the first and last
shotpoints.
All Posts a number for all shotpoints in the data file.
Rate Posts a label for every Rateth posted shotpoint symbol. A
shotpoint number label is also posted at the starting location (the
first shotpoint symbol labeled).
Divide Posts a shotpoint number label for any posted shotpoint
divisible by the divisor, in addition to the starting location (the first
shotpoint symbol labeled).
None Post no shotpoint symbol labels.

R2003.12.0 Features: 3D Seismic 345

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Rate To Post (Divisible By)

This parameter is required when the shotpoint labeling mode is Rate or
Divide. This is the shotpoint symbol posting rate. A rate of 2 posts
symbols for the starting location and for every other shotpoint, such as
1, 3, 5, 7, and so on.

Starting Location (Divisible Bias)

This parameter is required when the shotpoint labeling mode is Divide.
This is the number of the shotpoint where the first label is to be posted.

Shotpoint Labels (Z-value)

Z-labels are only available for posted shotpoints (and only if all or some
shotpoints are posted).
The value of the Z-attribute which can be posted with any shotpoint can
be labeled. The Z-value labeling control is the same as for shotpoints to
post and shotpoints to label, except that the user can specify the number
of decimal places desired in the Z-value label.

Label Posting Mode

For All, Some, or None of the posted shotpoints, a Z-value label can be
included. If a given shotpoint has a symbol posted, it can be selected to
have a Z-value label posted with it.
The options for label posting method are All, Rate, Divide, Interval, and
None. For All, Rate, Divide, and Interval, the program will always label
the first and last shotpoints with Z-labels.
All will result in all shotpoints on the data file having a Z-value
label posted on the active picture.
Rate will result in the posting of a label for every Rateth posted
shotpoint. A Z-value label will also be posted at the starting
location (the first shotpoint symbol which is to be labeled).
Divide will result in posting of a Z-value label for any posted
shotpoint divisible by the divisor, in addition to the starting
location (the first shotpoint symbol which is to be labeled).
Interval will result in posting of a Z-value label for the starting
shotpoint and for each successive shotpoint reaching the interval.
The last shotpoint will also have a Z-value label.
None will cause none of the posted shotpoint symbols to be
labeled with Z-values.

R2003.12.0 Features: 3D Seismic 346

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Rate To Post (Divisible By)

The rate to post Z-value labels is the frequency for posting labels on
posted shotpoints. A rate of 1 would post Z-value labels with all posted
shotpoints; a rate of 3 would post labels for every third shotpoint.

Starting Location (Divisible Bias)

The divisible bias is the starting shotpoint number on each seismic line
where Z-value label posting is to begin. The starting shotpoint number
is a bias added to the shotpoints on each seismic line before rate,
interval, or division are performed. If the starting shotpoint number is 5,
and the Divide value is 4, then shotpoint numbers 1, 8, 12, 16 and so on
are posted. Shotpoint 4 is evenly divisible by 4, but no Z-value label is
posted for it, falling as it does before the starting shotpoint number of 5.
For Rate, if the starting shotpoint number is 5 and the rate is 2, shotpoint
number 1, 5, 7, 9, and so on to the last shotpoint number have Z-value
labels posted. Shotpoint number 3 falls within the rate, but is not posted
with a Z-value label because it comes before the starting shotpoint.

Label Color
Z-value labels can have up to 20 colors assigned.

Label Size
The label size is expressed in plotter units (in./cm).

Label Angle
Taking the shotpoint associated with the Z-value to be labeled as the
pivot point, the Label Angle is the value in degrees counterclockwise to
be added to the original label angle.

Label Angle is a Characteristic

The above parameters refer to characteristics of the label. Bias, scale, and
number of decimals apply to the Z-value itself. The Z-value is biased or
scaled, and the value is put into the label.

Bias
Prior to posting the Z-value label, you can add a bias value can to the
Z-value. The posted Z-value label will reflect the biased Z-value.

R2003.12.0 Features: 3D Seismic 347

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Scale
Prior to posting the Z-value label, you can scale the Z-value by a value.
The posted Z-value label will reflect the scaled Z-value.

Number of Decimals
This is the number of decimals to the right of the decimal to be posted
in the Z-value label.

Line Name Parameters

This option brings up a panel which allows the user to control how a
seismic line name (or number) is posted. The location, angle of
orientation, text font, size and color can be controlled using this panel.

Name Location
There are eight possible locations for the seismic line name.
Both will result in the line name being printed at the beginning and
ending shotpoints, parallel to the seismic line.
Start will result in the line name being printed at the beginning
shotpoint, parallel to the seismic line.
End will result in the line name being printed at the ending
shotpoint, parallel to the seismic line.
North will result in the line name being printed at the
northernmost position on the seismic line, parallel to the line.
East will result in the line name being printed at the easternmost
position on the seismic line, parallel to the line.
West will result in the line name being printed at the westernmost
position on the seismic line, parallel to the line.
Omit will result in no line name being posted.

Name Orientation
The line name can be oriented parallel to the track line or parallel to the
X-axis of the picture.
Line. The line name will be oriented parallel to the track line it
labels.
X-axis. The line name will be oriented parallel to the X-axis of
the picture.

R2003.12.0 Features: 3D Seismic 348

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Name Font
The choices for text font are shown at left.

Name Size
This is the size of the text in plotter units (in./cm.).

Name Color
This is the color of the seismic line name. Clicking the color box will
bring up a color widget comprised of 256 colors. Select the color you
want for the seismic line name.

Name Angle
Taking the shotpoint nearest the line name as the pivot point, the Name
Angle is the value in degrees counterclockwise to be added to the
original line name angle.

Track Line Parameters

These parameters affect both 3D and 2D seismic lines.
These parameters allow the user to control how a posted seismic line
(track line) will be drawn. The connectivity mode allows a decision on
whether to use all shotpoints in drawing a seismic line or only those
points which have posted shotpoint symbols.
The discontinuity pattern allows a different line pattern to appear for
segments of a seismic line which fall within a discontinuity.
The normal pattern refers to the normal line pattern for the seismic line
(For a list of the line patterns and their associated numbers, see
Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line Patterns, starting on
page 791.)
Number break and distance break allow a track line to be broken up into
several segments by applying tests to consecutive shotpoints.
The value for number break refers to the difference in value between any
two posted shotpoint numbers. The user specifies a difference between
shotpoints number values. If the difference between two consecutive
values exceeds this value, then the program will show the break in the
track line.

R2003.12.0 Features: 3D Seismic 349

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

The value for distance break refers to the distance between shotpoints.
If the distance between shotpoints exceeds this value, then the program
will show the break in the track line.

Connectivity Mode
The options for connectivity mode are Posted and All.
Posted will result in drawing the track lines between posted
shotpoints only.
All will result in drawing the track lines between all shotpoints,
even shotpoints not selected for posting.

Discontinuity Pattern
You can alter the appearance of the line in areas where a discontinuity
(unconformity) is present. Consult the section Appendix C. Symbols,
Fonts, and Line Patterns, starting on page 791. Select the number for
the line pattern to draw if a discontinuity is present.

Normal Pattern
You can select the line pattern you want for the track line. If you wish
to distinguish between a normal pattern for the track line and a pattern
indicating a discontinuity, select one line pattern for normal, and another
line pattern to indicate a discontinuity.
The line patterns and their corresponding numbers appear in Appendix
C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line Patterns, starting on page 791.

Line Weight
You use this parameter if the Line Pattern Type for track line is bold (1).
The Bold line width factor is a multiple of plain line widths. The values
is a number from 18, with the default value set at 2.

R2003.12.0 Features: 3D Seismic 350

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Number Break
This parameter sets up a value difference test between any two
consecutive shotpoints on a track line. If the value entered exceeds this
difference, the track line will be broken between those shotpoints.
The value for number break refers to the difference in value between any
two posted consecutive shotpoint numbers. The user specifies a
difference between shotpoints number values. If the difference between
two consecutive values exceeds this value, then the program will show
the break in the track line. A value of 0 will insure that a continuous
track line will be drawn regardless of any difference in shotpoint
number values.

Distance Break
This parameter sets up a distance test between any two consecutive
shotpoints on a track line. If the value entered exceeds this distance, the
track line will be broken between those shotpoints.
The value for distance break refers to the distance between shotpoints.
If the distance between shotpoints exceeds this value, then the program
will show the break in the track line. A value of 0.0 will insure that a
continuous track line will be drawn regardless of the distance between
shotpoints.

3D Survey Name Parameters

These parameters allow control for the location of the survey name, the
font, size, and color of the text, and the angle of rotation for the survey
name.

Survey Name Location

There are eight location options for 3D Survey Names.
Both+Line Post the 3D survey name parallel to, and above, the
first seismic line in the survey, and parallel to, and below, the last
seismic line in the survey.
Start+Line Post 3D survey parallel to, and above, the first
seismic line in the survey.
End+Line Post 3D survey parallel to, and below, the last
seismic line in the survey.

R2003.12.0 Features: 3D Seismic 351

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Both+Shot Center the 3D survey with reference to all the first

shotpoints (on all the seismic lines in the survey). Likewise, the 3D
survey name will be centered with reference to the end shots on all
the seismic lines in the survey. The survey names at both ends will
be perpendicular to the lines in the survey.
Start+Shot Center the 3D survey with reference to all the first
shotpoints (on all the seismic lines in the survey). The survey name
will be perpendicular to the lines in the survey.
End+Shot Center the 3D survey name with reference to all the
end shotpoints (on all the seismic lines in the survey). The survey
name will be perpendicular to the lines in the survey.
Center Post 3D survey names in the center of each 3D survey
in the active map or cross section.
Omit Do not post 3D survey names in the active map or cross
section.

Survey Name Font

The choices for text font are shown at left.

Survey Name Size

This is the size of the text in plotter units (in./cm.).

Survey Name Color

This is the color of the text for the 3D survey name. Clicking the color
box will bring up a color widget composed of 256 colors. Select the
color you want for the 3D survey name.

Survey Name Angle

In considering the angle of rotation for the survey name, the program
takes the center of the label as the rotation point. The program begins
with the default orientation of the survey name label. Taking the current
angle of rotation of the Survey Name as the starting point, the Survey
Name Angle is the additional counter-clockwise angle applied to the
default orientation.

R2003.12.0 Features: 3D Seismic 352

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

3D Survey Line Parameters

These parameters enable you to control which 3D survey lines are
posted, and which posted lines have posted names. The parameters
allow decimation of track lines and track line labels.

Line Posting Method

For All, Rate, and Divide, the program will always post labels for the
first and last track lines.
All results in 3D survey lines being posted.
Rate results in the posting of the first and last track line in the
survey, and every Rateth track line. The calculation of the Rateth
line begins with a user-specified start track line number. A rate of 1
would result in all track lines being posted; a rate of 2 would result
in every other track line being posted.
Divide results in the posting of the first and last track line in the
survey, and each track line whose number (plus a user-specified
bias), is evenly divisible by the divide value.
None results in no 3D survey lines being posted.

Rate To Post Lines (Divisible By)

The rate to post lines is the frequency for posting track lines in the 3D
survey. A rate of 1 would post all lines; a rate of 3 would post every 3rd
line.

Starting Line (Divisible Bias)

The divisible bias is the seismic line number where posting is to begin.
The starting line number is a bias added to all lines in the survey before
rate or division are performed. If the starting line number is 5, and the
Divide value is 4, then line numbers 1, 8, 12, 16 and so on are posted.
Line 4 is evenly divisible by 4, but it is not posted, falling as it does
before the starting line number (5). For Rate, if the starting line number
is 5 and the rate is 2, line 1, 5, 7, 9 and so on will be posted. Line number
3 falls within the rate, but is not posted because it comes before the
starting line.

R2003.12.0 Features: 3D Seismic 353

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Line Name Posting Method

All will result in posting names for all posted 3D survey lines.
Rate will result in the posting of line names for the first and last
track line in the survey, and a line name for every posted Rateth
track line. The calculation of the Rateth line begins with a starting
posted line number which the user supplies. A rate of 1 would
result in posted names for all posted track lines. A rate of 2 would
result in posted names for every other posted track line.
Divide will result in the posting of line names for the first and last
track line in the survey, for each posted track line whose number
(plus a user-specified bias), is evenly divisible by the divide value.
None will result in no 3D survey line names being posted.

Rate To Post Line Names (Divisible By)

The rate to post line names refers to the frequency with which posted
lines are to have posted line names. A rate of 1 would post line names
for all posted lines; a rate of 3 would post line names for every 3rd line.

Starting Line Name (Divisible Bias)

The divisible bias is the seismic line number where name posting is to
begin. The starting line name is a bias added to all lines in the survey
before rate or division are performed. If the starting line number for
posting names is 5, and the Divide value is 4, then line numbers 1, 8, 12,
16 and so on will have line names posted. Line 4 is evenly divisible by
4, but no name is posted for it, falling as it does before the starting line
for name posting (5).
For Rate, if the starting line number is 5 and the rate is 2, line 1, 5, 7, 9
and so on will have line names posted. Line number 3 falls within the
rate, but no name is posted for it because it comes before the starting
line.

R2003.12.0 Features: 3D Seismic 354

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

General Posting Parameters

Use this dialog box to control some of the more important posting
parameters.
Reposition Line Name w.r.t AOI (With Respect to AOI)
Specify whether seismic line names or 3D survey names can be
placed outside the pictures area of interest instead of being
clipped at the border.
No If the 2D/3D line names or 3D survey names fall
partially or entirely outside the picture border, the line name/
survey name is not posted.
Yes The program attempts to place the 2D/3D line name
immediately outside the border. For 3D survey names, any
angle of rotation is eliminated, and the program attempts to
place the survey name inside the picture border. If the effort to
place the survey name inside fails, a diagnostic message
appears.
Use Discontinuities Specify whether to use discontinuities in
posting. Yes means that if a discontinuity field is present in the
data file, use it. No means ignore discontinuity fields.
Minimum Distance The minimum distance is to the smallest
plotter distance allowed between data points. To ignore minimum
distance, use 0.0 for the value.
Color Mode Color Mode determines how the color settings for
track lines and shotpoint symbols are set.
Value Set the color of track lines and shotpoint symbols by
selecting a color value.
Field Vary the color of track lines and shotpoint symbols by
field type. Select a color mode field for a particular graphics
feature (such as symbol color) from the input seismic data file.
To select a color field, select the Color Field option in the
Choose Fields menu.
Z-field Vary the color of track lines and color/size of
shotpoint symbols by Z-attribute field. The size and color are
determined by the Z-range table and Color and Symbol Size
table. The starting color index is the starting color for
modulated field values. The color changes one index for each
modulation level.
If the color or size of a posted object is to vary with the change in a
specific Z-value, the user can specify how many levels of variation
(modulation levels) are reflected in posting.

R2003.12.0 Features: 3D Seismic 355

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Color Value This parameter is used when Color Mode = Value.

The color value may be a field on your input file associated with a
particular posted entity (e.g., a shotpoint number). The color you
select will determine the color of the posted lines and shotpoint
symbols. Clicking the color to the left of the number field box will
bring up the color selection widget.
Number of Modulation Levels The number of modulation
levels determines the variations which will be possible for
shotpoint symbols, shotpoint labels, and Z-labels. The modulation
levels govern how many levels there are in the Z-range table and in
the Symbol Size table.
This parameter value must be supplied when the Color Mode is
Z-field, and if the Z-range Table Creation Method (on the
Modulation Parameters/Z-range Creation Parameters menu) is to
be Type In.
Enter the number of modulation levels you want to create. The
color and size of shotpoint symbol, shotpoint label, and Z-attribute
label will be varied when each level of Z-field values is reached.
Starting Color Index The starting color index is the color you
assign to the first level of the Z-range table. Each level up from the
first Z-field level results in posting with the next highest color.

Select Data to Post

This option brings up a Select Data to Post panel. If all data in the
seismic data file is to be posted, then the other parameters on this panel
are irrelevant. If only some of the data on the seismic data file is to be
posted, this panel allows the user to set up conditions which data must
satisfy in order to be posted. The data to post can be selected if it
satisfies one of the unary, binary, or Boolean operators available. Or,
data can be posted which satisfies a user-specified textual or numeric
mask.

Data to Post
All will result in all data being posted.
Some will allow you to set up selection criteria using operators, textual
and numeric masks, and wildcards. Data which match the selection
criteria you define will be posted.

R2003.12.0 Features: 3D Seismic 356

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Select Operator
The operators set up a comparison between data values (such as
shotpoint numbers, line names, z attribute values) and a user-specified
text or numeric mask. The mask excludes values which do not satisfy the
requirement when the operator is applied to it. The values that fail to
satisfy the operator/mask are not posted.
The operators are:
EQ Post values equal to the textual or numeric mask.
NE Post values which do not equal the textual or numeric
mask.
If the EQ and NE operators are applied to character fields, the
entry for VALUE can contain wildcard characters.
LT Post values which are lexically or numerically less than the
textual or numeric mask.
LE Post values which are lexically or numerically less than or
equal to the textual or numeric mask.
GT Post values which are lexically or numerically greater than
the textual or numeric mask.
GE Post values which are lexically or numerically less than or
equal to the textual or numeric mask.
Null Post attributes whose field value equal to the ZNON (null
value) for the field.
NotNull Post all attributes which have a non-null value, or
which do not equal the ZNON.
Between Post all values which are between the lowest and
highest end of the lexical or numerical range defined by the masks.
Endpoints are included.
Outside Post all values which do not fall within (which are
outside of) the range of the lowest and highest lexical or numeric
values. Endpoints are not included.
The Value of the field must be of the same type (numeric or character)
as the field being tested.

Textual Selection Mask 1

For the unary operators (EQ, NE, LT, LE, GT, GE), enter a text string
which is to be a constant. Wildcards may be used in textual masks
(except for the first character of the string).

R2003.12.0 Features: 3D Seismic 357

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

For example, using the operator EQ:

Mask 1: AUS
will post all values consisting of characters AUS.
Mask 1: AUS*
will post all values consisting of characters AUS, and any characters
which follow AUS, such as AUS-001, AUS-002, AUS--01, etc.
The textual selection mask 1 also serves as the lower constant of the
range for the operators Between and Outside.

Textual Selection Mask 2

Textual selection Mask 2 is required for the binary operators Between
and Outside. Textual selection Mask 2 serves as the upper constant for
the operators Between and Outside.

Numeric Selection Mask 1

For the unary operators (EQ, NE, LT, LE, GT, GE), enter a numeric
value which is to be a constant. The operator will be applied to the
constant and all numeric values which satisfy the mask will be posted.

Numeric Selection Mask 2

Enter a numeric value that is to be the upper constant for operations
Between and Outside.

Rules For Using Wildcards

Masks used with the GT, LT, GE, and LE operators must observe the
following conventions: 1) Must begin with a non-wildcard character,
2) May contain any number of % wildcards, 3) May end with an *
wildcard, 4) Must not contain an * wildcard before any characters that
are to be used in the comparison.

Single Character Wildcard

The single character wildcard is %. For example, to post any data
having a one-hundreds decimal value, the mask is: 0.0%
If the operator is EQ, data values such as 0.01, 0.02, 0.03 are posted. In
this example, the value 0.001 is not posted, because the program is
looking for only one character after the third character in the string.

R2003.12.0 Features: 3D Seismic 358

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Multiple Character Wildcard

The multiple character wildcard is *. For example, to post any data
beginning with the string AUS-, the mask is: AUS-*
If the operator is EQ, data values such as AUS-50 and AUS-51 are
posted.

Modulation Parameters
The Modulation Parameters panel allows you to set up ranges in
Z-Attribute variations which will cause a color or label text size change.

Z-Range Creation Parameters

The Z-Range Parameters panel allows users to set up a Z-Range table.
The Z-Range table sets out a number of minimum Z-Attribute values. A
change in the color or size of a posted entity will occur at each level of
the Z-Range table, e.g., the color index of the Z-Attribute value label
(and/or the size of that label) will increment to the next color index on
the color table (or to the next text size).
There are four methods of setting up a Z-Range table.
Z-Attribute modulation is defined in the Z-Range table. Symbol Size
modulation is defined in the Symbol Size Range table.

Z-Range Table Creation Method

When you choose a method for determining the number of modulation
levels, you are deciding how many levels of variation there can be in the
color of shotpoint and Z-Attribute labels, and the levels of size variation
you can have for shotpoint symbols. The number of modulation levels
is the same for the Z-Range table and for the Symbol Size table. The
levels in the two tables have a one to one correspondence. Modulation
level 2 in the Z-Range table will result in the symbol size assigned to
modulation level 2 in the Symbol Size table.
The four methods of creating a Z-Range table are:
Type In. When you select Edit Z-range Values, a series of panels
will appear, allowing you to enter the minimum value for each
level in the Z-Range table. Changes in posted items (color or size)
will occur when each level is reached.
Divide. You can specify a number of levels to be built into the
Z-Range table. If you want 7 levels of variation in the posted items
for Z-Attribute values, then the divide value would equal 7.

R2003.12.0 Features: 3D Seismic 359

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Inc. An increment will be added to the minimum value in the

table. If the minimum value is 1200, and the increment is 100,
then a Z-Range level will be created at 1300, 1400, etc., up to 50
levels.
Inc+Start. The user specifies the Z-Attribute value where the
modulation levels are to start. Values below the Start value do not
affect the variation in size or color of posted items. The user also
specifies the increment to be added to the start value to create the
next highest level. If the start value is 0.007 and the increment is
0.001, the posted color and size variations will take effect at each
level starting with 0.007, 0.008, 0.009, etc.

Z-Range Increment
When the Z-Range Table Creation Method is Divide, Inc or Inc+Start,
you must enter the value of the increment between modulation levels.

Z-Range Start
When the Z-Range Table Creation Method is Inc+Start, you must enter
the starting value. The increment will then be added to the start value to
create each additional modulation level.

Symbol Size Range Creation Parameters

To set a range for the size of symbols on the current map or cross
section, create a Symbol Size Range table.
Click the Symbol Size Range Creation Parameters button in the
Modulation Parameters dialog box to display the Symbol Size Range
Creation Parameters dialog box. Use this dialog box to set up a Symbol
Size Range table. The Z-Symbol Size table sets out minimum and
maximum value for varying symbol size.
Z-Attribute modulation is defined in the Z-Range table. Symbol Size
modulation is defined in the Symbol Size Range table.
Symbol Size Table Creation Method The methods of creating
a Symbol Size table are:
Type In. When you select Edit Symbol Size Range Values, a
series of panels appear, enabling you to enter the minimum
symbol size value for each level in the Symbol Size table.
Changes in shotpoint symbol size occur when each level is
reached. The number of modulation levels is specified on the
General Posting Parameters panel.

R2003.12.0 Features: 3D Seismic 360

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Divide. The user supplies a minimum and maximum symbol

size for the Symbol Size table. The program divides the
difference between the maximum and minimum symbol size
by the number of levels in the modulation table. If you have
specified 7 modulation levels, a minimum symbol size of 0.1, a
maximum symbol size of 0.7, you have a 0.1 change in symbol
size for each additional modulation level.
Inc. An increment will be added to the minimum symbol size
in the table. If the minimum value is 0.1, and the increment is
0.05, then a Symbol Size variation will be 0.1 for level one,
0.15 for level two, 0.2 for level 3, 0.25 for level four, etc.
Inc+Start. The user specifies the value for the starting symbol
size. If the start value is 0.3 and the increment is 0.07, the
symbol size for level two will be 0.37; for the third level, a
value of 0.44, etc.
Starting Symbol Size This is the size of the symbol for the first
modulation level in the table. The units are expressed in plotter
units (in./cm.) If the modulation field fails to satisfy any of the
values of the mod field on the Z-Range table, it is posted with the
starting symbol size (and starting color).
Symbol Size Table Increment When the Symbol Size Table
Creation Method is Divide, Inc or Inc+Start, you must enter the
value of the increment between symbol sizes.
Symbol Size Table Start When the Symbol Size Table
Creation Method is Inc+Start, you must enter the starting value for
shotpoint symbol size. The increment will then be added to the
start value to create each additional symbol size for the number of
modulation levels.
Symbol Size Table Minimum When the Symbol Size Table
creation Method is Divide, the minimum and maximum symbol
size for the table is required. The program computes the difference
between the minimum and maximum values for symbol size and
divides this difference by the number of modulation levels. The
resulting value is the amount to increment symbol size when each
modulation level is reached.

R2003.12.0 Features: 3D Seismic 361

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Symbol Size Table Maximum When the Symbol Size Table

creation Method is Divide, this is the maximum value of the range
where symbol sizes are to be calculated. The program computes
the difference between the minimum and maximum values for
symbol size and divides this difference by the number of
modulation levels. The resulting value is the amount to increment
symbol size when each modulation level is reached.

Edit Z-Range Values

When the Z-Range Table Creation Method is Type In, you must supply
a minimum Z-value for each of the modulation levels you are creating.
Depending on the number of modulation levels, from 1 to 5 panels will
appear, allowing you to enter minimum Z-values for each modulation
level.

Edit Symbol Size Range Values

If the Symbol Size Table Creation Method is Type In, you must supply
the symbol size for each of the modulation levels you create. Depending
on the number of modulation levels, from 1 to 5 dialog boxes appear,
which you use to enter symbol sizes for each level.

R2003.12.0 Features: 3D Seismic 362

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Surveys (Canadian)
Z-MAP Plus supports picture creation and survey posting for many
types of Canadian surveys:
Create DLS/NTS Picture Creates a picture using the
Dominion Land Survey (DLS) and /or the National Topographic
Survey (NTS) system.
Post DLS & NTS Surveys Posts DLS and NTS lines and labels
on an existing picture. You must supply both areas present to use
this option.
Create & Post DLS Picture Creates a picture on which you
can plot DLS information.
Create & Post NTS Picture Creates a picture on which you
can plot NTS information.
NAD 27NAD 83 Datum Shift Translates NAD 27 latitudes
and longitudes to NAD 83 state plane projections and vice versa.
Post Township/Section Range (DLS) Draws the Township,
Section, Quarter Section along with the Township and Section
labels.
Post National Topo. Survey (NTS) Posts National
Topographic Survey (NTS), Map, Series, Block, Unit and/or
Quarter lines and labels on an existing picture.

The DLS and NTS Binary Files

Z-MAP Plus supplies default files for defining DLS and NTS surveys. To
substitute custom survey definition(s), follow these steps:
1. Name the custom file(s) that contain the DLS.BIN or ZNTS.DAT surveys.
2. Set the appropriate environment variable:
setenv DLSFILE /directoryname/DLS.BIN
setenv NTSFILE /directoryname/ZNTS.DAT

R2003.12.0 Features: Surveys (Canadian) 363

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Create DLS/NTS Picture

On Solaris and IRIX platforms, you can use this option to create a
picture whose AOI is specified using either the Dominion Land Survey
(DLS) or the National Topographic Survey (NTS) system or both. You
must specify whether each corner is to be defined in NTS or DLS and
supply the definition.
If the corner is defined in DLS, you supply the Township, Range, and
Section numbers. If the corners are defined in NTS, you must supply the
NorthEast and SouthWest corners or the NorthWest and SouthEast
corners.
The Create DLS/NTS Picture option creates only the picture, no
annotation or lines are drawn.
You must provide the following information:
Meridian, township, range and section of any DLS corner
Description of any NTS corner
UTM zone and absolute scale value
This option calls the PICT-NTS-DLS macro. (For more information,
select Help Online Manuals Macros Manual, and locate the
topic for PICT-NTS-DLS.)

R2003.12.0 Features: Surveys (Canadian) 364

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Post DLS & NTS Surveys

On Solaris and IRIX platforms, you can use this option to post National
Topographic Survey (NTS), Map, Series, Block, Unit and/or Quarter
lines and labels on an existing picture. You can also specify line type
and width for each type of line, as well as the font and size for each type
of label.
You can also post Dominion Land Survey (DLS) lines on an already
created picture. (You can create a picture with DLS lines using the
Create DLS/NTS Picture option.) On the DLS map the Township,
Section, Quarter Section and DLS lines may be drawn along with the
Township and Section labels. Road allowances may also be posted on
the picture.
The NTS and DLS are clipped to each other along the British Columbia
and Alberta border.

Warning
To use this option, the current map must include both NTS and DLS areas.

Specify the following information:

type of line for NTS, Map, Series, Block, Unit and/or Quarter
boundaries
line type and width of each NTS line
type of labeling for the NTS lines
size and font of the NTS labels
type of line for Township, Section, Quarter, Section and Legal
Subdivision (DLS) lines
type of labeling for the DLS lines
whether to post DLS road allowances
This option calls the POST-NTS-DLS macro. (For more information,
select Help Online Manuals Macros Manual, and locate the
topic for POST-NTS-DLS.)

R2003.12.0 Features: Surveys (Canadian) 365

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Create & Post DLS Picture

On Solaris and IRIX platforms, you can use this option to create a
picture for plotting Dominion Land Survey (DLS) information. The area
of interest for the picture is specified using Meridian, Township, Range,
and Section numbers for the Northwest and Southeast corners of the
desired area. Township, Section, Quarter Section and Legal
Subdivision lines may be drawn on this map along with the Township
and Section labels. Road allowances may also be posted on the picture.
A border is drawn around the map.
This option calls the PIC-POST-DLS macro. For more information,
select Help Online Manuals Macros Manual, and locate the
topic for PIC-POST-DLS.
Specify the following information:
UTM Zone Number
name of the graphics file
name of the new picture
name of the input grid file

Create & Post NTS Picture

On Solaris and IRIX platforms, you can use this option to create a
picture on which you may plot National Topographic Survey (NTS)
information. The area of interest for the picture is specified using either
the North West and South East corners or the North East and South West
corners of an NTS or PNCA survey. You can request NTS, Map, Series,
Block, Unit and Quarter lines and labels.
You can specify line type and width for each type of line and font and
size for each type of label.
Specify the following information:
either the North East and South West corners and the North West
and South East corners of the survey
type of line for NTS, Map, Series, Block, Unit and Quarter borders
line style and width of each type of border
type of labeling for the lines
size and font of the labels
This option calls the PIC-POST-NTS macro. (For more information,
select Help Online Manuals Macros Manual, and locate the
topic for PIC-POST-NTS.)

R2003.12.0 Features: Surveys (Canadian) 366

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

NAD 27NAD 83 Datum Shift

With the capability to handle NAD 83 state plane projections, there is a
need to be able to translate NAD 27 latitudes and longitudes to the new
NAD 83 standard. On Solaris and IRIX platforms, you can use this
macro accomplish that translation. The translation is available in both
directions.
Specify the following information:
input data file for the old latitude and longitude data in the type
fields
individual fields of the latitude and longitude type to use in the
transfer
desired direction of the transfer
new field names for the output latitude and longitude fields
name of the target data file and MFD for writing the output
This option calls the NADCONV macro. (For more information, select
Help Online Manuals Macros Manual, and locate the topic for
NADCONV.)

Post Township/Section Range (DLS)

On Solaris and IRIX platforms, you can use this macro to post Dominion
Land Survey (DLS) lines on an existing picture. (You can create a
picture with DLS lines by using the PICT-NTS-DLS macro.) You can
also add Township, Section, Quarter Section and DLS lines, Township
and Section labels, and Road allowances.
Specify the following information:
type of line for Township, Section, Quarter, Section and Legal
Subdivision (DLS) lines
type of labeling for the lines
whether to post road allowances
This option calls the POST-DLS macro. (For more information, select
Help Online Manuals Macros Manual, and locate the topic for
POST-DLS.)

R2003.12.0 Features: Surveys (Canadian) 367

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Post National Topo. Survey (NTS)

On Solaris and IRIX platforms, you can use this option to post National
Topographic Survey (NTS), Map, Series, Block, Unit and/or Quarter
lines and labels on an existing picture. The macro also enables you to
specify line type and width for each type of line, as well as the font and
size for each type of label.
Specify the following information:
type of line for NTS, Map, Series, Block, Unit and/or Quarter
boundaries
line type and width of each line
type of labeling for the lines
size and font of the labels
This option calls the POST-NTS macro. (For more information, select
Help Online Manuals Macros Manual, and locate the topic for
POST-NTS.)

R2003.12.0 Features: Surveys (Canadian) 368

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Projection Box
This option posts AOI and Projection information for a map.
The Projection Box option posts a box on a map showing all the picture
information such as picture name, scale, projection, etc. This box is
always 3 inches by 5 inches (same height as the default title block). The
projection box can be placed to the left of the title block by specifying
the position of the lower right corner of the projection box in map units.
You must select an existing ZGF.
This option calls the POST-PIC-STATS macro. For more information,
select Help Online Manuals Macros Manual, and locate the
topic for POST-PIC-STATS.

R2003.12.0 Features: Projection Box 369

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Picture Assembly
In Picture Assembly, you can take several existing pictures of one or
more surfaces (for example, a contour map, a 3D perspective map and a
cross section) and compile them into one presentation picture. The
component pictures of the assembly can be drawn from more than one
graphics file.
Before you select the Picture Assembly option, you must create and
define the limits for a new assembled picture (map or cross section). To
create a map, select File New Basemap. Each picture in the
assembled picture is enclosed in a frame that you define and resize.

Select Graphics File

Click the Select Graphics File button in the Picture Assembly dialog
box to display a list of all the ZGFs found in the specified ZGF directory
paths. Select the graphics file ZGF) that contains the picture you want
to place in the assembly.

Select Picture
Click the Select Picture button in the Picture Assembly dialog box to
display a list of all the pictures in the specified ZGF. Select an input
picture to place in the assembly.

Select Features
Click the Select Features button in the Picture Assembly dialog box to
display a dialog box that lists the features in the selected picture. Select
the features that you want to draw on the assembly. The default behavior
is to select all the features.

R2003.12.0 Features: Picture Assembly 370

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Cutline, Division
Click the Cutline, division button in the Picture Assembly dialog box
to display the Division, Cutline Parameters dialog box. Specify input
values for the following options:
Division of Features for Index Map Click the Division of
Features for Index Map button and select one of these options
from the list:
Maintain Division (default value) Select this option to
maintain the features as separate entities (such as contours,
borders, and title block). This option enables you to edit or
delete the features individually.
Single Feature Select this option to combine all input
picture features into a single graphics block, referred to as an
index map.
Use cutline Click the Use cutline button and select one of these
options from the list:
Cutline. Add a cutline around the input picture. This places a
solid line around the outside border offsets.
No Cutline. Omit the cutline from the input picture.

Create Frame
Click the Create Frame button in the Picture Assembly dialog box to
display the Create Frame dialog box. Use this dialog box to create a
frame for a picture you are placing in the assembly.
Key Frame Click the Key Frame button in the Create Frame
dialog box to display the Location, Height and Scale dialog box.
Enter coordinates and parameters from the keyboard for the
position, scale, and height of the frame:
Lower Left X and Y Coordinates You can specify the
location for placing the picture by entering the values for the
x,y coordinates of the lower left corner of the location. Until
you select OK, the frame you are creating repositions its lower
left corner wherever you click the mouse button in the
Z-MAP Plus window display area. This enables you to
reposition the frame graphically.

R2003.12.0 Features: Picture Assembly 371

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Scale If you do not want to define the size of the component

picture by using the cursor, you can enter the picture scale.
Enter the value to use for scaling the picture. A value 1 does
not change the scale, a 0.5 halves the original scale. Each
picture in the assembly is treated individually.
Enter a value to scale the size of the picture being placed in the
assembly. The dimensions of the output picture (assembled
picture) are multiplied by this value to determine the size of the
picture.
Height Height overrides the scale. Enter the height in
plotter units (in./cm.).
Change Height and Change Width To change the size of the
input picture, click the Change Height button or Change Width
button in the Create Frame dialog box. The Change Height or
Change Width dialog box appears. Click the mouse button at the
new location for the frame edge. The frame is rescaled,
maintaining the same height to width ratio. When you finish
resizing the index map, click OK to close the dialog box.

Modify Frame
Once you create the index map frame, you can click the Modify Frame
button in the Picture Assembly dialog box to display the Modify Frame
dialog box. Use this dialog box to change any of the previously input
parameters, then click OK.
Select Corner Select the corner of the frame that you want to
move. The frame changes colors. Using the cursor, select the new
location for the corner of the selected frame.
Next Frame This option takes the cursor to the next component
frame on the active picture. From this position you can select the
modifications you want to make to the frame (location, height,
width, cutline, division, features). You can select Next Frame as
many times as you like before you click OK in the Modify Frame
dialog box.

R2003.12.0 Features: Picture Assembly 372

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Key Location This panel enables you to enter values for the
location, scale, and height of the frame. This method can be used
instead of the cursor method of making modifications.
Lower Left X and Y Coordinates You may specify the
location of the picture being placed on the assembly by
entering the values for the x,y coordinates of the lower left
corner.
Scale Enter a number to scale the size of the picture being
placed on the assembly. The dimensions of the input picture
will be multiplied by this number to determine the size of the
picture placed on the assembly.
Height Height overrides the Scale value. Enter the height in
plotter units (in./cm.).
Change Height Move the cursor above or below the frame.
When you change the height, the frame is rescaled.
Change Width Move the cursor to the left or the right of the
frame. When you change the width, the frame is rescaled.
Cutline, Division You can put a cutline around the pictures on
your assembly. You can also treat the features of your picture as
one single graphics feature, or you can keep the graphical features
separate. When the features are kept as one graphical feature, they
are lumped together and no further editing of individual features
may be done for that picture on the assembly. When you choose to
keep the graphical features separate, you can selectively modify
them, or omit particular features from the individual frames on
your output picture.
Division of Features for Picture Being Placed on the Assembly
The features in the picture being placed on the assembly may
be combined into one single graphical feature, or these graphical
features may remain separate.
Maintain Division (default value). Select this option to
maintain the features as they are in the original picture.
Consequently, contours, borders, title block, etc., are kept as
separate entities.
Single Feature. Select this option to combine all features
(contours, border, title block, etc.) into a single graphics block,
referred to as an index map.

R2003.12.0 Features: Picture Assembly 373

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Use Cutline You can put a cutline around each picture being
placed on the assembly.
Cutline. Select this option to place a cutline around the
picture being placed on the assembly.
No Cutline. Select this option to prevent a cutline from being
placed around the picture being placed on the assembly.
Select Features A list of the features on the picture is
presented. Select the features you wish to draw on the picture
being placed on the assembly. The program defaults to All the
features.

Delete Frame
Once you create the index map frame, you can click the Delete Frame
button in the Picture Assembly dialog box to display the Delete Frame
dialog box. Use this dialog box to select a frame to delete. You can also
restore a frame you have deleted.
Next Frame This option takes the cursor to the next component
frame in the active picture. You can select Next Frame as many
times as you like before you click OK in the Delete Frame dialog
box.
Delete Frame Use the cursor to select the frame to delete.
Undelete Frame The Undelete option works on the frame you
have just deleted. When you select Undelete Frame, the deleted
frame will be put back on your output picture, in the position from
which it was removed.

R2003.12.0 Features: Picture Assembly 374

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

View Menu Options

Overview

Use the View menu options to control the way maps and cross sections
appear in the Z-MAP Plus window display area including which
features appear, whether the entire image is visible, and whether
changes appear automatically.
View options are active only if the display area currently contains a map
or cross section. (The Switch Screens option is active only if the display
area is split from the menu bar and you are using a dual monitor system.)
A summary of the View menu options follows.
Display List Select the features (such as contours, faults, and
text) that are included when a redrawing operation executes (for
example, Zoom In, Zoom Out, Window, Pan, Re-display, and Full
Display).
Zoom In Enlarge part of the image to fill the display area. The
image enlarges as soon as you select a centerpoint.
Zoom Out Reduce the image in the display area. The image
becomes smaller as soon as you select a centerpoint.
Window Draw a window around an area in the image, which
then enlarges to fill the display area.
Pan Shift the image to reveal a different part of it in the display
area. Define the extent and direction of the pan by selecting a
point, then selecting a new location for the point.
Re-display Load new or changed features into the display area,
or reload the image after changing the selections in the display list.
Full Display Redisplay the map or cross section at its original
size.

R2003.12.0 View Menu Options: Overview 375

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Auto Display Set Z-MAP Plus to add new or changed features

immediately to the display area. If Auto Display is not enabled,
features are added only on demand (for example, if you execute a
Zoom In, Zoom Out, Window, Pan, Re-display, or Full Display
operation).
Switch Screens Switch the display area from one monitor to
the other. This option is available only if you set the system switch
so the display area is split from the menu bar, and the system has
dual monitors.

Display List
Use the Display List option to select the graphic features you to display
in the next redrawing operation (such as Zoom In, Zoom Out, Window,
Pan, Re-display, and Full Display). This capability is useful for
expediting work on complex pictures. For example, when you view a
complex map as a whole, you can hide elements that take a long time to
redraw. When you zoom in on a part of the map, you can include those
elements.
To view the display list, select View Display List or click the
Display List icon (shown at left).
The SELECT GRAPHICS FEATURES dialog box appears. The display
list in the dialog box shows all the graphic features in the current map or
cross section, such as borders, control points, contours, text, and title
block. By default, all features are selected (highlighted) and are set to be
included in the next redrawing operation.
To clear a selection, click the element. Elements that are not selected are
omitted from redrawing. Omitted elements are still part of the map or
cross section, they are just rendered temporarily invisible.

R2003.12.0 View Menu Options: Display List 376

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Zoom In
Use the Zoom In option to enlarge a part of the current map or cross
section. To zoom in, follow these steps:
1. Select View Zoom In or click the Zoom In icon (shown at
left).
The prompt LOCATE POINT TO ZOOM ABOUT appears in the
status area.
2. Click the center of the area you want to enlarge.
The map or cross section is enlarged to about four times the
original size. The display area contains the part of the image
defined by the center point you chose.
Only the features currently selected in the display list appear. (To
view the display list, select View Display List.) By default, all
features are selected in the display list and are redrawn. If you have
cleared any feature selections, they are not included in the Zoom
In operation.
To return the display to it previous size, click the Zoom Out icon
(described on page 378). To return the display to its original size and
orientation, click the Full Display icon (described on page 382).

Canceling an Ongoing Redraw Operation

To cancel the ongoing redrawing operation, click the Process Interrupt
icon (shown at left). The ongoing redrawing process (for example,
Zoom In, Zoom Out, Window, Pan, Re-display, or Full Display) stops
immediately.
You may want to clear some of the features in the display list (as
described above), then redisplay the picture by selecting View
Re-display or clicking the Re-display icon (shown at left). New or
missing features are redrawn.

R2003.12.0 View Menu Options: Zoom In 377

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Zoom Out
Use the Zoom Out option to reduce the size of the currently displayed
current map or cross section. To zoom out, follow these steps:
1. Select View Zoom Out or click the Zoom Out icon (shown at
left).
The prompt LOCATE POINT TO ZOOM ABOUT appears in the
status area.
2. Click to select a center point for the new display area.
The map or cross section is reduced to about one fourth of its
former size. The reduced image appears in the part of the display
area defined by the center point you chose.
Only the features currently selected in the display list appear. (To
view the display list, select View Display List.) By default, all
features are selected in the display list and are redrawn. If you have
cleared any feature selections, they are not included in the Zoom
Out operation.
To return the display to it previous size, click the Zoom In icon
(described on page 377). To return the display to its original size and
orientation, click the Full Display icon (described on page 382).

Cancelling an Ongoing Redraw Operation

For information about cancelling an ongoing redraw operation, see page 377.

R2003.12.0 View Menu Options: Zoom Out 378

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Window
Use the Window option to define an area of the current map or cross
section and enlarge it to fill the display area. To execute a Window
operation, follow these steps:
1. Select View Window or click the Window icon (shown at left).
The cursor changes to a cross hairs symbol.
2. Click to select a corner and drag to define the area (the window)
you want to include in the display. (In some applications this
action is called drawing a rubber band around an area.)
The image in the window expands to fill the display area.
Only the features currently selected in the display list appear.
(To view the display list, select View Display List.) By default,
all features are selected in the display list and are included in the
new display. If you have cleared any feature selections, they are
not included in the Window operation.
To return the display to its original size and orientation, click the
Full Display icon (described on page 382).

Cancelling an Ongoing Redraw Operation

For information about cancelling an ongoing redraw operation, see page 377.

R2003.12.0 View Menu Options: Window 379

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Pan
Use the Pan option to shift the current map or cross section within the
display area, so you can see an adjacent part of the image. This option is
useful for chasing lines or data across a map you have enlarged with
the Zoom In option.
To pan, follow these steps:
1. Select View Pan or click the Pan icon (shown at left).
The prompt LOCATE EXISTING PAN REFERENCE POINT
appears in the status area.
2. Click to select a point you want to include in the new display.
The prompt LOCATE NEW POINT POSITION appears in the
status area.
3. Click to select a new position for the point you selected.
The display area shifts immediately in the direction and to the
distance you specified. Only the features currently selected in the
display list appear. (To view the display list, select View
Display List.) By default, all features are selected in the display
list and are redrawn. If you have cleared any feature selections,
they are not included in the Pan operation.
To return the display to its original position, click the Full Display icon
(described on page 382).

Cancelling an Ongoing Redraw Operation

For information about cancelling an ongoing redraw operation, see page 377.

R2003.12.0 View Menu Options: Pan 380

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Re-display
Use the Re-display option to refresh the current display (whether it
shows all or part of a map or cross section). If you have added features
since the last redrawing operation, the features are added to the display
(and are the only items redrawn). If you have not made any changes, the
display reloads unchanged.
To execute a Re-display operation, select View Re-display or click
the Re-display icon (shown at left).
The display updates immediately. Only the features currently selected in
the display list appear. (To view the display list, select View
Display List.) By default, all features are selected in the display list and
are redrawn. If you have cleared any feature selections, they are not
included in the Re-display operation.

Cancelling an Ongoing Redraw Operation

For information about cancelling an ongoing redraw operation, see page 377.

R2003.12.0 View Menu Options: Re-display 381

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Full Display
Use the Full Display option if you have used the Zoom In, Zoom Out,
Window, or Pan option, then want to redisplay the map or cross section
at its original size and placement.
To execute a Full Display operation, select View Full Display or
click the Full Display icon (shown at left).
The current map or cross section returns to its original size and
placement. Only the features currently selected in the display list appear.
(To view the display list, select View Display List.) By default, all
features are selected in the display list and are redrawn. If you have
cleared any feature selections, they are not included in the Full Display
operation.

Cancelling an Ongoing Redraw Operation

For information about cancelling an ongoing redraw operation, see page 377.

R2003.12.0 View Menu Options: Full Display 382

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Auto Display
Use the Auto Display option to set Z-MAP Plus to add new features to
the display dynamically (on) or add new features only on demand (off).
If Auto Display is on, Z-MAP Plus performs a Re-display operation
each time you add or change a feature. If Auto Display is off, the display
updates only if you perform one of the redrawing operations (such as
Re-display, Full Display, Zoom In, Zoom Out, Window, or Pan).
To toggle Auto Display on or off, select View Auto Display. The
system window reports the status change for the Auto Display option, as
shown in the following example. (The appearance of the option in the
View menu does not change.)

R2003.12.0 View Menu Options: Auto Display 383

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Switch Screens
Use the Switch Screens option to switch the active picture display from
one monitor to the other. The Switch Screens option is useful if you run
multiple OpenWorks applications simultaneously.
The Switch Screens option is available only if you use dual monitors and
the Z-MAP Plus graphics window is split from the menu bar.

Splitting Screens Before Switching

The Switch Screen option is inactive (and appears dimmed) unless you split the
Z-MAP Plus window so the display area is separate from the main menu. After
the split, you can move the display area between monitors.
To split the Z-MAP Plus window, use one of the following methods:
1 Select Tools System Switches. Select Separate from the Graphics Window
Configuration list. Exit from Z-MAP Plus and restart it.
2 Edit the MappingLauncher.dat file by entering the following command on a new
line (or edit the existing zmapplussh line to include the -m option):
Applications:
ZMAP Plus zmapplussh -m &

To execute a Switch Screens operation, select View Switch Screens.

The graphics window immediately appears on the opposite monitor.
The Switch Screens option has the following features:
Once you select a monitor for displaying the Z-MAP Plus
Command Menu, you cannot move it to another monitor.
Online help appears on the same monitor as the Z-MAP Plus
Command Menu.
The color editing dialog boxes appear on the same monitor as the
Z-MAP Plus window.
The position of the Z-MAP Plus window is stored as a session
parameter and is restored in the next Z-MAP Plus session.

R2003.12.0 View Menu Options: Switch Screens 384

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Modeling

Overview
Surface modeling, or gridding, is one of the most important functions in
Z-MAP Plus. Many functions in Z-MAP Plus use grids as input or
produce grids as output. A good introduction to gridding terminology
and the gridding process is available in the Z-MAP Plus Users Guide,
accessible by selecting Help Online Manuals User Guide.
Simply put, a grid is a set of regularly distributed points that are
calculated or estimated from an input set of control points. Control
points represent real data that has been collected and is not regularly
distributed.
The gridding methods are designed to work with point data, grids,
digitized contours, seismic lines, or other line oriented data.

A summary of available Modeling menu options follows.

Point Gridding Plus Provides all the functionality available in Point
Gridding and supports new features that enhance the geologic accuracy
of faulted structure models. Point Gridding Plus honors the input fault
geometry data, so it creates more accurate horizon models than
traditional structure modeling programs. Used in combination with
Profile Contouring, Point Gridding Plus provides high quality maps of
faulted surfaces.
Point Gridding Provides nine algorithms for building grids from
point (x, y, z) data. The algorithms are: Least Squares, Projected Slopes,
Weighted Average, Closest Point, Distance, Isopach, Bounded Range,
Linear Trend, and Moving Plate. You can use faults as barriers when
you build grids.
Contour Gridding Builds a grid from digitized contours. The
algorithm takes advantage of the information content in the digitized
contours to produce the grid faster and honor the contours exactly. You
can use faults only as barriers when you build grids.

R2003.12.0 Running H/F 2: Running H/F 1 #

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Line Gridding Plus Adds fault-rendering functionality to the

capabilities of Line Gridding similar to the additional functionality
Point Gridding Plus adds to the capabilities of Point Gridding.
Line Gridding Builds a grid from data in line format (such as
seismic, magnetic, and gravity data). The algorithm takes advantage of
information content of the line format to produce a grid faster and of a
quality similar to the Least Squares algorithm. You can use faults as
barriers when you build grids.
Trend Fit Gridding Builds a polynomial trend grid from point (x, y,
z) data or from a grid. You can build first order (3 term) through sixth
order (28 term) trends.
Trend Surface Gridding Creates a trend grid and a residual grid by:
using the supplied surface grid to build a trend grid of a specified
order
subtracting the trend grid from the supplied surface grid and
creating the residual grid
Many applications for trend surface grids exist. For example, you can
generate residuals and a trend surface from a velocity grid. After you
examine the residuals, you can identify high velocity, pull-up areas.
For detailed information about this macro, see the
TREND-ANAL-GRID topic in the Macro Reference Manual for
Z-MAP Plus / ZCL (Help Online Manual Macros Manual).
Boolean Grid Creates a grid with node values that equal either 0.0
or 1.0. Boolean grids are useful for mapping a formation that meets or
exceeds a criteria (for example, below, equal to, or above the Oil-Water
Contact level). For detailed information about this macro, see the
GRID-LT-EQ-GT topic in the Macro Reference Manual for
Z-MAP Plus / ZCL (Help Online Manual Macros Manual).
Constant Grid Creates a grid with node values that are all identical.
For detailed information about this macro, see the
EVAULATE-CONGRID topic in the Macro Reference Manual for
Z-MAP Plus / ZCL (Help Online Manual Macros Manual).
Polynomial Grid Evaluates a polynomial function over a
user-defined area and stores the results as a new grid. For detailed
information about this macro, see the EVAULATE-POLYN topic in the
Macro Reference Manual for Z-MAP Plus / ZCL (Help
Online Manual Macros Manual).

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

User-Defined Filter Filters a grid with a user-defined grid (filter

operator). The filter operator grid can originate either from a GRID file
on an attached MFD or as an imported external disk file. The filter
operator can possess ring symmetry. Ring symmetry means that the
values in the grid nodes that are equidistant from the center point of the
grid are equal in value. For detailed information about this macro, see
the USER-FILTER topic in the Macro Reference Manual for
Z-MAP Plus / ZCL (Help Online Manual Macros Manual).
Flexing Smooths all or part of a grid by using Laplacian flexing,
Biharmonic flexing, or both. You can make smoothing adjustments with
or without further restrictions from the upper and lower constraint
surfaces. Flexing is used in many gridding methods, including Point
Grid Plus, Point Gridding, Contour Gridding, Line Gridding Plus, and
Line Gridding.
For an introduction to modeling and gridding in Z-MAP Plus, see the
Z-MAP Plus Users Guide. The section More on Grids covers the
process of creating grids, gridding terminology, and Point Gridding Plus
parameters.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Shared Gridding Parameters

Many of the Z-MAP Plus gridding methods share certain parameters.
This topic describes the common parameters. For specific ranges and
suggestions for setting these parameters, see the description of each
gridding method. The following table shows which gridding methods
use common parameters.

Shared Gridding Parameters Flexing Parameters

# of Flex Passes
Search Radius

Extrapolation

Refinements

Flexing Type
Control Grid

Smoothness
Data Hulls
Gridding Method

Modulus
Cutoff
Point Gridding Plus X X X X X X X X X

Point Gridding X X X X X X X X X

Contour Gridding X X X X X

Trendform Gridding X

Line Gridding Plus X X X X X X X X

Line Gridding X X X X X X

Flexing X X X X

The following topics describe the effect each of these parameters have
and how to use them to improve grids. The Boolean, Constant,
Polynomial, and User-Defined gridding methods do not use these
parameters.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Control Grids
You can use control grids to determine which grid nodes are initialized
in Point Gridding Plus, Point Gridding, and Line Gridding Plus. You can
designate a control grid to tailor the new grids node values. Each
gridding method can use information from the selected control grid in a
number of different ways. Possible choices for this parameter include:
None Do not use a control grid.
Flex Only Flex the control grid. To constrain flexing, Z-MAP Plus
uses any input control points and faults.
Grid Non-ZNONS Replace any non-null grid nodes in the control
grid with values. Determine the non-null values by using:
specified gridding parameters
input control points
faults
No null (ZNON) grid nodes are altered. This control option is useful for
ensuring that node values are calculated at the same node locations for
all project grids. You cannot perform any refinements. The output grid
has the same x,y limits and increments as the control grid.
Grid ZNONS Replace any null (ZNON) grid nodes in the control
grid with values determined by:
specified gridding parameters
input control points
faults
No non-null grid nodes are altered. You cannot perform any
refinements. The output grid has the same x,y limits and increments as
the control grid, and the entire grid is filtered (both original non-ZNON
values and the newly calculated nodes).
Faults Only Set the program to create the specified output faults and/
or fault profile files. The Faults Only control option uses the control grid
and processes the input centerline fault file against it. No input control
point data is required.
Default AOI Choose the x,y limits and increments from the control
grid. This is the most common application of a control grid and
guarantees that the control grid and output grid cover the same area and
that their nodes are located at the same x,y positions.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Data Hulls
You can use data hulls to determine which grid nodes are initialized
(assigned a value greater than null or ZNON) in Point Gridding Plus,
Point Gridding, or Line Gridding Plus. Choose one of the four methods
(discussed in the following text) to determine which grid nodes are
initialized:
Data Distribution
Convex Hull
Concave Hull 1
Concave Hull 2
Data Distribution The Data Distribution method of determining the
gridding area is the method used in classic Point Gridding. The
gridding area is determined by basic gridding parameters, such as reach
or minimum number of control points that can be used to compute any
grid value.
Convex Hull The Convex Hull option sets Z-MAP Plus to grid
whenever possible inside the convex hull of the dataset expanded by the
Expand parameter you defined in the Secondary Parameters option. The
gridding is limited only by the Reach Parameter.

Convex Hull

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Concave Hull 1 The Concave Hull 1 option sets Z-MAP Plus to grid
whenever possible inside the convex hull reduced by concavities. The
concavities are determined by the radius. The size of an imaginary ball
rolled around the convex hull of the data determines the depth of the
concavities.
Concave Hull 2 The Concave Hull 2 option is similar to Concave
Hull 1, except that concavities are slightly deeper between initialized
grid nodes.

Size of the ball rolled around Size of the ball rolled around
the convex hull of the data the convex hull of the data

Concave Hull 1 Using Different Size Balls

Setting the Radius of the Ball used to Create the Convex Hull
When you choose either Convex Hull method, the following dialog box
appears, which you use to set the radius of the ball used to roll around
the data edges.

In this dialog box, the value of the radius is automatically set to five
times the grid increment. You can reset the radius of the ball to any value
between 1 - 5 times the grid increment. In this dialog you also name the
data hull you create.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Search Radius
The Search Radius parameter determines how far from a node the
gridding method should look to determine the value assigned to the
node.

The default radius is half the diagonal of the grid being calculated and
is usually much larger than necessary. Although it is better for the radius
to be too large rather than too small, a large radius increases gridding
time. Since only the closest points are used, significantly more data are
looked at than are actually used to calculate a nodes value. Most users
have found that significantly reducing the default value for the Search
Radius is the easiest way to speed the gridding process.
This is one of the primary parameters for controlling how far
extrapolations are carried away from the data. Reducing this to the point
where the search radius is smaller than the distance between data and the
edge of the map, or between data points, will cause ZNONs to be placed
in those unreached areas. This extrapolation control method will create
holes (ZNON areas) in void areas in the middle of data.

Extrapolation Distance
You can use the Extrapolation Distance parameter to set a distance from
the perimeter of the data to define an area in which you want to calculate
grid nodes. This parameter is applicable to Point Gridding Plus, Point
Gridding, Contour Gridding, Line Gridding Plus, and Line Gridding.
The default Extrapolation value is equal to the Search Radius value.
If Search Radius, Minimum Number of Points, Number of Sectors, or
any other node initialization parameters restrict node calculation to an
area smaller than the one defined by the Extrapolation setting, the
Extrapolation setting overrides the other parameters. In other words,
node values are calculated even if the other parameters are set to prevent
it. To avoid overriding other node initialization parameters, set the
Extrapolation Distance value to 0.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Refinements
Grid refinement is the process of cutting the gridding interval in half and
computing the new intermediate grid values from the original grid
values (also called resampling). When combined with grid flexing, this
process can substantially reduce gridding time because resampling and
flexing are significantly faster than calculating initial node values.
You can compare the process of starting coarse and refining to building
a regional surface form, then adding the local detail to it. The more
refinements you do, the more general that regional starting surface is.
More refinements can help create a better grid if there is a strong
regional component or if the data have large void areas that a coarse grid
could easily model.
Refinements can cause problems with grids that use a large number of
faults or have a few closely spaced faults. Make the initial grid
increment small enough to place a grid node between fault segments.

Flexing Parameters
Flexing, sometimes called filtering or relaxation, is used to
simultaneously smooth the grid and tie it to the data. Flexings primary
purpose is to remove small surface irregularities in the initial surface
that are not supported by data. These irregularities are put in the surface
during initialization and are not desirable in the final surface model.
Flexing parameters are available in Point Gridding Plus, Point Gridding,
Contour Gridding, Trendform Gridding, Line Gridding Plus, Line
Gridding, and the Flexing Modeling menu options.
These parameters are described in detail with the final gridding method
in the section Flexing starting on page 520.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Point Gridding Plus

Enter from Modeling in the

Z-MAP Plus window

Select input control point file.

Choose a Z-field to grid from the drop-down list.

Select a Fault File name, if one is associated with the data file.

Select the fault field.

Select the Pre-computed Fault Polygon file, optional.

Choose a Point Gridding Plus algorithm.

Optional: Choose a control grid.

Name output files and select destination MFD.

Set other Advanced parameters as needed, such as

Data Hull, Fault Dip Angle, and Weighting.

Yes Do you want to No

flex the grid?

Is algorithm
Set flexing parameters. No Yes
Projected
Slopes?
Apply

Select additional
Save and return to the fields.
Z-MAP Plus window.

Point Gridding Plus Workflow

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Overview
Point Gridding Plus has the functions available in Point Gridding, with
additional features that enhance the geologic accuracy of faulted
structure models. To display the Point Gridding Plus dialog box, click
the Point Gridding Plus icon (shown at left) or select Modeling Point
Gridding Plus in the Z-MAP Plus window. Use Point Gridding Plus in
combination with Profile Contouring to create high quality maps of
faulted surfaces.
Details about the parameters found on each of the Point Gridding Plus
dialog box tabs is available in the browser-based Help system. To
display this information, click the Help button in the Point Gridding
Plus dialog box. The remainder of this topic contains conceptual
information to help you achieve the best results with the program.

You can use Point Gridding Plus to perform these tasks:

Grid randomly distributed point data (such as well data or seismic
data) with or without faults.
Build extremely accurate models of faulted horizons, given the
fault geometry data.
Model fault faces that cut a horizon, given the fault geometry data.

Point Gridding Plus has the following improved model interpretation

features:
directionally biased gridding
additional ways to specify which grid nodes are initialized
Kriging capability

Support utilities are also available, including these utilities:

export to Z-MAP Plus, a SeisWorks utility
Fault Polygon Shrinker
Fault Locator Circle
Profile Contouring

This next topics describe Point Gridding Plus and its capabilities,
including information about these subjects:
Honoring Fault Geometry in Point Gridding Plus on page 396
General features, starting on page 397
Point Gridding Plus Support Utilities on page 398

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

This discussion is followed by a description of Point Gridding Plus.

E
RFAC
T SU
FAUL

X
BED BED
X

Key:
AE= projected vertical separation of beds
AC= throw
CB= polygon gap
(Tearpock and Bischke 1991. Published with the permission of the authors.)

Fault Movement Terminology

Honoring Fault Geometry in Point Gridding Plus

Point Gridding Plus was originally developed to help geoscientists
accurately incorporate fault geometry data into geologic structure
models. The process expects input fault data to be in a centerline fault
format; this means that the dataset must contain X, Y, Segment ID,
Vertical Separation*, Fault Polygon Gap** and Dip Angle fields. Given
vertical separation and one of the other variables of either dip or fault
polygon gap, you can compute the missing variable. For example, if you
determine vertical separation by correlating logs and find missing
sections, and you assume that the fault strike approximately follows the
digitized fault traces, the program automatically computes accurate fault
polygons.
During grid initialization, the program searches across faults for data
points to use for initializing grid node values. Data points on the other
side of a fault trace are adjusted in depth by the vertical separation of the
fault trace that cuts between the data point and the grid node.
Once a centerline structure model is created, the program automatically
expands the centerline faults into fault polygons. The program fills the
grid nodes inside the fault polygons with values that provide a good
approximation of the part of the fault face that cuts the structure.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

By looking across the fault trace, Point Gridding Plus builds grids that
honor the vertical separation along the traces. As a result, a structure
model created by Point Gridding Plus has grid nodes initialized
accurately inside small fault blocks with few data points. The continuity
of structural features that are cut by faults is preserved across the fault
face. This is similar to hand contouring techniques.

Maintaining Classic Point Gridding Capabilities

Point Gridding Plus is designed to enhance classic point gridding and to
work correctly with the typical input data for point gridding. For
example, Point Gridding Plus builds structure models from point data
without faults, and builds structure models from point datasets
combined with fault polygons (cut-outs) without any fault geometry
data. As in classic point gridding, fault polygons without fault geometry
are treated as opaque barriers during grid initialization.

Gridding: Directionally Biased

Point Gridding Plus includes a biased gridding option. When the
program computes the initial value of a grid node with biased gridding,
the gridding code assigns higher weight factors to data points in the
direction of the trend than are assigned to data points in other directions.
If you use this option, you specify the strength of the desired trend and
a trend direction as an angle away from North.

Determining How Grid Nodes Are Initialized: Improved Methods

This gridding process also contains two additional methods for deciding
exactly which grid nodes are initialized:
One method computes the convex hull (the simplest complex
polygon) that encloses the data, and expands it by a specified
amount.
With the other method, the program hugs the data distribution
more closely, and may even divide it into distinct clusters. If the
data is highly clustered, this last method enables you to divide the
input data into separate data hulls and grid only the nodes in each
cluster.

Kriging
Point Gridding Plus has a kriging feature a gridding technique that
uses well-defined models of a structures spatial correlation to produce
optimal structure models. The kriging feature is designed for users who
are familiar with geostatistics.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Point Gridding Plus Support Utilities

The following support utilities are available for you to use with Point
Gridding Plus:
Export To Z-MAP Plus (a SeisWorks utility)
Fault Polygon Shrinker (a ZCL process)
Profile Contouring macro (part of Z-MAP Plus and ZCL)
Fault Locator Circle processes (part of Z-MAP Plus and ZCL)
Use the Export to Z-MAP Plus utility to copy horizons, fault polygons,
fault regulars, and cartographic data into an MFD. Once the data is in an
MFD, you can edit, grid, and contour the data. This utility automatically
creates centerline fault traces that have x, y coordinates, vertical
separation, and fault gap values. This utility does not handle intersecting
faults. You must join faults at intersection points.
Fault Shrinker is a ZCL process that automatically converts traditional
fault polygons into fault centerlines. This process automatically resolves
the center point of intersection from intersecting fault polygons. If you
provide seismic data for the target horizon, Fault Shrinker automatically
captures fault vertical separation along a fault trace from the seismic
data. This option is available by selecting Operations Faults
Shrinker.
Profile Contouring is designed to work with faulted structure models
created in Point Gridding Plus. You can use this utility to contour both
the structure model and the fault faces that cut that model. Profile
Contouring makes use of profiles created by Point Gridding Plus (data
files containing X, Y, Z, and Segment ID fields) to guide contours
making the sharp directional changes required to pass accurately from
contouring across a fault face to contouring across the structure
model.This option is available by selecting Operations Faults
Profiler.
In Point Gridding Plus, you can grid a set of closed polygons in a vertex
file, then contour and colorfill either inside or outside the polygon
boundaries.
You can use data hull polygons you create in Point Gridding Plus to
control colorfill operations in Profile Contouring.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Fault Locator Circles is a ZCL process that gives you a graphical

method for guiding an interactive interpretation of fault trace and fault
regular location, based on horizon and fault picks in vertical wells and
an estimate of the fault dip angle. This utility creates a file of circular
contours centered at each well location. An experienced geoscientist can
use fault locator circles with unfaulted horizon contour maps to make
high quality interpretations of fault traces.

Using Point Gridding Plus

Point Gridding Plus has four primary objectives:
Grid randomly distributed point data, with or without faults.
Build very accurate models of faulted horizons, given fault
geometry data.
Model the fault faces that cut a horizon, given fault geometry data.
Incorporate enhancements to point gridding that are useful with or
without fault input.
Point Gridding Plus can look across faults and use fault geometry along
fault traces during the gridding process. Point Gridding Plus enables you
to supply fault vertical displacement, and fault polygon gap or dip angle
data, to define fault geometry. The gridding process allows control point
values in one fault block to help determine grid node values in adjacent
blocks. Z-values assigned to grid nodes in the adjacent fault block are
normalized by the vertical separation of the faults separating the two
fault blocks. During grid initialization, Z-MAP Plus impresses the fault
vertical separation on the grid model, maintaining and refining this
vertical separation throughout the process of grid smoothing. When
geologic horizons are cut by normal faults, use of fault geometry data
adds significantly to the quality of gridded representations. Fault
polygon gap data or fault dip angle data combined with fault vertical
separation data can be used to produce realistic fault face
representations in gridded horizon models. While Point Gridding Plus
uses many of the same basic parameters as Point Gridding, output from
the Point Gridding Plus process does not duplicate the output of Point
Gridding. Point Gridding Plus uses improved versions of:
Least Squares Equations
Isopaching Procedures
Biharmonic Filter Edge Operators

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Fault Processing
Faults without vertical separation are treated exactly alike in the two
gridding processes, but Point Gridding Plus does not treat faults with
vertical separation as opaque barriers. Standard gridding algorithms
have difficulty with poorly initialized or undefined grid nodes inside
small fault blocks, but Point Gridding Plus does not. Point Gridding Plus
can replace the undefined grid nodes inside fault polygons
(characteristic of other gridding algorithms) with reasonable node
values modeling the fault face cutting the structure. The ease with which
Point Gridding Plus handles fault polygons can be especially useful
when you find, for example, that part of one of the horizon models
covered by your lease has ZNONs at equity determination time.
Gridding as if faults were opaque barriers produces incomplete and
inaccurate horizon models near faults for the following reasons:
Vertical separation may reverse along a fault
Small fault blocks may not be initialized
Significant surface structures may not continue across a fault

Point Gridding Plus, by contrast, can produce accurate horizon models

near faults for these reasons:
Vertical separation is consistent along faults
Small fault blocks are initialized
Significant surface structures continue across faults

Fault Geometry
Geoscientists measure fault throw, fault dip, and fault heave in a plane
perpendicular to the fault strike. Fault strike is the trend of a horizontal
line in the fault. Fault throw is the apparent vertical movement of the
fault in the plane. Fault dip is the angle of the fault face in the plane
measured down from the horizon.

Profile Contouring and Point Gridding Plus

Point Gridding Plus produces profile datasets optimized for use, in
combination with the output grid, which includes nodes that model the
fault field with Landmarks profile contouring model. Profile
contouring uses these datasets to produce accurate and visually pleasing
contour maps. By using throw gridding datasets optimized for work
with profile contouring, you can often avoid the expense of producing
and storing extremely fine-grid models.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Using Point Gridding Plus with Vertical Separation Faults

Point Gridding Plus produces the best results with fault centerlines that
have vertical separation, and fault polygon gap or fault dip. The program
automatically expands centerline faults into fault polygons after the it
creates the initial grid. Centerline faults are the most natural way to
incorporate fault geometry into a gridding algorithm. It is easy to
determine the opposite side of a centerline fault trace, but it may be
difficult to determine the opposite side of a fault polygon.

Point Gridding Plus Parameters

The Point Gridding Plus dialog box has four tabs:

Basic Tab Settings for the input data file or the control grid file to
grid and parameter values, such as which algorithm to use, how many
refinements to perform, and the name of the new grid file. The Basic tab
also displays statistics for the grid AOI and increments.
Advanced Tab Settings for smoothing and bias, data hull, fault dip
angle, and other parameters that control node initialization.
Other Outputs Settings for creating and naming any additional files
you want to create as output: expanded faults, filled faults, a grid file,
and blanked fault files.
Additional Fields Settings for using the Projected Slopes algorithm.

Basic Tab
The Point Gridding Plus: Basic tab is divided into three sections:
Input files (next topic)
Gridding Parameters (page 404)
Output (page 413)

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Input Files
The following illustration shows the options in the Input files section of
the Point Gridding Plus: Basic tab.

Control Point File

The Control Point File box value specifies the input control point file
(pointset file) to be gridded. If you click the Control Point File: Select
button, the Select Input File dialog box appears, which lists the pointset
files available in the attached MFDs (top list) and available in the
OpenWorks project (bottom list). Select a pointset file to use. The dialog
box closes immediately, and you return to the Point Gridding Plus
dialog box, which displays the specified file name in the Control Point
File box.

Z-Field Name
The Z-Field Name box value specifies the Z-field used to create the
grid. Click the Z-Field Name button and select a field from the
drop-down list. The list of Z-fields is automatically generated from the
selected control point file.

Fault File Name

If a fault file is associated with the specified control point file, click the
Fault File Name: Select button. From the dialog box that appears,
select the centerline fault file to use. The list includes all the available
fault files in the attached MFDs and in the current OpenWorks project.
The dialog box closes immediately, and you return to the Point Gridding
Plus dialog box, which displays the specified file name in the Fault File
Name box. The program uses this fault file to create fault polygons.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Fault File Fields

If the input fault file contains multiple fields for one or more data types,
click the Fault File Fields: Select button. In the Select CENTER LINE
FAULT Fields dialog box that appears, specify the data fields to use for
gridding. You can specify a field to use for the following types of data:
x, y, Seg ID, throw, dip angle, and heave.
If the fault file contains multiple fields for a data type and you do not
specify the field to use, the program uses the default setting the first
field found for the data type.
X-field Click the X-field button and select an x field to use from
the drop-down list.
Y-field Click the Y-field button and select a y field to use from
the drop-down list.
Seg I.D. Field Click the Seg I.D. Field button and select a
segment ID field to use from the drop-down list.
Throw Field Click the Throw Field button and select a delta-Z
throw field to use from the drop-down list. This field name is a
misnomer this field contains vertical separation values. This
field is required for incorporating fault geometry in Point Gridding
Plus.
Dip Angle Field Click the Dip Angle Field button and select a
dip angle field to use from the drop-down list. The dip angle
should always be greater than zero and less than or equal to 90
degrees. Either a dip angle field or a heave field is required for
Expanded Fault Computations.
Heave Field Click the Heave Field button and select a heave
field to use from the drop-down list. This field name is a
misnomer this field should contain fault polygon gap values.
Either a dip angle or heave field is required for Expanded Fault
Computations. If both a dip angle field and a heave field are
included in the input file, the heave field is the default selection,
and the dip angle field is ignored.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Gridding Parameters
The following illustration shows the options in the Gridding Parameters
section of the Point Gridding Plus: Basic tab.

Gridding Algorithm
You can choose any of ten gridding algorithms to use for the Point
Gridding Plus operation. A description of each gridding algorithm
follows.

Least Squares (default value) Each grid value is initialized by fitting

a weighted planar least squares fit to the data in a circular area around
the grid node. The grid value is the Z-value of the plane at the grid
location. This method tends to smoothly pass through data with no sharp
peaks. Overprojection is possible. It is the most frequently used gridding
method as it works well for many types of surface data.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Projected Slopes At each control point, the program computes the

local slope (strike and dip) of the surface. These may be combined with
user input slopes. Planar surfaces having these slopes are projected from
each data point into void areas. A grid nodes initial value is the average
of the distance-weighted Z-values of these planes at that node. Only data
inside a circular area around each node are used. This method tends to
exaggerate highs and lows. It is useful for monoclines where dips should
cause the surface to project above or below data values. This algorithm
requires additional parameters to be set. See Algorithms Requiring
Additional Parameter Dialogs page 422.
Weighted Average Each initial grid value is computed as the
weighted average of data in a circular area around the grid node. This
method tends to peak at highs and lows. It is considered good for
equipotential-type surfaces.
Closest Point Each initial grid value is set equal to the value of the
control point that is nearest to the grid location. This method is
sometimes called the polygon method or discrete method. Normally it is
not reasonable to flex (filter) this grid. This algorithm is applied with
moderate to poor success on average lithology data (a number at a point
represents the lithology at that point). The degree of success improves
with more and better distributed data.
Distance Sometimes referred to as Distance to Closest Point, this
algorithm produces a grid whose values are the distance from each node
to the closest data point. Normally it is not reasonable to flex (filter) this
grid. This type of grid is used extensively in computer mapping to build
masking grids. A distance grid, combined with a blanking grid
operation, places ZNONs at grid nodes beyond or within a certain
distance of data. That modified distance grid can then be used to control
where gridding is done (Control Grid) or where filtering is done
(Masking Grid). The technique is useful for updating old grids with new
data.
Isopach The gridding procedure used is almost identical to the Least
Squares/Biharmonic Gridding combination that is usually
recommended for irregularly spaced well or drill hole data. The
differences are in the treatment of zero thickness data. Otherwise the
isopaching procedure is Least Squares grid initialization followed by
Biharmonic post processing. This algorithm requires additional
parameters to be set. See Algorithms Requiring Additional Parameter
Dialogs page 422.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

The first difference is the treatment of zero thickness data that are, in
effect, replaced by Z-values that will continue the local trend of the
thickness into the zero data area. The slope of this trend establishes
where the inferred zero isopach curve will fall in the area between zero
and non-zero data.
The second difference between the Least Squares and Isopaching
procedures is the minimum allowed Z-value of the grid. In the case of
the Isopaching procedure, there is effectively no lower bound to the
Z-values of the grid. This allows the slope of the surface to continue
downwards outside the zero contour. However, the reported grid
minimum which is stored in the grid header is always zero.
Bounded Range This method is used to grid data that has an upper
and/or lower bound to the Z-values, such as Net to Gross data. It uses
the Least Squares algorithm to calculate grid node values. However,
before grid node values are computed, values of control points that are
equal to the upper limit or equal to the lower limit are replaced with
estimated values above and below the limits, respectively. The resulting
grid will contain values above and below the limits. A contour map
made from this grid will have limit contours which pass between the
limit and real-valued control points. The Bounded Gridding process can
be altered (Curve Compression Factor) so that the limit contours move
closer to, or farther from, real valued control points. This algorithm
requires additional parameters to be set. See Algorithms Requiring
Additional Parameter Dialog Boxes on page 422.
Point Density Gridding This gridding option computes the density
of data points within distance Reach of each grid node. The value
returned at each grid node location is the number of data points found
within distance Reach divided by the area of the circle with radius
Reach. The grid model created by point density gridding may be used as
a rough estimate of the confidence which should be assigned to each
grid value in a grid of the same size created using another gridding
algorithm and the same value of the Reach parameter.
Kriging Kriging is a gridding technique that uses information about
the spatial continuity of a surface. Using randomly positioned point
data, Kriging produces a statistically optimal model of the surface.
Kriging is a difficult algorithm to use correctly, but it is better when you
know certain characteristics of the target surface, and when the surface
satisfies certain hypotheses. Kriging is similar to classical Least Squares
estimation with the covariances determined from a user-defined
function. This algorithm requires additional parameters to be set. See
Algorithms Requiring Additional Parameter Dialogs page 422.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

The semivariogram is a mathematical model of the spatial continuity of

a surface or any spatially varying geologic property studied using
geostatistics. Following standard notation from probability theory, an
isotropic semivariogram for the spatially distributed variable Z is:
2
E(Z(x) Z(x + h))
S ( h ) = --------------------------------------------------
2
In this formula x stands for the X and Y coordinates of any location
in space and x+h stands for the X and Y coordinates of another point
in space h units away from x. In the isotropic case the value of S(h)
is assumed to be the same for any pair of locations separated by distance
h.
There are many standard models for semivariograms. Point Gridding
Plus supports four of the most frequently used models, each of which
requires you to specify three values: the Nugget C0, the Sill C, and the
Range R. The four semivariogram models are:
Spherical
S(h) = C0 + C[1.5(h/R) .5(h/R)]where h<R
S(h) = C0 + Cwhere h>=R
Linear
S(h) = C0 + C*h
Exponential
S(h) = C0 + C[1.exp(h/R)]where h<R
S(h) = C0 + Cwhere h>=R
Gaussian
S(h) = C0 + C[1.exp(-h /R)2]where h<R
C0 + Cwhere h>=R
Generally, semivariograms increase in value out to a distance equivalent
to the range. The fact that most semivariograms increase in value with
increasing range is equivalent to saying that the correlation between two
Z values decreases with separation between the points.
Semivariograms can be made non-isotropic by using the trend bias
option.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

To qualify for Kriging, data must be able to fit into one of three
mathematical hypotheses:
Kriging Stationary Hypothesis, where the first and second
moments of Z are independent of position
Intrinsic Hypothesis, a reduced form of the Stationary Hypothesis,
where S(H) is independent of position
Kriging Hypothesis, where deviations from the Stationary or
Intrinsic Hypotheses are acceptable only if these variations occur
beyond the practical range of the semivariogram

Random Closest The Random Closest Point algorithm models

secondary rock properties such as permeability or porosity. Other
algorithms are not well suited to modeling secondary rock properties
because they treat rock units as continuous. This method can grid a
secondary rock property throughout an area that is distributed in a
nonlinear and discontinuous fashion.
Random Closest Point collects one data point in each search octant,
subject to the standard search constraint. One of those points supplies
the z-value assigned to the grid node. The probability of a particular data
point being selected is inversely proportional to the distance between the
point and the grid node. A random number generator is used to make the
selection.

Control Grid Usage

You can use control grids to restrain an existing grid in various ways.
For example, you can use control grids to change an existing grids AOI
or grid increment for use in the Calculator or Volumetrics.
Use the Control Grid Usage options in the Point Gridding Plus: Basic
tab to specify whether and how to use a control grid.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

First select the control grid method from the drop-down menu. Next,
select the file to use as the control grid from the Select Input File dialog
box that appears.

Flex Only and Refinement Settings

If you choose the Flex Only method, the Refinements value is automatically
set to 0. For all other methods, the Refinements default value is 1.

Control grid is a common gridding parameter used by many gridding

methods. For more information about Control Grid Usage, see
page 389.

ZNON Value
The program uses a default value of 1.000000e+30 for null (ZNON)
points.

To change the setting, triple-click the ZNON Value box contents in the
Point Gridding Plus: Basic tab. Enter a value from the keyboard. Use a
null value that is far outside any values found in the input data.

Search Radius
In the Search Radius box of the Point Gridding Plus: Basic tab, enter
the radius for drawing a circle around the grid node being calculated.
Data points inside the circle are eligible for use in calculating the nodes
Z-value (expressed in map units). Typically, only the closest data points
are actually used. The default value is half the size of the grid.

Reduce Search Radius to Improve Performance

Most users have found that, for large volumes of data, reducing the Search
Radius will speed up the gridding process dramatically.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Search Radius is a parameter shared by many gridding methods. (For

more information, see page 392.)

Refinements
Each refinement pass halves the grid increment, which produces finer
detail in the map.

In the Refinements box of the Point Gridding Plus: Basic tab, enter the
number of refinement passes you want the program to perform. The
initial grid increment is used to build the initial grid. The refinement
passes are then performed, with the grid resampled at half of the
previous increment value, after which the grid is flexed. This process is
repeated for the specified number of refinement passes until the final
grid increment is reached. The default Refinements value is 1, and the
range of valid numbers is 0 to 5.
The Refinements setting is common to many types of gridding methods,
and is described further on page 393.

Extrapolation Distance
Use the Extrapolation Distance box in the Point Gridding Plus: Basic
tab to specify the width of an extrapolation corridor around the data
perimeter. Grid nodes that fall inside the corridor are initialized with
values extrapolated from the nearby data points.

The Extrapolation Distance value is expressed in map units. The default

value equals the default Search Radius value (half the grid size). The
Extrapolation Distance value cannot exceed the length of the Search
Radius value.
Extrapolation Distance is commonly used for a number of grid types.
(For more information, see page 392.)

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Smoothness Modulus
Use the Smoothness Modulus box in the Point Gridding Plus: Basic tab
to specify the extent to which you want to smooth the grid. Note that the
more smoothing you apply, the less the grid honors the data points.

In the Smoothness Modulus box, you can enter any value between 0
and 1. The default setting is 0.2. With a value of 0 (zero), if smoothing
pushes the surface away from the data, the program brings it back to
exactly honor the data. A value of 1 (one) produces the smoothest grid,
without regard for precisely fitting the grid to the data. With the default
value of 0.2, if smoothing pushes the surface away from the data, the
program brings it back at least 20% of the distance between the surface
and the data point. The Smoothness Modulus value affects the grid
nodes that are within 5 or 6 grid increments from the data.
To achieve an optimum trade-off between accuracy and smoothness,
you may need to produce several test grids that each use a different
smoothness modulus. The Smoothness Modulus is often used with
seismic data, with its value shifted towards 1. The effect is to remove
some of the wobble from contours that cross or run along seismic lines.
The Smoothness Modulus parameter is common to a number of gridding
methods. (For more information, see page 525.)

XMin, XMax, YMin, YMax

The XMin, XMax, YMin, and YMax values in the Point Gridding Plus:
Basic tab specify the AOI of the output grid. These values are the
minimum and maximum X and Y coordinate values of the output grid.

The default values are derived from the input data file. The default AOI
covers an area that is slightly larger than the smallest rectangle that
contains the input data (approximately 10% larger than the X/Y ranges).
If you specify a control grid, the control grid is used to supply these
values.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

You may want to round the values up to more even numbers. Do not
make the AOI any larger than required, however. The added grid nodes
increase the grid size and gridding execution time. In addition, remote
grid node values are more likely to have unrealistic values.

ZMin and ZMax

These values represent the upper and lower Z-values that appear in the
final grid.

These values default to numbers that are slightly smaller and larger
(10% of Z-range), respectively, than the smallest and largest data value
for the Z-field being gridded. This allows a small amount of overshoot
of grid values above or below data values. If you are using a control grid,
the control grid boundaries serve as the upper and lower boundary limits
for the Bounded Range algorithm.

XInc and YInc Grid

These values represent the gridding increment taken from the input
control point file. Grid increments represent the distance in the X and Y
direction respectively across the grid cell. These distances define the X
and Y gridding increments for your grid.

The increments default to the same value in both directions. If you are
using a control grid, these values default to those of the control grid.
For more information about X and Y gridding increments, see X and Y
Gridding Increments on page 493.

Experimenting with Different Increments

Many users find that altering grid increments has the most significant effect on
surface form and honoring data.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Output Panel

Output Location
From the drop-down Output Location list, select the attached MFD to
use for storing the grid (or use the OpenWorks project).

Output Grid Name

Name of the new grid file. These names can be up to 24 characters in
length, and can contain interval blanks. The default name supplied by
Z-MAP Plus adds a G/ to the value of the Z-field. This field is editable.

Number of Rows and Columns

As you set parameters in Point Gridding Plus, these fields display an
estimate of the size of the new grid. You can not change these values
directly. They are provided for your convenience.

Advanced Tab
The Advanced tab has two panels: Smoothing and Other Controls.

Smoothing Panel
The Smoothing panel parameters control grid flexing. You can use
flexing (sometimes called filtering or relaxation) to simultaneously
smooth the grid and tie it to the data. Flexings primary purpose is to
remove small surface irregularities in the initial surface that are not
supported by data. These irregularities are put in the surface during
initialization and are not desirable in the final surface model.
Many gridding methods have smoothing parameters. For more details
about each of these parameters, see page 520.

Flexing Type
The Flexing Type button shows which type of flexing is specified
whether flexing is performed with a Biharmonic filter, Laplacian filter,
both filters, or no filter.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Control of Passes
Use the Control of Passes setting to specify one of these conditions:
FLEX = NUMPASS (default value) Continue flexing until the
Number of Flex Passes value is met.
FLEX <= NUMPASS Stop flexing as soon as either the Cutoff
or Number of Flex Passes value is met.

Cutoff
In the Cutoff box, enter a number to use as a test value to determine
when to stop flexing. Flexing continues until the amount of change from
one pass to the next is smaller than the Cutoff value. The default Cutoff
value is 0.25, which typically results in three to six flexing passes.

Number of Flex Passes

In the Number of Flex Passes box, enter the number of flexing passes to
execute (if the Control of Passes setting is FLEX = NUMPASS) or the
maximum number of flexing passes to execute (if the Control of Passes
button reads FLEX <= NUMPASS). The default value is 10.

Other Controls Panel

Data Hull
Set the type of Data Hull on the Advanced tab under the Other Controls
panel. Data hull is a shared parameter, for a description of the different
settings, see Data Hulls on page 390. For Concave Hulls you also
need to set the following parameters.

Radius (for Concave Hull 1 and Concave Hull 2)

For Concave Hull 1 and Concave Hull 2, you are required to enter a
value for the radius of your data hull. The value set for this radius draws
the circle used to calculate which nodes are initialized and which treated
as null values. All grid nodes beyond the hull are blanked. A larger
radius stays closer to the outside boundary of the data and a smaller
radius will tend to move inside the original boundary. Then, the
Extrapolation setting is used to draw the actual hull around the
initialized data points.

Hull Radius is Different From the Search Radius

This parameter is different from the Search Radius parameter, which is set in
the Primary Parameters dialog box.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Output Data Hull File Name

Enter the name of the output data hull file.

Output Data Hull File

This is the destination MFD to use for storing the output data hull file.

X Expand and Y Expand

Enter numbers (representing the distance in the X and Y direction
beyond the edge of the grid) that you want Point Gridding to search for
data when calculating a nodes value. These default to 0.

Trend or Bias Ratio

Biased gridding adds a uniform directional bias to grid models created
by any of the gridding algorithms supported by Point Gridding Plus
except closest point gridding, distance to closest point gridding, and
point density gridding. Ratio is the strength of the trend. Generally,
Ratio should have a value of 5 or larger to have any marked impact on
the grid model.

Trend or Bias Angle

Biased gridding requires you to specify a bias direction measured
clockwise away from North.

Trend Bias Angle Units

Biased gridding requires you to specify a bias direction measured
clockwise away from North. The angle may be measured in units of
degrees or radians.

Fault Dip Angle Unit

The units indicate whether fault dip is measured in Degrees or Radians.
Almost always, fault dip angles are measured in radians.

Maximum # of Fault Crossings

In the data collection phase of gridding, this number refers to the
maximum number of fault crossings allowed between a data point and a
grid node.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Minimum Total Points

Enter the minimum number of points that must be used to calculate a
grid nodes value. If fewer points than this are available, then a ZNON
will be assigned to that grid node. The default is 1. This means that if
only one data point lies inside the search radius, the grid node will be
assigned the value of that data point. The Extrapolation Distance
parameter may need to be set to 0, since its value will override the
effects of this parameter.

Desired Points Per Sector

Enter the maximum number of points from each sector that can be used
to calculate a grid nodes value. This defaults to 4 and the range of valid
numbers is 1 to 8.

The circle, defined by the search radius, and centered over the grid node
being calculated is divided into 8 sectors. To do this lines running NS,
EW, N45E, and N45W are drawn. Each piece of pie defined by these
lines is a sector.

Using only a certain number of data points from each sector reduces the
influence of clustered data. For example, assume 40 points are tightly
clustered in the NNE sector, one point is in the SSW sector, the 40 and
the 1 are similar distance form the node, and that all are used to calculate
the nodes value. The average surface value in the NNE sector will be
40 times more influential in defining the nodes value than will the
isolated point in the SSW sector, even though the 40 and the 4 represent
nearly the same amount of information about the surface.
By using a maximum of 4 points per sector the above example would
change from a 40 to 1 influence to a 4 to 1 influence and a more
representative Z-value would be calculated for the node.

Minimum Number of Sectors

Enter a number representing the minimum number of sectors that must
contain data before a grid nodes value can be calculated. If fewer than
this number of sectors have data, then a ZNON is assigned to the grid
node. The default is 1 and the range of valid numbers is 1 to 8. The
Extrapolation Distance parameter may need to be set to 0, since its value
will override the effects of this parameter. For a definition of what
sectors are, see Desired Points Per Sector on page 416.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

This is one of the primary parameters for controlling how far

extrapolation is carried away from the data. Increasing this to 3 will
prevent nodes from being calculated in the corners of the grid,
increasing to 4 will create a large convex hull around the data, and 5, 6,
7 and 8 will create concave hulls around the data that fit tighter and
tighter to the data. This extrapolation control method will not create
holes (ZNON areas) in void areas in the middle of data. The other
parameter commonly used to control extrapolations is Search Radius.

Weighting
Controls whether data influence, when calculating a nodes value, falls
off quickly or slowly with distance from the grid node. Possible choices
for this parameter include:
Sharp Weighting (default value). This gives very large weights to
close data. The weight decreases roughly as an inverse squared function.
This type of weighting should be used unless you are dealing with very
rough (noisy) data.
Smooth Weighting. This allows even very distant data to have a
significant influence on a grid nodes value. It will produce a smooth
grid from rough or noisy data. However, the results will not necessarily
honor the data.

Uniform Weighting. There is no weighting function applied to the

data. Every point is assigned the same weight. In determining the value
of a grid node, the values of all points have equal weight.

Geoscientists will choose Uniform Weighting when all control points

have a very high noise level. When all control points have a very high
noise level, the best possible grid can by produced by simply averaging
the values of control points inside the search radius of each grid node.
When using Uniform Weighting you probably do not want to smooth
the grid using either the biharmonic or the Laplacian filters, since both
filters will tend to tie the grid back to the individual data points.

Report Type
You have three choices concerning the extent of the processing analysis
report: None, Partial, and Full.
None indicates that you do not wish to see the report.
Partial will give you a summary report.
Full will give you a full report.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Pre-Computed Fault Polygon File

Z-MAP Plus can compute expanded fault polygons for you if your
centerline fault file contains fields for either dip angle or heave. If you
have built your own expanded faults polygon file and would like the
program to use it instead of its own expanded fault polygon, this dialog
box allows you to select and use that user-supplied fault polygon.

Other Outputs Tab

Point Gridding Plus can generate several types of fault grids. The
following illustration shows these different types of fault grids and the
file that describe them.

Centerline Fault
To create a fault polygon from this
file, the centerline file must contain
x, y, seg ID, Heave, and Throw fields.

Filled Fault
Interpolates z-values along the edge of
the polygon;thus contouring across the polygon
to join contour levels is possible.

Expanded Fault
Defines a polygon filled with null
or ZNON values.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

To generate Expanded or Filled fault grid or files, designate a name in

the appropriate field on the Other Outputs tab. If you have supplied the
necessary fault geometry information, Point Gridding Plus generates the
file

Expanded Fault Panel

Expanded/Blanked Fault Grid Location and Grid File Name

In an expanded (or blanked) grid file, the horizon model is defined up to
the fault polygons. The grid nodes inside the fault polygons are ZNONs.
This file should be contoured using standard faulted contouring.

Expanded Fault Location and Fault File Name

Data that describes the grid is stored in the expanded fault file. To create
a fault file, specify an attached MFD (or use the OpenWorks project) to
store the new file and specify the file name.

Fault Filled Panel

Fault Filled Grid File Name and Location

In this file, the horizon model is defined up to the fault polygons. Grid
nodes inside the fault polygons are assigned Z-values to model the fault
face. This file should be contoured using the Profile Contouring Option.

Fault Profile Data File Name and Master File

This is the name of the output fault file containing profiles along the
expanded fault traces. The file produces fault polygons with Z-values to
model the intersection between the faults and the horizon. In order for
this file to be produced, the centerline fault file must contain both a
throw field, and a dip angle or heave field. The Output Fault Profile is
required for profile contouring (Features Contouring Line/
Label Tab Gradient Profile Discontinuity field).

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

ZNON Filled - Optional Panel

This is the name of the file that has ZNONs in throw, dip angle, or heave
fields filled in by linear interpolation. This file is useful for data
analysis.

Data Used in Gridding - Optional Panel

This file is an output version of the input control point file. If you do not
wish to output this file, leave the file name blank.
For the following gridding algorithms, the output data file will hold only
the input data actually used in gridding:
Least Squares
Weighted Average
Closest Point
Distance
Point Density
For these algorithms, the output data file eliminates points with ZNON
Z-values and points too far outside the Area of Interest (AOI) to be used
in gridding.
For the Projected Slopes Algorithm, this file holds the input data. In
addition, the output data file contains the DZ/DX and DZ/DY fields
used in gridding.
For Isopach or Bounded Range Gridding, this file holds the input data.
In addition, the output data file contains the modified bounding
Z-values.
For each output file to be produced by your execution of Point Gridding
Plus, select one of the attached MFDs or the scratch file. When you click
the parameter box, a popup menu appears, listing the MFDs and a
scratch file attached to the Z-MAP Plus session. Select the destination
MFD for storing the output file.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Additional Fields Tab

This tab allows you to supply values for DZ/DX, DZ/DY and Weight.
This selection is necessary only when:
You have chosen the Projected Slopes Algorithm and Expanded as
the type of data for Projected Slopes.
If more than one DZ/DX, DZ/DY, or Weight field is on the dataset.
If only one is present, the program will find and use it.
If the type of data is Normal, Z-MAP Plus uses the Projected Slopes
Algorithm to calculate DZ/DX, DZ/DY, and assign a weight of one to
each data point on the grid.

DZ/DX Field
This field represents the change in Z divided by the change in X, or the
first derivative in the X-direction. A list of DZ/DX Fields on your Input
Control Point file appears. Point to and click the field you want.

DZ/DY Field
This field represents the change in Z divided by the change in Y, or the
first derivative in the Y-direction. A list of DZ/DY fields on your Input
Control Point file appears. Point to and click the field you want.

GRADIENT-WEIGHT Field
The Projected Slopes Algorithm assigns weights to the Z-values inside
a circular area around a node before averaging them. Z-values closest to
the grid nodes receive the greater weight. If you assign your own
weights, higher numbers receive the greater weight.

Data Type
Normal. This data type is appropriate for data that does not contain
gradient information (X, Y, Z).
Expanded. This data type is appropriate for data that does contain
gradient information and weights (X, Y, Z, DZ/DX, DZ/DY, W).
If your data type is expanded, you will have the option to supply
information about additional fields.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Algorithms Requiring Additional Parameter Dialog Boxes

Projected Slopes Isopach Bounded Range Kriging

Select Control Grid Usage Select Data Hull Select Fault Dip Angle

A parameter dialog box appears, matching the selected gridding algorithm

Projected Slopes Isopach Bounded Range Kriging

Selected data type Compression factor Upper and lower Z-bound Semivariogram

Boundary tolerance Semivariogram nugget,

sill, and range

Compression factor X direction block

Y direction block

Output error file

Choose a control grid (optional)

Save and return to Point Gridding

Plus window

Point Gridding Plus Algorithms Requiring Parameter Dialog

Boxes Workflow

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Depending on which Point Gridding Plus Algorithm you have chosen, a

parameter option for that algorithm may or may not appear on your
screen. The following algorithms do allow additional user-supplied
parameter values:
Projected Slopes
Isopach
Bounded Range
Kriging

Isopach Parameter Options

The Isopach Parameter Option asks for the Compression Factor.
Compression Factor is also used for the Bounded Range Algorithm.

Compression Factor
The value entered for the compression factor will force the boundary
between negative and positive grid node values (the zero contour when
mapped) either closer to or farther from real valued data points
(nonzeros). The zero thickness contour will be drawn closer to the
zero-valued data when this parameter is reduced during Isopach
gridding. The zero contour will be drawn closer to the non-zero data if
the compression factor is increased. The default (2) causes the curve to
pass approximately halfway between zero and non-zero data. The
allowed range is 0 to 5.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Bounded Range Parameters Options

This option allows you to specify:
Upper and Lower Z-bound
Boundary Tolerance
Compression Factor

Upper Z-bound
This number represents the upper bound in Z of the bounded range.

Lower Z-bound
This number represents the lower bound in Z of the bounded range.

Boundary Tolerance
Enter a value that will be used to test each control points Z-value to see
if it is close to a boundary limit (Z-minimum and Z-maximum).
Z-values in this tolerance of the upper or lower limits are treated as if
their values were equal to those limits. The tolerance defaults to zero.

An example of Boundary Tolerance

When gridding Net to Gross, the lower and upper limits might be zero
and one and the Boundary Tolerance .03. Then, any points with
Z-values between .03 and .03 are treated as if they were zero, and
points with Z-values between .97 and 1.03 are treated as if their values
were one. Because these control points are now considered to be at the
limits, they will be replaced with estimated values that are beyond the
limits before the grid is calculated.

Compression Factor
The value entered for the compression factor will force the boundary
between negative and positive grid node values (the zero contour when
mapped) either closer to or farther from real valued data points
(nonzeros). The zero thickness contour will be drawn closer to the
zero-valued data when this parameter is reduced during Isopach
gridding. The zero contour will be drawn closer to the non-zero data if
the compression factor is increased. The default (2) causes the curve to
pass approximately halfway between zero and non-zero data. The
allowed range is 0 to 5.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Kriging Algorithm - Parameter Options

Select Kriging algorithm

Select Data Hull and Fault Dip Angle

(for expanded faults)

Kriging parameter dialog box appears

Select semivariogram

Spherical Linear Exponential Gaussian

Enter values for semivariogram nugget, sill and range

Enter values for X and Y direction block (usually 0)

Enter name for error grid file and select MFD

Save and return to

Z-MAP Plus
main menu

Point Gridding Plus, Kriging Workflow

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

There are eight parameters for the Kriging algorithm:

Semivariogram
Semivariogram Nugget
Semivariogram Sill
Semivariogram Range
X-direction Block
Y-direction Block
Output Kriging Error Grid File Name
Output Kriging Error Grid File Master File

Semivariogram
The semivariogram is a mathematical model of the spatial continuity of
a surface or any spatially varying geologic property studied using
geostatistics. Following standard notation from probability theory, an
isotropic semivariogram for the spatially distributed variable Z is:
2
E(Z(x) Z(x + h))
S ( h ) = --------------------------------------------------
2
In this formula x stands for the X and Y coordinates of any location
in space and x+h stands for the X and Y coordinates of another point
in space h units away from x. In the isotropic case the value of S(h)
is assumed to be the same for any pair of locations separated by distance
h.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

There are many standard models for semivariograms. Point Gridding

Plus supports four of the most frequently used models, each of which
requires you to specify three values: the Nugget C0, the Sill C, and the
Range R.

Semivariogram Models
The four semivariogram models are:
Spherical
S(h) = C0 + C[1.5(h/R) 0.5(h/R)]where h<R
S(h) = C0 + Cwhere h>=R
Linear
S(h) = C0 + C*h
Exponential
S(h) = C0 + C[1.exp(h/R)]where h<R
S(h) = C0 + Cwhere h>=R
Gaussian
S(h) = C0 + C[1.exp(h /R) 2]where h<R
S(h) = C0 + Cwhere h>=R
Generally, semivariograms increase in value out to a distance equivalent
to the range. The fact that most semivariograms increase in value with
increasing range is equivalent to saying that the correlation between two
Z values decreases with separation between the points.
Semivariograms can be made non-isotropic by using the Trend Bias
option.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Semivariogram Nugget
The Nugget is one of the three variables which defines the
semivariogram when using the Kriging capability provided by Point
Gridding Plus. The Nugget is the sum of measurement noise and
localized fracture effects which reduce the accuracy of any single
measured Z-value. A positive Nugget implies that a grid model created
using Kriging may not exactly honor the input Z values which are used
to define the model.

Semivariogram Nugget

Semivariogram Sill
In the picture above, 10 on the Y-axis represents the Nugget or the
distance between data points calculated by the Semivariogram when the
empirical distance is zero.
The Sill = the Nugget + 100, or 110.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Semivariogram Range
The Range is the user-specified distance between any two points in
space at which the correlation between the values of the two points is
assumed to reach a fixed and uniform minimum value. Range is one of
the three variables which define a semivariogram and must be specified
only when using the Kriging capability provided by Point Gridding.

X-direction Block
This is the block dimension in the X-direction used during Kriging. If
X-direction block value is zero, then point kriging is performed.

Y-direction Block
This is the block dimension in the Y-direction used during Kriging. If
Y-direction block value is zero, then point kriging is performed.

Output Kriging Error Grid File Name and Master File

The kriging error grid shows the estimated standard deviation of the
kriging horizon model. The Error Grid can show where more control is
needed or where the Kriging model cannot be trusted.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Point Gridding

Enter from Modeling in Z-MAP Plus

window

Default Point Gridding Operator Controlled Point Gridding

Select control point data file Select control point data file

Select faults and fault Z-field if required Select Z-field

Name output and choose algorithm Faults

Apply Point Gridding Name output and choose algorithm

Review Results/Gridding Set primary parameters & control grid use

Set secondary parameters

NOTE: Bold borders

indicate steps you must
Set flexing parameters
perform the step.

*Use only with

Choose control grid file
Projected Slopes
Gridding and if more
than one DZ/DX, DZ/
DY, and/or Weight field Select additional fields*
is present.

Review data distribution statistics

Apply Point Gridding

Save and return to

Z-MAP Plus window Review Results/Gridding Report

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Point Gridding Workflow

Overview
Point Gridding uses nearby x,y,z data to calculate values of nodes in a
grid. Any data set that has values at x,y locations and would be
reasonable to contour by hand can be gridded with this option. Input data
are referred to as randomly distributed, which means they need not be
digitized contours or line oriented data (seismic). However, data in those
formats are acceptable.
Point Gridding allows you to specify:
size and position of the grid
how far to look for data
upper and lower limits for the grid
whether faults are used
how far from data to calculate node values
You can also force the size of a grid to match that of another grid or pass
values of a previously built grid through to the grid being built.
Grids are built in three stages:
data and parameter input
grid initialization
post processing (flexing)
Data and Parameter Input sets the control point file, Z-field, fault file,
and control grid to be used during the gridding process.
Grid Initialization computes the initial node values. You select from
nine algorithms. Each algorithm produces different results and is
designed for different data and geologic problems. The default is a Least
Squares algorithm. Once an algorithm has been selected, you may set
the primary and secondary gridding parameters and the data distribution
parameters before continuing to the Post Processing phase.
Post Processing refines and adjusts the initial values to more closely
honor data and to smooth the surface. To do this the grid is refined by
dividing the X and Y grid increments by 2, once or several times. Before
and after each refinement the surface (grid nodes) is filtered to smooth
it and tie to the data. You control how much refinement, smoothing, and
honoring of data is done. The default is one refinement and use of a
Biharmonic filter. A gridding report is output to the processing window
once this option is applied.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Control Points
A list of files is presented. Point to and click the file you want. A field
will be selected from this file and used as input when the option
executes. The grid node values will be based on the control points
(usually depth values from wells).

Z-field
A list of fields is presented. Point to and click the field you want.
Z-values in this field will be used when this option executes. Z-values
are usually depth or time values.

Faults
A list of fault files is presented. Point to and click the fault file you want.
Faults are needed only when building surfaces cut by faults. When faults
are used, grid nodes are calculated using only data located on the same
side of the faults as the node. A fault file must have been previously
constructed in order to be available for this option.

Output Grid Name and Algorithm

Use this dialog box to specify the following input values:
name of the grid
MFD for storing the grid
gridding method (Moving Least Squares, Moving Weighted
Averages, Projected Slopes, etc.)
boundary tolerance (Bounded Range algorithm)
compression factor (Bounded Range and Isopach algorithms)
type of data (Projected Slopes algorithm)
Normally, you will go to this dialog box and change the grid name and
output MFD.

Output Grid Name

Enter the name of the grid to be created; this name may be up to 24
characters long and may contain internal blanks.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Output Grid Master File

When you click the parameter box, a popup menu appears, listing the
attached MFDs and scratch file. Select the MFD to use for storing the
output file.

Algorithm Choices
Select the algorithm to use when Point Gridding executes. Possible
choices for this parameter include:
Least Squares
Projected Slopes
Weighted Average
Closest Point
Distance
Isopach
Bounded Range
Linear Trend
Moving Plate
These choices are discussed in the following text.
Least Squares (default) Each grid value is computed by fitting a
weighted planar least squares fit to the data in a circular area around the
grid node. The grid value is the Z-value of the plane at the grid location.
This method tends to smoothly pass through data with no sharp peaks
and over projection is possible. It is the most frequently used gridding
method as it works well for many types of surface data.
Projected Slopes At each control point, the program computes the
local slope (strike and dip) of the surface. These may be combined with
user-input slopes. Planar surfaces having these slopes are projected from
each data point into void areas. A grid nodes value is the average of the
distance-weighted Z-values of these planes at that node. Only data
inside a circular area around each node are used. This method tends to
exaggerate highs and lows. It is useful for monoclines where dips should
cause the surface to project above or below data values.
Weighted Average Each initial grid value is computed as the
weighted average of data in a circular area around the grid node. This
method flattens towards the regional average and consequently tends to
peak at highs and lows. It is considered good for equipotential type
surfaces.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Closest Point Each initial grid value is set equal to the value of the
control point that is nearest to the grid location. This method is
sometimes called the polygon method or discrete method. Normally it is
not reasonable to flex (filter) this grid. This algorithm is applied with
moderate to poor success on average lithology data (a number at a point
represents the lithology at that point). The degree of success improves
with more and better distributed data.
Distance Sometimes referred to as Distance to Closest Point, this
algorithm produces a grid whose values are the distance from each node
to the closest data point. Normally it is not reasonable to flex (filter) this
grid. This type of grid is used extensively in computer mapping to build
masking grids. A distance grid combined with a blanking grid operation
places ZNONs (null data) at grid nodes beyond or within a certain
distance of data. That modified distance grid can then be used to control
where gridding is done (Control Grid) or where filtering is done
(Masking Grid). The technique is useful for updating old grids with new
data.
Isopach This algorithm uses the Least Squares algorithm to calculate
node values. However, before node values are computed, every zero
valued control point is replaced with a negative estimated value. The
resulting grid will contain negatives where there is no thickness. A
contour map made from this grid will have a zero contour which passes
between the non-zero and zero control points. The Isopach Gridding
process can be altered (Curve Compression Factor) so that this contour
moves closer to, or farther from, real valued control points.
Bounded Range This method is used to grid data that has an upper
and/or lower bound to the Z-values, such as Net to Gross data. It uses
the Least Squares algorithm to calculate grid node values. However,
before grid node values are computed, values of control points that are
equal to the upper limit or equal to the lower limit are replaced with
estimated values above and below the limits, respectively. The resulting
grid contains values above and below the limits. A contour map made
from this grid has limit contours that pass between the limit and
real-valued control points. The Bounded Gridding process can be
altered (Curve Compression Factor) so that the limit contours move
closer to, or farther from, real valued control points.
Linear Trend This is the Moving Least Squares algorithm, except
that all data are weighted equally (Moving Least Squares weights by
distance). For unfaulted data, this has the effect of building a first order
trend grid. With faults, this algorithm produces first order trends in fault
blocks but will create very rough transitions from one block to the next.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Moving Plate This is the Moving Weighted Averages algorithm,

except that all data are weighted equally (Weighted Average weights by
distance). For unfaulted data this has the effect of building a flat surface
at the average value of all the data. With faults this produces flat
surfaces in fault blocks but creates very rough transitions from one
block to the next.

Boundary Tolerance
This parameter is used only when you use the Bounded Range
algorithm. Enter a value to used for testing each control points Z-value
to see if it is close to a boundary limit (Z-minimum and Z-maximum).
Z-values within this tolerance of the upper or lower limits are treated as
if their values were equal to the limits. The default tolerance is 0.0.
Example
If when gridding Net to Gross the lower and upper limits are 0 and 1 and
the Boundary Tolerance is 0.03, any points with Z-values between - 0.03
and 0.03 are assigned a value of 0 and points with Z-values between 0.97
and 1.03 are given a value of 1. Consequently, these control points are
considered to be at the limits, and as a result they will be replaced with
estimated values that are beyond the limits before the grid is calculated.
(See the preceding discussion of Bounded Range under the Algorithm
parameter.)

Compression Factor
This parameter is used only when using the Isopach or Bounded Range
algorithm. This discussion is presented in terms of the Isopach
algorithm but applies equally to the upper and lower limits of the
Bounded Range algorithm.
Enter a value to be used. This value will force the boundary between
negative and positive grid node values (the zero contour when mapped)
either closer to or further from real valued data points (non-zeros). The
zero thickness contour will be drawn closer to the zero valued data when
this parameter is reduced during Isopach gridding. The zero contour will
be drawn closer to the non-zero data if the Compression Factor is
increased. The default (2) causes the curve to pass approximately
halfway between zero and non-zero data. The allowed range is 0 to 5.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

How Compression Factor Works

The Compression Factor actually alters the negative values that replace
zeros in the data file before gridding. The replacement values are
calculated using an equation of the form:

Zr = 1 Zc ( CF 2 ) DRATIO
Where:
Zr = Zero replacement value
Zc = Z-value of the real valued control point that is closest to the zero
valued control point being replaced
CF = Compression Factor
DRATIO = Distance between Zr and Zc divided by the average Control
Point spacing

Type of Data
This parameter only has effect when using the Projected Slopes
algorithm. It controls whether Point Gridding calculates dip in the X and
Y directions (first derivatives in these directions) for each data point or
whether you provide these values in fields of your data file. Possible
choices for this parameter include:
Normal. You are not providing this data and would like the Point
Gridding, Projected Slopes algorithm to calculate DZ/DX, DZ/DY and
use a weight of one for each data point.
Expanded. You have an expanded data file which contains DZ/DX,
DZ/DY, and Weight for the Z-field to be gridded. The Point Gridding
Projected Slopes algorithm will use the first DZ/DX field, DZ/DY field,
and Weight field it encounters. If some values for these fields are ZNON
(null data value), Point Gridding will calculate them.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Primary Parameters

After initializing grid,

enter from Primary
Parameters on Point

Enter coordinates for Area of

Enter X and Y grid increments

Enter minimum and maximum Z-values

Enter search radius value

Proceed to
Secondary
Parameters on

Point Gridding Primary Parameters Workflow

The Primary Parameters dialog box allows you to specify:
X and Y limits
X and Y grid increments
maximum and minimum Z-values
distance to search when looking for data
how control grids are used (if used).
Defaults can be automatically calculated for all of these parameters.
Altering grid increments most significantly effects how well the data is
honored and the form of the surface. For large volumes of data, reducing
the search radius will speed up the gridding process dramatically.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Minimum and Maximum X and Y Coordinates

Enter values to be used as the minimum and maximum X and Y
coordinates for the output grid. The default values for these parameters
delineate an area that is slightly larger (10% of X or Y range) than the
smallest rectangle that contains your data. If you are using a control grid,
then these values default to those of the control grid.
You may want to round the default coordinates to numbers more
appropriate for your project. However, do not make the area any bigger
than required, since the added grid positions will increase the gridding
time, and it may not be possible to compute realistic values if they are
too far from the data.

X and Y Gridding Increments

Enter numbers representing the distance in the X and Y direction
respectively across the grid cell, these define the X and Y gridding
increments for your grid. The increments default to the same value in
both directions.
If you are using a control grid these values default to those of the control
grid.
Usually you want square grid cells, so the X interval should be equal to
the Y interval. A gridding interval that is equal to (but not larger than)
the distance between your closest data points will accurately honor
every data point, but a larger gridding interval will often work equally
well and save some computer time.
A good rule-of-thumb is to select a gridding interval that is half the size
of the smallest feature of importance to your project. If you are
interested in closures that are 100 feet across, choose a 50 foot gridding
interval. However, do not make the gridding interval any smaller than
necessary, as gridding time increases rapidly as the cell size goes down
(e.g., cutting the grid increments in half will increase the compute time
by a factor of about 4).
The terms Initial and Final gridding intervals are sometimes used. You
must provide the final gridding intervals. Z-MAP Plus determines the
initial gridding intervals, based on the number of specified refinements.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Minimum and Maximum Z-values

Enter values that represent the upper and lower Z-values that will appear
in the grid. These values default to numbers that are slightly smaller and
larger (10% of Z-range), respectively, than the smallest and largest data
value for the Z-field being gridded. This allows a small amount of
overshoot of grid values above or below data values. If you are using a
control grid, the control grid boundaries serve as the upper and lower
boundary limits for the Bounded Range algorithm.

Search Radius
Enter the distance that will be used to draw a circle around the grid node
being calculated. Data falling inside that circle are eligible for use in
calculating that nodes Z-value. Normally, only the closest data are
actually used. Search Radius is a parameter common to many gridding
methods; for more information, see page 392.

Control Grid Usage

This parameter is active only if a grid is selected for the Control Grid
parameter on the Point Gridding main menu. It controls how
information in the selected Control Grid is used during Point Gridding
execution. Control grids are a common gridding parameter used by
many gridding methods. For more information about Control Grid
Usage, see page 389.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Secondary Parameters

After setting primary parameters,

enter from Secondary Parameters
on Point Gridding main menu

Enter X and Y expand distance beyond the grid limits

Select type of weighting (sharp or smooth)

Enter minimum number of points for interpolation

Enter desired number of points per sector

Enter minimum number of sectors

Enter extrapolation distance

Proceed to Flexing Parameters

on Point Gridding main menu

Point Gridding Secondary Parameters Workflow

The Secondary Parameters dialog box allows you to:
reach beyond the edge of the grid for data
adjust data point weighting
set the minimum points to calculate a value
set the maximum point to calculate per sector
specify the minimum number of sectors that must have data
specify the distance away from data which will force node value
calculation

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

X Expand and Y Expand

Enter numbers (representing the distance in the X and Y direction
beyond the edge of the grid) that you want Point Gridding to search for
data when calculating a nodes value. These default to 0, but if there is
data outside the grids AOI, you will get better grid node values at the
grid edges by using this data.

Type of Weighting
Controls whether data influence, when calculating a nodes value, falls
off quickly or slowly with distance from the grid node. Possible choices
for this parameter include:
Sharp Weighting (default). This gives very large weights to close data.
The weight decreases roughly as an inverse squared function. This type
of weighting should be used unless you are dealing with very rough
(noisy) data.
Smooth Weighting. This allows even very distant data to have a
significant influence on a grid nodes value. It will produce a smooth
grid from rough or noisy data. However, the results will not necessarily
honor the data.

Minimum Total Points

Enter the minimum number of points that must be used to calculate a
grid nodes value. If fewer points than this are available, then a ZNON
will be assigned to that grid node. The default is 1. This means that if
only one data point lies inside the search radius, the grid node will be
assigned the value of that data point. The Extrapolation Distance
parameter may need to be set to 0, since its value will override the
effects of this parameter.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Desired Points Per Sector

Enter the maximum number of points from each sector that can be used
to calculate a grid nodes value. This defaults to 4 and the range of valid
numbers is 1 to 8.
The circle, defined by the search radius, and centered over the grid node
being calculated, is divided into eight sectors. To do this lines running
NS, EW, N45E, and N45W are drawn. Each piece of pie defined by
these lines is a sector.
Using only a few data points from each sector reduces the influence of
clustered data. For example, assume 40 points are tightly clustered in the
NNE sector, one point is in the SSW sector, the 40 and the 1 are similar
distance from the node, and that all are used to calculate the nodes
value. The average surface value in the NNE sector will be 40 times
more influential in defining the nodes value than will the isolated point
in the SSW sector, even though the 40 and the 1 represent nearly the
same amount of information about the surface.
If we change the number of data points to a maximum of 4 points per
sector, where the four points kept are the four closest to the node, the
above example would change from a 40 to 1 influence to a 4 to 1
influence and a more representative Z-value would be calculated for the
node. When dealing with a small local area, such as around one grid
node, four points in one sector will give as good a surface or better as 40
points per sector would, and with much less processing time.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Minimum Number of Sectors

Enter a number representing the minimum number of sectors that must
contain data before a grid nodes value can be calculated. If fewer than
this number of sectors have data, then a ZNON is assigned to the grid
node. The default is 1 and the range of valid numbers is 1 to 8. The
Extrapolation Distance parameter may need to be set to 0, since its value
will override the effects of this parameter. For a definition of what
sectors are, see Desired Points Per Sector, above.
This is one of the primary parameters for controlling how far
extrapolation is carried away from the data. Increasing this to 3 will
prevent nodes from being calculated in the corners of the grid,
increasing to 4 will create a large convex hull around the data, and 5, 6,
7 and 8 will create concave hulls around the data that fit tighter and
tighter to the data. This extrapolation control method will not create
holes (ZNON areas) in void areas in the middle of data. The other
parameter commonly used to control extrapolations is Search Radius.

Extrapolation Distance
Enter a number representing the distance beyond the perimeter of the
data within which grid nodes are forced to be calculated. The default is
equal to the Search Radius.
If search radius, minimum number of points, number of sectors, or any
other parameters restrict node calculation to less than this distance,
those parameters are overridden by this parameter. Override means that
node values will be calculated even if those other parameters would
prevent this from happening. To prevent this override, you need to set
the Extrapolation Distance to 0.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Flexing Parameters
After setting secondary
parameters, enter from Flexing
Parameters on Point Gridding
main menu

Select type of flexing

Biharmo Laplacian Combinati None

Enter flexing cutoff value

Specify maximum number of refinements

Specify smoothness modulus

Select control grid if desired

Select additional fields if desired

Review data distribution statistics

Apply Point Gridding

Save and return to

Z-MAP Plus main menu

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Point Gridding Flexing Parameters Workflow

The Flexing Parameters dialog box allows you to specify:
the type of flexing to perform
when to stop flexing
how much to honor the data
whether contour/search-line intersection points are used
whether contour constraints are used
upper and lower bounds (surfaces) within which the flexed surface
must remain
Flexing, sometimes called Filter or Relaxation, is used to
simultaneously smooth the grid and tie it to the data. Flexings primary
purpose is to remove small surface irregularities in the initial surface
that are not supported by data. These irregularities were put into the
surface during initialization and are not desired in the final surface
model.

Type of Flexing
The Type of Flexing button shows which type of flexing is specified
whether flexing is performed with a Biharmonic filter, Laplacian filter,
both filters, or no filter.
Biharmonic (default) The Biharmonic filter adjusts grid values so
that the surface resembles a rigid surface like a handsaw that bends
slowly and smoothly from one inflection point to another. This is
sometimes called a minimum curvature or minimum tension surface.
This is the default filter for Least Squares gridding.
Laplacian The Laplacian filter adjusts grid values so that the surface
resembles a bubble that comes quickly back to the average surface
position away from inflection points. If you stick your finger into a
bubble it causes the surface to peak at your finger and quickly return to
its original form away from your finger. This is sometimes called a high
tension surface. This is the default filter for Weighted Average gridding.
Combination Combination flexing applies the Biharmonic filter,
then the Laplacian filter. The results are not easily predicted, but fall
somewhere between Biharmonic and Laplacian, probably a little closer
to the Biharmonic, since it is the first filter applied.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Cutoff
In the Cutoff box, enter a number to use as a test value to determine
when to stop flexing. Flexing continues until the amount of change from
one pass to the next is smaller than the Cutoff value. The default Cutoff
value is 0.25000, which typically results in three to six flexing passes.
Cutoff is a common flexing parameter used in many gridding methods.
For more information, see page 525.

Number of Refinements
Enter a value that represents the number of times the final grid intervals
are doubled when determining the settings for the initial grid increment
values. These initial grid increments will then be used to build an initial
grid, that initial grid will be resampled to half its grid increments and
then flexed. This process is repeated Number of Refinement times until
the final grid increment is reached. This defaults to 1 and the range of
valid numbers is 0 to 5.
Many gridding methods use refinement. For more information, see
page 393.

Number of Flex Passes

In the Number of Flex Passes box, enter the number of flexing passes to
execute (if the Control of Passes setting is FLEX = NUMPASS) or the
maximum number of flexing passes to execute (if the Control of Passes
button reads FLEX <= NUMPASS). The default value is 10.

Control of Passes
Use the Control of Passes setting to specify one of these conditions:
FLEX = NUMPASS Continue flexing until the Number of Flex
Passes value is met, or
FLEX <= NUMPASS (default) Stop flexing as soon as either
the Cutoff or Number of Flex Passes value is met.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Smoothness Modulus
In the Smoothness Modulus box, enter a value to specify the extent to
which you want to smooth the grid at the expense of honoring the data.
You can enter any value between 0 and 1. The default setting is 0.2.
With a value of 0 (zero), if smoothing pushes the surface away from the
data, Z-MAP Plus brings it back to exactly honor the data. A value of 1
(one) produces the smoothest grid, without regard for precisely fitting
the grid to the data. With the default value of 0.2, if smoothing pushes
the surface away from the data, Z-MAP Plus brings it back at least 20%
of the way toward the data. This Smoothness Modulus affects nodes that
are within 5 or 6 grid increments from the data.
To achieve an optimum trade-off between accuracy and smoothness,
you may need to produce several test grids that each use a different
smoothness modulus. The Smoothness Modulus is often used with
seismic data, with its value shifted towards 1. The effect is to remove
some of the wobble from contours that cross or run along seismic lines.
The Smoothness Modulus parameter is common to many types of
gridding methods. To learn more, see page 525.

Control Grid
A list of grids is presented. Point to and click the grid you wish to use as
the control grid. This is an optional parameter. Information from the
control grid such as X and Y limits and increments, node values, and
ZNON locations can be used when gridding. (See Control Grid Usage
on page 439 in the Primary Parameters topic.)

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Select Additional Fields

Use this dialog box to supply values for DZ/DX, DZ/DY and Weight.
This selection is necessary only in the following circumstances:
You use the Projected Slopes algorithm and specify Expanded as
the Type of Data for Projected Slopes value.
The dataset includes more than one DZ/DX, DZ/DY, or Weight
field. If only one field is present, the program finds and uses it.
If the data type is Normal, the program uses the Projected Slopes
algorithm to calculate DZ/DX and DZ/DY, and to assign a weight of one
to each data point in the grid.

DZ/DX Field
This field represents the change in Z divided by the change in X, or the
first derivative in the X-direction.

DZ/DY Field
This field represents the change in Z divided by the change in Y, or the
first derivative in the Y-direction.

Z-weight Field
The Projected Slopes Algorithm assigns weights to the Z-values inside
a circular area around a node before averaging them. Z-values closest to
the grid nodes receive the greater weight. If you assign your own
weights, higher numbers receive the greater weight.

Data Distribution Statistics

If you click the Data Distribution Statistics button in the Point Gridding
dialog box, the Z-MAP Plus System window immediately displays
statistics about the current data and its distribution relative to the grid
lattice (X and Y limits and increments).
Statistics appear only for data in the X and Y limits of the grid. An
example follows.
DATA STATISTICS FOR Z-VALUE: WINDOW DEFINED BY GRID LIMITS

POINTS READ = 120, POINTS IN WINDOW = 120, ZNON POINTS = 0

POINT NO. 1 = ( 920.000 , 1920.00 , 7400.00 )
POINT NO. 2 = ( 1015.00 , 2085.00 , 7500.00 )
POINT NO. 3 = ( 1110.00 , 1790.00 , 7200.00 )

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

POINT NO. 120 = ( 430.538 , 2012.49 , 8000.00 )

| | |
X-coord Y-coord Z-value
MIN-X = 153.876 , MAX-X = 3050.00 , RANGE-X = 2896.12
MIN-Y = 30.0000 , MAX-Y = 2085.00 , RANGE-Y = 2055.00
MIN-Z = 6475.00 , MAX-Z = 8500.00 , RANGE-Z = 2025.00
AVG-Z = 7497.00 , RMS-Z = 7509.94 , STD-Z = 440.595
REL-Z = 0.587695E-01, ZNON = 0.100000E+31

A table is created describing the relationship of the data to the grid

lattice. The object of the table is to help you determine:
whether the grid will honor the data
how to make the grid increment as large as possible to optimize
execution time
Change the grid increment several times and observe how the table
changes. The table looks like this:
DISTRIBUTION OF DATA IN FINAL GRID CELLS BY PERCENTAGE

Points Per Cell: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Cells with Each Grouping 83.95 15.06 0.99 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Cells with Points by Group 93.81 6.19 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Points in Each Grouping 88.33 11.67 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00

Points Per Cell This row indicates the number of data points
per grid cell.
Cells with Each Grouping This row contains the percentage of
the grid cells that contain zero, one, two, etc. control points. The
goal should be to have only one data point in a grid cell, and the
surface will be smoother if the grid cells that have data are
surrounded by empty grid cells.
In the preceding example, the program has looked at the entire grid
and determined that 83.95% of the cells contain zero control
points, 15.06% of the cells contain one point, 0.99% contain two
points, and 0.0% contain three or more points.
A large percentage of empty (0) grid cells would probably give
you a good grid, but would take much longer to process than a grid
that does not have a large percentage of empty grid cells.
It is much more important to have 0.0 percentage in the columns
represented by 37 points per cell than to have a small percentage
of cells with 0 points. Cells with 37 points will not always allow
contours to honor every point, no matter what the value is for the
smoothness modulus.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Cells with Points by Grouping Of the grid cells that do have

data, this is the percentage of cells that have that many (number at
top of column) data points in them. To guarantee that contours
honor data, you want at most one data point per grid cell.
Therefore, you want to keep the percentage in the 1 Points Per
Cell column as high as possible. Even with two or three points per
cell, the contours are likely to honor the data, but there is no
guarantee.
In the preceding example, 93.81% of all cells that contain points
have one point, 6.19% of this group contain two points, and 0.00%
contain three points.
Points in Each Grouping This is the percentage of all data
points that occur as that many (number at top of column) points
per grid cell. In the preceding example, 88.33% of the data occur
as one point per grid cell, 11.67% occur as two points per cell, and
none denser than that. Again you want to have most of your data in
cells by themselves. Therefore, you want to keep the percentage in
the 1 Points Per Cell column as high as possible. This row of the
table is a good indicator of how clustered versus how evenly
distributed your data is.
By understanding the goals for each of these categories, you can see that
one category cannot be improved without degrading another. The goal
is to reach an acceptable compromise. The best way to learn how to do
this is practice.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Contour Gridding

Select Modeling Contour

Gridding in Z-MAP Plus window

Select input contour data

Select the format of the data

Were
Select fault file Yes contours built No
using faults?

Enter output grid name and error-check parameters

Compute primary
Enter primary parameters No parameters from Yes
input data?

No Flex the Yes

grid?

Select profile data file and Use profile data

profile Z-field Yes No
to control Enter flexing
surface? parameters

Honor point
No data when Yes
building grid?
Apply

Results of CTOG appear Select control points file

and control points Z-field

Save and return to

Z-MAP Plus window

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Contour Gridding Workflow

Overview
Contour Gridding, sometimes known as Contour to Grid (CTOG), is an
interpolation technique which builds a grid from digitized contours. The
algorithm uses knowledge that adjacent points of equal value were
digitized from a continuous contour line to build a grid that accurately
honors the digitized contours.
In addition to digitized contours, Contour Gridding can also use seismic
line data (profiles) and/or well data (scattered data). These profile and
scattered data may also be interpretive data created to control the form
of the grid to be built. Other controls on the gridding process include
faults, x,y,z limits, grid increments, filters, and upper and lower limits
during filtering.

Contour Gridding Algorithm

Contour Gridding first reconstructs the original contours by connecting
the sequentially digitized contour points with straight line segments.
This is the Error Check Contour File.
Then Contour Gridding constructs a network of four search lines, two
along rows and columns of the grid to be built, and two at 45 degrees to
those search lines which pass through node locations. Contour values
are stored with these search lines at every spot where the lines cross a
reconstructed digitized contour.
When it is time to calculate a value for a grid node, only the four search
lines that radiate from that node are used. For each line, the contour
crossing on either side of the node and nearest to it are used. A straight
line is fit between those two point and a value from that line is calculated
at the grid node location. This is done for the other three search lines and
the average of all four lines is used as the nodes initial value. After the
initialization, filtering is applied to these node values.

Contours
Select a data file from list of files of type DATA or CNTR (contour) that
appears. The file you choose is used as the digitized contour input file.
If this file is of type Marker or No Marker (as described in the following
topic), the first field of type Z-field is used as the digitized contour input.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Contour Data Format

Use this dialog box to specify how the digitized contour file is
organized. The default organization is Marker+Contour, which is the
format used by Landmarkss Z-CAP program. If this or the current
parameter setting does not match the selected contour file, an error
appears in the Z-MAP Plus xterm window.
Five contour file formats are available. Some of the formats use one or
more header records at the beginning of each contour string to identify
and separate contours. The header records are identified by a marker
value in the X or Y field. The marker value must be a unique number that
does not conflict with any of the contour data values. Since each contour
starts with a header record, the marker value must appear in the first
record of the file.
For example, if the file structure is of the Marker+Contour type, the first
three records of the file might look like the following example:
X (EASTING) Y (NORTHING)
---------------------------
999999999 7200
34587.56 66743.9
34569.45 66748.3

Here the marker is nine 9s in the X field. The first record of the file is
assumed to have a marker in the X field and the second field is expected
to contain the Z value of the contour data that follows. The next two
records are X and Y coordinates for digitized points along the contour.
The next time nine 9s (Marker) is encountered in the X field will signify
a change in contour, and possibly a change in contour value.
Possible choices for this parameter are described in the following text.
The locations on either side of the + represent the X-field and Y-field
(e.g., X-field+Y-field for Marker+Marker). Although the notation
indicates which of the two fields is to contain the Marker, the fields need
not be in this order in the file.
Marker+Marker A marker occurs in both the X and Y fields.
The record immediately following the markers record contains the
Z value of the digitized contour in the X field. The Y field is
ignored. This is the standard format of a file created during using
Contouring. No Z field is required. The file should be a .CNTR file.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Marker+Contour (default value) A marker occurs in the X

field, and the contour value occurs in the Y field. The records that
follow this record are X and Y coordinates of the digitized contour.
This is the standard format of a file created by Landmarks
digitizing program Z-CAP and the Z-MAP Plus File Conversion
option. No Z field is required. The file should be a .CNTR file.
Contour+Marker A contour value occurs in the X field, and a
marker occurs in the Y field. The records that follow this record are
X and Y coordinates of the digitized contour. This is not a standard
format for Landmark software, but is offered as a convenience in
case other software in use creates files of this structure. No Z field
is required. The file should be a .DATA file.
Marker A marker occurs in the X field, and the Y field and Z
field are blank (are ignored). The records that follow this record
are X, Y, and Z records. In this case, the marker is used only to
distinguish between separate contours that have the same contour
value and are adjacent in the file. The file should be a .DATA file.
No Marker No marker is used. The first record of the file is
considered valid data. The data is stored as X, Y, and Z. A change
in Z is used to identify a change in contour. The file should be a
.DATA file.

Faults
A list of fault files is presented. Point to and click the fault file you want.
Faults are needed only when building surfaces cut by faults. When faults
are used, grid nodes are calculated using only data located on the same
side of the faults as the node. A fault file must have been previously
constructed in order to be available for this option.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Output Grid Name and Error Check Parameters

Use this dialog box to specify the following input values:
name of the new grid
MFD for storing the error check file
name for an optional error check contour file
MFD for storing the grid
distance between digitized points required to make two separate
contours, or, alternatively, to close on itself, making one contour

Select Output Type

Select Output Type controls whether a grid is built, an Error-Check
Contour File is built, or if both are built. The grid is the standard
Z-MAP Plus surface model representation of the input data. the
Error-Check Contour File is Z-MAP Plus interpretation of what your
input contours are. If there seem to be problems with Z-MAP Plus
breaking or connecting contours incorrectly, then you should create this
file. To use the file, create a picture. Then use View Contouring
Contour to put these contours on the picture in one color, and the
original digitized contours in another color. The differences are often
apparent and simple to correct.
Possible choices for this parameter are:
Save+Create Save an Error-Check Contour File and build a
grid of the surface.
Save Contours Only save an Error-Check Contour File.
Create Grid (default value) Only build a grid of the surface.

Output Grid Name

Enter the name of the grid to be created; this name may be up to 24
characters long and may contain internal blanks.

Output Grid Master File

When you click the parameter box, a popup menu will appear, listing the
attached MFDs and a scratch file. Select the MFD to use for saving the
output file.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Name of Error-Check Contour File

Enter the name of the Error-Check Contour File to be created; this name
may be up to 24 characters long and may contain internal blanks.
Contour Gridding creates this contour file from the input digitized
contours. It outputs the file using the Marker+marker format (as
described in Contour Data Format on page 453). This format clearly
marks where the program breaks or connects contours. Therefore, it
allows you to see how Contour Gridding interpreted your digitized
contours.
If breaks in contours are distinguished by change in Z-value, then
separate contours may be joined together by the program. Also, contours
may not connect to themselves when they represent a closure.
Displaying the Error-Check Contour File on a map will let you see if
these problems occur.

Contour File Master File

When you click the parameter box, a popup menu appears, listing the
attached MFDs and scratch file. Select the destination MFD for saving
the Error-Check Contour File.

Break Contour Distance

Enter a number representing the distance to test for when deciding
whether a contour should be continuous or broken. This distance is
measured in the same units as the X and Y coordinates of the digitized
data. The default is 10 times the grid increment.
If two consecutive contour points with the same Z-values are farther
apart than the specified distance, Contour Gridding will break the
contour and treat it as two separate contours.

Close Contour Distance

Enter a number representing the distance to test for when deciding
whether a contour should close on itself. This distance is measured in the
same units as the X and Y coordinates of the digitized data. The default
Extrapolation Distance is 4 times the grid increment (GINC).
If the first and last points on a contour line are closer together than the
specified distance, Contour Gridding will add an additional ending point
that is coincident with the starting point (i.e., close the contour).

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Primary Parameters
Use this dialog box to specify the following input values:
X and Y limits
X and Y grid increments
minimum and maximum Z-values
ZNON value
number of search lines
search radius
extrapolation distance
name of the intersection point file
MFD for storing the intersection point file

Minimum and Maximum X and Y Coordinates

Enter values to be used as the minimum and maximum X and Y
coordinates for the output grid. The default values for these parameters
delineate an area that is slightly larger (10% of X or Y range) than the
smallest rectangle that contains your data. Often you will need to adjust
these to match coordinates of other grids you will eventually be
operating the resulting grid against.

Grid Increment
Enter a number representing the distance across a grid cell. The grid
increment is the same in both the X and Y directions. This distance is
measured in the same units as the X and Y coordinates of the digitized
data. Computer time to build the grid is sensitive to the grid increment
but significantly less so than with Point Gridding. While the default is
usually larger than desired, it is good for a tilted plane (not an undulating
surface). The default is calculated in the following manner:
( XMax XMin ) Contour Interval
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Contour Maximum Contour Minimum
where Contour Interval = the smallest interval in the digitized file.
A good rule-of-thumb for determining Grid Interval is to look at the
original map that was digitized. Identify the smallest feature on that map
that you want to see reproduced when the created grid is contoured. A
feature may be the distance across a narrow ridge, a kink in a contour
line, or a closure. To reproduce that feature, select a grid increment
about half the size of that feature.
If the grid increment is small enough to store a feature in a grid, but the
map was not digitized with enough detail for Contour Gridding to
reproduce the feature, the feature does not appear in the grid contour.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Minimum and Maximum Grid Values

Enter values for the upper and lower Z-values allowed in the output grid.
If a nodes calculated initial value exceeds these limits, it will be
replaced with the exceeded limit. These limits default to numbers
slightly smaller and larger (10% of Z-range) than the smallest and
largest data value of the Z-field being modeled. Because filters are used,
node values usually taper smoothly to these limits, rather than producing
a clipped surface.

ZNON Value
Enter the value to use as the ZNON value in the grid. The standard value
is 0.1E+31. The value can be any valid number supported by your
operating system. Do not use a number that is within the grids value
range, as this creates problems when you display the grid. For best
results throughout Z-MAP Plus operations, use the standard value.

Number of Search Lines

Controls the number of search lines used for calculating node values.
You can use either two or four (default value) search lines. The default
behavior is to search rows, columns, and 45s. In almost all cases, the
default value is satisfactory.
Possible choices for this parameter are:
Horz+Vert Generate only two sets of lines, one along grid rows
and the other along grid columns.
Horz+Vert+45 (default value) Generate four sets of lines, one
along grid rows, one along grid columns, one NE-SW (N45E), and
one NW-SE (N45W). The 45 degree angle lines are located so as
to pass through grid nodes.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

How the Lines are Used

Contour Gridding constructs a network of two or four search lines. Two
search lines are always created along rows and columns of the grid to be
built. Optionally, two more search lines are created at 45 degrees to
those lines and pass through node locations. Contour values are stored
with these search lines at every spot where the lines cross a digitized
contour.
When it is time to calculate a value for a grid node, only the two or four
search lines that radiate from that node are used. For each line, the
contour crossing on either side of the node and nearest to it is used. A
straight line is fit between those two points and a value from that line fit
is calculated at the grid node location. This is done for the other search
line(s) and the average of all lines is used as the nodes initial value.

Search Radius
This is really not used as a radius but as a distance. Enter the distance
(Search Radius) that will be the maximum allowed separation between
contour intersections, profile intersections or any combination of the
two, along a search line. If the distance between two adjacent
intersections exceeds the specified Search Radius, Z-MAP Plus does not
interpolate grid node values for that search line (using those two contour
intersections).
Instead, the closest of the intersections to the grid node will be used to
determine an Extrapolated value. If interpolated values can be generated
for any of that nodes other search lines, then this extrapolation is
disregarded and the interpolation(s) used. If all of that nodes search line
values are determined by extrapolation, then those values will be
averaged to determine the nodes initial value.
The default value is half the diagonal of the grid.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Extrapolation Distance
Enter a number representing the distance away from the data perimeter
within which grid node values can be calculated. All nodes beyond this
distance are assigned a ZNON value. The default is 2 times the grid
increment.

How the Data Perimeter is Determined

If a grid nodes search line has contour or profile intersections on both
sides of the node and the distance between those two intersections is less
than the Search Radius, then the intersections are used to Interpolate a
value for the node. If the search line has an intersection on only one side
of the node, or the distance between intersections exceeds the Search
Radius, then only one value is used to Extrapolate a value for the node.
When all of a nodes search line values are determined through
Extrapolation, then a test is run to determine if the node is greater than
Extrapolation Distance away from the closest intersection. If the node is
farther away than Extrapolation distance, it gets assigned a ZNON. If
any of the nodes search line values are determined by Interpolation,
then a value is calculated for the node.

Name of Intersection Point File

Enter the name of the file to create. The name can be a maximum of 24
characters long and can contain internal blanks. An Intersection Point
File contains the locations where the search lines intersect digitized
contours and, optionally, the profile data. The file is of type DATA
(X,Y,Z). It is commonly saved so that the generated grid can be filtered
more without having to go though the entire Contour Gridding process.
These are the points used during default filtering in Contour Gridding
(they are not the control points that you can also have Contour Gridding
use during filtering).

Master File for Point File

When you click the parameter box, a popup menu appears, listing the
attached MFDs and scratch file. Select the destination MFD to use for
saving the output file.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Flexing Parameters
This dialog box allows you to select the type of flexing to perform, when
to stop flexing, how much to honor the data, whether contour/
search-line intersection points are used, and whether contour constraints
are used. This dialog box also enables you to specify an upper and lower
band (surfaces) within which the flexed surface must remain.
Flexing, sometimes called Filter or Relaxation, is used to
simultaneously smooth the grid and tie it to the data. Flexings primary
purpose is to remove small surface irregularities in the initial surface
that are not supported by data. These irregularities were put into the
surface during initialization, and are undesirable in the final surface
model.
The Flexing parameters are common to many gridding methods. To
learn more, see page 520.

Type of Flexing
The Type of Flexing Type shows which type of flexing is specified
whether flexing is performed with a Biharmonic filter, Laplacian filter,
both filters, or no filter. (For a description of the flexing types, see
page 524.)

Cutoff
In the Cutoff box, enter a number to use as a test value to determine
when to stop flexing. Flexing continues until the amount of change from
one pass to the next is smaller than the Cutoff value. The default Cutoff
value is 0.25, which typically results in three to six flexing passes.

Number of Flex Passes

In the Number of Flex Passes box, enter the number of flexing passes to
execute (if the Control of Passes setting is FLEX = NUMPASS) or the
maximum number of flexing passes to execute (if the Control of Passes
button reads FLEX <= NUMPASS). The default value is 10.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Control of Passes
Use the Control of Passes setting to specify one of these conditions:
FLEX = NUMPASS (default) Continue flexing until the
Number of Flex Passes value is met.
FLEX <= NUMPASS Stop flexing as soon as either the Cutoff
or Number of Flex Passes value is met.

Smoothness Modulus
In the Smoothness Modulus box, enter a value to specify the extent to
which you want to smooth the grid at the expense of honoring the data.
You can enter any value between 0 and 1. The default setting is 0.2.
With a value of 0 (zero), if smoothing pushes the surface away from the
data, Z-MAP Plus brings it back to exactly honor the data. A value of 1
(one) produces the smoothest grid, without regard for precisely fitting
the grid to the data. With the default value of 0.2, if smoothing pushes
the surface away from the data, Z-MAP Plus brings it back at least 20%
of the way toward the data. This Smoothness Modulus affects nodes that
are within 5 or 6 grid increments from the data.
To achieve an optimum trade-off between accuracy and smoothness,
you may need to produce several test grids that each use a different
smoothness modulus. The Smoothness Modulus is often used with
seismic data, with its value shifted towards 1. The effect is to remove
some of the wobble from contours that cross or run along seismic lines.
The Smoothness Modulus parameter is common to many types of
gridding methods. To learn more, see page 525.

Use CTOG Intersection Points?

Controls whether the intersection points generated between the search
lines and digitized contours and profiles are used when filtering. These
points are the only way to force Flexing to tie to the original digitized
data, since that data is not used during the flexing process. If you want
to use Contour Constraints when Flexing you will need to set this
parameter to No Points. Also, this parameter should probably be set to
No Points when applying Upper and Lower Surface Bias or when
applying Multiply, although it need not be.
Possible choices for this parameter include:
No Points Do not use intersection points when filtering.
Points (default) Use intersection points when filtering.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Use Contour Constraints?

Controls whether contour levels are used as constraints when Flexing
and whether the Upper/Lower Bias Multiplier parameters are active.
The Contour part of this Constraint parameter prevents a flexed node
from being adjusted to such an extent that it no longer has a value
between the contours on either side of it. When this parameter is set to
Constraints, the Upper/Lower Bias Multiplier parameters are also active
(scroll down for a review of their function). This parameter has no effect
unless the Use CTOG Intersection Points parameter is set to No Points.
Possible choices for this parameter include:
No Constraints (default) Do not use contour levels to constrain
the flexed node values.
Constraints Use contour levels to constrain the flexed node
values. This has no effect if CTOG Intersection Points are being
used.

How Contour Level Constraints Work

When digitized contours are read in by Contour Gridding, a list of all
contour levels is made. This list is used as a constraint during filtering.
For example the list may have 2000, 2010 and 2020 as contour levels. If
the node value is 2007 initially then this constraint would not let flexing
push that value higher than 2010 or lower than 2000. Because this works
from a list of contour values, an intermediate contour (say 2005 for this
example) on one side of the map could have a constraining effect on a
node on the other side of the map.

Upper/Lower Surface Bias and Multiplier Parameters

A limiting band (pair of surfaces) may be placed above and below the
gridded surface to constrain flexing. These limiting surfaces are
obtained by adding constants to each nodes value or by multiplying
each nodes value by constants. This shifts the grid to be flexed up and
down. Then, when a node is flexed its flexed value is compared to the
upper and lower limit surfaces. If the (flexed) node exceeds one of the
limits, it is set to that limit. Because flexing is normally run several
times, this constraint does not produce a clipped grid with a sharp
discontinuity but creates a grid that approaches the limit surface
asymptotically.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

These parameters are active only if the CTOG Intersection Points

parameter is set to No Points and the Use Contour Constraints parameter
is set to Constraints. The goal when using these limits is to remove small
features usually created by noisy data. Therefore, using the data
prevents removal of these features.
This capability is often used to take the wobble out of contours. A good
first try for the values is to add and subtract 20% of the contour interval
used to display the surface. If the contour interval were 10, then an upper
bias of 2 and lower bias of 2 might produce desirable results.

Upper Surface Bias

Enter a value to be added to each nodes value. This value will form an
upper limit surface to constrain flexing. This value should be positive
and defaults to 0. See Use Contour Constraints? on page 463.

Lower Surface Bias

Enter a value to be added to each nodes value. The value will form a
lower limit surface to constrain flexing. This value should be negative
and defaults to 0. See Use Contour Constraints? on page 463.

Upper Surface Multiplier

Enter a value to multiply each nodes value by. This value will form an
upper limit surface to constrain flexing. This value should be greater
than 1 and defaults to 1. See Use Contour Constraints? on page 463.

Lower Surface Multiplier

Enter a value to multiply each nodes value by. This value will form a
lower limit surface to constrain flexing. This value should be less than 1
and defaults to 1. See Use Contour Constraints? on page 463.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Profiles
Select a data file from the list presented. You will have the option to
select a field from this file, which is used as profile input when the
option executes. This file is not required. Use profile input only if you
want to use the data to further control the surface as you build the grid.
Profiles may be used to control the shape of the surface in areas where
contours are sparse because the surface is relatively flat, or inside small
fault blocks where only one or two contours exist. Profiles are similar to
contours in that they must be digitized sequentially. However, unlike
contours, the Z-value is usually different for each point along the
profile. Contour Gridding uses profiles in the same general way as
contours. The intersections of cross-section baselines and profile lines
are computed, and Z-values from the profiles are used to further define
the shape of the network of cross sections. Then Contour Gridding uses
linear interpolation along the profile to determine the surface elevation
where the cross-section baselines and profiles cross.
A profile is a file of type DATA that contains either
X-, Y-, and Z-fields and special records that indicate the start of a
new profile
X-, Y-, and Z-fields, and a SEG ID field that indicates (by
changing ID) the start of a new profile
If a file contains X, Y, Z, and special records, the first record in the file
has a special number (Marker) in the X-field and dummy values (which
are ignored) in the Y-field and Z-field. Each time a marker of this type
is encountered, Contour Gridding assumes that a new profile is starting.
Files with these special records are generated by Landmarks digitizing
program Z-CAP.
Profiles are like cross sections that have X-, Y-, and Z-values at each
digitized point along the section. Straight line connections are made
between these x,y,z points along each profile. The straight line
connections that intersect Contour Gridding search lines create
Intersection Points for use during the gridding process. These profiles
are commonly used to more adequately control gridding between or
away from contours, near faults, and in areas of rapid gradient changes.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Z-Field (Profiles)
A list of fields is presented. Point to and click the field you want. This
input field will be used when the option executes. Fields in this list were
picked from a previously selected file.

Control Points
A list of data files is presented. Point to and click the data file you want.
A field will be selected from this file and used as input control points
when Flexing executes. This file is not required and should only be used
when you want to honor point data (wells) when building the grid. To
see how these data are used, see Smoothness Modulus on page 462.

Z-Field (Control Points)

A list of fields is presented. Point to and click the field you want. This
input field will be used when the option executes. Fields in this list were
picked from a previously selected file.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Trendform Gridding
The Trendform Gridding algorithm creates two-dimensional
grid-based surface models, while imposing geologic constraints on the
models and the contour maps produced from them.
The ability to impose geologic constraints is not shared by other
Z-MAP Plus gridding algorithms, and is the primary reason for using
Trendform Gridding instead of other gridding algorithms. The geologic
constraints are encoded in already existing grids called form grids. Form
grids communicate the geoscientists interpretations to the gridding
process and may include:
Structure grids from seismic or well data created in Z-MAP Plus,
SeisWorks, or StratWorks
Isopach grids created in Z-MAP Plus, StratWorks, or other
applications
Contour Gridding (CTOG) user digitized contour data
Distance gridding from user digitized line features using the
distance gridding algorithm in Point Gridding and Point Gridding
Plus, or in the Macros Utilities Distance-to-Vertex Grid
(VERT-TO-DGRID) macro.
Trendform is easy to use compared to most petroleum industry gridding
algorithms. In fact, other than entering the names of input file and output
files and selecting input data fields, you are usually required to make
only three significant choices:
gridding algorithm to use
gridding bias value
form grid
The most challenging part of Trendform Gridding is selecting the right
gridding bias value. You may need to experiment with several values
before you come up with one that produces the desired results.
This topic includes the following subtopics:
Understanding Trendform Gridding on page 468
Using Trendform Gridding on page 471
Example 1. Applying Trendform to Attribute Modeling on
page 475
Example 2: Applying Trendform to Stream Channel Contours
on page 476

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Purposes of Trendform Gridding

You can use Trendform Gridding to perform these tasks:
Impose a geologic interpretation on new structure or attribute
models generated from sparse data.
Take advantage of the algorithms confidence factors.

Understanding Trendform Gridding

Trendform Gridding grids a dataset while honoring the shape (but not
the values) of a form grid by using the continuously varying bias
information embedded in the form grid.
This topic discusses Trendform Gridding and defines its terminology.

What is a Form Grid

A form grid contains the users generalized interpretation of the 3D
shape to be imposed on the data being modeled. Contours of the form
grid indicate local directional biases that should be applied to the data
being modeled.
A form grid extends across the entire area of interest that is covered by
the input data to be contoured, and the x and y increment of the form grid
define the output grids x and y increment. Form grids may include:
Structure grids generated from well or seismic data. These are a
natural source of form grids. Such grids guide contouring of rock
properties in the unit which lies above or below the structure.
Isopach grids, which are also natural form grids because the same
geologic processes that shape the thickness of an isopach affect the
distribution of rock properties in that isopach.
User digitized contour data which has been gridded using Contour
Gridding (CTOG)
Distance grids generated from digitized interpretations of stream
channel centerlines can be used to guide Trendform Gridding. (See
the macro: Macros Utilities Distance-to-Vertex Grid or
learn more about the macro in the VERT-TO-DGRID topic in the
Macro Reference Manual for Z-MAP Plus / ZCL. Also see the
Point Gridding Plus distance gridding algorithm description in the
Z-MAP Plus Reference Manual).

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Trendform Gridding Algorithm

Like most other petroleum industry surface modeling algorithms,
Trendform Gridding calculates grid node z-values based on the
distribution and z-values of the input data. And like most such
algorithms, it applies inverse distance weighting to the data to determine
the influence of each data point on each grid node.
Trendform is different in the way it calculates distances. In Trendform,
the measured distances between data and grid nodes are distorted to
follow the contours of the form grid. The distortion of distances by the
form grid is what makes Trendform unique and what causes the output
grid to be similar in shape to the form grid.
Like the Z-MAP Plus algorithms Point Gridding and Point Gridding
Plus, Trendform Gridding supports moving weighted averages, least
squares, and closest point grid initialization techniques. Subject to the
distortion of distance measurements, these initialization techniques are
essentially the same as those supported in the Z-MAP Plus algorithms,
with the same weaknesses and same strengths. For example, just as in
Point Gridding and Point Gridding Plus, moving weighted grid
initialization in Trendform will create a grid which never extends
beyond the range of the input data z-values.
Because of the unique way distances are measured in Trendform
Gridding, the algorithm must compute the influence of each data point
on every grid node. As a result, traditional data collection techniques
have no meaning and many of the concepts you learned for other
gridding algorithms do not apply here.
For example, Trendform Gridding does not require you to enter the size
of the search radius or the desired number of data points in each search
octant. Moreover, since every grid node is influenced by every data
point, the need for a post-initialization grid smoothing filter has been
eliminated. In addition, you are not asked to enter the size of the output
grid and the grid node spacing, as these values are taken directly from
the form grid.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Gridding Bias
The bias factor (which should always be a positive number) controls
how closely the gridding process honors the form grid. In general, the
larger the bias factor the closer gridding honors the form grid.

Faults in Trendform Gridding

You can specify one, two, or no fault sets to use in Trendform Gridding.
One of the fault sets is associated with the form grid. If the fault set is an
opaque barrier, it serves as a block to the movement of information
during gridding just as with any other Landmark gridding module. If the
set has embedded throw values, the values are used to remove the throw
from the input form grid, so the grid appears to be continuous. Use a
throw fault for gridding porosity or water saturation properties that are
expected to follow the pattern of a faulted structure grid before it was
faulted.
The second set of Trendform Gridding faults is associated with the
output dataset. Again, if these are opaque faults, they serve to block the
movement of information during gridding. If they are throw faults, data
points have their Z values adjusted when they are used to initialize grid
nodes across faults.
The advantage of using two input fault sets is apparent if you perform
conformable gridding of faulted surfaces. For example, suppose the
form grid is a structure grid obtained from seismic data and the
conformable surface is defined only in well picks. You can use the form
grid faults to remove discontinuities from the form grid and use the data
faults to add them to the output surface.

Recommendations
The Trendform algorithm is slower than the other gridding
algorithms and should not be used on dense data.
At the other extreme, results suffer when too little data is used. Do
not expect good results when you use a complex form grid
together with a dataset that contains three wells.
Ideally, some data must be scattered throughout the area of your
form grid.
Since a high frequency form grid that contains a lot of contour
detail between control points may cause unexpected results, it is
recommended that you filter such high frequency information out
of the form grid before using it

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

When viewing your form grid through Z-MAP Plus contouring,

use the COARSEST setting for the Curve Sampling Density
option.
A very fine row and column spacing in the form grid may be
required to impose an interpretation on closely spaced data.

Using Trendform Gridding

Modeling Trendform Gridding

Select the Form Grid (Shape).

Select a fault file associated with the Form Grid.

Select a Control Point File.

Designate the Z-field to grid.

If a confidence factor is stored in OpenWorks project,

select the Data Confidence Factor to use.

Select a fault file associated with the Control Point File,

Designate a new file name for the grid and the Location

Select an algorithm.

Required: Set the Gridding Bias.

Click OK to create the grid and close Trendform

gridding.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Trendform Gridding Parameters

The Trendform Gridding dialog is separated into two tabs: Trendform
Gridding an Other Outputs and Controls. Descriptions of the parameters
on each tab follow. Help is available from the Help button at the bottom
of the Trendform Gridding dialog box. The help contains parameter
definitions.

Trendform Gridding Tab

This tab is further divided into two panels: Input Files and Algorithm
and Outputs.

Input Files Panel

In this panel you name the form grid and any faults associated with it (if
any), the control point file to be gridded and the fault file associated with
it (if any), the Z-field in the Control Point File, data confidence field (if
any).
To select a file name, click the Select button and select a file name in the
dialog box that appears. The files in the dialog box list reflect the
contents of the attached MFDs and the current OpenWorks project.

Data Confidence Field

Your data file may contain one or more data confidence fields. Where
multiple confidence fields exist, you must designate which field you
want to use with the drop-down menu.

Creating Confidence Fields

When you create a confidence field, always use positive numbers (including
zero) for confidence factors. You can apply a confidence factor to each of the
z-values in the data file.

Algorithm and Outputs Panel

On this panel, name the new gridding file and its location in the file
system, designate which algorithm to use to generate the grid, and set
the required Bias parameter.

Output Location and Output Grid Name

In these fields, you name the new grid and designate the Output
Location for storing the grid.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Trendform Gridding Algorithms

Trendform Gridding offers three types of algorithms:
Least Squares (default value). Each grid value is initialized by fitting
a weighted planar least squares fit to the data in a circular area around
the grid node. The grid value is the Z-value of the plane at the grid
location. This method tends to smoothly pass through data with no sharp
peaks. Overprojection is possible. It is the most frequently used gridding
method as it works well for many types of surface data.
Weighted Average. Each initial grid value is computed as the weighted
average of data in a circular area around the grid node. This method
tends to peak at highs and lows. It is considered good for
equipotential-type surfaces.
Closest Point. Each initial grid value is set equal to the value of the
control point that is nearest to the grid location. This method is
sometimes called the polygon method or discrete method. Normally it is
not reasonable to flex (filter) this grid. This algorithm is applied with
moderate to poor success on average lithology data (a number at a point
represents the lithology at that point). The degree of success improves
with more and better distributed data.

Smooth Output Grid?

Choose YES to smooth the grid (the default) or NO to reject smoothing.
YES smooths the new grid with one pass of the minimum-curvature
biharmonic filter. Keep in mind that Trendform grids are smoother than
many other types of grids even without a smoothing filter.

Gridding Bias
The Gridding Bias parameter controls how closely the output grid will
follow the form grid. The default is 20. The bias has meaning only with
respect to the units used for the X, Y and Z coordinates in your data and
your form grid, and you probably will need to do some experimenting
to determine the best value. Start with the default, then iterate until you
get what you would consider to be the most accurate results. This setting
must be a positive number not zero.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Other Outputs and Controls Tab

Select from multiple X and Y Fields Panel

If the data file contains multiple x and y fields, you must specify which
fields to use. Select the appropriate fields from the drop-down menu.

Other Output Files Panel

Trendform Gridding can now generate a variety of other types of grids
including and Expanded Fault Grid, Fault Filled Grid, and a Fault
Profile similar to Point Gridding Plus and Line Gridding Plus. To learn
more about these types of grids, see the illustration on page 419.
To instruct Trendform Gridding to create these other types of output
files, assign a name and a location to store the new file. Trendform
Gridding automatically generates the new grid and profile files when
you click OK or Apply.

Viewing Results
To view the results of the Trendform grid, follow these steps.
1. Select Features Contouring. Create a contour map of the
Trendform results. When setting the Curve Drawing and Labeling
Parameters, be sure to specify that contours be Colorfilled and set
the Draw Contours Over Colorfill parameter to NO OVERLAY.
2. Select Features Overlay Pictures and overlay the form grid
contours onto the trendform contours to see how well the
colorfilled contours match those of the form grid.

Contouring Form Grids

When you contour a form grid, use the COARSEST setting for the Curve
Sampling Density option.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Example 1. Applying Trendform to Attribute Modeling

Trendform gridding may be used to grid attributes such as water
saturation and porosity. The following figures illustrate the difference
between using moving weighted average gridding without a form grid
and using the same algorithm in Trendform Gridding with a form grid.
.

Figure 1 - Without a Form Grid

Figure 1 shows a moving weighted average
grid of water-saturation data.
Water-saturation values are shown as
colorfilled contours in shades of gray. They
are overlaid by structural contours from the
horizon above the unit to which the
water-saturation values apply. Arrows
indicate parts of the map which emphasize
the tendency of moving weighted average
gridding to produce rounded features.

Figure 2 -
Trendform Gridding with a Form Grid
Figure 2 show contours of the same
water-saturation data shown in Figure1. In
this case, the water-saturation has been
modeled to honor the form of the overlaid
structure contours. Arrows indicate where
honoring the structure grid contours has
elongated water-saturation features.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Example 2: Applying Trendform to Stream Channel Contours

.

Step 1: Stream channel sand thickness data

showing digitized interpretations of the
channel centerlines. Note that the area inside
the dashed box outlines a region where the
centerline interpretation bends 90 degrees
without support from any local positive
thickness data

Step 2: Generate a grid of

distances from digitized
stream channel centerlines.
The underlying distance grid
is used as a form grid for the
data in Step 1. You can
create this grid by selecting
Macros Utilities
Distance-to-Vertex Grid.

Step 3: Generate stream channel

contours to conform to the distance
contours in Step 2

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Line Gridding Plus

Line Gridding Plus provides all the functionality available in classic
Line Gridding and supports new fault handling features present in Point
Gridding Plus. Line Gridding Plus honors your input fault geometry
data to create more accurate horizon models than can be provided by the
classic Line Gridding module. When used in combination with Profile
Contouring, Line Gridding Plus generates high quality maps of faulted
surfaces.
Line Gridding Plus enables you to:
Grid seismic line data with or without fault data.
Build extremely accurate models of faulted horizons, given fault
geometry data.
Model the fault faces cutting a horizon, given fault geometry data.
To understand the new types of fault files that Line Gridding Plus
generates, see the illustration on page 419 under Point Gridding Plus.
Line Grid Plus is a macro derived from the ZCL process
LINEGRIDPLUS. For detailed information about this macro, see the
Macro Reference Manual for Z-MAP Plus / ZCL. To display this guide,
select Help Online Manual Macros Manual, then find the
LINEGRIDPLUS topic.
In the Line Gridding Plus interactive macro dialog boxes, specify the
following information:
input seismic line file
X file on input seismic line file
Z file on input seismic line file
Line ID field on the seismic line file
optional input control grid file
input fault file
input pre-computed fault polygon file
standard grid file name and location, as well as the interpolated
fault file name and location
Optionally, you can assign names and locations to create a blanked
grid file or expanded fault file.
Optionally, you can assign names and locations to create a
fault-filled grid and fault profile data file.
Finally, use a series of dialog boxes to specify gridding
parameters.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Line Gridding Plus Gridding Parameters

The first series of parameters are explained in the following text.

First
Line Gridding
Plus Parameter
Dialog

Data Hull Polygon File Name and MFD Location

Select the name of the Data Hull polygon file and its location in the file
system.

Fault-cut Line File Name and Location

Enter the name of the Fault-cut Line File to be created. The name can be
a maximum of 24 characters long and can contain internal blanks. To
save this file, set the Output Type parameter to either Cut+Save+Grid
or Cut+Save+Nogrid.
If you include fault data, this file must be created regardless of whether
it is saved or not. The original input lines are cut at each fault and saved
as new smaller lines that do not cross the faults. This Fault-cut Line File
is used to build the grid. If you build several grids with Line Gridding
and the same data, then you can save time by saving this file. When
executing Line Gridding by using an already cut line file (Fault-cut Line
File), it becomes the input Line File and the parameter Select Output
Type is set to Already Cut.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Output Type
The output type controls whether a grid is constructed, a line file is cut
by faults, the fault-cut line file is saved, or informs Line Gridding that a
line file has already been cut by faults. When gridding faulted line data,
each line must be broken (cut) when it crosses a fault. These sublines are
given distinct line names and stored in a new lines file. This prevents
line gridding from incorrectly interpolating across a fault. By default
this is done automatically when a fault file is selected.
Possible choices for this parameter include:
Cut+Save+Grid. Cut the input line file using the selected fault file,
save the results (Fault-cut Line Output File Name), and build the grid
using the cut line data. This saved fault-cut line file can be used as the
input Line File if Line Gridding is rerun. The faults would still need to
be selected, and this parameter set to Already Cut.
Cut+Save+Nogrid. Cut the input line file using the selected fault file,
save the results (Fault-cut Line Output File Name), but do Not build the
grid using the cut line data. This saved Fault-cut Line File can be used
as the input Line File when Line Gridding is used to build the grid. The
faults would still need to be selected, and this parameter set to Already
Cut.
Cut+Nosave+Grid (default). Cut the input line file using the selected
fault file, do Not save the results (Fault-cut Line Output File Name), and
build the grid using the cut line data. If Line Gridding was to be rerun
with this same data the line file would again need to be cut with the
faults.
Already Cut. If you are using faults and the line file you are to grid has
already been cut and saved, you can use the saved version as the input
line file and avoid recutting the original lines. When using a saved
fault-cut line file you will still need to select the fault file since the
gridding process needs to know their location. Remember, dont use the
original line file, instead use the Fault-cut Line File as the input Line
File.

Distance Between Point to Cut Line

Enter a number for the maximum distance allowed between two
consecutive points on a line. If the points are farther apart than this
distance, the line is divided into two lines. Since these two points will
lie on separate lines, no interpolation is performed between them when
calculating intersection values between search lines and input data lines.
The default value is ten times the X increment.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Control Grid Usage

This parameter is active only if a grid is selected for the Control Grid
parameter on the first parameters dialog. It controls how information in
the selected Control Grid is used during creation of the grid. Control
grids are a common gridding parameter used by many gridding
methods. For more information about Control Grid Usage settings, see
page 389.

X and Y Grid Increments

Enter numbers representing the distance in the X and Y direction
respectively across the grid cell; these define the X and Y gridding
increments for your grid. The increments default to the same value in
both directions.
If you use a control grid, these values default to those of the control grid.
Usually you want square grid cells, so the X interval should be equal to
the Y interval. A gridding interval that is equal to (but not larger than)
the distance between your closest data points will accurately honor
every data point, but a larger gridding interval will often work equally
well and save some computer time.
A good rule-of-thumb is to select a gridding interval that is half the size
of the smallest feature of importance to your project. If you are
interested in closures that are 100 feet across, choose a 50 foot gridding
interval. However, do not make the gridding interval any smaller than
necessary, as gridding time increases rapidly as the cell size goes down
(e.g., cutting the grid increments in half will increase the compute time
by a factor of about 4).

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

The terms Initial and Final gridding intervals are sometimes used. You
must provide the final gridding intervals. Z-MAP Plus determines the
initial gridding intervals, based on the number of specified refinements
:

Second Line
Gridding Plus
Parameter Dialog

Use the second parameter dialog box to set the following parameters.

X Min, X Max, Y Min, Y Max, Z Min, Z Max

Enter values to use as the output grids minimum and maximum X and
Y coordinate values. The default values for these parameters delineate
an area that is slightly larger (10% of the X or Y range) than the smallest
rectangle that contains the data. If you use a control grid, the default
values are derived from the control grid.
You may want to round the default coordinates to numbers more
appropriate for your project. However, do not make the area any bigger
than required, since the added grid positions will increase the gridding
time, and it may not be possible to compute realistic values if they are
too far from the data.
Enter values that represent the lowest and highest Z-values you want to
appear in the grid. These values default to numbers that are slightly
lower and higher (10% of the range), respectively, than the smallest and
largest data value for the Z-field being gridded. This allows a small
amount of overshoot of grid values above or below data values.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Hull Data Value

Data hull is a common parameter shared by many types of gridding
algorithms, for a description of the different settings, see Data Hulls
on page 390. For Concave Hulls you also need to set the following
Radius parameter.

Radius (for CONCAVE HULLs)

Radius (for Concave Hull 1 and Concave Hull 2)

For Concave Hull 1 and Concave Hull 2, you are required to enter a
value for the radius of your data hull. The value set for this radius draws
the circle used to calculate which nodes are initialized and which treated
as null values. All grid nodes beyond the hull are blanked. A larger
radius stays closer to the outside boundary of the data and a smaller
radius will tend to move inside the original boundary. Then, the
Extrapolation setting is used to draw the actual hull around the
initialized data points.

Hull Radius is Different From the Search Radius

This parameter is different from the Search Radius parameter which is set in the
Primary Parameters dialog box.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Extrapolation Mode
Extrapolation Mode controls whether grid nodes outside the data
perimeter are assigned Z-values up to the grid edges or just to a specified
distance from the perimeter. Possible choices for this parameter include:
X-Distance (default). Extrapolated values will be calculated away from
the data perimeter as far as the value entered in the Extrapolation
Distance parameter. Using this setting and setting the Extrapolation
Distance parameter to a very large number will have the same effect as
choosing Grid Edges.
Grid Edges. The Extrapolation Distance parameter are ignored and
node values calculated everywhere in the grid.

Third
Line Gridding Plus
Parameter Dialog

The third Line Gridding Plus dialog allows you to set the following
flexing parameters. The Flexing parameters are common to many
gridding methods. To learn more about how they work, see page 393.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Extrapolation Distance
Enter a number representing the distance beyond the perimeter of the
data within which grid nodes are forced to be calculated. The default is
equal to the Search Radius.
If search radius, minimum number of points, number of sectors, or any
other parameters restrict node calculation to less than this distance,
those parameters are overridden by this parameter. Override means that
node values will be calculated even if those other parameters would
prevent this from happening. To prevent this override, you need to set
the Extrapolation Distance to 0.

Minimum Number of Fault Crossings

In the data collection phase of gridding, this number refers to the
maximum number of fault crossings allowed between a data point and a
grid node

Gridding Extrapolation Limit Method

There are five possible methods to use with data hull extrapolations.
These methods are common gridding parameters and are defined on
page 392 in the Data Hulls description. The default is DATA
DISTRIBUTION which sets no limits.

Number of Refinements
Refinements halve the grid increment to allow you to achieve finer
detail for your map. Enter a value that represents the number of times
the final grid intervals are doubled when determining the settings for the
initial grid increment values. These initial grid increments are used to
build an initial grid, that initial grid will be resampled to half its grid
increments and then flexed. This process is repeated number of
Refinement times until the final grid increment is reached. This defaults
to 1 and the range of valid values is 0 to 5.
Refinements are used in many types of gridding methods, and are
described further on page 393.

Type of Flexing
This parameter controls which type of flexing is done (which filter is
used). The Type of Flexing parameter is common to many gridding
methods. To learn more, see page 524.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Smoothness Modulus
In the Smoothness Modulus box, enter a value to specify the extent to
which you want to smooth the grid at the expense of honoring the data.
You can enter any value between 0 and 1. The default setting is 0.2.
With a value of 0 (zero), if smoothing pushes the surface away from the
data, Z-MAP Plus brings it back to exactly honor the data. A value of 1
(one) produces the smoothest grid, without regard for precisely fitting
the grid to the data. With the default value of 0.2, if smoothing pushes
the surface away from the data, Z-MAP Plus brings it back at least 20%
of the way toward the data. This Smoothness Modulus affects nodes that
are within 5 or 6 grid increments from the data.
To achieve an optimum trade-off between accuracy and smoothness,
you may need to produce several test grids that each use a different
smoothness modulus. The Smoothness Modulus is often used with
seismic data, with its value shifted towards 1. The effect is to remove
some of the wobble from contours that cross or run along seismic lines.
The Smoothness Modulus parameter is common to many types of
gridding methods. To learn more, see page 525.

Type of Flexing
The Type of Flexing Type shows which type of flexing is specified
whether flexing is performed with a Biharmonic filter, Laplacian filter,
both filters, or no filter. (For a description of the flexing types, see
page 524.)

Number of Flex Passes

In the Number of Flex Passes box, enter the number of flexing passes to
execute (if the Control of Passes setting is FLEX = NUMPASS) or the
maximum number of flexing passes to execute (if the Control of Passes
button reads FLEX <= NUMPASS). The default value is 10.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Control of Passes
Use the Control of Passes setting to specify one of these conditions:
FLEX = NUMPASS (default) Continue flexing until the
Number of Flex Passes value is met.
FLEX <= NUMPASS Stop flexing as soon as either the Cutoff
or Number of Flex Passes value is met.

Cutoff
In the Cutoff box, enter a number to use as a test value to determine
when to stop flexing. Flexing continues until the amount of change from
one pass to the next is smaller than the Cutoff value. The default Cutoff
value is 0.25, which typically results in three to six flexing passes.
For information about how the Cutoff test works, see page 525.

Final
Line Gridding Plus
Parameter Dialog

Use the final parameter dialog box to set the Dip Angle Unit of measure
(either DEGREES or RADIANS) and the type of report printed to the
System window.

Report Type
You have three choices concerning the extent of the processing analysis
report: None, Partial, and Full.
None indicates that you do not wish to see the report.
Partial gives you a summary report.
Full gives you a full report.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Line Gridding

Overview
Line Gridding is an interpolation technique which builds a grid from
line data such as seismic, gravity, or bathymetric surveys. The algorithm
uses knowledge that adjacent points in the file, if they have the same line
name, represent a continuous profile along the surface. With this
knowledge, the algorithm can be an order of magnitude faster than the
Least Squares algorithm for the same data, and yet produce results of
comparable quality.
In addition to digitized line data, Line Gridding can also use randomly
scattered data, such as well data. Other controls on the gridding process
include faults, x,y,z limits, grid increments, filters, and upper and lower
limits during filtering.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Enter from Modeling in the

Z-MAP Plus window

Select line file

Select line data Z-field

Is surface
Yes No
cut by
faults?
Select fault file

Select output file name(s) and type(s)

Define gridding
Define parameters or Accept
accept defaults?

Set primary parameters

Flex the
Yes grid? No

Set flexing parameters

Select control points and Z-field

Apply

A Line Gridding Report appears

Save and return to

Z-MAP Plus window

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Line Gridding Workflow

Line Gridding Algorithm

Line Gridding first reconstructs the original lines by connecting the
sequentially digitized points along the lines with straight line segments.
It distinguishes between lines by noting when the name in the line name
field changes (i.e., your data must have a line name field). If faults are
used, then Line Gridding must build a new line file from the old file and
the faults. The lines are broken when they cross faults, and the line
segments on either side of the fault are given different line names. This
prevents the algorithm from incorrectly interpolating across faults.
Then, Line Gridding constructs a network of four search lines, two
along rows and columns of the grid to be built and two at 45 degrees to
those search lines which pass through node locations. Z-values are
stored with these search lines at every spot where the lines cross a
reconstructed digitized line. Linear interpolation between points on the
digitized line produces this value.
When it is time to calculate a value for a grid node, only the four search
lines that radiate from that node are used. For each line, the search-line/
data-line intersection point on either side of the node, and nearest to it,
are used. A straight line is fit between those two points and its slope is
calculated. Next, on the side of the search line where the intersection
point is closest to the node, an additional intersection point is picked up.
A straight line fit is made between those two intersections on that side
of the node and its slope is stored. The two slopes are then averaged and
used to project a line from the nearest intersection point towards the
node. A value from this final projected line is calculated at the grid node
location and stored as that search lines value.
This process is repeated for the other three search lines. The resulting
values are weighted by distance to the nearest intersection point on each
search line and averaged together to create the nodes initial value. After
the initialization, filtering is applied to these node values.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Line File
A list of files is presented. Point to and click the file you want. This file
will be used as input when the option executes. The line data file is a
control point file (seismic data) where data is ordered as consecutive
points along lines. It must have a line name field in order to distinguish
one line from another.
If faults are being used and a Fault-cut Line File was previously created,
then that file can be input here rather than in the original Line File. When
this is done, you must set the parameter Select Output Type to Already
Cut.

Line Z-field
Select the horizon (depth or time field) for which you are making the
grid. This input field will be used when the option executes. Fields in
this list were picked from a previously selected file.

Faults
A list of fault files is presented. Point to and click the fault file you want.
Faults are needed only when building surfaces cut by faults. When faults
are used, grid nodes are calculated using only data located on the same
side of the faults as the node. A fault file must have been previously
constructed in order to be available for this option.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Output File Name(s) & Types

Use this dialog box to specify the following input values:
which files are created
output grid file name
MFD to use for storing the output grid
name of the line file modified by intersection with a the fault file
MFD to use for storing the modified line file

Select Output Type

The output type controls whether a grid is constructed, a line file is cut
by faults, the fault-cut line file is saved, or informs Line Gridding that a
line file has already been cut by faults. When gridding faulted line data,
each line must be broken (cut) when it crosses a fault. These sublines are
given distinct line names and stored in a new lines file. This prevents
line gridding from incorrectly interpolating across a fault. By default
this is done automatically when a fault file is selected.
The choices for this parameter are:
Cut+Save+Grid Cut the input line file using the selected fault
file, save the results (Fault-cut Line Output File Name), and build
the grid using the cut line data. This saved fault-cut line file can be
used as the input Line File if Line Gridding is rerun. The faults
would still need to be selected, and this parameter set to Already
Cut.
Cut+Save+Nogrid Cut the input line file using the selected
fault file, save the results (Fault-cut Line Output File Name), but
do Not build the grid using the cut line data. This saved Fault-cut
Line File can be used as the input Line File when Line Gridding is
used to build the grid. The faults would still need to be selected,
and this parameter set to Already Cut.
Cut+Nosave+Grid (default value) Cut the input line file using
the selected fault file, do Not save the results (Fault-cut Line
Output File Name), and build the grid using the cut line data. If
Line Gridding was to be rerun with this same data the line file
would again need to be cut with the faults.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Already Cut If you are using faults and the line file you are to
grid has already been cut and saved, you can use the saved version
as the input line file and avoid recutting the original lines. When
using a saved fault-cut line file you will still need to select the fault
file since the gridding process needs to know their location.
Remember, dont use the original line file, instead use the Fault-cut
Line File as the input Line File.

Output Grid Name

Enter the name of the grid to be created. The name can be a maximum
of 24 characters long and can contain internal blanks.

Output Grid Master File

When you click the parameter box, a popup menu appears, listing the
attached MFDs and scratch file. Select the MFD to use for storing the
output file.

Fault-cut Line Output File Name

Enter the name of the Fault-cut Line File to be created; this name may
be up to 24 characters long and may contain internal blanks. To have this
file saved you will need to set the Select Output Type parameter to either
Cut+Save+Grid or Cut+Save+Nogrid.
If faults are used, this file must be created regardless of whether it is
saved or not. The original input lines are cut at each fault and saved as
new smaller lines that do not cross the faults. This Fault-cut Line File is
then used to build the grid. If several grids are to be built using Line
Gridding and the same data, then time can be saved by saving this file.
When executing Line Gridding using an already cut line file (Fault-cut
Line File), it becomes the input Line File and the parameter Select
Output Type is set to Already Cut.

Fault-cut Line Output Master File

When you click the parameter box, a popup menu appears, listing the
attached MFDs and scratch file. Select the MFD to use for storing the
output file.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Primary Parameters
This dialog box allows you to specify the X and Y limits, X and Y grid
increments, maximum and minimum Z-values, distance to search when
looking for data, the maximum separation distance between lines for
data to be interpolated, the extrapolation mode, and extrapolation
distance.
Most users have found that altering grid increments has the most
significant effect on surface form and honoring data. They have also
found that, for large volumes of data, reducing the Search Radius will
speed up the gridding process dramatically.

Minimum and Maximum X and Y Coordinates

Enter values to be used as the minimum and maximum X and Y
coordinates for the output grid. The default values for these parameters
delineate an area that is slightly larger (10% of X or Y range) than the
smallest rectangle that contains your data.
You may want to round the default coordinates to numbers more
appropriate for your project. However, do not make the area any bigger
than required since the added grid positions will increase the gridding
time and it may not be possible to compute realistic values if they are
too far from the data.

X and Y Gridding Increments

Enter numbers representing the distance in the X and Y direction,
respectively, across the grid cell. These define the X and Y gridding
increments for your grid. The increments default to the same value in
both directions. They are calculated as:

( XMax XMin ) ( YMax YMin )

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8 Number of Points
The default is usually smaller than desired, and was designed to try and
honor every shotpoint. Often, you will not want to honor every shotpoint
because of the inherent noise in the data. Grid intervals that place 2 or 3
shot points in a grid cell will sometimes produce a smoother more
appealing surface model.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Many mappers feel that the features of importance should control the
grid interval decision rather than the data. A good rule-of-thumb is to
select a gridding interval that is half the size of the smallest feature of
importance to your project. If you are interested in closures that are 100
feet across, choose a 50 foot gridding interval. However, do not make
the gridding interval any smaller than necessary, since gridding time
increases rapidly as cell size goes down (e.g. cutting the grid increments
in half will increase the compute time by a factor of about 4 for Point
Gridding and, although not as severe, will still have an impact on Line
Gridding).
The terms initial and final gridding intervals are sometimes used. You
must provide the final gridding intervals. Z-MAP Plus determine the
initial gridding intervals, based on the number of specified refinements.

Minimum and Maximum Z Values

Enter numbers representing the maximum and minimum Z-values for
the output grid. These values are defaulted to numbers that are slightly
smaller and larger (10% of Z-range), respectively, than the smallest and
largest data value for the Z-field being gridded. This allows a small
amount of overshoot of the grid values above or below the data values.

ZNON Value
Enter the value to be used as ZNON (null value) when this field is
written by Z-MAP Plus. This value can be any valid number supported
by your computer. It is best not to use a number between the minimum
and maximum value in the field, as this creates many problems when
building grids and when drawing contours from those grids. The
Z-MAP Plus default is 0.1E31.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Search Radius
This is not really used as a radius but as a distance. Enter the distance
(Search Radius) that is the maximum allowed separation between
search-line/data-line intersection points, along a search line. When two
adjacent intersections are spaced wider apart than the specified Search
Radius, no grid node values will be Interpolated for that search line
using those two intersections.
Instead, the closest of the intersections to the grid node are used to
determine an Extrapolated value (a line is fit between two intersection
points on that side and closest to the node and projected to the node). If
interpolated values can be generated for any of that nodes other search
lines, then this extrapolation is disregarded and the interpolation(s) are
used. If all of that nodes search line values are determined by
extrapolation, then those values will be averaged to determine the
nodes initial value.
The default value is half the diagonal of the grid.

Break Line Distance

Enter a number representing the maximum allowed distance between
two consecutive points on the same line. If the points are greater than
this distance apart, then the line will be separated into two lines. Since
these two points will then lie on separate lines, no interpolation will be
performed between these points when calculating intersection values
between search lines and input data lines. The default is ten times the
X-increment.

Extrapolation Mode
Extrapolation Mode controls whether grid nodes outside the data
perimeter are assigned Z-values up to the grid edges or just to a specified
distance from the perimeter. Possible choices for this parameter include:
X-Distance (default). Extrapolated values will be calculated away from
the data perimeter as far as the value entered in the Extrapolation
Distance parameter. Using this setting and setting the Extrapolation
Distance parameter to a very large number will have the same effect as
choosing Grid Edges.
Grid Edges. The Extrapolation Distance parameter will be ignored and
node values calculated everywhere in the grid.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Extrapolation Distance
Enter a number representing the distance away from the data perimeter
within which grid node values can be calculated. All nodes beyond this
distance are assigned a ZNON value. The default is 2 times the grid
increment.

How the Data Perimeter is Determined

If a grid nodes search line has search-line/data-line intersection points
on both sides of the node, and the distance between those two
intersections is less than the Search Radius, then the intersections are
used to Interpolate a value for the node. If the search line has an
intersection point on only one side of the node or the distance between
intersection points exceeds the Search Radius, then only one value is
used (the nearest) to Extrapolate a value for the node. When all of a
nodes search line values are determined through Extrapolation, then a
test is run to determine if the node is greater than Extrapolation Distance
away from the closest intersection point. If more than this distance, then
the node is assigned a ZNON. If any of the nodes search line values are
determined by Interpolation, then a value is calculated for the node.

Flexing Parameters
This dialog box allows you to select:
the type of flexing to perform
when to stop flexing
how much to honor the data
whether the input Line File data are used
upper and lower band (surfaces) within which the flexed surface
must remain
Flexing, sometimes called Filter or Relaxation, is used to
simultaneously smooth the grid and tie it to the data. Flexings primary
purpose is to remove small surface irregularities in the initial surface
that are not supported by data. These irregularities were put into the
surface during initialization and are undesirable in the final surface
model.
The Flexing parameters are common to many gridding methods. To
learn more, see page 524.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Type of Flexing
The Type of Flexing Type shows which type of flexing is specified
whether flexing is performed with a Biharmonic filter, Laplacian filter,
both filters or no filter.
Biharmonic (default) Adjusts grid values so that the surface
resembles a rigid surface (like a handsaw) that bends slowly and
smoothly from one inflection point to another. This is sometimes called
a minimum curvature or minimum tension surface.
Laplacian Adjusts grid values so that the surface resembles a
balloon or soap bubble that comes quickly back to the average surface
position away from inflection points. Sticking your finger into a balloon
would cause the surface to dimple at your finger and quickly return to
its original form away from your finger. This is sometimes called a high
tension surface.
Combination This is a repeated application of first the Biharmonic
and then the Laplacian filter. Its results are not easily predictable, but
fall somewhere between Biharmonic and Laplacian, probably a little
closer to the Biharmonic, since it is the first filter applied.

Cutoff
In the Cutoff box, enter a number to use as a test value to determine
when to stop flexing. Flexing continues until the amount of change from
one pass to the next is smaller than the Cutoff value. The default Cutoff
value is 0.25, which typically results in three to six flexing passes.
For information about how the Cutoff test works, see page 525.

Number of Refinements
Enter a value that represents the number of times the final grid intervals
are doubled when determining the settings for the initial grid increment
values. These initial grid increments will then be used to build an initial
grid. Next, that grid will be resampled to half its grid increments and
then flexed. This process is repeated Number of Refinement times until
the final grid increment is reached. This defaults to 0 and the range of
valid numbers is 0 to 5.

Number of Flex Passes

In the Number of Flex Passes box, enter the number of flexing passes to
execute (if the Control of Passes setting is FLEX = NUMPASS) or the
maximum number of flexing passes to execute (if the Control of Passes
button reads FLEX <= NUMPASS). The default value is 10.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Control of Passes
Use the Control of Passes setting to specify one of these conditions:
FLEX = NUMPASS (default) Continue flexing until the
Number of Flex Passes value is met.
FLEX <= NUMPASS Stop flexing as soon as either the Cutoff
or Number of Flex Passes value is met.

Smoothness Modulus
In the Smoothness Modulus box, enter a value to specify the extent to
which you want to smooth the grid at the expense of honoring the data.
You can enter any value between 0 and 1. The default setting is 0.2.
With a value of 0 (zero), if smoothing pushes the surface away from the
data, Z-MAP Plus brings it back to exactly honor the data. A value of 1
(one) produces the smoothest grid, without regard for precisely fitting
the grid to the data. With the default value of 0.2, if smoothing pushes
the surface away from the data, Z-MAP Plus brings it back at least 20%
of the way toward the data. This Smoothness Modulus affects nodes that
are within 5 or 6 grid increments from the data.
To achieve an optimum trade-off between accuracy and smoothness,
you may need to produce several test grids that each use a different
smoothness modulus. The Smoothness Modulus is often used with
seismic data, with its value shifted towards 1. The effect is to remove
some of the wobble from contours that cross or run along seismic lines.
The Smoothness Modulus parameter is common to many types of
gridding methods. To learn more, see page 525.

Use Created Points in Flexing

Controls whether the original Line File data is used when flexing.
Normally, you will want to use this data. However, when using the
Upper/Lower Bias and Multiplier parameters, many mappers prefer not
to use the original data. This is because they are usually trying to smooth
out data noise with that parameter. Possible choices include:

Seismic Unused. Do not use the original Line File data when flexing.
If a fault file was input, it will still be used.

Seismic Used (default). Use the original Line File data when flexing.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Upper/Lower Bias and Multiplier Parameters

A limiting band (pair of surfaces) may be placed above and below the
gridded surface to constrain flexing. These limiting surfaces are
obtained by adding constants to each nodes value or by multiplying
each nodes value by constants. This shifts the grid to be flexed up and
down. Then, when a node is flexed its flexed value is compared to the
upper and lower limit surfaces. If the (flexed) node exceeds one of the
limits, it is set to that limit. Because flexing is normally run several
times, this constraint does not produce a clipped grid with a sharp
discontinuity, but creates a grid that approaches the limit surface
asymptotically.
This capability is often used to take the wobble out of contours. A good
first try for the values is to add and subtract 20% of the contour interval
used to display the surface. If the contour interval were 10, then an upper
bias of 2 and lower bias of 2 might produce desirable results.

Upper Surface Bias

Enter a value to be added to each nodes value. This value forms an
upper limit surface to constrain flexing. This value should be positive
and defaults to 0. See Use Contour Constraints? on page 463.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Lower Surface Bias

Enter a value to be added to each nodes value. This value forms a lower
limit surface to constrain flexing. This value should be negative and
defaults to 0. See Use Contour Constraints? on page 463.

Upper Surface Multiplier

Enter a value to multiply each nodes value by. This value forms an
upper limit surface to constrain flexing. This value should be greater
than 1 and defaults to 1. See Use Contour Constraints? on page 463.

Lower Surface Multiplier

Enter a value to multiply each nodes value by. This value forms a lower
limit surface to constrain flexing. This value should be less than 1 and
defaults to 1. See Use Contour Constraints? on page 463.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Trend Fit Gridding

Enter from Modeling on

Z-MAP Plus main menu

Select input file

Select Z-field to be gridded, if desired

Enter output grid name, AOI

Enter X and Y block factor and display

preferences for mean and residuals

Apply

Results of Trend Fit Gridding appear on

Save and return to

Z-MAP Plus main menu

Trend Fit Gridding Workflow

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Overview
Trend Fit Gridding produces a grid of the regional components of a
surface such as the general dip or the major highs and lows. A trend grid
can be built using either data or another grid. The extent to which the
trend grid fits the data is controlled by the number of terms that are used
to compute the trend.
Once a trend grid has been built, it can be subtracted from a
conventionally built grid (point, line, or contour gridding) to create a
residual grid. The residual represents the local (small) variations of the
surface from the trend. Often these variations are masked by the regional
component, and consequently this technique can provide significant
geologic insight. The trend grid will itself often provide significant
geologic information.
Another application of trend grids is to assist in building grids of
complex geologic surfaces. Standard algorithms may have difficulty
modeling a particular surface form. If the trend can be removed from
that data, then those algorithms will often be able to effectively model
the residuals. The trend and residual grids can then be combined to
create the final surface grid
.

Select Input File

Point to and click the file you want. Either control point data or a grid
may be used to generate a trend grid. If you select a data file, then a field
from this file will be used when the option executes.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Z-Field (for Data Input)

A list of fields is presented. Select the Z-field that will be used to
calculate the trend. Fields in this list were picked from a previously
selected file.

Output Grid Name, Primary Parameters

Use this dialog box to specify the following input values:
name of the grid file
MFD to use for storing the grid file
number of terms for the trend grid
X and Y limits
X and Y grid increments
maximum and minimum Z-values

Output Grid Name

Enter the name of the grid to be created; this name may be up to 24
characters long and may contain internal blanks.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Output Grid Master File

When you click the parameter box, a popup menu appears, listing the
attached MFDs and scratch file. Select the MFD to use for storing the
output file.

Number of Terms
The Number of Terms used to build a trend grid controls the form of the
surface model produced. You can specify from 1 to 28 terms. As the
term increases in value, the curvature of the grid becomes greater, fitting
the data more closely. With lower terms (less curvature), there is less
chance for the grid to extrapolate wildly. With higher terms there is a
greater chance for wild extrapolations. However, large amounts of
evenly distributed data help control these extrapolations.
Term refers to the number of items in the equation for the surface. For
example, a 3-term equation would be Z = c + aX + bY. The values for
the coefficients of the equation (c, a, b) are determined in such a way
that the surface generated by the equation fits as close as possible to all
the data (i.e., it is like a Least Squares fit to the data).
There is a relationship between term and order of an equation. The order
refers to the highest power of the equation. For example, Z = c is a 0th
order, Z = c + aX + bY is a 1st order, Z = c + aX + bY + dX2 + eY2 +
fXY is a 2nd order. Most mappers try to work with a number of terms
that fill out an order. A term-to-order table follows:

Terms Order
----- -----
1 0
3 1
6 2
10 3
15 4
21 5
28 6

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Minimum and Maximum X and Y Coordinates

Enter values to be used as the minimum and maximum X and Y
coordinates for the output grid. When a trend is built from a grid, these
values default to the X and Y limits of the input grid. When using data,
these default to an area that is slightly larger (10% of the X and Y
ranges) than the smallest rectangle that contains the data. Often you will
be planning to operate the resulting trend grid against other grids. If so,
you will need to adjust the X and Y coordinates of the trend grid to
match coordinates of these other grids.

X and Y Gridding Increments

Enter numbers representing the distance in the X and Y direction
respectively, across the grid cell. These numbers define the X and Y
gridding increments for your grid. Usually you want square grid cells
(i.e., the X interval should equal to the Y interval). When a trend is built
from a grid, these values default to those of the input grid. When using
data, these values default to increments that produce about four grid
cells for every data point. They are calculated as:

( XMax XMin ) ( YMax YMin )

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
8 Number of Points
The size of the grid increment will have little if any effect on the time it
takes to build a trend grid (the size of the input grid, or amount of data
has much more effect). It will also have no affect on the shape of the
trend grid. Normally you will want to match the trend grid increment to
that of other grids you will eventually be operating the output grid
against.

Minimum and Maximum Z Values

Enter values that represent the upper and lower Z-values that will appear
in the grid. If calculated values exceed these limits, they will be replaced
with the ZNON value. When using input data, the minimum and
maximum node values are defaulted to numbers slightly smaller and
larger (10% of Z-range) than the smallest and largest data value of the
Z-field or grid being modeled. When using a grid as input these default
to the maximum and minimum values of the grid.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Input Grid (Blocking) Parameters

When computing a trend grid from an existing grid, you can block
average. Block averaging divides your grid into sets of blocks, each
containing an equal number of rows and columns. The grid nodes in
each block are averaged. These average values are used to determine the
trend fit instead of the individual grid nodes. This method reduces the
CPU time required to generate a grid, normally, without causing
significant changes in the results.
Trend gridding is sensitive to anomalous data values (spikes in the grid).
Block averaging can often reduce the effects of individual spikes.

X and Y Block Factors

Enter the number of grid columns (X Factor) and rows (Y Factor) to be
included in each block when building a trend from an input grid. Block
Averaging is always done when the input is a grid; however, the default
factor is 1, so averaging has no effect.

Mean Information Display

This option determines whether to display mean and standard deviation
information.
Display Mean will cause the information to be displayed.
No Display Mean will cause the information not to be displayed.

Residual Display
Residual Display determines whether the residual as a fraction of the
standard deviation is displayed.
Display ResidDisplays the information.
No Display Resid Does not display the information.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Trend Surface Grid

The Trend Surface Grid option calls the TREND-ANAL-GRID macro
and creates a trend grid and a residual grid by:
building a trend grid of a specified order from the supplied surface
grid
subtracting the trend grid from the supplied surface grid and
creating the residual grid

Execute This Command Twice

You must execute the macro twice: once to view the histogram and determine
the correct number of terms and once again to perform the final trend analysis.

Typically, you would first look at a map of the residuals and a map of
the surface input grid on which contours from the trend grid have been
overlaid. Alternatively, you can display the residuals as colorfill and
overlay the contours of the input surface grid and trend grids. Using
either of these methods, localized high or low residual features, which
are geologically regarded as anomalies, can be easily identified.
Many application scenarios exist. For example, this macro may be used
to generate residuals and a trend surface from a velocity grid. On
examining the residuals, you could then identify high velocity, pull-up
areas
.

You are asked to input:

names of the output trend and residual grids

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

grid from which the trend grid is to be created

number of terms desired

To Process Data Files, Use Trend Gridding

This macro only uses grid files for input. When dealing with data files, you
must use Gridding Trend Gridding.

A grid containing a trend surface and a grid for the residual between the
input grid and the trend grid is created.

Using Trend Surface Gridding

The TREND-ANAL-GRID macro performs a Least Squares fit to grid
data to produce a grid model that represents the large scale regional
trend of the surface. The trend grid may be subtracted from the surface
grid model to reveal small scale surface features (residuals) that would
be otherwise obscured by the regional trend. This is called Trend and
Residual Analysis and it may be used to identify bad input data points.

Factors Affecting Trend Gridding Accuracy

Although the TREND-ANAL-GRID macro only accepts grid data as
input, this Technical Note discusses the use of both grid and control
point data.
Trend Gridding produces a grid of the large scale regional components
of a surface from either control point or grid data. The extent to which
the trend grid models the regional trend is controlled by the number of
terms in the polynomial expression used to compute the trend fit. In
addition, although the same data may be used to generate a trend grid
and map, drastic differences may appear when one surface trend is
generated from a grid and the other is generated directly from control
point data. Three factors that contribute to these differences are:
spatial distribution of the data
number of terms used in the computations
accuracy of the trend fit

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Spatial Distribution
The spatial distribution of the data is of primary importance in trend
gridding. Data that is evenly spaced throughout a field, as is grid data,
produces a trend that models the surface in a consistent manner. On the
other hand, data that is clustered, such as control point data, produces a
trend grid that resembles the structure of only the clustered areas. (You
have the option of inputting control point data when executing
Gridding Trend Gridding.) For this reason, the impact type data
can strongly affect the resulting trend grid.

Control Point Data In Trend Gridding

Trend grids generated from control point data are extremely sensitive to
the spatial distribution of the data. When the control points are evenly
spaced over the surface, the trend produced closely resembles the trend
produced from a a grid. However, if the control points are clustered, the
resulting trend differs from that produced from a grid.
Unlike the evenly distributed grid nodes, clustered control points
produce a trend that only accurately models those surface areas having
the highest concentration of control points.
Control point data is of greatest use when you wish to extend trend
analysis around a cluster of control points, or when you have a random
distribution of control points throughout the area. Also, because there
are typically fewer data points in a control point file than in a grid file,
processing time is less.
Control point data may be used as input when executing Modeling
Trend Gridding.

Grid Data in Trend Gridding

Trend grids generated from grid data more accurately reflect the overall
trend because the grid nodes are evenly distributed. However, grid data
files are typically large and can take a long time to process. For this
reason, interactive Trend Gridding gives you the ability to block
average. (The TREND-ANAL-GRID macro takes all the defaults found
in interactive Trend Gridding.)

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Number of Terms
Another consideration is the number of terms used in the trend fit. The
higher the number, the more flexion there can be in the trend surface and
the closer it fits the data. However, it also allows the trend surface to
climb or drop steeply in regions of low data concentration near the edge
of the grid. It is desirable to use the lowest number of terms that
adequately describe the surface.
When using evenly distributed data, a higher term number may be
selected to generate a trend model that closely fits the data. However, if
the data is not evenly distributed, the great amount of flexion from the
higher term numbers causes sporadic behavior in the trend.

Limiting the Number of Terms

Because the amount of flexion can cause inconsistency in the gridding of
various data distribution types, it is generally best to select the lowest number
of terms that adequately describe the surface.

Accuracy of the Trend Fit

To help determine the accuracy, or fit, of a trend grid to the actual data,
the Normalized Absolute Standard Deviation of the Residuals Graph
and the Residuals in Terms of the Standard Deviation Graph are
displayed. These are discussed in the following paragraphs.

Normalized Absolute Standard Deviation of the Residuals

Graph
The Normalized Absolute Standard Deviation of the Residuals Graph
helps you determine the lowest number of terms that adequately
describe the surface. When viewing the display, the smaller the absolute
standard deviation of the residuals, the better the trend fit. The number
of terms needed to produce an adequate trend model can be recognized
when an addition of terms to the trend fit no longer significantly reduces
the standard deviation of the residual. If you draw a curve through the
graph, the number of terms listed where the curve flattens out is the one
to use.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

In the following example, four to six terms might be used as a

reasonable number of terms. This is a second order trend.
NORMALIZED ABSOLUTE STANDARD DEVIATION OF THE
RESIDUALS FOR POLYNOMIAL OF GIVEN NUMBER OF TERMS
MAXIMUM VALUE = 0.27539E+02
I + +
I + +
I + + +
I + + + + + + + + + +
I + + + + + + + + + +
I + + + + + + + + + +
I + + + + + + + + + +
I + + + + + + + + + +
I + + + + + + + + + +
I + + + + + + + + + +
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 910
RESIDUAL MEAN = -0.13525E-05
STANDARD DEVIATION = 0.16910E+0

Residuals in Terms of the Standard Deviation Graph

This graph helps you determine how well the number of terms selected
fits the data. A good fit produces a normal distribution of approximately
0. In a typical normal distribution, less than 1% of the data is expected
to have a standard deviation greater than 3. Data points that fall into this
category are poorly fitted and are randomly distributed throughout the
surface. Points in this area may represent bad data. If the curve is
skewed, there is at least one region of the surface that is poorly modeled
by the trend. The following figure shows a significant number of data
points that are poorly modeled due to data clustering.
RESIDUAL MEAN = -0.13525E-05
STANDARD DEVIATION = 0.16910E+0
*** CALCULATING TREND FIT RESIDUALS ***
RESIDUALS IN TERMS OF THE STANDARD DEVIATION
FROM 3.0.SIGMA TO -3.0.SIGMA IN 0.5.SIGMA BINS
I + +
I + +
I + +
I + +
I + +
I + +
I + + + + +
I + + + + + +
I + + + + + + + +
I + + + + + + + + + + +
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 91011121314

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Block Averaging
Block averaging divides your grid file into a set of blocks, each
containing an equal number of rows and columns. The grid nodes in
each block are averaged to produce a mean z value for each block. These
mean values are used to determine the trend fit instead of the individual
grid node values. Block averaging drastically reduces the CPU time
required by the Trend Gridding Algorithm without significantly
changing the results.

UsING Trend Gridding For Block Averaging

Block Averaging is currently not available in the TREND-ANAL-GRID
macro; however, it is provided in Modeling Trend Fit Gridding.

Output Grid Parameters

When you use a grid file, the default parameters are identical to those of
your input grid. However, the Trend Gridding option gives you the
ability to modify the output trend grid by selecting different (x,y)
minimums, maximums, and grid increments.When you process multiple
grids, the gridding parameters must be compatible with all others.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Limiting Z Values
Limiting the minimum and maximum z values of the grid eliminates
drastic overshoot of the grid values above and below the data values,
especially when you are using 3rd order, or higher polynomials. Set the
minimum z value slightly smaller than the smallest data value, and the
maximum z value slightly larger than the largest data value.
****** PROCESS DUALGRIDOPS USE 15508 ******
Apply operation SUBTRACT

to grid ONE WAY TIME TO TOP and

to grid trend 1 ,

GRID FILE:ONE WAY TIME TO TOP

CREATED: 20 JAN 93
AT: 21:03

GRID FILE:trend 1
CREATED: 21 JAN 93
AT: 13:33

GRID FILE: resid 1

CREATED: 21 JAN 93
AT: 13:33

NUMBER OF ROWS = 156

NUMBER OF COLUMNS = 156
NUMBER OF Z-VALUE NODES = 24246
NUMBER OF ZNON NODES = 90
MINIMUM X COORDINATE = 635550.00
MAXIMUM X COORDINATE = 638650.00
MINIMUM Y COORDINATE = 5441880.0
MAXIMUM Y COORDINATE = 5444980.0
Grid statistics X INTERVAL BETWEEN COLUMNS = 20.000000
on the residual Y INTERVAL BETWEEN ROWS = 20.000000
MAXIMUM SURFACE VALUE = 68.618958
MINIMUM SURFACE VALUE = -29.918396
SURFACE RANGE = 98.537354
MEAN OF Z = -0.15759882
ROOT MEAN SQUARE OF Z = 16.731031
STANDARD DEVIATION OF Z = 16.730289
RELATIVE VARIATION OF Z = -106.15745
ROOT MEAN SQUARE CURVATURE OF Z = 0.52230442E-02
****** PROCESS MACROEND USE 15509 ******
****** PROCESS STOP USE 55 ******
** NORMAL TERMINATION **
PROCESSING FINISHED PLEASE CONTINUE

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Polynomial Number
Expression
Order of Terms

0 1 A (Constant)

1st 2 x
3 y
2nd 4 x2
5 xy
6 y2

3rd 7 x3
8 x2y
9 xy2
10 y3

4th 11 x4
12 x3y
13 x2y2
14 xy3
15 y4

5th 16 x5
17 x4y
18 x3y2
19 x2y3
20 xy4
21 y5

6th 22 x6
23 x5y
24 x4y2
25 x3y3
26 x2y4
27 xy5
28 y6

For example, a second order (6 term) polynomial would consist of the

following expression:
A + k 1 x + k 2 y + k 3 x 2 + k 4 xy + k 5 y 2
where kn, the coefficients, are calculated from the data.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Boolean Grid
The Boolean Grid method creates a Boolean grid of 0.0s and 1.0s to
indicate where a formation lies at each node (as in the following
example, which shows a formation below, equal to, or above the Oil
Water Contact level). The Boolean Grid method calls the
GRID-LT-EQ-GT macro.
The Boolean Grid method reads an input grid and produces an output
grid in which each input node is replaced by a flag value that indicates
whether the input Z value is Less Than, Equal To, or Greater Than a
designated Z level value.
GRID-LT-EQ-GT takes the following input:
A grid file
A Z level and equality tolerance setting
Flag values
For more information about Boolean Grid parameters, see Help
Online Manuals Macros Manual, then locate the
GRID-LT-EQ-GT topic.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Constant Grid
The Constant Grid method builds a constant grid from user-defined
input. This Constant Grid method calls the EVALUATE-CONGRID
macro.
You are asked to supply:
name of the output grid file
constant value to insert in the output grid nodes
minimum and maximum x and y values for the output gridding
area
x, y gridding increment
For more information about the Constant Grid parameters, select
Help Online Manuals Macros Manual, then locate the
EVALUATE-CONGRID topic.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Polynomial Grid
Polynomial Grid evaluates a polynomial function over a user defined
area and stores the results as a new grid. The Polynomial Grid method
calls the EVALUATE-POLYN macro.
Polynomial trends of up to the 2nd order are possible with this process
(a maximum 9 term polynomial function in which the highest order of
term in the function is x2 or y2). The process produces a grid with the
node values being the values calculated by the polynomial. You can
control the AOI of the grid, as well as the x and y grid increments. You
can also input the coefficient for each of the corresponding terms in the
polynomial.

Use EVALUATE-POLYN to Create a Polynomial Trend Grid

Start with reasonable coefficients for a polynomial surface expressed in terms
of surface location x and y. Use EVALUATE-POLYN to create a polynomial
trend grid.
For instance, the most simple geological trend is a monocline (a flat dipping
surface). In terms of x,y, the monocline surface can be expressed as a first
order polynomial with four terms. Accordingly, you can describe the
polynomial as 1st order and can supply the appropriate four coefficients for
those four terms. The macro creates a grid of that polynomial trend with the
AOI and grid increment you supply.
Remember that the x and y in the grid need not be map coordinates. They
could be any other two field values, such as porosity and V shale (from log
analysis); the node value (z) could be permeability.

More complex polynomials can be evaluated by the ZCL EVALUATE

process that is used in this macro. However, the macro is limited to 2nd
order because it is impractical to incorporate more terms for interactive
prompt input. If you want to create a grid of higher order, you can create
a ZCL script for a 3rd or higher order polynomial.
You are asked to input:
name of the output grid you are creating
MFD to use for storing the output grid
grid parameters (x and y min and max)
whether you describe the grid by giving increments or by
specifying rows and columns
ZNON value for the output file
degree of the polynomial and the value of the coefficients

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

For complete information about the Polynomial Grid parameters, select

Help Online Manuals Macros Manual, then locate the
EVALUATE-POLYN topic.
The following boxes illustrate the first and second polynomials:

Example 1st Degree Polynomial Example 2nd Degree Polynomial

Degree of Polynomial = 1
Equation = A + B[X] + C[Y] +D[XY]
Enter A polynomial [constant] term = 10
Enter B [X] term coefficient = 2
Enter C [Y] term coefficient = 4
Enter D [XY] term coefficient = 6
Where:
A is a Constant, B D are Coefficients, and
X and Y are the x,y coordinates
Degree of Polynomial = 2
Equation: A = B[X] + C[Y] + D[XY] =
E[X**2] + F[Y**2] + G[(X**2)Y] +
H[(Y**2)X] + I[(X**2)(Y**2)]
Enter A polynomial [constant] term = 10
Enter B [X] term coefficient = 2
Enter C [Y] term coefficient = 4
Enter D [XY] term coefficient = 6
Enter E [X**2] term coefficient = 8

Minimum X & Y = 0 Enter F [Y**2] term coefficient = 10

Maximum X & Y = 10 Enter G [(X**2)Y] term coefficient = 12

Grid Increment = 1 Enter H [(Y**2)X] term coefficient = 14

Check with Grid Statistics: Enter I [(Y**2)(X**2)] term coefficient= 16

Minimum Surface Value = 10.00 Where:

Maximum Surface Value = 670.00 A is a Constant, B I are Coefficients, and

X and Y are the x,y coordinates
Minimum X & Y = 0
Maximum X & Y = 10
Grid Increment = 1
Check with Grid Statistics:
Minimum Surface Value = 10.00
Maximum Surface Value = 188470.00

A grid with the requested AOI and grid increment and node values that
are resolved by the polynomial expansion using the supplied constant
and coefficients.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

User-Defined Filter
The User-Defined Filter method filters a grid by means of a user-defined
filter operator grid. The filter operator grid may originate either from a
GRID file on an attached MFD or as an external diskfile which is
imported.
The filter operator can possess ring symmetry. Ring symmetry means
that the values in the grid nodes that are equal distance from the
centerpoint of the grid are equal. The macro can handle up to 99 rings.
The input grid file may contain undefined values. These values may
exist in the grid itself or may be caused by faults crossing the grid. The
macro employs one of two methods to handle undefined values. If the
operator is ring symmetric, a ring-symmetric compensation method is
used; otherwise, an asymmetric compensation method is used. If no
compensation is desired, it may be turned off.
Specify the following input values:
GRID file to be filtered
optional fault (FALT) file
GRID file to be used as the filter operator grid
symmetry type of the filter operator grid. The options are NONE
or RING
whether to compensate for null nodes in the filter operator grid
origin of the ring symmetric filter operator grid (optional). The
grid can already exist or come from ASCII files.
name of the external file that defines the ring weights
symmetric operator grid (optional)
name of the output GRID file
This gridding method executes the USER-FILTER macro. (For more
complete descriptions of each parameter, select Help
Online Manuals Macros Manual, then locate the USER-FILTER
topic.)

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Flexing

Enter from Modeling in

Z-MAP Plus window

Select Input Grid and Fault (if needed)

Enter output grid name and select

destinatioin MFD or OpenWorks

Biharmonic Laplacian Both

Select grid flexing parameters

Apply

Save and return to Z-MAP Plus window

Flexing Workflow
You can use flexing, sometimes called filtering or relaxation to smooth
small (high frequency) features on a grid. This smoothing process can at
the same time tie the surface to data points. You can choose from two
flexing methods (Biharmonic or Laplacian) or use a combination of the
two. Controls are provided for which nodes are flexed, how much the
data is honored, how much smoothing is done, upper and lower limits
for the output grid, and whether a constraint band (limit surface) above
and below the flexed grid is used.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Major Types of Flexing

Flexing moves a template over the grid and calculates a new value for
the node at the center of this template based on values of that node and
the other nodes covered by the template. Two standard templates are
used: Templates and Weights.
Biharmonic Laplacian
---------- ---------

(1)
o

(2) (-8) (2) (-.25)

o o o o

(1) (-8) (20) (-8) (1) (-.25) (1) (-.25)

o o x o o o x o

(2) (-8) (2) (-.25)

o o o o

(1)
o

Templates and Weights for the Two Flexing Methods

The template is moved over the grid, stopping at each node and
adjusting it. At each template position, all nodes under the template are
multiplied by the weight at that location of the template. The results are
summed. If that sum equals zero, then the surface perfectly fits the
Biharmonic or Laplacian equation and no modifications are needed. If
not zero (in error), then the center value is adjusted up or down to reduce
this error. The method for adjustment is called Successive Over
Relaxation (Young, 1973). This is a mathematical procedure that
iteratively adjusts the center value until it acceptably satisfies the
Biharmonic or Laplacian equations (template).
When part of the template covers ZNONs or is outside the grid, then the
weights of the template must be adjusted. This adjustment process is
done at the start of Flexing with the adjusted weights stored temporarily
until needed. If the grid is large and the ZNON areas complex, this
weight adjustment process may take a considerable amount of time.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

The grid that results from one pass of the template will not perfectly
satisfy the Biharmonic or Laplacian equation. This is because, even
though the center point of the template is adjusted to an optimum value,
the other nodes that were used to adjust that one were also adjusted.
Thus, second and additional passes of the filter are required to
progressively bring the entire surface closer to the desired form. How
close the surface gets to this form before it stops is controlled by you.

Effects of Flexing on Surface Form

Biharmonic flexing creates a surface that resembles a rigid surface, like
a hand-saw (metal plate), which bends slowly and smoothly from one
inflection point to another. This is sometimes called a minimum
curvature or minimum tension surface.
Laplacian flexing creates a surface that resembles a balloon or soap
bubble which comes quickly back to the average surface position away
from inflection points. Sticking your finger into a balloon would cause
the surface to peak at your finger and quickly return to its original form
away from your finger. This is sometimes called a high tension surface.

Flexing Parameters

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Set FLEXING Parameters Dialog Box

Input Grid
Select a grid file from the list that appears. This input grid is used when
the option executes.

Faults
If the surfaces are cut by faults, select a previously constructed fault file
from the list that appears. If you include fault data, the calculation for
each grid node uses only the data located on the same side of the faults
as the node.

Output Grid Name, Mask Use

Use this dialog box to specify the name for the new grid, MFD to use for
storing it (or the OpenWorks project), and how a masking grid is used
(active if you select a grid with the Masking Grid parameter).

Output Grid Name

Enter the name of the grid to create. The name can be a maximum of 24
characters long and can contain internal blanks.

Output Grid Master File

When you click the parameter box, a popup menu appears, listing the
attached MFDs, scratch file, and OpenWorks. Select the MFD to use for
storing the output file.

Masking Grid Use

Controls how the masking grid affects where flexing is done. In order
for this parameter to take effect, a masking grid must be selected using
the Masking Grid parameter. Grid nodes of the masking grid and the
input grid must be at the same x,y locations (i.e., the grids must be
conformal). When the mask tells Z-MAP Plus to flex only certain node
locations, the locations adjacent to those locations are used to flex, even
though their values are not altered. Possible choices for this parameter
include:
Filter Non-ZNONs (default). Filter only those nodes of the input grid
that correspond to nodes in the masking grid that have values.
Filter ZNONs. Filter only those nodes of the Input Grid that
correspond to nodes in the masking grid that have ZNONs.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Flexing Parameters
This dialog box allows you to select the type of flexing to perform, when
to stop flexing, how much to honor the data, whether the surface is tied
to data while flexing, as well as upper and lower Z-values for the output
grid. Flexing parameters also lets you specify an upper and lower band
(surfaces) in which the flexed surface must remain.

Type of Flexing
The Type of Flexing button shows which type of flexing is specified
whether flexing is performed with a Biharmonic filter, Laplacian filter,
or both filters.
Biharmonic (default) Adjusts grid values so that the surface
resembles a rigid surface (like a handsaw) that bends slowly and
smoothly from one inflection point to another. This is sometimes called
a minimum curvature or minimum tension surface.
Laplacian Adjusts grid values so that the surface resembles a
balloon or soap bubble that comes quickly back to the average surface
position away from inflection points. Sticking your finger into a balloon
would cause the surface to dimple at your finger and quickly return to
its original form away from your finger. This is sometimes called a high
tension surface.
Combination This is a repeated application of first the Biharmonic
and then the Laplacian filter. Its results are not easily predictable, but
fall somewhere between Biharmonic and Laplacian, probably a little
closer to the Biharmonic, since it is the first filter applied.

Number of Flex Passes

In the Number of Flex Passes box, enter the number of flexing passes to
execute (if the Control of Passes setting is FLEX = NUMPASS) or the
maximum number of flexing passes to execute (if the Control of Passes
button reads FLEX <= NUMPASS). The default value is 10.

Control of Passes
Use the Control of Passes setting to specify one of these conditions:
No Flex Perform no flexing.
FLEX = NUMPASS (default) Continue flexing until the
Number of Flex Passes value is met.
FLEX <= NUMPASS Stop flexing as soon as either the Cutoff
or Number of Flex Passes value is met.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Cutoff
In the Cutoff box, enter a number to use as a test value to determine
when to stop flexing. Flexing continues until the amount of change from
one pass to the next is smaller than the Cutoff value. The default Cutoff
value is 0.25, which typically results in three to six flexing passes.
The Cutoff test value is compared to a Maximum-Relative-Change
value Z-MAP Plus calculates. If the Maximum-Relative-Change is
lower than the Cutoff value, flexing stops.
The Maximum-Relative-Change value is the absolute value of one
minus the ratio of the maximum change in the surface on the previous
flexing pass to the maximum change in the surface on this flexing pass.

max change flex one

Maximum-Relative-Change = 1 --------------------------------------------------
max change flex two
The number 1 is output for the Maximum-Relative-Change of the first
flexing pass since this equation cannot be solved after only one pass
through flexing. (Two flexes are required to make a relative change
comparison.)
Sometimes the Maximum-Relative-Change value stalls and fluctuates
around a number. For example, on one pass it may be .36, on the next
.35, the next .37, and so on. This is because flexing is trying to both
honor data and smooth the surface. Each time the surface is adjusted to
honor the data, it roughs up and then smooths back to approximately
(but not exactly) the same surface form. Therefore, it reaches a point
where the surface is still changing from flex to flex but not getting any
smoother.

Smoothness Modulus (0.0 to 1.0)

In the Smoothness Modulus box, enter a value to specify the extent to
which you want to smooth the grid at the expense of honoring the data.
You can enter any value between 0 and 1. The default setting is 0.2.
With a value of 0 (zero), if smoothing pushes the surface away from the
data, Z-MAP Plus brings it back to exactly honor the data. A value of 1
(one) produces the smoothest grid, without regard for precisely fitting
the grid to the data. With the default value of 0.2, if smoothing pushes
the surface away from the data, Z-MAP Plus brings it back at least 20%
of the way toward the data. This Smoothness Modulus affects nodes that
are within 5 or 6 grid increments from the data.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

To achieve an optimum trade-off between accuracy and smoothness,

you may need to produce several test grids that each use a different
smoothness modulus. The Smoothness Modulus is often used with
seismic data, with its value shifted towards 1. The effect is to remove
some of the wobble from contours that cross or run along seismic lines.
The Smoothness Modulus parameter is common to many types of
gridding methods. To learn more, see page 525.

How the Smoothness Modulus Works

Data can be used during the flexing process. Data close to the grid node
being modified (about half a grid increment from it) are used to produce
a new node value adjusted to that data. To do this:
1. The node to be modified is thrown away.
2. A smooth mathematical surface is fit to the eight nodes around that
node and the data point.
3. A value is determined from the mathematical equation at the x,y
location of the node to be modified.
For example:

o o o

+
o x o Key:
o = eight nodes used to smooth
x = node that is thrown away
o o o + = value used

If more than one point is close to the grid node, the process is repeated
for each point and the results are averaged.
This process returns a Z-value at the grid node based on the control
points. This node value is averaged with the node value returned from
the flexing process. You control how the two values are averaged with
the Smoothness Modulus parameter. The Smoothness Modulus is used
to get a weighting value from a look-up table. That value is then used in
the following equation:
Zf + W Zc
Z = -------------------------------
1+W

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

where:
Z = final node value
Zf = modified node value from flexing
Zc = modified node value from control points
W = weight from look-up table and Smoothness Modulus
The look-up table has the following form:
10,000 W S.M.
---------- ---------
|x 10,000.00 0.00
|x 50.00 .25
| x 10.00 .50
| x 1.00 .75
W | x .25 1.00
| x
| x
| x
| x
| x
.25 -----------------------------------------------------
0 .5 1
Smoothness Modulus

Bias and Multiplier Parameters

You can place a limiting band (pair of surfaces) above and below the
gridded surface to constrain flexing. These limiting surfaces are
obtained by adding constants to each nodes value or by multiplying
each nodes value by constants. This shifts the grid to be flexed up and
down. As a result, when a node is flexed its flexed value is compared to
the upper and lower limit surfaces. If it exceeds one of the limits, it is set
to that limit. Because flexing is typically run several times, this
constraint does not produce a clipped grid with a sharp discontinuity, but
creates a grid that approaches the limit surface asymptotically.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

You can use a limiting band to remove small features created by noisy
data. Because the data creates the features, using the data prevents
removal of these features. This capability is often used to take the
wobble out of contours. A good first try for the values is to add and
subtract 20% of the contour interval used to display the surface. If the
contour interval were 10, then an upper bias of 2 and lower bias of 2
might produce desirable results.

All Changed Values Produce a Limiting Surface

The default values for all bias and mulitplier parameters produce no limiting
surface. If you change the value of any parameter, a limiting surface is created.
If you change the parameter value by manually entering the default value, a
limiting surface is also created. To flex the grid without limiting the node values,
do not change the value of these values in any way.

The following table illustrates the effects of positive and negative values
in the Upper and Lower Surface Bias and Multiplier fields:

Original Filtered Upper Lower Upper Lower Result

Node Node Bias Bias Multiplier Multiplier
Value Value

1 10 default default default default 10

1 10 default default 1.1 default 1.1

1 10 default default 1.1 0.9 1.1

1 10 1.0 -1.0 1.1 0.9 1.1

1 -10 1.0 -1.0 1.1 0.9 -0.1

-1 -10 default default default 0.9 -1.1

-1 -10 1.0 -1.0 1.1 0.9 -2.1

Upper Surface Bias

Enter a value to be added to each nodes value to form an upper limit
surface to constrain flexing. This value should be positive and defaults
to 0. See Bias and Multiplier Parameters on page 527 for a detailed
discussion of limit surface constraints.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Lower Surface Bias

Enter a value to be added to each nodes value. This value will form a
lower limit surface to constrain flexing. This value should be negative
and defaults to 0. See Bias and Multiplier Parameters on page 527 for
a detailed discussion of limit surface constraints.

Upper Surface Multiplier

Enter a value to multiply each nodes value by. This value will form an
upper limit surface to constrain flexing. This value should be greater
than 1 and defaults to 1. See Bias and Multiplier Parameters on
page 527 for a detailed discussion of limit surface constraints.

Lower Surface Multiplier

Enter a value to multiply each nodes value by. This value will form a
lower limit surface to constrain flexing. This value should be less than 1
and defaults to 1. See Bias and Multiplier Parameters on page 527 for
a detailed discussion of limit surface constraints.

Minimum and Maximum Z-values

Enter values that represent the upper and lower Z-values that will appear
in the grid. The minimum and maximum grid values (Z-values) are
defaulted to numbers that are slightly smaller and larger (10% of
Z-range), respectively, than the smallest and largest data value for the
Z-field being gridded. This allows a small amount of overshoot of the
grid values above or below the data values. Grid values smoothly taper
to these values, rather than clip.

Control Points
When you select Control Points, a list of data files appears. Point to and
click the data file you want. A field will be selected from this file and
used as input when Flexing executes. If you do not want Flexing to tie
to data, then do not select this file. If a Control Points file is currently
selected, select None to nullify the selection. To learn how data is used
during flexing, see the Smoothness Modulus parameter on page 525.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Z-field (Control Pts)

Select the Z-field that is used during flexing.

Grid
A masking grid is an existing grid that you can use to control how a new
grid is created. Typical uses of masking grids are to limit gridding to
locations where the masking grid is null, or to limit gridding to locations
where the masking grid is not null. Masking grids also provide the
second and third function during filtering.
Click a grid from the list presented to select it as the masking grid used
when Flexing executes. To use no masking grid, do not select one. If a
masking grid is already selected, select None - use no field to clear the
selection.

R2003.12.0 Modeling: Flexing 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Operations

Overview

The Operations menu in the Z-MAP Plus window includes the

Calculator and a number of other operations. The Calculator helps you
create complex operations and to reuse them. The next four divisions of
the Operations menu contain groups of related processes:
Grid Operations starting on page 539
Data Operations starting on page 558
Geophysical Operations starting on page 646
Faults starting on page 667
Some remaining operations do not fall into the above groups and are
listed in alphabetical order, starting on page 675.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Overview 531

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Grid Operations
The Grid Operations are:
Single Grid Operations Create a grid by performing
operations on each grid node, such as scale, bias, square, and
clipmin.
Dual Grid Operations Create a grid by performing operations
between equivalent grid nodes of two input grids.
Antilog Base 10 (from Grid) Computes the antilogarithm of
the input grid to base ten (which is also called the common
logarithm).
Blank Grid Blank a grid, or set a grid to a constant, inside or
outside a defined polygon.
Resample Grid Use an existing grid to create a grid with the X
and Y limits changed.
Grid to Data Creates a data file based on the node values of a
Z-MAP Plus grid.

Data Operations
The Data Operations are:
Single Data Operations Perform mathematical operations
such as scale, bias, square, and clipmin, on every x,y location of a
single field in a data file.
Dual Data Operations Add, multiply, maximum, blankmax,
etc. at each x,y location between two fields in a file.
Antilog Base 10 (from Data). Compute the antilogarithm of the
input data to base ten (which is also called the common logarithm).
Blank Data Blank data inside or outside a given polygon.
Grid to Data Convert grids to data.
Data Selection Subset datasets in a way appropriate for your
project.
Merge Data Combine two sorted input files of the same type
into a new merged output file.
Range Editing. Keep or delete records in a data file, based on
whether values in one or more fields are inside or outside a
specified range.
Rotate Data Specify an angle for rotating a files records.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Overview 532

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Sort Data Sort data according to selected fields.

Fields Copy, rename, and delete fields from all nongrid files.
The field operations include:
Copy Only Selected Fields
Copy Original Fields and Additional Fields
Rename Fields
Delete Fields

Geophysical Operations
The Geophysical Operations options are:
Append X-Y to Seismic Time File Attach an X (Northing) and
Y (Easting) value to a seismic time file by using a seismic location
file and interpolating the shotpoint numbers in the seismic time
file.
Grid to Seismic Lines Converter Convert a grids rows,
columns, or both to seismic lines and concatenate them together in
one output seismic file.
Migration, Reverse Migration Produce a control point file
containing migrated grid nodes.
Mistie Reduction Shift lines to correct seismic misties.
Seismic Data Thinning Reduce the number of lines or
horizons from a seismic survey before gridding.
Scale/Bias Line or Area Use a constant value to add or
multiply all the points of a selected Z field in a seismic line or in an
area.
Normalized Interval Velocity (Data) Produces a control point
file with data fields describing top-lapped, base-lapped depth, and
a final normalized interval velocity calculation.
Normalized Interval Velocity (Grid) Produce a control point
file with data fields describing top-lapped, base-lapped depth, and
a final normalized interval velocity calculation.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Overview 533

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Faults
Balancer Remove small segments of crossing faults, add
vertices to each fault at bifurcation points, and balance throws at
the bifurcations.
Calculate Fault Fields Recalculate an entire field of fault data
using values found in the input file. For example, this option can
recalculate Throw values from Heave and Fault Angle field values
or Fault Angles from Throw and Heave fields.
Dip Symbol Generator Produce a VERT file that contains
polylines. Hachures added to these polylines mark downdip sides
of a fault.
Migrator Migrate faults to surrounding surfaces above or
below the originally defined structure surface.
Profiler Generate a trace parallel to an input fault trace with the
distance proportional to some data value on the fault trace, most
commonly Throw.
Shrinker Convert fault polygons to regular, center-line faults.

Remaining Operations
In addition to the grouped operations, Operations includes eleven other
options. Most of these options lend themselves to classification
according to their intended functions. The remaining operations include:
Back Interpolation
File Conversion
Coordinate Transformations
Transformation Coordinates (Overwrite Fields)
Lat/Lon (DMS) to Decimal Degrees
Line Generalization
Line Resampling
Surface Intersection
The remaining operations can be classified into three functional groups
plus miscellaneous operations:
operations with lines
operations that modify data
operations with cartographic applications
miscellaneous operations

R2003.12.0 Operations: Overview 534

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Operations with Lines

Operations with lines include:
Line Generalization Remove redundant points from files that
contain lines (such as seismic or vertex files).
Line Resampling Create points at regular intervals along the
lines of a dataset.

Data Modification Operations

Data modification operations include:
File Conversion Converts most file types from one type to another
(for example, vertex to fault data).

Cartographic Operations
Cartographic operations include:
Coordinate Transformations Convert latitude and longitude
to northing and easting values, or convert northing and easting
values to latitude and longitude.
Lat/Lon (DMS) to Decimal Degrees Convert degrees,
minutes, and seconds to decimal degrees, or convert decimal
degrees to degrees, minutes and seconds.

Miscellaneous Operations
Miscellaneous operations include:
Back Interpolation Calculate Z-values from a grid for each x,y
location in a data file. Resulting Z-values replace an old field either
completely or in part, or create a field for the x,y location in the
data file.
Surface Intersection Find the point of intersection between a
subsurface rock unit with present day topography (outcrop). Find
the point of intersection between a subsurface rock unit and an
unconformity (subcrop). Find the point of intersection between a
reservoir rock and a fluid contact, such as oil/water or gas/oil.
Perform quality control checks on grids.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Overview 535

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Calculator
Select Operations Calculator to create a series of grid or data
operations and save that series to use again. All the options for each type
of operation (single and dual data, single and dual grid, and back
interpolation) are available on the calculator. Use the Calculator to
perform these tasks:
Set up mathematical equation that use one or more grid files to
create a grid (grid operations).
Set up equations that take values from one or more fields in a data
file and create a field of information in the data file (data
operations).
This topic is a brief introduction to the Calculator. Detailed information
for the Calculator is available by clicking the Help button in the
Calculator dialog box. The topic Using the Calculator describes all the
Calculator configurations and buttons.
For a list of functions for each operation type, see the following topics:
Single Grid Operations on page 540
Dual Grid Operations on page 544
Single Data Operations on page 560
Dual Data Operations on page 565

Using the Calculator Icon

You can display the Calculator dialog box by clicking the Calculator icon.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Calculator 536

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

The Calculator dialog box is divided into two panels:

Input Panel Equations Panel

Input
Files, Grids,
and Fields

Select the
type of
Operation

Name the
New File
and/or
New Field

Move, Edit,
Delete, Insert Above
Buttons

R2003.12.0 Operations: Calculator 537

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Introduction to the Calculator

The Calculator is designed to make creating mathematical operations to
your data or grids easy to build and to repeat. Comprehensive help for
using the Calculator is available from the Help button on the Calculator
window. To give you a brief introduction, follow these steps:
1. Select an input data file or grid.
If you select a data file, choose which field(s) you want to
change with the operation you are building. Remember, a data
operation creates a data field in the input file.
If you select a grid file, you can elect to also choose a second
grid file in the Select Grid field. Use the second grid to perform
Dual Grid calculations.
2. Select the type of operation you want (Single, Dual, or Other
(Back Interpolation) to perform based on the file(s) you choose in
step 1.
3. Name the output file (for a grid operation) and the new field (for a
data operation). You can also use the Location box for specifying a
location for storing the new file.
4. Click the Move button ( ) to place your calculation into the
Equations panel.
5. When you have built all the equations you want to run, you can
save everything in the Equations panel to a .ZEQ file by clicking
the Save Equation button.
6. To execute the operations, click Apply (to run the operation and
leave the Calculator dialog box open) or OK (to run the operation
and close the Calculator dialog box).
Detailed help is available if you select the Help button in the lower right
corner of the Calculator dialog box. The topic Using the Calculator
describes all the different configurations and buttons on the Calculator
in detail.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Calculator 538

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Grid Operations

The Grid Operations are:

Single Grid Operations Create a grid by performing
operations on each grid node, such as scale, bias, square, or
clipmin operations.
Dual Grid Operations Create a grid by performing operations
between equivalent grid nodes of two input grids.
Antilog Base 10 (from Grid) Compute the antilogarithm of the
input grid to base ten (also called the common logarithm).
Blank Grid Blank a grid or set a grid to a constant inside or
outside a defined polygon.
Resample Grid Use an existing grid to create a grid with
changed X and Y limits.
Grid to Data Create a data file based on the node values of a
Z-MAP Plus grid.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Grid Operations 539

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Single Grid Operations

Select Operations Grid Operations

Single Grid Operations

Select input grid

Select single grid operation

Name output grid, enter constant (if required)

Save and return to

Z-MAP Plus window

Grid Operations Single Grid Workflow

Single Grid Operations performs mathematical operations on an
existing grid, creating a new grid. Normally you only select the
operation and input grid, and name the output grid. Some operations
require a constant which is used as a scalar, bias value, power, root,
threshold, or null value. A fault file is required for operations DX, DY,
DX2, DY2, Gradsize, and Gradangle, if one was used to build the grid
and is needed to correctly display the grid.

Input Grid
From the list of input grids that appears, select a grid to use as input for
the single grid operation.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Grid Operations 540

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Operation
If you click the Operation button, a list of mathematical operations
appears. The operation you select is applied to each of the values in the
input grid.
The single grid operations are:
SCALE Multiply node values by a constant.
BIAS Add a constant to the node values.
SQUARE Multiply each node by itself.
POWER Raise each node to a power you specify.
SQROOT Generate the square root of each node.
ROOT Generate the nth root of each node.
ABS Convert each node to its absolute value.
EXP Raises the natural exponent of the node value.
LN Calculate the natural log of each node value.
LOG10 Calculate the log (base 10) of each node.
SIN Calculate the sine of each node. Input grid node values
must be in radians.
COS Calculate the cosine of each node. Input grid node values
must be in radians.
TAN Calculate the tangent of each node. Input grid node values
must be in radians.
ATAN Calculate the arctangent of each node.
NORMMAX Divide all nodes by the largest node value.
NORMSIG Divide all nodes by the standard deviation.
NORM For all nodes subtract the mean and divide by the
standard deviation.
CLIPMAX If nodes are greater than a constant, set to that
constant.
CLIPMIN If nodes are less than a constant, set them to that
constant.
BLANKMAX If nodes are greater than a constant, set them to
ZNON.
BLANKMIN If nodes are less than a constant set them to
ZNON.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Grid Operations 541

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

RECIPRCL Divide one by the node value.

DX Calculate the first derivative in the X-direction (DZ/DX).
DY Calculate the first derivative in the Y-direction (DZ/DY).
DX2 Calculate the second derivative in the X-direction.
DY2 Calculate the second derivative in the Y-direction.
DIPMAG Calculate the tangent of the dip angle.
DIPAZM Calculate the compass orientation clockwise from
North of the maximum down dip direction in radians.
REPLZNON Replace values that are ZNON with a constant,
while keeping the number that represents ZNON the same. Change
the ZNON value with the value specified as the constant value. (To
check the constant value, click the Output Grid Name and
Constant Value button. In the Name OUTPUT Grid & Enter
PARAMETER dialog box that appears, note the value in the
Constant Value box.)
SUBTMEAN Subtract the mean from each node.
REDFZNON Change the number considered to be ZNON for
that grid. Do not modify any node values. To make the change,
click the Output Grid Name and Constant Value button. In the
Name OUTPUT Grid & Enter PARAMETER dialog box that
appears, enter the new value in the ZNON for Output Grid box.
If null is the initial value, all operations except REPLZNON and
REDFZNON output null.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Grid Operations 542

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Output Grid Name and Constant Value

If you click the Output Grid Name and Constant Value button, the
Name OUTPUT Grid & Enter PARAMETER dialog box appears. Use
this dialog box to specify these parameters:
Output Grid Name The new grids name
Output Grid MASTER FILE Location to store the grid
(either an MFD or OpenWorks)
Constant Value A constant to use if the operation requires it
ZNON for Output Grid The ZNON (missing) value for the
grid
A brief summary of each of these parameters follows.

Output Grid Name

Enter the name of the grid to be created. The name can be up to 24
characters long and can contain internal blanks.

Output Grid MASTER FILE

If you click the parameter box, a popup menu appears, which lists
OpenWorks, the attached MFDs, and the scratch file. Select the MFD to
use for writing the output grid.

Constant Value
Enter a number to use as the constant for the Scale, Bias, Power, Root,
Clipmax, Clipmin, Blankmax, or Blankmin operations.

ZNON for Output Grid

Enter the value to use as the ZNON (missing value) when the grid is
created. Nodes of the grid are ZNON at all ZNON locations of the input
grid. This value can be any valid number supported by your computer.
Never use a number between the minimum and maximum value in the
grid, because this creates many problems when you draw contours from
grid. The default is the same as ZNON of the input grid.

Faults
A list of fault files appears. Include fault files only if you are building
surfaces that are cut by faults. If you use faults, grid nodes are calculated
by using only the data located on the same side of the faults as the node.
Fault files are available for this option only if they have been previously
constructed.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Grid Operations 543

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Dual Grid Operations

Select Operations
Grid Operations from
Z-MAP Plus window

Select grid A

Select grid B

Select dual grid operation

Enter output grid name and select an MFD or OpenWorks

Set ZNON for output grid

Select source for output grid AOI

Gridin 1 Gridin 2 Union Intersection

Select source for X and Y direction increments

Specify
Gridin 1 Gridin 2
Enter X and Y direction increments

Apply

Save and return to

Z-MAP Plus window

Grid Operations Dual Grid Operations Workflow

R2003.12.0 Operations: Grid Operations 544

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Dual Grid Operations performs mathematical or logical operations

between two existing grids to create a grid. Typically, you only select
the operation, the two input grids, and the output grid name.
Occasionally, grid nodes of the two input grids are not aligned vertically
above each other. If this happens, the first grid is used as the template,
and the other is resampled to match. You can use parameters in this
option to override the default behavior.
A common example of Dual Grid Operations is to produce a depth grid
by multiplying a time grid by a velocity grid.
Mathematical operations include:

Add Minimum Clipmin

Subtract Or Blankmax
Multiply And Blankmin
Divide Cmplement Mergehi
Maximum Clipmax Mergelo
Azimuth

Grid A and B
Click the Grid A and Grid B buttons in the DUAL GRID
OPERATIONS dialog box. Select a grid for each from the list that
appeears. If the title at the top of the list says this is the A grid, it is used
as the first input grid when Dual Grid Operations executes. If it is the B
grid, it is used as the second input grid. If nodes of the two input grids
do not line up vertically (are nonconformal), by default the A grid is the
template and the B grid is resampled to match.

Operation
Click the Operation button in the DUAL GRID OPERATIONS dialog
box. Select an operation from the list of mathematical operations that
appears (the Select Dual Grid OPERATION list). The operation applies
to grid value pairs that have the same x,y location in both grids. The
result is placed in the new grid at the same x,y location. Nulls in either
input grid typically yield nulls in the output grid.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Grid Operations 545

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

The operations are:

(where: A = first input grid, B = second input grid)
ADD Add A and B.
SUBTRACT Subtract B from A.
MULTIPLY Multiply A by B.
DIVIDE Divide A by B.
MAXIMUM Output the larger of A and B. If either is ZNON,
output ZNON.
MINIMUM Output the smaller of A and B. If either is ZNON,
output ZNON.
OR (union) Output A where present. If ZNON, then output B.
AND (intersection) Output A only where B exists, else output
ZNON.
CMPLMENT (complement) Output B only where A is
ZNON, else output ZNON.
CLIPMAX Clip values of A to B if A exceeds B. If A=ZNON,
output ZNON. If B=ZNON, output A.
CLIPMIN Clip values of A to B if A is less than B. If
A=ZNON, output ZNON. If B=ZNON, output A.
BLANKMAX Set values of A to ZNON if A exceeds B.
BLANKMIN Set values of A to ZNON if A is less than B.
MERGEHI Output the larger of A and B. If A or B is ZNON,
output the other.
MERGELO Output the smaller of A and B. If A or B is
ZNON, output the other.
AZIMUTH Field A must represent the slope dZ/dX in the X
direction, and field B must represent the slope dZ/dY in the Y
direction. This value is expressed in radians. The new grid contains
the direction of the dip angle calculated clockwise from the north.
All operations output null if null is the initial value.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Grid Operations 546

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Output Grid Name, ZNON, and AOI

Use this dialog box to specify the following input values:
new grids name
MFD to use for storing the grid or the OpenWorks project
ZNON (missing) value for the grid
X and Y limits and increments for grids with non-coincident nodes

Output Grid Name

Enter the name of the grid to be created. The name can be up to 24
characters long and can contain internal blanks.

Output Grid Master File

If you click the parameter box, a popup menu appears, which lists
OpenWorks, the attached MFDs, and the scratch file. Select the MFD to
use for storing the output grid.

ZNON for Output Grid

Enter a value to use as the ZNON (missing value) in the new grid.
Depending on the operation you use, grid nodes have ZNON values at
all the ZNON locations of one or both of the input grids. This value can
be any valid number supported by your computer. Never use a number
between the minimum and maximum value in the grid: This creates
many problems when drawing contours from the grid. The default value
is the ZNON of the first input grid (grid A).

R2003.12.0 Operations: Grid Operations 547

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Source for Area of Interest

Controls where the X and Y limits for the output grid come from. This
parameter need be considered only if the X and Y limits of the input grids
differ. Possible choices for this parameter include:
Gridin1 (default value) Use the X and Y limits of the first grid
(grid A) to define the output grid limits.
Gridin2 Use the X and Y limits of the second grid (grid B) to
define the output grid limits.
Union Of the two input grids, use the lower of the X minimum
and Y minimum values and the higher of the X maximum and Y
maximum values to define the X and Y limits of the output grid.
Intersection Of the two input grids, use the higher of the X
minimum and Y minimum values and the lower of the X maximum
and Y maximum values to define the X and Y limits of the output
grid.

Antilog Base 10 (from Grid)

This option calculates the antilogarithm (base 10) for the value of each
grid node. This is the inverse operation for Single Grid Operation
LOG10.
Specify the following input values:
Name of the input grid file and its associated MFD
Name of the output grid file
MFD to use for storing the output grid file
Output is a grid file whose node values are the antilogarithms of the
corresponding node values in the input grid. Antilogarithms are always
positive numbers.

Usual Range
Antilogarithms can be calculated successfully only for numbers in a range from
about -40.0 to +38.0. The exact range depends on the machine used.

This option calls the macro ANTILOG-TEN-GRID. For detailed

information about the parameters for this operation, select Help
Online Manuals Macro Manual, then locate the
ANTILOG-TEN-GRID topic.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Grid Operations 548

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Blank Grid

Select Operations Grid

Operations in Z-MAP Plus
window

Select input grid

Select input polygon

Enter output file name and select MFD or

OpenWorks

Which
type of
blanking?

Inside Outside Clevel

Set blank value

Save and return to

Z-MAP Plus window

Grid Operations Blank Grid Workflow

R2003.12.0 Operations: Grid Operations 549

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Blank Grid uses a polygon or contour file to blank a grids nodes either
inside or outside those polygons or contours. Input to this option is a
grid, a polygon or contour file, and a value to replace all nodes that are
being blanked. The term Blank is used for this option because the
default replacement value is ZNON.

How Blank Grid Works

If using polygons, Blank Grid automatically adds another vertex to each
polygon so that the first and last vertex are coincident. Then, each grid
node location is checked against this polygon. If the node is inside (or
outside) the polygon its value is set to a value you supply.
If using contours, Blank Grid starts at the top left corner of the grid and
moves down each column of the grid. When it crosses a contour, it
begins to flag nodes as inside the contour. If it crosses the same contour
again, it stops flagging the nodes, and so on down the grid column.
Depending on the parameter settings the flagged values are all set to a
value you supply or to the value of the most recently crossed contour.
Special logic is added to ensure that the area of the contour that is
considered INSIDE encompasses the nodes that are higher than the
contour level for which the test is being made.

Input Grid
From the list presented, select an input grid to use when the Blank Grid
operation executes.

Select Polygon File

From the list of vertex and contour files presented, select a vertex file.
When the Blank Grid operation executes, polygons or contours in this
file are used to blank the grid.

Output Name and Parameters

Use this dialog box to specify the following input values:
name of the output grid
MFD to use for storing the grid (or use the OpenWorks project)
whether to blank inside or outside polygons or contours, and
if contours are used, whether the contour level is assigned to all
nodes between that level and the next higher level. You are allowed
to specify the blanking value as either a constant or a ZNON.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Grid Operations 550

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Output Grid Name

Enter the name of the grid to create. The name can be a maximum of 24
characters long and can contain internal blanks.

Output Grid Master File

If you click the parameter box, a popup menu appears, which lists
OpenWorks, the attached MFDs, and the scratch file. Select the MFD to
use for storing the output grid.

Type of Blanking
Controls which areas of the grid are blanked relative to the input
polygons or contours. Possible choices for this parameter are:
Inside (default value) Set nodes inside the polygons to the
specified blank value. Or, set nodes inside (above) all contours on
the file to the specified blank value.
Outside Set nodes outside the polygons to the specified blank
value. Or, set nodes outside (below) all contours on the file to the
specified blank value.
Clevel Set nodes inside (above) a contour level to the value of
the contour they are above and adjacent to. Nodes outside the
lowest contour level are unchanged.

Blank Value
Enter a value to replace all node values in the area being blanked. This
value can be any number that is valid for your operating system. The
default blank value is 1.E+30, the standard ZNON value.

Width of Boundary Tolerance

Designates the width of tolerance for your blanking polygon. Grid nodes
inside this distance of the boundary are considered to be on the
boundary. If this number is negative, Z-MAP Plus chooses a default
based on a query of the precision of the data and the hardware.

Points within tolerance are

Determines whether the edge of the polygon is inside or outside the
blanking boundary.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Grid Operations 551

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Resample Grid

Select Operations Grid Operations

from Z-MAP Plus window

Select input grid

If surface includes faults, select fault file

Enter output file name and select MFD or

OpenWorks

Enter AOI

Enter X and Y increments

Set ZNON value for output file

Save and return to

Z-MAP Plus window

Grid Operations Resample Grid Workflow

Resample Grid takes a grid as input, and creates a grid with new X/Y
limits, and X/Y increments. You have control over which grid is
resampled, whether faults are used, and the output ZNON value. You
can change any or all of the X/Y limits or increments.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Grid Operations 552

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Resample Grid is commonly used to make one grids nodes line up with
the nodes of another grid. Operations between two grids can only be
done if the nodes of the two grids lie at exactly the same x,y locations.
Although resampling is automatically done when operations execute,
resampling before a long series of operations means that resampling is
only done once instead of at each operation. Resampling is also used to
create a finer grid from a coarser one or (vice versa) when the form of
the output grid must remain the same as the original grid.

How Resample Grid Works

The resampling process is not a shifting of node values from one
position to another. If a node in the new grid does not lie exactly on a
node from the input grid, then a value is calculated for that node using
the back interpolation process. The new value is determined by fitting a
mathematical surface to 16 grid nodes that surround that location.
Although the actual computation process is somewhat more complex,
the process can be thought of as defining a mathematical equation for
the surface in terms of X, Y, and Z (Z = aX + bY + c + ...). Then, by
substituting the X and Y coordinate of the desired location into the
equation, there remains only one unknown, Z, which is easily
determined. The process is more complicated with faults, since only grid
nodes on the same side as the x,y location can be used to calculate its
value.
If nodes in the grid lie outside the area of the input grid or in a ZNON
area, then those nodes are assigned ZNONs.

Input Grid
A list of input grids is presented. Click the grid which you want to use
as input into this process.

Select Faults
A list of input fault files appears. Click the fault file you want to use as
input for this process.
Include fault files only if you are building surfaces cut by faults. If you
use faults, grid nodes are calculated by using only the data located on the
same side of the faults as the node. Fault files are available for this
option only if they have been previously constructed.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Grid Operations 553

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Output Grid Name and Parameters

Use this dialog box to specify the following input values:
name of the new grid
MFD to use for storing the grid (or use the OpenWorks project)
output ZNON value
whether to change some or all of the x,y limits
You always use this dialog box to change at least one of the x,y limits or
increments and usually to provide the grid name.

Output Grid Name

Enter the name of the grid to be created. The name can be up to 24
characters long and can contain internal blanks.

Output Grid Master File

If you click the parameter box, a popup menu appears, which lists
OpenWorks, the attached MFDs, and the scratch file. Select the MFD to
use for storing the output file.

Minimum and Maximum X and Y Coordinates

Enter values to be used as the minimum and maximum X and Y
coordinates for the output grid. The default values for these parameters
set the limits of the input grid. You can change one, all, or none of these.
If the new limits you select exceed the limits of the input grid, nodes
outside the input grid area have ZNON values.
Often you are trying to reposition nodes of the input grid to match those
of another grid. In that case, use the x,y limits of the grid you are trying
to match.

X and Y Increments
Enter numbers representing the distance in the X and Y direction,
respectively, across the grid cell. These define the X and Y gridding
increments for your grid. The increments default to the increments of the
input grid. You can change one, both, or none of these.
Often you are trying to reposition nodes of the input grid to match those
of another grid. In that case, use the X and Y increments of the grid you
are trying to match.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Grid Operations 554

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

ZNON Value
Enter the value to be used as ZNON (missing value) when the grid is
created. Nodes of the new grid are ZNON where ever they cover ZNON
areas of the input grid or lie outside the limits of the input grid. This
value can be any valid number supported by your computer. Never use
a number between the minimum and maximum value in the grid, as this
creates many problems when drawing contours from the grid. The
default is the same as ZNON of the input grid.

Grid to Data

In the Z-MAP Plus window, select Operations

Data Operations Grid to Data

Select input grid

Enter output data name, select output MFD

or OpenWorks

Enter output field name

Convert grid nodes to control points at a rate?

Convert ZNON values

Set ZNON value for output file

Save and return to

Z-MAP Plus window

Data Operations Grid to Data Workflow

R2003.12.0 Operations: Grid Operations 555

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Grid to Data converts a grid to data. Nodes in the grid become records
in the data file. The output data file has three fields, X (Easting),
Y (Northing), and Z which contains the node values. You control what
the Z-field is named. The other two are named as indicated above. Only
one grid can be converted at a time, and ZNONs may or may not be
output. You can specify whether every, every second, every third, etc.
node is output. The counting starts in the upper left corner and works
top-to-bottom, left-to-right.
Grid to Data is commonly used to:
Automatically generate synthetic (dummy) data to combine with
original data for added control. This is usually done by converting
a grid having the general trend of a surface to data, merging that
data with the original data, and reconstructing the grid.
Create data for input to a program other than Z-MAP Plus (for
example, reservoir simulator). This is usually done by converting
the desired grid to data, then selecting File Save As to output
that data file to a flat (ASCII) file.

Input Grid
From the list presented, select a grid to use when the option executes.

Output Data & Field Name, Conversion Rate

Use this dialog box to specify the following input values:
new data files name
MFD to use for storing the file (or use the OpenWorks project)
name of the output Z-field
frequency to output nodes
whether ZNONs are output
new ZNON value
Most users adjust the data file name, MFD, field name, and set the
Convert ZNONs value to NoZNONS.

Output Data Name

Enter the name of the data file to be created. The name can be up to 24
characters long and can contain internal blanks.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Grid Operations 556

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Output Master File

If you click the parameter box, a popup menu appears, which lists
OpenWorks, the attached MFDs, and the scratch file. Select the MFD to
use for saving the output file.

Output Field Name

Enter the name of the new field. The name can be a maximum of 20
characters long and can contain internal blanks. Grid To Data is often
used to merge the new file and field with another file and field. To do
this and concatenate the new field with a field in the other file, you must
name the field to exactly match the one with which it is concatenated.

Rate of Conversion
Enter an integer greater than 0 that represents the rate at which grid
values should be converted to X/Y data records. For example, 1 means
all grid values are converted, 2 means the 1st, 3rd, 5th, etc. are
converted, etc. Counting for node conversion starts in the upper left
hand (NW) corner of the grid and proceeds top-to-bottom and
left-to-right (column by column).

Convert ZNONs?
Controls whether ZNONs are output as X/Y records in the new data file.
Z-values for those records are the ZNON value you specify in the
Output ZNON Value parameter. Possible choices for this entry are:
YesZNON (default value) Outputs the ZNON records.
NoZNON Does not output the ZNON records.

Output ZNON Value

Enter the value to be use as the ZNON (missing value) when
Z-MAP Plus writes this field. This value can be any valid number
supported by your operating system. Do not use a number between the
minimum and maximum value in the field: This creates many problems
when building grids and drawing contours from those grids. The default
value is 0.1E+31.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Grid Operations 557

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Data Operations

Operations, Data Operations Menu

The Data operations include:
Single Data Operations starting on page 560
Dual Data Operations starting on page 565
Antilog Base 10 (from Data) starting on page 569
Blank Data starting on page 570
Grid to Data starting on page 572
Data Selection (Select Dialog Box) starting on page 573
Merge Data starting on page 617
Range Editing starting on page 624
Rotate Data starting on page 628
Sort Data starting on page 631
Fields Copy Only Selected Fields (Field Operations starting
on page 633)
Fields Copy Original Fields and Additional Fields
Fields Rename Fields
Fields Delete Fields

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 558

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Z-MAP Plus users have an extensive collection of data operations at

their disposal.
Special purpose data operations allow interpreters to perform the
following operations on data:
Single Data operations enable interpreters to apply the following to their
data: clip, blank, scale, bias, reciprocal, power, root, log and
trigonometric functions. Many of these functions are available in the
Calculator.
Dual Data operations enable users to add, subtract, multiply, divide, clip
and blank data.
blank inside/outside a polygon
subset
thin
interpolate from a grid
merge data with concatenation, union, intersection, and
complement
rotate
sort

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 559

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Single Data Operations

Select Operations Data

Operations Single Data Operations

Select input data file

Select input field

Select single data operation

Select field to replace with output field

Name output data file and MFD or

OpenWorks; set ZNON and constant value

Enter output data name and select MFD or

OpenWorks

Set ZNON value for output file

Set constant value

Save and return to

Z-MAP Plus window

Data Operations Single Data Operations Workflow

Single Data Operations performs mathematical operations on an
existing data field. From the existing field, it either creates a field or
replaces the contents of an old field. Normally you select the data file,
field, the operation, and then name the new field. A constant is required
for some operations. The input dataset is not changed. Instead, a new
dataset is produced. The new dataset contains all of the original fields as
well as results of the operation.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 560

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Single Data Operations work on all types of record data, including

control points, faults, polygons, and shotpoints. You cannot apply
Single Data Operations to grids.
The Single Data Operations are:
Scale Ln Norm
Bias Log10 ClipMax
Square Sin ClipMin
Power Cos BlankMax
Sqroot Tan BlankMin
Root Atan Reciprcl
Abs NormMax ReplZNON
Exp NormSig RedfZNON
Fix Floor Round
Ceil

Input Data
From the list of data files presented, select the file that contains the field
to use as input when the option executes.

Input Field
A list of fields is presented. Select the input field you want.

Operation
A list of mathematical operations is presented. The selected operation is
applied to each of the values in the input field. Operations are:
SCALE Multiply by a constant.
BIAS Add a constant.
SQUARE Multiply each value by itself.
POWER Raise each value to a power you specify.
SQROOT Generate the square root of each value.
ROOT Generate the Nth root of each value.
ABS Convert each value to its absolute value.
EXP Calculates the natural exponent for the value.
LN Calculate the natural log of each value.
LOG10 Calculate the log (base 10) of each value.
SIN Calculate the sine of each value; input must be in radians.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 561

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

COS Calculate the cosine of each value; input must be in

radians.
TAN Calculate the tangent of each value; input must be in
radians.
ATAN Calculate the arctangent of each value; output is in
radians.
NORMMAX Divide all values by the largest value.
NORMSIG Divide all values by the standard deviation.
NORM Subtract the mean and divide by the standard deviation.
CLIPMAX If values are greater than a constant, set to that
constant.
CLIPMIN If values are less than a constant, set to that
constant.
BLANKMAX If values are greater than a constant, set to
ZNON.
BLANKMIN If values are less than a constant, set to ZNON.
RECIPRCL Divide one by the value.
REPLZNON Replace values that are ZNON with the value
specified as the constant: Keep the number that represents ZNON
the same. (To change the constant value, click the Output Data,
Constant Value button. In the Name OUTPUT Data & Field
dialog box that appears, note the value in the Constant Value
box.)
REDFZNON Change the number considered to be ZNON for
that field. Do not modify any data values. To make the change,
click the Output Data, Constant Value button. In the Name
OUTPUT Data & Field dialog box that appears, enter the new
value in the ZNON for Output Data box.
FIX Change the value to the right of the decimal point to .0.
FIX maintains the value of the integral and changes the mantissa
to .0.
ROUND Fix the value of the number to the nearest integer. 3.2
becomes 3. Rounding 3.7 yields 4.
FLOOR The floor is the most proximate lower integer value.
The floor for 3.2 or for 3.7 is 3.
CEIL The Ceil is the most proximate higher integer value. The
ceil for 3.2 or 3.7 is 4.
If null is the initial value, all operations except REPLZNON and
REDFZNON output null.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 562

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Output Field
From the list presented, select a field for writing the operation results
when the option executes. You can replace an existing field or create a
field. If you create a field, you can name it with the default name or a
custom name.

New Field
Enter the name to store with the field. The name can be a maximum of
20 characters long and can contain internal blanks. The default name is
Z VALUE.

Output Data, Constant Value

If you click the Output Data, Constant Value button, the Name
OUTPUT Data & Field dialog box appears. Use this dialog box to
specify these parameters:
Output Data File Name The new data file name
Output File Master File Location for storing the file (either an
attached MFD or the OpenWorks project)
ZNON for Output Data The ZNON (missing) value for the
new field
Constant Value A constant to use if the operation requires a
constant

Output Data File Name

Enter the name of the file to be created. The name can be up to 24
characters long and can contain internal blanks.

Output File Master File

If you click the parameter box, a popup menu appears, which lists
OpenWorks, the attached MFDs, and the scratch file. Select the MFD to
use for storing the output data file.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 563

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

ZNON for Output Data

Enter the value to be used as the ZNON (missing value) when the
program writes the field. This value can be any valid number your
operating system supports. Do not use a number between the minimum
and maximum field value. This creates many problems when building
grids and drawing contours from those grids. The Z-MAP Plus default
value is 0.1E+31.

Constant Value
Enter a number to be used as the constant for Scale, Bias, Power, Root,
Clipmax, Clipmin, Blankmax, or Blankmin operations.
Special considerations are needed for the following operations:
Power The constant must be positive. However, the grid values
can be positive or negative.
Root The constant must be positive. The grid values must be
zero or positive; negative values yield ZNONs.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 564

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Dual Data Operations

Select Operations Data

Operations Dual Data Operations

Select input data file

Select input field A

Select input field B

Select dual data operation

Select output field

Is output
Yes field a new No
field
Assign new field name
and/or new field type

Name output data and MFD or OpenWorks and

set ZNON

Save and return to

Z-MAP Plus window

Data Operations Dual Data Operations Workflow

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 565

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Dual Data Operations performs mathematical or logical operations

between two existing fields of the same file, creating a field or replacing
the contents of an old field. Normally you select the data file, first and
second input fields, the operation, and then name the new field. The
input dataset is not changed. Instead, a new dataset is created. The new
dataset contains all of the original fields as well as results of the
operation.

Dual Data Creates a New Field Not a New File

Keep in mind that dual data operations operates on two existing fields
of the same file (pointset). If you want to perform an operation
between two fields residing in two different pointsets, use
Operations Data Operations Merge Data.

Dual Data Operations works on all types of record data, including

control points, faults, polygons, shotpoints, etc. These operations cannot
be applied to grids.
Operations include:
Add
Subtract
Multiply
Divide
Maximum
Minimum
Clipmax
Clipmin
Blankmax
Blankmin
Azimuth

Input Data
From the list of files presented, select a file that contains fields to use as
input when the option executes.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 566

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Input Field A and B

Select a field from that appears. If the title at the top of the list says it is
the A field, it is used as the first input field when the Dual Data
Operations operation executes. If it is the B field, it is used as the
second input field. The list contains the fields contained in a previously
selected file.

Operation
Click the Operation button in the DUAL DATA OPERATIONS dialog
box. Select an operation from the list of mathematical operations that
appears (the Select Dual Data OPERATION list). The operation applies
to the values of each field on each record (same x,y location) of the data
file. The result is placed in the new grid at the same x,y location. Nulls
in either input field typically yield nulls in the output field, unless
otherwise indicated. All operations output a null value if null is the
initial value.
The operations are:
(where: A = first input field, B = second input field, C = output field)
ADD Add A and B.
SUBTRACT Subtract B from A.
MULTIPLY Multiply A by B.
DIVIDE Divide A by B.
MAXIMUM Output the larger of A and B. If either is ZNON,
output ZNON.
MINIMUM Output the smaller of A and B. If either is ZNON,
output ZNON.
CLIPMAX Clip values of A to B if A exceeds B. If A = ZNON,
output ZNON. If B = ZNON, output A.
CLIPMIN Clip values of A to B if A is less than B. If A =
ZNON, output ZNON. If B = ZNON, output A.
BLANKMAX Set values of A to ZNON if A exceeds B. If B is
ZNON, output A.
BLANKMIN Set values of A to ZNON if A is less than B. If B
is ZNON, output A.
AZIMUTH Field A must represent the slope dZ/dX in the X
direction, and field B must represent the slope dZ/dY in the Y
direction. This value is expressed in radians. The new field
contains the direction of the dip angle, calculated clockwise from
the north.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 567

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Output Field
From the list that appears, select a field to use for writing operation
results. You can replace an existing field or create a field. If you create
a field, you can name it.

New Field
Enter the name to store with this field when you create it. The name can
be up to 20 characters long and can contain internal blanks. The default
name is Z VALUE.

Field Type (if New Output Field)

If your Dual Data Operation creates a field, you must supply the field
type. A list of fields appears. Point to and click the field type you want.
The default new field type is Z VALUE. To use another type, you must
specify it by picking from the list of field types.

Output Data, ZNON

Use this dialog box to specify the new data file name, destination MFD
(or use the OpenWorks project), and the ZNON (missing) value to use.
Output Data File Name Enter the name of the file to be
created. The name can be up to 24 characters long and can contain
internal blanks.
Output File Master File If you click the parameter box, a
popup menu appears, which lists OpenWorks, the attached MFDs,
and the scratch file. Select the MFD to use for storing the output
data file.

ZNON for Output Data

Enter the value to use as the ZNON (missing value) when Z-MAP Plus
writes this field. This value can be any valid number supported by your
operating system. Do not use a number between the minimum and
maximum field value: This creates many problems when building grids
and drawing contours from those grids. The default value is the same as
the first Z-field being used as input data (field A).

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 568

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Antilog Base 10 (from Data)

This option computes the antilogarithm to base ten, also called common
logarithm, of the numbers in the input field. This is the inverse operation
for the single data operation LOG10.
You are asked to specify:
name of the input data file and its associated MFD
field on the input data file to be used as input to the antilog
operation
name for the output data file
MFD for the output data file
field to receive the output antilogarithm
name for the field to receive the output antilogarithm
The antilogarithm is calculated and placed in the specified field on the
output file. Antilogarithms are always positive numbers.

Range from -40.0 to +38.0

Antilogarithms can be calculated successfully only for numbers in a range from
about -40.0 to +38.0. The exact range depends on the machine used.

This option calls the ANTILOG-TEN-DATA macro. For detailed

information about parameters for this operation, select Help
Online Manuals Macros Manual, then locate the
ANTILOG-TEN-GRID topic.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 569

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Blank Data

Select Operations Data

Operations Blank Data

Select input data file

Select input data field

Select polygon file

Select output field

Name output data file and select MFD or

OpenWorks

Enter polygon segment ID

Choose type of blanking

Inside Outside

Set ZNON value for output field

Save and return to

Z-MAP Plus window

Data Operations Blank Data Workflow

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 570

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Blank Data uses one polygon on a polygon file to blank values of a field
in a data file either inside or outside that polygon. Input to this option
includes:
a data file
a field
a polygon file
a ZNON value to replace all values that are being blanked

How it Works
Blank Data automatically adds another vertex to the polygon so that the
first and last vertex are coincident. Then, each x,y location is checked
against this polygon. If the point is inside (or outside) the polygon the
value in the field you have specified is set to ZNON. The input file and
modified field are written to a new file. You can modify the contents of
the old field, replace the contents of another field, or create a field.

Input Data
From the list of data files presented, select a data file that contains a field
you want to use as input when the Blank Data operation executes.

Input Field
This input field is used when the option executes. Fields in this list are
picked from the Input Data file you previously selected.

Polygon File
From the list of vertex (VERT) files presented, select a vertex file that
contains a polygon you want to use for blanking when the Blank Data
operation executes.

Output Field
A list of fields is presented. Click the field you want, or select New
Field. The new Z-values calculated during this process are written to this
field. If you select an existing field, the default is to replace all contents
of that field. See the Output Name, Strategy selection of this option to
alter this default.

New Output Field Name

Enter the name of the new field. The name can be up to 20 characters
long and can contain internal blanks.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 571

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Output Names and Parameters

Use this dialog box to specify the following input values:
Output Data Name Enter the name of the data file to be
created. The name can be up to 24 characters long and can contain
internal blanks.
Output Data Master File If you click the parameter box, a
popup menu appears, which lists OpenWorks, the attached MFDs,
and the scratch file. Select the MFD to use for storing the output
data file.
Polygon Segment ID Enter the number (Segment ID) of the
polygon that you want to use for blanking. This defaults to 1.
Type of Blanking Controls whether blanking is done inside or
outside the specified polygon. Possible choices for this parameter
include:
Inside (default value) Set values of the selected field to
ZNON when the control point is inside the polygon.
Outside Set values of the selected field to ZNON when the
control point is outside the polygon.
Field ZNON Enter a value to be used as the ZNON (blanking
value) for this field. This defaults to the ZNON of the Input Field.

Grid to Data
Identical to the Grid to Data process described on page 555.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 572

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Data Selection (Select Dialog Box)

Select Dialog Box Displaying Data Type Popup Menu

Use the Select dialog box to extract a subset of a dataset according to the
criteria you specify. (You cannot modify data values in this dialog box.)
The criteria you can use to define a data subset are:
Location Edit Keep records that are inside or outside of one or
more polygons.
Thinning Edit Keep every nth record (for example, every
second or every third record) of the entire file or of specified lines
in the file.
Range Edit Keep records if the value of one or several fields is
within a specified range of values.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 573

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

The output data values must satisfy all the criteria you select. The record
order in the output dataset is unchanged from the input dataset, and sort
flags (in file headers of sorted files) are preserved.
Edits are performed in the following order:
Range editing is performed first.
Data thinning is performed next.
Location editing is performed last.

Select Dialog Box Buttons

The interface buttons in the Select dialog box and subsidiary dialog
boxes operate slightly differently than the buttons for other processes.
The interface buttons are:
Apply
Save
Cancel
Delete
Help

Apply
Select Dialog Box: To execute the Data Selection process, click the
Apply button in the Select dialog box. The process executes
immediately using the currently specified parameters for all edits whose
Edits to be Perform check boxes are selected (checked). If the dialog
boxes associated with those edits are still open and contain unapplied
parameter settings, the parameter settings are automatically applied. The
Select dialog box remains open, and the current parameter values are
saved to the LASPARM.ZCL file.

Applying and Saving

If you click Apply, the action executes and the Save dialog box remains open.
If you click Save, the action does not execute and the Save dialog box closes.
The current parameter settings are saved in both cases.

Subsidiary Data Selection Dialog Boxes: To apply parameter settings

from one of the subsidiary data selection dialog boxes, click the Apply
button in the dialog box. When you click Apply or Save in the Select
dialog box, the parameter changes are applied or saved.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 574

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Save
Select Dialog Box: To save parameter settings without executing the
Data Selection process, click the Save button in the Select dialog box.
The Select dialog box and subsidiary dialog boxes close, and the current
parameter values are written to the LASPARM.ZCL file.

Cancel
Subsidiary Data Selection Dialog Boxes: To close a data selection
dialog box without saving changes, click Cancel. The parameter
settings remain the same as when you first displayed the dialog box.

Help
To display the online Z-MAP Plus Reference Manual, click the Help
button in the Select dialog box or in one of the subsidiary data selection
dialog boxes.

Delete
Select Range Edit Equations Display Dialog Box: To delete
equations in this dialog box, select the DELETE check boxes next to the
equations, then click the Delete button.

Data Type
From the drop-down Data Type list, choose the type of file to use for
the Data Selection process. The data type you select determines which
files are available as source files (as described in Source File on
page 576).
You can apply Data Selection to the following file types:
DATA well data, seismic data, and profile files
CNTR contour files
FALT fault files
VERT vertex files
DWEL deviated well files
SSEC seismic section files
XSEC cross section files
TEXT text files
Note that you cannot perform Data Selection on grids (GRID files).

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 575

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Output File
Enter the name of the output file to create in the Output File box. The
name can be up to 24 characters long and can contain internal blanks.
The file type is the same as the input file. If a file with the specified name
already exists, the last four characters of the name are replaced
automatically with a version number.

Output MFD
From the Output MFD drop-down list, select a destination MFD for
saving the output file. The list includes the currently attached MFDs, the
scratch file, and OpenWorks (if you are using OpenWorks).

Source File
Click the Source File button to display the Input List dialog box, which
you use to select an input file. The Input List dialog box displays all files
of the currently selected data type contained in the attached MFD(s) and
in the OpenWorks project. If no files match, a message appears and
informs you that no files are available.
Once you click on a file, it is selected immediately and the Input List
dialog box closes. You can change the selected file and data type at any
time. The selected file appears as white on black background. If you do
not see the file you want in the Input List dialog box, take these actions:
Use the scroll bar to view all the files in the dialog box.
Make sure the Data Type button displays the correct file type.
Make sure the appropriate MFD is attached.
Make sure the appropriate OpenWorks project is selected.

Edits to Perform
Select the edit(s) to perform. You can select multiple edits. The output
data values must satisfy all the criteria you select. To select edit types,
click the Edits to Perform check boxes next to the edit names. A dark
button is On; a light button is Off. If multiple edits are turned on, the
edits occur in the following order:
Range editing is performed first.
Data thinning is performed next.
Location editing is performed last.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 576

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

If no edits are selected and you click the Apply button, a warning
message may appear, asking you to select an edit type. (If you do not
specify a source file, no warning message appears. Error messages
appear in the system window.)

Input Edit Parameters

To define parameters for an edit type, click the arrow next to the edit
type name. The primary data selection dialog box for the edit type
appears (Select Location Edit, Select Thinning Edit, or Select
Range Edit Equations Display). You can display and use multiple data
selection dialog boxes at the same time. If you select an edit type whose
dialog box is already displayed, nothing happens.

Location Edit
In the Select Location Edit dialog box, you specify a polygon source
or method to define the location edit. If you specify a method other than
None, a selection dialog box for the method appears automatically.
Records are selected from a dataset located inside or outside one or
several polygons that are collectively called the select area. Records on
the boundary of the select area are considered to be inside the select
area.
If this is the first time you have performed a location edit or if you
selected a blank Z-MAP Plus parameter file, this dialog box appears. If
you performed a location edit previously, the dialog box appears that
you used to define your most recent location edit.
Polygon Source Allows you to specify the method used to
define the Select Area. The Select Area is the union of one or more
polygonal shapes that collectively are used to define an area within
which data is kept or deleted. Possible choices for this parameter
include:
None If a blank Z-MAP Plus parameter file was selected or
if this was the first time you choose the Location Edit option,
then None is the value for this parameter. None does nothing
and is not a common selection.
X,Y) Polygons from Menu You may specify up to ten
four-sided polygons. x,y coordinates of these polygons are
typed in from the keyboard.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 577

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

(LAT,LON) Polygons from Menu You may specify up to

ten, four sided polygons. Lat/Lon coordinates of these
polygons are typed in from the keyboard as degrees/minutes/
seconds, grads, or decimal degrees.
(X,Y) Rotated Polygons from Menu You may specify up
to ten, four sided polygons. The x,y coordinate of the lower left
corner, angle of rotation, width, and height of these polygons
are typed in from the keyboard.
(LAT,LON) Rotated Polygons from Menu You may
specify up to ten, four sided polygons. The Lat/Lon coordinate
(degrees/minutes/seconds, grads, or decimal degrees) of the
lower left corner, angle of rotation, width, and height of these
polygons are typed in from the keyboard.
Polygons from File You may select a vertices file and use
either all polygons on the file or interactively select up to ten
specific polygons from the file.
Picture from ZGF You may select a graphics file and
picture from that graphics file. The X/Y limits (Lat/Lon if
projected) of that picture define the Select Area for Location
Editing.
Area Limits from Data File You may select a file of type
data from a list of all data files in the currently attached MFDs
or the OpenWorks project. Maximum and minimum values
from the X/Y or Lat/Lon fields in this file define the limits of
the Select Area for Location Editing.
Area Limits from Grid File You may select a grid from a
list of all grids in the currently attached MFDs or the
OpenWorks project. Maximum and minimum values from this
grid define the limits of the Select Area for Location Editing.
Data Select Area Limits Specification Data Selection allows
only one type of Location Edit at a time. For example, if the
Location Edit method is Area Limits from Grid File, then X/Y
limits or Select Areas defined on other menus for other Location
Edit methods are ignored.
Multiple Select Areas When the Select Area is defined by
several polygons, Data Selection considers the Select Area to be
the union of those polygons. Therefore, when keeping records
inside the Select Area, any record inside any of the polygons are
retained in the output file.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 578

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Coordinate Compatibility Between File and Select Area

Data Selection checks for compatibility of the Select Areas
coordinates and the coordinates stored with the file. The following
table indicates how Data Selection handles coordinates of different
types. The Location Edit option discards records in the input
dataset that are missing location coordinates.

Input File Coordinate Types

Select Area Coordinate Types XY LL XY & LL

Polygon(s) XY use as is \ NA \ NA use as is \

use as is use XY

Polygon(s) XY use as is \ NA \ NA use as is \

(rotated) use as is use XY

Polygon(s) LL trans LL+10% \ use as is \ use as is \

uses input files projected parameters use as is use as is use LL

Polygon(s) LL trans LL origin \ use NA \ NA trans LL origin \ use

(rotated) as is XY
uses input files projected parameters

Grid XY use as is \ NA \ NA use as is \

use as is use XY

Data (XY fields) use XY+1% \ NA \ NA use XY+1% \

use as is use XY

Data (LL fields) trans LL+10% \ use LL1% \ use use LL+1% \
uses select area data files projected parameters use as is as is use LL

Data (XY and LL fields) use XY+1% \ use LL1% \ use use LL+1% \
use as is as is use LL

Picture (not projected) use as is \ NA \ NA use as is \

use as is use XY

Picture LL (projected) trans LL+10% \ use as is \ use as is \

uses Input Files projected parameters use as is use as is use LL

Polygon(s) XY use as is \ NA \ NA use as is \

(from VERT file) use as is use XY

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 579

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Input File Coordinate Types

Select Area Coordinate Types XY LL XY & LL

Key:
use as is Use the coordinates without
modification.
use XY The file or select area source has
both
X/Y and Lat/Lon coordinates, only the X/Y
coordinates are used.
use LL The file or select area source has
both
X/Y and Lat/Lon coordinates, only the Lat/Lon
coordinates are used.
use XY+1% The X/Y coordinates of the
select area are expanded by 1% (add and
subtract 1% of the X and Y ranges to their
respective maximum and minimum values)
before being used by Location Edit.
use LL+1% The Lat/Lon coordinates of the select area
are expanded by 1% (add and subtract 1% of the Lat. and
Lon. ranges to their respective maximum and minimum
values) before being used by Location Edit.
trans LL+10% The Lat/Lon coordinates of the select
area are transformed to X/Y coordinates and then expanded
by 10% (add and subtract 10% of the X and Y ranges to their
respective maximum and minimum values) before being used
by Location Edit.
trans LL origin The Lat/Lon coordinates of the select
area origin are transformed to X/Y coordinates.
N/A This is not performed by Location Edit.

Error Reporting
An error is reported and the Location Edit is not performed if the input file or
the select area source file does not contain projection parameters when they are
required. Projection parameter requirements are indicated in the Select Area
Coordinate Types column.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 580

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Select - (X,Y) Polygons from Menu

Operations, Data Selection, Select - (X,Y) Polygons from Menu

This dialog box allows you to specify up to ten four-sided polygons, the
union of which define the Select Area for Location Edit. To specify,
type from the keyboard, the x,y coordinates of these polygons.
Location Edit selects records from the dataset you specified on the main
menu that are located inside or outside this Select Area. Records located
on the boundary of the Select Area are considered to be inside the area.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 581

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Polygon Source
Allows you to redefine the method used to define the Select Area. The
Select Area is the union of one or more polygonal shapes that
collectively are used to define an area within which data is retained or
deleted. Possible choices for this parameter include:
None
(X,Y) Polygons from Menu
(Lat,Lon) Polygons from Menu
(X,Y) Rotated Polygons from Menu
(Lat,Lon) Rotated Polygons from Menu
Polygons from File
Picture From ZGF
Area Limits from Data File
Area Limits from Grid
For a detailed description of each polygon source, see Polygon Source
Allows you to specify the method used to define the Select Area. The
Select Area is the union of one or more polygonal shapes that
collectively are used to define an area within which data is kept or
deleted. Possible choices for this parameter include: on page 577.
The table on page 579 indicates how Data Selection handles different
types of coordinates.

Retain Points Inside or Outside Select Area

Defines which records of the file are retained, those inside the Select
Area or those outside the Select Area (polygons). Click (darken) the
appropriate button to select one of the options:
Inside retains record that fall inside of or on the boundary of the
Select Area.
Outside retains records that fall outside the boundary of the Select
Area.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 582

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Retain Extra Points Inside/Outside Select Area

For lines that cross the Select Area boundary, this parameter defines
whether an extra point on the line and outside the boundary is retained
(inside if records were retained outside). This is important for display
construction when retained lines are to be drawn up to the Select Area
boundary. This parameter has affect only with line-oriented data
(seismic DATA, FALT, VERT, SSEC, XSEC, and DWEL). Click
(darken) the appropriate button to select one of the options:
Yes retains an extra point on the other side of the Select Area
boundary.
No does not retain an extra point.

Polygon X and Y Minimums and Maximums (Entry Box)

This is an array of locations into which you enter the coordinates of the
four sided polygons you wish to use for defining the Select Area. Enter
the X-minimum, Y-minimum, X-maximum, and Y-maximum of each
polygon, one per line.
To enter a value, click the line and position and enter the number. You
must click each position you wish to enter (i.e., Tab, Arrow, and Return
keys do not advance the cursor input position). You can enter numbers
as integers, real numbers, or in scientific notation. All maximums must
be larger than minimums of the same coordinate type. Order of the
polygons and blank lines do not affect the result.

Delete
Allows you to delete selected polygons from the Polygon Entry Box. To
identify polygons for deletion, click the button to the right of each
polygon you wish to delete. Those polygons with darkened buttons are
selected for deletion. To delete selected polygons, click the Delete
button at the bottom right corner of the Polygon Entry Box. Undeleted
polygons are shifted up in the Entry Box to fill deleted positions.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 583

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Select - (Lat,Lon) Polygons from Menu

Operations, Data Selection, Select - (Lat,Lon) Polygons from Menu

This dialog box allows you to specify up to ten, four sided polygons, the
union of which define the Select Area for Location Edit. To specify,
type from the keyboard, the Lat/Lon coordinates of these polygons.
Location Edit selects records, from the dataset you specified on the main
menu, that are located inside or outside this Select Area. Records
located on the boundary of the Select Area are considered to be inside
the area.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 584

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Polygon Source
Allows you to redefine the method used to define the Select Area. The
Select Area is the union of one or more polygonal shapes that
collectively are used to define an area within which data is retained or
deleted. Possible choices for this parameter are:
None
(X,Y) Polygons from Menu
(Lat,Lon) Polygons from Menu
(X,Y) Rotated Polygons from Menu
(Lat,Lon) Rotated Polygons from Menu
Polygons from File
Picture From ZGF
Area Limits from Data File
Area Limits from Grid
For a detailed description of each polygon source, see Polygon Source
Allows you to specify the method used to define the Select Area. The
Select Area is the union of one or more polygonal shapes that
collectively are used to define an area within which data is kept or
deleted. Possible choices for this parameter include: on page 577.
The table page 579 indicates how Data Selection handles coordinates of
different types.

Retain Points Inside or Outside Select Area

Defines which records of the file are retained, those inside the Select
Area or those outside the Select Area (polygons). Click (darken) the
appropriate button to:
Inside retains record that fall within or on the boundary of the Select
Area.
Outside retains records that fall outside the boundary of the Select Area.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 585

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Retain Extra Points Inside/Outside Select Area

For lines that cross the Select Area boundary, this parameter defines
whether an extra point on the line and outside the boundary is retained
(inside if records were retained outside). This is important for display
construction when retained lines are to be drawn up to the Select Area
boundary. This parameter has affect only with line-oriented data
(seismic DATA, FALT, VERT, SSEC, XSEC, and DWEL). Click one of
the following buttons:
Yes Retains an extra point on the other side of the Select Area
boundary.
No Does not retain an extra point.

Coordinate System
This parameter specifies how to enter the Lat/Lon coordinates (for
example, deg/min/sec, grads, or decimal deg.). If the input style is
switched from one type to another, the current values in the Polygon
Entry Box are updated.

Use Apply to Save the Settings

If the values in the Entry Box are newly entered and Apply was not clicked
before changing the coordinate input style, then the new values can be lost! To
avoid this problem, be sure to select Apply before changing this parameter.

Choices for this parameter are:

D.M.S Degrees, Minutes, and Seconds
Grads The French coordinate system. Latitude being zero at
the equator, +100 at the North Pole, and 100 at the South Pole.
Longitude is zero at Paris, +200 measured east to the opposite side
of the world, and 200 measured west to the opposite side of the
world.
Decimal Degrees The whole portion of this number is the
degree and the decimal portion is the sum of the minutes and
seconds as fractions of a degree.

Polygon Lat/Lon Minimums and Maximums

This is an array of locations into which you enter the coordinates of the
four sided polygons you wish to use for defining the Select Area. Enter
the Lon-minimum, Lat-minimum, Lon-maximum, and Lat-maximum of
each polygon, one per line.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 586

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

To enter a value, click the line and position and enter the number. You
must click each position you wish to enter (i.e., Tab, Arrow, and Return
keys do not advance the cursor input position). All maximums must be
larger than minimums of the same coordinate type. Order of the
polygons and blank lines does not affect the result.

Delete
Allows you to delete selected polygons from the Polygon Entry Box. To
identify polygons for deletion, click the button to the right of each
polygon you wish to delete. Those polygons with darkened buttons are
selected for deletion. To delete selected polygons, click the Delete
button at the bottom right corner of the Polygon Entry Box. Undeleted
polygons move up in the Entry Box to fill unused space.

Select - (X,Y) Rotated Polygons from Menu

Operations, Data Selection, Select - Rotated Polygons(X,Y) from

Menu

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 587

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

This dialog box allows you to specify up to ten four-sided polygons, the
union of which define the Select Area for Location Edit. To specify,
type from the keyboard, the x,y coordinate of the lower left corner, angle
of rotation, and the width and height of each polygon.
Location Edit selects records from the dataset you specified on the main
menu that are located inside or outside this Select Area. Records located
on the boundary of the Select Area are considered to be inside the area.

Polygon Source
Allows you to redefine the method used to define the Select Area. The
Select Area is the union of one or more polygonal shapes that
collectively are used to define an area within which data is retained or
deleted. Possible choices for this parameter include:
None
(X,Y) Polygons from Menu
(Lat,Lon) Polygons from Menu
(X,Y) Rotated Polygons from Menu
(Lat,Lon) Rotated Polygons from Menu
Polygons from File
Picture From ZGF
Area Limits from Data File
Area Limits from Grid
For a detailed description of each polygon source, see Polygon Source
Allows you to specify the method used to define the Select Area. The
Select Area is the union of one or more polygonal shapes that
collectively are used to define an area within which data is kept or
deleted. Possible choices for this parameter include: on page 577.
The table page 579 indicates how Data Selection handles coordinates of
different types.

Retain Points Inside or Outside Select Area

Defines which records of the file are retained, those inside the Select
Area or those outside the Select Area (polygons). Click (darken) the
appropriate button to:
Inside retains records that fall within or on the boundary of the
Select Area.
Outside retains records that fall outside the boundary of the Select
Area.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 588

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Retain Extra Points Inside/Outside Select Area

For lines that cross the Select Area boundary, this parameter defines
whether an extra point on the line and outside the boundary is retained
(inside if records were retained outside). This is important for display
construction when retained lines are to be drawn up to the Select Area
boundary. This parameter has affect only with line-oriented data
(seismic DATA, FALT, VERT, SSEC, XSEC, and DWEL). Click
(darken) the appropriate button to:
Yes retains an extra point on the other side of the Select Area
boundary.
No does not retain an extra point.

Polygon Coordinates, Angle, Extent

This is an array into which you enter the descriptions of each four-sided
polygon, one per line. Enter the X and Y coordinate of the lower left
corner of the polygon, the angle the polygon is to be rotated (positive is
counter-clockwise), the width of the polygon and height of the polygon.
To enter a value, click the line and position and enter the number. You
must click each position you wish to enter (i.e., Tab, Arrow, and Return
keys do not advance the cursor input position). You can enter numbers
as integers, real numbers, or as scientific notation. Order of the polygons
and blank lines does not affect the result.

Delete
Allows you to delete selected polygons from the Polygon Entry Box. To
identify polygons for deletion, click the button to the right of each
polygon you wish to delete. Those polygons with darkened buttons are
selected for deletion. To delete selected polygons, click the Delete
button at the bottom right corner of the Polygon Entry Box. Undeleted
polygons are shifted up in the Entry Box to fill deleted positions.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 589

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Select - (Lat,Lon) Rotated Polygons from Menu

Operations, Data Selection, Select (Lat,Lon) Rotated Polygons

from Menu
This dialog box allows you to specify up to ten, four sided polygons, the
union of which define the Select Area for Location Edit. To specify,
type from the keyboard, the Lat/Lon coordinate of the lower left corner,
angle of rotation, and the width and height (measured in X and Y units
of the file to be Location Edited) of each polygon.
Location Edit selects records from the dataset you specified on the main
menu that are located inside or outside this Select Area. Records located
on the boundary of the Select Area are considered to be inside the area.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 590

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Polygon Source
Allows you to redefine the method used to define the Select Area. The
Select Area is the union of one or more polygonal shapes that
collectively are used to define an area in which data is kept or deleted.
Possible choices for this parameter are:
None
(X,Y) Polygons from Menu
(Lat,Lon) Polygons from Menu
(X,Y) Rotated Polygons from Menu
(Lat,Lon) Rotated Polygons from Menu
Polygons from File
Picture From ZGF
Area Limits from Data File
Area Limits from Grid
For a detailed description of each polygon source, see Polygon Source
Allows you to specify the method used to define the Select Area. The
Select Area is the union of one or more polygonal shapes that
collectively are used to define an area within which data is kept or
deleted. Possible choices for this parameter include: on page 577.
The tableSelect Area Coordinate Types on page 579 indicates how
Data Selection handles coordinates of different types.

Retain Points Inside or Outside Select Area

Defines which records of the file are retained, those inside the Select
Area or those outside the Select Area (polygons). Click (darken) the
appropriate button to:
Inside retains records that fall within or on the boundary of the Select
Area.
Outside retains records that fall outside the boundary of the Select Area.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 591

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Retain Extra Points Inside/Outside Select Area

For lines that cross the Select Area boundary, this parameter defines
whether an extra point on the line and outside the boundary is retained
(inside if records were retained outside). This is important for display
construction when retained lines are to be drawn up to the Select Area
boundary. This parameter has affect only with line-oriented data
(seismic DATA, FALT, VERT, SSEC, XSEC, and DWEL). Click
(darken) the appropriate button to:
Yes retains an extra point on the other side of the Select Area boundary.
No does not retain an extra point.

Coordinate System
This parameter tells the program how the Lat/Lon coordinates are
entered (for example, deg/min/sec, decimal deg, or grads). When the
input style is switched from one type to another, the current values in the
Polygon Entry Box are also converted. However, if the values in the
Entry Box are newly entered and Apply was not clicked on before
changing the coordinate input style, then those new values can be lost!
To avoid this problem be sure to select Apply before changing this
parameter. Choices for this parameter are:
D.M.S Degrees, Minutes, and Seconds.
Grads The French coordinate system. Latitude being zero at
the equator, +100 at the North Pole, and 100 at the South Pole.
Longitude is zero at Paris, +200 measured east to the opposite side
of the world, and 200 measured west to the opposite side of the
world.
Decimal Degrees The whole portion of this number is the
degree and the decimal portion is the sum of the minutes and
seconds as fractions of a degree.

Polygon Coordinates, Angle, and Extent

This is an array into which you enter the descriptions of each four-sided
polygon, one per line. Enter the Lat/Lon coordinate of the lower left
corner of the polygon, the angle the polygon is to be rotated (positive is
counter-clockwise), and the width and height of the polygon (measured
in the same X/Y units as the input file to be Location Edited).

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 592

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

To enter a value click the line and position and enter the number. You
must click each position you want to enter. (The Tab, Arrow, and
Return keys do not advance the cursor position). The order of polygons
and blank lines does not affect the result.

Delete
Use the Delete option to delete selected polygons from the Polygon
Entry Box. To identify polygons for deletion, click the button to the
right of each polygon you wish to delete. Those polygons with darkened
buttons are selected for deletion. To delete selected polygons, click the
Delete button at the bottom right corner of the Polygon Entry Box.
Undeleted polygons are shifted up in the Entry Box to fill deleted
positions.

Select - Polygons from File

Operations, Data Selection, Select - Polygons from File

This dialog box allows you to select a Vertices file from the currently
attached MFDs or the OpenWorks project. You can use all the polygons
or a maximum of 10 individually selected polygons from this Location
Edit. The union of the selected polygons defines the Select Area.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 593

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Location Edit selects records from the dataset you specified on the main
menu that are located inside or outside this Select Area. Records located
on the boundary of the Select Area are considered to be inside the area.

Polygon Source
Allows you to redefine the method used to define the Select Area. The
Select Area is the union of one or more polygonal shapes that
collectively are used to define an area within which data is kept or
deleted. Possible choices for this parameter include:
None
(X,Y) Polygons from Menu
(Lat,Lon) Polygons from Menu
(X,Y) Rotated Polygons from Menu
(Lat,Lon) Rotated Polygons from Menu
Polygons from File
Picture From ZGF
Area Limits from Data File
Area Limits from Grid
For a detailed description of each polygon source, see Polygon Source
Allows you to specify the method used to define the Select Area. The
Select Area is the union of one or more polygonal shapes that
collectively are used to define an area within which data is kept or
deleted. Possible choices for this parameter include: on page 577.
The tableSelect Area Coordinate Types on page 579 indicates how
Data Selection handles coordinates of different types.

Retain Points Inside or Outside Select Area

Defines which records of the file are retained, those inside the Select
Area or those outside the Select Area (polygons). Click (darken) the
appropriate button to:
Inside retains records that fall within or on the boundary of the Select
Area.
Outside retains records that fall outside the boundary of the Select Area.
Retain Extra Points Inside/Outside Select Area

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 594

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

For lines that cross the Select Area boundary, this parameter defines
whether an extra point on the line and outside the boundary is retained
(inside if records were retained outside). This is important for display
construction when retained lines are to be drawn up to the Select Area
boundary. This parameter has affect only with line-oriented data
(seismic DATA, FALT, VERT, SSEC, XSEC, and DWEL). Click
(darken) the appropriate button to:
Yes retains an extra point on the other side of the Select Area boundary.
No does not retain an extra point.

Vertex File Containing Polygons

A list of the vertex files contained in the currently attached MFDs or the
OpenWorks project appears. Click the file containing polygons you
wish to use in the Location Edit. The selected file appears as white on
black background. You may change your selection at any time. If the file
you want is not in the window, scroll the window to see the rest of the
files. If you still do not see the file, check to see that the MFD that
contains the file is attached to the Z-MAP Plus session.

Polygon(s) for Location Edit

Controls whether all or selected polygons from the selected Vertices file
are use in the Location Edit. When Select Individual Polygons is turned
on a list of Segment IDs for all polygons in the file appears in the
Segment Identifiers window. Click (darken) the appropriate button to:
Use All Polygons in the File. The union of all polygons in the selected
Vertices file defines the Select Area.
Select Individual Polygons. Location Edit uses up to 10 polygons
from the selected Vertices file. These polygons are the ones that have
been highlighted in the Segment Identifiers window.

Segment Identifiers
A list of all Segment IDs on the selected vertices file is displayed when
Polygon(s) for Location Edit is set to Select Individual Polygons. Click
the polygons you want to use for the Location Edit. Although you can
click more than 10 polygons only the first ten (sequentially) highlighted
polygons are used.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 595

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Select - Picture from ZGF

Operations, Data Selection, Select - Picture from ZGF

This dialog box allows you to select a graphics file and picture from that
graphics file. The selected picture defines the Limits of the Select Area
for this Location Edit.
Location Edit selects records from the dataset you specified on the main
menu that are located inside or outside this Select Area. Records located
on the boundary of the Select Area are considered to be inside the area.

Polygon Source
Allows you to redefine the method used to define the Select Area. The
Select Area is the union of one or more polygonal shapes that
collectively are used to define an area within which data is kept or
deleted.
Possible choices for the polygon source parameter include:
None
(X,Y) Polygons from Menu
(Lat,Lon) Polygons from Menu
(X,Y) Rotated Polygons from Menu
(Lat,Lon) Rotated Polygons from Menu

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 596

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Polygons from File

Picture From ZGF
Area Limits from Data File
Area Limits from Grid
For a detailed description of each polygon source, see Polygon Source
Allows you to specify the method used to define the Select Area. The
Select Area is the union of one or more polygonal shapes that
collectively are used to define an area within which data is kept or
deleted. Possible choices for this parameter include: on page 577.
The tableSelect Area Coordinate Types on page 579 indicates how
Data Selection handles coordinates of different types.

Retain Points Inside or Outside Select Area

Defines which records of the file are retained, those inside the Select
Area or those outside the Select Area (polygons). Click (darken) the
appropriate button to:
Inside retains record that fall within or on the boundary of the Select
Area.
Outside retains records that fall outside the boundary of the Select Area.

Retain Extra Points Inside/Outside Select Area

For lines that cross the Select Area boundary, this parameter defines
whether an extra point on the line and outside the boundary is retained
(inside if records were retained outside). This is important for display
construction when retained lines are to be drawn up to the Select Area
boundary. This parameter has affect only with line-oriented data
(seismic DATA, FALT, VERT, SSEC, XSEC, and DWEL). Click
(darken) the appropriate button to:
Yes retains an extra point on the other side of the Select Area boundary.
No does not retain an extra point.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 597

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Graphics File Containing Pictures

A list of the graphics files found on the graphics directory path is
presented. Click the file containing the picture you wish to use in the
Location Edit. The selected graphics file appears as white on black
background. You may change your selection at any time. If the file you
want is not in the window, scroll the window to see the rest of the files.
If you still do not see the file, check to see that the Graphics File
Directory Path points to the directory containing that graphics file. Once
you select the graphics file a list of pictures on that file appears in the
Picture Defining Area Limits window.

Picture Defining Area Limits

A list of pictures found on the selected graphics file is presented. Click
the picture you wish to use to define the Select Area for Location Edit.
The selected picture appears as white on a black background. You may
change your selection at any time. If the picture you want is not in the
window, scroll the window to see the rest of the pictures. If you still do
not see the picture, check to see if you have selected the correct graphics
file.

Select - Area Limits from Data File

Operations, Data Selection, Select -Area Limits from Data File

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 598

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Use this dialog box to select a DATA file from the attached MFDs or
from the files saved for the OpenWorks project. The minimum and
maximum values from coordinate fields in the selected data file define
the limits of the Select Area for this Location Edit.
Location Edit selects records from the dataset you specified on the main
menu that are located inside or outside this Select Area. Records located
on the boundary of the Select Area are considered to be inside the area.

Polygon Source
Allows you to redefine the method used to define the Select Area. The
Select Area is the union of one or more polygonal shapes that
collectively are used to define an area within which data is kept or
deleted. Possible choices for this parameter include:
None
(X,Y) Polygons from Menu
(Lat,Lon) Polygons from Menu
(X,Y) Rotated Polygons from Menu
(Lat,Lon) Rotated Polygons from Menu
Polygons from File
Picture From ZGF
Area Limits from Data File
Area Limits from Grid
For a detailed description of each polygon source, see Polygon Source
Allows you to specify the method used to define the Select Area. The
Select Area is the union of one or more polygonal shapes that
collectively are used to define an area within which data is kept or
deleted. Possible choices for this parameter include: on page 577.
The tableSelect Area Coordinate Types on page 579 indicates how
Data Selection handles coordinates of different types.

Retain Points Inside or Outside Select Area

Defines which records of the file are retained, those inside the Select
Area or those outside the Select Area (polygons). Click (darken) the
appropriate button to:
Inside retains record that fall within or on the boundary of the Select
Area.
Outside retains records that fall outside the boundary of the Select Area.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 599

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Retain Extra Points Inside/Outside Select Area

For lines that cross the Select Area boundary, this parameter defines
whether an extra point on the line and outside the boundary is retained
(inside if records were retained outside). This is important for display
construction when retained lines are to be drawn up to the Select Area
boundary. This parameter has affect only with line-oriented data
(seismic DATA, FALT, VERT, SSEC, XSEC, and DWEL). Click
(darken) the appropriate button to:
Yes retain an extra point on the other side of the Select Area boundary.
No does not retain an extra point.

File Defining Area Limits

A list of DATA files appears, which includes the DATA files in the
attached MFDs or saved for the OpenWorks project. Click the data file
you wish to use to define the Select Area in the Location Edit. The
selected file appears as white letters on a black background. You may
change your selection at any time. If the file you want is not in the
window, scroll the window to see the rest of the files. If you still do not
see the file, check to see that the MFD that contains the file is attached
to the Z-MAP Plus session.

Select - Area Limits from Grid File

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 600

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Operations, Data Selection, Select - Area Limits from Grid File

Use this dialog box to select a grid file from the attached MFDs or from
the files saved for the OpenWorks project. The X/Y limits from this grid
define the Limits of the Select Area for this Location Edit.
Location Edit selects records from the dataset you specified on the main
menu that are located inside or outside this Select Area. Records located
on the boundary of the Select Area are considered to be inside the area.

Polygon Source
Allows you to redefine the method used to define the Select Area. The
Select Area is the union of one or more polygonal shapes that
collectively are used to define an area within which data is kept or
deleted. Possible choices for this parameter include:
None
(X,Y) Polygons from Menu
(Lat,Lon) Polygons from Menu
(X,Y) Rotated Polygons from Menu
(Lat,Lon) Rotated Polygons from Menu
Polygons from File
Picture From ZGF
Area Limits from Data File
Area Limits from Grid
For a detailed description of each polygon source, see Polygon Source
Allows you to specify the method used to define the Select Area. The
Select Area is the union of one or more polygonal shapes that
collectively are used to define an area within which data is kept or
deleted. Possible choices for this parameter include: on page 577.
The tableSelect Area Coordinate Types on page 579 indicates how
Data Selection handles coordinates of different types.

Retain Points Inside or Outside Select Area

Defines which records of the file are retained, those inside the Select
Area or those outside the Select Area (polygons). Click (darken) the
appropriate button to:
Inside retains record that fall within or on the boundary of the Select
Area.
Outside retains records that fall outside the boundary of the Select Area.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 601

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Retain Extra Points Inside/Outside Select Area

For lines that cross the Select Area boundary, this parameter defines
whether an extra point on the line and outside the boundary is retained
(inside if records were retained outside). This is important for display
construction when retained lines are to be drawn up to the Select Area
boundary. This parameter has affect only with line-oriented data
(seismic DATA, FALT, VERT, SSEC, XSEC, and DWEL). Click
(darken) the appropriate button to:
Yes retains an extra point on the other side of the Select Area boundary.
No does not retain an extra point.

File Defining Area Limits

A list of grid files appears, which contains the grids in the attached
MFDs or in the OpenWorks project. Click the grid you want to use to
define the Select Area in the Location Edit. The selected grid appears as
white letters on a black background. You may change your selection at
any time. If the grid you want is not in the window, scroll the window
to see the rest of the grids. If you still do not see the grid, check to see
that the MFD that contains the grid is attached to the Z-MAP Plus
session.

Thinning Edit
Thinning edit can be performed on line-oriented data as well as on
non-line oriented data. The dialog box which appears when you click the
arrow to the right of Thinning Edit depends on the data type of your
input file. The Random Data File appears for non-line data files such as
text or well data files. The Line Data File appears if your input data is
line-oriented.

Select - Thinning Edit - Random Data File

This dialog box allows you to define how Thinning Edit is performed for
data that is not line-oriented (i.e., TEXT or well DATA). To perform a
Thinning Edit you specify the first record in the file you want to retain
and the frequency (for example, every second or third) for the remaining
retentions. Those specified records are transferred to the new output file.
This allows the number of records in a dataset to be reduced without
regard for spatial distribution.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 602

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Start Retention with Point

Specify the sequential position of the first record of the file to be thinned
that you want to be retained. This record is written to the output file.
Continuously adding the Retention Rate value to this number defines the
sequential position of the other records in the file that are to be retained.

Retention Rate
Specify the number that is to be repetitively added to the start retention
number in order to define the sequential positions of records in the file
that are to be retained. In other words, this is the rate at which points are
to be kept.

Select - Thinning Edit - Line Data File

Use this dialog box to specify how Thinning Edit is performed for
line-oriented data (such as seismic, fault, and vertex data). To perform a
Thinning Edit, specify the first record in the file you want to retain and
the frequency for the remaining retentions (for example, every second
or third). The specified records are copied to the output file. In this way,
you can reduce the number of records in a dataset without regard for
spatial distribution.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 603

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

You may optionally apply Thinning Edit on a line-by-line basis. To do

this, specify a Line Name or Segment ID field and the names or IDs to
be used. Data Selection then applies the thinning only to those lines. All
other lines are passed to the output file without thinning. Wildcard
characters allow you to easily select groups of lines having common
characters in their name (Wildcards cannot be used with Segment IDs).
The field type used in this selection process varies depending on the
files type.
Data Selection requires that a line-oriented file be sorted or in its
original captured order. For example, a seismic data file must be sorted
using line name as the primary sort field and shotpoint number as the
secondary sort field. Data Selection verifies that a file is sorted, but does
not automatically sort the file. The following table summarizes the sort
requirements of the Data Selection Edit options.

File Type Location Thinning Range

DATA (random) Unsorted Unsorted Unsorted

DATA (seismic) Conditionally sorted Sorted Unsorted

CNTR Load Order Load Order Load Order

FALT Load Order Load Order Load Order

VERT Load Order Load Order Load Order

TEXT Unsorted Unsorted Unsorted

SSEC N/A Load Order Load Order

XSEC N/A Load Order Load Order

DWEL Load Order Load Order Unsorted

Key
Unsorted - The order of records in the file does not matter.
N/A - The operation is not performed by Data Selection.
Conditionally - If extra records outside the Select Area are to be retained, the file
must be sorted in line name, shotpoint order.
Sorted - The file must be sorted in line name, shotpoint order.
Load Order - The order of the records in the file should be as they were loaded or
generated.

Control Field
A list of fields that can be used for line-by-line thinning is presented. If
you wish to thin only certain lines then select one of these fields. If you
do not select a field from this list then all lines are thinned equally.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 604

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

If you select a field, the field value in each record is compared to one or
more masks you specify. If the line does not match any masks, the line
is passed to the output file without thinning. If the line matches a mask,
the thinning criteria is used to thin the line.

Thin Mode
Use the Thin Mode option to control how thinning is applied to each
line. Choices for this parameter are:
Endpoints+Rate Retains the endpoints of the line. In addition,
retain every Retention Rate-th record on the file, beginning with
record Start Point. This uses Retention Rate and Start Point
parameters.
Endpoints+Divisible Retains the endpoints of the line. In
addition, retain ever Retention Rate-th record on the file that is
evenly divisible by Start Point. This uses Additive and Divisor
parameters and is appropriate only for seismic data.
Intervals Retains only those records which are at least Distance
units from the prior retained point. This uses the Distance
parameter.

Operator
This parameter is active if a Control Field has been selected to force
thinning on a line-by-line basis. Thinning Edit enables you to select
lines from a dataset based on each records value in the field (typically
line name or segment ID). You can instruct Data Selection to compare
a fields value to a Value by using the following operators:
EQ Equal to value.
NE Not equal value.
LT Less than value.
LE Less than or equal to value.
GT Greater than value.
GE Greater than or equal to value.
Null Equal to the ZNON (missing value) for the field.
Notnull Not equal to the ZNON (missing value) for the field.
Use the following operatiors to test field values for membership in a
range bounded by value A and value B:
Between Between value A and value B (endpoints included).
Outside Outside the interval bounded by value A and value B
(endpoints not included).

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 605

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Start Point
This parameter is only used if the Thin Mode value is Endpoints+Rate.
Specify the sequential position of the first file record that you want to
retain. This record is written to the output file. Continuously adding the
Retention Rate value to this number defines the sequential position of
the other records in the file that are retained.
If you have selected a Control Field, then you may specify up to 10 Start
Point values. Each value is applied only to those lines that match the
Line/Area Identification Masks. The Operator parameter (EQ, GT, LT,
etc.) determines the relationship between the records Control Field
value and the Mask.

Retention Rate
This parameter is only used if the Thin Mode value is Endpoints+Rate.
Specify the number to add repetitively to the Start Retention number in
order to define the sequential positions of file records to retain. (This is
the rate at which points are to be kept.)
If a Control Field is specified, you can specify a maximum of 10
Retention Rate values. Each value is applied only to the lines that match
the Line/Area Identification Masks. The Operator parameter (EQ, GT,
LT, etc.) determines the relationship between the records Control Field
value and the mask.

Additive
The Additive parameter is used only for seismic data and only if the
Thin Mode value is Endpoints+Divisible. Every Additive point on the
file that is evenly divisible by Divisor is kept.
If a Control Field is specified, you can specify a maximum of 10
Additive values. Each value is applied only to the lines that match the
Line/Area Identification Masks. The Operator parameter (EQ, GT, LT,
etc.) determines the relationship between the records Control Field
value and the mask.

Divisor
The Divisor parameter is used only for seismic data and only if the Thin
Mode value is Endpoints+Divisible. Every Additive point on the file
that is evenly divisible by Divisor is kept.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 606

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

If a Control Field is specified then you may specify up to 10 Divisor

values. Each value is applied only to those lines that match the Line/
Area Identification Masks. The Operator parameter (EQ, GT, LT, etc.)
determines the relationship between the records Control Field value
and the Mask.

Distance
This parameter is only used when Thin Mode is Intervals. Retain only
those records that are at least Distance from the previously retained
record.
If a Control Field is specified then you may specify up to 10 Distance
values. Each value is applied only to those lines that match the Line/
Area Identification Masks. The Operator parameter (EQ, GT, LT, etc.)
determines the relationship between the records Control Field value
and the Mask.

Delete
Allows you to delete selected entries in the scrolling windows on this
dialog box. These windows are only visible when a Control Field is
specified. To identify a line in the window for deletion, click the button
to the right of the line of entries. Those items with darkened buttons are
selected for deletion. To delete those selected items, click the Delete
button at the bottom right corner of the window. Undeleted lines are
shifted up in the window list.

Use Discontinuity Field

Specify whether discontinuity field values should be used during a
thinning edit on line data. If Yes, then any point that has a non-zero
discontinuity field value on a line that is being thinned passes the editing
criteria. This applies to DATA, FALT, VERT, SSEC, XSEC and
DWEL files. Click either Yes or No. The darkened entry is active.

Data Thinning - Wildcards

You can use text masks built with wildcard characters to select specific
lines for most Thinning Edit Operators. See Wildcard Characters
Application on page 610.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 607

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Line Area Identification Mask A

This parameter is only needed when Thinning on a line-by-line basis
and is used to determine which lines to thin. You can enter a maximum
of ten masks to compare with each records value in the selected control
field. If a line is found to match the nth mask then the nth thinning
criteria (box in the center of this dialog box) is applied.
You can use wildcard characters to define the mask (for example
*=multiple characters, %=single character). Rules for using wildcard
characters are described in the following text. The operator is used to
determine whether the records value must, for example equal or be
greater than the masks value. Rules for how operators work with masks
and with alphabetic characters are described after the wildcard
discussion.

Line Area Identification Mask B

This parameter is only needed when Thinning on a line-by-line basis
and the Operator is either Between or Outside. It is used to determine
which lines to thin. You may enter up to 10 Masks for comparison with
each records value in the selected Control Field. If a line is found to
match the nth mask then the nth thinning criteria (box in the center of
this dialog box) is applied.
As described for Mask A above, you can use wildcard characters in the
mask. Rules for using masks and for how operators work with masks
and with alphabetic characters are described in the following text.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 608

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Wildcard Characters Definition

Wildcard characters identify positions in a text string that are ignored
when a text string is compared to another.
Use this dialog box to specify wildcard characters to use in textual
comparisons for both Range and Thinning edits. You can specify a
multi-character wildcard to match 0 or more characters. For example,
consider the default multi-character wildcard *. The mask LINE*
matches any string which has the first four characters LINE, but does not
match the string LINE since this string begins with a space. The mask
LINE*1 matches the following strings:
LINE 1
LINE 01
LINE 11
LINE 21
LINE1
LINE01
LINE#1
LINEXXX1
but does not match LINE 10 since this string does not end with a 1.
The Select function interprets the single character wildcard to match
exactly one character. For example, consider the default single character
wildcard %. The mask LINE% matches any string containing five
characters with the first four being LINE but does not match LINE. The
mask LINE%1 matches the following strings:
LINE 1
LINE21
LINE31
LINE41
but does not match the strings LINE1 or LINE 1.
A mask can contain more than one wildcard character. For example, the
mask %A* matches all strings containing the letter A in the second
position.
Do not specify the same character for both the single and multi
wildcards.

User Defined Wildcards

Single Wildcard Character enables you to redefine the single
wildcard character. The default value is %.
Multi Wildcard Character allows you to redefine the multi
wildcard character. The default is *.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 609

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Wildcard Characters Application

You can use text masks built with wildcard characters to select specific
lines for all Thinning Edit Operators except Null and Notnull. The Null
and Notnull operators do not do a text string comparison. Some of the
Operators allow more freedom in the use of wildcard masks than do
others. The rules for using wildcards for different operators are defined
in the following text.

EQ and NE
Masks used with the EQ and NE operators may contain arbitrary
patterns of wildcard characters.

GT, LT, GE, and LE

Masks used with the GT, LT, GE, and LE operators must observe the
following conventions:
must begin with a non-wildcard character
may contain any number of % wildcards
may end with an * wildcard
must not contain an * wildcard before any characters that are to
be used in the comparison
To evaluate a text string with a mask containing wildcards, the program
processes the strings on a character-by-character basis as follows:
1. If characters occupying the same position in the string and the
mask are the same, Data Selection detects an equal to condition
and moves to the next pair of characters.
2. If a character from the mask which occupies the same position as a
character in the string is less than the string character based on the
computers collating sequence (greater/equal/less test for single
characters), Data Selection detects a less than condition and stops
processing the operation. Many computers use the following
collating sequence.
1 is less than 9
1 9 is less than A Z
A is less than Z
A Z is less than a z
3. If a character from the mask that occupies the same position as a
character in the string is greater than the string character based on
the computers collating sequence, Data Selection detects a
greater than condition and stops processing the operation.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 610

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

4. If an * wildcard is encountered, Data Selection detects a equal to

condition and stops processing.

Between and Outside

The two test masks used with the Between or Outside operators must
observe the following conventions:
must begin with a non-wildcard character
can contain any number of % wildcards
can end with an * wildcard
must not contain an * wildcard before any characters used in the
comparison
must contain the same number of characters
must contain identical wildcard characters in corresponding
positions
Data Selection tests each of the strings characters to determine whether
it is above, between (includes equal), or below corresponding characters
in the two masks you provide. This is done based on the computers
collating sequence (greater/equal/less test for single characters). When
any character that is being tested falls outside the test range then the
entire string is considered to be outside.

Example 1
Assume you are testing for Between and you provide:
Lower test mask = ccc* Upper test mask = jjj*
String being tested and result of test:
ddddd = between, because the first three characters are between c
and j.
adddd = not between, because the first character is below c.
dkddd = not between, because the second character is above j, even
though the other characters are between.
akddd = not between, because the first character is below c and the
second is above j, even though the others are between c and j.
ejdz = between, because the first three characters are between c
and j. The fourth character is ignored since the fourth character of
the test masks is an *.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 611

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Example 2
Assume you are testing for Outside and you provide:
Lower test mask = d%d* Upper test mask = j%j*
String being tested and result of test:
ddddd = not outside, because the first and third characters are
equal to the lower test mask.
adddd = outside, because the first character is below d, even
though the third character equals d.
dkddd = not outside, because the first and third characters are equal
to the lower test mask characters. The second character of the test
masks is a single character wildcard, therefore the second
character of the string is ignored.
akddd = outside, because the first character is below d, even
though the third character equals d.
ejdz = not outside, because the first and third characters are
between. The second and fourth characters are ignored, because
the second character of the test masks is the wildcard % and the
fourth character of the test masks is the wildcard *.

Select - Range Edit Equations Display

Range Edit Equations Display

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 612

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

This dialog box allows you to enter, display, edit, and delete Range Edit
equations. Up to 10 equations can be active. The equations are listed and
entered in a window with one equation per line. The equations consist
of four parts: field name, operator, value A, and value B. The equations
allow values in particular fields of a record to be compared to constants
to determine if the record should be retained.
To enter a new equation highlight an unspecified line in the equation
window. Whenever you request the creation of an equation or request to
change an existing equation, the Range Edit Equation Input dialog box
appears.
Clicking the position for Value A and Value B allows you to type entries
on those lines. When Apply is selected, the equations are saved. The
parts of this window include:

Field Name
This is a field name selected from a list of fields displayed on the Range
Edit Equation Input dialog box. Values in the field are compared to
Value A and Value B using the Operator (EQ, LT, GT, etc.) to
determine if the record should be retained.

Operator
This operator is used to compare a fields value in the record to Value A
or Value B to determine if the record should be retained. Valid
Operators include: EQ, NE, LT, LE, GT, GE, Between, Outside,
Notnull, and Null.

Value A
This is a constant numeric or alphanumeric value used to test the value
contained in the field of a record to determine if the record should be
retained. This constant is used with all Operators except Notnull and
Null.

Value B
This is a constant numeric or alphanumeric value used to test the value
contained in the field of a record to determine if the record should be
retained. This constant is used only with the Between and Outside
Operators.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 613

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Delete
Allows you to delete lines (equations) from the Range Edit Equation
window. To identify lines for deletion, click the button to the right of
each equation you wish to delete. Those equations with darkened
buttons are selected for deletion. To delete selected equations, click the
Delete button at the bottom right corner of the window. Undeleted
equations are shifted up in the window to fill deleted positions.

Select - Range Edit Equation Input

You can use this dialog box to define or edit a Range Edit equation.
Selecting a Field displays parameters in the lower half of the dialog box.
Selecting Line Name displays Text A (and Text B, if the Operator
value is set to Between or Outside). Selecting any other Field opens
Value A (and Value B, if the Operator value is set to Between or
Outside).

Fields
A list of fields found in the Input file is displayed. Click the field you
wish to use to perform the test. The selected field appears as white text
on a black background. You may change your selection at any time.

Operator
The operators are defined in the Thinning Edit section. See Operator
on page 605.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 614

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Click this popup menu and the available operators are displayed. In each
of the above tests, Value must be of the same type (numeric or character)
as the field being tested.
When you specify multiple Range Edit selections, they are applied in the
following way:
1. Selections on a common field are combined into one selection
using a logical Or operation (for example, a record that satisfies
one of the Range Edit conditions satisfies the entire condition for
that field).
2. Selections for distinct fields are combined using a logical And
operation (i.e., the fields of a record must satisfy all of the Range
Edit conditions to be retained in the output dataset). Multiple
selections on the same field are combined (case 1 above) and
treated as a single Range Edit condition when considered with
those for other fields.
3. When the EQ and NE operators are applied to character fields, the
entry for Value may contain wildcard characters. For a discussion
of wildcard characters, see Wildcard Characters Definition on
page 609 and Wildcard Characters Application on page 610.

Value A

Enter a numeric value that is to be the constant for operations EQ, NE,
LT, LE, GT, and GE. This value is also the lower constant for the
Between and Outside operations.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 615

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Value B
Enter a numeric value that is to be the upper constant for operations
Between and Outside.

Text A

Enter a text string that is to be the constant for operations EQ, NE, LT,
LE, GT, and GE. This value is also the lower constant for the Between
and Outside operations. Wildcard characters (* for multiple
characters and % for single characters) can be used to define masks
for this text string. For a discussion of wildcard characters, see
Wildcard Characters Definition on page 609 and Wildcard
Characters Application on page 610.

Text B
Enter a text string that is to be the upper constant for operations Between
and Outside. Wildcard characters (* for multiple characters and %
for single characters) can be used to define masks for this text string. For
a discussion of wildcard characters, see Wildcard Characters
Definition on page 609 and Wildcard Characters Application on
page 610.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 616

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Merge Data

Select Operations
Data Operations
Merge Data

Select input data A (fields must be sorted)

Select input data B (fields must be sorted)

Enter file name for merged data

Select output MFD or OpenWorks

Select type of merge operation

Concatenation Union Intersection Exception

Name output exception file and

select exception MGFD

Apply

Save and return to

Z-MAP Plus window

Data Operations Merge Data Workflow

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 617

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Use Merge Data to combine two sorted input files of the same type into
a new merged output file. You can concatenate, output the intersection
or union of the files, or create two files, one file being the intersection
and the other file being the exceptions. If the merge method is
intersection, union, or intersection with exceptions, then both input files
must be sorted using the same sort fields and both files must be of type
DATA.

Rules for the Input Files

The following constraints must be met by the files to be merged:
1. With the exception of Concatenation, both input files must be
sorted and at least one of the Sort Fields must be common to both
files (i.e., have the same name or be an X, Y, Lat, or Long field).
2. A file may only be merged with another file of the same type (for
example, DATA with DATA or VERT with VERT).
3. You cannot merge grid files.
4. Neither of the two input files should contain more than one each of
the following field types:
X-field
Y-field
latitude
longitude
When searching for a match in the other input file, Z-MAP Plus
ignores the field name for the above four field types. Multiple X-,
Y-, latitude, or longitude fields on one file may cause unpredictable
results.
5. With the exception of the X-field, Y-field, latitude, and longitude
fields, field names must match between input files in order for the
values to be placed in the same field in the output file.
6. In order for two fields to be matched, they must also have the same
file type.
7. Each matching field containing character data must have the same
number of characters in both files.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 618

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Default Width Determined by Input Data A

The field width in the new field is determined by the number of characters in
Input Data A. If the field in Input Data B has more characters than the
corresponding field from Input Data A, the merged field truncates data from
Input Data B to match the number of characters in Input Data A.

Specifying Merge Operation Parameters

Select Operations Data Operations Merge Data to display the
MERGE dialog box. Use this dialog box to specify the following
parameters:
Input Data A primary input file
Input Data B secondary input file
Output Name, Type of Merge name and location of output
file, type of Merge operation, and name of the exceptions file (for
an Exceptions Merge operation)

Input Data A
Click the Input Data A button in the MERGE dialog box. Select the
primary input file from the list presented. The output file orders its fields
to match the primary input file. Values from the primary input file
records are output, however, only if the secondary input files equivalent
field and record has a null value or does not exist. The primary values
are written first, then the secondary values overwrite them.

Input Data B
Click the Input Data B button in the MERGE dialog box. Select the
secondary input file from the list presented. This file must be of the same
type as the primary input file. (If the file types do not match, an error
message appears.) For an Intersection or Exception Merge operation,
the values from the secondary input file are included in the output file if
the fields match those in the primary input file.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 619

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Output Name, Type of Merge

Click the Output Name, Type of Merge button in the MERGE dialog
box to display the Name Output dialog box.
Use the Name Output dialog box to specify the following input values:
name of the merged file
MFD to use for storing the file (or use the OpenWorks project)
the kind of merge performed
the name of an exceptions file

Merged File Name

Enter the name of the file to be created. The name can be up to 24
characters long and can contain internal blanks.

Output File MASTER FILE

If you click the parameter box, a popup menu appears, which lists
OpenWorks, the attached MFDs, and the scratch file. Select the MFD to
use for storing the output merged file.

Type of Merge Operation

From the Type of Merge Operation list, choose one of these operations:
CONCATENATION (default setting) Append a file to another
file (applicable to any file type except GRID).
UNION Create a file from two DATA files, which contains the
records common to both files and the records unique to each file.
INTERSECTION Create a file from two DATA files, which
contains the records common to both files. Common implies that
values in the Sort fields of the two datasets are the same.
EXCEPTION Create a file from two DATA files, which
contains the records common to both files, and create an exception
file that contains the records unique to each file.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 620

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

How Merge Data Works

For all Merge operations, field names on the Primary File are compared
to field names in the Secondary File. Any fields that occur on both the
Primary and the Secondary File are output as a single field. The results
from both files are written to these fields. Fields that are unique to one
or the other file are also output and contain ZNONs for records from the
file that did not have a matching field in the other file. The X and Y
fields and the Latitude and Longitude fields of both files are always put
into one field of that type in the output file.
The secondary dataset values override the primary dataset values,
except where there is no matching field in the secondary dataset, or
where the secondary value is ZNON. In such cases the primary dataset
value is placed in the merge file.

CONCATENATION
Concatenation appends two files of the same type onto each other by
appending the secondary file (B) to the primary file (A). This type of
merge operation can be performed on all file types except grids.
Example:
(X and Y fields are sort fields)
Primary File | Secondary File
|
X Y Top Thick | Xcoor Ycoor Top Net
----------------------------|----------------------------
27.3 75.8 4324.1 37.8 | 27.3 75.8 4324.1 12.6
32.4 41.5 3345.1 47.5 | 41.9 91.4 4112.8 33.3
54.2 23.4 1123.4 53.0 | 54.2 23.4 1111.3 38.4

Merged File
X Y Top Thick Net
--------------------------------------------
27.3 75.8 4324.1 37.8 1.E30
32.4 41.5 3345.1 47.5 1.E30
54.2 23.4 1123.4 53.0 1.E30
27.3 75.8 4324.1 1.E30 12.6
41.9 91.4 4112.8 1.E30 33.3
54.2 23.4 1111.3 1.E30 38.4

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 621

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

UNION
Union outputs all records unique to the primary file, all records unique
to the secondary file, and all records that are common to both. Common
means that all sort fields that are common to both files and have the
same value in both files. Union can be applied only to files of type
DATA.
Example:

(X and Y fields are sort fields)

Primary File | Secondary File
|
X Y Top Thick | Xcoor Ycoor Top Net
---------------------------|----------------------------
27.3 75.8 4324.1 37.8 | 27.3 75.8 4324.1 12.6
32.4 41.5 3345.1 47.5 | 41.9 91.4 4112.8 33.3
54.2 23.4 1123.4 53.0 | 54.2 23.4 1111.3 38.4

Merged File
X Y Top Thick Net
--------------------------------------------
27.3 75.8 4324.1 37.8 12.6
32.4 41.5 3345.1 47.5 1.E30
41.9 91.4 4112.8 1.E30 33.3
54.2 23.4 1111.3 53.0 38.4

INTERSECTION
Intersection outputs only records common to both the primary (A) and
secondary (B) input files. Common means that all sort fields that are
common to both files and have the same value in both files. You can
apply Intersection only to files of type DATA.
Example:

(X and Y fields are sort fields)

Primary File | Secondary File
|
X Y Top Thick | Xcoor Ycoor Top Net
---------------------------|----------------------------
27.3 75.8 4324.1 37.8 | 27.3 75.8 4324.1 12.6
32.4 41.5 3345.1 47.5 | 41.9 91.4 4112.8 33.3
54.2 23.4 1123.4 53.0 | 54.2 23.4 1111.3 38.4

Merged File
X Y Top Thick Net
--------------------------------------------
27.3 75.8 4324.1 37.8 12.6
54.2 23.4 1111.3 53.0 38.4

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 622

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

EXCEPTION
This is identical to the Intersection Merge Operation in that records
common to both the primary and secondary file are output to the merge
file. However, in addition, all other records of both files are output to the
exception file. You can apply Intersection only to files of type DATA.
Example:

(X and Y fields are sort fields)

Primary File | Secondary File
|
X Y Top Thick | Xcoor Ycoor Top Net
---------------------------|----------------------------
27.3 75.8 4324.1 37.8 | 27.3 75.8 4324.1 12.6
32.4 41.5 3345.1 47.5 | 41.9 91.4 4112.8 33.3
54.2 23.4 1123.4 53.0 | 54.2 23.4 1111.3 38.4

Merged File
X Y Top Thick Net
--------------------------------------------
27.3 75.8 4324.1 37.8 12.6
54.2 23.4 1111.3 53.0 38.4

Exceptions File
X Y Top Thick Net
--------------------------------------------
32.4 41.5 3345.1 47.5 1.E30
41.9 91.4 4112.8 1.E30 33.3

Output Exception File

If you chose EXCEPTION from the Type of Merge Operation list,
specify a name for the exception file. The name can be up to 24
characters long and can contain internal blanks.

Exception MASTER FILE

If you click the parameter box, a popup menu appears, which lists
OpenWorks, the attached MFDs, and the scratch file. Select the MFD to
use for saving the output exception file.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 623

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Range Editing

Select Operations
Data Operations Range Editing

Select input data file

Enter output data name and select output MFD or OpenWorks

Indicate whether Keep Values are Inside or Outside specified range

What is the scope of the edit?

Entire dataset Line match Area match Text match

Enter alphanumeric string to limit scope of edit, if desired

Enter range minimums and maximums for fields selected to edit

Select limiting text field, if desired

Apply

Save and return to

Z-MAP Plus window

Range Edit Workflow

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 624

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Range Edit allows you to keep or delete records of a file based on

whether values in particular fields are inside particular ranges. Range
Edit can be performed on the entire dataset, or, on a subset, based on a
Line Name, Area Name, or Character Text that matches a text string you
supply. Your text string is compared to values in a field having a type
matching one of the three mentioned above.

Input Data
Select a file from the list that appears. One or more fields are selected
from this file and used as input when the option executes.

Output File, Edit Type and Scope

Use this dialog box to specify the following input values:
name of the new file
MFD to use for storing the file (or use the OpenWorks project)
whether to keep records whose field values are inside or outside a
specified range
whether the entire dataset or a subset based on line, area, or text
match is edited
text string to search when defining the subset to edit

Output Data Name

Enter the name of the file to be created. The name can be up to 24
characters long and can contain internal blanks.

Output Data Master File

If you click the parameter box, a popup menu appears, which lists
OpenWorks, the attached MFDs, and the scratch file. Select the MFD to
use for saving the output data file.

Keep Values
Controls which points are deleted, either those inside or those outside
the specified range. Possible choices for this parameter include:
Inside (default). Keep all records whose Select Field values lie inside
the Selected Ranges.
Outside. Keep all records whose Select Field values lie outside the
Selected Ranges.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 625

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Scope of Edit
Controls whether the entire data set, or a subset based on Line name,
Area name, or a Text string is Range Edited. Whether inside or outside
was selected, only those records that meet the Scope of Edit criteria are
output. Possible choices for this parameter include:
Entire Dataset (default). Apply the range edits to the entire data set.
Line Match. Apply the range edits to all records whose value in the
Line Name Field (Field type 22) match the value you enter in the
Matching String for Limiting Scope of Edit. Records that do not match
are ignored for this edit.
Area Match. Apply the range edits to all records whose value in the
Area Name Field (Field type 23) match the value you enter in the
Matching String for Limiting Scope of Edit. Records that do not match
are ignored for this edit.
Text Match. Apply the range edits to all records whose value in the
Character Text Field (Field type 20) match the value you enter in the
Matching String for Limiting Scope of Edit. Records that do not match
are ignored for this edit.

Matching String for Limiting Scope of Edit

Enter the text string that is to be searched for when establishing the
scope of the edits. This string is compared to values in either a Line
Name, Area Name, or Character Text field. The Scope of Edit parameter
determines which is searched (it is set to either Line Match, Area Match,
or Text Match). If the Scope of Edit parameter is set to Entire Dataset,
this parameter has no effect. If this string does not match values of any
records in the file, nothing is written to the output file.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 626

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Select Fields
The ordered selection dialog box is required when the user has the
option of determining the order in which field labels or symbols are
posted, or the order in which fields are printed on a report. The ordered
selection dialog box has two lists side by side. The left window is the
Source List. These fields are listed from your input data file. The right
window is the Destination List. When you click a field name from the
Source List, the field appears on the Destination List. By clicking a field
on the Source List, you indicate that you want to place that field on your
Output File.
The order of the fields on the Destination List determines the order of
the fields on the output file.
There are three mode buttons on the Ordered Selection dialog box:
Append, Delete, and Insert. These three buttons only affect the fields
on the Destination List. You can add (append), delete, and change the
order of (insert) the fields on the Destination List. Normally, the
Append button is the usual button to use when selecting fields to be
placed on the output file. Append is the default mode.
Append. To place a field on the Destination List, the Append button
must be depressed. Simply click the fields you want on the output file.
They appear on the Destination List.
Delete. You can delete any field on the Destination list. With the Delete
button depressed, click the fields you wish to delete from your output
file.
Insert. Insert allows you to pick a field on the Destination List and
Insert a field from the Source List on top of it.

Range Edit Field Mins and Maxs

This dialog box allows you to specify the minimum and maximum range
values for each field selected. The default values are the minimum and
maximum value of the selected fields. Records whose values fall inside
or outside (depends on Keep Values parameter setting) these limits are
written to the output file.

Specify Minimum for This Field

Enter a value that represents the lower limit for testing whether a record
should be kept or rejected. This limit is applied only to this field.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 627

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Specify Maximum for This Field

Enter a value that represents the upper limit for testing whether a record
should be kept or rejected. This limit is applied only to this field.

Text Field for Scope Definition

A list of Fields of type Line Name, Area Name, or Character Text is
presented. Point to and click the field you want. This field is used when
limiting the scope (records) to which the Range Edits are applied. Fields
in this list were picked from a previously selected file.

Rotate Data

Select Operations
Data Operations
Rotate Data

Select input data file

Enter output data name and select MFD or OpenWorks

Set rotation variables

Apply

Save and return to

Z-MAP Plus window

Data Operations Rotate Data Workflow

Rotate Data allows you to specify an angle for rotating the records of a
file. The X and Y coordinates of the file are changed in a manner that
rotates the data about a specified coordinate that many (angle) degrees.
You can specify the file to be rotated, the point about which the rotation
takes place, the coordinates for the rotation point in the rotated
coordinate system, and a scale factor to multiply both the X and Y
coordinates of the rotated file by.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 628

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Applications
This option can be used as part of a series of steps which incorporates a
directional bias into a grid. Given that there is an angle (say N33E), and
bias (say 3:1), to the surface, the steps would be:
1. Rotate to North-South (33 degrees, use all other defaults).
2. Divide Y-coordinate by 3 (scale by 1/bias magnitude).
3. Build a default grid.
4. Convert the grid to data (name Z-field same as the original data
Z-field).
5. Multiply the Y-coordinate by 3 (scale by bias magnitude).
6. Rotate back to original position (33 degrees, use all other defaults).
7. Merge (Concatenate) with the original data.
8. Build a grid of the merged data.
Data rotation can also be used when an equally spaced data array, such
as 3D seismic data, is not oriented in the NS-EW direction. To do this,
import the data as control points, rotate so that the data is aligned
NS-EW, and build a grid. Contours from this grid are not in the original
datas coordinate system. To display the contours in that orientation,
contour the grid, save the contours as a contour file, rotate the contours
back to the original data orientation, and then contour again using the
rotated contours as input rather than the grid.

Input Data
A list of data files appears. A field is selected from this file and used as
input when the option executes. The X and Y coordinates of this file are
changed so that the data are rotated about a point per specified number
of degrees.

Output Data Name, Parameters

Use this dialog box to specify the name of the file, MFD to use for
storing the file (or use the OpenWorks project), angle of rotation,
coordinates of the rotation point, new coordinates for the rotation point
in the rotated system, and scale factor for the X and Y coordinates in the
rotated system.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 629

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Output Data Name

Enter the name of the file to be created. The name can be up to 24
characters long and can contain internal blanks.

Output File Master File

If you click the parameter box, a popup menu appears, which lists
OpenWorks, the attached MFDs, and the scratch file. Select the MFD to
use for saving the output data file.

Degree of Rotation (Clockwise)

Enter a number representing the angle (degrees) of clockwise rotation to
be applied to the X/Y coordinates of the file. A negative angle indicates
counter-clockwise rotation. The default value is zero.

X- or Y-Center Before Rotation

Enter a number representing the x or y coordinate of a point about which
the rotation occurs. These default to zero. Most mappers use the defaults
(0,0) unless trying to create a special effect.
Sometimes coordinates of the new, rotated data are too large to be stored
in the computer (i.e., larger than single precision accuracy,
approximately 7 significant digits). When this happens, a point in the
center of the data is chosen to rotate about rather than the (0,0) of the
coordinate system.

X- or Y-Center After Rotation

Enter a number representing the x or y coordinate that the point of
rotation uses in the new rotated coordinate system. These values default
to zero. Most mappers use the defaults (0,0) unless trying to create a
special effect.
The data are shifted to this point by first rotating the data about the
X/Y-Center Before Rotation point. A constant is then added to the x
coordinates and another to the y coordinates so that the original point of
rotation is now located at the coordinates you entered for these
parameters. Most mappers accept the default rotation of (0,0).

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 630

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Scale Factor for Rotated Data

Enter a number that can be used to scale (multiply) all the x and y
coordinates by. The default value is1.
Sometimes coordinates of the new, rotated data are too large to be stored
in the computer (i.e., larger than single precision accuracy,
approximately 7 significant digits). When this happens and you do not
want to change the original rotation point, you can reduce the size of the
coordinates by making this number a fraction of one.

Move Data Closer or Further Apart

Using this approach to reduce the size of the numbers moves all of the data
closer together, or, if using a number larger than 1, moves them farther apart.

Sort Data

Select Operations
Data Operations in
Z-MAP Plus window.

Set the field sort order by selecting field

names in the correct order.

Enter sorted output file name and select

MFD or OpenWorks.

Specified field statistics appear in status area.

Save and return to

Z-MAP Plus window.

Data Operations Sort Data Workflow

The Sort Data operation rearranges file records in ascending order,
based on values in selected fields. Some options, such as Merge Data,
require the data to be sorted first. Other applications that use
Z-MAP Plus export data often require the output to be sorted, so you
may need to sort the file before you create the export file.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 631

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

How the Sort Data Operation Works

One field of the Input File is selected as the First Sort Field. The sorted
output records are in ascending order with respect to the contents of that
field. Up to nine additional Sort Fields can be specified.
If two records have equivalent First Sort Field values, the other fields are
used in the order specified to determine proper order. If records have
identical values for each of the sort fields, then those records are output
in the same order they occurred in the Input File and adjacent to one
another. The standard sort is a modified Heapsort algorithm with an
automatic merge-to-disk for files that are too large for the work-space.
This method is very fast for small or medium-sized files (a few thousand
records).

Input Data
A list of files is presented. Select the input file you want.

Sort Fields
You can select up to 10 Sort Fields. The file is sorted in ascending order
with respect to values in the first sort field. If that field has two identical
values, then the second sort field is used to sort those values. If records
have identical values for each of the sort fields, then those records are
output in the same order they occurred in the Input File, and adjacent to
one another.

Output Name
Use this dialog box to specify the name of the output data file and MFD
to use for storing the file (or use the OpenWorks project).

Sorted Output File Name

Enter the name of the file to be created. The name can be up to 24
characters long and can contain internal blanks.

Output File Master File

If you click the parameter box, a popup menu appears, which lists
OpenWorks, the attached MFDs, and the scratch file. Select an MFD to
use for saving the sorted output file.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 632

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Field Operations

Use the Field Operations options to copy, rename, and delete fields from
all nongrid files. The file that contains the fields to be modified is never
changeda copy of the file is created.

Select Operations Data Operations

from Z-MAP Plus window

Copy only Copy original Rename Delete

selected fields and fields fields
fields add additional
fields

Save and return to Z-MAP Plus window

Field Operations Workflow

Copy Only Selected Fields, Copy Original Fields and Add Additional Fields
Copy Original Fields and Add Additional Fields has the same menu as
the Copy Only Selected Fields procedure, but the results are different.
Copy Original and Add copies all fields in the input file to the output
file, and enables you to select fields to add. The field parameters for
additional fields can be altered to create additional fields in the output
file. You can also modify field parameters for copied fields.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 633

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Select Operations Data Operations

in Z-MAP Plus window

Select one of
two copy fields
methods Copy original fields and
Copy only selected fields
add additional fields

Select input file

Enter output file name and MFD or OpenWorks

Choose only selected fields to copy Choose additional fields

Change
Yes any field No
parameters?
Change field name, type,
format and/or ZNON

Apply

On screen report appears confirming copy fields

Save and return to

Z-MAP Plus window

Copy Fields Workflow

Selected fields can be copied from one file to a new file. During the copy
you can change the following:
fields name

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 634

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

field type
stored format descriptors (FORTRAN format)
ZNONs
destination MFD or OpenWorks project
The fields source file is not altered. You name a new file and select the
output MFD.

Input File
A list of non-grid files is presented. Point to and click the file you want.
This file is used as input when the option executes.

Output File Name and Master File

Use this dialog box to specify the new file name, MFD to use for storing
it (or use the OpenWorks project), and whether file history is carried
along to the new file.
Output File Name Enter the name of the file to be created. The
name can be up to 24 characters long and can contain internal
blanks. If you do not supply a name, a forward slash is added to
the old file name (for example, old name TOP OF MUDDY or
new default name /TOP OF MUDDY).
Output File Master File If you click the parameter box, a
popup menu appears, which lists OpenWorks, the MFDs attached
to the Z-MAP Plus session, and the scratch file. Select the MFD to
use for saving the output file.
Copy File History? This parameter allows you to carry history
information contained in the original file into the file you are
creating. File History describes what has happened to a file (ie.how
that file was created, parameter settings, files used, etc.). The
history can potentially go back many generations. Possible choices
for this parameter include:
Copy History Copy the history as it appears in the original
file and add this copy event to that file.
Do Not Copy (default value) Do not copy the history from
the original file. Instead, make this copy event the first item in
the files history.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 635

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Select Fields to Copy (Ordered Selection)

If you are in the Copy Original Fields and Add Additional Fields menu, you are
not selecting fields to copy; you are copying all your fields and you are selecting
fields to add.

An ordered selection dialog box presents a list of items, usually fields,

which can be used to produce a grid or data. The user controls both the
number of available fields which are used in the operation, and the order
in which the selected fields are arranged. A maximum of 10 fields can
go on the Destination List.

Ordered Selection Dialog Box

Click the Source List in the order desired for the fields on the output file.
You can edit the Destination List using the Delete and Insert buttons.

Append Mode
This mode is the default mode and is used to copy an item in the source
list to the end of the destination list. You put the dialog box into append
mode by selecting the append radio button.

Delete Mode
Use this mode to delete items from the destination list. You put the
dialog box into delete mode by selecting the Delete button. In delete
mode, you delete an item from the destination list by selecting it.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 636

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Select Fields to Add

The selections of fields you make here become the (additional) fields on
the output file.

Field Parameters for Added Fields

You can change the following settings for duplicated fields by using
steps similar to the ones for the Copy Only Selected Fields option
(described on page 633):
Field name
Field type stored format descriptors
FORTRAN format
ZNON (null or missing data value)

Results of Copy Original Fields and Add Additional Fields

Given an input file with three fields: X, Y, and Z:
If you have three fields on your input file, and if you select to duplicate
one field, the Z-field, your output file looks like this:
X Y Z Z
You can then select to change the field name and field type for fields on
the output file.
Change the duplicated Z to Shotpoint Number. Your output file has
these four fields:
X Y Z Shotpoint
To check the results, select Copy Fields again and use the output file
you just created as an input file. When you select Fields to Copy, the
new fields and field names should appear. You can also use the File
Info File Listing option.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 637

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Output Field Names

You can change the names of fields being copied. The original field
names are the default field names.

New Field Name

Enter the new name to store with this field when it is copied. The name
can be a maximum of 20 characters long and can contain internal blanks.

Output Field Types

A list of field names and previously selected field types appears. Select
the field type to be used for each copied field. Do this by pointing to and
clicking the Field Type box to be changed, moving the cursor to the
desired field type and releasing the button. The default field type is the
original fields type.

New Field Type

In the popup menu, select the field type. Not all field types appear in the
list. The last option in the list is (Other Field Types). To select a field
type that is not listed, select the (Other Field Types) option. Once you
click OK in the Output Field Types dialog box, a list of field types
appears. The status area prompts you to specify the field you need:
More FIELD types for field X-FIELD
Select a field type from the list. The dialog box closes immediately. If
you selected (Other Field Types) for more than one field, the list dialog
box and prompt reappear for each of the fields.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 638

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Output Field Format Descriptors

You can change the field format descriptor (FORTRAN format) that is
stored with the copied field. Field format descriptors are specified in
FORTRAN format notation, with the defaults taken from the original
field. The default descriptions are usually acceptable. However, since
these formats are used for default printing and exporting, this may be a
good time to improve some default formats.
Valid FORTRAN format notation includes:
Character Field Use the letter A followed by the maximum
number of characters for the column width, rounded up to a
multiple of 4. Text is left justified in the column.
Example:

Text in field (13 characters)= Base of Muddy

FORTRAN format = A16
Output = Base of Muddy
Column positions = ----------------

Even Multiples
The maximum size is an even multiple of 4.

Numeric Field (F Format) Use the letter F followed by the

maximum number of characters wide the column is to be, a period,
and the maximum number of decimal places you want to the right
of the decimal. The text is right justified in the column. An F is
FORTRAN floating point format.
Example:

Number in field = 4398.455

FORTRAN format = F10.4
Output = 4398.4550
Column positions = ----------

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 639

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Numeric Field (G Format) Use the letter G followed by the

maximum number of characters wide the column is to be, a period,
and the maximum number of significant digits you want to be
displayed. The text is right justified in the column. A G is the
FORTRAN general format.
Example:

Number in field = 4392.455

FORTRAN format = G15.5
Output = 4392.5
Column positions = ---------------

Example:

Number in field = 4392.455

FORTRAN format = G15.3
Output = .439E+04
Column positions = ---------------

Example:

Number in field = 4392.455

FORTRAN format = G15.7
Output = 4392.455
Column positions = ---------------

New Field Format

Enter the new format (FORTRAN) for the field.

Output Field ZNONS

The value of ZNON to be stored with each field, can be changed when
the field is copied. This value can be any valid number supported by
your computer. Never use a number between the minimum and
maximum value in the field, as this creates many problems when
building grids and drawing contours from those grids. The default is the
original ZNON of the field.

New ZNON
Enter the new default ZNON value to be stored with this field when it is
copied. The standard Z-MAP Plus ZNON is 0.1E+31.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 640

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Rename Fields

Select Operations Data Operations

in Z-MAP Plus window

Select input file

Enter output file name and select an MFD or

OpenWorks

Select to copy or not to copy file history

Select Fields to Rename

List of fields on input file appears

Enter new names for selected fields

Apply

To verify, select output file just created as Input File.

When you select Fields to Rename, the fields you

Confirmation of rename fields procedure

Save and return to Z-MAP Plus window

Rename Fields Workflow

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 641

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Overview
Fields of any type in the selected file can be renamed. The process of
renaming is actually a copy of the old file to a new file, renaming the
fields in the process. All fields in the old file are copied to the new file;
only those fields selected are renamed. The original file is unaltered.

Input File
Select an input file from the list of files that appears.

Output File Name and Master File

Use this dialog box to specify the new file name, the MFD to use for
storing it (or use the OpenWorks project), and whether file history is
carried along to the renamed file.
Output File Name Enter the name of the file to create. The
name can be up to 24 characters long and can contain internal
blanks. If you do not supply a name, a forward slash is added to
the old file name (for example, old
name TOP OF MUDDY or new default name /TOP OF
MUDDY).
Output File Master File If you click the parameter box, a
popup menu appears, which lists OpenWorks, the attached MFDs,
and the scratch file. Select the MFD to use for saving the output
file.
Copy File History This parameter allows you to carry history
information contained in the original file into the file you are
creating. File History describes what has happened to a file (i.e.,
how that file was created, parameter settings, files used, etc.). The
history can potentially go back many generations. Possible choices
for this parameter include:
Copy History Copy the history as it appears in the original
file and add this copy event to that file.
Do Not Copy (default value) Do not copy the history from
the original file. Instead make this copy event the first item in
the files history.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 642

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Fields to Rename
A list of Fields is presented. Point to and click the Fields you want to
rename. Fields selected to be renamed appear as white letters on a black
background. You can toggle these fields on and off until you are ready
to rename.

Output Field Names

Names of the fields being copied can be changed. The default names are
the original field names.

New Field Name

Enter the new name to be stored with this field when it is copied. The
name can be up to 20 characters long and can contain internal blanks.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 643

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Delete Fields

Select Operations Data Operations

in Z-MAP Plus window

Select input file

Enter output file name and select an MFD or

OpenWorks

Select fields to delete and OK

Apply

To verify, select the output file name. When you select Fields
to Delete, it should have only the fields you did not delete.

Name of file and creation date and time appear

Save and return to

Z-MAP Plus window

Delete Fields Workflow

Fields of any type in the selected file can be deleted. The process of
deletion is actually a copy of the old file to a new file, deleting the fields
in the process. All fields in the old file are copied to the new file, except
those fields selected to be deleted. The original file is unaltered.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 644

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Input File
A list of files is presented. Point to and click the file you want. This file
is used as input when the option executes.

Output File Name and Master File

Use this dialog box to specify the new file name and the MFD to use for
storing it (or use the OpenWorks project).

Output File Name

Enter the name of the file to be created. The name can be up to 24
characters long and can contain internal blanks. If you do not supply a
name a forward slash is added to the old file name (for example, old
name TOP OF MUDDY or new default name /TOP OF MUDDY).

Output File Master File

If you click the parameter box, a popup menu appears, which lists
OpenWorks, the attached MFDs, and the scratch file. Select the MFD to
use for saving the output file.

Copy File History

This parameter allows you to carry history information contained in the
original file into the file you are creating. File History describes what
has happened to a file (i.e., how that file was created, parameter settings,
files used, etc.). The history can potentially go back many generations.
Possible choices for this parameter include:
Copy History Copy the history as it appears in the original file and
add this copy event to that file.
Do Not Copy (default value) Do not copy the history from the
original file. Instead, make this copy event the first item in the files
history.

Fields to Delete
Select one or more fields to delete from the list that appears. The
selected fields are deleted immediately when Delete Fields executes. No
confirmation message box appears. Once you Apply field deletion, the
fields are deleted. However, since Z-MAP Plus never modifies an
existing file, you can go back to the original file to get a deleted field.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Data Operations 645

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Geophysical Operations

Geophysical operations include:

Append X-Y to Seismic Time File starting on page 647
Grid to Seismic Lines Converter starting on page 648
Migration, Reverse Migration starting on page 649
Mistie Reduction starting on page 653
Seismic Data Thinning starting on page 656
Scale/Bias Line or Area starting on page 662
Normalized Interval Velocity (Data) starting on page 664
Normalized Interval Velocity (Grid) starting on page 665
Append X-Y to Seismic Time File. Attaches an X (Northing) and Y
(Easting) values to a Seismic time file using a Seismic Location File and
interpolating the shotpoint numbers in the Seismic Time File.
Grid to Seismic Lines Converter. Converts a grids rows, columns, or
both to seismic lines and concatenates them together in one output
seismic file.
Migration, Reverse Migration. Produces a control point file
containing migrated grid nodes.
Mistie Reduction. Shifts lines to correct seismic misties.
Seismic Data Thinning. Reduces the number of lines or horizons from
a seismic survey before gridding.
Scale/Bias Line or Area. Adds or multiplies by a constant value all the
points of a selected Z-field in a seismic line or in an area.
Normalized Interval Velocity (Data). Produces a control point file
with data fields describing top-lapped, base-lapped depth, and a final
normalized interval velocity calculation.
Normalized Interval Velocity (Grid). Produces a control point file
with data fields describing top-lapped, base-lapped depth, and a final
normalized interval velocity calculation.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Geophysical Operations 646

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Append X-Y to Seismic Time File

Append X-Y to Seismic Time File attaches X (Easting) and Y
(Northing) values to a seismic time file. Using digitized map shotpoint
locations in a Seismic Location File (sometimes called a geographic
location file), the macro interpolates x,y values from the location values.
As a result, x,y values for the shotpoint numbers in the Seismic Time
File are merged with the Digitized Seismic Section File.
If the process must interpolate or extrapolate to get the correct location
values, you can specify:
a maximum distance between points for interpolation
an interpolation value
an extrapolation value
The seismic time file must be of type DATA, and it must contain Line
Name and Shotpoint Number fields. Sort the file first by Line Name and
then by Shotpoint Number with the Operations Data Operations
Sort Data option.
The coordinate reference file must be of type DATA, and it must contain
line name, shotpoint number, and x and y coordinate fields. Sort the file
first by Line Name and then by Shotpoint Number with the
Operations Data Operations Sort Data option.
This option calls the APPEND-XY macro. For detailed information
about parameters for this operation, select Help Online Manuals
Macro Manuals, then locate the APPEND-XY topic.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Geophysical Operations 647

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Grid to Seismic Lines Converter

This option converts the rows and columns of a grid to seismic lines and
concatenates them together in one output seismic file (dataset).
You can specify whether to output:
N-S lines (columns)
W-E lines (rows)
both N-S lines and W-E lines
Using this process, you can create a seismic file for use in conjunction
with the Operations Faults Shrinker option.
You are asked to specify:
name of the input grid file
name of the output seismic file and where to store it.
which lines are to be converted
This process produces a seismic dataset that contains the x and y values
for each grid node location, with a shotpoint number that is derived from
the y value and a line name that is derived from the x value.

Generating a Proper Sequential Line Name and Shotpoint Record

To generate a file that contains proper sequential line name and shotpoint
number records, you must implement the Data Enumeration macro twice on the
same file, entering the key field first for Line Name and second for Shotpoint
Number. Since this macro creates only Segment I.D. fields, you next need to
export the final file and import it reading in one of the Segment I.D. fields as the
line name and the other as the Shotpoint Number.

For example:

X (EASTING) Y (NORTHING) SHOT POINT LINE NAME Z VALUE

0.28920E+07 0.23600E+07 0.23600E+07 0.28920E+07 1999.2
0.28920E+07 0.23620E+07 0.23620E+07 0.28920E+07 2048.6
0.28920E+07 0.23640E+07 0.23640E+07 0.28920E+07 2121.3
0.28920E+07 0.23660E+07 0.23660E+07 0.28920E+07 2201.1
0.28920E+07 0.23680E+07 0.23680E+07 0.28920E+07 2278.5
0.28920E+07 0.23700E+07 0.23700E+07 0.28920E+07 2350.6
0.28920E+07 0.23720E+07 0.23720E+07 0.28920E+07 2424.1

This option calls the GRID-TO-SEISMIC macro. For detailed

information about parameters for this operation, select Help
Online Manuals Macro Manuals, then locate the
GRID-TO-SEISMIC topic..

R2003.12.0 Operations: Geophysical Operations 648

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Migration, Reverse Migration

Migration, Reverse Migration is a line ray trace algorithm which uses
average interval velocity grids and faults. It migrates time, shotpoints,
and faults while detecting overmigration. The output of Migration,
Reverse Migration is a vector file that displays the movement of grid
position or shotpoint.
You can use Migration, Reverse Migration for these purposes:
Migrate a time horizon grid, faults and control points to migrated
time space, or
Unmigrate a migrated time horizon grid, faults and control points
to unmigrated time space.
Depending on whether you choose forward or reverse migration, the
migrated or unmigrated grid nodes are saved as a control point file.
Both migration and reverse migration perform overmigration testing.
Time grid nodes and control points that would have been overmigrated
are saved as separate control point files.
Before you run the Migration, Reverse Migration option, make sure the
data units in each input file are consistent, specifically in these ways:
Know whether the time horizon grid contains one-way or two-way
times and whether those times are in seconds or milli-seconds.
Make sure the depth units used in the velocity grid match the depth
units used in any supporting fault files or control point files.
Make sure the time units used in the velocity grid match the time
units used in the time horizon grid.
To specify parameters for Migration, Reverse Migration, select
Operations Geophysical Operations Migration, Reverse
Migration. The MIGRATION, REVERSE MIGRATION dialog box
appears. Specify parameters as described in the following text.

Time Horizon Grid

Click the Time Horizon Grid button in the MIGRATION, REVERSE
MIGRATION dialog box. From the list of grids that appears (the Select
TIME HORIZON GRID list), select a time horizon grid to use. You
should know whether this grid contains one-way or two-way times and
if those times are in seconds or milliseconds.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Geophysical Operations 649

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Velocity Grid
Click the Velocity Grid button in the MIGRATION, REVERSE
MIGRATION dialog box. From the list that appears (the Select
VELOCITY GRID list), select a velocity grid to use. The depth units in
this grid must match the depth units used in supporting fault or control
point files. The time units must match those used in the selected time
horizon grid.

Time Horizon Faults

Optional: If the map has faults and you want to use a fault file for the
time horizon grid, click the Time Horizon Faults button in the
MIGRATION, REVERSE MIGRATION dialog box. From the list that
appears (the Select TIME HORIZON FAULTS list), select a fault file to
use. If the fault file contains Z-fields, the Z-field units must be consistent
with the time units in the time horizon grid.

Velocity Faults
Optional: If the map has faults and you want to use a fault file for the
velocity grid, click the Velocity Faults button in the MIGRATION,
REVERSE MIGRATION dialog box. From the list that appears (the
Select VELOCITY FAULTS list), select a fault file to use. If the fault
file contains Z-fields, the Z-field units must be consistent with the
velocity units in the velocity grid.

Control Points
Optional: To use control points, click the Control Points button in the
MIGRATION, REVERSE MIGRATION dialog box. From the list that
appears (the Select CONTROL POINTS list), select a control point file
to use. The Z-field units in this file must be consistent the depth units in
the velocity grid.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Geophysical Operations 650

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Output Files
Optional: To create output files, click the Output Files button in the
MIGRATION, REVERSE MIGRATION dialog box. Use the Name
OUTPUT files dialog box that appears for specifying a maximum of six
output files. Name each file and specify the MFD to use for storing it.
Output file names can have a maximum of 24 characters and can contain
internal blanks. You are asked for an output file name and output MFD
or OpenWorks for the following:
migrated nodes
migration vectors
unmigrated nodes
migrated time faults
migrated control points
unmigrated control points
If you do not specify output file names and locations, output is stored in
the scratch file.

Migration Parameters
Optional: To set migration parameters, click the Migration
Parameters button in the MIGRATION, REVERSE MIGRATION
dialog box. Use the MIGRATION parameters dialog box that appears
for specifying the following options:
Direction of Migration From the Direction of Migration list,
select FORWARD or REVERSE migration.
Type of Time From the Type of Time list, select ONE WAY
TIME or TWO WAY TIME. Select the option that is consistent
with the time horizon grid.
Time Units From the Time Units list, select SECONDS or
MILLISECONDS. Select the option that is consistent with the
time horizon grid.
Fill gap on fault migration failures? From the Fill gap on
fault migration failures list, select CONNECT or BREAK. If a
fault passes through a grid cell that is either overmigrated or not
defined (null), the fault is broken into two separate faults (the
BREAK option) or it is connected across the grid cell by a straight
line (the CONNECT option).
Sampling Rate for Time Horizon Faults From the Sampling
Rate for Time Horizon Faults list, select one of the following rates
for sampling the input fault file.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Geophysical Operations 651

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

To migrate a fault correctly, at least one vertex point must exist per
grid cell. However, in order to ensure proper fault migration, you
may need to use a higher sampling rate two, four or eight
vertices per cell. As a general rule, the smaller the grid interval, the
coarser the sampling rate.
The available fault file sampling rates are defined as follows:
COARSEST One vertex point per grid cell.
COARSE Two vertices per grid cell.
MEDIUM Four vertices per grid cell.
FINE Eight vertices per grid cell.

Control Point X-field

Optional: If you have specified a control point file, click the Control
Points X-field button in the MIGRATION, REVERSE MIGRATION
dialog box. The Select X-FIELD for Control Point File list appears,
which shows all the appropriate fields in the selected control point file.
Select a field to use as the x field.

Control Point Y-field

Optional: If you have specified a control point file, click the Control
Points Y-field button in the MIGRATION, REVERSE MIGRATION
dialog box. The Select Y-FIELD for Control Point File list appears,
which shows all the appropriate fields in the selected control point file.
Select a field to use as the y field.

Output Z-field
Optional: If you have specified a control point file to be migrated, you
must assign a name to the Z-field that contains the migrated control
points. The Select output Z-FIELD for Migrated Control Points list
appears, which shows the Z-fields in the selected control point file. To
overwrite one of these Z-fields, select that field. To create a new Z-field
for the migrated control points, select the Create a new Z-FIELD
option and enter the field name in the New Z-FIELD dialog box.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Geophysical Operations 652

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Mistie Reduction

This operation detects, reports, and reduces line-crossing misties on an

input file of seismic line data. Mistie Reduction uses bulk shifts to
minimize the largest mistie, preserving interpretation along each line.
Surfaces above or below the target horizon are simultaneously adjusted
while one or more lines are held constant. You can select by line name
seismic lines you wish to hold constant. Previously, the Mistie process
shifted all seismic lines by the same amount. The output files of the
Mistie Reduction includes a reduced mistie file, an optional report file
and an optional plot file.

Input File Name

Mistie Reduction is executed on the input file you supply here. This file
must contain a line name field.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Geophysical Operations 653

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Input Z-field
This is the name of the Z-field whose values are to be shifted to reduce
misties. The names of the Z-fields on your input seismic line data file
are displayed. Select the Z-field whose values you wish to check for
misties. The default Z-field is the first Z-field in the input seismic line
file.

Adjustment Desired?
This option enables you to select which Z-fields are shifted in the course
of reducing misties. When additional Z-fields are also shifted, their
Z-values are also shifted by the same amount as the value of the selected
Z-field.

Horizon Only
Only the Z-values on the present horizon (selected input Z-field) are
shifted.

Horizon & Shallower Horizons

This selection says to shift the Z-values of the reference horizon
(defined by the value of the Z-field on the seismic line data file you have
chosen as the Input Z-field) and all Z-fields that occur before the
selected Z-field in the seismic file.

Line Data Field Order is Important

Make sure the fields in the seismic line data field are in top-down
order before you begin Mistie Reduction.

If the fields are not in top-down order, use Field Operations to copy
them into a new seismic file in the correct top-down order before
running this Mistie Reduction process.

Horizon & Deeper Horizons

This selection says to shift both the Z values of the reference horizon and
of the horizons below the reference horizon, in other words, Z fields that
occur after the selected Z field in the seismic file.

All Horizons
This selection results in the shifting of Z values for all Z Fields in the
input seismic data file.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Geophysical Operations 654

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Output File Names and Master File

These are the file names and the output MFDs or OpenWorks for the
Adjusted Mistie File, and the optional Plot and Report Files. For each of
the output files, specify the destination MFD onto use for storing the
output file.
Adjusted Mistie File This is the name of output file which
contains the mistie adjusted seismic line data.
Plot File This is the name of the output data file called Plot
File. The output data file contains line names, shotpoint numbers,
and other Mistie information intended for plotting or listing.
Report File The Report File contains line names, shotpoint
numbers and other Mistie information intended for printout.

Hold Specific Line(s) Fixed

This option allows users to specify seismic lines which they do not want
to be bulk shifted during mistie adjustments.
Select Line(s) from Input Data File This dialog box contains
an array of up to 10 entries containing the names of those seismic
lines which are not to be shifted during Mistie Reduction.
Line Name 110
From the list of items displayed when a line name popup menu
button is selected, you can choose the name of the line you want
held during Mistie Reduction.
Select Line(s) from Text File This option allows you to choose
a text file from this list which contains the line names of seismic
lines which are to be held fixed during Mistie Reduction.

Text File Creation

This selection does not create the text file. You must build the list in an
ASCII file, then import that file.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Geophysical Operations 655

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Seismic Data Thinning

Select Operations
Geophysical Operations
Seismic Data Thinning

Select input file

Enter output file name and select MFD or

OpenWorks

Select thinning mode

Enter line/area name

Select thinning algorithm

Set starting point and increment divisor

Select applicable fields for thinning

Line Horizon Area

Shotpoint Segment
X-filed Y-filed Name Name Name
filed ID field
field field field

Window
Yes data in the No
file?
Select up to 10 fields for
windowing

Select values for maximum

and minimum window fields

Save and return to

Z-MAP Plus window

R2003.12.0 Operations: Geophysical Operations 656

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Geophysical Operations Data Thinning Workflow

Data Thinning is designed to thin out datasets in order to speed up such
options as gridding. For example, if you have kept every shotpoint in a
digitized seismic data file, you can greatly speed up gridding by thinning
the data and keeping every 10th shotpoint in the resulting file.
You can perform Data Thinning on these types of data:
control point (well, seismic, and profile) data
contour data
vertex (line) data
fault data
cross-section data
You can limit thinning to:
the entire dataset
a window specified on up to 10 data fields
one seismic line
one area
When you thin seismic data, the first and last shotpoints are always kept
in the resulting data file. In other words, they are never lost, no matter
what shotpoint you started with and what your thinning increment was.
When you thin well data, you specify a starting point and an increment.
In other words, you may want to start with the first well in a dataset and
keep every other well in the resulting file. Thinning simply goes through
the dataset with the well data and write every second well to the output
file.

Input File
Select the name of a data file to thin from the list that appears.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Geophysical Operations 657

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Output File, Algorithm, Parameters

Use this dialog box to specify the name of the output file and to select
the destination MFD and thinning mode. Also specify parameter values
for line/area name, line/area mode, starting point, and increment/divisor.
Output File Name Enter the name of the file to be created. The
name can be up to 24 characters long and can contain internal
blanks. This file contains the thinned data and is stored on the
MFD.
Output File Master File If you click the parameter box, a
popup menu appears, which lists OpenWorks, the attached MFDs,
and the scratch file. Select the MFD to use for saving the output
file.
Thinning Mode The options are:
All Lines This option thins out all of the lines in the
selected dataset by the same increment (or number divisible).
For example, it is useful for thinning out every line in a dataset
by the same amount.
All Points This option thins all of the points in a dataset by
the desired increment. For example, this option would be used
if you wanted to edit all of the wells in your dataset.
Single Line This option thins out a single line in a data file,
and writes all of the other lines in that data file into the output
file unchanged. You need to have Line Name as a field in your
data file, and enter the line name that you would like thinned.
Single Area This option thins out the data in a single area
that is specified. There must be an area name field in the
dataset in order to thin out the data in a single area. You also
need to enter the Area Name that contains the data you want to
thin. An example of this would be if you wanted to thin out the
data that fell in a certain lease block.
Line/Area Name Enter a Line Name if you are trying to thin
the data for a single line. The line name must match exactly a line
name in the dataset. Enter an Area Name if you are trying to thin
the data for a single area (such as a single lease). The area name
must match exactly an area name in the dataset.
When thinning seismic lines, you can only apply the thinning
formula to one seismic line at a time. You select the seismic line by
providing the Line Name. If you want to apply the same thinning
formula to more than one seismic line, select Operations Data
Operations Data Thinning.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Geophysical Operations 658

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Line/Area Mode There are two Line/Area Modes available:

Normal The normal mode of thinning is to start at a certain
point that is specified and to thin by a certain increment.
Divisible Thinning by a Divisible number keeps only those
points that divides into the given number. For example, if you
have shotpoints ... 103, 105, 107, 110, ... and you want to keep
the shotpoints divisible by 5, you would keep ... 105, 110, ...
and so on.
Starting Point Select the point to begin the thinning with. For
example, you may want to start with shotpoint 105 and keep every
5th shotpoint after that. The starting point is kept, but all points
before that are deleted, except if you are thinning seismic data, in
which case the first shotpoint is also kept.
Increment/Divisor For normal thinning, select the increment
to thin by. For example, if you want to keep every 10th point in the
output file, your increment is 10. Thinning with an increment of 4
keeps every 4th point in the output file. An increment of 1 keeps all
points and does no thinning.
If you are thinning by a number divisible, then you need to enter
the divisor, which is the number that you want to divide into the
points to keep. Thinning by a Divisible number keeps only those
points that can divide into the given number. For example, if you
have shotpoints ... 103, 105, 107, 110, ... and you want to keep the
shotpoints divisible by 5, you would keep ... 105, 110, ... and so
on. In this example, the number 5 is the divisor.

X Field
Select the field that you are using for X values in your dataset. This
defaults to the first field with X values in your data, so you do not need
to select this unless you have more than one X field.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Geophysical Operations 659

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Y Field
Select the field that you are using for Y values in your dataset. This
defaults to the first field with Y values in your data, so you do not need
to select this unless you have more than one Y field.

Shotpoint Field
Select the field that you are using for the shotpoints in your dataset. This
defaults to the first field with shot point values in your data, so you do
not need to select this unless you have more than one shot point field.
This is necessary for seismic thinning, but you dont need this for well
data. Seismic thinning thins by shotpoint you select a starting
shotpoint and an increment to thin by.

Segment ID Field
Select the Segment ID field if you are thinning digitized line (vertex)
data such as coastlines, faults, or lease boundaries. Any points in a
vertex type file that have the same Segment ID are connected by a line
when the line is drawn. When a different Segment ID is reached, the
program interprets it as a separate line. Z-MAP Plus defaults to the first
field of this type in the dataset, so you would usually not need to select
this unless you have more than one Segment ID field.

Line Name Field

Select the field that you are using for the seismic line name in your
dataset. This defaults to the first line name field in your data, so you do
not need to select this unless you have more than one line name field.

Horizon Name Field

Select the field that you are using for horizon names in your dataset.
This defaults to the first field with horizon names in your data, so you
do not need to select this unless you have more than one horizon name
field. The horizon name would be the names of your seismic horizons
(events, or tops).

R2003.12.0 Operations: Geophysical Operations 660

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Area Name Field

Select the field that you are using for area names in your dataset. This
defaults to the first field with area names in your data, so you do not
need to select this unless you have more than one area name field.

Windowed Thinning Fields

This dialog box allows you to define a window for your data. You can
create your data window either by selecting fields or by selecting field
mins and max.

Select Fields for Window

If you would like to thin the data that falls within certain parameters, you
may select up to 10 existing fields to base the thinning on. For example,
you may want to thin only the wells that fall between certain depth
ranges. This is an Ordered Selection.

Select Field Mins and Maxs

If you are thinning your data in a window, you need to enter the
minimum and maximum values for each field you have selected to
window in on. For example, if you are windowing based on a depth
field, then you may use a minimum depth of 6000 and a maximum depth
of 8000.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Geophysical Operations 661

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Scale/Bias Line or Area

Enter from Operations Geophysical Operations

Scale/Bias Line or Area

Select input file

Enter output file name and select MFD or

OpenWorks

Select scale/bias mode

Scale line Bias line Scale area Bias area

Enter line name Enter area name

Enter Scale/bias value for line Enter Scale/bias value for area

Select line name field Select area name field

Select the field to be scaled or biased

Save and return to

Z-MAP Plus window

Scale/Bias Line or Area Workflow

Scale/Bias Line or Area multiplies by or adds a constant value to all
points in a field for a seismic line or for an area. If you would like to
subtract a constant, input the negative of the constant. To divide by a
constant, input the inverse (1/constant) of the constant value.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Geophysical Operations 662

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Input File
From the list that appears, select the input file to scale (multiply) or bias
(add) a constant to.

Output File, Algorithm, Parameters

Typically, you use this dialog box to change the output file name and
output MFD. You can use this dialog box to specify the following input
values:
Output File Name Enter a name to call your new (scaled or
biased) data file. The name can be up to 24 characters long and can
contain internal blanks. If you do not supply a name, a forward
slash is added to the old file name (for example, old name = TOP
OF MUDDY or new default name = /TOP OF MUDDY).
Output File Master File If you click the parameter box, a
popup menu appears, which lists OpenWorks, the attached MFDs,
and the scratch file. Select the MFD to use for saving the output
file.
Scale/Bias Mode Select whether to Scale or Bias and Line or
Area. Choices appear on a popup menu.
Scale Line. Multiply a field of data on a seismic line by a
constant. For example, you may want to multiply time values
that are in seconds by 1000 in order to get time values in
milliseconds.
Scale Area. Multiply a field of data for an area by a constant.
Bias Line. Add a constant to a field of data on a seismic line.
For example, you may know that a particular seismic line
misties other seismic lines by 20 milliseconds and need to add
20 milliseconds to all of the time values for that seismic line.
Bias Area. Add a constant to a field of data for an area.
Line/Area Name Enter a name for your scaled or biased line or
area.
Scale/Bias Value Enter the number that you would like to have
multiplied or added to your field.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Geophysical Operations 663

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Line Name Field

Select the field of data that to use as the line name. For example, you
may have called the field that contained the line name Name of Seismic
Line. Your other choice is None - use no field.

Area Name Field

Select the field of data that you use to select the area. For example, you
may have called the field that contained the area Leases.

Scale/Bias Field
Select the field that you would like to have a constant multiplied or
added to. A list of the numeric (non-character) fields that is on the
selected data file is provided.

Normalized Interval Velocity (Data)

This option creates three new fields in a new control point file (DATA)
using a Carter-Good Iterative Depth algorithm (IDA). The new fields in
the file are:
Base-lapped depth on Z(0)
Top-lapped depth on Z(0)
Final estimate for the NIV velocity calculation
Velocity normalization attempts to make interval velocity information
independent of depth. When this is achieved, normalized velocities have
a common depth and age. Given their common depth and age,
differences in velocity should be attributable to changes in lithology
and/or pore pressure.
You must provide the following parameters as separate fields on the
input control point (DATA) file:
field number for the isochrone data field (the zones time
thickness)
field number for the datum depth field Z(0) (the depth to the top of
the zone)
field number for the initial estimate for the normalized interval
velocity (NIV)

R2003.12.0 Operations: Geophysical Operations 664

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

You must enter:

minimum velocity constraint used to calculate the normalized
interval velocity for a single interval (enter zero for no constraint)
normalization depth
compaction parameter n
Compaction is determined for each interval from crossplots of data
from velocity surveyed wells in the project area. The equation used
is:
log ( ZM )
g ( VI ) = ---------------------- + log ( L A P )
n
whereVI = interval velocity ZM = midpoint depth
L = lithology A = age P = pressure
For each interval where seismic times correlate with times in the
wells, plot the algorithm of interval velocity vs. the logarithm of
midpoint depth. Calculate this value for all surveyed wells in the
project area. Fit the points with a line. The slope of the best fit line
is 1/n for the interval.
Normalization depth is an arbitrary number in the range of the depths
being converted. If multiple zones are converted, then the same number
should be used for all zones so similar lithology can be recognized
between zones by comparing normalized interval velocities (NIV).
Normalized Interval Velocity (Data) calls the NIV-DATA macro.
(For detailed information about parameters for this operation, select
Help Online Manuals Macro Manual, then locate the
NIV-DATA topic.)

Normalized Interval Velocity (Grid)

This option uses a Carter-Good Iterative Depth algorithm (IDA) and
creates the following new grids.
Base-lapped depth on Z(0)
Top-lapped depth on Z(0)
Final estimate for the NIV velocity
The resulting grids are hung from a datum depth grid Z(0).

R2003.12.0 Operations: Geophysical Operations 665

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Velocity normalization attempts to make interval velocity information

independent of depth. When this is achieved, normalized velocities have
a common depth and age. Given their common depth and age,
differences in velocity should be attributable to changes in lithology
and/or pore pressure.
You must provide an input file having the following fields:
zones time thickness (isochrone)
depth to the top of the zone
initial estimate for the normalized interval velocity (NIV)

Parameter panels prompt for the following information:

isochrone GRID
datum depth GRID Z(0) with an optional FALT file
initial NIV estimate GRID Z(0) with an optional FALT file
minimum velocity constraint used to calculate the normalized
interval velocity for a single interval (enter zero for no constraint)
normalization depth
compaction parameter n
This is determined for each interval from crossplots of data from
velocity surveyed wells in the project area. The equation used is:
log ( ZM )
log ( VI ) = ---------------------- + log ( L A P )
n
where:VI = interval velocity
ZM = midpoint depth
L = lithology A = age P = pressure
Normalization depth is an arbitrary number in the range of the
depths being converted. If multiple zones are converted, then the
same number should be used for all zones so similar lithology can
be recognized between zones by comparing normalized interval
velocities (NIV)
For each interval where seismic times correlate with times in the
wells, plot the algorithm of interval velocity vs. the logarithm of
midpoint depth. Calculate this value for all surveyed wells in the
project area. Fit the points with a line. The slope of the best fit line
is 1/n for the interval.
Normalized Interval Velocity (Grid) calls the NIV-GRID macro. For
detailed information about parameters for this operation, select Help
Online Manuals Macro Manual, then locate the NIV-GRID topic.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Geophysical Operations 666

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Faults
Fault operations help you condition faults to increase accuracy during
gridding. The example workflow that follows shows how to use several
operations to condition a fault file so it can be used with the Z-MAP Plus
non-opaque fault (faults with throws) gridding methods (Point Gridding
Plus, Line Gridding Plus, or Trendform Gridding).
.

Generate a pseudo-seismic file from grid nodes using the

Operations Geophysical Grid to Seismic Line Converters.

Convert your hand-interpreted fault polygons to regular fault

traces using the Operations Faults Shrinker.

Post the fault traces derived from the Shrinker process on a map.
Visually check the heave and vertical separation values using
Operations Faults Profiler.

Backfill the fault angle field in the fault file using

Operations Faults Calculate Fault Fields.

Examine the new fault angle fields using the Faults Profiler.
Using the Z-MAP Plus Edit Data Editor option,
edit the fault angle and vertical separation values.

Run Operations Faults Calculate Fault Fields again.

This brings the heave field values into line with your edited vertical
separation and fault angle fields.

Recheck the resulting heaves by running Operations Faults

Profiler again on the new heave values. Re-run Point Gridding Plus
to obtain better fault with throw geometry.

Workflow Converting Regular (Center-line) Faults into Faults with Throws

R2003.12.0 Operations: Faults 667

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Balancer
The fault Balancer option helps to balance fault bifurcations to adjust
the throw values on fault traces that are in close proximity to each
bifurcation. Balancing means that the throws around each bifurcation
point add to zero. The Balancer operation:
locates bifurcations in a regular fault file
removes small segments of the crossing faults that are not needed
extends (snaps) fault traces that almost touch another fault so that
the two faults meet
adds vertices to each fault at the bifurcation points
balances vertical separation at the bifurcations
reports the Segment I.D. of faults that appear to have incorrect
patterns of vertical separation
Balancer normally seeks out each bifurcation point in a set of regular
fault traces with throw information obtained by running the
Operations Faults Shrinker option. So you would typically run
Shrinker before Balancer.
You are asked to specify:
name of the input fault file and its associated MFD
the vertical separation (throw) field on the input fault file
extent of the output report
tolerance distance to be used in determining whether one fault
touches another
maximum distance to extrapolate vertical separation (throw) along
the fault
name of the output balanced centerline fault
MFD for the output balanced centerline fault
Output includes a regular fault file with:
center-line fault traces snapped and clipped at bifurcation or
compensation points
the vertical separation along splitting faults balanced at the fault
trace intersection
You may need to perform minor touch up to the vertical separation
values calculated in this operation before running one of the non-opaque
fault geometry gridding methods.
Balancer calls the FAULT-BALANCER macro. For detailed
information about parameters for this operation, select Help
Online Manuals Macro Manual, then locate the
FAULT-BALANCER topic.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Faults 668

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Calculate Fault Fields

Calculate Fault Fields produces a fault file with a calculated field value
to overwrite one of the three required fields. The calculated value is
derived from the known values of the other two (out of three) fields.
Based on the numbers for Vertical Separation, Fault Heave or Fault
Angle (in degrees), this operation recalculates one entire column of
values based on the values in the other two. This is done using data
operations to perform the necessary trigonometry.

Angle Must Be in Degrees

If the throw sense is negative the angle is also negative. The angle field must be
specified in decimal degrees.

When regular fault files are output, they can require editing before you
process them further in Z-MAP Plus gridding methods. Once you have
edited the fields in a regular fault file, you can use the enhanced fault
processing available in Point Gridding Plus, Line Gridding Plus or
Trendform Gridding. The three field types used by these gridding
methods to create expanded faults are vertical separation, heave, and
fault dip angle.
When regular fault traces emerge from the Operations Fault
Shrinker option, the unedited fields usually do not have consistently
good vertical separation and heave values. In editing the regular fault
files, you get a good idea what the vertical separation values should be,
but a poor understanding of what the heaves should look like. Since
these heaves are used to produce the geometry of the expanded fault
polygon traces, they are the focus of the field value editing.

Fault Dip Angle Field

Point Gridding Plus does not presently use the fault angle in the regular fault
file. However, fault dip angle usually varies in a smooth and predictable fashion,
and you can concentrate on editing this field value. Then we use Operations
Fault Calculate Fault Fields to recalculate the heave field values.

You must input a regular fault file. This fault file must have vertical
separation, heave, and fault dip angle fields.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Faults 669

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Select either the vertical separation or heave field to overwrite. This

operation overwrites the values of the field you select with new values
based on the input values of the other two fields. Calculate Fault Fields
uses simple right angle trigonometry in the calculations. If one of the
fields used in the calculations has a ZNON value, the ZNON is
propagated to the new output field.
Balancer calls the FAULT-BACKFILL-F macro. (For more
information about the macro parameters, select Help
Online Manuals Macro Manual, then locate the
FAULT-BACKFILL-F topic.)

Dip Symbol Generator

Dip Symbol Generator produces polylines on an existing expanded
fault. You can place hachures on these polylines to designate the
downdip sides of the fault polygons. Expanded faults are created in
Point Gridding Plus, Line Gridding, or Trendform gridding and are
derived by expanding the fault center-lines with attached fault geometry
data. Specify the following input values:
input FALT file with centerline faults, a vertical separation (throw)
field and either a dip angle field or a fault gap (heave) field
name of the output file for the symbolization polylines
whether depth units increase downward (Positive Depth) or
upward (Negative Depth)
whether Dip Angle is measured in degrees or radians
Dip Symbol Generator produces a vertex (VERT) file that contains
polylines to mark the downdip sides of expanded faults. You can display
these faults in a picture.

Polylines and Hachures Posted with the Dip Symbol Generator

R2003.12.0 Operations: Faults 670

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Dip Symbol Generator calls the FAULT-DIP-SYMBOL macro. For

detailed information about parameters for this operation, select Help
Online Manuals Macro Manual, then locate the FAULT-DIP
SYMBOL topic.

Migrator
The Migrator produces a set of centerline traces adjusted from their
current map position to the position they would have on a structure
surface either above or below the structure surface to which the faults
belong. Faults with small vertical separation at the ends are shortened
automatically.
You must input a fault file containing regular, centerline faults with dip
and vertical separation information. The isochore thickness (thickness
between the faults horizon and the horizon to which the faults are
migrated) may be encoded on the input fault file or input directly as a
constant value. You can specify rates of change of dip and vertical
separation (throw) to model the migration of listric faults.
The thickness field in the input fault file is normally created by
interpolating values from an unfaulted isochore grid that represents
thickness between the surface for which faults exist and the surface to
which the faults are migrated.
After migration, some minor editing is usually required to fix
bifurcations that may have separated and to remove or add faults that
die-out or start-up on the target structure surface. Balancer can aid in
this task.
You are asked to specify:
a required fault file, its associated MFD, and field parameters
whether larger or smaller values are deeper
constant dip value if there is no dip field
constant thickness value if there is no z field for isochore thickness
change in dip angle and vertical separation (throw) for depth unit
minimum acceptable length of fault traces
minimum acceptable vertical separation (throw) value
output centerline fault file and its associated MFD

Before You Use the Output File for Other Fault Processing Macros
You must eliminate the isochore thickness value from the file before you can use
the output file for other fault processing utilities.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Faults 671

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Original Fault

Two Migrated Faults

Migrator calls the FAULT-MIGRATION macro. (For detailed

information about parameters for this operation, select Help
Online Manuals Macro Manual, then locate the
FAULT-MIGRATION topic.)

R2003.12.0 Operations: Faults 672

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Profiler
This process creates a fault file and a vertex file which graphically
describe an attribute distribution along a centerline fault. The attribute
could be throw, heave or fault angle. The output, when displayed on a
map with the original faults, provides a visual representation of the
chosen attribute field in the fault file. The output can be thought of as a
cross-section profile of the attribute laid on its side. The input fault
traces are the baseline for the cross section and represent a value of zero
for the attribute on the section. Positive deviations from the centerline
faults (positive throws, for instance) appear by default on the upthrown
side of the fault, while negatives appear on the downthrown side. The
display of output from this process can be used to:
identify reversals in direction of throw along a fault
detect high variations in throw along the fault
evaluate how well the fault balances at bifurcations
Using closed polygons, you can colorfill the area between the input
faults and the profile faults that result from this process. The closed
polygons consist of the input faults tied with the profile faults. You can
save both the polygon and the map view profile fault file.
You are asked to specify:
required fault file and its field parameters
map scaling profile method
maximum profile height
depth in positive or negative units
side of trace on which the profile should appear
output fault and polygon profile file names
color and posting information for polygons and lines
Profiler calls the FAULT-PROFILE macro. For detailed information
about parameters for this operation, select Help Online Manuals
Macro Manual, then locate the FAULT-PROFILE topic.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Faults 673

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Shrinker
Shrinker automatically converts fault polygons to regular, center-line
faults. If a seismic data file is also input, then the process can calculate
the vertical separations (called Throw in the parameter prompts),
heave, and dip angle at each point where the seismic lines cross the
newly created regular faults. If the faults are already regular faults, then
the process does not modify them but calculates vertical separation at
seismic crossings (heave is returned as zero and dip as ninety).
Centerline faults with vertical separation, created by this process are
standard inputs used by gridding methods that produce faults with
throws (non-opaque faults.

Only the X, Y, and ID fields are carried through from the input fault file to the
output fault file. All other fields (throw, dip and heave) are created by the
Shrinker.
The expanded fault file is not normally made but can be used as a check to see
how well the regular, center-line construction and heave calculation processes
have operated.

Shrinker calls the FAULT-SHRINKER macro. For detailed information

about parameters for this operation, select Help Online Manuals
Macro Manual, then locate the FAULT-SHRINKER topic.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Faults 674

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Remaining Operations
In addition to the groups of similar operations, Operations includes 14
remaining options. These options are not grouped together on the
Operations main menu, but most of them lend themselves to
classification according to their intended functions. The remaining
operations are listed in alphabetical order, and include:
Back Interpolation (page 677)
File Conversion (page 681)
Coordinate Transformations (page 686)
Transformation Coordinates (Overwrite Fields) (page 700)
Lat/Lon (DMS) to Decimal Degrees (page 701)
Line Generalization (page 704)
Line Resampling (page 710)
Surface Intersection (page 735)
The remaining operations can be classified into these groups:
operations with lines
data modification operations
operations with cartographic applications
miscellaneous operations

Operations with Lines

Operations with lines include:
Line Generalization Remove redundant points from any files
that contain lines (such as seismic or vertex).
Line Resampling Create new points at regular intervals along
the lines of a dataset.

Data Modification Operations

Data modification operations include:
File Conversion Convert most file types from one type to another
(for example, vertex to fault data).

R2003.12.0 Operations: Remaining Operations 675

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Cartographic Operations
Cartographic operations include:
Coordinate Transformations Convert latitude and longitude
to northing and easting values, or convert northing and easting
values to latitude and longitude.
Transform Coordinates (Overwrite Fields) Adds the ability
to overwrite existing fields onto all the Coordinate
Transformations functionality.
Lat/Lon (DMS) to Decimal Degrees Convert degrees,
minutes, and seconds to decimal degrees, or convert decimal
degrees to degrees, minutes and seconds.

Miscellaneous Operations
Miscellaneous operations include:
Back Interpolation Calculate Z values from a grid for each x,y
location in a data file. Resulting Z values replace an old field either
completely or in part, or create a new field for that x,y location in
the data file.
Surface Intersection Find the point of intersection between a
subsurface rock unit with present day topography (outcrop). Find
the point of intersection between a subsurface rock unit and an
unconformity (subcrop). Find the point of intersection between a
reservoir rock and a fluid contact, such as oil/water, gas/oil.
Perform quality control checks on grids.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Remaining Operations 676

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Back Interpolation

Enter from Operations on

Z-MAP Plus window

Select input grid

If surface includes faults, select fault file

Select input data file

Is output
Yes field a new No
field?

Assign new field name Select Z-value

Enter output data name and select MFD or

OpenWorks

Select interpolation strategy

Set ZNON value for output file

Save and return to

Z-MAP Plus window

Back Interpolation Workflow

R2003.12.0 Operations: Back Interpolation 677

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

This operation calculates a value from a grid at an x,y location. The

value is determined by fitting a mathematical surface to 16 grid nodes
that surround that location. Although the actual computation process is
more complex, the back interpolation process can be thought of as
defining a mathematical equation for the surface in terms of X, Y, and Z
(Z = aX + bY + c + ...). Then by substituting the X and Y coordinate of
the desired location into the equation there remains only one unknown,
Z, which is easily determined. The process is more complicated with
faults, since only grid nodes on the same side as the x,y location can be
used to calculate its value.
Back Interpolation requires as input a grid and a data file. A value is
Back Interpolated at each x,y location of the data file. You have the
following options:
Create a new field in that file to contain the Z-values.
Replace all values in an existing field.
Replace only ZNON (missing) values in an existing field.
Replace all but ZNON values in an existing field.
Using faults is optional. If faults are used to build the grid, however, you
should probably use the same fault file when Back Interpolating.
You may want to use Back Interpolation to accomplish these goals:
Determine depth at each shotpoint from a depth grid derived by a
time-to-depth conversion process.
Determine an average pore-thickness at each well from a
pore-thickness grid,
Fill ZNONs in a data file containing deviated wells. This allows
Data Operations to be used to calculate thickness for all original
data values.
Compute the differences between a gridded surface derived from
one dataset and values in a separate, but related dataset.
The algorithm used to Back Interpolate is the same one used in
Contouring, Volumetrics, Resampling, and other Z-MAP Plus options.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Back Interpolation 678

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

BACK INTERPOLATION Dialog Box Options

Select Input Grid

A list of grids is presented. Point to and click the grid you want. This
input grid is used when the option executes.

Select Faults
A list of fault files is presented. Point to and click the fault file you want.
Faults are needed only when building surfaces cut by faults. When faults
are used, grid nodes are calculated using only data located on the same
side of the faults as the node. A fault file must have been previously
constructed in order to be available for this option.

Select Input Data

A list of data files is presented. Click the data file you want. The X and
Y coordinates in this file define the locations at which Z-values are
calculated by Back Interpolation on the grid.

Output Z-field
From the list of fields that appears, select a field you want, or select New
Field. The Z-values calculated during Back Interpolation are written to
this field. If you select an existing field the default behavior is to replace
all contents of that field. To change the default behavior, see the Output
Name, Strategy parameter topics that follow.

New Field
Enter the name to store with the field. The name can be a maximum of
20 characters long and can contain internal blanks. The default name is
Z VALUE.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Back Interpolation 679

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Output Name, Strategy

You can use this dialog box to specify the following input values:
new data file name
MFD to use for storing it (or use the OpenWorks project)
strategy to use when writing values to an existing field
ZNON value to use if creating a new field

Output Data Name

Enter the name of the file to be created. The name can be up to 24
characters long and can contain internal blanks.

Output Data Master File

If you click the parameter box, a popup menu appears, which lists
OpenWorks, the attached MFDs, and the scratch file. Select the MFD to
use for saving the output file.

Strategy
Controls what is replaced when the back interpolated values are written
to an existing field. Possible choices for this parameter include:
All (default). Write to all locations in the field, replacing both Z-values
and ZNONs.
No ZNON. Write to only Z-value locations in the field; do not replace
ZNONs.
Only ZNON. Write to only ZNON locations in the field; do not replace
existing Z-values.

ZNON Value
Enter the value to be used as ZNON (missing or null data value)
when this field is written by Z-MAP Plus. This value can be any valid
number supported by your computer. Never use a number between the
minimum and maximum value in the field, as this creates many
problems when building grids and drawing contours from those grids.
The default is the ZNON of the field being replaced, or, if a new field is
being created, the default is 0.1E+31.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Back Interpolation 680

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

File Conversion

Enter from Operations in

Z-MAP Plus window

Select file to convert

Enter output file name and select MFD or OpenWorks

Select Converted File Type

DATA FALT XSEC WLOG TEXT

CNTR VERT SSEC DWEL

Enter alphanumeric string to limit scope of edit, if desired

Enter range minimums and maximums for fields selected to edit

Select limiting text field, if desired

Apply

Line Line Horizon Shotpoint

Segment Name Name field
field field field

Save and return to

Z-MAP Plus window

R2003.12.0 Operations: File Conversion 681

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

File Conversion Workflow

You can use File Conversion to convert one type of data file into
another. A total of ten file conversion options are available.
When converting data from one type to another, you are asked to
specify:
the type of conversion
the name of the input file
the name of the output (new) file
When converting control point data to contour data, you are also asked
to input the Separate distance and the Connect distance.
You can perform the following file conversions:

From To

Contour File Control Point File

Contour File Fault File

Contour File Vertex File

Control Point File Contour File

Fault File Data File

Fault File Vertex File

Vertex File Contour File

Vertex File Data File

Vertex File Fault File

R2003.12.0 Operations: File Conversion 682

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Converting a Control Point File to a Contour File

The control points must first be in the correct order, that is they must be
in sequential order along the contour.
After entering the customary input and output file information, you are
asked to enter the maximum separation distance between any two points
on a contour. If two adjacent points exceed the separation (break)
distance, the contour is split in two.
You are also asked to specify the connect (close) distance. This is the
maximum distance between the two end points of a contour in order for
a contour to be closed.

Converting a Vertex File to a Contour File

Your vertex file must contain at least one Z-field, and it should have the
same Z-value and Segment ID for each vertex in the same contour.

FILE CONVERSION Dialog Box Options

Input File
Select an input file from the list that appears.

Output Name, Type, Conversion Parameters

From this dialog box, you must enter the name of the file and the MFD
or scratch file to use for storing it. You must also indicate the file type
to output. When converting to contour data you must also enter the
Separate and Connect values.

Output File Name

Enter the name of the file to be created. The name can be up to 24
characters long and can contain internal blanks.

Output File Master File

If you click the parameter box, a popup menu appears, which lists
OpenWorks, the attached MFDs, and the scratch file. Select the MFD to
use for saving the output file.

R2003.12.0 Operations: File Conversion 683

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Output File Type

You must specify the output file type. You can convert files to:
DATA
CNTR (contour)
FALT (fault)
VERT (vertex) (lines)
XSEC (cross section)
SSEC (seismic section)
WLOG (well log)
DWEL (deviated well)
TEXT
The default option is CNTR.

Separate (DATA-CNTR)
Any two points in the X/Y/Z data file further apart than this distance are
considered to belong to different contours (even if their Z-values
match).

Connect (DATA-CNTR)
If the first and last point of a contour line are closer than this distance,
then the contour is closed.

Discontinuity Flags (SSEC-DATA)

This option allows you to choose how to treat the presence of
discontinuity codes during the file conversion process. The flags can be
either retained or omitted when converting cross-section data to data
files.
Discontinuity flags are a way of letting the program know that an
unconformity exists on a surface.
RETAIN (default). Any discontinuity codes present in the seismic
section are included in the output data file.
OMIT. Leave out discontinuity fields during the process of
converting seismic cross sections to data.

Number of Decimal Places (SSEC-DATA)

This option allows you to determine how many places there are to the
right of the decimal in the Z-Attribute value labels for shotpoint
numbers.

R2003.12.0 Operations: File Conversion 684

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

X Field
A list of fields from your input file is presented. Select the one you want
to use.

Y Field
Select the Y-field you want from the list. Y-fields in this list were picked
from your input file.

Z Fields
Select the Z-field you want from the list. Z-fields in this list were picked
from your input file.

Line Segment Field

Select the Line Segment Field you want from the list. Line Segment
Fields in this list were picked from your input file.

Line Name Field

Select the Line Name Field you want from the list. Line Name Fields in
this list were picked from your input file.

Horizon Name Field

Select the Horizon Name Field you want from the list. Horizon Name
Fields in this list were picked from your input file.

Shotpoint Field
Select the Shotpoint Field you want from the list. Shotpoint Fields in
this list were picked from your input file.

R2003.12.0 Operations: File Conversion 685

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Coordinate Transformations

R2003.12.0 Operations: Coordinate Transformations 686

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Enter from Operations on

Z-MAP Plus window

Select input file

Select direction of transformation

Lat/Lon to X/Y X/Y to Lat/Lon

Select and name output X and Y fields Select and name output Lat/Lon fields

Enter output file name and select MFD or

OpenWorks

Enter ZNON value for output file

Select method of setting up a projection

Projection from user input Projection from data or picture Projection from State Plane

Select projection code Select source data file or picture Select state and zone for state
for projection plane projection
Select spheroid and enter
value for semi-major and
semi-minor axes

Set projection parameters for

unit code, factor, parallel,
reference point, false northing
and easting, dateline

Activate/deactivate projection

Save and return to

Z-MAP Plus window

Coordinate Transformations Workflow

R2003.12.0 Operations: Coordinate Transformations 687

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Coordinate Transformations converts geodetic coordinates (latitude and

longitude) to projected coordinates (northings and eastings) and vice
versa.
You may use this option:
To plot information about a map or to build a grid, there must be X/Y
coordinates in the file. If there are only Latitude and Longitude
Coordinates then you use this option to create the X/Y coordinates.
1. If correctly placed latitude and longitude marks are desired on a
map then that map needs to be projected. This means that
projection parameters need to be set up for the picture when it is
defined. You do not use this option to do that; instead go to File
New Basemap and define the parameters.
2. If a map is projected then all data (whether it be contour, vertex,
control point, grid, etc.) to be plotted on the picture must match
that projection in order to be placed in the correct position on the
projected picture. If the data is already projected but with the
wrong projection parameters then you must use the original
Lat/Long coordinates and create new X/Y coordinates in the right
projection. If there are no Lat/Long coordinates in the file then you
need to do two projections one using the old parameters to get
Lat/Long and another using the new parameters to get the new X/
Y coordinates.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Coordinate Transformations 688

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Spheroid
The earth is neither flat nor spherical but is an oblate-spheroid, flattened
at the poles and bulging at the equator (a flattening of about 1/300). This
oblate-spheroid is not perfect but is highly irregular due to variations in
material density and the affects of gravity and recent geologic activity
on that material. Defining and measuring position on this surface
requires that a definition of the spheroid (earth shape) be made.
Depending on where on the earth you are, one shape should match the
earth better than another. Also, depending on the size of the area,
different spheroids provide better results than others, therefore there are
many spheroid definitions. You must select the spheroid appropriate for
your area. Usually a company has a standard for each area it works in.
Once the shape of the earth is defined then latitude and longitude lines
are laid on that shape in their correct position.

Projection
The next problem is to unwrap the spheroid so that it can be viewed
as a flat map. This is, in fact, impossible to do with a sphere; however,
it can be done with a cone, cylinder or other shape representing a plane
that has been wrapped. Planes are sometimes used in the manner
described in the following text. So, rather than try to unwrap a sphere,
we run a cone, cylinder, plane, or other easily unwrapped geometric
form (projection surface) through the spheroid near the area we want to
map. All of the spheroid information is then projected mathematically
onto the geometric form. This usually involves moving the object from
the spheroid onto the projection surface following a line normal to the
projection surface, although other methods are used.
The point or line where the projection surface intersects the spheroid
does not have to be projected since the two forms have the same
position. Therefore, when the projection surface (cone, cylinder, etc.) is
unwrapped, that point or line is not distorted. Points not on this
intersection point or line are distorted by the process of projecting along
a normal to the projection surface. This can be visualized in the diagram
that follows.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Coordinate Transformations 689

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

The projection surface is a plane running in and out of the screen

(paper). Points on the spheroid are projected onto that surface along
lines normal to the plane. Only on points along the line of intersection
between the two surfaces are there nor distorted, everywhere else the
points are moved relative to each other and, in this case, always closer
to one another.

plane for projection

point (line) of zero distortion

spheroid

When you select a projection, you are automatically defining the

geometry of the projection surface, its orientation, and how it intersects
the spheroid. For example, polyconic is a cone that intersects the
spheroid twice once when the cone passes into the sphere and once
when it passes out of the sphere. The intersection, therefore, forms two
lines of zero distortion. The projection surface may intersect (form a line
or two lines) or be tangential (form a point or line) to the spheroid. The
projection surface may also be oriented parallel to N-S or at some angle
to that direction. Again selection of projection automatically defines
shape, orientation, and intersection.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Coordinate Transformations 690

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Defining Where Projection Surface and Spheroid Intersect

Since where the spheroid and projection surface intersect represents
zero distortion on your map, its location is very important. You can
specify where that intersection is. There are usually standard defined
points or lines of intersection used by companies in certain areas of the
earth. The advantage of using standards is so that maps one person
makes match those another person makes. That is, the maps are distorted
in exactly the same manner in the same areas of the maps and
measurements from one map match those from the other.
When using Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) and State Plane
projections the position of the intersection is automatically defined.
With using most other projections you have control over the positioning
of the point, line, or both lines of intersection. Parameters commonly
used to control these are:
central meridian
standard parallel
scale factor
parallel closest to equator
parallel closest to the pole
You should ask someone knowledgeable about your companys
standards, which parameters and values to use.
With conic projections you specify two standard parallels, one closest to
the equator and one closer to the pole, and this automatically defines the
cone angle and spheroid intersection lines.
With cylindrical projections where the cylinder is aligned parallel to a
line connecting the North and South poles you specify a Standard
Parallel and a Scale Reduction Factor. Standard Mercator is a projection
of this form and uses a Scale Reduction Factor of 1 which makes the
cylinder and spheroid tangential at a line.
With cylindrical projections where the cylinder is aligned perpendicular
to a line connecting the North and South Poles you specify a Central
Meridian and Scale Reduction Factor. Transverse Mercator is this kind
of projection.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Coordinate Transformations 691

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

TRANSFORM COORDINATES Dialog Box Options

Input File
Coordinate Transformations can be performed on any data file
containing X/Y coordinates or latitude/longitude. Control point data
consists of scattered x,y,z data where x,y is the horizontal position of the
data point and z denotes the value of some griddable surface.
A list of files is presented. Point to and click the file you want. This file
is used as input when the option executes.

Set Direction of transformation

The choices in the popup menu are LLXY and XYLL.
LLXY. You may convert latitude/longitude locations to northing/
easting locations given a set of map projection parameters. Geodetic
locations on a data file must first be projected before you can display the
file information.
XYLL. You may also perform the inverse, that is recover latitude/
longitude coordinates from northing/easting coordinates. This option is
useful when the input data comes from a projection that is incompatible
with the desired map projection.

Input Y/Latitude Field

From the list that appears, select the Y-field or latitude to use.

Input X/Longitude Field

From the list that appears, select the X-field or longitude to use.

Output Name and Transformation parameters

You can use this dialog box to specify the following input values:
output file name
output MFD
output latitude/Y-field name
output longitude/X-field name
ZNON for the output file

Output File Name

Enter the name of the output file to create. The name can be 24
characters long and can contain internal blanks.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Coordinate Transformations 692

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Output Master File

If you click the parameter box, a popup menu appears, which lists
OpenWorks, the attached MFDs, and the scratch file. Select the MFD to
use for saving the output file.

Output Latitude/Y Field Name

Enter the name of the field that contains the new latitude or Y- field
values. The name can be up to 20 characters long and can contain
internal blanks.

Output Longitude/X Field Name

Enter the name of the field that contain the new longitude or X-field
values. The name can be up to 20 characters long and can contain
internal blanks.

ZNON for Output File

Enter the value to be used as ZNON (missing value) when this field is
written by Z-MAP Plus. This value can be any valid number supported
by your computer. Never use a number between the minimum and
maximum value in the field, as this creates many problems when
building grids and drawing contours from those grids. The Z-MAP Plus
default is 0.1E+31.

Set Projection for Transformation

You may set up a projection using either the State Plane Coordinate
System (SPCS) or Landmarks Generalized Cartographic
Transformation System (GCTS). Once a projection has been defined,
the projection remains in effect until the projection is deactivated or
another projection is defined
Most map projections are either geometric or semi-geometric so that
geographic features are projected onto a geometric surface, which can
be laid flat like a map. The geometric surfaces employed in most
cartographic projections are the cone, the cylinder and the plane. The
position of points projected on the surface can be determined by
constructing a straight line from the reference point of the projection
through the desired location on earth, and intersecting the projection
surface at a point.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Coordinate Transformations 693

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Projection from Data or Picture

You may take projections from your input data file or from a picture file.
A Select Projection dialog box appears. Point to and click the
appropriate file type.

Select Projection Source from Data File

A list of data files appears. The file you select becomes your projection
source.

Select Projection Source Graphics File

A list of graphics files appears. The graphics file you select provides the
list of projection source pictures.

Select Projection Source Picture

A list of pictures on the graphics file you have selected appears. The
picture you select from this list becomes the source for your projections.

Projection from User Input

When defining a projection, you may specify:
the type of projection
the reference spheroid
the projection parameters specific to your projection

Projection Code
A list of projection codes is presented. Point and click the projection
code you want. Projections can be Cylindrical, Conic or Planar
Azimuthal. The available projections are shown in the following
illustration. For a complete description of each available projection, see
Map Projections on page 875.

Unlocking Parameters
It is highly recommended that you unlock parameters when you change
projections in order to prevent AOI incompatibility.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Coordinate Transformations 694

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

R2003.12.0 Operations: Coordinate Transformations 695

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Reference Spheroid
The Reference Spheroid is a theoretical geometric figure whose
dimensions closely approach the dimensions of the earth for a particular
area. As a result, there are a number of defined Reference Spheroids. For
a complete description of each of the following reference spheroids
including the dimensions for the semi-major axis and the semi-minor
axis. seeReference Spheroid on page 893. From these two
dimensions, the program calculates the ellipticity for you. Select the
desired reference spheroid from the popup menu. Selections include:
.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Coordinate Transformations 696

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Projection Parameters
This dialog box contains a list of the parameters required for the
specified projection. These parameters may include:
Unit Code
Unit Factor
Reference Latitude
Latitude Scale Factor
Reference Longitude
Longitude Scale Factor
False Northing and False Easting
Central Meridian
Mapping Across the Dateline

Unit Code
Unless you select to use a UTM projection where units are always
defined in meters, you have the option of projecting your data in eight
units of measurement. These include: user-supplied, meters, feet, yards,
inches, kilometers, nautical miles, statute miles.

Unit Factor (Units/Meter)

In order for this parameter to have effect, the Unit Code must be set to
user-defined. The unit factor provides the option of defining your own
units factor. User defined units are defined as units/meter.

Reference Latitude (Standard Parallel)

Reference Latitude, or Standard Parallel, is a parallel of latitude which
is used as a control line in the computation of a map projection.

Latitude Scale Factor

The Latitude Scale Factor is a multiplier for reducing a distance
obtained from a map by computing the scale to the actual distance on the
datum of the map. For example, applying a scale reduction along the
central meridian of a transverse Mercator projection creates two lines of
true scale on either side of the central meridian, optimally reducing the
distortion for a particular area. Reference Longitude, or Central
Meridian, is the line of longitude located at the center of a projection on
which the projection is generally based.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Coordinate Transformations 697

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Longitude Scale Factor

The Longitude Scale Factor is a multiplier for reducing a distance
obtained from a map by computing the scale to the actual distance on the
datum of the map. For example, applying a scale reduction along the
central meridian of a transverse mercator projection creates two lines of
true scale on either side of the central meridian.

False Northing
False Northing represents a value assigned the origin of northings, or
grid coordinates to avoid the inconvenience of using negative
coordinates.

False Easting
False Easting is a value assigned a central meridian of a coordinate
system to avoid the inconvenience of using negative coordinates.

Central Meridian
The line of longitude located at the center of a projection on which the
projection is generally based. This parameter is also known as the
reference longitude.

Mapping Across The Dateline

The international dateline is a conventional line following
approximately the 180th Meridian. If the AOI of the new map crosses
the international dateline, set this parameter to Yes. If the new map does
not cross the international dateline, set this parameter to No.

Projection from State Plane

The State Plane Coordinate System (SPCS) is used as a standard for
geodetic mapping across the United States and its territories. This
system which is used by the United States Geologic Survey (USGS),
dictates the parameters which are used by the projections.

NAD27 and NAD83 Projection Systems

Z-MAP Plus explicitly supports both NAD27 and NAD83 coordinates
and provides a means of converting latitude/longitude coordinates
between the two datums.
In general, a geodetic datum is determined by direct measurement of the
earths surface in a specific area. In the cases of NAD27 and NAD83,
the area in question is North America.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Coordinate Transformations 698

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

A complete horizontal datum consists of:

all of the parameters necessary to define a particular coordinate
system
a set of control points whose geometric relationships are known,
either through measurement or calculation.
For many years, the standard of reference for latitude/longitude
coordinates for North America were the measurements made for
NAD27.
Due to the improvements in measurement equipment and techniques, a
new datum for North America has been determined: NAD83 also
known as WGS84 (World Geodetic Survey of 1984).
Since NAD27 was the reference for over 50 years, there is an enormous
amount of data which needs to be converted to the NAD83 reference.

NAD27 and NAD83 Units of Measure

Units used by the NAD27 state plane projection system are in U.S. survey feet.
Units used by the NAD83 state plane projection system are in metric units.

When you click either NAD27 or NAD83, a list of all 50 states, as well
as Samoa, Puerto Rico, the Virgin Islands and the Old and New regions
for Michigan is presented. Point to and click the selection you want.

Select Region
A list of regions associated with the selected state is presented.
Depending on the state, regions are listed as East, West, North, South,
Central, or by number, i.e., Region 1, Region 2, Region 3, etc.

Activate Projection
Select this option to activate the currently defined projection
parameters. These parameters remain in effect until you select the
Deactivate Projection option or reactivate and change the current
projection parameters by reselecting the Activate Projection option.

Deactivate Projection
Select this option to deactivate a projection when you wish to generate
a picture using northing/easting parameters.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Coordinate Transformations 699

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Transformation Coordinates (Overwrite Fields)

This operation performs coordinate transformations (map projections)
and enables you to overwrite designated fields in the new file. The
operation uses an input data file to define the transformation parameters.
It allows the output coordinates to overwrite an existing field.

Coordinate Transformations vs. Transform Coordinates

In Coordinate Transformation, if you supply a file with the following fields: Lat,
Lon, Z, the process creates at file with the following fields: Lat, Lon, Z, X, Y
(where is X, Y are created by the process). For this example, assume these X,Y
fields are in UTM coordinate system. If you used the Coordinate
Transformation option to then transform the Lat, Lon, Z,X,Y fields into a pair
of Lambert XY coordinates, you would get the following fields: Lat, Lon, Z, X,
Y, X,Y. Multiple X,Y fields in a data file is unusable with many processes.
Coordinate Transformation is not able to overwrite existing fields. Transform
Coordinates (Overwrite Fields) performs the same transformations and allows
you to overwrite the original X,Y fields.

Specify the following input values:

input data file to use for performing the map projection
fields in the input data file to use as input for the projection
input file for which a projection is defined (The projection
information from this file defines the projection for the process.)
direction of the transformation
output file name and destination MFD
target fields for writing output coordinates in the output file
null data (ZNON) value for the output fields
This option calls the TRANSFORM-COORDS macro. For detailed
information about parameters for this operation, select Help
Online Manuals Macro Manual, then locate the
TRANSFORM-COORDS topic.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Transformation Coordinates (Overwrite Fields) 700

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Lat/Lon (DMS) to Decimal Degrees

Enter from Operations in

Z-MAP Plus window

Select input file

Enter output file name and select MFD or OpenWorks

Enter name of output latitude and longitude fields

Select
DEG to DMS direction of DEG to DMS
conversion
Select input latitude &
longitude fields to convert

Save and return to

Z-MAP Plus window

Lat/Lon (DMS) to Decimal Degrees Workflow

Degree-Minute-Second Conversion is designed to convert data that is in
degrees, minutes, and seconds into decimal degrees, or vice versa.
Data stored in degrees, minutes, and seconds is stored in DMS Latitude
and DMS Longitude fields. The D-M-S Conversion option converts
these fields into decimal degrees stored in Latitude and Longitude
fields, which is how Z-MAP Plus expects Latitude and Longitude
information.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Lat/Lon (DMS) to Decimal Degrees 701

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

DEGREES, MINUTES, SECONDS CONVERSION Dialog Box Options

Input File
The format of this DMS file should be 98 50 20 with no commas. In
this example, 98 is degrees, 50 is minutes, and 20 is seconds. Degree
values can be negative, and seconds values can be decimal (for example,
20.3453). Be sure to use the DMS-LATITUDE and DMS-LONGITUDE
files for the import.
From the list of files that appears, select an input file to use.

Output File, Algorithm, Parameters

You can use this dialog box to specify the following input values:
name of the output file
MFD to use tor storing it (or use the OpenWorks project)
conversion direction (DEG to DMS, DMS to DEG)
output latitude field name
output longitude field name
Normally, you use this dialog box and change the output file name and
output MFD.

Output File Name

Enter the name of the file to be created. The name can be up to 24
characters long and can contain internal blanks.

Output File Master File

If you click the parameter box, a popup menu appears, which lists
OpenWorks, the attached MFDs, and the scratch file. Select the MFD to
use for saving the output file.

Conversion Direction
DEG to DMS converts decimal degrees into degrees, minutes, and
seconds.
DMS to DEG converts Latitude/Longitude information that is in
degrees, minutes, and seconds into decimal degrees.

Output Latitude Field Name

Enter the name to call your new (converted) Latitude field.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Lat/Lon (DMS) to Decimal Degrees 702

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Output Longitude Field Name

Enter the name to call your new (converted) Longitude field.

DMS Latitude Field

Input the field that you would like to use as the Degree-Minute-Second
input Latitude field. This field would be selected as the field to convert
to Latitude in decimal degrees.

DMS Longitude Field

Input the field that you would like to use as the Degree-Minute-Second
input Longitude field. This field would be selected as the field to convert
to Longitude in decimal degrees.

Latitude Field
Input the field that you would like to use as the decimal degree input
Latitude field. This would be the field that you would like to convert into
Degree-Minute-Second Latitude information.

Longitude Field
Input the field that you would like to use as the decimal degree input
Longitude field. This would be the field that you would like to convert
into Degree-Minute-Second Longitude information.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Lat/Lon (DMS) to Decimal Degrees 703

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Line Generalization

Enter from Operations in

Z-MAP Plus window

Select a vertex, fault or data file

Enter name for output file and select MFD or OpenWorks

Choose a generalization algorithm

Choose desired statistics level

Enter the generalization tolerance

Choose field(s) for line generalization

Horizon Name Horizon Name Horizon Name Horizon Name

field field field field

Save and return to

Z-MAP Plus window

Line Generalization Workflow

The purpose of Line Generalization is to reduce the number of data
points in linear cartographic features. As the data is generalized, the
features are redefined so that they contain fewer points, yet maintain the
important characteristics of their original shape. The resulting output
file requires less storage space and processing time is reduced.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Line Generalization 704

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Use Line Generalization to thin:

digitized faults to optimize processing for contouring and gridding
faulted data
seismic data to optimize plotting track-line maps
contour lines to reduce the storage requirements of large contour
datasets
coastline or other vertex files that contain more detail needed for
the chosen map scale

Increasing Generalization
As the map scale decreases the amount of generalization that can be performed
increases.

LINE GENERALIZATION Dialog Box Options

Input File
If you select Line Generalization, a list of input file types that contain
line data appears on your screen. The input file may contain any of the
following types of line data: contour, fault, seismic lines, cross section,
profile and vertex. Select the file you want.
Keep the following points in mind when you select a seismic data file:
All lines on the file are generalized.
Only one Z-field at a time can be generalized.
Points for a particular line may not be segmented throughout the
data file.
Points describing a line must smoothly cross through the x,y plane.
If you are trying to thin seismic data (for example, to keep every
10th shotpoint in the data file) use the operation Data Thinning
instead of line generalization. Generalization may throw out may
more points than you intended along straight line segments, since
it only tries to maintain the same line shape.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Line Generalization 705

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Output File, Algorithm, Parameters

Use this dialog box to name the Output File and Output MFD. You can
also specify an Algorithm, Statistics Level, and Tolerance.

Output Filename
Enter the name of the grid to be created. The name can be a maximum
of 24 characters long and can contain internal blanks.

Output Master File

If you click the parameter box, a popup menu appears, which lists
OpenWorks, the attached MFDs, and the scratch file. Select the MFD to
use for saving the output file.

Algorithm
You can choose from two algorithms when performing Line
Generalization. Either of these algorithms reduce the size of the line data
file. However, the Douglas Poiker algorithm produces a smaller output
file and is slightly more accurate than the Williams algorithm. On the
other hand, the Williams algorithm is faster, but produces a larger output
file.
Douglas Poiker Algorithm. This is a global curve thinning algorithm.
The first and last points of the input curve are always included in the
output curve. The algorithm begins by drawing an imaginary baseline
between these two points. To select a third point, the algorithm
measures the deviation of all intermediate points from this baseline. If
its distance is greater than the user-specified tolerance, the point furthest
away from the baseline is chosen for inclusion. On selection, the third
point divides the curve into two parts, each of which is recursively
analyzed in the same manner. The algorithm continues to select points
based on their deviation from the output curve until all nonselected
points lie within the specified tolerance.
Williams Algorithm. This is a curve-scanning algorithm. As in the
Douglas Poiker Algorithm, the first and last points are automatically
included in the output curve. Subsequent points are chosen based on
purely local calculations.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Line Generalization 706

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

The Williams Algorithm begins by drawing an imaginary baseline

between the first and third points along the input curve. It then measures
the deviation of the second point from the baseline. If the second point
lies within the specified tolerance, then the third point is temporarily
included and a new baseline is defined using the first and fourth points.
Next, the algorithm calculates the distances of both the second and third
points from this baseline. If both points lie within the tolerance, the
fourth point is temporarily included in the output curve. This process
continues until the distance calculated for one of the intermediate points
is greater than the user-specified tolerance. When this event occurs, the
last point selected for temporary inclusion is permanently included in
the curve.

Temporary Points
The last temporary point in each sequence is the only temporary point that is
actually included in the output curve.

On selecting a point for permanent inclusion in the output curve, the

algorithm proceeds to build local baselines starting with the most
recently included point and working towards the last point on the input
line.

Statistics Level
You may specify that full, partial or no statistics be displayed in the
processing window.
Full Statistics provides statistics as shown in the following example.
INPUT FILE STATISTICS
-----------------------

TOTAL NUMBER OF LINES = 12

TOTAL NUMBER OF VERTICES = 118
MINIMUM NUMBER OF VERTICES/LINE = 1
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF VERTICES/LINE = 29
AVERAGE NUMBER OF VERTICES/LINE = 9

LINE SEQUENCE NUMBER OF NUMBER OF

NUMBER INPUT POINTS OUTPUT POINTS
------------- ------------ -------------

2 12 12
3 13 12
4 16 14
5 12 12

R2003.12.0 Operations: Line Generalization 707

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

6 29 28
7 6 5
8 11 11
9 5 5
10 6 6
11 1 1
12 4 4
12 3 2

OUTPUT FILE STATISTICS

------------------------

TOTAL NUMBER OF LINES = 12

TOTAL NUMBER OF VERTICES = 112
MINIMUM NUMBER OF VERTICES/LINE = 1
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF VERTICES/LINE = 28
AVERAGE NUMBER OF VERTICES/LINE = 9

NUMBER OF DELETED VERTICES = 6

Partial Statistics displays the input file statistics and the output file
statistics without the print out for each line in the file.

Tolerance
The generalization tolerance is a user-defined threshold value that is
measured in the same units as the data. The distance between input curve
points and various algorithm baselines is compared to this threshold.
Data thinning is inversely proportional to the selected tolerance. A
tolerance that is only a very small fraction of the total X or Y range of
the data is usually appropriate for planimetric data. A tolerance that is a
very small fraction of the Z-range of the data is usually appropriate for
seismic data. Choosing a best tolerance can require several trial runs,
but most digitized cartographic data is so highly oversampled that a very
small tolerance produces immediate improvements.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Line Generalization 708

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Z Field
A list of Z-fields is presented. A Z-field is usually depth or time values.
Point to and click the field you want. This input field is used when the
option executes. Fields in this list were picked from a previously
selected file.

Segment ID Field
Vertex points that have the same Segment ID are connected as a line.
When vertex data is digitized or input interactively, a Segment ID is
automatically assigned to each line input.
A list of fields is presented. Point to and click the field you want. This
input field is used when the option executes. Fields in this list were
picked from a previously selected file.

Line Name Field

A list of fields is presented. Point to and click the field you want. This
input field is used when the option executes. Fields in this list were
picked from a previously selected file.

Horizon Name Field

A list of fields is presented. Point to and click the field you want. This
input field is used when the option executes. Fields in this list were
picked from a previously selected file.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Line Generalization 709

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Line Resampling

Line resampling operates on data organized in lines such as 2D seismic

lines and deviated wells. Line Resampling does two things:
Resampling creates new points at regular intervals along the lines
in a dataset.
Attribute Propagation finds the value of an intermediate point
(whose data value is unknown) by using the known values of
points on either side. For example, if the intermediate point is
located midway between two points where the attribute Time has
the values of 230 and 240, the value of Time at the intermediate
point is 235.
Users typically apply both Resampling and Attribute Propagation to a
dataset. However, Line Resampling allows you to omit either process.
The Line Resampling interval can be expressed in terms of distance
along the line in some coordinate system or by the value of an attribute
attached to each point. The original points can be included in the output
dataset. Once new points are positioned along a line, line resampling
computes attribute values at the new points. The new values are either
interpolated or copied from adjacent points.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Line Resampling 710

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Line Resampling creates a new output dataset and does not change the
input dataset. The output dataset contains exactly those fields found on
the input dataset. Sort flags and projection information are preserved in
the output dataset.
Line Resampling allows choices and entries for the following:
Data Type
Files (Input)
Output File and Master File
Operation Parameters (Resampling or Propagation)
Choose Field

Line Resampling Dialog Box Options

Data Type
Allows you to select which type of file to resample or propagate. File
type choices are listed in a popup menu that appears when you click this
parameter box. A list of files of that type is listed in the Files window.
Only files in the currently attached MFDs and the OpenWorks project
are displayed.
Possible choices for this parameter include:
DATA
CNTR (Contour)
FALT (Fault)
VERT (Vertex lines)
SSEC (Seismic Section)
XSEC (Cross Section)
DWEL (Deviated Well)

Files
This option allows you to select the input file. Click the name of the file
you want to be the input file. To display the subsidiary Line Resampling
dialog boxes, you must firs select an input file.

Output File
This option allows you to name the output file. The name can be up to
24 characters long, and can contain interval blanks.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Line Resampling 711

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Output MFD
From the popup menu, select the scratch file or MFD to use for saving
the output file.

Resampling and Propagation

You can use these options to specify whether you want to perform Line
Resampling, Attribute Propagation, or both. Clicking the Resampling
box causes Line Resampling to be performed on execution. Clicking the
Propagation box causes Attribute Propagation to be performed on
execution. Clicking both boxes causes Line Resampling and Attribute
Propagation to be performed on execution.

Resampling Parameters

The Resampling Parameters dialog box includes 19 parameters. To

avoid confusion, all 19 parameters are listed in the following text. If a
parameter is used by one or more (but not all) Resampling methods, the
method(s) which use this parameter are noted. For example, Arc
Distance is used by DISTINCLL.
The 19 Resampling Parameters are:
Resampling Method

R2003.12.0 Operations: Line Resampling 712

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Lines to Resample
Increment
Rectangular Increment: DISTINCXY
Arc Distance: DISTINCLL
Shotpoint Increment: SHINCREM and NMINCREM
Distance along Baseline: DISPLACE
Base: SHINCREM, NMINCREM, DISPLACE
Discontinuity Usage
Geographic Coordinate Technique: DISTINCLL
Geographic Arc Distance Units: DISTINCLL
Geographic Arc Units/Meter
3-D Line Divisor
Records to Retain
Resampling Tolerance
Distance Break
Shotpoint Break: SHINCREM and NMINCREM when Lines to
Resample = All
Ellipsoid Method: DISTINCLL
Spheroid: DISTINCLL
Semi Major Axis A: DISTINCLL when Ellipsoid Method =
ELLIPSD
Semi Minor Axis B: DISTINCLL when Ellipsoid Method =
ELLIPSD
Axis Units: DISTINCLL, Ellipsoid Specified
Axis Units/Meter

Resampling Method
Controls which resampling method is used to position new points along
the line. Possible choices for Resampling Method include:
DISTINCXY (Distance Increment X/Y). This is the Distance
Increment process for Resampling in a rectangular x,y coordinate
system. Line Resampling creates new points at a regular increment of
distance along the line. One parameter controls this process: Distance
Increment value, I.
Where Pj is the distance from the first point on the line,
Pj = jI, for j = 1,2,3

R2003.12.0 Operations: Line Resampling 713

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

For example, consider a four point line resampled by rectangular

coordinates distance. Assume that the original line coordinates are (1,0),
(10,0), (11,0), (20,0). For I = 4.0, Line Resampling creates new points
at coordinates, (5,0), (9,0), (13,0), and (17,0).
DISTINCLL (Distance Increment Latitude/Longitude). This is the
Distance Increment process for resampling in a geographic coordinate
system. Line Resampling creates new points at a regular increment of
distance along the line. One parameter controls this process: Distance
Increment value, I.
Where Pj is the distance from the first point on the line,
Pj = jI, for j = 1,2,3
For a geographical coordinate system, the Distance Increment I is an arc
distance in user definable linear units.
SHINCREM (Shotpoint Increment). In the Shotpoint Increment
Method, Line Resampling creates new points at a regular increment of
shotpoint values along the line. Two parameters control this process: 1)
a shotpoint base value B and 2) a shotpoint increment value I.
For example, consider a seismic line where the number of first and last
shotpoints are m and n respectively. Line Resampling creates new points
with shotpoint numbers Pj according to the formula:
Where Pj is new points with shotpoint number,
Pj = B+ (j-1)I, for j = 1,2,3,... where all m < Pj < n.
To apply the above formula, assume a line resampled by shotpoint
number, the first shotpoint number being 1147 and the end shotpoint
number being 1632. For B = 0, and I = 10, Line Resampling creates new
shotpoints with the following numbers:
1150, 1160, 1170, 1180,..., 1600, 1610, 1620, and 1630
NMINCREM (Numerical Increment). In the Numerical Increment
method, Line Resampling creates new points at a regular increment
along some specified numerical field. Two common uses of this method
would be resampling a seismic dataset with respect to a time field and
resampling a deviated well dataset with respect to a depth field. Line
Resampling uses two parameters to control this process: 1) a numerical
offset value B and 2) a numerical increment value I.
For example, consider a seismic line where the number of first and last
shotpoints are m and n respectively. The formula for Line Resampling
with the Numerical Increment method is:
Where Pj represents new points,
Pj = B + (j-1)I, for j = 1,2,3,... where all m < Pj < n

R2003.12.0 Operations: Line Resampling 714

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

DISPLACE. In the Displacement method, Line Resampling creates

new points at a regular distance along the baseline of an XSEC dataset.
Two parameters control Displacement Line Resampling: 1) a distance
offset value B and 2) a distance increment value I.
For example, consider a seismic line in which the number of first and
last shotpoints are m and n respectively. The formula for Line
Resampling with the Displacement method is:
Pj = B + (j-1)I, for j = 1,2,3,...where all 0 < Pj < n
For example, lets say a geologic section line is 100 units long. For B =
10, and I = 20, Line Resampling creates new baseline distance points
with the following values: 10.0, 30.0, 50.0, 70.0, and 90.0.
The method specified must be valid for the resampled dataset type. Line
Resampling defaults to a method depending on the file type of the input
file. The following is a table of the fields each Resampling Method uses.

Dataset Type DISTINCXY DISTINCLL SHINCREM NMINCREM DISPLACE

2D Seismic X, Y Lat, Lon SP Number numeric field,
SP Distance
3D Seismic Bin Number,
Track Number
DWEL X, Y Lat, Lon numeric field
FALT X, Y Lat, Lon numeric field
VERT X, Y Lat, Lon numeric field
SSEC Y
CNTR X, Y
XSEC X
DATA X, Y Lat, Lon numeric field

Lines to Resample
Controls whether to resample all or some of the lines. Possible choices
for this parameter include:
All (default). Resample all the lines from the input file.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Line Resampling 715

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Some. Resample only some of the lines from the input file. A mask
Line Identification Parameters dialog box appears to allow you to select
which lines are resampled. See Line Identification Parameters on
page 730 for a discussion of this dialog box. Before you select Some,
you should have selected the Choose Fields button on the main dialog
box; when you do (or if you havent) the Choose Fields dialog box
appears. See Choose Fields on page 728 for a discussion of this
dialog box. You should also have chosen a Primary Line Select Field
on the Choose Fields dialog box.

Increment
This option allows you to choose the resampling increment or distance
between successive new points on a line. The type of distance depends
on Resampling Method chosen. Increment is defaulted only if
Resampling Method is SHINCREM.
You can increase or decrease the value of the Increment by clicking the
up or down arrows on either side of the parameter window.
There are two main categories of resampling:
resampling based on coordinate fields (X/Y or Lat/Long)
distance increment method (DISTINCXY)
geographic coordinate method (DISTINCLL)
resampling based on attribute fields
shotpoint increment (SHINCREM)
numerical increment (NMINCREM)

Rectangular Increment
If Resampling Method is DISTINCXY, then the Increment, or distance
between two new points on the line which is being resampled, is
rectangular distance. This distance is computed using the Pythagorean
Theorem. Line Resampling uses the first set of X- and Y-fields on the
dataset (unless the user specifies another set of X- and Y-fields using the
control parameters). Line Resampling fills all other fields in the dataset
with nulls, even other X and Y coordinate fields.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Line Resampling 716

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Arc Distance
If Resampling Method is DISTINCLL, then the Increment, or distance
between two new points on the line which is being resampled, is
distance along an arc. With DISTINCLL, Line Resampling uses the first
set of Latitude and Longitude fields on the dataset (unless the user
specifies another set of Latitude and Longitude fields using the control
parameters). Line Resampling fills all other fields on the dataset with
nulls, even other Latitude and Longitude fields.
When Line Resampling uses geographical coordinates to resample the
dataset, it calculates the distance between new points along a line
(Increment) along a great circle joining the adjacent original points.
Line Resampling needs ellipsoid parameters to calculate the parameters
of the arc defining the great circle. In Z-MAP Plus, there are three ways
Line Resampling can get the ellipsoid parameters:
If the dataset has been projected in a Landmark product, Line
Resolution can get the ellipsoid parameter values recorded in the
history information.
You may specify the name of the ellipsoid (for example, Clarke
1866).
You may specify the lengths of the axes of the ellipsoid.

Shotpoint Increment
When Resampling Method is SHINCREM, then the value is shotpoint
increment. The base shotpoint value could be a beginning shotpoint
value. Line Resampling creates new shotpoints at a specified interval.
With a base shotpoint number of 1127 and an increment of 50, the next
new point is 1177.
When the Resampling Method is NMINCREM, then the value is
numerical increment. The increment represents a constant value along a
numerical field, such as time or depth.

Distance Along Baseline

When the Resampling Method is DISPLACE, then the value is distance
along the baseline of a cross-section (XSEC) dataset.
You may enter the value in the box or click the up or down arrow to
increase or decrease the value in the box.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Line Resampling 717

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Arc Distance
The Increment, or distance between two new points on the line which is
being resampled, is distance along an arc. With DISTINCLL, Line
Resampling uses the first set of Latitude and Longitude fields on the
dataset (unless the user specifies another set of Latitude and Longitude
fields using the control parameters). Line Resampling fills all other
fields on the dataset with nulls, even other Latitude and Longitude
fields.
When Line Resampling uses geographical coordinates to resample the
dataset, it calculates the distance between new points along a line
(Increment) along a great circle joining the adjacent original points.
Line Resampling needs ellipsoid parameters to calculate the parameters
of the arc defining the great circle. In Z-MAP Plus, there are three ways
Line Resampling can get the ellipsoid parameters:
If the dataset has been projected in a Landmark product, Line
Resolution can get the ellipsoid parameter values recorded in the
history information.
You may specify the name of the ellipsoid (for example, Clarke
1866).
You may specify the lengths of the axes of the ellipsoid.
There are two methods for resampling a dataset based on geographic
coordinates.
The Great Circle Method starts with a pair of original points, and places
new points on the great circle passing through the original points.
The Rhumb Line (loxodrome method) starts with a pair of original
points, and places new points on the rhumb line between the original
points. (A Rhumb Line is a line marking out a constant compass
direction. When drawn on a map, a Rhumb Line cuts across all
meridians at the same angle). Parallels of Latitude at 90 or 270 degrees
are handled by the Rhumb Line method.
You can select a different method for each line on the dataset if they
desire to do so. Some lines can be resampled according to the Rhumb
Line (RL), others according to the Great Circle (GC) method. If no
method is specified, the program uses the operative default for the
Resampling Method you have chosen.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Line Resampling 718

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Base
For computational purposes, the base is the starting value for three of the
Resampling Methods. The base is not necessarily the starting value of
the resulting line. For example, a 2D seismic line with original shotpoint
values of 7,9,11,13 that is resampled with SHINCREM and base = 0,
increment = 2, RETAIN=ENDPOINTS results in a line of 7,8,10,12,13.
(Not 0,2,4,6,7,8,10,12,13.)
This option allows you to choose the base value (defined in the
following text). It is needed if the Resampling Method is SHINCREM,
NMINCREM, or DISPLACE. You may enter the value in the box or
click the up or down arrow to increase or decrease the value in the box.
In the SHINCREM method, Base refers to the starting shotpoint
number.
In the NMINCREM method, Base refers to the starting value in some
specified numerical field, such as a time field or depth field.
In the DISPLACE method, Base refers to the starting value on the
baseline of a Cross-Section dataset. Line Resampling depends on the
X-EASTING field in the cross-section baseline to determine linear
displacement.

Discontinuity Usage
This option allows you to choose how to treat the presence of
discontinuity fields during the resampling process.
Discontinuity flags are a way of letting the program know that an
unconformity exists on a surface subject to resampling. Resampling
does not consider the geometry of the underlying surfaces when creating
new points at regular intervals along a line. If discontinuity flags are not
used, attribute propagation computes values at the new points for all the
attributes attached to the points.
Ignore. Ignore the discontinuity fields during the resampling process.
Some. Preserve any original point for which any of the propagation
discontinuity fields is positive.
All (default). Preserve any original point for which any of the
discontinuity fields in the dataset is positive.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Line Resampling 719

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Geographic Coordinate Technique

Controls which geographic coordinate method to use in resampling. It is
used when Resampling Method is DISTINCLL. Choices for this
parameter include:
GC (default). The Great Circle method starts with a pair of original
points, and places new points on the great circle passing through the
original points.
RL. The Rhumb Line (loxodrome method) starts with a pair of original
points, and places new points on the rhumb line between the original
points. (A Rhumb Line is a line marking out a constant compass
direction. When drawn on a map, a Rhumb Line cuts across all
meridians at the same angle). Parallels of Latitude at 90 or 270 degrees
are handled by the Rhumb Line Method.
NA. No preference
Field. Use resampling coordinate method specified in a field.
You can select a different method for each line on the dataset if they
desire to do so. Some lines can be resampled according to the Rhumb
Line (RL), others according to the Great Circle (GC) method. If no
method is specified, the program uses the operative default for the
Resampling Method you have chosen.

Geographic Arc Distance Units

Controls unit of measure for arc distances. It is required when Distance
Break, Increment, or Resampling Tolerance value is an arc value.
Choices for this parameter include:
File
User-Supplied
Meters
International Feet
US Survey Feet
Yards
Inches
Kilometers
Nautical Miles
Statute Miles
File (default). Parameters are obtained from the history records of the
input file.
User Supplied. User supplies the units in Geographic Arc Units/Meter.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Line Resampling 720

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Geographic Arc Units/Meter

If you defined a user-specified Geographic Arc Distance Unit, then you
must specify a value. You may either enter the value or use the up/down
arrow to increase/decrease the value in the Geographic Arc Units/Meter
box.

3-D Line Divisor

Each record of a 3D Seismic dataset has the following format:
Coordinates, 3D Survey Name, Bin Number, Track Number, attributes
The 3D Line Divisor can prevent a seismic line from being resampled.
If the line number is not evenly divisible by the line divisor, the line is
written to the output dataset without resampling.

Records to Retain
Controls which original records to keep during the resampling process.
It is applied globally to all lines. Possible choices for this parameter
include:
All. Line contains newly created points plus all the points from the
original line.
Endpoints. Line contains newly created points plus the endpoints from
the original line.

Resampling Tolerance
For the increments in which tolerance values can be expressed, see the
definition of Increment for each of the resampling methods in the
following topics.
Tolerance values refer to the maximum allowable distance between
points. If the user-specified maximum tolerance distance is exceeded (in
the units of each resampling method), Line Resampling does not create
a new point.
This option allows you to define a resampled point closeness tolerance.
A resampled point is discarded if it is within the specified tolerance
distance from any original point. This check applies only to the
endpoints if the Records to Retain parameter = ENDPOINTS. A
tolerance value of 0.0 disables the tolerance check. You can enter the
value or click the up or down arrow to increase or decrease the value in
the box.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Line Resampling 721

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Distance Break
The Increment parameter, discussed above, has a more complete
discussion of the units of distance required by each of the Resampling
Methods.
You may wish to suspend line resampling between two points if the
distance between successive points on a line is too large. You may do so
by specifying a break distance.
If the distance between any adjacent points on the line is greater than the
break value, then no resampling occurs between these points. This
option allows you to choose the distance break value. Break value of 0.0
disables distance break checking. You may enter the value in the box or
click the up or down arrows to increase or decrease the value in the box.
For a definition/explanation of the units in which you can specify
distance break, see the Increment topic on page 716.
If Resampling Method is DISTINCXY, then Distance Break is assumed
to be in rectangular units (x,y units).
If Resampling Method is DISTINCLL, then Distance Break is assumed
to be arc distance (Lat, Long units).
If Resampling Method is SHINCREM, DISPLACE, or NMINCREM
and if the X-field and Y-field are specified by the user, then the
following rules apply. If the X- and Y-fields are rectangular coordinate
fields, then the Distance Break is assumed to be in rectangular units. If
the X- and Y-fields are geographic coordinate fields, then the Distance
Break is assumed to be arc distance in units specified by Geographic Arc
Distance Units.

Shotpoint Break
If the distance between any adjacent shotpoints on a line is greater than
break value, then no resampling occurs between these points. This
option allows you to choose the distance break value. Break value of 0.0
disables shotpoint break checking. You may enter the value in the box
or click the up or down arrows to increase or decrease the value in the
box.

Resampling Based on Geographic Coordinates

Line Resampling may resample lines based on either X/Y or Lat/Long
fields. The geographic distance along the line governs the frequency
with which Line Resampling inserts new points.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Line Resampling 722

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

If resampling uses rectangular coordinates, then the program uses the

first X- and Y-fields on the dataset unless you specify otherwise. For
more information about User-Specified Fields, see Choose Fields on
page 728. The lines are resampled by calculating the distance between
new points along a line using the Pythagorean Theorem, where d = the
square root of x squared + y squared.
If resampling uses geographic coordinates, then the program uses the
first Latitude and Longitude fields on the dataset unless you specify
otherwise. See Ellipsoid Method topic that follows.

Ellipsoid Method
Use this option to specify the method for defining ellipsoid parameters.
This option is used if the Resampling Method value is DISTINCLL.
Choices for this parameter are:
File (default value) Parameters are obtained from the history
records of the input file if one is available.
Projection Parameters are obtained from the currently defined
projection. (not currently available)
Ellipsd Parameters are defined by naming the ellipsoid using
the standard spheroids available from the Spheroid menu.
Specified Parameters are specified in Semi Major Axis A and
Semi Minor Axis B parameters.

Spheroid
The Spheroid defines the size of the semi-major and semi-minor axes.
You only need to define the Spheroid when the Ellipsoid Method is
Ellipsd. Each spheroid on this list has a semi-major and semi-minor axis
defined. The Reference Spheroid has dimensions which closely
approach the dimensions of the earth for a particular area of interest.
From these two dimensions, the program calculates the ellipticity for
you. Select the desired Reference Spheroid. For a complete description
of each of the following reference spheroids including the dimensions
for the semi-major axis and the semi-minor axis, see Reference
Spheroid on page 893.

Semi-Major and Semi-Minor Axis

This value must be entered when the Ellipsoid Method = Specified. If
you do not derive the value of the semi-major and semi-minor axes from
a projected data file or from a standard spheroid, you can enter the
values for the semi-major and semi-minor axes.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Line Resampling 723

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Axis Units
Axis Units are required when the Resampling Method is DISTINCLL
and the Ellipsoid Method is user-specified. The units of the Semi-Major
and Semi-Minor Axis are converted into the units you select.
Choices for this parameter include:
File
User Supplied
Meters (default)
International Feet
Us Survey Feet
Yards
Inches
Kilometers
Nautical Miles
Statute Miles
File. Get the information from projection information in the input file
dataset.
User Supplied. You supply the units in Axis Units/Meter.

Axis Units/Meter
The Units/Meter parameter is in effect when the Ellipsoid Method is
User-specified. The Units/Meter number is a multiplier. If you have
specified the semi-major axis to 100,000, and the axis units/meter to 1.0,
the semi-major axis is 100,000 meters. if you have a semi-major axis of
100,000, and a units/meter factor of 0.5, then the semi-major axis is
50,000 meters.
You may either enter the number in the box or use the arrow to increase
or decrease the multiplier.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Line Resampling 724

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Propagation Parameters

Use this dialog box to define Attribute Propagation Parameters.

While Resampling is a method for creating new points, Attribute
Propagation is a process of computing the value of an Attribute at a new
point. If a new point is located exactly halfway between two points
where the attribute Time has the values of 230 and 240, the value of
Time at the new point is computed to be 235.
The records for new points produced by the resampling phase contain
null values for each field except the field(s) directly involved in line
resampling and the line identifier field. The Attribute Propagation phase
fills in all the remaining fields of the new record with reasonable values.
Attribute Propagation fills in the value of an attribute either by copying
the value of a neighbor or by interpolating the new value from two
bounding records. Character data is copied from a neighboring character
field. Numerical data are either copied or interpolated depending on the
field type.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Line Resampling 725

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Source List and Fields to Propagate

You may specify up to 50 fields. If you do not specify, there is no limit
on the number of fields you can propagate.
The left window is the Source List. These fields are listed from your
input data file. It lists the fields not yet qualified or unqualified to be
chosen for Attribute Propagation. When you click a field name from the
Source List, the field moves to the Fields to Propagate list. If the field is
not qualified for propagation, then nothing happens.
The right window is the Fields to Propagate list. It lists the fields which
are propagated. If the Mode dialog box is in Delete mode, then when you
click a field name from the Fields to Propagate list, it moves to the
Source List.

Method
Line Resampling assumes a default propagation mode for each type of
field. For example, the default propagation method for X-field, Y-field,
and TOPO is Interpolate. For Symbol Code and Well ID, the method of
propagation is Copy Closest.
As you select fields to be propagated, a propagation method appears in
the adjacent Method window. You may change the listed method using
the Methods parameter box.
For example, if Well ID appears in the Fields to Propagate window, the
default Method is Copy Closest. If you do not want the Symbol Code for
the new point to be copied from the closest point Symbol Field, click the
method you prefer in the Method Mode menu. The Method Mode menu
resides in the bottom half of the Line Propagation Parameters menu. To
change propagation for WELLID from Copy Closest to Copy Prior,
click Copy Prior under methods. Next click WELLID in the Fields to
Propagate area, and on Copy Closest in the Method column. The
Method changes to Copy Prior.

Discontinuity Field
You should consider Discontinuity Usage when you wish to propagate
fields along a surface which is not continuous. Common examples of
special discontinuity points on a surface are terminations on faults,
washouts, pinchouts, and truncations. If a field has a discontinuity field
attached, then values are propagated only when there are no
discontinuities (as defined in the attached Discontinuity Fields).
You may change the listed method using the Discontinuity Usage
parameter box.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Line Resampling 726

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Mode
There are three mode buttons in the Mode dialog box: Append, Delete,
and Insert. These three buttons only affect the fields in the Fields to
Propagate list. You can add (append), delete, and change the order of
(insert) the fields in the Fields to Propagate list. Normally, the Append
button is the usual button to use when selecting fields to be propagated.
Append. To move a field from the Source List window to the Fields to
Propagate window, the Append diamond must be depressed. Simply
click the fields you want on the output file. If qualified, they appear in
the Fields to Propagate list.
Delete. You can delete any field in the Fields to Propagate list. With the
Delete diamond depressed, click the fields you wish to move back into
the Source List.
Insert. Insert allows you to move a field from the Source List to the
Fields to Propagate list. It inserts the selected field above a highlighted
item in the Fields to Propagate window.

Lines to Fill
You may choose whether to use Attribute Propagation for some of the
lines or all of them. Choices for this parameter includes:
All (default). Propagate all the lines from the input file.
Some. Propagate only some of the lines from the input file. A Line
Identification Parameters dialog box appears to allow you to define
which lines are propagated.

Methods
You may choose how to propagate each field. You must first choose
which method you want specified by clicking a diamond in the Method
dialog box. Afterward, click the Method window next to the Fields to
Propagate you want the method assigned to. Choices for this parameter
include:
Interpolate. Interpolate field value from the field value in the
surrounding records. Valid for numeric fields only.
Copy Prior. Copy field value from the field value in the previous
record.
Copy Post. Copy field value from the field value in the next record.
Copy Closest. Copy field value from the field value in the record
closest (by coordinate distance) to the present record.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Line Resampling 727

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Default. Use the default as defined by the field type.

Discontinuity Usage
Each field being propagated can be assigned a discontinuity field. You
must click the Discontinuity Usage dialog box to enable the process. To
choose the discontinuity field, click the Discontinuity Field and then
click Discontinuity Field window next to the Fields to Propagate
window you want it assigned to.

Choose Fields

This dialog box allows you to select a field that is involved in the
Resampling and/or Propagation processes. The fields you can choose
from depend on the fields actually present in your input dataset.
There can be more than one field of a certain field type in the input file.
This dialog box allows you to define which field is the field type default.
Clicking the button next to the Field Type you want to define causes one
or more choices to appear in the Choices window. Click which field you
want to choose and it appears in the Chosen Field window next to the
chosen Field Type.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Line Resampling 728

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

The following table lists the required fields.

Shotpoint 3D 3D
X/ Y/ Line Survey Segment Horizon
Number/ Shotpoint Line
Lon Lat Name Name ID Name
Distance Number Name

DATA Req. Req.

2D
seismic

DATA Opt. Req. Req.

3D
seismic

DATA Req. Req. Req.

other

CNTR Req. Req.

FALT Req. Req. Req.

VERT Req. Req. Req.

DWEL Req. Req. Req.

SSEC Req. Req. Req. Req.

XSEC Req. Req. Req. Req.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Line Resampling 729

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Line Identification Parameters

Line Resampling normally applies its control parameters to all lines in

the dataset. However, you may specify control parameters for subsets of
the dataset through the use of subsetting criteria.
You may want to specify the subset based on the line name. For
example, you may apply different sets of resampling parameters to lines
with names starting with 8902 and 8903. See the discussion of the
top half of this dialog box beginning with Primary Line Select Field
on page 731.
You may want to specify the subset based on line separation criteria; see
the discussion of the lower half of this dialog box beginning with
Increment on page 733.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Line Resampling 730

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Primary Line Select Field

Displays the name of the Primary Line Select Field chosen in the
Choose Fields dialog box.

Operator
This parameter is active only if a Primary Line Select Field has been
selected. Only those lines for which the value of the field Primary Line
Select Field satisfies the comparison are processed. You may instruct
Line Resampling to compare a fields value to a Value using the
operators listed under Operator on page 605.
For each of the operators, Value must be of the same type (numeric or
character) as the field being tested.

Wildcards
For a complete discussion of wildcards, see Wildcard Characters
Definition on page 609 and Wildcard Characters Application on
page 610.

Line Identification Textual Mask A

This window shows a list of the masks you have defined. To add a new
entry to the list, single click an entry. The new entry appears above it.
Type in the Mask A Entry window the mask. To edit an existing mask
in this window, double-click it and it appears in the Mask A Entry
window. Edit it in the Mask A Entry window. To place a mask above
one listed in this window, single click that particular mask and create the
new one in the Mask A Entry window. If more than seven entries are
present, a scroll bar appears.
Note that both single and double clicking a mask entry highlights its
associated entries in the Line Identification Textual Mask B, Increment,
Base, Distance Break, and Shotpoint Break windows.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Line Resampling 731

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Line Identification Textual Mask B

This window show a list of the masks you have defined. To add a new
entry to the list single click an entry. The new entry appears above it.
Type in the Mask A Entry window the mask. To edit a mask in this
window, double click it and it appears in the Mask B Entry window. Edit
it in the Mask B Entry window. To place a mask above one listed in this
window, single click that particular mask and create the new one in the
Mask B Entry window. This window is active only if Operator is
Between or Outside. If more than seven entries are present, then a scroll
bar appears.
Note that both single and double clicking a mask entry highlights its
associated entries in the Line Identification Textual Mask A, Increment,
Base, Distance Break, and Shotpoint Break windows.

Mask Entry
When defining the Mask, wildcard characters (* = multiple characters,
% = single character) can be used. Rules for using wildcard characters
are described starting on page 609. The Operator is used to determine
whether the records value must equal, be greater than, etc. the Masks
value. Rules for how operators work with Masks and with alphabetic
characters are described after the wildcard discussion.

Mask A Entry
Edit the Textual Mask A in this window. Click Apply to save, or Delete
Selected to delete this mask from the Line Identification Textual
Mask A window.

Mask B Entry
Edit the Textual Mask B in this window. Click Apply to save or Delete
Selected to delete this mask from the Line Identification Textual
Mask B window.

Accept
Clicking Accept indicates that you wish to use the masks you see listed
from either or both of the Textual Mask windows.

Clear
Clicking Clear indicates that you wish to clear the masks you see listed
from either or both of the Textual Mask windows.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Line Resampling 732

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Delete Selected
Clicking Delete Selected causes the mask you selected in Line
Identification Textual Mask A or B to be deleted.

Increment
Double-clicking one of the entries copies it to the Increment Entry boxes
where you may edit it. If more than seven entries are present, then a
scroll bar appears.
Note that both single and double clicking a mask entry highlights its
associated entries in the Line Identification Textual Mask A, Line
Identification Textual Mask B, Base, Distance Break, and Shotpoint
Break windows.

Increment Entry
Allows you to edit an Increment entry. Click Apply when you have
completed the edit.

Base
Double-clicking one of the entries copies it to the Base Entry boxes
where you may edit it. This window is inactive if Resample Method is
SHINCREM. If more than seven entries are present, then a scroll bar
appears.
Note that both single and double clicking a mask entry highlights its
associated entries in the Line Identification Textual Mask A, Line
Identification Textual Mask B, Increment, Distance Break, and
Shotpoint Break windows.

Base Entry
Allows you to edit a Base entry. Click Apply when you have completed
the edit.

Distance Break
Double-clicking one of the entries copies it to the Distance Break Entry
box where you may edit it. If more than seven entries are present, then
a scroll bar appears.
Note that both single and double clicking a mask entry highlights its
associated entries in the Line Identification Textual Mask A, Line
Identification Textual Mask B, Increment, Base, and Shotpoint Break
windows.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Line Resampling 733

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Distance Break Entry

Allows you to edit a Distance Break entry. Click Apply when you have
completed the edit.

Shotpoint Break
Double-clicking one of the entries copies it to the Shotpoint Break Entry
box where you may edit it. If more than seven entries are present, then
a scroll bar appears.
Note that both single- and double-clicking a mask entry highlights its
associated entries in the Line Identification Textual Mask A, Line
Identification Textual Mask B, Increment, Base, and Distance Break
windows.

Shotpoint Break Entry

Allows you to edit a Shotpoint Break entry. Click Apply when you have
completed the edit.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Line Resampling 734

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Surface Intersection

The Surface Intersection operation finds the point of intersection

between a subsurface geologic structure and present day topography.
The input data are the two surface grids, and the output is a vertex file
which marks the intersection line of the two grids.
Surface intersection is most commonly used to map two surfaces with
baselapping or truncating relationships. For an outcrop, Surface
Intersection can find the intersection point between the subsurface rock
unit and the present day horizon. For a subcrop, Surface Intersection can
find the intersection of two subsurface rock units, one of which is an
unconformity.
Another application is finding the point where a fluid contact intersects
a reservoir rock unit. Still another application is a quality control
function. Suppose that you have generated two grids having the same
AOI, each grid using data from a seismic dataset. If the surfaces are
known to be non-intersecting and the grids do in fact intersect, there are
two main sources of the error: 1) a horizon has been misinterpreted, or
2) a grid has been allowed to flex or extrapolate too much. This quality
control option is an alternative to subtracting one grid from another and
running Grid Statistics. If the Maximums and Minimums of both grids
have the same sign (for example all of the Mins are negative or all of the
Mins are positive), the grids do not intersect.
In order for a line to be created, the two grids must cross. Therefore,
when creating lines of outcrop or subcrop, you want to use the crossing
grids (before MAX/MIN or BLANKMAX/BLANKMIN operations are
applied to the grids to baselap or truncate them).

R2003.12.0 Operations: Surface Intersection 735

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Surface Intersection Dialog Box Options

Input Grid 1
This is one of the grids that are used as input for Surface Intersection.
Their order is not important. Select a grid from the list that appears,
which lists the grids stored in the currently attached MFDs.

Input Grid 2
This the second of two grids that are used as input for Surface
Intersection. The grid order is not important. Select a grid from the list
that appears, which lists the grids stored in the currently attached MFDs.

Output Vertex File

The Output Vertex file contains the line of intersection, if any, between
the two grids. Supply a file name in the box.

Output Vertex File Master File

Select an output MFD for storing the output vertex file.

R2003.12.0 Operations: Surface Intersection 736

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Macros

Overview
In addition to standard Z-MAP Plus commands, you can execute ZCL
macros from Z-MAP Plus. A macro is a collection of ZCL processes
packaged so you can call and execute them as a group. The macros are
fully described in the Macro Reference Manual for Z-MAP Plus / ZCL.
You can execute only macros that have already been written: The
Macros menu does not have a dialog box for creating macros. The
directory used to store macros must be specified in the Directory Paths
for Macro Files (described on page 115). A macro can be executed only
if its name ends with .ZCLMAC.
Macros are organized into the following groups.

User Macros
Lists user created macros from the user macro directory.
When you select User Macros, the SELECT a MACRO Dialog box
appears. The SELECT a MACRO dialog box lists the macros located in
the directories specified in the Directory Paths: Macro dialog box. Only
macros whose names end with .ZCLMAC appear in the list.

R2003.12.0 Macros: Overview 737

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

If no macros are found when you select the User Macros option, an
error message like the following one appears.

If this message appears even though macros are available, check to

make sure the following requirements are met:
The Directory Paths: Macros dialog box setting specifies the
directory or directories that contain the macros.
The extension used for the macro name is .ZCLMAC.
The macros listed in the following groups are documented in detail in
the Macro Reference Manual for Z-MAP Plus / ZCL.

Quick-look
The Quick-look macros are shown in the following illustration:

R2003.12.0 Macros: Overview 738

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Graphics
The Operations macros are shown in the following illustration.

Operations
The Operations macros are shown in the following illustration.

R2003.12.0 Macros: Overview 739

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Geophysics
The Geophysics macros are shown in the following illustration.

Utilities
The Utilities macros are shown in the following illustration.

R2003.12.0 Macros: Overview 740

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Execute Macro
The EXECUTE MACRO dialog box allows you to supply all of the
parameter values required by the macro you selected and then to execute
that macro. Defaults set in the macro can be viewed when working with
the Macro Parameter menus. These dialog boxes are dynamically built
from information in the macro. Because of this, the order, names, and
information in the dialog boxes are directly related to the quality of
macro construction.
When you select a macro, the system window gives a brief description
of the macro, its input needs, and result, and the EXECUTE MACRO
dialog box appears.

This is an example of the EXECUTE MACRO dialog box for the

GEOSORT macro. The first button sets the macro parameters to
defaults; the second button allows you to set the parameter values for
yourself. If you choose to specify parameter values manually, a series of
dialog boxes appears and prompts you to specify the values. Each option
is described in more detail in the following topics.
Many Z-MAP Plus operations run macros. You can always tell if the
operation is running a macro when the EXECUTE MACRO dialog
appears.
To learn more about the parameters for a macro, select Help
Online Manuals Macro Manual, then select the name of the macro
from the alphabetical list provided.

R2003.12.0 Macros: Execute Macro 741

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Fill in Macro Parameter Defaults

When you select this option, the defaults that were built into the macro
are displayed with each macro parameter. To view the defaults, select
View Parameter Panels.
If no default appears for a parameter, then the macro writer did not
provide one. If there is no default, and you do not supply a value, the
ZCL default for that parameter will be used.

View Parameter Panels, Change/Assign Parameter Values

Choosing this option starts the display of parameter menus for the
selected macro. These menus are dynamically built from information in
the macro. Once you start reviewing these menus, you must step through
all of them. However, there is a backup button which you can use to go
back as many panels as you want. You can step through them as many
times as you like. On each menu, select items and fill in parameter
values just as if you were working with a standard Z-MAP Plus option.
If you have not already selected Fill in Macro Parameter Defaults, the
defaults will not appear on the panels. However, they will be used.
Menus with lists of selectable items (such as data or grids) are derived
from the current OpenWorks project, MFDs, or ZGFs. Typically, a
description of the selected item appears in the Z-MAP Plus window
status area. If the macro does not write prompts, status area information
does not appear. If this happens, you must know the purpose of the list,
based on your understanding of the macro, or review a listing of the
macro. To locate the macro, look at the Directory Paths: Macro dialog
box setting.
Parameter value menus have the parameters arranged in the order they
appear in the macro. You either enter the parameter values or select
them from lists.

R2003.12.0 Macros: Execute Macro 742

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

CARM

Overview
The CARM (Computer Aided Reservoir Management) menu contains
the following items:
Volumetrics
Reservoir Envelope Volumetrics
Surface Correction
Water Saturation Averaging
Area/Depth Plot
Quick Volumetrics (2 Polygons)
Quick Volumetrics (40 Polygons)

Volumetrics
Use volumetrics to compute areas and volumes from a grid. Volumes
are computed by intersecting the grid limits of the input grid with the
input polygons that define the areas for which volumes are calculated.

Reservoir Envelope Volumetrics

Lets you execute the ENVELOPE macro. This macro allows you to
produce net hydrocarbon pore thickness grids and to perform quick,
visual, reportable results for HC volumetrics for a prospect or field.

R2003.12.0 CARM: Overview 743

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Surface Correction
Executes the SURFCORRECT macro. SURFCORRECT offers a way
of correcting a surface or of conformably merging a surface with a set
of new well picks. Using residual correction techniques,
SURFCORRECT ties a grid to new well data. SURFCORRECT outputs
a corrected grid, optional quality control data files, and optional maps
and cross sections, all of which can be assembled into a presentation
quality montage (composite map).

Water Saturation Averaging

Create a grid depicting the average water saturation of a reservoir using
porosity information and the height of the reservoir above the oil water
contact.

Area/Depth Plot
Runs volumes by slice increment on a surface and converts the output
into a line suitable for plotting on a plot of area versus depth. Volumes
for each increment can also be plotted.

Quick Volumetrics (2 Polygons)

Produces quick volumetrics printouts for each polygon/grid
combination.

Quick Volumetrics (40 Polygons)

Computes quick volumetrics for a full range of polygons and grids and
produces a set of printouts for each polygon/grid combination.

R2003.12.0 CARM: Overview 744

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Volumetrics
Volumetrics is designed to compute areas and volumes from a grid.
Input to this subtask is:
a grid (normally of thickness)
a value for a base plane (normally zero)
one or more polygons that define the areas for which volumes are
desired (for example, lease block boundaries)

Volumes are then calculated between the grid and the base plane and in
each polygon.
Additional controls allow you to specify:
whether faults are used
to save the results to a file
to define area and volume scale factors for units conversion
optionally to calculate the grid surface (undulating) area
to define incremental adjustments for the base plane
to use grids or polygons to define additional areal constraints

R2003.12.0 CARM: Volumetrics 745

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

How Volumes Are Computed

First the property polygons are intersected with the AOI limits of the
grid, replacing portions of the property polygons that lie outside the grid
with the grid edge. Output from the process is intersected with the
constraint polygons (if used), creating the final composite polygons
that define the areas common to the property and constraint polygons.
For a given composite polygon, volumes are calculated on a grid cell by
grid cell basis. A square column with a flat base and continuous surface
top is formed over each grid cell that lies either totally or partially inside
the composite polygon. The smooth top is formed by fitting a
mathematical surface to the 16 grid nodes surrounding the grid cell.
Then using calculus, the volume of the column is computed exactly and
added to a total volume accumulator. If a cell is intersected by the
composite polygon (half inside and half outside), then only the portion
inside the polygon is computed and added to the accumulator.
Calculating volumes for cells intersected by the property polygon is
done by creating a series of trapezoids. Since a polygon is a series of
straight line segments, each segment in a cell forms a side of a trapezoid.
The opposite side of the trapezoid is the edge of the cell. The other two
sides are lines normal to the cell edge. They connect the cell edge to the
ends of the polygon line segment. Calculus is applied to each of the
individual trapezoids and the results are added to the volume
accumulator. The trapezoids cover only the area inside the polygon.
With slightly more complex application of this technique, volumes for
polygons that lie entirely within a grid cell can be calculated.
If faults have been selected, two sets of trapezoids are calculated one
for each side of the fault. Only the nodes on the same side as the
trapezoid being integrated are used to define the trapezoids
mathematical surface.
If constraint grids are used, the contour level that defines the boundary
for that grid is contoured similarly to the Contouring subtask by using a
very fine smoothness for the contour. Since contours are also strings of
connected straight line segments, the trapezoid technique used for the
composite polygons can be used. The area of the grid cell that is above
the contour level is integrated. The contour line, composite polygon, and
faults together create a very large number of very small trapezoids. The
volume of each is calculated and added to the accumulator.
When all cells have been tested against the composite polygon a report
is written to the screen and, optionally, to a file.

R2003.12.0 CARM: Volumetrics 746

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Volumetrics Report
VOLUMETRICS REPORT 22-SEP -90 13:43

----------------------------------------------------------------------
BODY (SURFACE) NAME ...............: THICK NEW X/Y INC
PROPERTY POLYGON FILE .............: ENTIRE GRID AOI
PROPERTY POLYGON ID ...............: 1
PROPERTY POLYGON CENTROID COORDS...: ( 2631000.0000 , 668000.00000)
FAULT FILE ........................:
1ST CONSTRAINT POLYGON ............:
2ND CONSTRAINT POLYGON ............:
1ST CONSTRAINT GRID ...............:
2ND CONSTRAINT GRID ...............:
Baseplane LEVEL ..................: 0.000000000000E+00
SLICE INCREMENT (ZINC) ............: 0.000000000000E+00
VOLUME (AREA) SCALE FACTOR ........: 1.00000000 (1.0000000)
PROPERTY POLYGON AREA IN(OUT) AOI : 108000000.000 (0.000000000E+0)
UNRECOVERABLE NULL AREA ...........: 0.000000000000E+00
AREA OF COMPOSITE POLYGON (NET) ...: 108000000.000
POSITIVE AREA ( NEGATIVE AREA ) ...: 93093937.7975 (14906062.2025)
SURFACE AREA ......................:
POSITIVE SURFACE AREA (NEGATIVE SA):
POSITIVE VOLUME (NEGATIVE VOLUME)..: 503340474.589 (11066788.2448)
NET VOLUME ........................: 492273686.344

Explanation of Terms Used in the Volumetrics Report

Body (Surface) Name Name of the required input grid for which
volumes were calculated.
Property Polygon File Name of optional vertex file containing
polygons for which volumes were calculated. If no file is input this
defaults to area of the grid (GRID AOI).
Property Polygon ID Numeric ID of the specific polygon on the
Property Polygon File that this volumes report represents.
Property Polygon Centroid Coords The x,y coordinates of the
centroid of the input polygon. These are the average of all X coordinates
and average of all Y coordinates of the polygon.
Fault File Name of the optional fault file to use when calculating
volumes for input grid.
1st Constraint Polygon Name of an optional Constraint Polygon
file. Only the first polygon in this file is used. This is intersected with
each polygon in the Property Polygon file. New polygons are created
and are used as the property polygons.

R2003.12.0 CARM: Volumetrics 747

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

2nd Constraint Polygon Name of another optional Constraint

Polygon file.
1st Constraint Grid Name of an optional Constraint Grid. This grid
is contoured at a level you specify. Only the grid areas above that level
has volumes from the input grid calculated. The drawn contour works
essentially like a Constraint Polygon.
2nd Constraint Grid Name of another optional Constraint Grid.
Base Plane Level Number that represents the level (horizontal plane)
above or below which volumes are calculated. Volumes are positive if
they are above this level (and below the Input Grid) and are negative if
they are below this level and above the grid.
Slice Increment (ZINC) Number that represents the increment to
use for raising or lowering the base plane. A new volume is calculated
for the polygon for each new base plane. The base plane is moved
towards the Limit plane you specify.
Volume (Area) Scale Factor Number used to convert from the X, Y,
and Z units of the grid to desired units for the calculated volumes.
Volume results were multiplied by this number. (Area) Number used to
convert from the X and Y units of the grid to desired units for the
calculated areas. Area results were multiplied by this number.
Property Polygon Area In(Out) AOI The total area of the property
polygon inside the limits of the grid. (Out) The total area of the property
polygon outside the limits of the grid.
Unrecoverable Null Area Area of ZNONs (null data areas) inside
the property polygon for which volumes were not calculated. ZNONs in
the constraint grids create an Unrecoverable Null Area, just as they do
when found in the Input Grid.
Area Of Composite Polygon (Net) Area of the grid as projected
onto the base plane that was not unrecoverable ZNON, was inside the
property polygon, and within any restrictions related to constraint
polygons or grids. (NET) A similar area but multiplied by the Area Scale
Factor.

R2003.12.0 CARM: Volumetrics 748

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Positive Area (Negative Area) Area of the grid as projected onto the
base plane that was not unrecoverable ZNON, was inside the property
polygon, within any restrictions related to constraint polygons or grids,
and that represents positive volumes (grid that is above the base plane).
(Negative Area) is a similar area but representing negative volumes
(grid that is below base plane).
Surface Area Area of the grid (the undulating or actual grid surface
area) that was not unrecoverable ZNON, was inside the property
polygon, and within any restrictions related to constraint polygons or
grids.
Positive Surface Area (Negative SA) Area of the grid (the
undulating or actual grid surface area) that was not unrecoverable
ZNON, was inside the property polygon, within any restrictions related
to constraint polygons or grids, and that represents positive volumes.
(Negative SA) is a similar area but representing negative volumes.
Positive Volume (Negative Volume) Volume of the grid that is
above the base plane, below the Input Grid, inside the property polygon,
and within any restrictions related to constraint polygons or grids.
(Negative Volume) Volume of the grid that is below the base plane,
above the Input Grid, inside the property polygon, and within any
restrictions related to constraint polygons or grids.
Net Volume Volume of the grid that is between the base plane and
the Input Grid (regardless of whether it is above or below either), inside
the property polygon, and within any restrictions related to constraint
polygons or grids.

Volumetrics Dialog Box Options

Input Grid
From the list of grids presented, click a grid to use as an input grid. The
input grid is used as the control grid when the subtask executes.
Normally this grid is an isochore bounded above by the top structure,
upper fluid contact and any overlying unconformities, and bounded
below by the base structure, lower fluid contact, and the next lower
unconformity. However, any grid is eligible for input.

R2003.12.0 CARM: Volumetrics 749

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Select Faults
If you are building surfaces cut by faults, select a fault file from the list
of fault files presented. If you use faults, grid nodes are calculated by
using only the data located on the same side of the faults as the node. To
be available for this subtask, a fault file must have been previously
constructed.
When faults are used, the mathematical surface model that is integrated
is calculated using only grid nodes located on the same side of the faults
as the cell for which the model is being defined. If the grid cell being
mathematically modeled straddles a fault then two models are built, one
for each side of the fault and each using appropriate grid nodes.
The original faulted structure surfaces used to derive the isochore
typically has faults with gaps between the up-side traces and low-side
traces. If nodes in those gaps are ZNON, the isochore in those areas are
also ZNON. This is undesirable and produces incorrect (low) volumes.
Try to get Z-values in the gaps that represent the fault plane (face).

Which Faults to Use

Often a different set of faults exists for the structure surface that bounds
the top of the isochore than for the surface that bounds the base of the
isochore. You have several options:
Do not use faults and let the surface be modeled as a continuous
surface over the fault zones. This is feasible when the isochore is
thick and fault throw is small or when only a few faults are
involved. This is also reasonable when the upper fluid contact is
below most or all of the upper surface and the lower fluid contact
is above most or all of the lower surface.
Use the upper surface faults if a lower fluid contact occurs above
all or most of the base surface and the upper fluid contact is above
most or all of the upper surface.
Use the lower surface faults if an upper fluid contact occurs below
all or most of the upper surface and the lower fluid contact is
below most or all of the base.
Merge the fault files from the upper and lower structure surfaces
and use the combined file. This often breaks the surface into areas
too small to be effectively handled by Volumetrics. It also takes a
long time to execute.

R2003.12.0 CARM: Volumetrics 750

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Select Vertex File

Select a vertex (VERT) file from the list presented. When Volumetrics
executes, volumes are calculated for each polygon in this file (to a
maximum of 400). If you do not select a vertex file, Volumetrics
performs these actions: Builds a four-sided polygon by using the X-Y
limits of the input grid, writes the polygon to a temporary vertex file,
places the file in the scratch file, uses that polygon to calculate volumes,
and deletes the temporary file when it finishes.

Output Name and Parameters

You can use this panel to specify the following input values:
name of data file to contain the volumetrics results
MFD or OpenWorks to use for storing the new file
the area and volume scale factors
whether positive volumes (above base plane) and surface area
(area of undulating grid surface projected area is always
calculated)
the base plane
slicing thickness and limit
bounding contours for the two optional constraint grids
The most commonly changed parameters are the data file name and the
area and volume scale factors.

Output Data File Name

Enter the name of the data file to be created. This name can be up to 24
characters long and can contain internal blanks. Results of the
Volumetrics execution are written to this file. If you do not enter a name,
no file is created. Volume results are still printed to the window you
used to start Z-MAP Plus.
Each record of this file contains the volumes for a different polygon in
the input vertices file. The X and Y coordinates of each record
represents the centroid (average X and average Y) of the polygon. These
coordinates are useful for posting the results on a map.

R2003.12.0 CARM: Volumetrics 751

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

The following fields are written to the output vertex file:

Field
Field Name
Number

1 X-COORDINATE
2 Y-COORDINATE
3 SURFACE NAME
4 POLYGON FILENAME
5 POLYGON INDEX
6 BASE PLANE
7 NET AREA
8 NET VOLUME
9 NET SURFACE AREA
10 POSITIVE AREA
11 POSITIVE VOLUME
12 POSITIVE SURFACE AREA
13 NULL AREA
14 SLICE THICKNESS
15 AREA OUTSIDE AOI
16 NEGATIVE VOLUME
17 NEGATIVE AREA
18 NEGATIVE SURFACE AREA
19 VOLUME SCALE FACTOR
20 AREA SCALE FACTOR

A description of these items follows the topic Volumetrics Report on

page 747.

Output File Master File

If you click the parameter box, a popup menu appears, which lists
OpenWorks, the attached MFDs, and the scratch file. Select a location
to use for saving the output file.

R2003.12.0 CARM: Volumetrics 752

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Area Scale
Enter a value that is used to multiply all areas by before they are written
to the screen or an output file. Before this scale factor is applied, the
areas is in terms of the Grids X-coordinate unit times the Y-coordinate
unit. For example, if the grids X and Y coordinates are measured in
feet, the areas before scaling are in square feet. To convert square feet
to acres, you would use an Area Scale of 2.295684E5. Following are
some commonly used Area Scales:

Input Units Area Scale = Output Units

Acre 4.046856E1 Hectare
Acre 4.356 E+4 Foot2
Acre 4.046856E+3 Meter2
Centimeter2 1.550003E1 Inch2
Centimeter2 1.076391E3 Foot2
Foot2 2.295684E5 Acre
Foot2 9.290304E+2 Centimeter2
Foot2 9.290304E2 Meter2
Foot2 1.44 E+2 Inch2
Foot2 9.290304E+4 Millimeter2
Hectare 1.0 E+4 Meter2
Hectare 2.471054E+0 Acre
Hectare 1.076391E+5 Foot2
Hectare 1.0 E+10 Millimeter2
Inch2 6.4516 E+0 Centimeter2
Inch2 6.4516 E4 Meter2
Inch2 6.4516 E+2 Millimeter2
Inch2 6.944444E3 Foot2
Millimeter2 1.076387E4 Foot2
Millimeter2 1.550003E3 Inch2
Mile2 6.4 E+2 Acre
Mile 2.589988E+6 Meter2
Meter2 2.471054E4 Acre
Meter2 1.550003E+3 Inch2
Meter2 1.076391E+1 Foot2
Meter2 1.195990E+0 Yard2
Yard2 8.361274E1 Meter2

R2003.12.0 CARM: Volumetrics 753

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Volume Scale
Enter a value to use for multiplying all volumes before they are written
to the screen or an output file. Before this volume factor is applied, the
volumes are in terms of the Grids X-coordinate unit, times
Y-coordinate unit, times Z-value unit. For example, if the grids X and
Y coordinates are measured in meters, and the Z-value is in feet, the
volumes before scaling are in meters squared feet. To convert this to
barrels, you would use a Volume Scale of 1.9171346E+0. This was
arrived at by:
(M2Ft)(2.471054E4 Acre/M2)(7.758368E+3 Acre-Foot) =
1.9171346E+0
The following table shows some commonly used Volume Scales:

Input Units Volume Scale = Output Units

Acre-Foot 7.758368E+3 Barrel (API)

Acre-Foot 4.356 E+4 Foot3
Acre-Foot 3.258515E+5 Gallon
Acre-Foot 1.233482E+3 Meter3
Barrel (API) 1.288931E4 Acre-Foot
Barrel (API) 1.589873E+5 Centimeter3
Barrel (API) 1.589873E+2 Liter
Barrel (API) 1.589873E1 Meter3
Barrel (API) 5.614583E+0 Foot3
Barrel (API) 4.2 E+1 Gallon
Barrel (API) 9.701999E+3 Inch3
Foot3 1.781076E1 Barrel (API)
Foot3 2.831685E+4 Centimeter3
Foot3 7.480520E+0 Gallon
Foot3 1.728 E+3 Inch3
Foot3 2.831685E+1 Liter
Foot3 2.831685E2 Meter3
Gallon (UK) 1.200950E+0 Gallon (US)
Liter 1.0 E+3 Centimeter3
Liter 1.0 E3 Meter3
Liter 6.289811E3 Barrel (API)
Liter 3.531466E2 Foot3

R2003.12.0 CARM: Volumetrics 754

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Input Units Volume Scale = Output Units

Liter 2.614720E1 Gallon
Liter 6.102373E+1 Inch3
Meter3 1.0 E+6 Centimeter3
Meter3 1.0 E+3 Liter
Meter3 8.107131E4 Acre-Foot
Meter3 6.289811E+0 Barrel (API)
Meter3 3.531466E+1 Foot3
Meter3 2.641720E+2 Gallon
Meter3 6.102376E+4 Inch3
Meter3 1.307951E+0 Yard3

Following are some commonly used length scales:

Input Units Length Scale = Output Units

Foot 3.048 E1 Meter

Foot 3.048 E+1 Centimeter
Inch 2.540 E2 Meter
Inch 2.540 E+0 Centimeter
Yard 9.144 E1 Meter
Mile (US statute) 1.609344E+3 Meter
Mile (US statute) 1.609344E+0 Kilometer
Mile (US statute) 5.280 E+3 Foot
Meter 3.937008E+1 Inch
Meter 3.280840E+0 Foot
Meter 1.093613E+0 Yard
Meter 6.213712E4 Mile (US statute)
Kilometer 6.213712E1 Mile (US statute)

R2003.12.0 CARM: Volumetrics 755

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Volume to Compute
Use the Volume to Compute to control which volumes are calculated.
These volumes are measured as being above or below the Base Plane
and between the Base Plane and the Input Grid. If your input grid is an
isochore and your Base Plane value is zero, the only volumes that make
sense to use are the Positive Volumes. Net Volumes are almost never of
any use. Possible choices for this parameter include:
Positive+Net (default value) Output both POSITIVE and NET
volumes. Positive Volumes are those volumes above the Base
Plane and below the Input Grid. Net Volumes are the volumes
below the Base Plane and above the Input Grid (Negative
Volumes), subtracted from the Positive Volumes.
Net Only Output only NET volumes. Net Volumes are the
volumes below the Base Plane and above the Input Grid (Negative
Volumes), subtracted from the volumes above the Base Plane and
below the Input Grid (Positive Volumes).

Calculate Surface Area?

Controls whether the area of the grid in each polygon is calculated. This
is the area of the undulating grid surface, not the area projected onto the
Base Plane (polygon area). The area is only calculated where a surface
can be calculated, which means ZNON areas are not included. This area
is broken into two areas: the area above the Base Plane (Positive Surface
Area) and the area below the Base Plane (Negative Surface Area).
Calculating this area takes considerable time, and the results are often
used for specific engineering applications, not for standard volumetrics
studies.
Possible choices for this parameter include:
Surface Area. Calculate the surface area of the grid in each polygon.
No Surface Area (default). Do not calculate the surface area of the grid
in each polygon.

R2003.12.0 CARM: Volumetrics 756

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Base Plane Value

Enter a value that represents the level of a horizontal plane used to
define volumes. Volumes above this plane and below the Input Grid are
called positive volumes. Volumes below this plane and above the Input
Grid are called negative volumes. If the Input Grid is an Isochore, this
value is typically zero. The default value is zero.
When you work with a top of structure grid and a horizontal fluid
contact, you may set this value to the elevation of the fluid contact. In
this case, the volume of gross rock below the top of structure (Input
Grid) and above the fluid contact (Base Plane) are the positive volumes.

Slice Thickness
Enter a value to use for incrementally raising the Base Plane when
calculating volumes above the Base Plane and below the Input Grid.
This defaults to 0, which means no incremental adjustments are made.
When this parameter is active, incremental Base Plane adjustments are
made and multiple volumes are calculated up to the level specified in the
parameter Slice Limit. If you do not change the Value of Slice Limit,
then nothing happens. If you enter a negative value for Slice Thickness,
it is made positive before it is used. To move down rather than up, set
Slice Limit lower than Base Plane Value.
The first volume is above the Base Plane and below the Input Grid (Slice
#1 in figure). The second volume is above the Base Plane plus one slice
increment and below the Input Grid (Slice #2 in figure). The process is
repeated for each additional slice.
----------------------------------------
|
*| * |--- (Slice Increment)
*| | * |
-----------*--|--|------*---------------(Base Plane/Slice #3)
* | | * |
* | |Slice #2 * |--- (Slice Increment)
* | | * |
------*-------|--------------*----------(Base Plane/Slice #2)
* | * |
* Slice #1| * |--- (Slice Increment)
* | * |
--*------------------------------*------(Base Plane/Slice #1)
* *

Slicing is of little value if the input grid represents thickness. It is

typically used only if the input grid represents structure and the results
have some engineering, reservoir planning, or mining significance.

R2003.12.0 CARM: Volumetrics 757

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Slice Limit
Enter a value that represents the upper level to which slicing is to go.
The default value is 0. This must be changed in order for the Slice
Thickness parameter to have an effect. If this number is less than the
Base Plane value, Slicing causes the Base Plane to move downward.
Scroll up for figure.

Bound for Constraint Grid 1 or 2

Enter a value that represents the constraint contour level to use with
Constraint Grid 1 or 2. The portion of the grid above (within) this level
defines the area over which volumes are calculated. Areas in which the
Constraint grids node values are below this contour level are excluded
from the calculated volumes. The default value is zero.

How the Bound Level Is Used

The Volumetrics subtask can be thought of as contouring the constraint
grid at this level, saving that contour, turning the contour into one or
more polygons, and using the polygon(s) as constraints for limiting
volumes. If the contour intersects the edge of the grid, the edge is used
as part of the generated polygon.

Input Constraint Grid 1 or 2

Select a grid from the list presented. This input grid is used when the
subtask executes. This grid is used as Constraint Grid 1 or 2 when
Volumetrics executes. If you do not select a grid (None - use no file), no
grid constraint is applied. The default setting is no constraint grid.
Faults cannot be used with constraint grids. Constraint Grids must have
the same X and Y limits and increments as the Input Grid. If a ZNON
exists in the Constraint Grid, Volumetrics tries to calculate a
replacement value for the ZNON by using neighboring node values.
ZNONs can be replaced about one grid cell into ZNON areas, although
this depends on which of the surrounding nodes have values.

R2003.12.0 CARM: Volumetrics 758

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

How Constraint Grid is Used

A contour is generated from this grid at the level defined by the Bound
for Constraint Grid parameter (see Output Name and Parameters). The
portion of this grid above (within) that level defines the area over which
volumes are calculated. The Volumetrics subtask contours this grid at
the bound level, saves the contour, turns that contour into one or more
polygons, and uses the polygon(s) as constraints for limiting volumes.
For example, lets say you calculate volumes for a thickness grid only
where porosity values are greater than 15%, and use the porosity grid as
a constraint grid.

Input Constraint Polygon 1 or 2

Select a vertex (VERT) file from the list presented. When Volumetrics
executes, the first polygon in this file is used as Constraint Polygon 1 or
2. If more than one polygon exists on the vertex file, the first polygon is
used. If no vertex file is selected (None - use no file), then no Polygon
Constraints are applied. The default setting for this parameter is no
Constraint Polygon.
Volumetrics automatically closes constraint polygons. This means the
first vertex of the polygon is connected to its last vertex. Digitize the
polygon or add points to control the polygons final shape. Mappers
often digitize a map from one edge to the other, then stop. As a result, a
closing line is drawn back across the map. It is usually better to digitize
across the map, then digitize around (slightly outside of) the border until
you are near the starting point. Be careful the digitized polygon does not
cross over itself and cause an hour-glass polygon (sometimes called
butterfly or double polygon) to form when the polygon is closed.

How Constraint Polygon is Used

The Constraint Polygon (or both Constraint Polygons) is intersected
with each polygon in the file selected by the parameter Input Vertices
(property Polygons). The area common to the property polygon and the
Constraint Polygons becomes the new property polygon for Volume
calculations. Volumes are calculated only inside these polygons.

R2003.12.0 CARM: Volumetrics 759

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Reservoir Envelope Volumetrics

This option lets you execute the ENVELOPE macro. This macro
enables you to produce net hydrocarbon pore thickness grids and to
perform quick, visual, reportable results for HC volumetrics for a
prospect or field.
For more information about this macro, select Help
Online Manuals Macros Manual, then locate the ENVELOPE
topic.
Macro Name ENVELOPE

Macro Type .ZCLMAC

Purpose The purpose of this macro is to produce net hydrocarbon pore thickness
grids and to perform quick, visual, reportable results for HC
volumetrics for a prospect or field.

Description The macro analyzes a two phase reservoir system using basic grid file
and numerical input. Quick turnaround and accurate results make this
work flow ideal for use in sensitivity analysis.

Results The output of the macro consists of a montaged picture for each phase,
showing the following elements:
a Gross Rock Volume Isochore for each HC zone that can display
disconformities
a Net Hydrocarbon Volume Isochore posted with information as in
the map described above
a map with the primary polygon Net HC Volumes Posted, with
units
a map with the secondary polygon Net HC Volumes Posted, with
units

R2003.12.0 CARM: Reservoir Envelope Volumetrics 760

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Surface Correction
Use the Surface Correction option to execute the SURFCORRECT
macro. This macro offers a way of correcting a surface or of
conformably merging a surface with a set of new well picks. Using
residual correction techniques, SURFCORRECT ties a grid to new well
data. SURFCORRECT outputs a corrected grid, optional quality control
data files, and optional maps and cross sections, all of which can be
assembled into a presentation quality montage (composite map).
For more information about this macro, select Help
Online Manuals Macros Manual, then locate the SURFCORRECT
topic.
Macro Name SURFCORRECT

Macro Type .ZCLMAC

Description You can restrict the area of the surface to be modified by the new well
data using one of four modes:
Use default gridding to distribute the change in the surface over the
entire area (MMETHOD = DEFAULT GRIDDING).
Specify a radius of influence around the selected well data
(MMETHOD = SYNTHESIZED DATA + RADIUS).
Use one or more closed polygons to specify where you want to
change the surface grid (MMETHOD = SYNTHESIZED DATA +
POLYGON).
Use a correction grid that you build independently of the macros
execution (MMETHOD = INPUT GRID).

Results The primary output of this macro is a new grid that shows how the new
wells affect the surface. Optional output includes quality control data
files that you can save to an MFD of your choice. SURFCORRECT
also creates maps and cross sections of its results.

R2003.12.0 CARM: Surface Correction 761

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Water Saturation Averaging

When a geoscientist undertakes a complex task such as equity
determination, certain assumptions of simple reservoir models become
less satisfactory. The assumption that the oil-water-contact (OWC) in a
reservoir marks an abrupt separation of oil and water is a case in point.
The Water Saturation Averaging operation models the transition zone
that exists at the OWC due to the ability of oil and water to mix in the
presence of solids.
Water Saturation Averaging creates a grid of the reservoirs average
water saturation based on:
1. the porosity of the reservoir rock
2. the height of the reservoir above the OWC
3. a model in the form of a series of J-curves that reveal the way
Water Saturation depends on the two previous variables.
Using a Porosity Curve file as input, this operation produces a
temporary, intermediate grid of water saturation as a function of
porosity and height above the OWC. This intermediate grid serves as
input to the final gridding process.
The final grid shows average water saturation throughout the reservoir
using the following grids as input:
the intermediate grid
formation structure grids
formation porosity grid

R2003.12.0 CARM: Water Saturation Averaging 762

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Requirements for Performing Water Saturation Averaging

You must supply the following input values:
description of the formation structure using either formation top
and bottom grids or a formation midpoint grid
description of the lateral porosity variations using a formation
porosity grid
name of the porosity curve data file that describes how the water
saturation of the formation varies with porosity and height above
the OWC. This file can be either a contour (CNTR) or a profile
(DATA) file
water saturation at the OWC. The default is 1.0
name of the intermediate grid and the target MFD or OpenWorks
to use for storing it
name of the output water saturation average grid and the target
MFD or OpenWorks to use for storing it
The input grid files that describe the structure and porosity of the
formation of interest must have the same area of interest (AOI) and
gridding parameters (XMIN, XMAX, YMIN, YMAX, XINC, YINC).

Units for Input Data

The porosity in the input porosity curve file and in the input porosity grid file
must be in the same units (either percentage or decimal).
The elevation of the formation top and bottom must be expressed as height,
increasing upward, or negative depth, NOT as positive depth, increasing
downward. I.e. 400 is below 500, and -900 is below -700.

R2003.12.0 CARM: Water Saturation Averaging 763

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Water Saturation Averaging Dialog Box Options

Formation Grids (Formation Structure)

You can use one of two grid structures to describe the structure of the
formation:
Top/Bottom Formation Grid
Formation Midpoint Grid

Formation Top/Bottom Grid Input Option

Using a top and bottom grid produces more precise results.

Top
If you click the Top parameter, a list of grids in the attached MFDs or
OpenWorks appears. Select a grid to be the top grid of the reservoir
structure.

R2003.12.0 CARM: Water Saturation Averaging 764

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Bottom
If you click the Bottom parameter, a list of grids in the attached MFDs
or OpenWorks appears. Select a grid to be the bottom grid of the
structure.

Formation Midpoint Grid Input Option

Use the Midpoint Grid option to select one midpoint grid from a list of
grids contained on the attached MFDs or OpenWorks. This method is
less precise than the Top/Bottom method.

Formation Porosity Grid

A Formation Porosity grid describes lateral porosity variations in the
formation. Porosity values may be input as percentages or as decimals.
If you click the Formation Porosity Grid parameter, a list of grids on the
attached MFDs or OpenWorks appears. Select a grid to use as the
formation porosity grid of the structure.

Porosity Curves
Porosity curve (J-curve) data may be stored on either a contour file or
a profile file. There are two acceptable formats for contour files. See
File Structures on page 851.
Profile files must contain:
X-field (water saturation)
Y-field (height above the OWC)
Z-field (porosity)
Line ID field (must have a different number for each consecutive
constant porosity curve)

Water Saturation at OWC

The value for water saturation at the OWC should match the lower ends
of the input porosity curves. The grid is constrained to this water
saturation value at the OWC elevation. The default is 1.0.

Elevation at OWC
The elevation at OWC is the Y value of elevation of the OWC for either
the top and bottom formation grids or the midpoint formation grid. If the
formation is defined in height above the OWC, the Elevation at OWC is
zero. The default setting is 0.0.

R2003.12.0 CARM: Water Saturation Averaging 765

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Intermediate Grid Porosity Increment

The intermediate grid porosity increment is the distance in the X
(Porosity) direction across the grid cell. A good value is the porosity
interval between adjacent porosity curves. The default setting is 0.01.

Intermediate Grid Height Increment

The intermediate grid height increment is the distance in the Y (Height)
direction across the grid cell. The function curves sharply due to height,
especially near the OWC. As a result, a small increment is
recommended, resulting in a large number of grid rows. The default
setting is 1.0.

Intermediate [Check] Grid Output File Name

This is the file name for the output intermediate grid.

Examining the Intermediate Grid

Examine this grid carefully to see if it models the water saturation as a function
of porosity and height to your satisfaction. The intermediate grid is essential to
achieve the results you need. If it is not satisfactory, try again, adjusting the
intermediate grids height and porosity increments.

Intermediate Grid Master File

This is the name of the target MFD or OpenWorks to use for storing the
output intermediate grid.

Average Water Saturation Output File Name

This output grid is an average of water saturation for the formation of
interest. Each grid value represents the water saturation averaged by
integration vertically over the interval from the reservoir bottom
(formation bottom or OWC) to the reservoir top (formation top).

Average Water Saturation Output Master File

Specify the name of the target MFD or OpenWorks to use for storing the
output average water saturation grid.

R2003.12.0 CARM: Water Saturation Averaging 766

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Area/Depth Plot
This option checks the results of the volumetrics task as compared to
volumetrics results arrived at by hand. This macro runs volumes by slice
increment on a surface and converts the output to a line suitable for
plotting on an area versus depth plot.
The input depth grid is scaled to a negative value, then biased by a value
you specify. The volume of the grid covered by the polygon area is then
calculated using the following values that you supply:
volume and area scaling factors
slice limit
increment

You are asked to input:

the GRID file on which volumetrics is calculated
an optional fault (FALT) file
the polygon vertex (VERT) file defining the area for the
volumetrics calculation
bias to move grid up or down
volume and area scaling factors (optional)
slice limit for end of volumes and slice increment
The resulting file is converted to a vertex file and is used to produce a
picture plotting the area versus depth. Area/Depth plot produces a vertex
file that plots the area versus depth. An example follows.

R2003.12.0 CARM: Area/Depth Plot 767

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

This isochore grid is based on true triple point geometry from fault plane
models. The area bounded by the box is processed to generate the area
depth curve.

Area Depth Curve

For more information about this operation, select Help

Online Manuals Macros Manual, then locate the AREA-DEPTH
topic.

R2003.12.0 CARM: Area/Depth Plot 768

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Quick Volumetrics (2 Polygons)

This option provides a quick, although less accurate, estimate of the
volume between the surface represented by the input grid and the flat
surface with the constant z value specified by the baseplane parameter
(BASEPLAN). Volumes are calculated over a region specified by a
polygon or polygons on an input file specified by VERTICES. To
calculate volume, this process multiplies the area of the polygon by the
numeric average of the grid nodes in the polygon.
You are asked to input:
a grid dataset
a vertex file containing up to two polygons
scaling factors

Keep Polygons Within Grid AOI

Quick Volumetrics calculates volume as the average height of the gridded area
with the polygon times the area of the polygon. If part of the polygon reaches
outside the AOI of the grid, this can bias the volume upward. Either clip the
polygons so they describe an area in the grid AOI, or use the full Volumetrics
feature if your polygons extend beyond the AOI to avoid inaccurate results.

This process trades off accuracy for speed. You can increase accuracy
by:
refining your grid to a smaller cell size
making your evaluation polygons adhere to the non-ZNON edges
of the grid being evaluated, e.g. OWC
incorporating a shape factor in the specified scale factor to account
for unusual geometric shapes defined by your surfaces
Quick Volumetrics (2 Polygons) calls the QUICKVOL-TWOPOLS
macro, which in turn executes ZCLs QUICK VOLUMETERICS
process. (For more detailed descriptions of each parameter, select
Help Online Manuals Macro Manual, then locate the
QUICKVOL-TWOPOLS topic.)

R2003.12.0 CARM: Quick Volumetrics (2 Polygons) 769

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Quick Volumetrics (40 Polygons)

This option provides a quick, although less accurate, estimate of the
volume between the surface represented by the input grid and the flat
surface with the constant z value specified by the baseplane parameter
(BASEPLAN). Volumes are calculated in a polygon or polygons on an
input file specified by VERTICES. To calculate volume, this process
multiplies the area of the polygon by the numeric average of the grid
nodes in the polygon.
You are asked to input:
a grid dataset
a vertex file containing up to 40 polygons
scaling factors
baseplane elevation

Keep Polygons Within Grid AOI

Quick Volumetrics calculates volume as the average height of the gridded area
with the polygon times the area of the polygon. If part of the polygon reaches
outside the AOI of the grid, this can bias the volume upward. Either clip your
polygons so they describe an area in the grid AOI, or use the full Volumetrics
feature if your polygons extend beyond the AOI to avoid inaccurate results.

This process trades accuracy for speed, but you can increase accuracy
by:
refining the grid to a smaller cell size
making the evaluation polygons hug the non-ZNON edges of the
grid being evaluated (for example, OWC)
incorporating a shape factor in the scale factor specified in the
macro to account for unusual geometric shapes defined by the
surfaces
Quick Volumetrics (40 Polygons) calls the QUICKVOL-FORTYPOLS
macro, which in turn executes ZCLs QUICK VOLUMETERICS
process. (For more detailed descriptions of the parameters, select
Help Online Manuals Macro Manual, then locate the
QUICKVOL-FORTYPOLS topic.)

R2003.12.0 CARM: Quick Volumetrics (40 Polygons) 770

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Tools

Overview
Use the Tools menu options in the Z-MAP Plus window to perform the
following tasks:
Spawn Unix Process Execute the SPAWN-PROCESS macro,
which enables another program or system command to run in
Z-MAP Plus (next topic).
System Window Create a new Z-MAP Plus System Window
(page 773). This option is useful if you closed the original
Z-MAP Plus System Window.
Process Logging Create a log of your actions in Z-MAP Plus,
written in ZCL format (page 774). Non-ZCL options become
comments in the job stream.
System Switches Control when parameter values are cleared
out (parameter unlocking mode), whether diagnostic messages or
pictures are automatically displayed, and the background color of
the display area (page 776). You can also choose English (in.) or
Metric (cm.) units for text heights and plotter information.
OW Sort Order Specify the order for displaying OpenWorks
files in Z-MAP Plus dialog boxes (page 779).
SIL Debug Print Switch Toggle on or off the debug printouts
in SIL modules (page 780).

R2003.12.0 Tools: Overview 771

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Spawn Unix Process

Executes the SPAWN-PROCESS macro, which spawns a process to
allow another program or system command to run in Z-MAP Plus.
For more information about this macro, see the Macro Reference
Manual for Z-MAP Plus / ZCL.
Macro Name SPAWN-PROCESS

Macro Type .ZCLMAC

Purpose This macro spawns a process to allow another program or system

command to run in Z-MAP Plus. Any Unix executable can be invoked
by SPAWN-PROCESS. For example, awk or nawk edit programs can
be used to reformat files interactively or to create files for export/import
during macro execution.
You can use SPAWN-PROCESS to write data import format statements
on a disk file with the echo system command. Use the spawn process
again to delete them.
If Z-MAP Plus closes unexpectedly, it locks the attached MFDs. One of
the first macros that you write should be to spawn and remove lock files
(.LCK, .lck) from the directory used to store the MFDs.
Z-MAP Plus waits for the command to finish before continuing, unless
it is invoked in the background.

Description You enter a system command. For example, the command could be ls,
cd, rm, mv, or ls - l on a Unix system.

Results The command is executed, then control is returned to Z-MAP Plus.

R2003.12.0 Tools: Spawn Unix Process 772

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

System Window
The Z-MAP Plus System Window menu contains the following options:
Raise
Log Output
Always On Top

Raise
Raise moves the system window to the top or deiconifies it if it has been
iconified.
To execute the Raise option, select System Window Raise or click
the Raise System Window icon shown at the left.

Log Output
Log Output allows you to write system window output to a file.This
option is useful because it allows you to create a permanent record of the
output of a Z-MAP Plus process.

Always On Top
Always On Top allows you to set the system window so that it is
displayed on top of the Main Window.

R2003.12.0 Tools: System Window 773

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Process Logging
You can create a file (log) that keeps a record of what you do in a
Z-MAP Plus sessions. When Process Logging is turned on, all the
options you execute in Z-MAP Plus are written to a text file. They are
written as ZCL processes with all the parameters written for each
process. Only those Z-MAP Plus options that are executed are logged.
Therefore, if you Cancel a process, that process is not logged. Once
logging is turned on, it continues until you turn it off. If Process Logging
is turned on when you exit Z-MAP Plus, when you restart Z-MAP Plus
the logging continues to the same file. You can point to an old Process
Log file or any other text file and append more process information.
With modifications, the logged job stream can be executed as a ZCL
batch job. Of course, the job executes properly only if MFDs, ZGFs,
data files, and pictures used by the logged processes are available and
attached. The logged job stream can be edited like any text file in order
to modify parameter settings, delete processes, or add others.

Extra Parameters
When you create a process log in Z-MAP Plus, some parameters are created
that are not documented as ZCL parameters. These extra parameters affect only
the graphical interface. ZCL ignores the additional parameters.

Some options in Z-MAP Plus do not have equivalent ZCL processes,

such as contour editing. These options and their parameter settings are
also written to the Process Log file. However, these non-ZCL processes
are commented out. Commenting out involves putting a C followed by
a space in the first two columns of the line or an ! anywhere in front of
the information on the line. When executing a process log file, these
commented lines are ignored.

R2003.12.0 Tools: Process Logging 774

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Logging Option
Controls whether Process Logging is turned on or off. Use this switch to
terminate logging, start logging to a new file, or start logging to an old
file. Possible choices for this parameter are:
Terminate Logging (default value) Stops printing information
to the Process Log file. This is the setting to use when you are not
creating a Process Log or wish to stop creating a log.
Begin Logging Starts printing information to a new Process
Log file. This setting creates a new Process Log file or, if the
Process Log file already exists, creates a new version of the file.
Resume Logging Starts printing information to the end of an
existing Process Log file or any other flat (ASCII) file. If this
setting is used and the specified Process Log file does not already
exist, the following error is printed:
THE REQUESTED FILE DOES NOT EXIST
If this happens, enter the correct, existing file. If you do not have a
file, set the parameter value to Begin Logging.

Log File Name

Enables you to enter the name of a file for writing Process Logging
information. You can use any name acceptable to your computer
system. If you do not enter a fully qualified name (such as
dua1:[deh.zcl]picture.log), the program looks for the file in the directory
you used to start Z-MAP Plus. This file is created if Logging Option =
Begin Logging. This file must exist if Logging Option = Resume
Logging. If you point to an already existing file, it must be a standard
ASCII file (the type of file you could edit with a text editor).

R2003.12.0 Tools: Process Logging 775

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

System Switches
You can control certain Z-MAP Plus settings (switches). These settings
control when parameter values are cleared out, whether messages or
pictures are automatically displayed, and the appearance of the picture
background (dark or light) etc. Once a switch is set, it remains set unless
you return to this panel and change it, or you select a Parameter File with
different System Switch settings.

Parameter Unlocking Mode

The Parameters Unlocking Mode controls when parameter values are
automatically unlocked by the program. Unlocking means that the value
you entered for that parameter on the previous use of that process is
removed. In place of the previously used value, standard defaults are
used or calculated for that parameter. Possible choices for this parameter
include:
Automatic (default value) All parameter values revert to default
settings each time you return to a process.
Data All data-dependent parameter values revert to default settings
if you select a new dataset to use. For example XMIN, XMAX, YMIN,
and YMAX revert to default settings if you select a new dataset for Point
Gridding. Parameters that are not data-dependent are not replaced.
Manual All parameter values have the values that were in effect
during the most recent execution of the process. No automatic value
replacement (unlocking) occurs. In this mode, values are changed only
if you change them manually.

Not Active in Tabbed Dialog Boxes

This parameter has no effect in the newer, tabbed dialog boxes. To determine if
you are working in a newer dialog box, press Mouse Button 2. If the Locking/
Unlocking options appear in the MB2 menu, the dialog box is a newer style
dialog box.

R2003.12.0 Tools: System Switches 776

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Diagnostic Messages Displayed

Controls when diagnostic error messages are displayed. Standard error
and other messages are displayed in a Z-MAP Plus message that pops
up at appropriate times. A diagnostic error message is additional
information about an error that will help Landmark assist you in
determining what your problem is. These messages contain subroutine
names and other strange information not normally useful to you.
Diagnostic error messages are written to the Z-MAP Plus message
immediately following a standard error message. A typical message is:
ERROR - COULD NOT GET FIELDS FROM FILE
DIAGNOSTIC ZMAP Plus: ERROR <IBFELD> ON CUGFLD
CALL)
where the first line is the standard error message and the second line is
the diagnostic error message.
The values for the parameter are:
On Diagnostic messages appear if they are available.
Off (default value) Diagnostic messages do not appear.

Display Picture When Opened

Controls whether an old picture is automatically displayed. This
happens if the following conditions are met:
You select an old picture or
You restart Z-MAP Plus and the Parameter File points to a
graphics file and picture displayed at the most recent Z-MAP Plus
exit.
The values for the parameter are:
Yes (default value) Automatically displays a picture whenever
both the ZGF name and existing picture name are made available
to the program.
No Displays a picture only on demandif the display process
is selected.

R2003.12.0 Tools: System Switches 777

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Graphics Background Mode

To toggle the color of the graphics display area from black to white or
back, select Tools System Switches. In the SYSTEM SWITCHES
dialog box, select BLACK or WHITE from the Graphics Background
Mode list. The display area updates immediately to reflect your choice.
You can also toggle the background color by clicking the Toggle
Background Color button, shown at left.

Previewing Map Appearance for Printing

The Graphics Background Mode is useful for previewing hardcopy to see if the
map colors look good against a white background.

None of the colors for items on the picture are changed. Possible choices
for this parameter include:
Black (default value) Make the graphics screen background
dark.
White Make the graphics screen background light.

Units
The Units toggle affects picture and feature measurements, but no other
measurements. You can choose whether the program calculates and
reports distances in Metric units (centimeters) or English units (inches).
If you choose Metric, the UNITSPERINCH scale refers to units per
centimeter.

Graphics Window Configuration

Main (default value) The Z-MAP Plus graphics window and
the Z-MAP Plus main menu appear in one window.
Separate You can separate the Z-MAP Plus graphics window
from the Z-MAP Plus main menu.

Confirm Exit
Yes (default value) A confirmation box appears and prompts
you to confirm that you want to exit from Z-MAP Plus.
No No confirmation box appears before you exit from
Z-MAP Plus.

R2003.12.0 Tools: System Switches 778

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Iconify Console on Macro Execution

No (default value) The console window is not iconified while
macros are executed.
Yes The console window is iconified while macros are
executed.

OW Sort Order
OW Sort Order controls the order in which OpenWorks files are
displayed in input dialog boxes. OW Sort Order only affects the sorting
of OpenWorks dataset lists and does not affect the displaying of MFD
file lists.

Sort Hierarchically by Key Fields

Source List contains the list of fields that appear in an input list dialog
box. As you select fields from the source List, they are placed in the
Destination List. The destination list forms a hierarchal sort order for
files appearing in list dialog boxes.

R2003.12.0 Tools: OW Sort Order 779

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Sort By Date
Allows you to sort the by date. When you select Sort By Date the Source
List and Destination List fields become disabled and the Ascending and
Descending options change to Oldest First and Most Recent First, as
shown below.

SIL Debug Print Switch

The SIL Debug Print Switch enables you turn on the debug print switch.
SIL represents the subroutine interface library.
The Debug SIL Switch toggles the SIL Debug switch. When
Z-MAP Plus starts up, the switch is off. When it is off, an invocation of
this macro turns it on. When it is on, an invocation of this macro turns it
off.
When the switch is on, each SIL module print its input and output
parameters. This information is useful when documenting or searching
for bugs.
This Macro requires no parameters: Click Apply in Z-MAP Plus.

R2003.12.0 Tools: SIL Debug Print Switch 780

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Appendix A.
Graphics Feature Codes

Graphics Feature (Segment Type) Codes

A graphics file is composed of a number of individual pictures, or
maps. Each picture is segmented into graphics features (LGBs), which
contain graphics primitives such as lines, polygons, symbols, and text
strings. The features are useful to identify groups of related graphics
primitives for selective display and editing. CAD programs sometimes
refer to these collections as layers.
The following table lists the feature codes, internal names, and
descriptions of the features (LGBs) defined by Z-MAP Plus. If you
write SIL programs that generate graphics, you need to specify the
graphics feature number when you open a ZIGS graphics feature.
Landmark recommends that you use one of the pre-defined codes from
the following table whenever possible. If you need to add your own
unique graphics feature (LGB) number, the range from 500 to 600 is
reserved for your use.

R2003.12.0 Appendix A. Graphics Feature Codes 781

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Graphics
Feature
Graphics Feature Name Graphics Feature Description
Number

1 BORDERS Borders
2 BORDER LABELS AND TICK MARKS Border labels and tick marks
3 CONTOURS Contours
4 POSTED CONTROL POINTS AND VALUES Posted control points and values
5 POSTED GRID NODES AND VALUES Posted grid nodes and values
6 TEXT Text
7 POLYGON LINES Polygon lines
8 TITLE BLOCK Title block
9 REFERENCE CROSSES AND GRID LINES Reference crosses and grid lines
10 NORTH ARROW North arrow
11 CROSS SECTION TRACES Cross-section traces
12 CROSS SECTION LABELS Cross-section labels
13 CROSS SECTION POSTED WELLS Cross-section posted wells
14 PERSPECTIVE FISHNET Perspective fishnet
15 SEISMIC LINES Seismic lines
16 FAULT TRACES Fault traces
17 RESIN LATTICE RESIN lattice
18 COLORFILLED CONTOURS Colorfilled contours
19 PROFILES Profiles
20 GRID DIP (GRADIENT) ARROWS Grid dip (gradient) arrows
21 RESIN CELL CONTOURS Contours of RESIN cells
22 ALBERTA TOWNSHIP SURVEY POSTING Alberta Township Survey posting/lines
23 TOWNSHIP BASEMAP LINES Township map lines
24 SECTION BOUNDARY LINES Section boundary lines
25 TOPOGRAPHIC DATA Topographic data
26 PERSPECTIVE AXES Perspective axes
27 SEISMIC SECTIONS Seismic sections
28 DEVIATED WELLS Deviated wells
29 AREA OR VOLUME BOUNDARY Area or volume boundary

R2003.12.0 Appendix A. Graphics Feature Codes 782

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Graphics
Feature
Graphics Feature Name Graphics Feature Description
Number

30 COLORFILLED POLYGONS Colorfilled polygons

31 CONTROL POINT DIP (GRAD) ARROWS Control point dip (gradient) arrows
32 INDEX MAP Index map
33 ZIMS FILE HISTORY TREE ZIMS file history tree
34 MAP LEGENDS Map legends
35 CULTURAL LINE FEATURES Cultural line features
36 LEASE BORDERS AND LABELS Lease borders, labels, and lease solid fill to be
stroked out by a pen plotter
37 - 39 Unassigned
40 GRAPHICS MENU Graphics menu
41 PICTURE LIMITS Picture limits
42 NTS BOUNDARIES NTS boundary lines
43 NTS LABELS NTS labels
44 MAP SCALES Map scales
45 - 55 Unassigned
56 Z-3D GRID Z-3D grid mesh
57 Z-3D DEVIATED WELL TRACKS Z-3D deviated well tracks
58 Z-3D DISPLAY BOX Z-3D display box
59 Z-3D ARROW Z-3D orientation arrow
60 Z-3D AXIS ANNOTATION Z-3D axis annotation
61 Z-3D CROSS-SECTION PROFILES Z-3D cross-section profiles
62 Z-3D FENCE ISOCHORE COLORFILL Z-3D FENCE isochore colorfill
63 Z-3D LITHOLOGY PATTERN FILL Z-3D lithology pattern fill
64 Z-3D PANEL POSTS Z-3D panel end posts
65 Z-3D PANEL BASELINES Z-3D panel baselines
66 Z-3D FENCE BASEMAP BORDER Z-3D FENCE map border
67 Z-3D BLOCK ISOCHORE COLORFILL Z-3D BLOCK isochore colorfill
68 - 100 Unassigned
101 LITHOLOGY COLUMNS STRATVIEW lithology columns
102 LOG CURVES STRATVIEW log curves

R2003.12.0 Appendix A. Graphics Feature Codes 783

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Graphics
Feature
Graphics Feature Name Graphics Feature Description
Number

103 LOG ANNOTATION STRATVIEW log annotation

104 WELL TRACES ON BASEMAP STRATVIEW well traces
105 CONFLICT POSTING SYMBOLS STRATVIEW conflict post
106 FAULT LINES STRATVIEW fault lines
107 FAULT POINTS STRATVIEW fault locations
108 GRID PROFILES STRATVIEW grid profile lines
109 LOG LATTICES STRATVIEW log lattices
110 ANALYSIS DATA STRATVIEW analysis data
111 BASELINES ON BASEMAP STRATVIEW baselines
112 HORIZON CROSSINGS STRATVIEW horizon crossings
113 LEGEND FOR HORIZON CROSSINGS STRATVIEW legend of horizon crossings
114 PROJECTION ARROWS STRATVIEW projection arrows
115 DATUM LINE STRATVIEW datum line
116 HORIZON NAME ANNOTATION STRATVIEW horizon name annotation
117 ROCK TYPE ANNOTATION STRATVIEW rock type annotation
118 GRID SURFACE VALUES STRATVIEW grid surface values
119 TOP LINES STRATVIEW top lines
120 COLORFILLED HORIZONS STRATVIEW colorfilled horizons
121 GRID NAME ANNOTATION ON XSECT STRATVIEW grid name annotation
122 WELL HEADERS ON XSECT PLOTS STRATVIEW well header
123 CROSS-SECTION TITLE STRATVIEW cross-section title
124 ROTATED BASEMAP BORDER ON FENCE STRATVIEW rotated border on fence
DIAGRAMS diagrams
125 KB ELEVATION CONNECTIONS STRATVIEW KB/collar elevation line
126 HORIZON LINE CONNECTIONS STRATVIEW horizon lines
127 COLORFILLED LOG CURVES STRATVIEW colorfilled log curves
128 Currently reserved for STRATVIEW
500-600 Reserved for clients use

R2003.12.0 Appendix A. Graphics Feature Codes 784

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Appendix B.
File and Field Codes

Data File Type Codes

File type codes are four-character descriptors that tell the program the
type of information a file contains. The following table lists all the
file type codes used in Landmark geological products and shows which
file types you can import into Z-MAP Plus.

File Code File Type Description Importable

1 GRID Grid values Yes

2 DATA Generic control points data Yes
3 CNTR Contour data Yes
4 FALT Fault traces Yes
5 VERT Line data Yes
6 TEXT Textual data Yes
7 TRIA Trilat triangulation lattice Yes
8 XSEC Cross section Yes
9 SSEC Seismic section Yes
10 WLOG Well log traces Yes
11 DWEL Deviated well data Yes
12 MCRO Macro file Yes
13 LSLT Selected line name file Yes
14 LPST Posted line name file Yes
15 - 19 Unassigned
20 SDEF STRATVIEW default file No
21 SVDR STRATVIEW driver file No
22 LITH STRATVIEW lithology file No
23 CMMT STRATVIEW comment text file No

R2003.12.0 Appendix B. File and Field Codes 785

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

File Code File Type Description Importable

24 LOG STRATVIEW log file No

25 TABL STRATVIEW table file No
26 FTPT STRATVIEW fault point file No
27 CHEM STRATVIEW analysis file No
28 - 30 Unassigned
31 LATT RESIN lattice file No
32 CELL RESIN celltable file (BLOCK) No
33 PCEL RESIN celltable file (POINT) No
34 - 35 Unassigned

R2003.12.0 Appendix B. File and Field Codes 786

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Data Field Type Codes

Unless otherwise specified, real values are stored as single precision.
Alphanumeric fields are limited to a maximum of 80 characters.

Data FORTRAN
Type Data
Code Type Default Field Name Description

1 Real X (EASTING) x coordinate

2 Real Y (NORTHING) y coordinate
3 Real Z VALUE Z-value (data value)
4 Real DZ/DX X-component of the gradient
5 Real DZ/DY Y-component of the gradient
6 Real DZ2/DXDY Cross partial derivative
7 Real X WEIGHT Weight of the x coordinate
8 Real Y WEIGHT Weight of the y coordinate
9 Real Z WEIGHT Weight of the z coordinate
10 Real GRADIENT WEIGHT Weight of the gradient components (Range 0. to 1.)
11 Real Z-VARIATION Noise or inaccuracy variation in Z-value
12 Real LATITUDE * Latitude of the point
13 Real LONGITUDE * Longitude of the point
14 Real SHOTPOINT NUMBER Seismic shotpoint number
15 Real LINEAR DISPLACEMENT Linear displacement measured along the baseline
in a cross section
16 Real TEXT LOCMOD Text registration location (1. lower left,
2. lower right, 3. center of text string)
17 Real TEXT FONT Text font type (1. Plain, 2. Roman Simplex,
3. Roman Complex, 4. Italics, 5. Duplex)
18 Real TEXT SIZE Text character size in inches
19 Real TEXT ANGLE Text rotation angle in degrees counterclockwise
from east
20 Char*80 CHARACTER TEXT Any alphanumeric text, e.g., well name

* South and west coordinates must be entered as negative numbers; minutes should be input as fractions of the
whole (for example, 7020E input as 70.3333). For degrees, minutes, seconds type of input, see Field Type
51 and 52. Latitude/Longitude coordinates cannot be used by most mapping processes; convert to x,y coordi-
nates using the Coordinate Transformation operation.
Currently not used by Landmark geological programs.
Cannot import interactively in Z-MAP Plus.

R2003.12.0 Appendix B. File and Field Codes 787

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Data FORTRAN
Type Data
Code Type Default Field Name Description
21 Real SYMBOL CODE Code of symbol to plot
22 Char*80 LINE NAME Seismic line name or geologic cross-section name
23 Char*80 AREA NAME Seismic area name or any other name identifying a
data group
24 Char*4 RESHOT CHARACTER Reshot points identification
25 Real SEISMIC LINE NUMBER Seismic line number (non-textual)
26 Char*80 WELL TRACK NAME Alphanumeric identifier for a well track
27 Char*80 DEVIATED WELL NAME Alphanumeric identifier for a group of well tracks
or PLATFORM IDENTIFIER drilled from a single platform or well top
28 Char*80 API OR WELL CODE API or other unique alphanumeric code that
identifies the well
29 Real LOG RUN NUMBER Well log run number
30 Real X-FAULT JOINT x coordinate of fault joint
31 Real Y-FAULT JOINT y coordinate of fault joint
32 Real ZL-LEFT SIDE Z-value on left side of fault
33 Real ZR-RIGHT SIDE Z-value on right side of fault
34 Real DELTA Z-THROW Fault throw
35 Real SEG I.D. Fault or line identifier (all vertices for the same line
have the same identifier)
36 Real FAULT BANDWIDTH Width of a fault band
37 Real DIP ANGLE Angle of dip below the horizontal either in degrees
or radians
38 Real DIP AZIMUTH ANGLE Azimuth angle in degrees or radians of the
direction of dip clockwise from north
39 Real VOLUME BASEPLANE The baseplane used for a volumetrics calculation
40 Char*80 HORIZON NAME Surface or Horizon name
41 Real COLOR Color index
42 Real LINE NAME ANGLE Seismic track direction
43 Real SHOTPOINT LOCATION Distance along seismic track
44 Real POINT SEQUENCE NO. Sequence number for a point along a line
45 Real LOG DEPTH TYPE Type of depth:
1. True Vertical Depth, 2. Measured Depth, 3. True
Vertical Thickness, 4. True Stratigraphic Thickness
46 Real LOG DEPTH UNITS Log depth units: 1. feet, 2. meters
47 Real GRADS LATITUDE Latitude based on the Paris grads system
48 Real GRADS LONGITUDE Longitude based on the Paris grads system

Currently not used by Landmark geological programs.

Cannot import interactively in Z-MAP Plus.

R2003.12.0 Appendix B. File and Field Codes 788

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Data FORTRAN
Type Data
Code Type Default Field Name Description
49 Real AREA SYMBOL Code to guide hachuring and colorfill in B-MAP
lease posting
50 Char*80 AREA IDENTIFICATION Lease polygon identification field to use in B-MAP
lease posting
51 Char*80 DMS-LATITUDE * Character string for Degree-Minute-Second
Latitude, with integer degrees, integer minutes and
decimal seconds separated by blanks
52 Char*80 DMS-LONGITUDE * Character string for Degree-Minute-Second
Longitude, with integer degrees, integer minutes
and decimal seconds separated by blanks
53 Real HEAVE The horizontal displacement of a fault
54 Real STANDARD DEVIATION Statistical standard deviation
55 Real DISCONTINUITY CODE Number that identifies the termination type of a
seismic horizon (for example, fault cu or diapir)
56 Char*8 FEATURE CODE Character field used to differentiate between
different kinds of data in the same ZIMS file, e.g.,
rivers, highways and political boundaries in the
same VERT file
57 Real 3D LINE NUMBER 3D line identifier
58 Real 3D SHOTPOINT NUMBER 3D shotpoint number
59 Char*8 WELL STATUS Character field containing well status information
60 Real SYMBOL ROTATION Field containing the rotation angle for a symbol in
degrees
61 Real LINE PATTERN NUMBER Field containing numbers indicating ZIGS line
pattern number
62 Real I-COORDINATE i coordinate for i,j coordinate system
63 Real J-COORDINATE j coordinate for i,j coordinate system
64 Real VELOCITY Seismic velocity
65 Real DEPTH Depth in linear units (such as m or ft)
66 Real TIME Depth in time units (sec or ms)
67 Real THICKNESS Interval thickness (isopach, isochore)
68 Real DZ2/DX2 Second derivative in X direction
69 Real DZ2/DY2 Second derivative in Y direction
70 Real DZ/DS Gradient amplitude
71 Real DZ/DS AZIMUTH Azimuth of the gradient amplitude

* South and west coordinates must be entered as negative numbers. These values can currently be converted to
decimal degrees in Operations.
Currently not used by Landmark geological programs.
Cannot import interactively in Z-MAP Plus.

R2003.12.0 Appendix B. File and Field Codes 789

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Data FORTRAN
Type Data
Code Type Default Field Name Description

72 Char*4 GEOGRAPH RESAMP TECH Resampling method for geographic data

73 Char*80 3D SURVEY NAME Survey name in a 3D seismic survey
74 Char*80 DATABASE IDENTIFIER Key field in data extracted from database
75 Real SYMBOL SIZE Size of the shotpoint symbol in plotter units (in./
cm.)
76 Real LINE WEIGHT Width of a line measured in multiples of normal
line width.
100-112 Reserved for future use

Currently not used by Landmark geological programs.

Cannot import interactively in Z-MAP Plus.

R2003.12.0 Appendix B. File and Field Codes 790

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Appendix C.
Symbols, Fonts, and Line Patterns

Introduction
Z-MAP Plus now uses the OpenWorks well symbol table. This appendix
begins with a description of the OpenWorks symbol set, then describes
the Z-MAP Plus fonts and line patterns.

Working with Well Symbols

Z-MAP Plus uses the OpenWorks well symbol table (as of
OpenWorks 2003). OpenWorks shares these well symbols with other
Landmark applications. Most users should never notice the change since
the OpenWorks symbol table is based on the Z-MAP Plus symbol table.
The major difference comes when editing well symbols.

Substitution of the + Symbol

If Z-MAP Plus cannot find a symbol ID, it substitutes symbol #1a plus sign
(+). To remove the substituted + symbols, change the symbol ID to a symbol
that is currently defined.

Editing Well Symbols in the OpenWorks Environment

You can edit the OpenWorks symbol table by selecting Data
Management Well Symbol Editor from the OpenWorks Command
Menu. Using this option edits the well symbols for all OpenWorks users
who share the same installation of OpenWorks. Use this option with
care. For more information about the Well Symbol Editor, see
OpenWorks Data Management, Vol 2.

Restarting Z-MAP Plus After Editing a Symbol

To see the edited symbol, restart Z-MAP Plus after you finish with the Well
Symbol Editor.

R2003.12.0 Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line Patterns 791

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Editing Well Symbols in the Standalone Environment

To edit the well symbol table when running standalone, you must edit
the symbol definitions in the text file that describes the symbol. These
text files are stored in the OW_SYS_DATA/owsymbols/*.sym files in the
Z-MAP Plus installation area. Each file defines a single symbol. For
example, symbol 41 is defined in the Z41:41.sym file by the following
elements: an arc, two lines, and a circle.
In the illustration below, the text in monospace (Courier) black is the
definition of symbol 41, red lines connect the actual file entry to an
explanation, and definitions are in sans serif font (Helvetica):
SYMBOL Z41 41 0 1 1 0 Line Style Edge Line Style
Line Width Edge LIne Width
Arc
5 0.000000 0.000000 0.400000 0.000000 360.000000 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 0

Center X Center Y Radius Start End Fill Edge Color

Angle Angle Fill Edge
Pattern

Line
5 -0.000471 -0.400000 -0.000942 -0.799999 0 0

Line
5 0.000471 0.399999 0.000942 0.799999 0 0

Line Width
Start X Start Y End X End Y Line Style

Circle
5 0.000000 0.000000 0.040000 1 0 0 5 0 0 0 0

Line Width
Center Y Edge Line Width
Color Fill Edge
Center X Radius Line Style
Fill
Pattern Edge Color

Edge Line Style

To edit this type of file, use a text editing program (such as vi or emacs).
The following information lists the column order of each graphic
element. In the text files, columns are delineated by a blank space. In
this list, a comma is used to show column separation simply to make the
list easier to read.

R2003.12.0 Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line Patterns 792

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Arc
Color, Center X Position, Center Y Position, Radius, Start Angle, End Angle, Line Style, Line Width, Fill, Fill
Pattern, Edge, Edge Color, Edge Line Style, Edge Line Width

Circle
Color, Center - X Position, Center - Y Position, Radius, Fill, Fill Pattern, Edge, Edge Color, Edge Line Style, Edge
Line Width, Line Style, Line Width

Disk
Color, Center X Position, Center Y Position, Radius, Inner Radius, Start Angle, End Angle, Line Style, Line Width,
Fill, Fill Pattern, Edge, Edge Color, Edge Line Style, Edge Line Width

Ellipse
Color, Center X Position, Center Y Position, Major Radius, Minor Radius, Fill, Fill Pattern, Edge, Edge Color, Edge
Line Style, Edge Line Width, Line Style, Line Width

Line
Color, Start Point X Position, Start Point Y Position, End Point X Position, End Point Y Position, Line Style, Line
Width

Polygon
Color, Line Style, Line Width, Fill, Fill Pattern, Edge, Edge Color, Edge Line Style, Edge Line Width, Number of
Points

Polyline
Color, Line Style, Line Width, Number of Points

Rectangle
Color, Line Style, Line Width, Fill Fill Pattern, Edge, Edge Color, Edge Line Style, Edge Line Width, Number of
Points

Spline
Color, Line Style, Line Width, Number of Points

Text
Color, Start Point X Position, Start Point Y Position, Character Width Legible, Character Height Legible,
Character Width WYSIWYG, Character Height WYSIWYG, Font, Mode, Angle, Justification, Path
Well Symbol IDs

R2003.12.0 Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line Patterns 793

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

R2003.12.0 Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line Patterns 794

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

R2003.12.0 Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line Patterns 795

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

R2003.12.0 Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line Patterns 796

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

R2003.12.0 Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line Patterns 797

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

R2003.12.0 Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line Patterns 798

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

R2003.12.0 Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line Patterns 799

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

R2003.12.0 Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line Patterns 800

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Font Types

R2003.12.0 Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line Patterns 801

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Line Patterns

R2003.12.0 Appendix C. Symbols, Fonts, and Line Patterns 802

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Appendix D.
Color Editing

Introduction
In a color graphics terminal, Z-MAP Plus picture features appear in
different colors. The colors assigned to each feature or part of a feature
are stored in the pictures color table.
Each picture in a graphics file has a color table associated with it. If you
edit the color editing for a picture, previously generated pictures are not
affected.
Use the color editing options to display and modify the current color
table. You can perform these actions:
Change the color that makes up a color index. *
Change the color of one or more features.
Change the default colors for displaying graphics features.
Read the color table from a disk file. *
Write the color table to a disk file. *
This appendix begins with an overview of how the program determines
the color of a specific feature. This is followed by a general description
of the Color Table.
For information about using the Color Table and Color Indices editing
options, see the View Menu Options section in the Z-MAP Plus
Reference Manual.

* From the View menu, select the Color Table option.

From the Change Features menu, select the Edit Features option, then select Change Parameters.
From the View menu, select the Color Indexes option.

R2003.12.0 Appendix D. Color Editing 803

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Terminology
The following terms are important for understanding color table basics.
Color Index is a number assigned to a color in the color table.
Graphic Primitives are the lines, text, symbols, and polygons used to
generate a feature.
Graphics Features are graphic primitives that have been grouped into
map features, such as contours, seismic lines, and borders.

Color Concepts in Z-MAP Plus

The fundamental units of graphics are called primitives. Z-MAP Plus
supports four types of graphic primitives:
line strings
text
symbols
polygons
Each primitive possesses an attribute called color. Rather than
identifying the color of a primitive directly, color is identified indirectly
as an index into a table of available colors. The Color Table is indexed
from 0 to 255, and supports 256 colors. Each entry to the table is
described using the Red, Green, Blue (RGB) color system.
Although colors can be defined in either the RGB or Hue, Lightness and
Saturation (HLS) system, HLS parameters are converted to and stored
as RGB parameters in the Color Table.
The RGB system describes color as three numbers in the range of
0 to 1.* These three numbers indicate the relative amounts of red, green
and blue that are added together to obtain the color. HLS describes color
by the angle of hue (from 0360 degrees) and the percentage of
lightness and saturation (from 0100%).

* The RGB model describes the colors in ranges of 0 to 1, as evidenced in page 813. However, Z-MAP Plus
uses ranges of 0 to 100 in the interactive Color Table Edit.

R2003.12.0 Appendix D. Color Editing 804

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

RGB Color System

The Z-MAP Plus Color Table stores colors in the RGB Color
Coordinate System. The amount of each color used may range from 0 to
1 *; however, their combined total does not have to equal 1 .
CYAN
(0, 100, 100)

BLUE
(0, 0, 100)
WHITE
(100, 100, 100)

MAGENTA
(100, 0, 100)
E
AL
SC
Y
G RA
GREEN
(0, 100, 0)

BLACK
(0, 0, 0)
YELLOW
(100, 100, 0)

RED
(100, 0, 0)

RGB Color Model

HLS Color System

Hue is determined by the wave length of light reflected from a surface.
Lightness is the amount of color reflected from a surface and Saturation
is the intensity of the color.

* The RGB model describes the colors in ranges of 0 to 1, as evidenced in page 813. However, Z-MAP Plus
uses ranges of 0 to 100 in the interactive Color Table Edit.
A very dark color might have a low combined total, such as Index 94 (R<0.2, G=0, B<0.05, total<0.25) or
Index 122 (B<0.4, G<0.01, B=0, total<0.41). A very light color might have a high combined total, such as
Index 150 (R=1, B<1, G<0.9, total<2.9).

R2003.12.0 Appendix D. Color Editing 805

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Hue is measured in degrees. The degree measurement for some hues is

given below:

Blue = 0
Magenta = 60
Red = 120
Yellow = 180
Green = 240
Cyan = 300

Both Lightness and Saturation are defined on a scale from 0 to 100

percent. A Lightness of 0 produces black, while a Lightness of 100
produces white. Likewise, a Saturation of 0 results in a gray (and Hue is
irrelevant), while a Saturation of 100 is a color at its most intense.

WHITE 0 Saturation 100 100

75

Lightness
Red 120 60 Magenta

Yellow 180 Hue 0 Blue 50

Green 240 300 Cyan

25

BLACK 0

The HLS Color Model

R2003.12.0 Appendix D. Color Editing 806

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

RGB Color System vs. HLS Color System

The table below illustrates the settings for the primary colors and gray
in both the RGB and HLS systems.

RGB HLS
COLOR
Red Green Blue Hue % Lightness % Saturation

Blue 0 0 1 0 50 100

Magenta 1 0 1 60 50 100

Red 1 0 0 120 50 100

Yellow 1 1 0 180 50 100

Green 0 1 0 240 50 100

Cyan 0 1 1 300 50 100

Black 0 0 0 N/A 0 N/A

Gray same amount of each* N/A 199* 0

White 1 1 1 N/A 100 N/A

The illustration below shows the settings as seen in the Display Color
Table Edit window for Color Index 119 for both the RGB and HLS
systems.

Color Table Edit RGB and HLS settings for Color Index 119

* Gray is darker as amount approaches 0, lighter as amount increases.

R2003.12.0 Appendix D. Color Editing 807

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Color Table
The Color Table defines 256 colors. The first eight default Z-MAP Plus
colors are:

0 = background (black/white) *
1 = normal foreground (white/black) *
2 = red
3 = green
4 = blue
5 = cyan
6 = magenta
7 = yellow

An index number is assigned to each cell in the Color Table. The Color
Index Number of each cell in the Color Table can be determined by
adding the number on the left side of the row to the number at the top of
the column.

Z-MAP Plus Color Table with first 160 indexes displayed

* The background of the Z-MAP Plus window display area is independent of the RGB value associated with
color 0. The display depends on the System Switches Background setting, which toggles the display of color
indexes 0 and 1. Setting color 0 to red does not cause the display area background to be red, but may have
other unexpected results. It is advised that you not change the colors for indexes 0 or 1.

R2003.12.0 Appendix D. Color Editing 808

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

These color associations are valid the first time you enter the program.
The color table used in future sessions is based on any changes you
make in the current session.

Printing Color
Z-MAP Plus comes with the graphics file COLORWHEEL.ZGF *. If
you plot the single picture on this graphics file on an electrostatic plotter,
you see a graphical representation of all the 256 color choices provided
by the color table. This representation also helps you understand the
logic behind the design of the color table, explained below.
Electrostatic plotters can render have significant differences in the way
colors are rendered even though the machines are given exactly the same
instructions for ink combinations. Differences can occur even on
machines made by the same manufacturer. Color variation can be
caused by many factors, including:
the model of the machine used
the state of maintenance of the machine
rasterization software employed, and the version
the control setting, such as the contrast knob on the plotter
the source and batch number of the inks used on the machines
the source and batch number of the paper used on the machines,
and the humidity at which paper has been stored
The color table is optimized for use with Landmarks own 400 dpi
Versatec plotter. (This is why the picture in COLORWHEEL.ZGF is
named VERSATEC SAMPLE COLOR.) Color combinations are likely
to appear slightly different on other machines.

* The file may be named colorwheel.zgf in some installations.

R2003.12.0 Appendix D. Color Editing 809

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Color Representation Section

The Color Representation Section of the color table maps each color
index between 0 and 55 into one of the eight primary colors that can be
produced on an electrostatic color plotter without the use of dither
patterns: black, white, red, green, blue, cyan, magenta, and yellow.
Some colors are repeated to insure a unique index is assigned to each
feature.
Color indexes between 56 and 93 are intended to be place holders for
colors that change according to data parameters such as colorfilled
contouring or well label posting. They default to a range of colors
starting with pale blue changing gradually to lime green and finally to
reddish gray. The small range of colors for these indexes does not mean
that colorfill operations are not performing correctly. The defaults for
these colors show up distinctly on a map, but they are not expected to be
good choices for any particular application. Create new colors or copy
colors from other parts of the color table into individual indexes in this
56 to 93 range, then use color interpolation between the new colors to
create final maps.
Color index 94 is a shade of brown that is difficult to mix. Index 95 is
the color of the default background. The display area shows black or
white depending on the System Switches Background setting, as
described in System Switches starting on page 776.
Color indexes between 96 and 255 are specifically intended to provide
colors for filling areas with color, such as is done in colorfilled
contouring. Indexes 96 to 100 are shades of gray, indexes 101 to 106 are
shades of cyan. Indexes 106 to 130 provide a dark-colored sampler, not
good on paper (black is dithered in, muddying the colors in the print) but
useful for colorfilling contours so that overlaid line data is easily seen
on the screen. Indexes 131 to 155 provide samples of the primary hues
at lightnesses not covered by the color wheels.
Color indexes 156 to 255 are matched to a display of five different color
wheels, which are shown on the picture on the COLORWHEEL.ZGF
graphics file. Each color wheel represents a full spectrum of colors from
blue to magenta, red, yellow, green, cyan and back to blue. The wheels
are stacked with the bottom at about 50% lightness and the top at 100%
lightness (pure white). Generally, color choices for area fill on white
paper should be no darker than 50% lightness; light fill colors allow
overplotted line data in saturated colors to show up well, and lightness
below 50% is usually accomplished by dithering in some black, which
muddies the saturated colors.
Numbers plotted in the color wheels are the Color Index numbers.

R2003.12.0 Appendix D. Color Editing 810

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

For a particularly complex map you may wish to use more than 100
distinct color indexes of your own design for different map features.
Assuming that you start with index 56 and use up indexes in order from
56, then 150 user-defined color indexes takes you to color index 205.
To provide maximum flexibility for such a power user, Landmark has
mapped the color wheels corresponding to 50% and 75% lightness into
indexes 206 to 230 and 231 to 255, respectively. For more information
about color representation, see page 813.

Color Index Section

In the Color Table, the Color Index Section has assigned distinct indexes
to graphic primitives (lines, text, symbols, polygons) for the most
commonly used graphics features (contours, map borders, seismic lines,
etc.) pointing into the first 55 indexes of the color table.
This has two advantages over assignments in the old color table.
First, the first 55 indexes are primary colors that can be reproduced
without resorting to dithering, so narrow lines for most features show up
well on a hardcopy plot.
Second, because different graphics features have distinct color indexes
for their primitive elements, you can safely change the color of one
primitive for one feature on a map by editing the color representation
section of the table, without worrying that the colors for other primitives
will change simultaneously. See Color Index Section on page 811, at
the end of this section.

R2003.12.0 Appendix D. Color Editing 811

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Color Table and the COLORWHEEL.ZGF Graphics File

To obtain the best possible use of the color table, you should have access
to a hardcopy representation of the colors it defines. Therefore, you
should perform the following steps:
1. Plot the color table picture from COLORWHEEL.ZGF on your
own graphics device.
2. If the color samples are not satisfactory on your hardcopy device,
you should tune the color table and replot. A color can be
reproduced by the Copy function in Display Color Table editing,
or the RGB amounts can be entered in an ASCII version of the
color table. *
3. Hang a final version of the plot on the wall next to the terminal or
workstation where maps are made. You can choose a color from
the plot, knowing what it will look like on the hardcopy, regardless
of how it looks on the screen.

Default Changes
The default starting color index for colorfill contours is cell 56.
Remember that 56 through 93 are place-holders that you are expected to
change in order to develop a range of colors for a particular operation
such as deviated well posting or colorfilled contouring.
The two tables that complete this section show the RGB settings for all
256 color indexes (Color Representative Area) and the color indexes
associated with the four types of graphic primitives for each of the
graphics feature types (Color Index Section).

* Select Write in the Display Color Table editing window to create an ASCII file of the color table. After
editing this file, select Read in the Color Table editing window to create a color table from the ASCII file.

R2003.12.0 Appendix D. Color Editing 812

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Index Red Green Blue Color

0 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 Black (White)

1 1.000000 1.000000 1.000000 White (Black)
2 1.000000 0.000000 0.000000 Red
3 0.000000 1.000000 0.000000 Green
4 0.000000 0.000000 1.000000 Blue
5 0.000000 1.000000 1.000000 Cyan
6 1.000000 0.000000 1.000000 Magenta
7 1.000000 1.000000 0.000000 Yellow
8 0.000000 1.000000 1.000000 Cyan
9 0.000000 1.000000 0.000000 Green
10 1.000000 0.000000 0.000000 Red
11 0.000000 0.000000 1.000000 Blue
12 0.000000 0.000000 1.000000 Blue
13 0.000000 1.000000 1.000000 Cyan
14 0.000000 1.000000 1.000000 Cyan
15 0.000000 0.000000 1.000000 Blue
16 1.000000 0.000000 1.000000 Magenta
17 0.000000 1.000000 1.000000 Cyan
18 1.000000 0.000000 0.000000 Red
19 1.000000 0.000000 0.000000 Red
20 1.000000 0.000000 0.000000 Red
21 0.000000 0.000000 1.000000 Blue
22 1.000000 0.000000 1.000000 Magenta
23 1.000000 0.000000 0.000000 Red
24 1.000000 0.000000 0.000000 Red
25 0.000000 1.000000 0.000000 Green
26 0.000000 1.000000 0.000000 Green
27 0.000000 0.000000 1.000000 Blue
28 0.000000 1.000000 0.000000 Green
29 0.000000 1.000000 1.000000 Cyan

R2003.12.0 Appendix D. Color Editing 813

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Index Red Green Blue Color

30 0.000000 1.000000 1.000000 Cyan

31 0.000000 0.000000 1.000000 Blue
32 0.000000 1.000000 0.000000 Green
33 0.000000 1.000000 0.000000 Green
34 0.000000 1.000000 0.000000 Green
35 0.000000 0.000000 1.000000 Blue
36 0.000000 1.000000 1.000000 Cyan
37 1.000000 0.000000 1.000000 Magenta
38 0.000000 1.000000 1.000000 Cyan
39 1.000000 0.000000 1.000000 Magenta
40 0.000000 1.000000 0.000000 Green
41 0.000000 0.000000 1.000000 Blue
42 0.000000 1.000000 1.000000 Cyan
43 1.000000 0.000000 1.000000 Magenta
44 1.000000 0.000000 0.000000 Red
45 0.000000 1.000000 1.000000 Cyan
46 0.000000 0.000000 1.000000 Blue
47 1.000000 0.000000 1.000000 Magenta
48 0.000000 1.000000 0.000000 Green
49 1.000000 0.000000 1.000000 Magenta
50 1.000000 1.000000 1.000000 White
51 1.000000 0.000000 0.000000 Red
52 0.000000 1.000000 0.000000 Green
53 0.000000 0.000000 1.000000 Blue
54 0.000000 1.000000 1.000000 Cyan
55 1.000000 0.000000 1.000000 Magenta
56 0.000000 0.719453 0.859238 Place holders for
colors that change
57 0.029326 0.709677 0.849462 according to data
58 0.049853 0.699902 0.829912 parameters, e.g.,
colorfilled contours
59 0.079179 0.689150 0.819159 or well label posting.
60 0.109482 0.689150 0.809384

R2003.12.0 Appendix D. Color Editing 814

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Index Red Green Blue Color

61 0.129032 0.679374 0.799609

62 0.159335 0.669599 0.789834 Place holders for
colors that change
63 0.189638 0.659824 0.779081 according to data
64 0.219941 0.659824 0.769306 parameters, e.g.,
colorfilled contours
65 0.239492 0.649071 0.759531 or well label posting
66 0.269795 0.639296 0.739980 (contd)

67 0.299120 0.629521 0.729228

68 0.319648 0.629521 0.719453
69 0.349951 0.619746 0.709677
70 0.379277 0.609971 0.699902
71 0.399805 0.599218 0.689150
72 0.429130 0.599218 0.679374
73 0.459433 0.589443 0.659824
74 0.479961 0.579668 0.649071
75 0.509286 0.569892 0.639296
76 0.539589 0.569892 0.629521
77 0.569892 0.559140 0.619746
78 0.589443 0.549365 0.609971
79 0.619746 0.539589 0.599218
80 0.649071 0.539589 0.589443
81 0.649071 0.539589 0.589443
82 0.649071 0.539589 0.589443
83 0.649071 0.539589 0.589443
84 0.649071 0.539589 0.589443
85 0.649071 0.539589 0.589443
86 0.649071 0.539589 0.589443
87 0.649071 0.539589 0.589443
88 0.649071 0.539589 0.589443
89 0.649071 0.539589 0.589443
90 0.649071 0.539589 0.589443
91 0.649071 0.539589 0.589443

R2003.12.0 Appendix D. Color Editing 815

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Index Red Green Blue Color

92 0.649071 0.539589 0.589443

93 0.649071 0.539589 0.589443
94 0.199413 0.049853 0.000000 Brown
95 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 Same as Index 0
96 0.429130 0.429130 0.429130 Shades of Gray
97 0.599218 0.599218 0.599218
98 0.719453 0.719453 0.719453
99 0.829912 0.829912 0.829912
100 0.949169 0.949169 0.949169
101 0.000000 0.449658 0.539589 Shades of Cyan
102 0.000000 0.719453 0.859238
103 0.179863 0.859238 1.000000
104 0.519062 0.919844 1.000000
105 0.839687 0.969697 1.000000
106 0.000000 0.000000 0.719453 Spectrum of dark
colors not
107 0.159335 0.000000 0.639296 represented on
108 0.279570 0.000000 0.559140 colorwheel.zgf; good
for viewing
109 0.479961 0.000000 0.479961 colorfilled contours
110 0.479961 0.000000 0.239492 on screen

111 0.499511 0.000000 0.179863

112 0.499511 0.000000 0.119257
113 0.519062 0.000000 0.059629
114 0.519062 0.000000 0.000000
115 0.539589 0.119257 0.000000
116 0.559140 0.269795 0.000000
117 0.579668 0.419355 0.000000
118 0.599218 0.579668 0.000000
119 0.429130 0.559140 0.000000
120 0.259042 0.499511 0.000000
121 0.109482 0.439883 0.000000
122 0.000000 0.399805 0.009775

R2003.12.0 Appendix D. Color Editing 816

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Index Red Green Blue Color

123 0.000000 0.399805 0.119257

124 0.000000 0.399805 0.239492
125 0.000000 0.399805 0.349951 Spectrum of dark
colors (contd)
126 0.000000 0.329423 0.399805
127 0.000000 0.309873 0.499511
128 0.000000 0.229717 0.559140
129 0.000000 0.139785 0.639296
130 0.319648 0.319648 0.319648
131 0.000000 0.000000 0.899316 Series of colors not
represented in
132 0.299120 0.299120 1.000000 colorwheel.zgf
133 0.499511 0.499511 1.000000 consisting of five
shades each of five
134 0.699902 0.699902 1.000000 colors
135 0.899316 0.899316 1.000000
136 0.639296 0.000000 0.319648
137 0.959922 0.000000 0.479961
138 1.000000 0.259042 0.629521
139 1.000000 0.559140 0.779081
140 1.000000 0.859238 0.929619
141 0.699902 0.000000 0.000000
142 1.000000 0.019550 0.019550
143 1.000000 0.299120 0.299120
144 1.000000 0.579668 0.579668
145 1.000000 0.859238 0.859238
146 0.799609 0.769306 0.000000
147 1.000000 0.969697 0.139785
148 1.000000 0.979472 0.379277
149 1.000000 0.989247 0.639296
150 1.000000 0.989247 0.879765
151 0.000000 0.539589 0.019550
152 0.000000 0.819159 0.029326
153 0.179863 1.000000 0.209189

R2003.12.0 Appendix D. Color Editing 817

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Index Red Green Blue Color

154 0.519062 1.000000 0.529814

155 0.839687 1.000000 0.839687
156 0.399805 0.399805 1.000000 Spectrum of medium
bright colors (about
157 0.469208 0.299120 1.000000 63% Lightness),
158 0.599218 0.199413 1.000000 represented by the
second wheel up in
159 1.000000 0.099707 1.000000 colorwheel.zgf; last
160 1.000000 0.099707 0.549365 index of group is a
gray
161 1.000000 0.119257 0.439883
162 1.000000 0.139785 0.349951
163 1.000000 0.139785 0.239492
164 1.000000 0.159335 0.159335
165 1.000000 0.379277 0.179863
166 1.000000 0.589443 0.209189
167 1.000000 0.789834 0.229717
168 1.000000 0.969697 0.259042
169 0.809384 1.000000 0.189638
170 0.569892 1.000000 0.129032
171 0.279570 1.000000 0.059629
172 0.000000 1.000000 0.029326
173 0.000000 1.000000 0.299120
174 0.000000 1.000000 0.599218
175 0.000000 1.000000 0.879765
176 0.019550 0.829912 1.000000
177 0.119257 0.679374 1.000000
178 0.219941 0.539589 1.000000
179 0.319648 0.469208 1.000000
180 0.659824 0.659824 0.659824

R2003.12.0 Appendix D. Color Editing 818

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Index Red Green Blue Color

181 0.799609 0.799609 1.000000 Spectrum of pale

colors (about 87%
182 0.819159 0.759531 1.000000 Lightness),
183 0.869990 0.739980 1.000000 represented by fourth
wheel up in
184 1.000000 0.699902 1.000000 colorwheel.zgf; last
185 1.000000 0.699902 0.849462 index of group is a
gray
186 1.000000 0.699902 0.809384
187 1.000000 0.719453 0.789834 Spectrum of pale
colors (about 87%
188 1.000000 0.719453 0.749756 Lightness),
189 1.000000 0.719453 0.719453 represented by fourth
wheel up in
190 1.000000 0.799609 0.739980 colorwheel.zgf; last
191 1.000000 0.869990 0.739980 index of group is a
gray (contd)
192 1.000000 0.929619 0.739980
193 1.000000 0.989247 0.759531
194 0.939394 1.000000 0.739980
195 0.859238 1.000000 0.719453
196 0.769306 1.000000 0.699902
197 0.679374 1.000000 0.689150
198 0.679374 1.000000 0.769306
199 0.659824 1.000000 0.859238
200 0.659824 1.000000 0.959922
201 0.679374 0.949169 1.000000
202 0.699902 0.889541 1.000000
203 0.739980 0.849462 1.000000
204 0.779081 0.829912 1.000000
205 0.889541 0.889541 0.889541
206 0.199413 0.199413 1.000000 Spectrum of bright
colors (about 50%
207 0.309873 0.079179 1.000000 Lightness),
208 0.459433 0.000000 0.919844 represented by
bottom wheel in
209 0.799609 0.000000 0.799609 colorwheel.zgf; last
210 0.799609 0.000000 0.399805 index in group is a
gray
211 0.819159 0.000000 0.299120

R2003.12.0 Appendix D. Color Editing 819

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Index Red Green Blue Color

212 0.839687 0.000000 0.209189

213 0.859238 0.000000 0.099707
214 0.879765 0.000000 0.000000
215 0.899316 0.209189 0.000000
216 0.939394 0.449658 0.000000
217 0.959922 0.689150 0.000000
218 1.000000 0.969697 0.000000 Spectrum of bright
colors (about 50%
219 0.699902 0.919844 0.000000 Lightness),
220 0.419355 0.819159 0.000000 represented by
bottom wheel in
221 0.179863 0.739980 0.000000 colorwheel.zgf; last
222 0.000000 0.659824 0.019550 index in group is a
gray
223 0.000000 0.659824 0.189638
224 0.000000 0.659824 0.389052
225 0.000000 0.659824 0.579668
226 0.000000 0.569892 0.679374
227 0.000000 0.519062 0.819159
228 0.229717 0.429130 0.699902
229 0.079179 0.279570 1.000000
230 0.539589 0.539589 0.539589
231 0.599218 0.599218 1.000000 Spectrum of light
colors (about 75%
232 0.649071 0.539589 1.000000 Lightness),
233 0.729228 0.459433 1.000000 represented by the
center wheel in
234 1.000000 0.399805 1.000000 colorwheel.zgf; last
235 1.000000 0.399805 0.699902 index in group is a
gray
236 1.000000 0.399805 0.619746
237 1.000000 0.419355 0.559140
238 1.000000 0.419355 0.489736
239 1.000000 0.439883 0.439883
240 1.000000 0.589443 0.459433
241 1.000000 0.719453 0.459433

R2003.12.0 Appendix D. Color Editing 820

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Index Red Green Blue Color

242 1.000000 0.849462 0.479961

243 1.000000 0.979472 0.499511
244 0.869990 1.000000 0.459433
245 0.719453 1.000000 0.419355
246 0.529814 1.000000 0.379277
247 0.339198 1.000000 0.359726
248 0.339198 1.000000 0.539589
249 0.319648 1.000000 0.729228 Spectrum of light
colors (about 75%
250 0.319648 1.000000 0.919844
Lightness),
251 0.339198 0.889541 1.000000 represented by the
center wheel in
252 0.399805 0.779081 1.000000 colorwheel.zgf; last
253 0.479961 0.699902 1.000000 index in group is a
gray (cont)
254 0.539589 0.639296 1.000000
255 0.769306 0.769306 0.769306

R2003.12.0 Appendix D. Color Editing 821

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Index for Graphic Primitive Graphics

Graphics Feature Description Feature
Lines Text Symbols Poly Number

2 1 1 1 BORDERS 1

5 8 5 1 BORDER LABELS AND TICK MARKS 2

3 9 1 1 CONTOURS 3

1 4 10 1 POSTED CONTROL POINTS AND VALUES 4

1 11 6 1 POSTED GRID NODES AND VALUES 5

1 12 1 1 TEXT 6

13 1 1 1 POLYGON LINES 7

14 15 1 1 TITLE BLOCK AND MAP SCALES 8

1 1 1 1 REFERENCE CROSSES AND GRID LINES 9

16 17 16 1 NORTH ARROW 10

19 1 1 1 CROSS SECTION TRACES 11

1 1 1 1 CROSS SECTION LABELS 12

1 1 1 1 CROSS SECTION POSTED WELLS 13

6 7 7 1 PERSPECTIVE FISHNET 14

20 20 20 17 SEISMIC SHOTPOINT TRACKS 15

18 1 1 1 FAULT TRACES 16

1 1 1 1 RESIN LATTICE (no longer valid) 17

3 1 1 195 COLORFILLED CONTOURS 18

26 27 1 1 PROFILES 19

21 21 22 22 GRID DIP (GRADIENT) ARROWS 20

1 1 1 1 CONTOURS RESIN CELLS (no longer valid) 21

1 1 1 1 ALBERTA TOWNSHIP SURVEY FEATURES 22

1 1 1 1 TOWNSHIP BASEMAP LINES 23

1 23 1 1 SECTION BOUNDARY LINES 24

1 1 1 1 TOPOGRAPHIC DATA 25

7 1 1 1 PERSPECTIVE AXIS 26

10 10 1 1 SEISMIC SECTIONS 27

R2003.12.0 Appendix D. Color Editing 822

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Index for Graphic Primitive Graphics

Graphics Feature Description Feature
Lines Text Symbols Poly Number

28 28 1 1 DEVIATED WELLS 28

7 2 1 1 AREA OR VOLUME BOUNDARY 29

1 1 1 1 COLORFILLED POLYGONS 30

24 24 25 25 CONTROL POINT DIP (GRAD) ARROWS 31

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR INDEX MAP 32

1 1 1 1 ZIMS FILE HISTORY TREE 33

1 1 1 1 MAP LEGENDS 34

1 1 1 1 CULTURAL LINE FEATURES 35

1 1 1 1 LEASE BORDERS AND LABELS 36

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 37

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 38

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 39

2 7 1 7 GRAPHICS MENU 40

1 1 1 1 PICTURE LIMITS 41

1 1 1 1 NTS BOUNDARIES 42

1 1 1 1 NTS LABELS 43

1 1 1 1 MAP SCALES 44

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 45

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 46

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 47

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 48

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 49

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 50

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 51

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 52

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 53

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 54

R2003.12.0 Appendix D. Color Editing 823

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Index for Graphic Primitive Graphics

Graphics Feature Description Feature
Lines Text Symbols Poly Number

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 55

1 1 1 1 Z3D GRID (no longer valid) 56

1 1 1 1 Z3D DEVIATED WELL (no longer valid) 57

1 1 1 1 Z3D DISPLAY BOX (no longer valid) 58

1 1 1 1 Z3D ARROW (no longer valid) 59

1 1 1 1 Z3D AXIS ANNOTATION (no longer valid) 60

1 1 1 1 Z3D CROSS-SECTION (no longer valid) 61

1 1 1 0 Z3D FENCE ISOCHORE (no longer valid) 62

1 1 1 1 Z3D LITHOLOGY PATTERN (no longer valid) 63

1 1 1 1 Z3D PANEL POSTS (no longer valid) 64

1 1 1 1 Z3D PANEL BASELINES (no longer valid) 65

1 1 1 1 Z3D FENCE BMAP (no longer valid) 66

1 1 1 1 Z3D BLOCK ISOCHORE (no longer valid) 67

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 68

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 69

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 70

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 71

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 72

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 73

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 74

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 75

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 76

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 77

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 78

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 79

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 80

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 81

R2003.12.0 Appendix D. Color Editing 824

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Index for Graphic Primitive Graphics

Graphics Feature Description Feature
Lines Text Symbols Poly Number

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 82

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 83

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 84

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 85

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 86

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 87

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 88

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 89

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 90

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 91

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 92

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 93

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 94

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 95

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 96

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 97

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 98

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 99

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 100

29 30 31 32 LITHOLOGY COLUMNS 101

33 33 1 1 LOG CURVES 102

1 1 1 1 LOG ANNOTATION 103

34 34 1 1 WELL TRACES ON BASEMAP 104

1 35 36 1 CONFLICT POSTING SYMBOLS 105

37 37 37 1 FAULT LINES 106

38 38 39 1 FAULT POINTS 107

40 40 40 1 GRID PROFILES 108

R2003.12.0 Appendix D. Color Editing 825

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Index for Graphic Primitive Graphics

Graphics Feature Description Feature
Lines Text Symbols Poly Number

41 41 1 1 LOG LATTICES 109

1 1 1 1 ANALYSIS DATA 110

42 42 42 1 BASELINES ON BASEMAP 111

43 43 43 1 HORIZON CROSSINGS 112

44 44 44 1 LEGEND FOR HORIZON CROSSINGS 113

1 1 1 1 PROJECTION ARROWS 114

1 1 1 1 DATUM LINE 115

1 1 1 1 HORIZON NAME ANNOTATION 116

1 1 1 1 ROCK TYPE ANNOTATION 117

1 1 1 1 GRID SURFACE VALUES 118

1 1 1 1 TOP LINES 119

1 1 1 1 COLORFILLED HORIZONS ON XSECT 120

1 1 1 1 GRID NAME ANNOTATION 121

1 45 1 1 WELL HEADERS ON XSECT PLOTS 122

1 46 1 1 CROSS-SECTION TITLE 123

1 1 1 1 ROTATED BORDER ON FENCE DIAGRAMS 124

47 47 47 1 KB ELEVATION CONNECTIONS 125

48 48 48 1 HORIZON LINE CONNECTIONS 126

1 1 1 1 COLORFILLED LOG CURVES 127

1 1 1 1 RESERVED FOR EXPANSION 128

R2003.12.0 Appendix D. Color Editing 826

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Appendix E.
Import/Export

Transferring Data In or Out of an MFD

Introduction
You can move files into or out of an MFD by using the File Import
and File Save As options in the Z-MAP Plus window (as described
in this topic). (You can also move files into or out of an MFD by using
the File Manager, as described in Using the File Manager on
page 60.)
MFDs are files used by Z-MAP Plus and other Landmark geological
products for storing data, such as the data to create maps or cross
sections. Files you import into an MFD can be in almost any
column-oriented format since the import process allows you to describe
and locate each part of the input file. Similarly, the Save As operation
gives you complete control of the output format when you move files
out of an MFD.
If you use OpenWorks, you have a direct connection with the
OpenWorks project data. You do not need to perform explicit import
and export operations to transfer data between the OpenWorks database
and Landmark applications. If you use Z-MAP Plus with an OpenWorks
project, you can read and save grids, pointsets, and faults directly to the
OpenWorks database.
For more information about OpenWorks, see the topic OpenWorks on
page 13.
As shown in Appendix B. File and Field Codes on page 785, you can
import only file types 1-14 into Z-MAP Plus.

R2003.12.0 Appendix E. Import/Export 827

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Common Terms
The following terms are used to discuss file transfer.

Formatted Disk Files

A formatted disk file, such as ASCII, text or flat files, may be
transferred into or created from an MFD. These files reside on disks
(sometimes tapes) and have a very structured format; that is, values
representing a particular variable have a specific position on a specific
line of the file. Usually these files can be viewed and edited on a
computer terminal with a standard text editor. In general terms, Import
is the conversion from generic ASCII to the very specific binary MFD
format that Z-MAP Plus uses.

Physical Record
Each formatted disk file is composed of a number of lines of
information; each line is referred to as a physical record. Normally the
physical records are 80 characters (columns) long; however, the length
of the record may vary so that it is longer or shorter than 80 characters.

Logical Record
A group of related information that may extend to several lines (physical
records) of a formatted disk file is called a logical record.
For example, information brought into Z-MAP Plus is commonly tied to
an x,y location. Many measurements may be recorded at that x,y
location, such as top and base elevation of rock units, porosities, ore
grades, etc. This recorded information may take up several lines
(physical records) in the file. A logical grouping of information related
to one x,y position is followed by another logical grouping of
information related to another x,y position and so on. These logical
groups of related information, which may extend over several physical
records, are called logical records.

Limits for Records

There is a maximum of ten physical records per logical record.

R2003.12.0 Appendix E. Import/Export 828

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Import/Export File Format

The information that describes the form of a file to be transferred is put
in a format. The format consists of a set of parameters. Some parameters
describe the general nature of the data file (that is, the file description
parameters). Other parameters describe each field of the data file (field
description parameters). The format is seldom constructed from scratch:
It is typically created by interactive import or export with a header. The
entire set of format parameters is stored either at the top of the data or in
a special format file.
Example
! Format Namer, File Type, Line Length, # Lines
!
@FAULT FILE, FALT, 80, 1
!
!
! Field Name, Field Index, Field Type, Rec. #, Start, End, Input Deci.,
! ZNON, Alpha ZNON, Print Width, Print Sig. Digits, Sort Index
!
X (EASTING) , 1, 1, , 1, 8, , 1.0e+30, , 15, 8, 0
Y (NORTHING), 2, 2, , 11, 18, , 1.0e+30, , 15, 8, 0
SEGMENT ID , 3, 35, , 21, 23, , 1.0e+30, , 5, 0, 0
@

Beginning and Ending Symbols

The beginning and end of a format is indicated by a special symbol. This
symbol is placed in column 1 of the first and last lines of the format. Any
alphanumeric character may be used for this format symbol; however,
Landmark suggests that you use one of the special characters, such as
@, !, +, #, $, %,... The symbols /, ' , " , : , ; , or , should not be used due
to the impact on other systems. The symbol most often used to indicate
the beginning and end of a format is an at (@) sign.

Multiple Formats
If multiple formats follow one another, you do not need to enter an end @ sign
until you enter the last format.

R2003.12.0 Appendix E. Import/Export 829

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Example
@GROUP 1
.
.
.
@GROUP 2
.
.
.
@

Comment Symbols
You can place comment lines anywhere in the format. You use another
special symbol to identify a comment line, typically an exclamation
point (!). Place the ! in the first column of each comment line.

History Symbols
You can store history information in a file created by the import
operation. History information consists of the date the file was created,
who created it, and other useful facts. To identify a line of history
information, another you use another special symbol, typically a plus
sign (+). Place the + in the first column of each history line. You can
include a maximum of 23 lines of historical information anywhere in the
format.
Example
You can build the basic form of the format with the three types of format
lines just described. The following example shows the types of format
lines in use.
@
!
! Date: 04 February, 1996
! Author: VAB
! Purpose: This Format Group demonstrates how
! special symbols are used to define:
!
! 1) The Format Group "@"
! 2) Comments "!"
! 3) History information "+"
!

R2003.12.0 Appendix E. Import/Export 830

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

+ This data is for the Nomans Land Basin

+ in Anywhere, Alaska. It was collected
+ in May of 1985 by John Doe of Crater
+ Company
!
@

File Description Parameters

File description parameters enable you to describe the general character
of the import file. These parameters include name of the format, type of
input data, and physical record length and number of physical records
per logical record (non-grid files) or number of grid nodes per physical
record (grid files only). Include these parameters on the first line of the
format immediately following the beginning format symbol. Separate
parameters with a comma. A detailed description of each parameter
follows.

General File Description Parameters

The general file description parameters include the format name
(Parameter 1) and file type (Parameter 2). These are the first two
parameters in both a grid and non-grid file description.

Format Name (Parameter 1)

The format name is a name of your choice and can be a maximum of 40
alphanumeric characters long. Do not put quotes around the name. Any
blanks you leave between the format symbol and the name are
considered part of the name. In addition, any blanks after the name and
before the comma are considered part of the name. Imbedded blanks are
acceptable. Imbedded commas are not acceptable since a comma
signifies the end of the name.

File Type (Parameter 2)

The file type is a four-character descriptor that tells the program which
type of information the file contains. Typical descriptors include:
DATA, VERT, GRID, FALT, CNTR, and CELL. For a list of file types,
see Appendix B. File and Field Codes, starting on page 785.
Default Value:DATA

R2003.12.0 Appendix E. Import/Export 831

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Non-Grid File Parameters

Line Length (Parameter 3)

When importing files, you must input the length of the physical records
on the formatted disk file. The value entered must be an integer. For
export, this indicates the length of the physical records for the formatted
file that is being created.
Default Value:80

Number of Lines (Parameter 4)

For importing files, this is the fourth and last group descriptor parameter
you need to specify. This tells the import operation how many physical
records (lines) are in each logical record. The value entered must be an
integer. For export, this indicates how many physical records are created
for each logical record in the formatted disk file being generated.
Default Value:1 (Import)

Record Limits
There is a maximum of ten physical records per logical record.

Output Header (Parameter 5)

This parameter is only used for export. To place the format information
at the top of the data file being exported, set this parameter to Header.
The output header is not required when you import a file.
Default Value:NO HEADER

R2003.12.0 Appendix E. Import/Export 832

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Summary: Non-Grid File Parameters

In summary, the format parameters needed for non-grid files are: format
name, file type, line length, number of lines, and header.

Example
@Seismic Section, SSEC, 80, 1
@Alaskan Well Data, DATA, 200, 4, HEADER
@ Alaskan Baseline , VERT, 80, 3
@Alaskan Cell Table, CELL, 80, 1

The name Alaskan Baseline would have to be referenced elsewhere with two
spaces in front and one behind.

Grid File Parameters

Nodes Per Line (Parameter 3)

For importing a grid file, this is the third and last format descriptor
parameter to specify. This value specifies the number of grid nodes on
each physical record of the source formatted disk file. The value must
be an integer.

Output Header (Parameter 4)

This parameter is only used for export. To place the format information
at the top of the grid file being exported, set this parameter to Header.
Default Value:NO HEADER

Summary: Grid File Parameters

The format parameters needed for grid files are: format name, file type,
nodes per line, and header.

Example
@Alaskan Topography, GRID, 6
@Alaskan Top Lisburne, GRID, 1, HEADER

R2003.12.0 Appendix E. Import/Export 833

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Field Description Parameters

You can use field description parameters to describe the position, size
and type of each field in the logical record, that is, the X and Y fields and
all additional fields at that location. Field Description Parameters may
be one of two types, either Non-Grid or Grid. Non-Grid Field
Description Parameters are used for all file types except Grids. Grid
Field Description Parameters are used only for grid files.
Field Description Parameters are placed on lines that do not start with a
special symbol; standard special symbols are @, !, and +. The
parameters may start in any column of the line. However, they must be
in the order described in the documentation below and separated by
commas. If a parameter is allowed to default, that is, a value is not
supplied for a parameter, then its position must be held by two commas
with nothing between them.

Example
375, 1, 0,, 42 . . .
In the above example, the fourth parameter has no value but its position
is held.
Any ending parameters on a line that are allowed to default and not
followed by other parameters may be dropped and no commas used to
hold their position.

Limitation on Number of Fields Imported

You can import al maximum of 50 fields can be imported at one time.

Non-Grid Field Description Parameters

The Non-Grid Field Description Parameters used to describe one field
are all specified on the same line. The Field Description Parameters are
repeated on as many lines as there are fields read from the input file. Do
not carry parameters from one field onto a second line that is
interpreted as the beginning of another field description. Fields are
stored in the MFD in the order the fields are described. Once again, the
parameters must be entered in the same order as they are listed below.
Following are the Non-Grid Field Description Parameters.

R2003.12.0 Appendix E. Import/Export 834

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Field Name (Parameter 1)

The field name is a name of your choice, which can be up to 20
alphanumeric characters long. Do not put quotes around the name. The
comma signifies its end. If you do not provide a field name when
importing, a default field name based on field type is used.

Example
X-Field, Z-Field, Segment ID., etc.
For a list of standard default field names, see Appendix B. File and Field
Codes, starting on page 785.
When exporting from an MFD out to a formatted data file, the output
Field Name must match the name of the field being exported. If left
blank, by default the name of the field in the MFD is used. This means
that fields to be exported are not selected by Field Index instead of by
Field Name.

Field Index (Parameter 2)

The field index is an integer that represents the sequential number of the
field as it is stored or will be stored in the MFD. When importing data
into an MFD, this parameter is usually left blank and the default
automatically increments to the number of fields already entered plus
one. Field indexes are imported in ascending order. If a Field Index is
skipped when importing, the field indexes are resequenced to correct for
this. When exporting data from an MFD out to a formatted disk file, the
Field Index may be in any order desired. The fields are output in the
Field Index order.

Field Type (Parameter 3)

The field type is an integer typically used when importing a field to
indicate the type of field being created. The Field Type must be one of
the valid types listed in Appendix B. File and Field Codes, starting on
page 785.
Default Value:None = Import
Field Type for that field = Export

R2003.12.0 Appendix E. Import/Export 835

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Record Number (Parameter 4)

As mentioned earlier, a single logical record can contain multiple
physical records. The Record Number value is an integer used to
identify each physical record in a logical record. When exporting, this
value specifies the physical record for storing the field's value.
Default Value:1 (the first physical record)

Starting Location (Parameter 5)

The Starting Location value is an integer that represents the physical
record column in which the field begins. This value is typically between
1 and 80. If the physical record has more than 80 columns, this number
can be larger than 80. Some fields may have the same Starting Location
value, although their Record Number value is usually different.
Default Value:None

Ending Location (Parameter 6)

The Ending Location value is an integer that represents the physical
record column in which the field ends. The value must always be larger
than the Starting Location value. (Otherwise, the value would imply that
the field started at the end of one physical record and carried onto
another physical record, which is not allowed.)
Default Value:None

Decimal Location (Parameter 7)

The Decimal Location value is an integer that specifies the number of
digits to the right of the decimal point. For importing data, this value is
used only if the decimal is missing from the field value in the import file.
If the imported field values include decimals, they override this setting.
For exporting numeric data, this setting specifies the number of digits
included to the right of the decimal point. This parameter is ignored for
text data.
Default Value:0 = Import

R2003.12.0 Appendix E. Import/Export 836

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

7 = Export

ZNON (missing data) Value (Parameter 8)

The ZNON value represents missing entries in the import field (null
values). The value is stored with the field and becomes the ZNON value
for this field on the MFD. If an operation (for example, gridding)
encounters the specified ZNON value, it ignores it.
Default Value:1.0+E30 (Import)

When exporting, this value is written when a ZNON is encountered. If

this parameter is blank, the export ZNON value is either:
the character string specified in the Alphanumeric ZNON Indicator
parameter (Parameter 9 that follows) or
if that parameter is also blank, the ZNON value in the export file.
Default Value:ZNON of file (Export)

Alphanumeric ZNON (missing data) Indicator (Parameter 9)

This is a second way to indicate missing values in the field of your
import file. It is an alphanumeric character string, no longer than:
(Ending Location Starting Location + 1)
Do not enclose the character string in quotes and do not include any
internal blanks; however, blanks before or after it are allowed. The
ZNON Indicator may be used with fields of either numerical or textual
type. When the import operation encounters this character string, it
realizes the fields value is missing and replaces the character string
with the ZNON value when writing to the MFD. Some typical ZNON
Indicators are ZNON, MISSING, and NULL VALUE. The default
value is blanks, for example, ,which means that if a field is left
blank, it is treated as missing and not as a zero value!
When exporting, this character string is written if a ZNON is
encountered and the ZNON value parameter (Parameter 8) above is
blank. If this parameter and the ZNON value parameter are blank, the
ZNON value in the export file is written.

R2003.12.0 Appendix E. Import/Export 837

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Printer Field Width (Parameter 10)

The Printer Field Width value is an integer that specifies the number of
columns used in listings of this field's value.
Default Value:(Ending Location Starting Location +1)

Printer Decimal Location (Parameter 11)

The Printer Decimal Location value is an integer that specifies how
many digits are included to the right of the decimal point in listings of a
numeric field's values. This parameter is ignored for text fields.
Default Value:7

Sort Index (Parameter 12)

The Sort Index value is an integer that indicates the priority given to a
field if sorting is done. A 1 means to sort first on this field, a 2 means to
sort second on this field, and so on. Fields cannot have the same priority.
The maximum value of this parameter is the number of fields being
imported. Both numerical and textual field types can be used when
sorting.
Default Value:0 (setting the program to not use the field in sorting)

Sorting is performed by other operations than import and export. In the import
and export operations, you have the option to override the sort priorities.

Summary: Non-Grid Field Description Parameters

The Field Description Parameters needed for Non-Grid files are: Field
Name, Field Index, Field Type, Rec Number, Starting Location, Ending
Location, Decimal Location, ZNON, Character ZNON, Printer Field
Width, Printer Decimal Location, and Sort Index.

Example
X-FIELD, 1, 1, 1, 1, 15, 7, 1.0E+30, NULL, 15, 7, 0
Y-FIELD, 2, 2, 1, 16, 30, 7, 1.0E+30, , 15, 7, 0
TOPO, 3, 3, 1, 31, 45, 7, 9999, , 15, 7, 0
SYMBOL CODE, 8, 21, 2, 31, 40, 3, -9999, , 10, 3, 0
WELL ID, 9, 20, 2, 41, 52, 12
BIASED TOPO, 10, 3, 2, 53, 67, 7, 1.0E+30, , 15, 7, 0

R2003.12.0 Appendix E. Import/Export 838

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Grid Field Description Parameters

When importing or exporting a grid, the import or export operation
reads or writes column by column, starting in the upper left-hand corner
(NW).

Example
If you are importing a 7 row by 9 column grid in
which there are 4 node values per record, then
IMPORT would read the top 4 rows of column 1 from
the first record and the bottom 3 rows of column
1 from the second record. IMPORT would start on
a new record (record 3) and begin reading values
from column 2, and so on until the grid is read.
The grid field description parameters are specified on three lines of the
format. Certain parameters belong on each line and cannot be carried
from one line to the next. As with non-grid field description parameters,
these parameters must be entered in the same order listed in the
following description.
They must also be separated by commas, and two commas must be used
to hold the position of parameters that are not specified (allowed to
default). Lines containing description parameters have no special
symbols at their start. Following are the grid field description
parameters.

Parameters for Line 1

Field Width (Parameter 1)

The field width is an integer that specifies the total space each grid value
occupies in:
the file that is being imported, or
the file that is being created when exporting

R2003.12.0 Appendix E. Import/Export 839

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

It includes the decimal point and places to the right and left of the
decimal. If the grid value is an integer, the value is right-justified in this
space. If the value has a decimal point, the decimal is positioned
according to your specification in the Number of Decimals parameter
(Parameter 4 of this line). This value must be at least 7 greater than the
Decimal Location (Parameter 4.)
Default Value:15

ZNON (missing data) Value (Parameter 2)

This number is used to represent missing grid values in the file being
imported. The value is stored with the grid and becomes the ZNON
(missing data) value for this grid in the MFD. Each time contouring or
another task encounters this ZNON value it is ignored.
Default Value:1.0E+30 (Import)

When exporting, this is the value written when a ZNON is encountered.

If this parameter is left blank, the export ZNON value is either:
the character string specified in the Alphanumeric ZNON Indicator
parameter (Parameter 3 below), or
if that parameter is also blank, it is the ZNON value in the export
file.

Alphanumeric ZNON (missing data) Indicator (Parameter 3)

This is a second way to indicate missing values in the import file. It is
an alphanumeric character string no longer than the value specified by
the Field Width parameter (Parameter 1 above). The Import task
replaces this character string with the ZNON value when it is written to
the MFD. Do not enclose the character string in quotes and do not
include any internal blanks; however blanks before or after it are
allowed. Typical ZNON Indicators may include ZNON, MISSING,
and 99999. The default value is blanksfor example, ,
which means that if a field is left blank, it is treated as missing and not
as a zero value!

R2003.12.0 Appendix E. Import/Export 840

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

When exporting, this character string is written if a ZNON is

encountered and the ZNON value (Parameter 2) is unspecified. If both
the ZNON value and the Alphanumeric ZNON Indicator values are
unspecified, the export operation uses the ZNON value stored in the
MFD.
Default Value:Blank

Decimal Location (Parameter 4)

This integer represents the number of digits to the right of the decimal
point. This value is used if values stored in the import file do not include
decimals. If the import file data includes decimals, you can leave this
parameter blank. If decimals are included in the import file and this
parameter has a value, Z-MAP Plus requires the Field Width
(Parameter 1) to be at least 7 greater than the Decimal Location value.
If this minimum is met, this parameter is overridden.
When exporting this value, this is the number of digits to the right of the
decimal point plus one for the decimal point.
Default Value:0 = Import
7 = Export

Starting Position (Parameter 5)

This integer represents the starting column for the first grid value of
each physical record.
Default Value:Column 1

Summary: Parameters for Line 1

The Field Description Parameters for Grid files Line 1 are: Field Width,
ZNON, Character ZNON, Decimal Location, and Start Location.

Example
15, 9999.0, , 5, 10
, ,UNKNOWN

Using Default Values

In the second example the first two and final parameters use the default values.

R2003.12.0 Appendix E. Import/Export 841

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Parameters for Line 2

Number of Rows (Parameter 1)

The number of rows (nodes in the N-S direction) in the grid.
Default Value:None

Number of Columns (Parameter 2)

The number of columns (nodes in the E-W direction) in the grid.
Default Value:None

Minimum X-Value (Parameter 3)

The minimum x coordinate in the grid (the x coordinate of the left-most
column of grid nodes). This value subtracted from the maximum
X-value divided by the number of columns yields the X-grid interval.
Default Value:None

Maximum X-Value (Parameter 4)

The maximum x coordinate in the grid (coordinate of the right-most
column of grid nodes).
Default Value:None

Minimum Y-Value (Parameter 5)

The minimum y coordinate in the grid (y coordinate of the lower-most
row of grid nodes). This value subtracted from the maximum Y-value
divided by the number of rows yields the Y-grid interval.
Default Value:None

Maximum Y-Value (Parameter 6)

The maximum y coordinate in the grid (y coordinate of the upper-most
row of grid nodes).
Default Value:None

Summary: Parameters for Line 2

The Field Description Parameters for Grid files Line 2 are: Number of
Rows, Number of Columns, Minimum X, Maximum X, Minimum Y, and
Maximum Y.

Example
3, 2, 0.0, 9765.01, -400.32, 900.25
501, 301, 0., 10000., 0., 900

R2003.12.0 Appendix E. Import/Export 842

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Parameters for Line 3

Reach, Distance From Grid Cell (Parameter 1)

This number represents the maximum distance from each grid node that
data was obtained when computing the value for that node. This value
is used only for header information and does not affect the character of
the stored grid.
Default Value:0.0

X-Expand (Distance Beyond The X-Grid Boundary)

(Parameter 2)
This number represents the distance in the X-direction beyond the edge
of the grid that data could lie and still be used to build the grid. This
value is used only for header information and does not affect the
character of the stored grid.
Default Value:0.0

Y-Expand (Distance Beyond The Y-Grid Boundary)

(Parameter 3)
This number represents the distance in the Y-direction beyond the edge
of the grid that data could lie and still be used to build the grid. This
value is used only for header information and does not affect the
character of the stored grid.
Default Value:0.0

Summary: Parameters for Line 3

The Field Description Parameters for Grid files Line 3 are:
Reach, X-expand and Y-expand

Example
10.0, 20.0, 40.0
0.0, 10.0, 0.0

R2003.12.0 Appendix E. Import/Export 843

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Lattice Field Description Parameters

During the operation to import or export a lattice file, the program reads
or writes the vertical spacings, followed by the horizontal spacings.

Example
If you are importing a 7 by 7 lattice file, then
IMPORT would read the first 7 vertical spacings
followed by the 7 horizontal spacings.
The lattice field description parameters are specified on two lines of the
format. Certain parameters belong to each line and cannot be carried
from one line to the next. As with non-grid field description parameters,
these parameters must be entered in the same order as they are listed
below.
They must also be separated by commas, and two commas must be used
to hold the position of parameters that are not specified (allowed to
default). Lines containing description parameters have no special
symbols at their start. Following are the lattice field description
parameters.

Parameters for Line 1

Number of Digits to the Right of the Decimal (Parameter 1)

This integer specifies the number of decimal places that each spacing
value uses.

Number of Spaces to Indent the Data (Parameters 2)

This integer specifies how far the data is indented from the left most
column.

Type of Spacing (Parameter 3)

This text field indicates whether the spacing is uniform (UNIFORM) or
not (NOTUNIF).

R2003.12.0 Appendix E. Import/Export 844

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Number of Vertical Spacings (Parameter 4)

This integer indicates the number of column spacings that are read from
the data file.

Number of Horizontal Spacings (Parameter 5)

This integer indicates the number of row spacings that are read from the
data file.

Angle of Rotation (Parameter 6)

This number represents how far from horizontal the lattice has been
tilted.

Summary: Parameters for Line 1

The Field Description Parameters for Lattice files for Line 1 are:
Number of decimal places, where to start, the type of spacing, the
number of vertical (column) and horizontal (row) spacings and the angle
of rotation.

Example
7, 1, NOTUNIF, 7, 7, 43.11157
5, 2, UNIFORM, 5, 4, 0.0

R2003.12.0 Appendix E. Import/Export 845

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Parameters for Line 2

X-Coordinate for the Origin (Parameter 1)

This number represents the origin for the X-value of the lattice.

Y-Coordinate for the Origin (Parameter 2)

This number represents the origin for the Y-value of the lattice.

Summary: Parameters for Line 2

The Field Description Parameters for Lattice files for Line 2 are: the X-
and Y-coordinates for the lattice origin.

Example
304344.3125, 1507823.750
0.0, 0.0

R2003.12.0 Appendix E. Import/Export 846

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Format File
Many file formats referring to a variety of different datasets may be
stored in one file. The file is a standard formatted disk file built with a
text editor. The formats are stored one after the other with no extra lines
between them.
To use a format in a format file you must specify the format file name.
You must also specify the format in the format file.
The format file concept has been carried to the format that is placed at
the top of the actual data file. Sometimes it is desirable to read a file
using several different descriptions. For example, you may want to read
some of the fields in one transfer and other fields in another transfer.
Several formats can be placed on top of the file being transferred. To get
the description you want to use, specify the name of that format.
If several formats are at the top of a file and no format name is specified,
the first group is used when the data is transferred.

Examples
The examples in the following text illustrate the file and field
description parameters for non-grid and grid files.

Non-Grid Examples

Example 1: For a Data File

@ SKYPLUS HEADER, DATA, 80, 2
!
! ZIMS FILE NAME : SKYPLUS
! FORMATTED FILE CREATION DATE: DEC 29 87
! FORMATTED FILE CREATION TIME: 09:56
!
+ HISTORY CARD 1
+ HISTORY CARD 2
+ HISTORY CARD 3
X-FIELD, 1, 1, 1, 1, 15, 7, 0.1000000E+31, , 15, 7, 0
Y-FIELD, 2, 2, 1, 16, 30, 7, 0.1000000E+31, , 15, 7, 0
TOPO, 3, 3, 1, 31, 45, 7, 9999.000, , 15, 7, 0
TOP-1, 4, 3, 1, 46, 60, 7, 9999.000, , 15, 7, 0
THICK-1, 5, 3, 1, 61, 75, 7, 9999.000, , 15, 7, 0
TOP -2, 6, 3, 2, 1, 15, 7, 9999.000, , 15, 7, 0
THICK-2, 7, 3, 2, 16, 30, 7, 9999.000, , 15, 7, 0
SYMBOL CODE, 8, 21, 2, 31, 40, 3, 0.1000000E+31, , 10, 3, 0
WELL ID, 9, 20, 2, 41, 52, 1
BIASED TOPO, 10, 3, 2, 53, 67, 7, 0.1000000E+31, , 15, 7, 0
@

R2003.12.0 Appendix E. Import/Export 847

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Example 2: For a Contour File

@ BYE CONTOURS, CNTR, 80, 1
!
! ZIMS FILE NAME : GRID BYE CONTOURS
! FORMATTED FILE CREATION DATE: JAN 20 88
! FORMATTED FILE CREATION TIME: 19:18
!
X (EASTING), 1, 1, 1, 1, 14, 7, 9999.000, NEWCONTOUR, 14, 7, 0
Y (NORTHING), 2, 2, 1, 15, 30, 7, 9999.000, NEWCONTOUR, 14, 7, 0
@

Example 3: For a Fault or Vertex File

@ FRACTURE, FALT, 80,1
! ZIMS FILE NAME : FRACTURE CTOG FAULTS
! FORMATTED FILE CREATION DATE: JAN 26 88
! FORMATTED FILE CREATION TIME: 23:27
!
X-FIELD, 1, 1, 1, 1, 15, 5, 0.1000000E+31, , 15, 5, 0
Y-FIELD, 2, 2, 1, 16, 30, 5, 0.1000000E+31, , 15, 5, 0
SEG I.D., 3, 35, 1, 31, 35, 0, 0.1000000E+31, , 5, 0, 0
@

Example 4: For a Deviated Well File

@ DEVIATED WELLS, DWEL, 80, 1
!
! ZIMS FILE NAME : DEVIATED WELLS
! FORMATTED FILE CREATION DATE: JAN 26 88
! FORMATTED FILE CREATION TIME: 23:55
!
X (EASTING), 1, 1, 1, 1, 14, 7, 0.1000000E+31, , 14, 7, 0
Y (NORTHING), 2, 2, 1, 15, 28, 7, 0.1000000E+31, , 14, 7, 0
WELL NAME, 3, 27, 1, 29, 36, 8,
SEGMENT ID, 4, 35, 1, 37, 50, 7, 0.1000000E+31, , 14, 7, 0
WELL TRACT 5, 26, 1, 51, 54, 4,
@

R2003.12.0 Appendix E. Import/Export 848

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Grid Examples

Example 1:
@ TOPOLOGICAL GRID, GRID, 5
!
! Date: 04 February, 1996
! Author: VAB
! Purpose: This Format Group may be used for grid
! formatted files
!
+ This file covers the Nomans Land Basin in Anywhere, Alaska.
+ It was obtained in May of 1985 from Crater Company.
!
15, 9999.0, , 5, 10
3, 2, 0.0, 9765.01, -400.32, 900.25
1000.0, 200.0, 200.0
@

Example 2:
@BASELINE GRID, GRID, 5
!
, , UNKNOWN
501, 301, 0., 10000., 0., 900
500.0, 0.0, 0.0
@

R2003.12.0 Appendix E. Import/Export 849

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Structuring Files for Transfer into a Master File

Introduction
How files are structured for transfer into an MFD depends on: 1) the
type of data being transferred, and 2) the process in which the data is
used. This section contains important information regarding these
different file types and how they must be structured for use in the
selected Z-MAP Plus process.
Among the many different types of data that Z-MAP Plus supports are:
contour, control point, deviated well, fault, grid, profile, text, vertex,
seismic sections, and geologic sections. When you transfer data to an
MFD, keep the following points in mind:
Not all data that can be transferred into an MFD can be used
by the Z-MAP Plus program.
Some types of data may be input as more than one file type. For
example, you can bring in contour data as a contour file or a
control point file, depending on the data structure.
Fields may consist of any number of characters and may be in
any order.
Some file structures are rigid; others are free format. Seismic
section data is an example of a rigid file structure, while contour is
an example of a free format structure.
Control Point files may contain anywhere from two to fifty
fields. However, two fields must always be either X and Y or
latitude and longitude. When latitude and longitude fields are
substituted for the X- and Y-fields, you must generate the X- and
Y-fields before using the file in most processes. You may do this by
performing coordinate transformation on the file.
Vertex files must have a minimum of three fields: the X-field,
the Y-field, and the Segment ID.

R2003.12.0 Appendix E. Import/Export 850

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

File Structures
Each of the charts in this section is dedicated to a different type of data.
The purpose of these charts is to:
List the file structures associated with each file type.
Help you select the correct data type for the selected structure.
Tell you the minimum number of fields you should transfer in
when you use a particular structure.
Help you match the correct file structure with the process you use.
Comments specific to each file structure are also provided, as well as an
example of the structure.

How Grids are Formatted

Z-MAP Plus reads grid files into an MFD in the following order:
column by column
top to bottom
left to right
Grids going from an MFD out to a disk file are written in the same
manner.

START

YMAX Z1,1 Z2,1 Z3,1 Z4,1

Z1,2 Z2,2 Z3,2 Z4,2

YMIN Z1,3 Z2,3 Z3,3 Z4,3

XMIN XMAX

NCOLS = 4
NROWS = 3

How Grids are Formatted

R2003.12.0 Appendix E. Import/Export 851

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

How Contour Files Are Structured

Contour Files Structured As: Are Imported As: Can Be Used By:

Contour Gridding
ZNON/Marker* Contour Level CONTOUR Data Contour Editing
X Y with 2 Fields Contour Digitizing
Contour Drawing

Example: Comment:

0.1000E+31 9500 ZNON (the null data value) or a unique marker value is
1200. 826.1 the first value read from the record. All subsequent
1400. 832.2 records beginning with this value are recognized as
0.1000E+31 9600. divider records.
1522 1000.
1568 1200.
1578 1400
* Marker can be any value not found in the data. All subsequent records having this value is considered as divider
records. A file with the marker in the latitude or Y-field cannot be converted by the coordinate transformation
operation.
ZNON
ZNON Continuation
Contour Level Flag
X Y CONTOUR Data Contour Editing
with a Minimum Contour Gridding
of 2 Fields Contour Drawing

ZNON ZNON (optional line,
not required for input)

Example: Comments:

0.1000E+31 0.1000E+31 The Contouring subtask of Z-MAP Plus outputs contours

9000. 1.2 in this file structure. For best annotation results, this same
585.6 1600. structure should be used to input contours into this
600.0 1578. subtask. Contour files input into Contour Gridding do
686.4 1400. not require this data.
800.0 1329.
914.4 1400.
Continuation Flags (e.g., 1.2)
1000. 1572.
1032. 1600. Number to the left of the decimal indicates initial trace/
0.1000E+31 0.1000E+31 continued trace of the same contour.
9000. 1.4 1 = initial
1200. 1461. 0 = continued trace
1264. 1400. Number to the right of the decimal indicates whether
1220. 1200. downhill is on the left or on the right.
1200. 1146. 2 = on the left
1172. 1200. 4 = on the right
1145. 1400.
1200. 1461.
-.1000E+31 -.1000E+31

R2003.12.0 Appendix E. Import/Export 852

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Contour Files Structured As: Are Imported As: Can Be Used By:

Contour Level ZNON/Marker* Control Point Data Contour Gridding

X Y with 2 Fields Post Data/Grids

Example:

9500. 0.1000E+31
1200. 826.1
1400. 832.2
9600. 0.1000E+31
1522. 1000.
1568. 1200.
1578. 1400.
1593. 1600.
* Marker can be any value not found in the data. All subsequent records having this value is considered as divider
records. A file with the marker in the latitude or Y-field cannot be converted by the coordinate transformation
operation

ZNON Dummy Dummy Control Point Data Contour Gridding

X Y Z with 3 Fields Post Data/Grids

Example: Comments:

0.1000E+3 99999. 99999. Any number can be entered as a "Dummy" value, as the
1 826.1 9500. program ignores these values.
1200. 832.2 9500.
1400. 1000. 9600. The contour level changes each time the Z-value changes.
1522. 1200. 9600.
1568. 1400. 9600
1578.
Contour Gridding (with
careful attention to
Control Point Data
X Y Z error checking
with 3 Fields
parameters)
Post Data/Grids

Example: Comment:

1200. 826.1 9500. The contour level changes each time the Z-value changes.
1400. 832.2 9500.
1522. 1000. 9600.
1568. 1200. 9600.
1578. 1400. 9600.
1593. 1600. 9600.
1200. 826.1 9600.
1096. 800.0 9600.

R2003.12.0 Appendix E. Import/Export 853

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

How Vertex Files Are Structured

Vertex Files Structured As: Are Imported As: Can Be Used By:

Any process that

Vertex Data
X Y SEG ID requires polygons or
with 3 Fields
lines

Example: Comment:

585.6 1600. 1.0 These are polygonal vertices without symbol code field.
600.0 1578. 1.0
686.4 1400. 1.0
1200. 1461. 2.0
1264. 1400. 2.0
1220. 1200. 2.0
Any process that
SYMBOL Vertex Data
X Y SEG ID requires polygons or
CODE with 4 Fields or Lines
lines

Example: Comment:

584.6 1600. 1.0 24 These are polygonal vertices without symbol code field.
600.0 1578. 1.0 24
686.4 1400. 1.0 24
1200. 1461. 1.0 24
1264. 1400. 1.0 24
1220. 1200. 1.0 24
Vertex files may also contain additional fields such as Color, Area Identification, etc.

R2003.12.0 Appendix E. Import/Export 854

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

How Profile Data is Structured

Profile Files Structured As: Are Imported As: Can Be Used By:

ZNON Dummy Dummy

X Y Z1


Contour Gridding
Control Point Data
Xn Yn Z1
with 3 Fields Post Data/Grids
ZNON Dummy Dummy
X Y Z2


Xm Ym Z2

Example: Comment:

0.1000E+3 99999. 99999. Any number can be entered as a "Dummy" value, as the
1 1.4000 400.0 program ignores these values.
7.6000 2.7510 398.0
7.7500 99999. 99999.
0.1000E+3 4.4750 405.0
1 5.8800 412.0
7.7000
7.1500
SEG Control Point Data Post Data/Grids
X Y Z
ID with 4 Fields

Example: Comment:

7.6000 1.4000 400.00 1.0 Each time the Segment ID changes, a new profile line
7.7500 2.7510 398.00 1.0 begins.
7.7000 4.4750 405.00 2.0
7.1500 5.8800 412.00 2.0
6.4000 6.1900 413.00 3.0
6.4500 6.6100 414.00 3.0
6.8500 0.3980 406.00 3.0
5.4920 0 409.50 4.0
4.4280 0.5560 416.00 4.0
3.5090 0 423.00 4.0
2.4250 1.3910 430.00 4.0
2.0500 1.7900 434.00 4.0
1.4940
1.3000

R2003.12.0 Appendix E. Import/Export 855

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

How Fault Files are Structured

Fault Files Structured As: Are Imported As: Can Be Used By:

Point Gridding
SEG DELTA DIP Faults Plus
X Y HEAVE
ID Z-THROW ANGLE with 6 Fields Line Drawing
Post Data/Grids

Example: Comment:

585.6 1600. 1.0 10.5 85 3.0 This is the center-line fault structure used in
600.0 1578. 1.0 10.7 82 2.9 Point Gridding Plus.
686.4 1400. 1.0 10.2 87 2.7
1200. 1461. 2.0 10.9 81 3.5
1264. 1400. 2.0 11.3 78 3.6
1220. 1200. 2.0 11.1 77 3.8
SEG BAND Faults Point Gridding
X Y
ID WIDTH with 4 Fields

Example: Comment:

585.6 1600. 1.0 10.0 This structure includes a fault bandwidth field
600.0 1578. 1.0 25.0 used only by point gridding. Contour
686.4 1400. 1.0 10.0 Gridding can use this file, but ignores this
1200. 1461. 2.0 10.0 field.
1264. 1400. 2.0 25.0
1220. 1200. 2.0 10.0
Point Gridding
Plus
SEG Faults
X Y Point Gridding
ID with 3 Fields
Contour Gridding
Line Drawing

Example: Comment:

585.6 1600. 1.0 These are faults with no fault band data.
600.0 1578. 1.0
686.4 1400. 1.0
1200. 1461. 2.0
1264. 1400. 2.0
1220. 1200. 2.0
SEG Faults Contour Gridding
X Y Zleft Zright
ID with 5 Fields Line Drawing

Example: Comment:

R2003.12.0 Appendix E. Import/Export 856

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Fault Files Structured As: Are Imported As: Can Be Used By:

585.6 1600. 1.0 25.0 36.0 Contour Gridding accepts this format. Using
600.0 1578. 1.0 27.0 30.0 Zleft and Zright avoids having to create
686.4 1400. 1.0 28.0 37.0 separate profile lines around faults to help
1200. 1461. 2.0 27.0 35.0 control Contour Gridding.
1264. 1400. 2.0 26.0 36.0
1220 1200. 2.0 27.0 37.0
ZNON 0
X1 Y1



Faults
Xn Yn
(Faults with No Contour Gridding
ZNON 0
Bands)
X1 Y1



Xm Ym

Example:

0.1000E+31 0
1200. 826.1
1400. 826.2
1522. 1000.
1568. 1200.
1578. 1400.
1593. 1600.
0.1000E+31 0

R2003.12.0 Appendix E. Import/Export 857

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Other Types of Files You Can Transfer to an MF

D

Deviated Well Posting

File Type: DWEL
Minimum No. of Fields = 4
(The Well Track Name is optional. An optional Z-field might also be inserted.)
May also optionally include: Symbol Code Fields, Text Size Fields, Color Fields
and Z-values
Can be used by: Post Data/Grids
X Y DEVIATED SEG ID WELL TRACK
WELL NAME NAME (Optional)

Example:

1920060. 43687.39 A 1.000000 DA-A

1919892. 44213.71 A 1.000000 DA-A
1920060. 43687.39 A 2.000000 DA-B
1919339. 41996.05 A 2.000000 DA-B
1920060. 43687.39 A 3.000000 DA-C
1921219. 43323.96 A 3.000000 DA-C
1918564. 39681.36 WELL DB 5.000000 DB-C
1918522. 37217.57 WELL DB 5.000000 DB-C
1918564. 39681.36 WELL DB 6.000000 DB-B
1918162. 38766.77 WELL DB 6.000000 DB-B
1918564. 39681.36 WELL DB 7.000000 DB-A
1918231. 40737.25 WELL DB 7.000000 DB-A
Seismic Section
File Type: SSEC
Minimum No. of Fields = 4
Can be used by: File Conversions
X-FIELD Y-FIELD LINE NAME HORIZON NAME

Example:

0.1000000E+31 0.0000000E+00 LIN-001 FAULTA/LEFT

22.71431 0.3432056 LIN-001 FAULTA/LEFT
11.73763 2.151490 LIN-001 FAULTA/LEFT
0.1000000E+31 0.0000000E+00 LIN-001 FAULTA/LEFT
0.1000000E+31 0.0000000E+00 LIN-001 FAULTA/RIGHT
17.57001 2.205378 LIN-001 FAULTA/RIGHT
27.62594 0.3503071 LIN-001 FAULTA/RIGHT

Comment:

The X-field is a non-integer shotpoint number and the Y-field measures time. However, the X- and Y-fields are used
instead of the shotpoint number field and the Z-field because it represents the x,y axes of a seismic section.

R2003.12.0 Appendix E. Import/Export 858

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Text
File Type: TEXT
Minimum No. of Fields = 3
Can be used by: All text processes
X-FIELD Y-FIELD TEXT FIELD

Example:

1913272. 43947. Z-MAP Plus Contours

Comment:

Text files may also define location mode, font, character size and orientation.
Cross Section
File Type: XSEC
Minimum No. of Fields = 4
Can be used by: (generated by) Z-CAP
X-FIELD Y-FIELD LINE NAME HORIZON NAME

Example:

0.1000000E+31 0.0000000E+00 BASEPLANE 1 HORIZON K

18.81438 -9177.212 BASEPLANE 1 HORIZON K
38.05873 -9177.458 BASEPLANE 1 HORIZON K
57.27757 -9177.604 BASEPLANE 1 HORIZON K
76.54882 -9177.950 BASEPLANE 1 HORIZON K
93.91723 -9178.347 BASEPLANE 1 HORIZON K
107.4618 -9178.795 BASEPLANE 1 HORIZON K
124.8698 -9179.342 BASEPLANE 1 HORIZON K
138.4157 -9179.789 BASEPLANE 1 HORIZON K
153.8920 -9180.286 BASEPLANE 1 HORIZON K
171.3008 -9180.834 BASEPLANE 1 HORIZON K
190.5720 -9181.180 BASEPLANE 1 HORIZON K
206.0497 -9181.677 BASEPLANE 1 HORIZON K
221.4849 -9182.024 BASEPLANE 1 HORIZON K
0.1000000E+31 0.0000000E+00 BASEPLANE 1 HORIZON K

Comment:

The X-field represents linear displacement along the profile baseline, while the Y-field represents depth. However,
X- and Y-fields are used instead of the linear displacement field and the Z-field because it represents the x,y axes of
a cross section.

R2003.12.0 Appendix E. Import/Export 859

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Importing ASCII Files Into Z-MAP Plus and OpenWorks

You can use Z-MAP Plus to transfer ASCII data formatted for input into
an MFD directly into the OpenWorks database. The following
illustration shows how to import data directly into OpenWorks or to
import data by going through Z-MAP Plus.

MFD Copy Files

Disk File to MFD/OW

OpenWorks

Grid File to MFD/OW

MFD Copy Files

Disk File to MFD/OW

You can use the File Import ASCII(Import) option to perform
either of these tasks:
Import ASCII data into an MFD, then use the File Copy
Files option to transfer the data to OpenWorks.
Import ASCII data directly to the OpenWorks database.

You can use the ASCII (Import) option to save the following data in an
MFD or in OpenWorks:
Well Data (X, Y, Z)
Grids
Contours
Vertices
Profiles
Faults

R2003.12.0 Appendix E. Import/Export 860

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Grid File to MFD/OW

Select File Import Grid file to MFD/OW to execute the
IMPORT-GRID macro. This option imports a GRID file from an
external ASCII file into an attached MFD.
For more information, see Grid File to MFD/OW on page 130, and
the Macro Reference Manual for Z-MAP Plus / ZCL.

Other Tools
OpenWorks also contains tools you can use to load mapping data into
the OpenWorks database. These tools accessible from the OpenWorks
menu under Data Import. (For more information about these
options, see the OpenWorks Data Loading guide).
The following OpenWorks tools are of particular interest to
Z-MAP Plus users:
Data Import ASCII Well Loader
Data Import Curve Loader
Data Import Map Data I/O (Point sets and Fault
polygons)
Data Import MFD Cultural Loader

R2003.12.0 Appendix E. Import/Export 861

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Example 1: Loading an ASCII Dataset into OpenWorks ASCII (Import)

You can use the Disk File to MFD/OW option to import ASCII data
into OpenWorks in the same way you import data into Z-MAP Plus,
except for the way you specify the output file name. To specify an
output file name and write it to the OpenWorks database, follow these
steps:

Step 1:
Click the Output Name button in
the IMPORT FILES dialog box.

Step 2:
Select OpenWorks
from the Output
MASTER FILE
drop-down list. A
default Fault Set Name
appears in the Output
File Name box. Click
the OW button. The
OpenWorks Output
Specification dialog
box appears.

Step 3:
Review and change, if necessary,
the Fault Set Name and other
parameters. Click OK.

ASCII (Import) Output Name

After you complete these steps and click Apply in the Import Files
dialog box, the data is written to the OpenWorks database. You can then
use the data in Z-MAP Plus for mapping.

R2003.12.0 Appendix E. Import/Export 862

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Example 2: Loading ASCII Grid to OpenWorks with Grid File to MFD/OW

Use the File Import Grid File to MFD/OW option to import
ASCII disk files that contain grid data in the Z-MAP Plus export format.
This process is actually a macro you can use to build the special format
group that a grid requires.
The procedure for importing ASCII grid data into OpenWorks is the
same as the procedure for importing grid data into Z-MAP Plus, except
for the way you specify the Output Grid File name.
To specify an output grid file name and write it to the OpenWorks
database, follow these steps:

Step 1:
Click the Fill in Macro Parameter Defaults
button, then click the View Parameter Panels,
Change/Assign Parameters Values button
on the EXECUTE MACRO dialog box.
Fill in appropriate macro parameters until the
following dialog box appears.

Step 2:
Select OpenWorks for
the MFD to Contain the
Output Grid File. A
default map data set
name appears in the
Name of the Output
Grid File. Click the OW
button. In the OpenWorks
Output Specification
dialog box that appears,
make any needed
changes and click OK.

Step 3:
Review and change, if necessary,
the Map Data Set Name and the
other parameters. Click OK.

Grid file to MFD/OW Output Name

R2003.12.0 Appendix E. Import/Export 863

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

After you complete these steps, the grid data is written to the
OpenWorks database and is accessible in Z-MAP Plus.

R2003.12.0 Appendix E. Import/Export 864

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Appendix F.
State Plane Codes

State Plane Projection Codes

The table in this section lists the setup codes for grid system
transformation to projection parameters.

Compliance with API Codes

The State Plane codes in the following table are based on the API codes and
abbreviations. Occasionally, an additional character is required for a specific
state differentiation.

R2003.12.0 Appendix F. State Plane Codes 865

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

State Plane
NAD 27 NAD 83
No. State/Territory
Zone Zone
Char. Code Num. Code

1 Alabama East East AL_E 0101

West West AL_W 0102

2 Alaska Zone 1 Zone 1 AK_1 5001

Zone 2 Zone 2 AK_2 5002
Zone 3 Zone 3 AK_3 5003
Zone 4 Zone 4 AK_4 5004
Zone 5 Zone 5 AK_5 5005
Zone 6 Zone 6 AK_6 5006
Zone 7 Zone 7 AK_7 5007
Zone 8 Zone 8 AK_8 5008
Zone 9 Zone 9 AK_9 5009
Zone 10 Zone 10 AK_10 5010

3 Arizona East East AZ_E 0201

Central Central AZ_C 0202
West West AZ_W 0203

4 Arkansas North North AR_N 0301

South South AR_S 0302

5 California Zone 1 Zone 1 CA_1 0401

Zone 2 Zone 2 CA_2 0402
Zone 3 Zone 3 CA_3 0403
Zone 4 Zone 4 CA_4 0404
Zone 5 Zone 5 CA_5 0405
Zone 6 Zone 6 CA_6 0406
Zone 7 CA_7 0407

6 Colorado North North CO_N 0501

Central Central CO_C 0502
South South CO_S 0503

7 Connecticut CT 0600

8 Delaware DE 0700

9 Florida North North FL_N 0903

East East FL_E 0901
West West FL_W 0902

10 Georgia East East GA_E 1001

West West GA_W 1002

R2003.12.0 Appendix F. State Plane Codes 866

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

State Plane
NAD 27 NAD 83
No. State/Territory
Zone Zone
Char. Code Num. Code

11 Hawaii Zone 1 Zone 1 HI_1 5101

Zone 2 Zone 2 HI_2 5102
Zone 3 Zone 3 HI_3 5103
Zone 4 Zone 4 HI_4 5104
Zone 5 Zone 5 HI_5 5105

12 Idaho East East ID_E 1101

Central Central ID_C 1102
West West ID_W 1103

13 Illinois East East IL_E 1201

West West IL_W 1202

14 Indiana East East IN_E 1301

West West IN_W 1302

15 Iowa North North IA_N 1401

South South IA_S 1402

16 Kansas North North KS_N 1501

South South KS_S 1502

17 Kentucky North North KY_N 1601

South South KY_S 1602

18 Louisiana North North LA_N 1701

South South LA_S 1702
Offshore Offshore LA_O LA_SH 1703
2

19 Maine East East ME_E 1801

West West ME_W 1802

20 Maryland MD 1900

1 Non-standard API, because of conflict.

2 Character code for NAD 83.
3 Numeric code for NAD 83.

R2003.12.0 Appendix F. State Plane Codes 867

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

State Plane
NAD 27 NAD 83
No. State/Territory
Zone Zone
Char. Code Num. Code

21 Massachusetts Mainland Mainland MA_M 2001

Island Island MA_O MA_I2 2002

22 Michigan (Old) East MI_E 2101

Central MIO_C1 2102
West MI_W 2103

23 Michigan (Current) North North MI_N 2111

Central Central MI_C 2112
South South MI_S 2113

24 Minnesota North North MN_N 2201

Central Central MN_C 2202
South South MN_S 2203

25 Mississippi East East MS_E 2301

West West MS_W 2302

26 Missouri East East MO_E 2401

Central Central MO_C 2402
West West MO_W 2403

27 Montana One Zone MT2 25003

North MT_N 2501
Central MT_C 2502
South MT_S 2503

28 Nebraska One Zone NE2 26003

North NE_N 2601
South NE_S 2602

2 Character code for NAD 83.

3 Numeric code for NAD 83.
4 Zone 2 for Puerto Rico includes St. Croix.

R2003.12.0 Appendix F. State Plane Codes 868

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

State Plane
NAD 27 NAD 83
No. State/Territory
Zone Zone
Char. Code Num. Code

29 Nevada East East NV_E 2701

Central Central NV_C 2702
West West NV_W 2703

30 New Hampshire NH 2800

31 New Jersey NJ 2900

32 New Mexico East East NM_E 3001

Central Central NM_C 3002
West West NM_W 3003

33 New York East East NY_E 3101

Central Central NY_C 3102
West West NY_W 3103
Long Island Long Island NY_LI NY_L2 3104

34 North Carolina NC 3200

35 North Dakota North North ND_N 3301

South South ND_S 3302

36 Ohio North North OH_N 3401

South South OH_S 3402

37 Oklahoma North North OK_N 3501

South South OK_S 3502

38 Oregon North North OR_N 3601

South South OR_S 3602

39 Pennsylvania North North PA_N 3701

South South PA_S 3702

40 Puerto Rico and Virgin One Zone PR2 52003

Islands Zone 1 PR 5201
Zone 2 VI4 5202

41 Rhode Island RI 3800

42 Samoa AS 5300

R2003.12.0 Appendix F. State Plane Codes 869

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

State Plane
NAD 27 NAD 83
No. State/Territory
Zone Zone
Char. Code Num. Code

43 South Carolina One Zone SC2 39003

North SC_N 3901
South SC_S 3902

44 South Dakota North North SD_N 4001

South South SD_S 4002

45 Tennessee TN 4100

46 Texas North North TX_N 4201

North Central North Central TX_NC 4202
Central Central TX_C 4203
South Central South Central TX_SC 4204
South South TX_S 4205

47 Utah North North UT_N 4301

Central Central UT_C 4302
South South UT_S 4303

48 Vermont VT 4400

49 Virginia North North VA_N 4501

South South VA_S 4502

50 Washington North North WA_N 4601

South South WA_S 4602

51 West Virginia North North WV_N 4701

South South WV_S 4702

52 Wisconsin North North WI_N 4801

Central Central WI_C 4802
South South WI_S 4803

53 Wyoming East East WY_E 4901

East Central East Central WY_EC 4902
West Central West Central WY_WC 4903
West West WY_W 4904

R2003.12.0 Appendix F. State Plane Codes 870

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Appendix G.
Mapping and Cartographic Projections

Overview
Projections transform coordinates between geodetic format (latitude and
longitude) and projected format (northings and eastings).
A map projection may be associated with each picture you generate.
Once you project a picture, however, all data to be plotted in the picture
must be compatible with the pictures projection parameters. (This
applies to all picture data, such as contour, vertex, control point, and grid
data.). Before you can plot the picture data, geodetic coordinates must
also be transformed to northings/eastings by using the correct map
projections.
To set up a projection, you must perform these tasks:
Choose a control point dataset.
Specify the projection direction (for example, Lat/Long to N/E).
Select a projection and specify the applicable parameters.
Enter the output file name and coordinate field names.

R2003.12.0 Appendix G. Mapping and Cartographic Projections 871

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Map Properties
As a flat two-dimensional map cannot accurately represent the curved
surface of the earth, a compromise must be found in the resultant
distortion to satisfy the needs of each application. Cartographic
projections generally are classified by the properties preserved in
transforming the curved face of the earth to a flat map. Shape, area,
distance and direction are the most important properties that may be
retained by a map. A single map projection can at best only meet one or
two of these properties. Each is discussed below.

Shapes
If a map represents the true shape of each localized region on the earth,
it is said to be conformal. The shapes and angles of a local region are
preserved, along with the contours of boundaries, borders and
coastlines. Lines representing parallels and meridians always cross at
right angles. The three most common conformal projections are:

Mercator (Transverse, Oblique, Equatorial)

Lambert Conformal
Stereographic
Conformality is a term loosely applied to some projections. A few
projections are genuinely conformal, while most are conformal only for
very small areas near the origin of the map. The familiar rectangular
Standard Mercator map found in schoolrooms is conformal.

Areas
When a map accurately represents the relative proportions of different
areas of the earth, it is called an equivalent or equal-area map.
Consequently, a penny placed anywhere on the map covers the same
total surface area. Note that conformality (correct shapes) does not
imply equivalence (correct area proportions). For example, the Standard
Mercator projection correctly depicts the contours of both Greenland
and South America. However, it scales the surface area of Greenland as
almost equal to that of South America when in reality, Greenland is only
about one-ninth the size of South America.
As a rule, equivalent projections are considered only when working with
a very large area, such as world maps.

R2003.12.0 Appendix G. Mapping and Cartographic Projections 872

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Distances
Although the area scale of a map may be kept constant (equivalent), this
is usually not true for the scale distance between two points on a map.
The scale varies along a line between two locations, even if the scale
areas are in correct proportion. The optimal situation is one where true
scale is preserved on the map along a particular line on the earth. This
line is called a standard parallel or a central meridian.

Directions
Since the earth is globular, compass directions at a location bend in the
direction of the earths curvature and can actually overlap on the
opposite side of the earth. This may be illustrated by imagining a ship
headed toward the North Pole. Once the ship passes the pole it is then
headed south, opposite from its original direction. Thus, it is not
possible to obtain a true azimuth from one location to another simply by
measuring the apparent angle on a flat map. However, a special class of
projections allows the measurement of true azimuth from the reference
point at the center of the map to any other point on the map. Such maps
are called azimuthal projections. Unfortunately, azimuthal projections
suffer distortions in other important map properties such as shape, area,
and distance.

R2003.12.0 Appendix G. Mapping and Cartographic Projections 873

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Control Parameters

Input Dataset
Coordinate Transformations can be performed on control point, contour,
fault, vertex, and/or any other datasets having x and y coordinates.
Control point data need only consist of x,y fields where x is the
horizontal distance of the data point and y is the distance of that point
perpendicular to x.

Direction of Projection
Data may be transformed between geodetic and northing/easting
coordinate system, using either a forward or inverse projection.

Forward Projection
A forward projection translates latitude/longitude locations to
northing/easting locations given a set of map projection parameters.
Geodetic locations on a data file must first be projected before you can
display the information on a map.

Inverse Projection
An inverse projection recovers latitude/longitude coordinates from
northing/easting coordinates. This option is useful when the input data
comes from a projection that is incompatible with the desired map
projection.

R2003.12.0 Appendix G. Mapping and Cartographic Projections 874

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Map Projections
Most map projections are either geometric or semi-geometric so that
geographic features are projected onto a geometric surface that can be
laid flat like a map. The geometric surfaces employed in most
cartographic projections are the cone, the cylinder and the plane. The
position of points projected upon the surface may be determined by
constructing a straight line from the reference point of the projection
through the desired location on earth, and intersecting the projection
surface at a point. Imagine a line from the center of the earth passing
through New York City and intersecting a cylinder lying tangent at the
Equator. The location of New York City would be determined uniquely
on the cylinder, which could then be cut along its length and unrolled to
produce a rectangular map. The shape formed by numerous locations on
the earth produces the shape appearing on the map. Figure 1 exactly
describes the case of the Standard Mercator
.

Tangent Cylinder Tangent Cone Tangent Plane

F F F

R2003.12.0 Appendix G. Mapping and Cartographic Projections 875

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

There are additional schemes for projecting points onto suitable

geometric surfaces. The projection surface may be tangent at a
particular line or point as in Figures 1, 2, and 3, or it may be secant at
multiple locations to reduce overall scale distortion (see Figures 4, 5, 6).

Secant Cylinder Secant Cone Secant Plane

F Fi
In the case of planar projections, there are three ways to orient the plane.
It may be centered on the polar axis as shown in Figure 7, on the Equator
as seen in Figure 8, or in the oblique case (see Figure 9) at some latitude
in between.

Polar Equatorial Oblique

F F

Available projection options are discussed in detail on the following

pages.

R2003.12.0 Appendix G. Mapping and Cartographic Projections 876

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Projections
The available projections are listed below. They have been organized
into two groups depending on their source of origin. The first group
contains the traditional Z-MAP Plus projections and the second group
contains projections obtained from Blue Marble. The groups are listed
below.
Z-MAP Plus projections
UNIVERSAL TRANSVERSE MERCATOR
GENERAL TRANSVERSE MERCATOR
STANDARD MERCATOR
SINGLE PARALLEL LAMBERT
DOUBLE PARALLEL LAMBERT
AZIMUTHAL GNOMONIC
AZIMUTHAL STEREOGRAPHIC
AZIMUTHAL ORTHOGRAPHIC
MODIFIED POLYCONIC
ALBERS EQUAL AREA
AMERICAN POLYCONIC
OBLIQUE MERCATOR
NEW ZEALAND MAP GRID
CASSINI-SOLDNER
BIPOLAR OBLIQUE CONIC CONFORMAL
VAN DER GRINTEN I
EQUIDISTANT CONIC
STEREOGRAPHIC
POLAR STEREOGRAPHIC
ROMANIA STEREOGRAFICA
NEDERLAND STEREOGRAFISCHE

R2003.12.0 Appendix G. Mapping and Cartographic Projections 877

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Blue Marble Projections

Mercator
Transverse Mercator
Cassini-Soldner
Lambert Conic Conformal
Stereographic
Hotline Oblique Mercator (1 point and azimuth)
Albers Equal-Area Conic
Azimuthal Equal Area
Azimuthal Equal Area (Polar Aspect)
Azimuthal Equidistant
Azimuthal Equidistant (Polar Aspect)
Bonne
Equal Area Cylindrical
Equidistant Conic
Equidistant Cylindrical
IMW Polyconic
Miller Cylindrical
Mollweide
Orthographic
Polar Stereographic
Polyconic
Robinson
Hotline Oblique Mercator (2 points)

R2003.12.0 Appendix G. Mapping and Cartographic Projections 878

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Cylindrical Projections
Landmarks geological mapping programs support four cylindrical
projections.
Standard Mercator
Oblique Mercator
Transverse Mercator
Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM)

UTM Zone and as a Result the

Has a Longitude Range of:
Number: Central Meridian is:
1 180 to 174 177
2 174 to 168 171
3 168 to 162 165
4 162 to 156 159
5 156 to 150 153
6 150 to 144 147
7 144 to 138 141
8 138 to 132 135
9 132 to 126 129
10 126 to 120 123
11 120 to 114 117
12 114 to 108 111
13 108 to 102 105
14 102 to 96 99
15 96 to 90 93
16 90 to 84 87
17 84 to 78 81
18 78 to 72 75
19 72 to 66 69
20 66 to 60 63
21 60 to 54 57
22 54 to 48 51
23 48 to 42 45
24 42 to 36 39
25 36 to 30 33
26 30 to 24 27

R2003.12.0 Appendix G. Mapping and Cartographic Projections 879

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

UTM Zone and as a Result the

Has a Longitude Range of:
Number: Central Meridian is:
27 24 to 18 21
28 18 to 12 15
29 12 to 6 9
30 6 to 0 3
31 0 to +6 3
32 +6 to +12 9
33 +12 to +18 15
34 +18 to +24 21
35 +24 to +30 27
36 +30 to +36 33
37 +36 to +42 39
38 +42 to +48 45
39 +48 to +54 51
40 +54 to +60 57
41 +60 to +66 63
42 +66 to +72 69
43 +72 to +78 75
44 +78 to +84 81
45 +84 to +90 87
46 +90 to +96 93
47 +96 to +102 99
48 +102 to +108 105
49 +108 to +114 111
50 +114 to +120 117
51 +120 to +126 123
52 +126 to +132 129
53 +132 to +138 135
54 +138 to +144 141
55 +144 to +150 147
56 +150 to +156 153
57 +156 to +162 159
58 +162 to +168 165
59 +168 to +174 171
60 +174 to +180 177

R2003.12.0 Appendix G. Mapping and Cartographic Projections 880

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Conic Projections
Landmark geological mapping programs support five conic projections.
Lambert with One Standard Parallel
Lambert with Two Standard Parallel
Modified Rectangular Polyconic
Albers Equal Area Projection
Cassini-Soldner

Planar Azimuthal Projections

The Gnomonic, Stereographic and Orthographic projections always
provide an accurate azimuth from the center point of the map to any
other location on the map. While there are considerable distortions for
maps of large areas, azimuths from the reference point remain true.
Azimuthal projections are useful for areas that have fairly equal
dimensions in each direction.
Gnomonic
Stereographic
Orthographic

Other Projections
New Zealand Map Grid

R2003.12.0 Appendix G. Mapping and Cartographic Projections 881

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Descriptions of Z-MAP Plus Map Projections

UNIVERSAL TRANSVERSE MERCATOR

This is a special case of the Transverse Mercator (discussed below)
projection to which certain standardized parameters are applied. The
standard scale factor along the Central Meridian has been chosen by
international agreement to be .9996. This scale reduction factor
optimally reduces distortions within 3 degrees of longitude on either
side of the Central Meridian. Because of this, it is not generally
recommended that the projection be used to map beyond 4 degrees on
either side of the Central Meridian. It is also customary to replace UTM
(Universal Transverse Mercator) with UPS or Polar Stereographic
beyond 80 degrees latitude North and South. A UTM grid system is used
world wide as a plane coordinate referencing system, with the earth
divided into sixty equal zones of longitude. A false easting of 500,000
meters is applied to avoid negative eastings at the western end of the
zone. In the Southern Hemisphere, a false northing of 10,000,000 meters
is applied. See the table of the Longitude Range and Central Meridian
of each UTM zone on page 879.

GENERAL TRANSVERSE MERCATOR

Maps generated using the Transverse Mercator projection have a
constant scale along the central meridian and overcome the extreme
scale distortion toward the poles found in the Standard Mercator
projection. The projection is conformal and approximately equivalent
for areas within a few degrees of the central meridian. Scale distance is
exact along the central meridian for a tangent cylinder, and exactly
reduced in proportion to the scale factor along the central meridian for a
secant cylinder. Directions are fairly accurate over a few degrees.
Distortions become significant three or four degrees East or West of the
Central Meridian. This projection should not be used to create maps
with large east-west extent.

R2003.12.0 Appendix G. Mapping and Cartographic Projections 882

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

STANDARD MERCATOR
When a Standard Mercator projection is applied, the map is conformal,
but has serious distortions in area proportions for regions located more
than a few degrees apart in latitude. Distance scale is constant along the
equator, which serves as the standard parallel, but becomes increasingly
distorted away from the equator approaching infinity at the pole. A
Standard Mercator projection is most accurate within 15 degrees of the
Equator, but may be used up to approximately 85 degrees latitude for
illustrative purposes. This projection is useful in navigation since, in its
spherical form, a straight line on the map represents a rhumb line or a
line of constant bearing.

SINGLE PARALLEL LAMBERT

This projection places the reference point at the center of the earth, and
projects to a cone aligned on the polar axis tangent at the standard
parallel. The map is conformal over very large areas, and offers
excellent equivalence within a few degrees of the standard parallel.
Exact scale distance is preserved along the standard parallel, with
distortion increasing away from the parallel. Directions are accurate
over fairly large areas. The map resembles a conic section that has been
cut and unrolled to produce a pie-shaped map. It is used to map areas
that run east and west at intermediate latitudes.

DOUBLE PARALLEL LAMBERT

This projection possesses all the desirable elements of the single
standard parallel projection, and improves all of them by using a cone
that is secant at the two standard parallels. Unlike the single standard
parallel, this projection diminishes overall distortions by reducing scale
slightly between the two parallels and enlarging it less beyond the
parallels. As this projection offers exceptionally good shape and
direction relationships, it is used where accuracy is desired for large
areas lying in an east-west direction.

R2003.12.0 Appendix G. Mapping and Cartographic Projections 883

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

AZIMUTHAL GNOMONIC
This projection places the reference point at the center of the earth. The
map is not conformal. Distortion in area and shape grows quickly away
from the center of the map. Although distance scale is distorted, the
shortest distance between two points appears as a straight line on the
map. Chiefly used for obtaining azimuths, this projection may also be
used to preserve shapes, areas, and distances if the scale is large enough.
The Azimuthal Gnomonic, Stereographic and Orthographic projections
always provide an accurate azimuth from the center point of the map to
any other location on the map. While there are considerable distortions
for maps of large areas, azimuths from the reference remain true.

AZIMUTHAL STEREOGRAPHIC
This projection places the reference point on the surface of the earth,
opposite the center of the mapping plane. It is conformal for all
orientations. However relative areas and distance scale quickly distort
away from the center of the map, although not as quickly as in the
Gnomonic projection. It produces a near perfect map if used for circular
areas of a few degrees in size such as large islands, small countries and
continents, and polar areas. One of its notable properties is that any
circle on earth, unless it passes through the point opposite the origin of
projection, appears as a circle on the map. The Z-MAP Plus Azimuthal
Stereographic projection uses a spherical earth model.

AZIMUTHAL ORTHOGRAPHIC
This projection places the reference point at an infinite distance away
from the earth and is analogous to a plan or elevation view of the earth.
This projection produces the same distortion present when the earth is
viewed from outer space. This projection is not conformal. This
projection suffers severe distortions in other map properties far away
from the center of the projection plane, although this could be
considered a visual aid. An Orthographic projection is used when an
accurate pictorial view of the earth is desired, and is limited to the
hemisphere visible from space.

R2003.12.0 Appendix G. Mapping and Cartographic Projections 884

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

MODIFIED POLYCONIC
In a polyconic projection, each parallel of latitude is constructed as
though it were the standard parallel of a true conic projection. Thus, a
complete projection requires an infinite number of cones, one for each
value of latitude, with cones successively flatter towards the pole.
In a rectangular polyconic projection, the parallels are evenly spaced,
and meridians and parallels meet at right angles. This projection is used
extensively to map north of the 80th parallel in Canada. The modified
rectangular polyconic projection is neither conformal, equivalent, or
azimuthal. However, it is possible to produce a map of a small region
with excellent properties since the user may alter the scale in a desired
manner by choosing both a central meridian and a standard parallel,
along with their respective scale errors.

ALBERS EQUAL AREA

This projection has parallels that are unequally spaced arcs of concentric
circles, more closely spaced at the north and south edges of the map. The
meridians are equally spaced radii of these circles, which are intersected
at right angles. The poles are also seen as concentric circles. There is no
distortion in scale or shape along the two standard parallels. This
projection is primarily used for maps with a predominant east-west
expanse; it is used extensively by the USGS for maps at scales of
1:2,500,000 and smaller.

AMERICAN POLYCONIC
This is a conic projection in which meridians are complex curves
concave toward a straight central meridian. Parallels are nonconcentric
circles except for a straight equator. This projection is used for areas
with a north-south orientation. Only along the central meridian does it
portray true shape, area, distance, and direction. Individual sheets of this
series can be edge-joined since they are drawn with straight meridians
for convenience. They cannot be mosaiced beyond a few sheets.

R2003.12.0 Appendix G. Mapping and Cartographic Projections 885

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

OBLIQUE MERCATOR
This is a conformal cylindrical map projection. Points on the surface of
a sphere or spheroid, such as the earth, are conceived as developed by
Mercator principles on a cylindrical tangent along an oblique great
circle. This projection may be useful for plotting linear configurations
situated along a line oblique to the earths equator.

CASSINI-SOLDNER
This projection is similar to a polyconic map projection except that it
uses but one central meridian for a whole series. It is best adapted for
north-south belts and large-scale maps of small areas.

NEW ZEALAND MAP GRID

This is a conformal projection developed for New Zealand to give a
small range of scale variation over the land area of New Zealand.

BIPOLAR OBLIQUE CONIC CONFORMAL

Also called The Americas projection, this consists of two oblique
conformal conics designed to fit the shape of the continents of North and
South America in order to allow both continents to be on one map with
minimum distortion. It is used only for small scale maps.

VAN DER GRINTEN I

Used for maps of the entire globe, this projection is an attempt to
compromise between the areal distortion of a Mercator and the shape
distortion of an Equal-Area. It shows the entire globe mapped in a circle
and it is neither conformal nor equal area, with large distortion near the
poles. The area to be mapped (Map AOI) should not extend more than
180 degrees east or west of the central meridian.

R2003.12.0 Appendix G. Mapping and Cartographic Projections 886

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

EQUIDISTANT CONIC
A conic projection with scale true in the north-south direction, but in the
east-west direction only along the two standard parallels. Neither
conformal nor equal area. This Projection provided by Blue Marble
Geographics.

STEREOGRAPHIC
This is like the Azimuthal Stereographic, but it uses a spheroidal model
of the earth rather than a spherical model.This Projection provided by
Blue Marble Geographics.

POLAR STEREOGRAPHIC
This is a special case of the Stereographic projection, with the center of
the projection at the pole. It is used mostly for mapping polar
regions.This Projection provided by Blue Marble Geographics.

ROMANIA STEREOGRAFICA
This is a custom projection promoted by the Romanian government for
the mapping of Romania. It is designed to product very low-distortion
maps of that region, and is not recommended for mapping anywhere
else. Because it is a custom projection, almost all of the parameters are
standard and users have to supply very few. This Projection provided by
Blue Marble Geographics.

NEDERLAND STEREOGRAFISCHE
This is a custom projection promoted by the government of the
Netherlands for the mapping within the Netherlands. It is designed to
product very low-distortion maps of that region, and is not
recommended for mapping anywhere else. Because it is a custom
projection, almost all of the parameters are standard and users have to
supply very few. This Projection provided by Blue Marble Geographics.

R2003.12.0 Appendix G. Mapping and Cartographic Projections 887

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Descriptions of Blue Marble Map Projections

Mercator
The Mercator is a cylindrical, conformal projection with no distortion
along the equator.When a Mercator projection is applied, the map is
conformal, but has serious distortions in area proportions for regions
located more than a few degrees apart in latitude. Distance scale is
constant along the equator, which serves as the standard parallel, but
becomes increasingly distorted away from the equator approaching
infinity at the pole. A Standard Mercator projection is most accurate
within 15 degrees of the Equator, but may be used up to approximately
85 degrees latitude for illustrative purposes. This projection is useful in
navigation since, in its spherical form, a straight line on the map
represents a rhumb line or a line of constant bearing.

Transverse Mercator
Maps generated using the Transverse Mercator projection have a
constant scale along the central meridian and overcome the extreme
scale distortion toward the poles found in the Standard Mercator
projection. The projection is conformal and approximately equivalent
for areas within a few degrees of the central meridian. Scale distance is
exact along the central meridian for a tangent cylinder, and exactly
reduced in proportion to the scale factor along the central meridian for a
secant cylinder. Directions are fairly accurate over a few degrees.
Distortions become significant three or four degrees East or West of the
Central Meridian. This projection should not be used to create maps
with large east-west extent.

Cassini-Soldner
This projection is best suited for regions predominantly north-south,
rather than for east-west regions. This projection has been replaced by
the Transverse Mercator in many modern applications. This projection
is cylindrical, but is neither equal area nor conformal. This projection is
similar to a polyconic map projection except that it uses but one central
meridian for a whole series. It is best adapted for north-south belts and
large-scale maps of small areas.

R2003.12.0 Appendix G. Mapping and Cartographic Projections 888

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Lambert Conic
The Lambert Conic is often used for maps of countries and regions with
predominant east-west expanse. Its parallels are unequally spaced arcs
of concentric circles, more closely spaced near the center of the map.
Meridians are equally spaced radii of the same circles, thereby cutting
parallels at right angles. Scale is true along two standard parallels,
normally, or along just one. Pole in same hemisphere as standard
parallels is a point; other pole is at infinity.

Stereographic
This is like the Azimuthal Stereographic, but it uses a spheroidal model
of the earth rather than a spherical model.Hotine Oblique Mercator
(1 point and azimuth)

Albers Equal-Area Conic

Albers Equal-Area Conic projection is best suited for regions with
predominant east-west expanse. In particular, this projection is often
used for the United States. This projection is conic and equal area.

Azimuthal Equal Area

This projection was developed by Lambert in 1772 and is typically used
for mapping large regions like continents and hemispheres. It is an
azimuthal, equal area projection, but is not perspective. Distortion is
zero at the center of the projection, and increases radially away from this
point.

Azimuthal Equal Area (Polar Aspect)

This projection is the polar version of the Azimuthal Equal Area
projection.

Azimuthal Equidistant
The most noticeable feature of this azimuthal projection is the fact that
distances measured from the center (of the map) are true. Therefore, a
circle about the projection center defines the locus of points that are
equally far away from the plot origin. Furthermore, directions from the
center are also true. The projection, in the polar aspect, is at least several
centuries old. It is a useful projection for a global view of locations at
various or identical distance from a given point (the map center).

R2003.12.0 Appendix G. Mapping and Cartographic Projections 889

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Azimuthal Equidistant (Polar Aspect)

The most noticeable feature of this azimuthal projection is the fact that
distances measured from the center (of the map) are true. Therefore, a
circle about the projection center defines the locus of points that are
equally far away from the plot origin. Furthermore, directions from the
center are also true. The projection, in the polar aspect, is at least several
centuries old. It is a useful projection for a global view of locations at
various or identical distance from a given point (the map center).

Bonne
Bonne projection is best suited for the continents in the northern
hemisphere. The Bonne projection is pseudoconical and equal area. The
central meridian is a straight line. Other meridians are complex curves.
Bonne projection has no distortion along the central meridian and the
standard parallel. It is used for atlas maps of continents and for
topographic mapping of some countries.

Equal Area Cylindrical

The equal area cylindrical has Meridians on normal aspect are equally
spaced straight lines, and parallels on normal aspect are unequally
spaced straight lines, closest near the poles, cutting meridians at right.
There is substantial shape and scale distortion near points 90deg from
central line.

R2003.12.0 Appendix G. Mapping and Cartographic Projections 890

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Equidistant Conic
A conic projection with scale true in the north-south direction, but in the
east-west direction only along the two standard parallels. Neither
conformal nor equal area.

Equidistant Cylindrical
Equidistant Cylindrical projection--probably the simplest of all map
projections to construct and one of the oldest, dating back more than
2000 years. It is now used primarily for maps covering small areas,
where distortion is less important than the ease of displaying special
information. This projection is cylindrical, and neither equal area nor
conformal
This projection is similar to a polyconic map projection except that it
uses but one central meridian for a whole series. It is best adapted for
north-south belts and large-scale maps of small areas.

Miller Cylindrical
Miller Cylindrical projection--basically a modified Mercator projection,
with a better balance between shape and area distortion. This projection
is cylindrical, and neither equal area nor conformal. Often used for
world maps this projection avoids some of the scale exaggerations of the
Mercator

Mollweide
The Mollweide projection is a pseudocylindrical projection that
resembles cylindrical projections in that parallel latitude lines are
straight, but lines of longitude are curved. The Mollweide is equal-area
and its central meridian is straight. The 90th meridians are circular arcs.
Parallels are straight, but unequally spaced. Scale is true only along the
standard parallels of 40:44 N and 40:44 S. Because of its shape, the
Mollweide is often used for world maps.

Orthographic
The orthographic azimuthal projection is a perspective projection from
infinite distance. It is therefore often used to give the appearance of a
globe viewed from space. As with Lamberts equal area and the
stereographic, only one hemisphere can be viewed at any time. The
projection is neither equal area nor conformal, and much distortion is
introduced near the edge of a hemisphere. The directions from the center
of projection are true. The projection was known to the Egyptians and
Greeks more than 2,000 years ago.

R2003.12.0 Appendix G. Mapping and Cartographic Projections 891

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Polar Stereographic
This is a conformal, azimuthal projection that dates back to the Greeks.
Its main use is for mapping the polar regions. In the polar aspect all
meridians are straight lines and parallels are arcs of circles.

Polyconic
Polyconic projectionbest suited for small regions. When used for a
small area, this projection preserves shapes, areas, distances, and
azimuths in their true relation to the surface of the earth. The Polyconic
projection is not suited for large areas, as gross exaggeration of details
occurs. This projection is neither equal area nor conformal.

Robinson
Uses tabular coordinates rather than mathematical formulas to achieve
a correct look. Better balance of size and shape for high-latitude areas
than Mercator. Van der Grinten or Mollweide. Directions are true along
all parallels and along central meridian Not conformal, equal area,
equidistant or perspective. Pseudocylindrical right appearing
projection.

R2003.12.0 Appendix G. Mapping and Cartographic Projections 892

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Reference Spheroid
The Reference Spheroid is a theoretical geometric figure that has
dimensions closely approaching the dimensions of the earth for a
particular area of interest.
Note that the reference spheroid may be user defined. In such instances,
you are asked to specify the semi-major and semi-minor axes.
The following Z-MAP Plus tasks use reference spheroids:
File New Basemap
Operations Coordinate Transformations
Operations Line Resampling
The following descriptions provide the dimensions for the semi-major
axis and the semi-minor axis. From these two dimensions, the program
calculates the ellipticity for you. Select the desired reference spheroid
from the popup menu. Selections include:
User-Defined The reference spheroid may be user defined. In
such instances, you must specify the semi-major and semi-minor
axes.
Everest 1830 A reference spheroid, used in India, Burma,
Pakistan, Laos, Cambodia, Thailand, and Vietnam, which has the
following dimensions:
semi-major axis = 6,377,276.345 meters
semi-minor axis = 6,356,075.413 meters
Malayan Everest 1830 A reference spheroid with the
following dimensions:
semi-major axis = 6,377,304.063 meters
semi-minor axis = 6,356,103.039 meters
Bessel 1841 A reference spheroid with the following
dimensions:
semi-major axis = 6,377,397.2 meters
semi-minor axis = 6,356,078.962 meters
Airy 1858 A reference spheroid with the following dimensions:
semi-major axis = 6,377,563.396 meters
semi-minor axis = 6,356,256.909 meters

R2003.12.0 Appendix G. Mapping and Cartographic Projections 893

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Clarke 1858 A reference spheroid with the following

dimensions:
semi-major axis = 6,378,294.007 meters
semi-minor axis = 6,356,618.299 meters
Clarke 1866 A reference spheroid with the following
dimensions:
semi-major axis = 6,378,206.4 meters
semi-minor axis = 6,356,583.8 meters
Clarke 1880 A reference spheroid with the following
dimensions:
semi-major axis = 6,378,249.145 meters
semi-minor axis = 6,356,514.870 meters
Hayford 1909 A reference spheroid with the following
dimensions:
semi-major axis = 6,378,388.0 meters
semi-minor axis = 6,356,911.946 meters
Krassovsky 1940 A reference spheroid with the following
dimensions:
semi-major axis = 6,378,245.000 meters
semi-minor axis = 6,356,863.019 meters
Hough 1956 A reference spheroid with the following
dimensions:
semi-major axis = 6,378,270.0 meters
semi-minor axis = 6,356,794.343 meters
Fischer 1960 A reference spheroid with the following
dimensions:
semi-major axis = 6,378,166.0 meters
semi-minor axis = 6,356,784.284 meters
Kaula 1961 Reference spheroid with the following dimensions:
semi-major axis = 6,378,165.0 meters
semi-minor axis = 6,356,344.388 meters

R2003.12.0 Appendix G. Mapping and Cartographic Projections 894

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

IUGG 1967 A reference spheroid with the following

dimensions:
semi-major axis = 6,378,160.0 meters
semi-minor axis = 6,356,774.719 meters
These dimensions match the dimensions of the Australian
National and South American 1969.
Fischer 1968 A reference spheroid with the following
dimensions:
semi-major axis = 6,378,150.0 meters
semi-minor axis = 6,356,768.337 meters
WGS-72 1972 A reference spheroid with the following
dimensions:
semi-major axis = 6,378,135.0 meters
semi-minor axis = 6,356,750.520 meters
IUGG 1975 A reference spheroid with the following
dimensions
semi-major axis = 6,378,140.0 meters
semi-minor axis = 6,356,755.289 meters
International A reference spheroid with the following
dimensions:
semi-major axis = 6,378,388.000 meters
semi-minor axis = 6,356,911.946 meters
This spheroid is based on the Hayford Spheroid.
Mercury A reference spheroid with the following dimensions:
semi-major axis = 6,378,166.0 meters
semi-minor axis = 6,356,768.337 meters
This spheroid is based on the Fischer 1960 spheroid.
Australian National A reference spheroid with the following
dimensions:
semi-major axis = 6,378,160.0 meters
semi-minor axis = 6,356,774.719 meters
These dimensions match the dimensions of the IUGG 1967 and
South American 1969.
South American 1969 A reference spheroid with the following
dimensions:

R2003.12.0 Appendix G. Mapping and Cartographic Projections 895

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

semi-major axis = 6,378,160.0 meters

semi-minor axis = 6,356,774.719 meters
These dimensions match the dimensions of the IUGG 1967 and
the Australian National.
Mercury Modified A reference spheroid with the following
dimensions:
semi-major axis = 6,378,150.0 meters
semi-minor axis = 6,356,768.337 meters
Helmert A reference spheroid with the following dimensions:
semi-major axis = 6,378,200.0 meters
semi-minor axis = 6,356,818.169 meters
Ghana National A reference spheroid with the following
dimensions:
semi-major axis = 6,378,295.0 meters
semi-minor axis = 6,356,746.71 meters

GRS-80 A reference spheroid with the following dimensions:

semi-major axis = 6,378,137.0 meters
semi-minor axis = 6,356,752.314 meters
WGS-84 A reference spheroid with the following dimensions:
semi-major axis = 6,378,137.0 meters
semi-minor axis = 6,356,752.314 meters

State Plane Coordinate System

The State Plane Coordinate System (SPCS) is used as a standard for
geodetic mapping across the United States and its territories. This
system is used by the United States Geologic Survey (USGS) and
dictates the parameters used by the projections. The SPCS uses the
Universal Transverse Mercator, Lambert Conformal Conic projection
and the Hotline projection (currently unavailable in GCTS). You are
prompted for a code that defines the state and zone of the specific
region. Once these questions have been answered, the program searches
our database for the correct input for the projection routines. (For a list
of states and codes, see Appendix F. State Plane Codes, starting on
page 865.)

R2003.12.0 Appendix G. Mapping and Cartographic Projections 896

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Appendix H. Customized Title Blocks

Introduction
This section describes how to create a customized logo in the title block
logo area.

Contents of This Appendix

Logo and Title Block shows how the logo relates to other title
block information (page 898).
Understanding LOGOFILEs shows how to structure a
LOGOFILE so Z-MAP Plus and ZCL can use it. This topic defines
the variables for designing a custom logo, and provides an
example LOGOFILE (page 899).
Using LOGOFILEs provides simple steps for activating
LOGOFILE instructions (page 900).

R2003.12.0 Appendix H. Customized Title Blocks 897

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Logo and Title Block

This section shows how a logo fits into the title block.

Height LOGO

XLOGO,YLOGO

TopHorz

WIDTH
XLL,YLL
Line Drawing of Title Block

Landmark Graphics Corporation

Houston, Texas

CUSTOM TITLE BLOCK

Example Custom Title Block with Landmark Logo

R2003.12.0 Appendix H. Customized Title Blocks 898

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Understanding LOGOFILEs
ZCL and Z-MAP Plus use an ASCII flat file to determine the
appearance and location of your customized logo. The table below
describes the structure of the LOGOFILE according to line numbers and
pre-defined areas in the file.

Fortran
File Group File Area Variables Assigned
Format
Header Info First Line (7X,F14.7,I7) TopHorz, NameIncluded
Second Line (I5,3F10.4) NumPolys, XLOGO,
YLOGO, Height
Polygon Block (as many Polygon Block Header Line (2I5) NumVertices, Color
as specified by
NumPolys)
Polygon Block Vertex Line (as (2F14.7) X, Y
many as specified by
NumVertices).

The table below explains the purpose of each variable you can use in the
LOGOFILE.

Variable Description
TopHorz Allows you to specify the amount of space allowed for the logo area of the Title Block
(See Figure 1). Its value is expressed as a percentage of the Title Block Width. The
default value for TopHorz is 0.4. For reference, the overall height of the Title Block is
0.52.
NameIncluded Allows you to specify whether the company name is digitized with the logo. If it is, this
value should be 1; otherwise specify 0.
NumPolys Specifies the number of polygon blocks to follow in the file.
XLOGO, Specifies the X,Y coordinates of the lower-left corner of the logo (see Figure 1). These
YLOGO values are expressed as a percentage of the Title Block Width.
Height Allows you to specify the actual height of the logo. The value is expressed as a
percentage of the overall Title Block Width.
NumVertices Specifies the number of vertices (lines in the file) in the polygon block.
Color Specifies the color index to use for this polygon block.
X,Y Specifies the X,Y coordinates of a vertex in a polygon. The coordinates are expressed as a
percentage of the logo height. For example, if the X,Y coordinates were 0.0,0.0, the
vertex would be located at XLOGO,YLOGO. If the X,Y coordinates were 1.0,1.0, the
vertex would be located at (XLOGO + Logo height), (YLOGO + Logo height).

R2003.12.0 Appendix H. Customized Title Blocks 899

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Example LOGOFILE
The following shows a short sample LOGOFILE.

NumVertices NameIncluded
TopHorz
NumPolys XLOGO YLOGO Height
Color
0.3 1 Header
1 0.1250 0.4100 0.2000 Info
10 201
-0.3488372 0.4813953
0.1772093 0.4813953
0.1877907 0.4639535 Polygon
0.1981395 0.4488372 Block
0.2077907 0.4290698
0.2176744 0.4093023
0.2245349 0.3930233
0.2348837 0.3709302
0.2419767 0.3465116
-0.3488372 0.4813953

X Y

You can calculate the actual plotter locations of your polygon vertices
using the following equations:
Plotter X = X ( Height Width ) + ( XLOGO Width ) + XLL
Plotter Y = Y ( Height Width ) + ( YLOGO Width ) + YLL
A real LOGOFILE is in the /files area of the /ZMAPPlus directory. The
file is called COMPANY.LOGO.

Using LOGOFILEs
To use a LOGOFILE in Z-MAP Plus or ZCL, you need to set the
environment variable LOGOFILE to the path for the LOGOFILE. For
example, if the LOGOFILE is located in the following path:
/landmark/logofiles/LOGO.FILE
Execute the following command in the run scripts for ZCL and/or
Z-MAP Plus:
setenv LOGOFILE /landmark/logofiles/LOGO.FILE

R2003.12.0 Appendix H. Customized Title Blocks 900

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Appendix I.
Auxiliary Files

Auxiliary Files for Z-MAP Plus

This appendix describes files you may see in your home directory or
files in the programs /bin/files directory, which you share with the other
Z-MAP Plus users at your site. The information includes a simple
explanation about what the files do, and the relevance, if any, the files
have to you. Although some of these files have no impact on users,
Z-MAP Plus users have shown an interest in learning about them.

Files in Your Home Directory

This topic covers files Z-MAP Plus creates in your home directory (the
directory you use to run Z-MAP Plus). Not all of these files affect you
as a user.

Files That Affect Z-MAP Plus Sessions

MFDs and ZGFs The most familiar files to most users are master
files (.MFDs) and graphics files (.ZGFs). These files contain the data
and the pictures that you bring to Z-MAP Plus for interpretation.
.LCKs Related to the MFDs are the .LCK files. The .LCK files
prevent multiple users from working on the data in MFDs at the same
time. If you want to work with another persons data, you can take turns
or copy that users MFD. The lock protection remains in place until you
exit from Z-MAP Plus by selecting File Exit.
If the session does not terminate normally, you must delete the lock files
before you can use the MFDs again. Perform a search for *.lck or *.LCK
in your home directory. Delete all the .LCK files, unless other users are
also using the home directory. In this case, take care to leave their lock
files in place.

Do Not Delete Lock Files During a Session

Do not delete .LCK files while you are running Z-MAP Plus or those MFDs will
be available to other users at the same time. Conflicting write operations may
destroy or corrupt MFDs.

R2003.12.0 Appendix I. Auxiliary Files 901

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Another set of files present in the home directory make it easier for you
to save and resume your work on a project when you run your next
session of the program: the LASPRM.ZCL, LASPRM.ZCL2, and the
POSMEM4_0 files.
LASPRM The LASPRM files save all the parameter settings you
specified and saved in your most recent session. On startup, a new
Z-MAP Plus session uses the settings from the LASPRM files. For
example, the LASPRM.ZCL is responsible for remembering which
MFDs you attached during the most recent session, as well as which
gridding algorithm or system switch settings you chose before you last
ended the session.

Corrupt LASPRM Files

LASPRM files can become corrupt. If Z-MAP Plus unexpectedly exits or
produces unexpected results on common processes, delete the LASPRM.ZCL
and LASPRM.ZCL2 files and restart the program.

You can customize and save parameter files that are project- specific.
Z-MAP Plus can locate only those parameter files that have the
extension .ZCLPARMS.
POSMEM4_0 The POSMEM4_0 file remembers where you
placed the various menus and panels that appeared during your last
session. This enables you to position the panels according to your
personal preferences.
Two files may be created in connection with running processes that rely
on ZCL (Z-MAP Command Language): the ZMAPPARM file and the
TEMPMACRO.ZCL file.
The ZMAPPARM file maps ZCL parameters to Z-MAP Plus
dialog boxes.
The TEMPMACRO.ZCL file is created each time a parameter
processes a call to a defined macro. Whenever you execute a
macro, the last macro ZCL stream used to call the macro is saved.
Editing the TEMPMACRO.ZCL file, you can use a text editor to
generate a call to a ZCL process.

R2003.12.0 Appendix I. Auxiliary Files 902

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

VOLUMES.OUT VOLUMES.OUT is an ASCII file that contains

volumetrics results. If you wish to save or edit the file, you can rename
it using your computers operating system. The VOLUMES.OUT file is
overwritten with each new Z-MAP Plus session. The results of the
Volumetrics Operation are also displayed to screen and written to the
output file and MFD you name. The useful thing about the
VOLUMES.OUT file is your ability to edit it if you want to. If you have
used previous releases of Z-MAP Plus, the VOLUMES.OUT file is the
equivalent of the FOR087.DAT(VAX) or the FORT.87 (Unix).

Files That Dont Affect the Operation of Z-MAP Plus

As Z-MAP Plus runs, other files may be created that are not retained for
the next session. Examples of these transient files include:
tmp. files
ZPLUS.ERR
ZPLUS.RHF
Tmp. files are scratch files. They contain various sorts of information
that the program usually only needs for part of your program run. For
example, you may decide to run the Point Gridding subtask on a dataset.
If you look in the home directory while the program is still running, you
see tmp. files:
> ls -l tmp.*
-rw-rw-r-- 1 usr 9216 Jan 19 15:01 tmp.FAAAa00922
-rw-rw-r-- 1 usr 57344 Jan 19 15:01 tmp.FBAAa00922

These files together occupy over 6.6KB. They contain intermediate

calculations required by various tasks, in this case, the Point Gridding
subtask. By using these scratch files, the program avoids needing to
keep the intermediate information in your computers main memory.
When you Exit Z-MAP Plus, these temporary files are deleted. If your
program run ends abnormally (if it quits before you select File Exit),
you can delete the tmp.* files from your directory. Do not delete these
files while you are running Z-MAP Plus or you will lose the
Scratch.mfd and other temporary files.

R2003.12.0 Appendix I. Auxiliary Files 903

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Maximizing Home Directory Disk Space

If disk space in your home directory is scarce, you can redirect your tmp.* files
to another directory.
To re-route tmp.* files to another destination, enter a command of this form in
the home directory:
> setenv TMPDIR path/tmp
For example, you may run from zbig/tapes/20 but you want your tmp. files in a
scratch subdirectory:
> mkdir scratch
> setenv TMPDIR /zbig/tapes/20/scratch

Do Not Delete Temporary Files During a Z-MAP Plus Session

Do not delete .tmp files in mid-session, or you will lose the Scratch.mfd and
other needed temporary files.

Other files that may be created in the home directory include

ZPLUS.RHF and ZPLUS.ERR. These files contain run history
information and error information, respectively. The .RHF and .ERR
files are erased if they are empty. If the Z-MAP Plus session terminates
abnormally, you can delete these files.

External Runtime Application Files That Everyone Uses

The previous section described files you may encounter in the home
directory.This section briefly describes the files in the /files directory.
These files are used by the Z-MAP Plus executables in the /bin
directory. These directories are installed and maintained on your site by
your systems administrator.
Files ending in the suffix .uid contain definitions of Z-MAP Plus
X Window System components.
A group of files supports the operation of the online help window for
Z-MAP Plus. Files that drive the online help system
include: ZHELP.TXT, ZHINDX.BIN, ZHSEC.BIN, ZHTAG.BIN, and
ZHTOC.BIN.
Graphical, plotter, and color capabilities of Z-MAP Plus require support
from the following files.
LGBNAMES.DAT Supports custom graphics feature names
(custom LGB names).
WDFILE Contains graphic, plotter, and digitizer definitions.
ZYCOLOR Contains graphic element descriptions and their color
values.

R2003.12.0 Appendix I. Auxiliary Files 904

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Glossary

Z-MAP Plus Glossary

abort
The improper or unexpected termination of a computer run prior to normal completion.

A-format
The FORTRAN format for converting characters into internal codes or vice-versa. The
general form is Axx where xx is an integer indicating the number of characters to be read on
input or the number of spaces to be allocated for output. On output, the characters are left
justified in the xx positions.

Alber's conical equal area map projection

An equal area projection of the conical type, on which the meridians are straight lines that
meet in a common point beyond the limits of the map, and the parallels are concentric circles
whose center is at the point of intersection of the meridians. Meridians and parallels intersect
at right angles and areas of longitude along any given parallel are of equal length.

algorithm
An unambiguous sequence of instructions, such as a portion of a computer program, which
gives an answer to a problem within a finite number of steps.

alias
The ambiguity in surface shape resulting from too widely spaced control data. If a surface is
very rough or wavy and the control points are widely spaced relative to the highs and lows
of the surface, then it appears to be a much smoother surface after gridding. It is not possible
to accurately reconstruct a surface when it is undersampled and aliasing occurs.

alphabetic character
A letter or other symbol, excluding digits, used in a language. A blank is also considered an
alphabetic character.

R2003.12.0 Glossary 905

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

alphanumeric data
Data composed of alphabetic and/or numeric characters. Generally, any data that is keyed or
displayed directly to a computer terminal or printer is alphanumeric data. When alphanumeric
data are stored by the computer, each character occupies one byte (8 bits). The two standard
internal computer representations of alphanumeric data are called ASCII and EBCDIC. See
binary data.

altitude
The height above a reference plane, usually mean sea level.

annotation
Descriptive text, scales, legends, etc., that are drawn on a map to identify and locate features,
describe the function of the map or features, and generally make the map useful.

anomaly
A deviation from the uniform character of surrounding information. For example, an anomaly
might be a structure of interest or a feature that might be associated with petroleum
accumulations or mineral deposits.

API well number

A unique numbering system developed by the American Petroleum Institute to identify wells
drilled in the United States. The 12 digit number can be broken down as follows:
Digits 1-2: State code. Numbers 1-49 are alphabetical for states including the District of
Columbia. Alaska and Hawaii are 50 and 51 respectively.
Digits 3-5: County, parish, or offshore code.
Digits 6-10: Specific well code.
Digits 11-12: Codes for sidetracks, etc.

apparent dip
Any dip not measured at a right angle to the strike. It is always less than the true dip. Cross
sections, which cut a surface at any angle other than 90 degrees to the strike of the surface,
reveal the apparent dip.

application program
A program written by or for a user that applies to the user's work, for example, a mapping
application program.

R2003.12.0 Glossary 906

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

area of interest (AOI)

The area within a map's border as specified in rectangular coordinates (x and y or northings
and eastings). In Z-MAP Plus, the AOI may also be defined in latitude and longitude. AOI is
also used when discussing the limits of a grid since grids usually have the same spatial
dimensions as the map they are intended to produce.

array
An arrangement of elements in one or more dimensions. Contrast with scalar.

ASCII
American National Standard Code for Information Interchange. The standard code, using a
coded character set consisting of seven-bit coded characters (eight bits including parity
check), used for information interchange among data processing systems, data
communications systems, and associated equipment. The ASCII set consists of control
characters and graphic characters including some that are not represented on the keyboard
keys.

azimuth
The horizontal direction measured clockwise from the meridian plane or north. It ranges from
0 to 360 degrees.

back interpolation
An operation that is somewhat like the reverse of gridding in that Z-values can be interpolated
from a grid at irregularly spaced x,y locations. A local interpolation scheme is used to compute
the Z-value from grid values surrounding the x,y location and the resulting Z-value is added to
the data location to yield x,y,z for each of the input x,y points.

background
1) The area that surrounds the subject; in particular, that part of the display screen surrounding
a character or line data. 2) Behind the scenes, e.g., background processing. Contrast with
foreground. See also batch mode.

bandwidth
Method of selecting wells to be placed on a cross section. If the user specifies two endpoints
and a bandwidth, the computer picks the wells falling within the area.

barrel
The volume of 42 U.S. gallons or 144 liters. Sometimes incorrectly called a drum, which
actually holds 55 gallons.

R2003.12.0 Glossary 907

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

baselap
A case of onlap where the bases of younger strata lap onto an older surface. In modeling
baselap, you would use one of the Merge operations. See onlap.

basemap
A map showing the names and locations of map data such as seismic lines, shotpoints, well,
culture, and other basic geographic data.

base plane
The two-dimensional x versus y plane used to display map data, contours, and other non-relief
map information. The base plane is defined so that the positive X-direction is east and the
positive Y-direction is north.

batch mode
A mode for executing computer programs when no operator intervention is required. Batch
processing is usually scheduled so that it does not interfere with interactive processing. Batch
processing is sometimes called background processing. Contrast with interactive mode.

binary data
A way of encoding numeric data to make best use of the computational and storage facilities
of computers. Numeric data are converted into binary data as they are loaded into the
computer. Most numeric data are converted to binary data unless they are strictly for display
purposes on a map or other type of graphics. Then they would be retained in alphanumeric
form.

blanking
The operation of changing valid Z-values within a designated area into null values so that it
appears there are no data within the area. Data blanking nulls a specified field of all x,y,z data
points within an area. Grid blanking nulls all the grid values of a specified grid within an area.

border ticks
Short lines drawn perpendicular to map border and used to divide the border into distance
intervals. Longer ticks are used to indicate major intervals while shorter ticks are used to
subdivide major intervals. Major ticks are usually labeled with their respective coordinates.

boundary
A line or closed curve that delineates one area from another. The line or curve is usually
represented by a series of x,y points at its vertices. Boundaries between private properties are
called property lines or lease lines.

R2003.12.0 Glossary 908

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

boundary polygon
An enclosed multi-sided area that limits data processing, such as regridding, to either inside or
outside the marked area.

byte
Usually eight bits (binary positions) that are used to represent a character.

catalog
The listing of available information that is keyed to a well. Data must be cataloged prior to
manipulation and analysis. If data is not cataloged, the computer does not know it exists.

call
The action of bringing a computer program, a routine, or a subroutine into effect, usually by
specifying the entry conditions and jumping to an entry point.

centered symbol
See symbol.

CGM
Acronym for Computer Graphics Metafile. CGM files are a standard way of storing graphics
information. You can use the File Print CGM option in the Z-MAP Plus window to
save pictures as CGM files. You can use CGM files in graphics applications outside of
Z-MAP Plus.

character
Any one of approximately 100 different symbols that appear on a computer keyboard. Each
character occupies one byte of storage. See also ASCII.

character string
A series of characters such as a word or other useful text that might be used to annotate a map.

Clarke spheroid of 1866

A reference ellipsoid having the following approximate dimensions:
semimajor axis 6,378,206.4 meters
semiminor axis 6,356,583.8 meters
ellipticity 1/294.97

class
The color and display format for text items on a map.

R2003.12.0 Glossary 909

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

class size
The number of elements grouped into each of the histogram bars.

clipping
The operation of limiting or truncating data that is beyond specified limits. Grid clipping is
performed to truncate grid values that exceed or fall below specified thresholds; values above
or below the threshold are set to the threshold. Data clipping of Z values is similar. Map
clipping cuts off all graphic information that would otherwise be drawn beyond a clipping
boundary, typically the map border.

closure
The property of a structure that means it is enclosed by a closed contour. In a structural trap,
vertical closure is the vertical distance between the lowest contour that closes and the highest
point on the feature. Areal closure is the area contained in the lowest closing contour.

color index
A number assigned to a color in the Z-MAP Plus Color Table.

column
A vertical arrangement of characters or other expressions. Contrast with row.

concatenate
To link two or more datasets into a single dataset, generally so the data from one precedes the
data from the next in the combined dataset.

conformable
An unbroken stratigraphic sequence in which the layers have been formed under conditions of
uninterrupted deposition.

conformal map projection

A map projection that preserves the shape of small areas on the surface of a globe when they
are projected onto a plane. All angles around any point are correctly preserved.

conic map projection

A map projection that is equivalent to projecting geographic latitude and longitude lines onto
a cone or cones, tangent to or intersecting the surface of a spheroid, then unfolding the cone to
a plane. Generally employed for mapping mid-latitude areas.

R2003.12.0 Glossary 910

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

constant
A fixed or invariable value or data item.

contour interval
The difference in value between two adjacent contour lines. Generally, the contour interval is
constant across a map; however, the interval may be decreased in flat areas or increased in
high-slope areas to maintain a fairly uniform density of contours across a map.

contour line
A line separating all points that are higher than the contour value from points of lower value.
Alternatively, the contour line is the locus of all points on the surface having the same value as
the contour value. Computer drawn contours are approximations of true contours. They are
produced by computing closely spaced points along the true contour and connecting them by
line segments.

control grid
An existing grid that is used to control how a new grid is generated. In gridding, the most
frequent uses of control grids are to: 1) default the gridding control parameters for the new
grid to match those of the control grid, 2) limit gridding to locations where the control grid is
null, or 3) limit gridding to locations where the control grid is not null. Control grids also
provide the second and third functions during filtering.

control points
Known points on a surface that are used to control the interpretation of the surface. Control
points minimally contain x,y,z information, where x,y is the horizontal location of some
measured information represented by z such as depth or time values. Control point files can
also contain other Z values, textual descriptions about the data, symbol codes, and other types
of measured information. Control point files are used to store well data, seismic data, and other
types of data that are recorded at discrete locations. A typical control point file may be of the
form
X, Y, symbol, API, top 1, top 2
where symbol denotes the symbol used to spot the well on a map, API is a text string, and top
1 and top 2 are subsea elevations.

R2003.12.0 Glossary 911

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

conversion factors
Scale factors used to convert one set of units to another. The following is a table of useful scale
factors for mapping work.

Starting Units Scale Factor Converted Units

meters 39.37 inches

meters 3.280833 feet

feet 0.3048006 meters

kilometers 0.6213699 statute miles

statute miles 1.609347 kilometers

nautical miles 6076.103 feet

nautical miles 1.851999 kilometers

square feet 2.295684E-5 acres

square miles 640 acres

square miles 2.589998 sq. kilometers

hectare 2.471 acres

square kilometers 100 hectares

cubic feet 7.4805 U.S. gallons

cubic feet 2.295684E-5 acre feet

cubic feet 5.61 barrels

barrels 0.15899 cubic meters

barrels 42 U.S. gallons

acre feet 7758 barrels

acre feet 1233.5 cubic meters

coordinates
Numbers that identify a location on the display.

R2003.12.0 Glossary 912

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

cross hair cursor

Depending on the graphics device, a cross hair cursor can span the entire screen or be a fairly
small cross. In the former case, the cursor is composed of two faint white lines that cross the
screen, one vertical and one horizontal. Typically, the horizontal and vertical lines can be
positioned independently. The other type of cursor is formed with the two lines about 1/2 inch
long. In this case, the lines do not move independently. The cursor is moved using the mouse,
arrow keys, thumb wheels, or joystick. The cross hair cursor is also called graphics cursor or
cursor.

cross section
A geologic diagram showing the vertical relationship between formations and structures that
are cut by a vertical plane. The vertical scale is typically depth while the horizontal scale is
distance along the section baseline. Z-MAP Plus displays cross sections of grid surfaces.

culture data
The term used to refer to man-made map data such as roads, property lines, cities, pipelines,
etc. It sometimes includes geographic land grids.

cursor
A movable marker used to indicate a position on the display screen.

curvature
The rate of change in the slope of a surface. The curvature at any grid location can be
estimated using a finite difference formula that relates the grid value to 12 symmetrically
surrounding grid values. The total squared curvature is the sum of the squared curvature at all
grid locations.

curve identification
The names used to designate log curve types. These names are usually the same as those
commonly used to identify log curves.

cylindrical projection
A map projection made by projecting geographic latitude and longitude lines onto a cylinder
that is tangent to a spheroid, then by unfolding the cylinder into a plane. A cylindrical
projection is generally used for mapping large areas.

data entry panel

A type of panel that prompts the user to supply specific information.

R2003.12.0 Glossary 913

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

data field
A portion of a data record that is allocated to store numeric or textual data. Data fields are
qualified by the type of information in the field, the position of the field within the data record,
the range of values for information stored in the field, and the null value for the data in the
field. The position of a specific data field must be the same for all records in a dataset.

data record
The grouping of all data fields for each independent item (control point, vertex, fault trace
point, etc.) in a specified order. The format (contents and order) of the data record is defined
by the specifications for each data field in the record.

data reduction
The process of removing unnecessary or redundant data from the dataset.

dataset
A collection of data records. Typical mapping datasets include x,y,z control point data, grids,
polygons, profiles, fault traces, and map text.

datum (datum level)

A reference used to make other measurements, such as an elevation, typically sea level, used
as a reference for determining elevations in a dataset.

decimation
A controlled deletion of data entities or posted attributes. For example, the Post Seismic Data
(New) process under Add Features, Post Data/Grids allows for decimation of shotpoints,
shotpoint labels, and Z-Attribute labels. Seismic lines can be selectively eliminated from 3D
seismic surveys.

default value
Any automatically assigned value/answer to a process control question. It is displayed on the
screen in the response field for the parameter or question to which it applies. Default values
are appropriate for many standard mapping tasks. Static default values are the same from run
to run. Dynamic default values depend on other parameters, processing steps, process results,
or combinations of these. Default values are sometimes called defaults or standard values.

delimiters
Key names (lease or part of lease), or numbers (part or all of API number or well number) that
limit the number of wells retrieved during a well search.

R2003.12.0 Glossary 914

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

derivative map
A map of one of the derivatives of a surface, usually the second vertical derivative of a
potential surface. The objective of a derivative map is to areally emphasize small anomalies.

dialog
In an interactive system, a series of interrelated inquires and responses. A dialog is composed
of programs and panels that together provide an interaction between the computer and the user
of that application.

dialog manager (dm)

The dialog manager provides the interface between the user dialog boxes and the applications.

digitize
The process of converting documents (such as maps or graphs) into datasets for mapping. For
example, to digitize contours, a map is taped to a digitizer and registered, then each curve is
followed manually with a special stylus or a cross hair device. The path the stylus follows is
automatically converted into x,y locations. Additional information is entered at a keyboard,
such as Z values or text.

dip
The angle of inclination from the horizontal of any planar surface. True dip or full dip is
measured at 90 degrees from the strike of the surface. Measurement at any other angle is
apparent dip. The term dip normally refers to true dip.

dip vector
An arrow on a map pointing in the direction of the dip. The length of the arrow may be
proportional to the magnitude of the dip.

display area
The part of the terminal screen used to show the picture.

display attribute
A particular property that is assigned to all or part of a display; for example, low intensity,
green color, and blinking.

downdip
The direction of the surface dip vector from higher to lower surface values.

R2003.12.0 Glossary 915

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

downlap
Downdip termination of strata against an unconformity at the base of a depositional unit. In
modeling downlap, you would use one of the Merge operations.

downward continuation
The process of inferring the shape of a deep surface using the more reliable shape of a shallow
surface and the nature of the interval between the two surfaces.

drift
The deviation of a borehole from the vertical. The drift angle is the angle between the borehole
axis and the vertical; the drift azimuth is the angle between a vertical plane through the
borehole and north.

dual grid operations

Mathematical operations such as addition, multiplication, etc. that can be performed on two
grids to create a grid.

dynamic
Occurring at the time of execution.

editor
A Z-MAP Plus task used to edit data or text.

element
A single member of an array.

engineering units
The units for measuring the source data, such as feet, meters, miles, or seconds. Engineering
units are not plotter units or other special units used by a computer program.

equatorial projection
Any cylindrical map projection with the polar axis vertical and the center point at the equator.
The Mercator Projection is the most well known example.

exaggeration
1) The use of a vertical scale that is larger than the horizontal scale to make subtle structural
detail more evident. 2) The ratio of the vertical to horizontal scale factors in the aspect ratio.

R2003.12.0 Glossary 916

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

extrapolate
A mathematical procedure to estimate surface values in areas beyond the spatial limits of the
data. How the data are extrapolated is dependent on the specific algorithm chosen to model the
data.

exploration mapping
The use of mapping procedures in the search for commercial deposits of useful minerals,
hydrocarbons, geothermal sources, etc.

extension
The part of a file name that follows the last period and is used by Z-MAP Plus when filtering
for a type of file at the system level.

external file assignment

The process IBM/MVS systems use to attach master files (.MFDs) before entering the specific
Landmark geological software program.

facies
The composite properties of a sedimentary rock that relate to the conditions of its origin and
distinguish it in relationship to adjacent rock within a stratigraphic unit.

fault
A displacement of rocks along a shear surface. The surface along which the displacement
occurs is the fault face or fault plane. The dip of the fault face is the angle it makes with the
horizontal. The fault throw is the vertical displacement of a surface across the fault face. The
heave is the horizontal separation of a surface across the fault. The trace of the fault is the
curve formed by the intersection of the fault face and the surface that is faulted. The fault zone
on any surface is the area enclosed by the fault trace. See merge operations.

fault data
A data file type, signified with the FALT extension, that graphically represents a fault.

field
On a panel, a specific input, output, or test area used for a particular named data item.

filtering
A mathematical process to remove certain types of surface information from a gridded
surface. In many applications, filters are used to smooth a surface, which is equivalent to
removing rough character. Filters can also be designed to remove trends and leave the local
variation. In general, grid filters are implemented by convolving the grid with a set of weights.

R2003.12.0 Glossary 917

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

finite difference method

A numerical method for approximating a solution of differential equations by representing the
differentials by different equations that can be solved interactively.

flexing
A special type of grid filter that is used to remove unwarranted surface variation between data
locations while retaining a precise fit at the data locations. One type of grid flexing uses a
biharmonic filter to produce a grid that is smooth between data locations while honoring the
data.

flexing pass
Grid flexing generally must be performed several times to achieve the desired smoothness and
accuracy. This term is used to indicate how many times the input grid has been flexed.

foreground
1) The part of the display area that is the character itself. 2) Evident on screen, e.g, foreground
processing. Contrast with background. See also interactive mode.

format
The way and order in which data are arranged within data records; or a Fortran control
statement telling the computer how data are arranged. The format precisely defines where
each field is positioned within the data record, the number of characters in the field, and the
type of information (integer, decimal, or text). The A, F, E and G formats are used most
frequently.

formatted dataset
A dataset that has been prepared for input into a specific application program. It is in
alphanumeric format; therefore, it can be displayed and edited at a computer terminal
independently of the mapping program.

FORTRAN
A computer language used for most scientific computer programs. The term is short for
Formula Translator.

forward projection
A mathematical scheme for converting geographic latitude and longitude coordinates into
northing and easting coordinates.

R2003.12.0 Glossary 918

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

function pool
A collection of variables that are known only within the currently active function. See also
profile pool, shared pool, and variable.

geodetic coordinates
The quantities that define the horizontal position of a point on a spheroid with respect to a
specific geodetic datum. This datum is usually expressed as latitude and longitude. The
elevation of a point is also a geodetic coordinate and may be referred to as a height above sea
level.

geoid
The undisturbed, mean sea level equipotential surface to which the direction of gravity is
everywhere perpendicular. An oblate ellipsoid (spheroid) that approximates the geoid is the
reference for geodetic latitude determinations.

gradient vector
A vector on a surface that always points in the direction of most rapid increase. The gradient
vector is composed of two components: the slope in the X direction and slope in the Y
direction. The magnitude of the gradient vector is the square root of the sum of the two
squared slopes. The direction of the gradient vector is the arc tangent to the ratio of the
Y-slope to the X-slope. The gradient vector can also be expressed in terms of the dip angle and
the direction of dip. (Note: The direction of dip is at right angles to the strike angle.) The
magnitude of the gradient vector is the tangent of the dip angle and the direction of the
gradient vector is the direction of dip.

graphics file
A disk file that contains individual picture files. Also referred to as a ZGF (the graphics file
extension) and as a Z-MAP graphics file.

graphics primitives
The lines, text, symbols, and polygons used to generate a feature. See also logical graphics
block.

grid
A set of surface values located at the intersections of grid lines that span a rectangular area and
that run parallel to the sides of the rectangle. The grid line spacing is called the grid increment.
Usually the increment is constant across the entire grid. The grid line intersections are called
grid nodes. The smallest areas enclosed by grid lines are called grid cells. The surface values
of a grid are called grid values. Since the grid covers a rectangle, the grid limits are given by
the coordinates of the lower left and upper right corners of the area.

R2003.12.0 Glossary 919

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

gridding
The mathematical process used to estimate values at the grid nodes from control points,
digitized contours, shotpoints, etc. The result of gridding is a grid.

grid increment ticks

See reference crosses.

hachured line
A line or curve such as a contour formed by drawing short and equally spaced line segments
perpendicular to the curve. The line segments are typically about 0.1 inch long and 0.5 inch
apart. Hachured contours are used to indicate the dip direction, closed low areas, elevated
areas, or steep slopes depending on the conventions established for the map.

hardcopy
A paper or other tangible media copy of a map or other types of graphic products as opposed
to an image of the map on a graphics screen.

header
Information that is inserted at the beginning of a dataset to identify the data and assist in
loading the data into the computer program.

herringbone
A systematic distortion in contours made from roughly parallel seismic or flight line data. The
distortion is caused when a line is mislocated or has a systematic bias relative to the other
lines. The result is a herringbone pattern in the contours as they bend away from their
predictable trend to cross the corrupted line.

hexadecimal code
A numeric code with a base of 16, in which the digits 0 through 9 and the letters A through F
represent the numbers.

horizon
The surface at the intersection of two different rock layers or a surface associated with a
seismic reflection when the reflector covers a large area.

hydrocarbon saturation
The fraction of the pore volume filled with hydrocarbons as opposed to water saturation.

R2003.12.0 Glossary 920

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

inclination
The angle between a surface and the horizontal. See dip.

index map
A reference map, usually of a large scale, showing the location of another small-scale map. An
index map is frequently drawn in the margin of a small-scale map near the map title block.

initial dip
The slope angle of bedding surfaces at deposition.

input file name

Name given a file that contains data to be entered into a process such as the gridding task.

interactive mode
A mode for executing computer programs where the operator must respond immediately to
requests for information and decisions in the order they are presented by the program.
Operator responses and instructions are entered at a computer keyboard.
Contrast with batch mode.

interpolation
A mathematical process for estimating surface values at locations where the surface values are
not known. The estimates are made from known data, such as control point datasets. Grids are
produced by interpolating control points. The interpolation procedure employed to grid a
dataset should be selected to best fit the characteristics of the data and the specific application.

inverse projection
A mathematical scheme for converting northing and easting coordinates into latitude and
longitude coordinates.

irreducible water saturation

The fraction of the pore volume occupied by water in a reservoir at maximum hydrocarbon
saturation.

isochore
1) The vertical thickness of a rock unit. 2) A contour map of vertical thickness for a rock unit.

isochron
1) The difference of two time horizons. 2) A contour map of the reflection time differences for
two time horizons.

R2003.12.0 Glossary 921

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

isofacies map
A map that uses pattern symbols to show areas of distributions of a rock type, facies, or other
areally distributed features.

isogram
A contour line.

isolith
A line connecting points of similar lithology.

isopach
1) The stratigraphic thickness of a rock unit (measured perpendicular to the top and base of a
unit). Isopach thickness is less than or equal to isochore thickness. 2) A contour map of
stratigraphic thickness for a rock unit.

iteration
The repeated execution of a sequence of operations. Some mapping algorithms such as
filtering iterate or repeat a sequence of steps to produce their results.

justify
To align characters horizontally to fit the positioning constraints of a required format.

kelly bushing (k.b. or KB)

A part of a rotary drilling rig that is near the top of a well. The elevation at the top of the
bushing is used as the datum for well logs, depths and other measurements.

Lambert azimuthal equal area projection

An azimuthal map projection that places the pole of the projection at the center of the map.
The great circles radiate from the center of the projection. As the name states this map
projection produces maps where the areas are equally proportioned.

Lambert conformal conic projection

A map projection where the longitude lines are straight lines that meet at a common point
outside the map. Latitude lines are arcs or circles that have the common point as their center.
The meridian and parallels intersect at right angles and angles on the earth are correctly
represented. Used to map elongated areas and for navigational applications.

R2003.12.0 Glossary 922

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

kriging
A geostatistical method of modeling a surface that takes into account the inherent variability in
the data being mapped. According to Jones, Hamilton, and Johnson, Kriging is a complex
weighted average that takes into account spatial relationships between data points and from
them to the grid node.

latitude
The distance measured north or south of the Equator. Latitude is usually expressed in degrees
ranging from 0 at the Equator to 90 degrees at the North Pole and 90 degrees at the South
Pole.

least squares fit

An approximation of a set of data such that the sum of the squared deviations between the
approximation and the data is minimized.

library
A collection of related files.

line of section
A map line indicating the location of a profile or cross section.

line resampling
1) Creates points at regular intervals along the lines in a dataset.
2) Through attribute propagation, finds the value for a given field of an intermediate point by
using the known values of the points on either side.

lithofacies map
A map showing the variation in some property of a rock unit. Examples include percent of an
element or fossil in a given geologic unit.

logical graphics blocks (LGB)

Graphics primitives that have been grouped into many features, such as contours, seismic
lines, borders, etc. Also referred to throughout Landmark geological products interchangeably
as: picture feature, picture segment, graphics feature.

longitude
The distance measured east or west from the Central Meridian. Longitude is usually expressed
in degrees ranging from 0 at the Central Meridian to 180 degrees east or 180 degrees west.
The central meridian is an internationally recognized line that passes through Greenwich,
England.

R2003.12.0 Glossary 923

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

magnetic declination
The angle between magnetic and geographic meridians.

magnetic meridian
At any point, the direction of the horizontal component of the earths magnetic field.

map grid
Geographic grid lines that are drawn on a map to provide spatial references for other map
features. Map grid lines can be latitude and longitude lines, northing and easting lines, or other
types of geographic grids.

map projection
A mathematical procedure for mapping latitude and longitude grid lines on the surface of the
earth onto a plane surface, such as a map that enables the systematic transformation of
spherical coordinates into planar coordinates and vice versa.

map scale
The ratio of the distance between any two points on the map to the distance between the same
two points on the earth. Map scales are expressed as 1:2000, 1:10000, etc.

map symbol
See symbol.

masking grid
See control grid.

master file
A disk file that contains a collection of datasets. Master files are used by Landmark geological
mapping systems and often have the extension .MFD.

maximum contour level

The largest contour value found in a mappable dataset.

mean value
The average of all data values. Null values are not included in the mean.

menu
A list of options that are displayed by a computer program.

R2003.12.0 Glossary 924

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Mercator projection
A cylindrical type of conformal map projection where meridian lines are parallel to the
equator line and are spaced according to their distance apart at the equator. The latitude lines
are parallel to the equator. This is a conformal map projection, thereby maintaining the true
shape of the land masses. It is more often employed when mapping large areas.

merge operations
A general class of dual grid operations that act to combine intersecting and sometimes
unrelated surfaces, such as unconformities, onlap, faults, etc. The hybrid surface resulting
from such a combination usually serves to define a geologically distinct body of rock. The
operations involved are MIN, MAX, CMIN, CMAX, MERGE LOW and MERGE HIGH. See
the Operations section in the Z-MAP Plus Reference Manual to determine which operation
best fits the specific circumstances.

meridian
A longitude line. See longitude.

message
A comment that provides special information to the user. It may alert the user about what to
expect next, confirm that a user-requested action is in progress, or provide a report of some
error condition.

metafile
A special graphics file that is used to drive various output devices (i.e., plotter, monitor).

minimum contour level

The smallest contour value found within a set of mappable Z-values.

missing value
See null value and ZNON.

mis-tie
The difference of values at identical points on intersecting seismic lines.

modeling
The use of computer programs and available data to develop a more complete understanding
of the data source. For example, a reservoir model can be constructed from seismic and well
data to estimate reserves or predict future production.

R2003.12.0 Glossary 925

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

modulation
A process of varying a graphics feature to reflect a variation in the value of a field. Modulation
tables for symbol and label size and symbol color can be built using Post Seismic Data (New).

NADCON
A geodetic conversion process. A geodetic datum is a direct measurement of the earths
surface in a given geographical area. The NADCON acronym stands for North American
Datum Conversion. NADCON is currently available in Z-MAP Plus as a macro. NAD27 was
the reference system of measurement for latitude/longitude coordinates in North America.
Improvements in measurement equipment and techniques have resulted in the development of
a new datum for North America, NAD83. NADCON allows for conversion in either direction
between NAD27 and NAD83.

negative volume
Volume bounded by a surface and a datum plane when the surface is below the datum.
Negative volume is a measure of the amount of fill required in a cut and fill computation.
See positive volume and net volume.

net volume
The difference between positive and negative volumes.

normalization
A means of transforming from one value range to another using linear regression techniques.

notation
A set of symbols and rules for their use, for the representation of data.

null area
That portion of the gridded area where valid grid values were not computed, generally because
of insufficient data.

null value
A special number that is encoded in the place of Z-values to indicate that the Z-values are
missing or unknown. The null value must be different than any possible Z-value it replaces.
Typical null values are 999, 9999, 1.0E+30, etc. Null values are used to indicate areas where
grid values cannot be determined and when Z-values in a control point dataset are missing.
Landmark geological products call the null value ZNON.

numeric character
A digit from 0 to 9.

R2003.12.0 Glossary 926

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

oblique projection
A conformal map projection that is centered on either the equator or a pole.

offset
The number of measuring units from a starting point in a record or other area to some other
point.

onlap
Successive landward termination of strata at the base of a depositional unit. In modeling onlap,
you would use one of the Merge operations. See also baselap.

operand
An entity to which an operation is applied; that which is operated upon. An operand is usually
identified by an address part of an instruction.

operations
Mathematical or logical (Boolean) operations that are performed on grids or other types of
datasets. See dual grid operations and single grid operations.

output dataset
The dataset produced by gridding or some of the other mathematical operations.

overlay
The process of taking a set of graphics, such as contours, and superimposing them onto
another set, such as a map.

pad
To fill a field with dummy data, usually zeros or blanks. Padding is usually performed with
zeros at the left of a numeric field and with blanks at the right of an alphanumeric field.

paleo section
A cross section showing attitudes of bedding and structure as it is assumed to have been at
some past time. The cross section may have been constructed by flattening one of the
structures and applying the same shifts to deeper structures.

parallel
A latitude line. See latitude.

R2003.12.0 Glossary 927

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

parameter
A number, text string, or other information that is required to control a process. Parameters are
the values assigned to variables within a computer program.

perspective display
A 3D display of a surface that is geometrically similar to how the surface would appear if it
could be photographed. The display is constructed relative to a specified viewing point that
must be some distance from the surface just as a camera must be away from the surface to
make a photograph. The dimensions of surface features are decreased with distance from the
viewing point.

picture
A generic term for a map, cross section, or other type of display that can be produced by a
mapping system. A picture is a named collection of graphic features. It can be recalled by its
name, displayed and edited.

planimeter
A mechanical or digital instrument used to compute areas and volumes of mapped features
manually. The instrument consists of a small wheel and a counter. Revolutions are converted
directly into distances when the wheel follows a contour or other closed figure.

plotter units
Units of distance used to specify plotting locations as opposed to actual data units. Most
plotters manufactured in the United States use inches, while most foreign plotters use
centimeters. The plotter units are given relative to the lower left corner of the picture and
include space for map margins.

point to point
Method of selecting wells to be displayed on a cross section. User is required to pick (one at a
time) the desired wells.

polygon
A closed planar figure with three or more sides. Polygons are used to specify property
ownership boundaries, areas where special grid operations such as grid blanking are to be
performed, the horizontal limits for volume calculations, and other map data.

pool
A storage place for names and values of variables.

R2003.12.0 Glossary 928

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

porosity
Pore volume per gross volume of rock. Porosity is determined from cores or from neutron or
resistivity logs.

positive volume
The volume formed between a surface and a datum plane when the surface is above the datum.
Generally the volume is limited to a bounded area.

posting data
Placing data on a map on its correct geographic position. In some programs, posting data is
referred to as spotting data. See spotting data for additional information.

process window
A computer terminal screen display used to list process control parameters and their current
values or processing options. The Z-MAP Plus process window is known as the Status/Report
window.

profile
A file stored on disk that contains variable names and values to be used in future Dialog
Manager sessions.

profile pool
A collection of variables that are contained in the application profile and automatically
retained from one session to another for the user. See also function pool, shared pool, and
variable.

projection
A planar representation of the Earth's surface made by passing lines from points on the surface
to the intersection with the plane.

prompt
In an interactive program, a message from the program that requires a response from the
operator. The type of response should be evident from the message.

range
1) The interval between two numbers or coordinates. 2) The designation for the north-south
sections of a township. The north-south boundary between townships is called a range line.

R2003.12.0 Glossary 929

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

record
A logical set of data for one item in a dataset. Each record is partitioned into two or more data
fields, all records within the dataset must have the same number of fields, and all records must
have their fields in the same order. When the records are constructed, all fields must contain
their appropriate values or the null value.

reference crosses
Also called grid increment ticks. Crosses (+) that are drawn on a map so that it can be overlaid
and aligned with other maps. Reference crosses are usually drawn at the intersections of major
geographic grid lines. They are drawn large enough (approximately 1 inch) to be distinguished
from other types of posted data.

reference spheroid
A theoretical figure whose dimensions loosely approach the dimensions of a geoid.

refinement passes
Recalculation passes on a grid that have the effect of smoothing contours. The calculation
interval becomes smaller and smaller with an increasing number of passes and the processing
time increases.

reserved word
A word that is defined in a programming language for a special purpose, and that must not
appear as a user-declared identifier.

residual
The small scale regional variation of a surface. The residual is used to locate important surface
detail that might be obscured by large scale surface trends. See trend analysis.

return code
A value that indicates the outcome of preceding instructions.

row
A horizontal arrangement of characters or other expressions. Contrast with column.

scalar
A quantity characterized by a single number. Contrast with array.

scaling factor
A multiplicative factor used to alter the values of a specific curve.

R2003.12.0 Glossary 930

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

scratch file
A disk file that is automatically attached to each Z-MAP Plus program run. All intermediate
files created during the run are stored on the scratch file and deleted when you terminate the
run, unless you specify otherwise.

scrolling
In computer graphics, vertically or horizontally moving a display image in a manner such that
new data appears at one edge as old data disappears on the opposite edge.

search radius
The radius of the data collection circle that is constructed around each grid node during
gridding. The circle defines the area from which data can be collected to be used to interpolate
the grid value. Data outside the circle are not used to interpolate the grid value.

selection panel
A type of panel that presents a list of options (a menu) to the user, who must then make a
selection to proceed in the dialog.

semi-variogram
The statistical tool employed by the gridding method called Kriging. The semi-variogram
relates variation to distance. The semi-variogram assumes that we expect nearby data points
on a surface to be more similar than distant points.

set points
Positions on the display marked by the user using function keys [F9] and [F10]. These
positions are marked to provide reference points for some subsequent function to be
performed by the SDF Program.

shared pool
A collection of variables accessible to different functions belonging to the same application.
See also function pool, profile pool, and variable.

shotpoint (SP)
For mapping purposes, the shotpoint is the location where seismic reflection times are
recorded.

R2003.12.0 Glossary 931

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

spotting data
The process of drawing data locations and data values on a map. The dataset can be either grid
or control point data. The data locations are indicated by special centered symbols while data
values are written in designated locations around the symbol. The data values may be numeric
or text strings. See posting data.

standard cross section

One of three available cross-section types. The standard cross-section display has true relative
horizontal and vertical scales, with two user-selected log curves. Logs may be hung either
structurally or stratigraphically. Wells not falling exactly on the line of section are projected in
at right angles.

standard deviation
The square root of the variance.

strike
The direction of a contour of a surface; the horizontal direction at right angles to the dip.

structure
1) The general disposition, attitude, arrangement, or relative position of the rock masses of an
area. 2) Any physical arrangement of rocks such as an anticline that may involve the
accumulation of oil or gas. 3) A subsurface area with a closed high.

substitute American Petroleum Institute number (API number)

A number to be used as the unique identifier for cataloging information when the real API # is
not available.

support data
Frequently used in conjunction with control points or grids, support data includes fault traces,
polygons, digitized curves, etc.

symbol
One of 964 different graphics symbols that can be drawn on a map at designated x,y locations.
The symbols are constructed so their centers are positioned at x,y. Symbols range in graphic
complexity from a simple plus sign to complex combinations of shaded circles and lines. The
different designs are used to indicate different types of data or states of the data. Any of the
symbols can be used to spot a dataset.

R2003.12.0 Glossary 932

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

three point problem

The geometric construction that results in the determination of the strike and dip from three
points defining a plane.

township
1) A square area, six miles on each side and divided into 36 sections numbered 1 to 36. In the
United States the section numbers start in the upper right corner and lap back and forth and
down. In Canada, the numbers start in the lower right corner and lap back and forth and up. 2)
A designation of the east-west row of townships. United States townships are specified
relative to standard reference parallels that often are not stated explicitly; T2NR3E identifies
the township that is 2 rows north of the reference parallel and 3 columns east of the reference
meridian.

trailing
Located at the end of a string or number. For example, the number 1000 has three trailing
zeros.

transfer
The process of moving a dataset into or out of the mapping program.

trend analysis
The fitting of a smooth analytical surface to data points to represent the large scale regional
variation of the data rather than a precise fit that honors all the data. The objective is to detect
trends in the data that might mask small and important local features. The difference between
a precise fit to the data and a trend fit is called the residual. This is the local erratic or random
component of the data.

trend surface map

The calculated average surface over a given area. Initial calculated surface is linear (first
order).

truncate
1) To remove the beginning or ending elements of a string or number. 2) To cut-off or remove
a part of a geological structure.

unconformity
A surface of erosion or nondeposition that separates younger strata from older rock.
Frequently, the strata above and below the unconformity are not parallel. In modeling an
unconformity, you would use one of the Merge operations.

R2003.12.0 Glossary 933

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

unique identifier
A number (the API number or its last 5 digits) used to establish the uniqueness of a well.

Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM)

An internationally recognized map projection with the following attributes. The globe is
divided into sixty 6-degree zones starting at 180 degrees and increasing towards the east (i.e.,
zone 1 extends from 180 degrees west to 174 degrees west). The center of the zone (177
degrees for zone 1) is the line of tangency for the projection. By mathematically joining the
adjacent zones a large area may be mapped with a minimum of distortion. The UTM
projection is used to map areas between 84 degrees N and 80 degrees S.

unwindow one level

The opposite of window. The display is restored to the viewing window that was selected prior
to the current window. Window may be used to make progressively smaller viewing windows.
Unwindow One Level steps backward by restoring the viewing windows in the reverse order
they were selected. See window.

value to shift
The amount to be added or subtracted from a curve. Results in an overall shift of the curve
values.

variable
A character or group of characters that refers to a value in a computer program; a quantity that
can assume any of a given set of values.

variance
The average of the squared distances from the data values to the mean of the data values.
When the variance is small relative to the mean then the data are clustered around the mean
value. When the variance is large, the data are scattered away from the mean.

vertex
An x,y point where two line segments of a digitized curve join.

volumetrics
A mathematical procedure for computing the volume between two surfaces. The volumetrics
module also computes planar and surface areas.

water saturation
See irreducible water saturation.

R2003.12.0 Glossary 934

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

weighting function
A mathematical equation that is used in gridding to decrease the significance of control point
data with increasing distance from the grid node being interpolated. The justification for a
weighting function is that the similarity in surface characteristics at any two arbitrary points
typically decreases with increasing distance between the points. Weighting function equations
are designed to approximate the way that similarity decreases.

wildcard
A designated character such as * or % used to set up a search or a mask. Usually the wildcard
is used in the middle or at the end of a partial string. For example, AUS* searches for any
character string beginning with AUS. Wildcards are used in Z-MAP Plus to construct textual
masks for selective posting, as well as for file extensions and directory path definitions.

window
1) A rectangular portion of a graphics display that is extracted from the current display and
enlarged to the full viewing area of the display. Windows are used to examine portions of a
map or other type of graphic display in greater detail. A window is defined by using the
graphics cursor to mark two opposite corners of the rectangle. The terms windows and zoom
windows are functionally the same. 2) A rectangular area that is used to extract a subset of a
dataset by selecting only the data located in the window. See unwindow one level.

worm's eye map

A map showing the view one would have looking up at the bottom of a surface. Also a map
depicting progressive transgressions or sediment overlap.

X-coordinate
1) The horizontal (left-right or east-west) component of a rectangular cartesian coordinate
system used in mapping. The x coordinate increases to the right or the east. 2) The first
component of a 3-dimensional rectangular system.

X-field
A portion of a data record that is allocated to store the x coordinate. See data field.

Y-coordinate
1) The vertical (up-down or north-south) component of a 2-dimensional rectangular cartesian
coordinate system. The y coordinate increases to the north. 2) The second component of a
3-dimensional rectangular system.

Y-field
A portion of a data record that is allocated to store the y coordinate. See data field.

R2003.12.0 Glossary 935

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Z-field
A portion of a data record that is allocated to store a Z-value. See data field.

ZNON
A name for the null value. See null value.

zoom
The process of displaying a small area of a picture so that small features are made visible. See
window and unwindow one level.

Z-value
1) The third component of a 3-dimensional coordinate system of x,y,z points.
2) A measured or computed value for a surface at a corresponding x,y location. Z-value is used
to refer to grid values or the numeric data components in control point datasets. Measured or
computed values of elevation, thickness, porosity, pressure, and seismic time are typical
Z-values.

ZGF
Z-MAP Graphics File. See graphics file.

R2003.12.0 Glossary 936

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Index
Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Numerics algorithms
also see: gridding algorithms
2D Seismic option (Features menu) 321-337
Carter-Good Iterative Depth 664, 665
3D Fishnet Plot option (Features menu) 246
Douglas Poiker (curve thinning) 706
3D Seismic option (Features menu) 338-362
Extended Fault Contouring 238
3D Time-to-Depth Conversion macro
Profile Contouring 238
shown on menu 740
Williams (curve-scanning) 706
3D Velocity Grid (Time Slice) macro
alias, defined 905
shown on menu 740
Altitude Of Sun setting
Shaded Relief dialog box 248
A Always On Top option (System Window) 773
American Petroleum Institute (API)
ABS (absolute value) function
substitute numbers defined 932
Single Data Operations 561
well number defined 906
Single Grid Operations 541
American Polyconic projections
adding
Z-MAP Plus 885
AOI/projection information 369
Antilog Base 10 (from Data) operation 569
DLS data (Create & Post) 366
Antilog Base 10 (from Grid) operation 548
DLS data (Township/Section/Range) 367
antilogarithm see: Antilog Base 10
DLS/NTS lines/labels on a map 365
AOI
DLS/NTS survey data 365
adding (Projection Box option) 369
fault dip symbols 670
definition 907
fields (Data Operations) 633
DLS/NTS maps 364
grid node symbols/values 275-276
resetting with resample grid 552
lines to map 252-270
source for dual grid 548
logo to title block 899
specifying AOI type for new map 36
NTS data (Post National Topo) 368
specifying for new map (from file data) 37
NTS data to map 366
specifying for new map (from user input) 38
points to lines (Line Resampling) 675
Append X-Y to Seismic Time File
polygons to map 277-279
Operations: Geophysical Operations 647
text to map 271-274
area of interest see: AOI
Advanced tab
Area/Depth Plot option
Point Gridding Plus window 413
used in volumetrics 767
A-format, defined 905
areas
Albers Equal Area projections
Edit Area dialog box 173
Blue Marble 889
Scale Area option 663
Z-MAP Plus 885
Scale/Bias Line or Area operation 662
Albers projection, defined 905
volume scale 753

R2003.12.0 Index 937

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

ASCII data B
creating from ZGF data 74
back interpolation
exporting grids to OpenWorks 863
Back Interpolation (Operations) 677-680
File menu options, overview 31
summary 676
importing .DAT file (File menu) 120
using in Calculator 538
importing to MFD/OpenWorks 860-864
background display color
limitations of import file format 118
setting as black/white 778
listing printing formats (File: Info) 97
Balancer option (Operations: Faults) 668
previewing before importing 123
base plane value
Save As option (File menu) 70
Volumetrics dialog box 757
workflow for importing 117
baselapping surface intersections
ATAN (arctangent) function
Surface Intersection operation 735
Single Data Operations 562
baseline files
Single Grid Operations 541
constructing a cross section 226
attaching
Basemap Features dialog box 223-225
Attach MFDs icon 48
activating tabs/fields 223
Attach ZGFs icon 49
buttons 225
new ZGF attached automatically 34
Basemap option (File: New): workflow 35
X,Y values to seismic time file 647
basemaps see: maps
attributes
bathymetric surveys
color assignments 804
using in Line Gridding 487
color attribute of primitives 208
Bias (Trend) ratio: Point Gridding Plus 415
modeling with Trendform Gridding 475
BIAS function
propagating (Line Resampling) 710
Single Data Operations 561
Auto Display option
Single Grid Operations 541
redrawing display automatically 383
Bias mode
auxiliary files for Z-MAP Plus 901
biasing a line/area 663
Azimuth Of Sun setting
bifurcations
Shaded Relief dialog box 248
Balancer option (Faults) 668
azimuthal projections
Biharmonic filters
Azimuthal Equal Area (Blue Marble) 889
described (Point Gridding) 445
Azimuthal Equal Area (Polar Aspect - Blue
shown in flexing workflow 520
Marble) 889
template described 521
Azimuthal Equidistant (Blue Marble) 889
using in Contour Gridding 461, 485
Azimuthal Equidistant (Polar Aspect - Blue
using in Flexing 524
Marble) 890
using in Line Gridding 497
Azimuthal Gnomic (Z-MAP) 884
using in Point Gridding Plus 413
Azimuthal Orthographic (Z-MAP) 884
Bipolar Oblique Conic Conformal projections
Azimuthal Stereographic (Z-MAP) 884
Z-MAP Plus 886
Orthographic (Blue Marble) 891

R2003.12.0 Index 938

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

blanking cartographic features

Blank Data (Data Operations) 570-572 reducing points (Line Generalization) 704
Blank Grid (Grid Operations) 549-551 cartographic operations 676
definition 908 cartographic projections
inside/outside polygon 572 setting up a projection 871-896
BLANKMAX function Cassini-Soldner projections
Single Data Operations 562 Blue Marble 888
Single Grid Operations 541 Z-MAP Plus 886
BLANKMIN function CEIL function
Single Data Operations 562 Single Data Operations 562
Single Grid Operations 541 centerline faults
block averaging (Trend Fit Gridding) 506 converting from polygon 398
Blue Marble map projections 888-892 Profiler option (profiling attributes) 673
Bonne projections (Blue Marble) 890 using in Point Gridding Plus 396
Boolean Grid (Modeling) 515 centerlines
briefly described 386 moving with Migrator option 671
borders central meridian
adding to map/picture 223 False Easting (projection parameters) 43
Bounded Range gridding algorithm map projection setting 43
Boundary Tolerance parameter 435 CGM files
Compression Factor parameter 435 briefly defined 909
Point Gridding 434 printing 131-139
Point Gridding Plus 406 saving 136
Break & Extend option (Data Editor) 189 Change Internal MFD Name macro
brightness grids shown on menu 740
Shaded Relief dialog box 247 CLIPMAX function
Single Data Operations 562
C Single Grid Operations 541
CLIPMIN function
Calculate Fault Fields (Operations: Faults) Single Data Operations 562
669-670 Single Grid Operations 541
Calculator (Operations menu) 536-538 clipping
Equations/Input panels illustrated 537 definition 910
saving equation as ZEQ file 538 extending seismic lines over border 355
Single Grid Operations (listed) 541 Close Polygons in Vertex File macro
using (basic steps) 538 shown on menu 740
Calculator icon 536 closed polygons
Canadian surveys 363-368 using in Profiler 673
CARM (Computer Aided Reservoir Closest Point gridding algorithm
Management) 743-770 Point Gridding 434
Carter-Good Iterative Depth (IDA) algorithm Point Gridding Plus 405
Normalized Interval Velocity Data 664 Trendform Gridding 473
Normalized Interval Velocity Grid 665 closing
Cartesian coordinate system MFDs 48
using for new map AOI type 36 ZGF 49
CNTR files see: contour files

R2003.12.0 Index 939

Landmark
codes
data field types 787
data file type codes 785
State Plane projection 865
Color Scale option (Features)
adding color scale bar to map 251
Color Table dialog box 808-826
Edit Color Table dialog box 212
color table files
accessible in File Manager 60
creating 216
loading 216
required extensions for file names 115
color tables
copying colors 214
defining spread (Interpolate option) 214
directory paths/file naming conventions 115
displaying 209
displaying all colors 214
effect: overlaying pictures (ZGF Viewer) 235
loading existing (Read option) 216
saving as files 216
saving changes 217
setting RGB/HLS mode 213
Color-filled Border macro
shown on menu 739
colorfilled contours
Color-filled Contour Intervals macro 739
Curve Drawing & Labeling Parameters 245
colors
color index defined 804
Color Indices option 218
Color Table option 209-217
Curve Drawing & Labeling Parameters 245
Delete Fill Area (Graphics Editor) 173
Edit Area dialog box 173
Edit Lines dialog box 167
Edit Markers dialog box 169
Edit Text dialog box 165
editing 803-826
editing color index 213
editing indexes in ASCII 81
editing text 166
Graphics Background mode 778
R2003.12.0
Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide
colors continued
overview 208
updating dynamically/on demand 217
variation of plotter color 809
COLORWHEEL.ZGF, described 809
commenting
comment symbols (import/export files) 830
out log file lines 774
compaction equation
Normalized Interval Velocity Data 665
Normalized Interval Velocity Grid 666
compass orientation
calculating in DIPAZM function 542
complex text, illustrated 801
compressing
Compress menu (File) 153-156
MFDs 153
ZGF/MFD in File Manager 65
ZGFs 155
Compression Factor parameter
Isopach/Bounded Range algorithms 435
Computer Graphics Metafiles see: CGM files
computing grid area/volume see: Volumetrics
concatenating
Concatenation option (Merge Data) 621
concave hulls
using to initialize grid node values 390-391
console window
switch to iconify when macro executes 779
constant grids
Constant Grid modeling 516
Constant Grid modeling, described 386
constants
setting nodes to constants (CLIPMIN) 541
Contour (Old) option (Features) 240-245
contour files
creating 198
creating a subset of 575
editing (Contours, Faults, Lines option) 185
editing data (Data Editor) 174
reducing file size (Line Generalization) 705
Contour Gridding 451-466
briefly described 385
Extrapolation Distance parameter 392
purpose of flexing described 393
Index 940
Landmark
contour labels
Curve Drawing and Labeling Parameters
dialog box 244
contour levels
constraints (Contour Gridding) 463
contour maps
adding perspective with 3D fishnet 246
Contour Map macros (on menu) 738
creating 238-251
Contour To Grid macro
Regrid option (Data Editor) 201
Contouring icon 238
Contouring options (Features menu) 238-251
Contour option 239-240
contours
adding lines to 252-270
Break & Extend option 189
breaking a line into parts 187
creating data file 198
Curve Drawing and Labeling Parameters
dialog box 244
curve sampling density rates 242
Edit Lines dialog box 167
editing (Contours, Faults, Lines option) 185
extending lines 188
file structure 852
removing wobble in Line Gridding 499
Reshape Contours option 185
Shaded Relief dialog box 247
using a profile to control 465
using to blank grids 550
control grids 911
using to initialize grid nodes 389
control point files
adding fields with IDA 664
Area Edit option 176
Create Data option 198
Create Point option (Data Editor) 179
editing data 175
editing data (Data Editor) 174
output by Migration/Reverse Migration 649
R2003.12.0
Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide
control points 911
adding symbols for 280-290
moving 186
Point Gridding method 430-450
Point Gridding Plus gridding 394-429
symbol parameters 280
converting
conversion factors, defined 912
Convert Lat/Lon (DMS) to Decimal Degrees
macro (on menu) 739
data to/from decimal degree format 701
file types (table) 682
geodetic/projected coordinates 686
NAD 27 data to/from NAD 83 data 367
overwriting coordinate fields 700
convex hulls
using to initialize grid node values 390
Coordinate Transformations (Operations)
control parameters 874
Projection 689-691
Spheroid 689
Transform Coordinates 692-699
coordinates
setting up a projection 871-896
Copy menu (File)
Copy Files option 140-141
Copy Pictures option 142-145
copying
also see: exporting, importing
color in color table 214
Copy Files (Copy menu) 140
Copy Pictures option (Copy menu) 142
fields (Data Operations) 633
files in File Manager 62
files/pictures 66
MFD data to ASCII file 70
text (Edit menu) 162
text (Graphics Editor) 165
COS (cosine) function
Single Data Operations 562
Single Grid Operations 541
Index 941
Landmark
CPS-1 files
converting MFD data to 73
File menu options, overview 31
importing to MFD 131
listing contents of SAVE file 107
Create a new Z-FIELD dialog box
Migration, Reverse Migration 652
creating
color table file 216
cross section 45-47
map 34-44
map with DLS data 366
map with DLS/NTS AOI 364
map with NTS data 366
MFD 33
session 32
ZGF 34
Cross Section Features dialog box 226-232
cross section files
creating a subset of 575
reducing file size (Line Generalization) 705
Cross Section Map Features dialog box 232
Cross Section menu
Cross Section Features 226-232
Map Features 232
cross sections
adding well data 230
creating 45-47
creating data file from 198
Delete Fill Area (Graphics Editor) 173
displaying automatically (System Switches)
777
displaying cross section 49
displaying file information 105
displaying headers (File: Info) 106
displaying information (File Manager) 67
File menu options, overview 31
partially regridding (Data Editor) 201
Picture Assembly (Features) 370-374
Rename Pictures option (File: Rename) 148
specifying features 226-232
workflow 45
working with (File Manager) 60
CTOG see: contour gridding
R2003.12.0
Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide
curve sampling density rates
contouring parameter described 242
curve thinning algorithm 706
curves
drawing (Contouring) 243
curve-scanning algorithm 706
customizing
title block 897-900
cutlines
adding (Picture Assembly option) 371
Cutoff parameter
Contour Gridding 461
Flexing (test described) 525
Line Gridding 497
Line Gridding Plus 486
Point Gridding 446
Point Gridding Plus 414
cutting
files/pictures (File Manager) 62
D
dashed lines, pattern illustrated 802
data
also see by data type
Antilog Base 10 (from Data) operation 569
Blank Data operation 570-572
codes for data fields 787
converting data types (File Conversion) 675
converting to/from decimal degrees 701
Data Distribution Statistics (Point Gridding)
448
Data Selection (Data Operations) 573-616
Data Statistics dialog box 104
Dual Data Operations 565-568
editing 174
editing selected data 205
Grid to Data operation 572
importing from/exporting to Stratamodel 27
importing from/exporting to TDQ 28
importing/exporting methods (overview) 22
Single Data Operations 560-564
thinning seismic data 657
Update Files setting (Data Editor) 206
using PetroWorks data 29
Index 942
Landmark
Data Blanking (Multiple Vertex Files)
shown on menu 739
Data Distribution method (data hulls) 390
Data Editor (Edit menu)
updating files automatically on exit 206
Data File Field Listing macro
shown on menu 740
Data File History macro
shown on menu 740
Data File Summary macro
shown on menu 740
DATA files
importance of using correct extension 112
data files
Create Point option (Data Editor) 179
creating 198
creating a subset of 575
creating/editing (Data Editor) 174-207
data file type codes 785
directory paths/naming conventions 112
importing (File menu) 120
regridding after editing (Data Editor) 201
Select-Area Limits from Data File 598
Select-Thinning Edit-Random Data File 602
using to import/export Stratamodel data 27
using to import/export TDQ data 28
data hulls
methods described 390-391
Data Operations (Operations menu) 558-645
Antilog Base 10 algorithm 569
Calculator option 536
deleting records 625
Field Operations option 633-645
Merge Data option 617-623
Range Editing option 624-628
Rotate Data option 628-631
rotating X,Y values around a coordinate 628
Sort Data option 631-632
Data Selection (Data Operations)
Select-Area Limits from Data File 598
Select-Area Limits from Grid File 600
Select-Range Edit Equation Input 614
Select-Range Edit Equations Display 612
Select-Thinning Edit Line Data File 603
Wildcards 610
R2003.12.0
Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide
Data Set Name (OpenWorks) 15
data sources
definition/purpose (OpenWorks) 21
databases
access levels described (OpenWorks) 21
Dataset Profile Generator macro
shown on menu 739
datelines
Mapping Across the Dateline option 43
Mapping Across the Dateline option
(Coordinate Transformations) 698
debug print switch
toggling on/off 780
decimal degrees
converting data to/from 701
DEG (degrees with decimals)
converting data to/from 701
Delete menu (File) 150-152
deleting
Delete Fill Area (Graphics Editor) 173
equations from Range Edit Equations Display
dialog box 575
fields (Data Operations) 633
fields (Data Operations): workflow 644
files (File: Delete) 150
files in File Manager 62
limitations on Cut 62
lock (.lck) files 901
maps/cross sections (Delete Pictures) 151
redundant points (Line Generalization) 675
restoring deleted feature 159
text (Edit menu) 162
Undo Last Feature (Edit menu) 159
deviated wells
adding as map feature 291-320
creating a subset of files 575
file structure of 858
diagnostic messages
system switch for showing/hiding 777
digitized contours
redrawing with Contour option 239
digitizers
WDFILE defined 904
Index 943
Landmark
dip
reflected in Trend Fit Gridding 502
dip angle
calculating in DIPAZM function 542
used in Calculate Fault Fields 669
Dip Symbol Generator (Operations: Faults)
670-671
Dip Vector Map macros 739
DIPAZM function
Single Grid Operations 542
DIPMAG (angle tangent) function
Single Grid Operations 542
Directory Paths (File menu) 108-115
color tables 115
data files 112
format files 114
importance of file name extensions 109
macro files 115
MFDs 110
overview of options 31
session/parameter files 112
workflow 108
ZGFs 111
discontinuity codes/fields
discontinuity fields (line thinning) 607
Discontinuity Flags (file conversion) 684
setting flags (line resampling) 719
Disk File to ZGF option (Import) 130
DISPLACE (Displacement)
Line Resampling method 715
display area
separating from menu bar 778
displaying
Auto Display option (View menu) 383
Display List option (View menu) 376
fault dip symbols 670
file information: workflow 93
Full Display option (View menu) 382
grid statistics (File: Info) 105
Re-display option (View menu) 381
statistics for .data file 104
View menu options 375-384
ZGF information 105
Distance gridding algorithm
Point Gridding 434
Point Gridding Plus 405
R2003.12.0
Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide
distances
Distance-to-Vertex Grid macro 467
Distance-to-Vertex Grid macro (menu) 740
DISTINCLL (Distance Increment
Latitude/Longitude)
Line Resampling method 714
DISTINCXY (Distance Increment X/Y)
Line Resampling method 713
distortion in projections, explained 689
DMS (Degree-MInute-Second)
converting data to/from 701
Dominion Land Survey (DLS)
adding DLS data to map 367
adding DLS lines/labels 365
using DLS AOI to create map 364
using DLS data to create/post map 366
dotted lines, pattern illustrated 802
double parallel Lambert projections
Z-MAP Plus 883
Douglas Poiker algorithm 706
downdip
using in DIPAZM function 542
drag-and-drop operations
in the File Manager 64
drawing
curves (Contouring) 243
hacured lines in polygons 279
lease polygons 278
lines 252-270
polygons 277-279
DTS files
importing, creating .dts Z-MAP files 57
Dual Data Operations 565-568
Operation options listed 567
Dual Grid Operations 544-548
Operation options listed 545
duplex text, illustrated 801
DX function (Single Grid Operations) 542
DX2 function (Single Grid Operations) 542
DY function (Single Grid Operations) 542
DY2 function (Single Grid Operations) 542
dynamic, defined 916
DZ/DX field (Point Gridding) 448
DZ/DY field (Point Gridding) 448
Index 944
Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

E Equal Area Cylindrical projections

Blue Marble 890
easting
equations
adding labels to map 223
Biharmonic/Laplacian flexing templates 521
Edit menu 157-218
defining/editing equations in Range Edit 614
Color Indices option 218
deleting from Range Edit Equations Display
Color Table option 209-217
dialog box 575
Data Editor option 174-207
saving to file in Calculator 538
Graphics Editor option 158-173
Equidistant Conic projections
icon button counterparts illustrated 6
Blue Marble 891
overview of options 157
Z-MAP Plus 887
Edit/Create Data 174
Equidistant Cylindrical projections
canceling edit 207
Blue Marble 891
contours, faults, lines 185
equity determination
creating data files 198
water saturation averaging overview 762
grid nodes 194
error messages
points 175
appearing in system window 4
regridding 201
appearing in xterm window 4
selecting data 205
saving system window output 773
editing
system switch for showing/hiding 777
breaking a line (Break option) 187
exaggeration, defined 916
Cancel Edit (Data Editor) 207
exception files 623
color index 213
Execute Macro dialog box 741
deleting elements (Graphics Editor) 160
Exit option (File)
deleting features (Graphics Editor) 159
ending Z-MAP session 156
deleting text (Graphics Editor) 166
EXP (natural exponent) function
Edit All Features option 173
Single Data Operations 561
Edit Area dialog box 173
Single Grid Operations 541
Edit Lines dialog box 167
expanded faults
Edit Markers dialog box 169
described (Point Gridding Plus) 396
Edit Selected Features (Graphics Ed.) 161
Dip Symbol Generator option 670
Edit Text dialog box 165
exporting
extending lines (Data Editor) 188
file format symbols 829-831
files 575
files 827-864
polygons 277-279
format of export files 829-846
removing wobble in Line Gridding 499
methods of exporting data (overview) 22
Reshape Contours option 185
MFD data to CPS SAVE file 73
using wildcards in Range Edit 609
Save As option (File menu) 70
editor, defined 916
ZGF data to ASCII file 74
elements
extended symbol generator 791
deleting elements of features 160
extensions
English units
importance of using standard extensions 109
setting with system switches 778
Extrapolation Distance parameter
enlarging
described 392
area of map (Window option) 379
Zoom In option (View menu) 377

R2003.12.0 Index 945

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

F Faults (Operations menu) 667-674

Balancer option 668
False Easting value: projection parameter 43
Calculate Fault Fields option 669-670
False Northing value: projection parameter 43
Dip Symbol Generator option 670-671
FALT files see: fault files
Migrator option 671-672
Fast Contour option (Features) 246
Profiler option 673
fault angles
Shrinker option 674
used in Calculate Fault Fields 669
workflow 667
fault files
features
creating 198
Delete Elements of a Feature (Graphics Editor)
creating a subset of 575
160
editing (Contours, Faults, Lines option) 185
Edit All Features option (Graphics Editor)
editing data (Data Editor) 174
173
fault polygons
graphic features codes 781-784
honored in Point Gridding Plus 396
Undo Last Feature (Edit menu) 159
fault traces, described 228
Features menu 219-374
fault-cut line files 478
(X,Y,Z) Point Data 280-290
faulted line data grids 479
2D Seismic option 321-337
faults
3D Fishnet Plot option 246
also see: centerline faults
3D Seismic 338-362
balancing bifurcations 668
Basemap 223-225
Break & Extend option (Data Editor) 189
Color Scale option 251
breaking a line into parts 187
Contour (Old) option 240-245
calculate dip, heave or separation 669
Contouring options 238-251
Calculate Fault Fields command 669
Contouring: Contour option 239-240
creating data file 198
Cross Section 226-232
drawbacks of treating faults as opaque 400
Deviated Wells 291-320
editing (Contours, Faults, Lines option) 185
Fast Contour option 246
extending lines 188
Grid Nodes 275-276
FALT data file type 917
Lines 252-270
Fault Locator Circles utility 399
Overlay Pictures 233-237
Fault Shrinker utility 398
Picture Assembly option 370-374
file structure 856
Polygons 277-279
in Trendform gridding 470
Projection Box 369
Migration/Reverse Migration algorithm 649
Shaded Relief option 247-250
movement terminology 396
Surveys (Canadian) 363-368
moving centerlines (Migrator option) 671
Text 271-274
Point Gridding Plus: processing faults 400
field description parameters
shrinking from polygon to centerline 674
for import/export file formats 834-846
used in volumetrics 750
Field Operations (Data Operations) 633-645

R2003.12.0 Index 946

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

fields file structures

adding to control point files with IDA 664 contours 852
Calculate Fault Fields command 669 deviated wells 858
copying/adding (Data Operations) 633 fault files 856
data type field codes 787 grids 851
deleting: workflow 644 LOGOFILE 899
description parameters (import/export files) profile data 855
829-846 seismic section 858
FORTRAN format 639 text 858
overwriting transformed coordinates 700 vertex files 854
parameter options 127 file types
renaming: workflow 641 codes for data files 785
File Conversion (Operations menu) 681-685 converting file types 682
file description parameters File: Import: ASCII (Import) menu
for import/export file formats 831-833 ZMAP+ data preview window 123
file formats File: Import: Disk File to ZGF option 130
import files for MFDs 850-859 File: Info menu
File Manager 60-67 Graphics File Summary option 107
drag-and-drop operations 64 Grid Listing option 101
File Manager icon illustrated 60 File: New menu
selecting multiple files (File Manager) 63 Basemap option 34-44
File menu 31-156 Basemap option: workflow 35
Compress 153-156 Cross Section option 45-47
Copy options 140-145 Master File (MFD) option 33
Delete 150-152 File: Open menu 48-59
Directory Paths 108-115 MFD Open/Close option 48
Exit 156 overview of options 48
Import 116-131 Picture Open option 49
Info 89-107 SeisWorks option 50
Manager 60-67 Session option 48
New options 32-47 ZGF Open/Close option 49
Open options 48-59 files
Open options: overview 48 Copy Files (Copy menu) 140
Print 131-139 copying file history (Copy File) 141
Rename 146-149 deleting (File: Delete) 150
Save As option 70-88 descriptors for file types 785
Save Session As 68-69 displaying file types in MFD 92
file names editing data 174
importance of extensions 109 File Conversion option (Operations) 675
File menu options, overview 31
format of imported/exported files 829-846
history 645

R2003.12.0 Index 947

Landmark
files continued
importing/exporting 827-864
limitations on Cut 62
listing file information: workflow 93
Master File Directory utility 90
overwriting coordinate fields 700
renaming 146
saving grid as SeisWorks horizon 85
filter operator grid
Polynomial Grid 519
filtering see: flexing
filters
User-Defined Filter described 387
fishnet plot maps
creating with Fast Contour feature 246
FIX function
Single Data Operations 562
flexing
definition 918
flexing pass defined 918
parameters: smoothing 525
Point Gridding Plus Smoothing 413
purpose of flexing described 393
Flexing option (Modeling menu) 520-530
Bias/Multiplier parameters 527
briefly described 387
Cutoff 525
Flexing Type parameter
Contour Gridding 461, 485
Point Gridding Plus 413
FLOOR function
Single Data Operations 562
FMT files see: format files
fonts
Edit All Features option 173
editing 166
options illustrated 801
types of 166
form grids
contouring tips 474
defined 468
examples 475
using Trendform Gridding for 467-476
R2003.12.0
Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide
format files 847-849
accessible in File Manager 60
as distinct from format name 121
comment ID character 73
designate 121
group ID character 73
history ID character 73
MFD to ASCII 71
naming conventions 114
setting directory paths for 114
using in ASCII (Export) 71
format groups
defined 121
formation grids 764
formatted disk files, defined 828
FORTRAN
A-format definition 905
data types 787
field format 639
listing printing format (File: Info) 97
Four Corner Map Labeling macro
shown on menu 739
frames (picture assembly) 372
Full Display option (View menu) 382
G
GC (Great Circle) geographic coordinates
using in line resampling 720
General Transverse Mercator projections
Z-MAP Plus 882
Generalized Cartographic Transformation
System (GCTS) projection, setting
(Coordinate Transformations) 693
Geo Name 15
Geo Type 15
geodetic coordinates
converting to/from projected coordinates 686
setting up a projection 871-896
Geographical Sorting macro
shown on menu 740
Index 948
Landmark
Geophysical Operations (Operations menu)
646-666
Append X-Y to Seismic Time File 647
Grid to Seismic Line Converter option 648
Migration, Reverse Migration 649-652
Mistie Reduction option 653-655
Normalized Interval Velocity (Data) 664-665
Normalized Interval Velocity (Grid) 665-666
Seismic Data Thinning option 656-661
Geophysical Operations (Operations)
Scale/Bias Line or Area option 662-664
Geophysics options (Macros menu)
menu illustrated 740
glossary 905
graphic features
codes 781-784
color index table 826
defined for color table 804
deleting/modifying (Graphics Editor)
158-173
number assignment 826
graphic primitives
changing color (Color Indices option) 218
color attribute (overview) 208
graphical toolbar
icon buttons illustrated/identified 6
Graphics Editor
Edit Selected Features option 161
graphics files see: ZGFs
Graphics options (Macros menu)
menu illustrated 739
Grid File to MFD/OW (File: Import) 129
grid files
importing to MFD/OpenWorks 129
Select-Area Limits from Grid File 600
User-Defined Filter described 387
grid increments
advice for setting size 393
formula for (Trend Fit Gridding) 505
parameters (Point Gridding Plus) 412
R2003.12.0
Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide
grid node initialization
control grids determine which 389
data points per sector used 416
directionally biased 397
number of faults to cross 415
grid node values
Antilog Base 10 (from Grid) operation 548
blanking 549
convert to data 556
divide by largest value (NORMMAX) 541
divide by standard deviation (NORMSIG)
541
editing data 194
editing data file (Data Editor) 174
NORM function 541
User-Defined Filter described 387
using data across faults (Point Gridding Plus)
396
grid nodes
adding symbols/values 275-276
aligning with resample grid 552
Boolean Grid modeling described 386
changing values evenly (Constant Grid) 516
Constant Grid modeling described 386
Extrapolation Distance parameter 392
how flexing values are calculated 521
Search Radius parameter 392
setting symbol for 196
using data hulls to initialize values 390
using to initialize grid node values 389
Grid Operations (Operations menu) 539-557
Grid to Data (Data Operations) 572
Grid to Data (Grid Operations) 555-559
Grid to Seismic Line Converter
Operations: Geophysical Operations 648
gridding
common parameters 388
reducing execution time (search radius) 392
regridding (Data Editor) 201
Index 949
Landmark
gridding algorithms
Bounded Range (Point Gridding Plus) 406
Bounded Range (Point Gridding) 434
Closest Point (Point Gridding Plus) 405
Closest Point (Point Gridding) 434
Closest Point (Trendform Gridding) 473
Distance (Point Gridding Plus) 405
Distance (Point Gridding) 434
Isopach (Point Gridding Plus) 405
Isopach (Point Gridding) 434
Kriging (Point Gridding Plus) 406
Least Squares (Point Gridding Plus) 404
Least Squares (Point Gridding) 433
Least Squares (Trendform Gridding) 473
Line Gridding 489
Linear Trend (Point Gridding) 434
Moving Plate (Point Gridding) 435
Point Density (Point Gridding Plus) 406
Projected Slopes (Point Gridding Plus) 405
Projected Slopes (Point Gridding) 433
Random Closest (Point Gridding Plus) 408
Weighted Average (Point Gridding Plus) 405
Weighted Average (Point Gridding) 433
Weighted Average (Trendform Gridding) 473
gridding methods
Boolean Grid 515
Constant Grid 516
Contour Gridding 451-466
Flexing 520-530
Line Gridding 487-500
Line Gridding Plus 477-486
Point Gridding 430-450
Point Gridding Plus 394-429
Polynomial Grid 517-518
Trend Fit 501-506
Trend Surface Gridding 507-514
Trendform Gridding 467-476
User-Defined Filter (Polynomial Grid) 519
Gridin1/Gridin2
as source for area of interest 548
R2003.12.0
Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide
grids
back interpolating X,Y positions 677
Blank Grid (Grid Operations) 549-551
blanking 549
computing area/volume see: Volumetrics
creating with IDA 665
data distribution in grid (Point Gridding) 448
displaying statistics (File: Info) 105
Dual Grid Operations 544-548
file format 851
filter operator (Polynomial Grid) 519
importing from/exporting to Stratamodel 27
listing information (File: Info) 101
operations using Calculator 536
overview of flexing 520
OWC 515
photographic representation of surface 247
reducing interval (Refinements) 393
Resample Grid (Grid Operations) 552-555
saving as SeisWorks horizon 85
saving to merged SeisWorks project 88
Single Grid Operations 540-543
H
hachured lines
adding fault dip symbols 670
filling polygons with 279
pattern illustrated 802
specifying on contour map 244
headers
displaying information (File Manager) 67
records
in ZGF flat files 75
heave
SeisWorks heave computation 57
used in Calculate Fault Fields 669
high tension surfaces
effects of Laplacian flexing 522
history
of a file 645
symbols for import/export file format 830
Index 950
Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

HLS color mode 213 Import Files dialog box

HLS color system 210 Examine/Prepare Input File button 123
HLS color system compared to RGB 807 Import menu (File) 116-131
HLS color system defined 805 ASCII (Import) 117-128
interpolation 215 importing
home directory ASCII files to MFD/OpenWorks 860-864
files created during session 901 ASCII files: workflow 117
horizons CPS-1 file to MFD 131
displayed in cross section 226 disk file to ZGF 130
in cross sections 46 file format symbols 829-831
Migration, Reverse Migration 649 File menu options, overview 31
opening SeisWorks file 50 files 827-864
saving to merged SeisWorks project 88 format files: descriptions/examples 847-849
format of import files 829-846
I grid files to MFD/OpenWorks 129
limitations of ASCII file formats 118
iconifying methods of importing data (overview) 22
console window when macro executes 779 PetroWorks data 29
icons previewing ASCII data to import 123
Attach MFDs 48 structures of import files for MFD 850-859
Attach ZGFs 49 using an interactive format description 122
Basemap Features 223 index maps
Calculator 536 adding to maps 223
Color Indices option 218 Info menu (File) 89-107
Color Table 209 Data Statistics option 104
Contouring 238 File Listing option: workflow 93
Display List 376 Graphics File Summary option 107
File Manager 60 List CPS-1 File macro 107
Full Display 382 integers
Master File Directory 90 rounding down to (FLOOR function) 562
overview of graphical toolbar 6 rounding up to (CEIL function) 562
Pan 380 integrating
Picture Open 49 data to/from other applications 22
Point Gridding Plus 395 with PetroWorks 29
Raise System Window 773 with SeisWorks 24
Redisplay 381 with StratWorks 27
Redo Last Feature 159 interpolating
Toggle Background Color 778 Back Interpolation operation 676
Undo Last Feature 159 HLS color mode 215
Window 379 RGB color mode 216
workflow overview 7 values in color table 214
Zoom In 377
Zoom Out icon 378

R2003.12.0 Index 951

Landmark
interpreters
column heading (Grid Statistics dialog) 15
definition (OpenWorks) 21
described 20
project access levels (OpenWorks) 21
interrupting
redrawing process 377
intersections
Surface Intersection operation 735
Intrinsic hypothesis
kriging in Point Gridding Plus 408
Isopach Contouring (Profiles) macro
shown on menu 739
Isopach gridding algorithm
Compression Factor parameter 435
Point Gridding 434
Point Gridding Plus 405
isopach grids
using from StratWorks 467
italic text, illustrated 801
iterative depth algorithm (IDA) 664, 665
J Operations menu 701-703
J-curve data
storing (Water Saturation Averaging) 765
K Reference Latitude (projection setting) 42
key field 779
key text 273
kriging
defined 923
hypotheses (Point Gridding Plus) 408
included in Point Gridding Plus 397
parameters 425-429
semivariograms (Point Gridding Plus) 426
Kriging gridding algorithm
Point Gridding Plus 406
R2003.12.0
Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide
L
labels
adding DLS/NTS labels to map 365
adding to contour map 243
adding to map 223
Curve Drawing and Labeling Parameters
dialog box 244
Lambert Conic projections
Blue Marble 889
Lambert projections
double parallel (Z-MAP Plus) 883
single parallel (Z-MAP Plus) 883
Laplacian filters
described (Point Gridding) 445
shown in flexing workflow 520
template described 521
using in Contour Gridding 461, 485
using in Flexing 524
using in Line Gridding 497
using in Point Gridding Plus 413
LASPRM files, described 902
Lat/Lon (DMS) to Decimal Degrees option
latitude
adding labels to map 223
converting to Y 692
Latitude Scale Factor (projection setting) 42
using to define new map AOI 36
LATLONGPROJECTED AOI type
specifying for new map 36
LCK files see: lock files
leases
drawing lease polygons 278
least squares fit, defined 923
Least Squares gridding algorithm
Point Gridding 433
Point Gridding Plus 404
Trendform Gridding 473
LGBNAMES.DAT files, described 904
Index 952
Landmark
limiting bands 527
Limits, Offsets, and Scale dialog box
using to specify AOI for new map 38
line data files
algorithms for reducing 706
Select-Thinning Edit-Line Data File 603
Line Generalization algorithms 706
Line Generalization option (Operations menu)
704-709
Tolerance setting 708
Line Gridding 487-500
briefly described 386
Extrapolation Distance parameter 392
purpose of flexing described 393
removing wobble in lines 499
search radius for node values 392
Line Gridding algorithm 489
Line Gridding Plus 477-486
briefly described 386
control grid methods described 389
data hull methods described 390-391
Extrapolation Distance parameter 392
purpose of flexing described 393
reducing grid interval with Refinements 393
line ray trace algorithms
Migration/Reverse Migration 649
Line Resampling option (Operations menu)
710-734
line strings
color attribute (overview) 208
Linear Trend gridding algorithm
Point Gridding 434
lines
adding 2D seismic data 321-337
adding 3D seismic data 338-362
adding DLS/NTS lines to map 365
adding to map 252-270
Curve Drawing and Labeling Parameters
dialog box 244
drawing lines using cursor 269
drawing lines using file 253
Edit Lines dialog box 167
editing (Contours, Faults, Lines option) 185
eliminating crossing misties 653
enhancing line features (Shaded Relief) 247
Line Generalization, Line Resampling 675
R2003.12.0
Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide
lines continued
patterns illustrated 802
reducing file size (Line Generalization) 705
Scale Line option 663
Scale/Bias Line or Area operation 662
thinning seismic data (Data Operations) 602
listing
contents of CPS-1 SAVE file 107
LN (natural log) function
Single Data Operations 561
Single Grid Operations 541
location editing
Select-Area Limits from Data File 598
sorting source data 604
lock files
caution about deleting 901
deleting 901
described 901
log files
commenting out lines 774
creating 774
LOG10 (log base 10) function
Single Data Operations 561
Single Grid Operations 541
logging
Log Output option (System Window) 773
session events 774
logical graphics blocks (LGB), defined 923
logical records
defined 828
field description parameters for 834
LOGOFILE, described 899
logos
adding a logo to a title block 899
longitude
adding labels to map 223
converting to X 692
Longitude Scale Factor option 43
Reference Longitude (projection setting) 43
using to define new map AOI 36
Index 953
Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

M macros continued
POST-NTS-DLS: calling via command 365
macro files
POST-PIC-STATS 369
inaccessible in File Manager 60
QUICKVOL-FORTYPOLS 770
setting directory paths for 115
QUICKVOL-TWOPOLS 769
macros
SPAWN-PROCESS 772
ANTILOG-TEN-DATA 569
SURFCORRECT 761
ANTILOG-TEN-GRID 548
TRANSFORM-COORDS 700
APPEND-XY 647
TREND-ANAL-GRID 507
Area/Depth Plot (on menu) 739
using ZCLMAC extension for 737
AREA-DEPTH 768
VERT-TO-DGRID (Distance-to-Vertex Grid)
Bubble Map Posting macro (on menu) 739
467
COLOR-BAR 251
ZGF-SUMMARY 107
Color-filled Contours macro (on menu) 739
Macros menu 737-742
CTOG 201
Execute Macro dialog box 741
ENVELOPE 760
Geophysics options 740
ENVELOPE (reservoir envelope volumetrics)
Graphics options 739
760
Operations options 739
EVALUATE-CONGRID 516
Quick-look options 738
EVALUATE-POLYN 517
User Macros option 737
EXPORT-CPS-FILE 73
Utilities options 740
EXPORT-ZGF-FILE 74
main window, described 4
FASTCONTOURMAP 246
mantissa
FAULT-BACKFILL-F 670
changing to .0 562
FAULT-BALANCER 668
map projections see: projections
FAULT-DIP-SYMBOL 671
map scales
FAULT-MIGRATION 672
Scale Type option (new map) 37
FAULT-PROFILE 673
maps
FAULT-SHRINKER 674
adding 2D seismic surveys 321-337
FISHNET-PLOT 246
adding 3D seismic surveys 338-362
GRID-LT-EQ-GT 515
adding AOI/projection information 369
GRID-TO-SEISMIC 648
adding color scale bar 251
IMPORT-CPS-FILE 131
adding control point symbols 280-290
IMPORT-GRID 129
adding features/labels/border 223
IMPORT-ZGF-FILE 130
adding grid node symbols/values 275-276
LINEGRIDPLUS 477
adding lines 252-270
LIST-CPS-FILE 107
adding text 271-274
NADCONV: calling via command 367
adding/editing polygons 277-279
NIV-DATA 664
Contouring options 238-251
NIV-GRID 665
creating a map 34-44
overview (Macros menu) 737
creating data file from 198
PIC-POST-DLS: calling via command 366
Delete Fill Area (Graphics Editor) 173
PIC-POST-NTS: calling via command 366
deleting (Delete Pictures) 151
POST-DLS: calling via command 367
displaying automatically (System Switches)
POST-NTS: calling via command 368
777
POST-NTS-DLS 364

R2003.12.0 Index 954

Landmark
maps continued
displaying file information 105
displaying header information 67
displaying headers (File: Info) 106
displaying map 49
Edit Area dialog box 173
editing: Wrong Item Found option 164
Mapping Across the Dateline option 43
Overlay Pictures option 233-237
partially regridding (Data Editor) 201
Picture Assembly (Features) 370-374
properties 872
redisplaying portion of 381
reference spheroid list 41
Rename Pictures option (File: Rename) 148
setting background color 776
setting projection parameters 39-44
Shaded Relief dialog box 247
specifying projection codes 40
specifying State Plane projection 43
viewing current color settings 172
workflow for creating 35
working with (File Manager) 60
markers
Edit Markers dialog box 169
masking grids
described 530
Output Grid Name, Mask Use dialog 523
Master File Directory icon 90
master file directory see: MFDs
Master File Directory utility 90
Maximum-Relative-Change value
used in flexing 525
MCF files
importing SeisWorks MCF file data 58
measurement units
setting with system switches 778
Mercator projections
Blue Marble Mercator 888
cylindrical: table of zones 879
General Transverse (Z-MAP) 882
Oblique Mercator (Z-MAP Plus) 886
Standard (Z-MAP Plus) 883
Transverse Mercator (Blue Marble) 888
Universal Transverse (Z-MAP) 882
R2003.12.0
Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide
Merge Data (Data Operations) 617-623
Concatenation option 621
Exception option 623
Intersection option 622
rules for input files 618
types of Merge operations 620
Union option 622
workflow 617
merging
surface/well picks (Surface Correction) 761
metric units
setting with system switches 778
MFDs
compared to scratch files 49
compressing 153
copying data to ASCII file 70
copying files in 140
creating 33
deleting files from (File: Delete) 150
directory paths/list of file types 110
displayable file types 92
effect creating has on scratch file 33
file information 90
importing ASCII files into 118
importing files into 850-859
importing grid files to 129
internal file name described 33
locking files 901
master file directory defined 924
Master File Directory icon 90
Master File Directory utility 90
naming conventions 33
opening/closing 48
renaming files in 146
specifying an internal MFD name 33
using to import PetroWorks data 29
working with (File Manager) 60
Migration, Reverse Migration operation
(Geophysical Operations) 649-652
Time Horizon Grid option 649
Velocity Grid option 650
Migrator option (Operations: Faults) 671-672
Miller Cylindrical projections
Blue Marble 891
minimum tension surfaces
effects of Biharmonic flexing 522
Index 955
Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

minutes N
converting data to/from minutes format 701
NAD state plane projections
Mistie Reduction
for new map 43-44
Geophysical Operations 653-655
NAD 27-NAD 83 Datum Shift 367
mistie, defined 925
using in Coordinate Transformations 698
Modeling menu 385-530
Name Output dialog (Merge Data) 620-623
Boolean Grid option 515
Name Output files dialog box
Constant Grid option 516
Migration, Reverse Migration 651
Contour Gridding option 451-466
naming conventions
Flexing option 520-530
color tables 115
Line Gridding option 487-500
for data files 112
Line Gridding Plus option 477-486
format files 72, 114
Point Gridding option 430-450
imported SeisWorks files 58
Point Gridding Plus option 394-429
National Topographic Survey (NTS)
Polynomial Grid option 517-518
adding NTS data (Post National Topo) 368
Trend Fit Gridding option 501-506
adding NTS lines/labels 365
Trend Surface Gridding option 507-514
using NTS AOI to create map 364
Trendform Gridding option 467-476
using NTS data to create/post map 366
User-Defined Filter option 519
Nederland Stereografische projections
Modified Polyconic projections
Z-MAP Plus 887
Z-MAP Plus 885
net pay
Modulation Parameters options (3D Seismic)
importing data from PetroWorks 29
Symbol Size Range Creation Parameters
New Map Creation dialog box 34-44
360-362
AOI from Grid, Data, Picture or Contours 37
Molleweide projections
AOI from user input, Offsets, and Scale 38
Blue Marble 891
Picture Name, AOI & Scale Type 36
monitors
Projection Parameters option 39-44
setting system switches 776
New menu 32-47
Switch Screen option (View menu) 384
New Zealand Map Grid projections
moving
Z-MAP Plus 886
fault centerline (Migrator option) 671
NIV see: normalized interval velocity
files/pictures (File Manager) 62
NMINCREM (Numerical Increment)
map/cross section in graphic display 380
Line Resampling method 714
text (Edit menu) 162
node see: grid nodes
text (Graphics Editor) 165
non-opaque faults
Moving Plate gridding algorithm
processing in Point Gridding Plus 400
Point Gridding 435
NORM function
Multi-Surface Map macro
Single Data Operations 562
shown on menu 739
Single Grid Operations 541
Normalized Absolute Standard Deviation of the
Residuals Graph (for trend surface grid)
510

R2003.12.0 Index 956

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Normalized Interval Velocity (Data) option OpenWorks

Operations: Geophysical Operations 664-665 column heading definitions 15
Normalized Interval Velocity (Grid) option connection overview 13
Operations: Geophysical Operations 665-666 data source/interpreter defined 21
NORMMAX function data you can import 22
Single Data Operations 562 files sort order 779
Single Grid Operations 541 importing grid files to 129
NORMSIG function importing SeisWorks .hor files 50
Single Data Operations 562 importing/exporting Stratamodel data 27
Single Grid Operations 541 importing/exporting TDQ data 28
north arrows loading ASCII grid 863
adding to map 223 location of data loading tools 861
northing/easting selecting project/interpreter 20
adding labels to map 223 starting initial session 19
converting to latitude/longitude Coordinate starting Z-MAP Plus from 14
Transformations) 692 well symbol table 791
using for new map AOI type 36 OpenWorks files
Number of Flex Passes parameter working with (File Manager) 60
Contour Gridding 461 operations
Flexing 524 building with Calculator 536
Line Gridding 497 Operations menu 531-736
Line Gridding Plus 485 Back Interpolation option 677-680
Point Gridding 446 Calculator option 536-538
Point Gridding Plus 414 Coordinate Transformations 686-699
number of terms 504, 510 Data Operations option 558-645
Data Operations overview 532
O Faults option 667-674
Faults overview 534
Oblique Mercator projections File Conversion option 675, 681-685
Z-MAP Plus 886 Geophysical Operations option 646-666
oil water contact (OWC) 515 Geophysical Operations overview 533
opaque faults Grid Operations overview 532
drawbacks of treating faults as opaque 400 Grid option 539-557
opening Lat/Lon (DMS) to Decimal Degrees 701-703
MFDs 48 Line Generalization option 704-709
picture (map/cross section) 49 Line Generalization, Line Resampling 675
SeisWorks horizon file 50 Line Resampling option 710-734
session file 48 overview 531-535
ZGF 49 remaining operations 675-736
OpenVision 3D Viewer remaining operations (overview) 534
briefly described 22 Surface Intersection option 735-736
Transformation Coordinates (Overwrite Fields)
option 700

R2003.12.0 Index 957

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

Operations options (Macros menu) Plot a Picture (CGM) dialog box 132
menu illustrated 739 Plot A Picture (Other) dialog box 137
Orthographic projections plotters
Blue Marble 891 color variation on 809
Overlay Pictures (Features menu) 233-237 WDFILE defined 904
oversampled data 708 Point Density gridding algorithm
OW button 16 Point Gridding Plus 406
Point Gridding 430-450
P briefly described 385
control grid methods described 389
Pan icon 380 Data Distribution Statistics option 448
parameter files see: session files data hull methods described 390, 391
parameters Extrapolation Distance parameter 392
changing for text (Edit menu) 162 purpose of flexing described 393
map features: Edit All Features option 173 reducing grid interval with Refinements 393
resetting by opening session file 48 search radius for initializing nodes 392
unlocking automatically 776 Point Gridding Plus 394-429
pasting Advanced tab 413
files/pictures (File Manager) 62 briefly described 385
Patch-grid Posting macro control grid methods described 389
shown on menu 739 data hull methods described 390, 391
patterns Extrapolation Distance parameter 392
line patterns illustrated 802 Point Gridding Plus icon 395
perspective maps purpose of flexing described 393
creating 246 reducing grid interval with Refinements 393
PetroWorks search radius for initializing nodes 392
description of 23 smoothing (flexing) parameters 413
importing data from 29 XMin, XMax, YMin, YMax coordinates 411
photographic representation of grid 247 points
physical records, defined 828 adding with Line Resampling 675
Picture Assembly (Features) 370-374 deleting with Line Generalization 675
Picture Name, AOI & Scale Type dialog box reducing in cartographic features 704
using to specify name for new map 36 pointsets
Picture Statistics macro importing from Stratamodel 27
shown on menu 740 importing/exporting to/from OpenWorks 22
pictures see: maps and cross sections saving Z-MAP data into 16
plain text, illustrated 801 StratWorks 27
planar projections Polar Stereographic projections
polar, equatorial, oblique 876 Blue Marble 892
planimetric data Z-MAP Plus 887
setting line generalization tolerance for 708 polyconic projections
American Polyconic (Z-MAP Plus) 885
Latitude Scale Factor option 42
Modified Polyconic (Z-MAP Plus) 885
Polyconic (Blue Marble) 892

R2003.12.0 Index 958

Landmark
polygons
color attribute (overview) 208
converting to centerline fault 674
drawing/editing 277-279
filling polygons with hachured lines 279
rotated 578
Select- Polygons from File dialog 593
used to blank data 571
used to edit files 577
using closed polygons in Profiler 673
using to blank grids 550
using to subset data (Select dialog) 573
polylines
creating data file 198
Polynomial Grid 517-518
briefly described 386
examples of polynomial degrees 518
polynomial trend grids
Trend Fit Gridding briefly described 386
pore pressure
Normalized Interval Velocity Data 664
porosity curve data
storing (Water Saturation Averaging) 765
using in Water Saturation Averaging 762
POSMEM files, described 902
Post Line macro, shown on menu 739
Post Seismic Line Data dialog (2D) 321-337
Post Seismic Line Data dialog (3D) 338-362
Post Z-field Star macro, shown on menu 739
posting see: adding
POWER function
Single Data Operations 561
Single Grid Operations 541
previewing
ASCII data to import 123
primitives
changing color (Color Indices option) 218
color attribute 804
graphic features codes 781-784
graphic primitives defined 804
record types saved in ASCII 79
Print menu (File) 131-139
printing
CGM files 132
File menu options, overview 31
Other option 137
R2003.12.0
Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide
Process Interrupt icon
using to interrupt redrawing process 377
processes
logging 774
Profiler option (Operations: Faults) 673
profiles
Create Data option 198
data structure 855
editing data file (Data Editor) 174
reducing file size (Line Generalization) 705
using to control contours 465
projected coordinates
converting to/from geodetic coordinates 686
projected map labels
Basemap Features dialog box 223
projected slopes
data type parameter 436
Projected Slopes gridding algorithm
Point Gridding 433
Point Gridding Plus 405
Projection (Operations: Coordinate
Transformations) 689-691
projection codes
using to specify map projection 40
projection information
adding (Projection Box option) 369
Projection Parameter Setup dialog box
specifying map projection explicitly 39
projections
Albers projection, defined 905
Blue Marble 878, 888-892
conic 881
coordinate transformation codes 694
cylindrical 879
cylindrical: table of zones 879
map projections 875
map properties 872
NAD27/NAD83(CoordinateTransformations)
698
planar 876
planar azimuthal 881
reference spheroids 893
secant projections illustrated 876
setting (Coordinate Transformations) 693
setting up a projection 871-896
specifying AOI type to store projection 36
Index 959
Landmark
projections continued
specifying parameters for new map 39-44
State Plane 865
State Plane Coordinate System 896
tangent projections 875
using NAD27/NAD83 for new map 43-44
Z-MAP Plus 882-887
pseudocylindrical projections
Robinson projection (Blue Marble) 892
Q physical records defined 828
Quality Assurance (Data, Grid) macro
shown on menu 739
Quick Volumetrics (2 polygons) 769
Quick Volumetrics (40 polygons) 770
Quick-look options (Macros menu)
menu illustrated 738
R Single Data Operations 562
raising
Raise option (Tools: System Window) 773
Raise System Window icon 773
Random Closest gridding algorithm
Point Gridding Plus 408
Range Edit Equations Display dialog box
deleting equations 575
range editing (Data Selection)
Select dialog box 573
Select-Range Edit Equation Input 614
Select-Range Edit Equations Display 612
sorting source data 604
wildcards 609
Range Editing (Operations: Data Operations)
624-628
Read option
Edit Color Table dialog box 216
RECIPRCL (reciprocal) function
Single Data Operations 562
Single Grid Operations 542
R2003.12.0
Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide
records
deleting: Range Editing (Data Operations)
625
field description parameters (logical) 834
format for ZGF data exported to ASCII 74
group 79
logical records defined 828
logical/physical records described 118
modal 83
non-command types 84
primitives 79
Rotate Data (Data Operations) 628
Select-Range Edit Equation Input 614
Select-Range Edit Equations Display 612
Sort Data (Data Operations) 631
thinning (Select dialog box) 573
ZGF flat file headers 75
REDFZNON (redefine ZNON) function
Single Grid Operations 542
redisplaying
Re-display option (View menu) 381
Redo Last Feature icon 159
redrawing
digitized contours (Contour) 239
Full Display option (View menu) 382
portion of display 381
reducing
enlarged part of map (Zoom Out) 378
execution time/search radius 392
grid interval with Refinements 393
Reduce Text Posting macro (menu) 739
redundant points
removing from files with lines 675
Reference Latitude (projection setting) 42
Reference Longitude (projection setting) 43
reference spheroids
described 893
list of options 41
specifying (Coordinate Transformations) 696
Refinements parameter, described 393
Index 960
Landmark
Regrid option (Data Editor) 201
relaxation see: flexing
Rename menu (File) 146-149
Rename Pictures option 148
renaming
fields (Data Operations) 633
fields: workflow 641
files 146
ZGF/MFD in File Manager 65
REPLZNON (replace ZNON) function
Single Data Operations 562
Single Grid Operations 542
reports
appearing in system window 4
File menu options, overview 31
generating for ZGF contents 107
volumetrics 747
Reposition Line Name option
Features: 3D Seismic 355
Resample Grid (Grid Operations) 552-555
Resample with AOI from Grid macro
shown on menu 739
resampling
Line Resampling (Operations menu) 710
lines to add points (Line Resampling) 675
Reservoir Envelope Volumetrics 760
reservoir production parameters
importing from PetroWorks 29
Reshape Contours option (Data Editor) 185
residual grids
creating with Trend Surface Grid 507
determining accuracy of trend fit 510
Trend Surface Gridding described 386
resizing
pane height in File Manager dialog 67
RGB color mode 213
interpolation 216
RGB color system 209
RGB color system compared to HLS 807
RGB color system defined 805
ring symmetry, defined 519
RL (Rhumb Line) geographic coordinates
using in line resampling 720
Robinson projections
Blue Marble 892
R2003.12.0
Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide
Romania Stereographica projections
Z-MAP Plus 887
ROOT function
Single Data Operations 561
Single Grid Operations 541
Rotate Data (Data Operations) 628-631
rotated polygons 578
Select - (X,Y) Rotated Polygons dialog 587
Select-(Lat,Lon) Rotated Polygons 590
ROUND function
Single Data Operations 562
S
Save As option (File menu) 70-88
Save Session As option (File menu) 68-69
saving
changes in color table 217
color table as file 216
grid as horizon (merged SeisWorks project)
88
session files 68
system window output 773
scale bars 223
SCALE function
Single Data Operations 561
Single Grid Operations 541
Scale Type option (File: New: Basemap) 37
Scale/Bias Line or Area
Geophysical Operations 662-664
Scale Area option 663
Scale Line option 663
scratch files
compared to MFDs 49
definition 931
examples 903
Master File Directory utility 90
warning about creating MFD 33
Search Radius parameter
using for intitializing node values 392
secant planar projections
cylinder, cone, plane 876
secondary rock properties
Random Closest (Point Gridding Plus) 408
seconds
converting data to/from minutes format 701
Index 961
Landmark
Segment ID Generator macro
shown on menu 740
segment type codes 781-784
seismic data
dividing lines (Line Gridding Plus) 479
extending lines over border 355
Mistie Reduction operation 653
Scale/Bias Line or Area operation 662
setting line generalization tolerance for 708
thinning line data (Data Operations) 602
thinning lines with posting operator 357
thinning posted lines (3D Seismic) 353
using in Line Gridding 487
Seismic Data Thinning
Geophysical Operations 656-661
seismic files
appending X,Y values to time files 647
creating subset of seismic section files 575
editing data (Data Editor) 174
reducing file size (Line Generalization) 705
structure of seismic section files 858
Seismic Hand-contour Assist macro
shown on menu 740
SeisWorks
briefly described 22
Export to Z-MAP Plus utility 398
heave computation differences 57
importing DTS files 57
integration workflow/data types 24
manual contour files (.MCF) 58
naming conventions for imported files 58
opening horizons from 50
saving grid as horizon (merged project) 88
saving grid as horizon file 85
Select - (Lat,Lon) Polygons from Menu 584
Select - (X,Y) Polygons from Menu 581
Select - (X,Y) Rotated Polygons from Menu
dialog box 587
Select - Location Edit dialog box 577
Select a Macro dialog box
User Macros option (Macros) 737
Select AOI Source Type dialog box
using to specify AOI for new map 37
Select Area Coordinate Types
parameter for Location Edit 579
R2003.12.0
Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide
Select dialog box (Data Operations) 573-616
Select Edit
file types 575
Select Grid System for State Plane Projection
using to specify projection for new map 43
Select Projection Source Type dialog box
specifying projection for new map 39
Select Session File dialog box 48
Select Time Horizon Grid list
Migration, Reverse Migration 649
Select Velocity Grid list
Migration, Reverse Migration operation 650
Select-(Lat,Lon) Rotated Polygons from Menu
dialog box 590
Select-Area Limits from Data File dialog 598
Select-Area Limits from Grid File dialog 600
Select-Picture from ZGF dialog 596
Select-Polygons from File dialog box 593
Select-Range Edit Equation Input dialog 614
Select-Range Edit Equations Display 612
Select-Thinning Edit-Line Data File 603
Select-Thinning Edit-Random Data File 602
semivariograms
models used in Point Gridding Plus 407
used in Point Gridding Plus 426
session events
appearing in system window 4
appearing in xterm window 4
session files
creating a blank session file 32
naming conventions 68
setting choices in directory paths 112
sessions
creating 32
ending (Exit option) 156
File menu options, overview 31
opening session file 48
Set Interpreter/Source Priority dialog box 21
set points, defined 931
Set up a Projection dialog box
Activate Projection option 44
Deactivate Projection option 44
using to specify new map 39-44
Shaded Relief dialog box 247-250
SHINCREM (Shotpoint Increment)
Line Resampling method 714
Index 962
Landmark
Shotpoint Interpolation macro
shown on menu 740
Shotpoint Labeling mode (2D Seismic) 325
shotpoints
Data Thinning 657
Migration/Reverse Migration algorithm 649
posting selected (2D Seismic) 322
Seismic Data Thinning operation 656-661
Shrinker option (Operations: Faults) 674
SIL (subroutine interface library)
codes for graphic features 781-784
toggling on/off debug print switch 780
simplex text, illustrated 801
SIN (sine) function
Single Data Operations 561
Single Grid Operations 541
Single Data Operations 560-564
Single Grid Operations 540-543
antilogarithm 548
single parallel Lambert projections
Z-MAP Plus 883
Slice Increment (ZINC) setting
Volumetrics report 748
Slice Thickness setting
Volumetrics dialog box 757
smoothing
also see: flexing
contour lines with Break & Extend 189
overview of flexing 520
Point Gridding Plus parameters 413
purpose of smoothing described 393
Smoothness Modulus parameter
Contour Gridding 462
Flexing 525
how smoothing works 526-527
Line Gridding 498
Line Gridding Plus 485
Point Gridding 447
Point Gridding Plus 411
Sort Data (Data Operations) 631-632
sorting
file lists in File Manager 66
OpenWorks file display order 779
spatial distribution in trend gridding 509
spawn unix process 772
R2003.12.0
Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide
Spheroid Operations (Coordinate
Transformations) 689
spheroids see: reference spheroids
SQROOT (square root) function
Single Data Operations 561
Single Grid Operations 541
SQUARE function
Single Data Operations 561
Single Grid Operations 541
standard deviation
dividing data by (NORMSIG) 562
Standard Mercator projections
Z-MAP Plus 883
standard parallel option (projection setting) 42
State Plane Coordinate System
described 896
specifying for new map 43
State Plane projections
setting (Coordinate Transformations) 693
State Plane projection codes 865
using in Coordinate Transformations 691
Stationary hypothesis
kriging in Point Gridding Plus 408
stereographic projections
Nederland Stereografische (Z-MAP) 887
Polar Stereographic (Z-MAP Plus) 887
Romania Stereographica (Z-MAP Plus) 887
Stereographic (Blue Marble) 889
Stereographic projection (Z-MAP Plus) 887
stopping
Process Interrupt option (View menu) 377
Stratamodel
briefly described 22
importing data from/exporting to 27
Stratigraphic Thickness macro
shown on menu 739
StratWorks
briefly described 22
data used in Z-MAP Plus 27
integration 26, 27
using isopach grids from 467
workflow 26
stream channel
contours 476
trendform grid example 476
Index 963
Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

subroutine interface library (SIL) T

toggling on/off debug print switch 780
TAN (tangent) function
subset datasets
Single Data Operations 562
extracting (Select dialog box) 573
Single Grid Operations 541
substitute API number, defined 932
tangents
SUBTMEAN (subtract mean) function
projections (cone/cylinder/plane) 875
Single Grid Operations 542
tangent to dip angle (DIPMAG) 542
Successive Over Relaxation method
TBL files see: color table files
used in flexing 521
TDQ
Surface Intersection (Operations) 735-736
briefly described 22
summary 535
importing/exporting data 28
Surface Intersection Curve macro
templates
shown on menu 739
Biharmonic/Laplacian templates 521
surfaces
TEMPMACRO files, described 902
effects of flexing 522
temporary files, described 903
enhancing texture (Shaded Relief) 247
text
Shaded Relief dialog box 247
adding control points to map 280-290
Surface Intersection operation 676
adding to map 271-274
SURFCORRECT macro 761
adding to map from file 272
surveys
adding to map with keyboard 273
Canadian 363-368
color attribute (overview) 208
Switch Screen option (View menu) 384
Curve Drawing and Labeling Parameters
Symbol Size Range Creation Parameters
dialog box 244
3D Seismic map/cross section 360-362
deleting (Graphics Editor) 166
symbols
Edit Text dialog box 165
abbreviated standard code 168
file structure of 858
color attribute (overview) 208
key text 273
creating 3D symbol size range 360-362
moving/copying (Graphics Editor) 165
Edit Markers 169
setting color for 166
Edit Markers dialog box 169
symbol parameters 280
for import/export file formats 829-831
text files
indicating fault dip 670
Select-Thinning Edit-Random Data File 602
OpenWorks well 791
thinning
system files
3D seismic lines 353
working with (File Manager) 60
data (Select dialog box) 573
System Switches (Tools) 776-779
editing seismic line data 602
automatically displaying picture 777
posted 2D shotpoints 324
Graphics Background mode 778
posted 3D shotpoints 357
parameter unlocking 776
seismic data 657
showing/hiding diagnostic messages 777
Seismic Data Thinning operation 656-661
system window
Select-Area Limits from Grid File 600
described 4
Select-Thinning Edit Line Data File 603
System Window menu (Tools) 773
shotpoints 657
sorting source data 604
Wildcards 610

R2003.12.0 Index 964

Landmark
throw values
adjusting with Balancer command 668
time horizon grids
Migration/Reverse Migration algorithm 649
time slice increment setting
Volumetrics report 748
title blocks
adding a logo 899
Basemap Features dialog box 223
customizing 897-900
tmp files see: temporary files
Toggle Background Color icon 778
Tools menu 771-780
icon button counterparts illustrated 6
System Window options 773
township/section range data
adding to map 367
tracklines see: polylines
Transform Coordinates (Operations: Coordinate
Transformations) 692-699
Transformation Coordinates (Overwrite Fields)
option 700
transition zone modeling
water saturation averaging overview 762
Transverse Mercator projections
Blue Marble 888
Trend (Bias) ratio: Point Gridding Plus 415
Trend Fit Gridding 501-506
briefly described 386
trend polynomial grids
creating (Constant Grid) 517-518
Trend Surface Gridding 507-514
briefly described 386
determining accuracy of trend fit 510
Trendform Gridding 467-476
purpose of flexing described 393
troubleshooting
drag-and-drop limitations 64
effect of overlaying pictures: color 235
importance of color table file extension 115
importance of file name extensions 109
recovering from abnormal session end 901
using correct DATA file extension 112
using correct extension for ZGFs 156
R2003.12.0
Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide
truncating surface intersections
Surface Intersection operation 735
Type of Flexing parameter
Flexing 524
Line Gridding 497
Point Gridding 445
U
UID files, defined 904
Undo Last Feature icon 159
units see: measurement units
Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM)
using in Coordinate Transformations 691
Z-MAP Plus 882
unlocking parameters automatically 776
Update Files option (Data Editor) 206
Update picture dynamically option
Edit Color Table dialog box 217
updating graphic display
Process Interrupt icon 377
User Macros option (Macros menu) 737
User-Defined Filter
briefly described 387
gridding method 519
users
definition/access levels (OpenWorks) 21
Utilities options (Macros menu)
menu illustrated 740
UTM see: Universal Transverse Mercator
V
Van der Grinten I projections
Z-MAP Plus 886
vector files
output by Migration/Reverse Migration 649
velocity data
Migration, Reverse Migration 650
Normalized Interval Velocity Data 664
Velocity-function Time-to-Depth macro
shown on menu 740
VERT files see: vertex files
Index 965
Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

vertex files W
creating 198
Water Saturation Averaging
creating a subset of 575
overview 762
cross section baseline 46
Water Saturation Averaging dialog 766
editing data (Data Editor) 174
WDFILE files, described 904
reducing file size (Line Generalization) 705
Weighted Average gridding algorithm
structure of 854
Point Gridding 433
using to blank grids 550
Point Gridding Plus 405
vertical separation data
Trendform Gridding 473
required for Point Gridding Plus 396
weighting function, defined 935
used in Calculate Fault Fields 669
Well Overposting macro
View menu 375-384
shown on menu 739
Auto Display option/icon 383
Well Symbol Editor 791-792
Display List option/icon 376
Well-penetration Coordinates macros
Full Display option/icon 382
shown on menu 739
icon button counterparts illustrated 6
wells
Pan option/icon 380
adding deviated wells 291-320
Switch Screens option 384
importing well data from Stratamodel 27
Window option/icon 379
merging surface/picks (Surface Correction)
Zoom Out option 377, 378
761
volume scale 754
OpenWorks symbols 791
VOLUMES.OUT files, described 903
wildcards
Volumetrics 745-759
used with thinning editing 610
Base Plane setting 757
using to create data subset 609
constraints 758
Williams algorithm 706
Quick Volumetrics (2 polygons) 769
Window option (View menu) 379
Quick Volumetrics (40 polygons) 770
Windowed Contour Map macro
report fields 752
shown on menu 739
Reservoir Envelope Volumetrics 760
workflow icons see: icons
Slice Thickness setting 757
workflows
volumetrics defined 934
blanking a grid 549
comprehensive 17
creating a cross section 45
creating a map 35
Faults (Operations menu) 667
Grid Listing (File: Info) 101
integrating w/other Landmark products 23
SeisWorks/Z-MAP Plus integration 24
setting directory paths 108
Write option
Edit Color Table dialog box 216
Wrong Item Found (Graphics Editor) 164

R2003.12.0 Index 966

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

X Z
X fields ZCL Command Language
converting to longitude 692 overview of macros 737
X gridding increment using to create macros 115
Line Gridding Plus 480 ZCL processes
X scale formula logging 774
AOI of new map 38 ZCLMAC files see: macros
X,Y values ZCLPARMS files
back interpolating from grid location 677 creating 68
X,Y,Z Point Data (Features) 280-290 opening 48
XMin, XMax, YMin,YMax parameters ZEQ files
Point Gridding Plus 411 accessible in File Manager 60
XMin,XMax saving equation as (Calculator) 538
Line Gridding Plus parameters 481 ZGFs
xterm window compressing 155
described 4 copying 142
XY AOI type creating 34
specifying for new map 36 deleting (Delete Pictures) 151
XYPROJECTED AOI type displaying contents 105
specifying for new map 36 displaying headers (File: Info) 106
displaying list of features (File: Info) 106
Y File menu options, overview 31
Graphics File Summary (File: Info) 107
Y fields headers in flat files 75
converting to latitude 692 importance of correct file name extension 156
Y gridding increment importing disk files to 130
Line Gridding Plus 480 naming conventions 34
Y scale formula no locking for ZGFs 901
AOI of new map 38 opening 49
YMin,YMax opening/closing 49
Line Gridding Plus parameters 481 Rename Pictures option (File: Rename) 148
saving ZGF data as ASCII file 74
Select-Picture from ZGF dialog 596
setting directory paths for 111
working with (File Manager) 60
ZINC (slice increment) setting
Volumetrics report 748

R2003.12.0 Index 967

Landmark Z-MAP Plus Reference Guide

ZMAPPARM files, described 902

ZMin, ZMax
Line Gridding Plus parameters 481
Point Gridding Plus parameter 412
ZNONs
defined 936
replacing/setting Z-fields (Data Editor) 177
standard value defined 458
Zoom In icon/option 377
Zoom Out icon/option 378
ZPLUS.ERR files, described 903
ZPLUS.RHF files, described 903
Z-value, defined 936
Z-weight field (Point Gridding) 448
ZYCOLOR files, defined 904

R2003.12.0 Index 968